diff options
| author | Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org> | 2024-04-15 20:22:03 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org> | 2024-04-15 20:22:03 +0000 |
| commit | ffccd5b2b05243e7976db80f90f453dccfae9886 (patch) | |
| tree | 39a43152d27f7390d8f7a6fb276fa6887f87c6e8 /doc | |
| parent | Initial commit. (diff) | |
| download | mc-upstream/3%4.8.30.tar.xz mc-upstream/3%4.8.30.zip | |
Adding upstream version 3:4.8.30.upstream/3%4.8.30
Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>
Diffstat (limited to 'doc')
103 files changed, 50287 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/doc/COPYING b/doc/COPYING new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5056c63 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/COPYING @@ -0,0 +1,641 @@ + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this +license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and +other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to +take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU +General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change +all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its +users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for +most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its +authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our +General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to +distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you +receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the +software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do +these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these +rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain +responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: +responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or +for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you +received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. +And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) +assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you +legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that +there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, +the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their +problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified +versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This +is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to +change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of +products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most +unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit +the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other +domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future +versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States +should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on +general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special +danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively +proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to +render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification +follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of +works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. +Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be +individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a +fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. +The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work +“based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the +Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, +would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable +copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. +Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), +making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties +to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer +network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the +extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) +displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is +no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), +that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of +this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such +as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making +modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official +standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces +specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among +developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than +the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a +Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves +only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a +Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in +source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential +component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system +(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the +work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the +source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the +object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those +activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or +general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used +unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. +For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated +with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and +dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to +require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those +subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate +automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright +on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This +License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified +Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only +if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License +acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by +copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, +without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may +convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make +modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running +those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in +conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making +or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, +under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any +copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the +conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it +unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure +under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO +copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or +restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid +circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is +effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered +work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the +work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' +legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive +it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on +each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that +this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply +to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give +all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you +may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce +it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, +provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and + giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under + this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement + modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to + anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore + apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole + of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This + License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it + does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display + Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive + interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need + not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of +sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable +Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including + a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source + fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software + interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including + a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid + for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts + or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses + the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the + software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable + physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no + more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of + source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network + server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written + offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed + only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the + object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis + or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source + in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not + require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object + code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the + Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a + third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you + maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find + the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the + Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available + for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you + inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the + work are being offered to the general public at no charge under + subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from +the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying +the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any +tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or +household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a +dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases +shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a +particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class +of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in +which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the +product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has +substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses +represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, +authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute +modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version +of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the +continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or +interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or +specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a +transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is +transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of +how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under +this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this +requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the +ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the +work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a +requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a +work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User +Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be +denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the +operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication +across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in +accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and +with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must +require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License +by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions +that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were +included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable +law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may +be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains +governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any +additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional +permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when +you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by +you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright +permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to +a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that +material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of + sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author + attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices + displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or + requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable + ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors + of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade + names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by + anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with + contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability + that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and + authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further +restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received +it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this +License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that +term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits +relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work +material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the +further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must +place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that +apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of +a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements +apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided +under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and +will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any +patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from +a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until +the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) +permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by +some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated +permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some +reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation +of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the +violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the +licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this +License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you +do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a +copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as +a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does +not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you +permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe +copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or +propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to +do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a +license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, +subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by +third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an +organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an +organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results +from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy +of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor +in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to +possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in +interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights +granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a +license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this +License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or +counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by +making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any +portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License +of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed +is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or +controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, +that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, +using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would +be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor +version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant +patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent +license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, +offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of +its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express +agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as +an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent +infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an +agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the +Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of +charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network +server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the +Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of +the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a +manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent +license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual +knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a +country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would +infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason +to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, +you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a +patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing +them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, +then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of +the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope +of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the +non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under +this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an +arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, +under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your +activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any +of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory +patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you +(or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with +specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you +entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to +28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any +implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be +available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse +you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so +as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other +pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For +example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for +further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you +could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely +from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to +link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU +Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the +resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part +which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero +General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network +will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the +GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar +in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new +problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License +“or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms +and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published +by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version +number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever +published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of +the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of +acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for +the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. +However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder +as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE +LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER +PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER +EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE +QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE +DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL +ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM +AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, +SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY +TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING +RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF +THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER +PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above +cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts +shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all +civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption +of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible +use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software +which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to +attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the +exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line +and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice +like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be +different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, +if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more +information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see +<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program +into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public +License instead of this License. But first, please read +<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. @@ -0,0 +1,924 @@ +GNU Midnight Commander +Frequently Asked Questions + + The newest version of this document is available at + https://www.midnight-commander.org/browser/doc/FAQ + + * 1 Getting started + + 1.1 What is Midnight Commander? + + 1.2 Does it run on my machine? + + 1.3 Does it work with my terminal? + + 1.4 What else do I need to run MC? + + 1.5 Is GNU Midnight Commander Public Domain? Copyrighted? + + 1.6 Where can I get GNU Midnight Commander? + + 1.7 I cannot compile MC. What should I do? + + * 2 Keyboard + + 2.1 What does documentation mean with the C-?, M-? and F? + keys? + + 2.2 Why don't function keys (or some other key) work? + + 2.3 How do I use function keys F11 to F20? + + 2.4 Why does the ESC key behave funny? + + 2.5 How can I add the plus sign (+) on the command line? + + 2.6 C-o doesn't work! + + 2.7 What 'keys' are the "a1" and "c1" keys mentioned in the + manual? + + 2.8 How do I change the key bindings? + + * 3 Mouse + + 3.1 How do I enable mouse support? + + 3.2 How do I cut and paste text with mouse? + + 3.3 How do I get the extension dependent pop-up menu to + pop up? + + * 4 Display + + 4.1 Why do I keep getting "Terminal not powerful enough for + SLang" or "Terminal not powerful enough for SLsmg"? + + 4.2 Why don't line drawing characters work? + + 4.3 Can one use latin-1 characters without losing the lines? + + 4.4 I have problems with entering/viewing national + characters! + + 4.5 How can I get colors? + + 4.6 My color_xterm goes completely (or partially) black! + + 4.7 Where can I get xterm or rxvt? + + 4.8 I got colors working with MC but the other programs + don't work at all anymore! + + 4.9 Why are there both terminfo and termcap? Wouldn't one + database be enough? + + * 5 Graphical user interface + + 5.1 Xview, Tk and Gnome editions? + + 5.2 Why is MC linked with X libraries? + + * 6 Command line problems + + 6.1 How do I stay in the last directory when I exit Midnight + Commander? + + 6.2 How can I access command line history? + + 6.3 How can I complete commands, file names, variable names + and so on? + + 6.4 I am using ksh. Can I use functions defined in the + .kshrc within MC? + + 6.5 Is there any way to include additional options or hot + keys to MC? + + 6.6 When I use Ctrl-O I don't get a subshell. How do I fix + this? + + 6.7 Ctrl-O doesn't work at all. What happens? + + * 7 Virtual file systems + + 7.1 How can I see the contents of a tar archive? + + 7.2 How do I get out of a tar archive? + + 7.3 How do I do anonymous ftp with MC? + + 7.4 How do I do non-anonymous ftp with MC? + + 7.5 How do I close an ftp connection? + + 7.6 Why aren't the contents of ftp panel updated? + + 7.7 What kind of proxy server works with Midnight Commander? + + * 8 Internal editor + + 8.1 When I try pasting to the internal editor, it indents + the amount of indenting increases with each line! + + 8.2 Is it possible to use Colorer for syntax highlighting? + + * 9 Other common problems + + 9.1 Is there any way to 'bookmark' favorite ftp-fs links? + + 9.2 When I start Midnight Commander, nothing happens! + + * 10 Development + + 10.1 Who has written Midnight Commander? + + 10.2 Do I dare to use a development version? + + 10.3 How can I report a bug/request for a feature? + + 10.4 How can I join the development? + + * 11 More information + + 11.1 This document didn't answer my question. Where else + can I look for an answer? + + 11.2 What mailing lists are there for Midnight Commander? + + 11.3 Where should I look on the World Wide Web for MC stuff? + + 11.4 Are the mailing lists archived anywhere? + + * 12 Legal issues + + 12.1 Authorship + + 12.2 Feedback is invited + + 12.3 Disclaimer and copyright + + +1 Getting started + +1.1 What is Midnight Commander? + + GNU Midnight Commander is a user-friendly yet powerful file manager + and visual shell, useful to novice and guru alike. It provides a + clear, user-friendly, and somewhat protected interface to a Unix + system while making many frequent file operations more efficient and + preserving the full power of the command prompt. After some + practice, you will wonder how you could ever live without it. + +1.2 Does it run on my machine? + + GNU Midnight Commander runs on POSIX (Unix-like) operating systems, + such as GNU/Linux, FreeBSD, Mac OS X, Solaris, HP-UX and others. It + can also be compiled under Cygwin on Windows. + + GNU Midnight Commander uses GNU Autoconf which should automatically + configure it for every Unix clone. Following configurations have + been tested in the past (this list is very old): + + * i386-*-linux1.x, 2.x + * alpha-linux-linux2 + * sparc-linux-linux2.x + * sparc64-linux-linux2.1 + * mips-sgi-irix5.x, 6.x + * sparc-sun-sunos4.1 + * sparc-sun-solaris2.3, 2.4, 2.5 + * sparc-sun-netbsd1.0 + * hppa-hp-hpux9 + * hppa-hp-hpux7 + * m68k-apple-aux + * unixware + * mc88110-aviion-dgux5.4R2.01 + * i386-*-sco3.2v4.2 + * i386-*-sco3.2v5 + +1.3 Does it work with my terminal? + + Yes, it does. + + Because GNU Midnight Commander is a full screen program it doesn't + run on dummy terminals but anything more advanced will do (like + vt100). If your terminal works with vi, emacs, elm or pine it will + work with GNU Midnight Commander. + +1.4 What else do I need to run MC? + + You need a POSIX (Unix compatible) operating system. If you are + running Windows, use Cygwin. + + To compile any edition you need to have glib >= 2.30 installed. + It's available at https://download.gnome.org/sources/glib/. + + If you want to use mouse on the Linux console you need the gpm daemon + from https://www.nico.schottelius.org/software/gpm/. You need nothing + extra to use mouse on xterm. + + If you do not want to use the S-Lang library you could try using + ncurses version 4.1 and above. + +1.5 Is GNU Midnight Commander Public Domain? Copyrighted? + + Midnight Commander is under GNU Public License which basically means + that you may freely copy, change and distribute it, but that you may + not impose any restrictions on further distribution, and that you + must make the source code available. This is not the same as Public + Domain. For details, the GNU license is included in GNU Midnight + Commander source distribution (the COPYING file). + + Midnight Commander is now officially a part of the GNU project. + All the authors of GNU Midnight Commander have given all their rights + on the program to the Free Software Foundation. + +1.6 Where can I get GNU Midnight Commander? + + The main site is https://www.midnight-commander.org + +1.7 I cannot compile MC. What should I do? + + Make sure you have read the INSTALL file in the sources. Report the + error messages exactly as they appear, mention the versions of your + OS, your compiler and whatever else software you think is relevant. + If you have compile problems in the VFS code, try disabling it by + using "--disable-vfs" option. + +f2 Keyboard + +2.1 What does documentation mean with the C-?, M-? and F? keys? + + GNU Midnight Commander documentation uses emacs style names for + keyboard keys. + + C stands for the Ctrl key. For example, C-f means that you should + hold down the Ctrl key and press the f key. + + M stands for the Meta key. Your terminal might call it Alt or + Compose instead of Meta. For example, M-f means that you should hold + down the Meta/Alt/Compose key and press the f key. If your terminal + doesn't have Meta, Alt or Compose or they don't work you can use Esc. + For M-f press the Esc key and then press the f key. + + Sometimes Ctrl and Alt are used instead of C and M for simplicity. + Keep in mind that Alt can actually be Meta on some keyboards. + + F? stands for a function key. If your terminal doesn't have function + keys or they don't work you can use Esc. For example, for F3 press + the Esc key and then press the 3 key. + +2.2 Why don't function keys (or some other key) work? + + Your terminfo or termcap database has missing or incorrect + definitions for function keys. Type "mc -V" to see what terminal + database is being used. If the result is "using the S-Lang library + with terminfo database" and you are using a very old terminfo + database, consider installing one of the enhanced terminfo files + included in GNU Midnight Commander source distribution. For example, + if you are using xterm type "tic xterm.ti". + + If the result is "using the S-Lang library with termcap database" you + should fix your /etc/termcap database. + + Up-to-date termcap and terminfo databases are available here: + + http://www.catb.org/~esr/terminfo/ + ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/ + + If you don't have permissions to edit terminal databases you can use + Learn keys feature of Midnight Commander instead. Press Esc 9 o k + and follow instructions. + + If all else fails you can emulate function keys by first pressing the + ESC key and then one of the number keys. For example, if you want to + produce F9, press ESC, then 9. If you don't have a ESC key on your + keyboard you can try alt-9 or meta-9. + +2.3 How do I use function keys F11 to F20? + + These are normally mapped to function keys F1 to F10 with Shift held, + e.g. function key F13 can be activated by pressing Shift-F3. You can + define the keys this way in the Options->Learn Keys dialog. The + convention for PC keyboards is that F11-20 always means Shift with + F1-10. + + You may find that on the Linux console with some keyboard layouts + Shift-Fn is interpreted as F(n+12), not as F(n+10). This is a result + of non-uniformity of keyboard layouts. This is not an intended + behavior and it may be fixed some day. In the meantime, use "Learn + Keys" to remedy this inconvenience. + +2.4 Why does the ESC key behave funny? + + Midnight Commander uses the ESC key as a prefix for simulating the + Meta and Alt keys (for terminals which don't have Meta or Alt, see + the three previous questions). For example, pressing ESC-a is the + same as pressing Meta-a. In addition most terminals use ESC for + internal representation of arrow keys, function keys and other + enhanced keys. If you want to use ESC to cancel things you have to + press it twice i.e. ESC-ESC. If you find this cumbersome you can + generally use F10 to cancel. Alternatively turn on the old_esc_mode + setting in the ~/.config/mc/ini file. The + old_esc_mode setting makes ESC work as a prefix only if another key + is pressed within 0.5 seconds. After 0.5 seconds the ESC key cancels. + There is no way to make ESC cancel immediately (if we want to be able + to use arrows keys and function keys). + +2.5 How can I add the plus sign (+) on the command line? + + Press C-q first, then press the + sign. + + The plus key is the hotkey for the select files command. If you want + to add a literal plus on to the command line you must quote it by + pressing C-q first. + + Another common key which needs the C-q prefix is backslash "\". + +2.6 C-o doesn't work! + + Maybe C-o is a stty control character on your terminal. See man stty + for details on how to list and change stty control characters. + +2.7 What 'keys' are the "a1" and "c1" keys mentioned in the manual? + + The "a1" key is the key which has the "a1" caption on it. + + The "c1" key is the key which has the "c1" caption on it. + + If you have to ask what these two keys are your keyboard hasn't + probably got them. Actually, I have never seen a keyboard which has + got them. + +2.8 How do I change the key bindings? + + Key binding con be reconfigure via keymap files: /etc/mc/mc.keymap + and ~/.config/mc/mc.keymap. + + You can use the "Learn Keys" dialog to assign keys to some actions + listed in that dialog. + + +3 Mouse + +3.1 How do I enable mouse support? + + Invoke mc like this (without quotes): "mc -x". If this doesn't work + upgrade to a terminal which compatible with the Xterm mouse + sequences. + + Alternatively, on Linux console you can use gpm. + +3.2 How do I cut and paste text with mouse? + + Hold down shift key while using mouse to cut and paste. + + +4 Display + +4.1 Why do I keep getting "Terminal not powerful enough for SLang" or + "Terminal not powerful enough for SLsmg"? + + This means that your terminfo databases do not contain the correct + definitions for your terminal. + + You could try using a different terminal setting. If you use csh or + tcsh: + + setenv TERM vt100 + + or if you use sh, bash, ksh or zsh: + + export TERM=vt100 + +4.2 Why don't line drawing characters work? + + Since version 4.0.13 there's the command line option -a to force use + of charaters +, |, - for line drawing. Use the -a option if any + of the suggestions below doesn't help. + + In general, there are three cases: + * Lines are shown as ASCII characters like this + + +---------+ + | | + +---------+ + + This also happens when you use the -a option. Other than that + possible reason is 1 or 2 (see below). + + * Lines are shown as lower case characters like this + + lqqqqqqqqqk + x x + mqqqqqqqqqj + + Possible reason is 1 or 2 (see below). + + * Lines are shown as blanks or missing characters. Possible reason + is 2 or 3 (see below). + + The reason for the problem is one of following: + + 1. Your terminal might not support line drawing characters. VT100 + compatible terminals, rxvt and xterm and color_xterm do support + them. + 2. Your terminfo or termcap database might have missing or incorrect + definitions for line drawing characters. Set the acsc variable + in the terminfo database like this: + acsc=a\376k\277l\332m\300j\331n\305w\302v\301u\264t\303q\304x + \263h\2600\333 + Don't forget issue 'tic' command. This supposes you are using PC + character set. The octal values might be different for other + character sets. If you are using termcap instead of terminfo, + you should modify above solution appropriately. + 3. Your terminal font might not support line drawing characters. + Try changing the font. + + Here is Miguel's answer to Torben on this subject. + + Torben: + + When I load consolefonts/iso01.f16, I get perfectly right national + characters, but the line drawing characters in mc get wrong. Is it + a mc problem, or is it a problem with the font? (I guess it is). + + Is there a trick? + + Miguel: + + First of all, we should determine whether the font has line drawing + characters or not. + + If it has line drawing characters, then a new terminfo entry should + be written for this specific case. Let's call this linux-iso01. + The acsc variable should be modified to reflect which characters + are used to do the line drawing. + + If it does not have line drawing characters, then we should get rid + of the switch to acsc sequences and make the acsc sequence be just + a mapping to the ugly +, -, |, - characters. + + You can get your terminfo definition by running the infocmp + program, making the proper changes and running the tic program to + compile your new terminfo database. + +4.3 Can one use latin-1 characters without losing the lines? + + Yes, you need a correct font and a correct termcap/terminfo database. + + For font, if you use xterm try "xterm -fn fixed". + + For termcap/terminfo database, change the acsc capability in the + database. + +4.4 I have problems with entering/viewing national characters! + + From the Options - Display Bits dialog select Full 8 bits or ISO + 8859-1. In addition, select 8 bit input from the same dialog. + +4.5 How can I get colors? + + Invoke mc like this (without quotes): "mc -c". + + If you get colors, be happy. + + If your terminal stays black and white, your terminal doesn't support + color. You might want to upgrade to a terminal which compatible with + the ANSI color sequences. + + If your terminal goes completely black, see the next question. + + More detailed answer: + + Check that your terminal supports color. color_xterm, rxvt and Linux + console do support, most other terminals don't. You can test color + support with following simple C program: + + #include <stdio.h> + + int main (void){ + printf ("\033[32m Hello world! \033[m\n"); + return 0; + } + + Compile and run it. If you see "Hello world!" text in green your + terminal supports color, otherwise not (however, for color_xterm see + also the next question). + + Check whether you are using Ncurses or the S-Lang library (type + "mc -V" to find out). + + With S-Lang library you can force color support by setting the + environment variable COLORTERM to any value. + + If you use ncurses library, check that your terminfo database + supports color. If not, you should install one of the enhanced + terminfo databases included in GNU Midnight Commander source + distribution. + + You might want to set the TERM environment variable so that you are + using the correct terminfo database or termcap entry. + + If you use color_xterm (or rxvt) the correct value might be + xterm-color, xtermc or simply xterm. + + If you use Linux console the correct value for TERM is linux or + console. + +4.6 My color_xterm goes completely (or partially) black! + + Some color_xterm terminals define all colors as black instead of the + standard ANSI colors. This makes them go completely black when you + try to use Midnight Commander with colors. + + You will have to override the defaults. Create a file + "color.defaults" which has the following contents: + + color_xterm*color0: Black + color_xterm*color1: Red + color_xterm*color2: Green + color_xterm*color3: Yellow + color_xterm*color4: Blue + color_xterm*color5: Magenta + color_xterm*color6: Cyan + color_xterm*color7: White + color_xterm*background: White + color_xterm*foreground: Black + + (replace color_xterm with the name of your color_xterm, color_xterm + mentions its name in its title bar) + + Now type: + + xrdb -merge color.defaults + + Alternatively you can add the suggested contents of the + color.defaults file to your .Xdefaults or .Xresources file (or what + ever the name of your X configuration file is). Or you can replace + your non-ANSI color_xterm with an ANSI color_xterm. + +4.7 Where can I get xterm or rxvt? + + xterm is included with the X Window System, so you probably already + have it if you have X. This version is not actively maintained, but + Thomas Dickey maintains his more advanced version of xterm at + ftp://dickey.his.com/xterm/ + + rxvt has its own site http://www.rxvt.net/ - get the latest version + there. + +4.8 I got colors working with MC but the other programs don't work at +all anymore! + + Midnight Commander uses terminfo database (if available) but many + other programs use termcap database. If you set the TERM environment + variable to a value which has no corresponding entry in termcap + database those programs stop working. You should add the new value + of TERM to the termcap database. + + Example: If you have set TERM to xterm-color locate from /etc/termcap + the line which starts: + + xterm|vs100|xterm terminal emulator + + Change it to start: + + xterm|xterm-color|vs100|xterm terminal emulator + +5 Graphical user interface + +5.1 Xview, Tk and Gnome editions? + + Xview and Tk and GNOME editions have been removed from the sources. + +5.2 Why is MC linked with X libraries? + + GNU Midnight Commander is linked with X libraries to read key + modifiers from the X Server. It may be helpful to distinguish + between keys that the terminal emulator reports in the same way, e.g. + PgUp and Ctrl-PgUp. Versions of GNU Midnight Commander after 4.6.0 + will load X libraries dynamically on the systems that support it. + + +6 Command line problems + +6.1 How do I stay in the last directory when I exit Midnight Commander? + + See the description of the -P option in the Options section of the + manual. + +6.2 How can I access command line history? + + Meta-h shows the last commands you executed from the command line. + Duplicates are suppressed from the history. Commands executed from + the subshell prompt are not shown. + + You can put previous commands to the command line with Meta-p. Meta-n + moves you forward in history. + + Since version 4.1.15 all the input widgets have permanent history. + You can summon the history listbox by pressing M-h. + +6.3 How can I complete commands, file names, variable names and so on? + + Just press M-Tab. Press M-Tab again to get a listbox if there are + multiple possible completions. + +6.4 I am using ksh. Can I use functions defined in the .kshrc within +MC? + + Sorry, MC only supports bash, tcsh and zsh functions. Ksh functions + are not supported because ksh lacks the necessary hooks needed for + subshell integration. + + Switch to bash or zsh. They are both quite compatible with ksh. + Your ksh functions should work as such or after minimal changes. + +6.5 Is there any way to include additional options or hot keys to MC? + + Yes, F2 invokes an user menu, which is fully configurable. You can + add any shell commands to the user menu. See the mc(1) man page for + more info. + + Another way to add functionality is the external panelize feature. + See the mc(1) man page for more info. + + And finally, you can code any feature you want yourself. MC source + code is free which means you can change it anyway you want. There + are some limitations to make sure MC stays free. See GNU General + Public License for details. + +6.6 When I use Ctrl-O I don't get a subshell. How do I fix this? + + Only bash, tcsh and zsh can be used as subshell. Use one of those + shells as your default shell, and it will be used as subshell in GNU + Midnight Commander. + +6.7 Ctrl-O doesn't work at all. What happens? + + Ctrl-O works if either the subshell is used or the terminal can save + the output of the commands so it can be restored. If neither is + true, there is absolutely nothing interesting behind the panels! + + Only few terminals support screen saving. It's xterm, rxvt and other + xterm-like terminals and virtual terminals on Linux and FreeBSD. + +6.8 Why I see lot of strange 'cd "printf ' lines into my .history file? + + Add + + export HISTCONTROL="ignoreboth" + + into your ~/.profile file (.bash_profile) for avoid this. + +6.9 I have a problem with Screen which makes using Midnight Commander +problematic. I use Ctrl-O to disable panels. Output of previous commands, +just a clear, screen is blanked. + + Update GNU Screen to the last version. This bug was fixed in + + commit ad56f746c6243d45124485d198d577bdbb78071c + Author: Sadrul Habib Chowdhury <sadrul@users.sourceforge.net> + Date: Sun Nov 29 23:34:25 2009 -0500 + + Fix using alternate screen buffers in some cases. + + Screen would reset the 'main' screen buffer if an app tries to + switch to an alternate buffer while it is already using one (in + other words, sends multiple 'smcup' without an 'rmcup'). This should + fix debian #558724 + + (see http://bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=558724) + + or do not rewrite TERM (mustbe TERM=screen) andrun mc as follow: + + echo -e '\e[?1000h' && mc -x + +7 Virtual file systems + +7.1 How can I see the contents of a tar archive? + + If you use keyboard just move the selection bar on the tar file and + press enter. If you use mouse just double-click on the tar file. + + The recognized suffixes for tar archives are .tar, .tar.gz and .tgz. + You can also enter a tar archive by typing "cd filename/utar://" where + filename is the name of the archive. In this case, the suffix is not + important. + +7.2 How do I get out of a tar archive? + + Just press enter on the toplevel ".." file or change to a non-tar + directory. Just typing "cd" with no parameters is enough (it will + take you to your home directory). + +7.3 How do I do anonymous ftp with MC? + + Just type "cd ftp://hostname" where hostname is the name of the host + you want to connect. Alternatively, select FTP link from the Left or + Right menu and type the name of the host you want to connect. + +7.4 How do I do non-anonymous ftp with MC? + + Non-anonymous ftp works just like the anonymous ftp but you give the + login name with the host name. For example, type "cd + ftp://username@hostname". + +7.5 How do I close an ftp connection? + + Just change to a non-ftp directory. Simply typing "cd" with no + parameters is enough (it will take you to your home directory). + + GNU Midnight Commander closes ftp connection automatically after a + timeout or on exit. It's possible to force disconnect by selecting + "Command" -> "Active VFS List" in the menu and using the "Free VFSs + Now" button. + +7.6 Why aren't the contents of ftp panel updated? + + Update is skipped because there would be a serious performance + penalty. Constantly updating directory panels through a ftp + connection would take too much time. + + You can use C-r to force an update. + +7.7 What kind of proxy server works with Midnight Commander? + + There are two kinds of ftp proxies: proxies for ftp clients and + proxies for web browsers. + + Midnight Commander only supports ftp proxies which are meant for ftp + clients. Common WWW proxies (like Squid) are not supported. A rule + of thumb is that if a ftp proxy requires a web browser, it won't work + with Midnight Commander. + + +8 Other common problems + +8.1 When I try pasting to the internal editor, it indents the amount of +indenting increases with each line! + + Either turn off 'Return does autoindent' in the editor options or + update GNU Midnight Commander to version 4.6.0 or above - it doesn't + autoindent when you are holding Shift. + +8.2 Is it possible to use Colorer for syntax highlighting? + + Yes if you submit the patch. There are no legal problems with it + because it's licensed under GPL now. The homepage of Colorer is + http://colorer.sourceforge.net/ + + +9 Other common problems + +9.1 Is there any way to 'bookmark' favorite ftp-fs links? + + Use the directory hotlist. Just press control-backslash. If your + national keyboard layout doesn't have backslash key, just press the + control key with the key which is the backslash key in the English + keyboard layout. + +9.2 When I start Midnight Commander, nothing happens! + + First, invoke MC without subshell support: "mc -u". If this helps + check the shell you are using. Subshell support works best with + bash, although tcsh and zsh are also supported. You might want to + upgrade your shell to a newer version. If you use something else + than bash, tcsh or zsh, subshell support is disabled automatically. + + Another reason is problems with gpm. Try using "--nomouse" option to + see if it makes any difference. Restarting gpm can help. Sometimes + it's enough to move the mouse. + + Also, if you have the DISPLAY environment variable set, but the X + server is unreachable (e.g. it's firewalled), this can also cause a + delay at startup. Unset DISPLAY to see if that's the case. + + +10 Development + +10.1 Who has written Midnight Commander? + + Midnight Commander was started by Miguel de Icaza and he is the + maintainer of the package. Other authors have joined the project + later: + * Mauricio Plaza (early releases) + * Janne Kukonlehto (joined Sep 27 1994) + * Radek Doulik (joined Oct 30 1994) + * Fred Leeflang (joined Nov 2 1994) + * Dugan Porter (joined Dec 1 1994) + * Jakub Jelinek (joined Feb 8 1995) + * Ching Hui (joined Jun 27 1995) + * Andrej Borsenkow (joined Jul 1996) + * Paul Sheer (joined Nov 1 1996) + * Norbert Warmuth + * Alex I. Tkachenko + + + Alessandro Rubini has been specially helpful with debugging and + enhancing of the mouse support. John E. Davis has made his S-Lang + library available to us and answered many questions about it. + + Many people have contributed bug reports, feature suggestions and + small code bits (alphabetical order): + * Thomasz Cholewo + * Juan Jose Ciarlante + * Alexander Dong (OS/2 port, NT port updates) + * Erwin van Eijk + * Torben Fjerdingstad + * Massimo Fontanelli + * Juan Grigera (NT port) + * Gerd Knorr + * Sergey Ya. Korshunoff + * Jean-Daniel Luiset + * Wim Osterholt + * Antonio Palama (old DOS port) + * Thomas Pundt + * Marcelo Roccasalva + * Ilya Rybkin + * Vadim Sinolits + * Jon Stevens + * Adam Tla/lka + + Current list of active developers can be found here: + https://www.midnight-commander.org/wiki/McDevelopers + + This page lists everbody who has provided a patch or + has written code for the Midnight Commander in the past: + https://www.midnight-commander.org/wiki/McContributors + +10.2 Do I dare to use a development version? + + Yes, of course. Feel free to test: + https://www.midnight-commander.org/wiki#Download + As we do our development in git, please do a git checkout + of the master branch and build it + + But always remember: development versions may have nasty bugs + at some points of time. It's up to you to judge whether the new + features and fixes for the bugs you know outweigh the risk of unknown + bugs. + +10.3 How can I report a bug/request for a feature? + + You might first want to get the newest development version to see if + the bug is fixed or the feature is added already. + + If this is not the case, feel free to add a ticket in our ticket system, + which is located here: https://www.midnight-commander.org/newticket + + If you want to send an email instead write your report to + mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org or mc@lists.midnight-commander.org. + + These mailing lists are the most certain way to contact the + developers. Remember to mention if you are not on the mailing list + to make sure that you will receive a copy of replies. + + Give as much details as possible. A too long message is a lot better + than a too short message. + + For segmentation faults a stack backtrace is appreciated. You can + produce stack backtrace as follows: + * If segmentation fault produced a core file: + 1. Load the core file by typing "gdb mc core" or "dbx mc core". + 2. Type "where". + 3. Cut and paste the results to your message. + * If segmentation fault didn't produce a core file: + 1. Load mc by typing "gdb mc" or "dbx mc". + 2. Start mc by typing "run". + 3. Try to reproduce the segmentation fault by doing whatever + you did last time when the segmentation fault occurred. + 4. Type "where". + 5. Cut and paste the results to your message. + 6. For the future you might want to check out what is the + command in your shell to allow producing of the core files. + Usually it is "limit coredumpsize unlimited" or "ulimit + coredumpsize" or "ulimit -c unlimited". + +10.4 How can I join the development? + + To join the development just code the feature you want to add and + send your patch for inclusion. Email address is mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org. + Before you start coding check the latest development version. It + might be that your feature has already been implemented. + + Note that the authors of GNU Midnight Commander have given all their + rights on the program to the Free Software Foundation. You will have + to do the same if you contribute non-trivial patches. Otherwise we + have to reject your patches in order to avoid copyright problems. + + +11 More information + +11.1 This document didn't answer my question. Where else can I look for +an answer? + + Read messages from the Discussion (mailing list archive) or read the + Manual. + + Upgrade to a newer version of Midnight Commander. Many problems are + fixed in the new versions. + + If you still can't find an answer, post your question to the Midnight + Commander mailing list. Its address is mc@lists.midnight-commander.org. + +11.2 What mailing lists are there for Midnight Commander? + + Following mailing lists discuss about Midnight Commander: + + mc@lists.midnight-commander.org + General discussion of GNU Midnight Commander + To subscribe visit + https://lists.midnight-commander.org/mailman/listinfo/mc/ + + mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + Technical development discussion + To subscribe visit + https://lists.midnight-commander.org/mailman/listinfo/mc-devel/ + + mc-commits@googlegroups.com + mailing list only for applyed commits into master/stable branches + To subscribe visit + http://groups.google.com/group/mc-commits/subscribe + + mc-bugs@googlegroups.com + Mailing list only for tickets and comments (use it as RSS :) ) + To subscribe visit + http://groups.google.com/group/mc-bugs/subscribe + +11.3 Where should I look on the World Wide Web for MC stuff? + + There is a WWW page for Midnight Commander. The URL is: + + https://www.midnight-commander.org/ + +11.4 Are the mailing lists archived anywhere? + + The mc and mc-devel lists are archived on the World Wide Web. There + are links to the archives on the mailing list pages (see 10.2). + + +12 Legal issues + +12.1 Authorship + + Questions and Answers was written by Janne Kukonlehto. Parts of it + originate from Ian Jackson, Miguel de Icaza, Dugan Porter, Norbert + Warmuth and Paul Sheer. + +12.2 Feedback is invited + + Send your comments about this document and GNU Midnight Commander to + mc@lists.midnight-commander.org + +12.3 Disclaimer and copyright + + Note that this document is provided as is. The information in it is + not warranted to be correct; you use it at your own risk. + + You can use Questions and Answers according to GNU General Public + License (see the COPYING file in GNU Midnight Commander source + distribution). Questions and Answers is not public domain. diff --git a/doc/HACKING b/doc/HACKING new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15cc1de --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/HACKING @@ -0,0 +1,388 @@ +This document +============= + +This document is a guide how to develop GNU Midnight Commander. It's +quite incomplete, but may be worth reading anyway. + +The document was written by Miguel de Icaza and reworked by Pavel +Roskin and later from Patrick Winnertz. + Some parts were taken from the messages posted in the mailing +lists. + + +Compiling from GIT +================== + +To compile GNU Midnight commander from GIT, the following software is +required: + +Autoconf 2.64 and above (latest is recommended) +Automake 1.12 and above (latest is recommended) +Gettext 0.18.2 and above +Glib 2.30 and above + +Full list of requirements you can see at: +https://www.midnight-commander.org/wiki/doc/buildAndInstall/req + +It is recommended that all those tools are installed with the same +prefix. Make sure that the tools with the right version are first in +PATH. + +Once you have the right tools, run `autogen.sh' - it will generate +everything necessary for the build `configure'. Then run 'configure' +and `make' as usually. + +The distribution tarball is created by the command `make distcheck'. +This command can take a while. + +Currently snapshots are made on Debian unstable and use the versions of +the tools from the unstable repository. Yes, the rpm packages are made +on Debian too. + +Note that the version of gettext doesn't affect the snapshot because the +distributed files are installed by gettext from archives for the version +used in the AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION macro, which is 0.18.2. + + + +Working with GNU Midnight Commander +=================================== + +Please use the GIT version. It may be quite different from the released +versions. A lot of cleanup is going on. The GIT version may be easier +to understand, in addition to the obvious fact that the merging is +easier with the GIT version. + +In order to compile GNU Midnight Commander from a clean GIT checkout you +should use 'autogen.sh && ./configure' instead of 'configure'. + +GNU Midnight Commander uses Autoconf and Automake, with make it fairly +portable. However, GNU Make is strongly recommended for development +because other versions of make may not track dependencies properly. +This is very important for correct compilation, especially if you change +any header files. + +If you add or remove any files, please change Makefile.am in the same +directory accordingly. When doing significant changes in the tree +structure, "make distcheck" is strongly recommended. + +GNU Autoconf allows you to test several different configurations are +once. To do so, use the so called out-of-tree (or VPATH) compilation. +Create separate empty directories and run configure with full path from +those directories, like this: + +cd /usr/local/src +mkdir mc-slang +mkdir mc-ncurses +cd mc-slang +/usr/local/src/mc/configure && make all +cd ../mc-ncurses +/usr/local/src/mc/configure --with-screen=ncurses && make all + +Please use the same indentation as other developers. To indent a block, +select in the internal editor and use Shift-F9 to call the external +indent. For historic reasons, GNU Midnight Commander used formatting +that is not default for GNU Indent. Please put following text to your +~/.indent.pro file to make GNU Indent follow the style used in GNU +Midnight Commander: + +--gnu-style +--format-first-column-comments +--indent-level4 +--brace-indent0 +--line-length100 +--no-tabs +--blank-lines-after-procedures + +or in short notation: + +indent -gnu -fc1 -i4 -bli0 -nut -bap -l100 + +It's OK to indent the whole function if you edit it. However, please +refrain from it if you are posting your patch for review. In this case +you would save time of other developers if you only include significant +changes. The developer applying your patch can format the code for you. + +Please keep in mind that the VFS subsystem is licensed under LGPL, while +the rest of the code uses GPL. + + +Code structure - outline +======================== + +The code is located in following directories. + +vfs - Virtual File System. + +This library provides filesystem-like access to various data, such are +archives and remote filesystems. To use VFS, you should use wrappers +around POSIX calls. The wrappers have names composed from "mc_" and the +standard name of the function. For example, to open a file on VFS, use +mc_open() instead. + +edit - the internal editor. + +This code has been contributed by Paul Sheer, the author of Cooledit. +The internal editor shares some code with Cooledit, but now it's +developed as part of GNU Midnight Commander. + +src - the main part of the code. + +This code includes the dialog manager written by Radek Doulik and source +code of the main application. + +Code structure - details +======================== + +GNU Midnight Commander uses extensively the dialog manager written by +Radek Doulik. To understand how the dialog manager works, please read +the dialog.c. You will find the basic widgets in the files widget.c. +Some more high-level functions, e.g. to display a message box, are +located in wtools.c. This file also contains the Quick Dialog code, +which makes it easier to create complex dialogs. + +The files util.c and utilunix.c have a lot of utility functions. Get +familiar with them, they are very simple. + +glib is used for memory allocation and for some utility functions, such +as manipulation with lists and trees. gmodule (part of the glib +distribution) is used to load some libraries dynamically at the run +time. + +Thanks to glib, the code has almost no hardcoded limits, since there are +many ways to avoid them. For example, when you want to concatenate +strings, use the g_strconcat() function: + + new_text = g_strconcat (username, " ", password, (char *)0); + +This allocates new memory for the string, so you should use g_free() on +the result. + +The parent of all dialogs is called midnight_dlg. Both panels are +widgets in that dialog. Other widgets include the menu, the command +line and the button bar. + + +Input handling +============== + +The routines for input handling on the Midnight Commander are: +getch, get_key_code, mi_getch and get_event. + +getch is an interface to the low level system input mechanism. It +does not deal with the mouse. + + In the case of ncurses, this is a function implemented in the + ncurses library that translates key sequences to key codes (\E[A to + something like KEY_UP and so on). + + In the case of S-Lang there is no such conversion, that's why we + load a set of extra definitions. + +The get_key_code routine converts the data from getch to the +constants the Midnight Commander uses. + + In the case of S-Lang, it will actually do all the jobs that getch + does for curses. In the case of curses it patches a couple of + sequences that are not available on some terminal databases. This + routine is the one you want to use if you want a character without + the mouse support. + +get_event is the routine you want to use if you want to handle mouse +events, it will return 0 on a mouse event, -1 if no input is available +or a key code if there is some input available. This routine in turn +uses get_key_code to decode the input stream and convert it to useful +constants. + +mi_getch is just a wrapper around get_event that ignores all the mouse +events. It's used only in a couple of places, this routine may return +-1 if no input is available (if you have set the nodelay option of +ncurses or S-Lang with nodelay) or a character code if no such option is +available. + + +Mouse support +============= + +The mouse support in the Midnight Commander is based on the get_event +routine. The core of the mouse event dispatching is in the +dlg.c:run_dlg routine. + + +ncurses +======= + +Although S-Lang is now used by default, we still support ncurses. We +basically are using a small subset of ncurses because we want to be +compatible with Slang. + + +The Dialog manager and the Widgets +================================== + +The Dialog manager and the Widget structure are implemented in +src/dialog.c. Everything shown on screen is a dialog. Dialogs contain +widgets, but not everything on screen is a widget. Dialogs can draw +themselves. + +Dialogs are connected into a singly linked list using "parent" field. +Currently active dialog is saved in current_dlg variable. The toplevel +dialog has parent NULL. Usually it's midnight_dlg. + + parent parent +current_dlg ------->another dialog-- ... -->midnight_dlg + +When the screen needs to be refreshed, every dialog asks its parent to +refresh first, and then refreshes itself. + +A dialog is created by create_dlg(). Then it's populated by widgets +using add_widget(). Then the dialog is run by calling run_dlg(), which +returns the id of the button selected by the user. Finally, the dialog +is destroyed by calling destroy_dlg(). + +Widgets are placed to a doubly linked circular list. Each widget has +previous and next widget. + + prev next prev next +widget1 <---------> widget2 <---------> widget3 + ^ ^ + ----------------------------------------- + next prev + +Pressing Tab moves focus to the "next" widget, pressing Shift-Tab moves +focus to "prev". The tab order is equal to the add order except some +old code that use the reverse order by setting DLG_REVERSE flag in +create_dlg() call. Please don't use reverse order in the new code. + +The initial widget to get focus can be selected by calling +dlg_select_widget(). + +When creating a dialog, you may want to use a callback that would +intercept some dialog events. However, many widgets will do the right +thing by default, so some dialogs can work just fine without callbacks. + +There are also widget events, which are sent by the dialog to individual +widgets. Some widgets also have user callbacks. + +To create your own widget, use init_widget(). In this case, you must +provide a callback function. Please note that it's not the same as the +user callback in some widgets. + + +Where to Find Bug Reports and Patches +===================================== + +The official place for bug reports is: + + https://www.midnight-commander.org/ + + +There are various unofficial sources where bug reports and patches can +be found (NOT maintained by the MC team). + + +http://bugs.debian.org/mc + The bug tracking system for Debian, a package collection mainly + for GNU/Linux and the Hurd. + +http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/buglist.cgi?component=mc + Bugs reported in Redhat Linux. + +http://www.openbsd.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb/ports/misc/mc/patches/ + The patches that are applied for the OpenBSD version of MC. + +http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/ports/misc/mc/files/ + The patches that are applied for the FreeBSD version of MC. + +http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/pkgsrc/sysutils/mc/patches/ + The patches that are applied for the NetBSD version of MC. + +http://sources.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewvc.cgi/gentoo-x86/app-misc/mc/files/?hideattic=1 + The patches that are applied for the Gentoo Linux version of MC. + + +Programming Tips +================ + +(This list should be sorted alphabetically.) + +?: This operator has a precedence that is easy to use the wrong way. You + might think that + + int right = 25 + have_frame() ? 1 : 0; /* WRONG */ + + results in either 25 or 26. This is not the case. The C compiler + sees this as: + + int right = (25 + have_frame()) ? 1 : 0; /* WRONG */ + + To avoid this, put the ?: in parentheses, like this + + int right = 25 + (have_frame() ? 1 : 0); /* RIGHT */ + + If the condition is more complicated, put it in additional + parentheses: + + int right = 25 + ((have_frame()) ? 1 : 0); /* RIGHT */ + +const: For every function taking a string argument, decide whether you + (as a user of the function) would expect that the string is modi- + fied by the function. If not, declare the string argument as + "const char *". If your implementation needs to modify the string, + use g_strdup to create a local copy. + +const_cast: Has been replaced by str_unconst. + +g_free: g_free handles NULL argument too, no need for the comparison. + Bad way: + if (old_dir) g_free (old_dir); + Right way: + g_free (old_dir); + +g_strdup: When you use g_strdup to create a local copy of a string, use + the following pattern to keep the reference. + + char * const pathref = g_strdup(argument); + /* ... */ + g_free (pathref); + + The "const" will make the pointer unmodifiable (pathref++ + is not possible), but you can still modify the string contents. + +NULL: When you pass NULL as an argument of a varargs function, cast the + 0 to the appropriate data type. If a system #defines NULL to + be 0 (at least NetBSD and OpenBSD do), and the sizes of int and + a pointer are different, the argument will be passed as int 0, + not as a pointer. + + This tip applies at least to catstrs (edit/edit.h), execl(3), + execle(3), execlp(3), g_strconcat (glib), parent_call + (src/background.h), parent_call_string (src/background.h). + + example: + char *path = g_strconcat("dir", "/", "file", (char *)0); + +size_t: This data type is suitable for expressing sizes of memory or the + length of strings. This type is unsigned, so you need not check + if the value is >= 0. + +strncpy: Don't use this function in newly created code. It is slow, insecure + and hard to use. A much better alternative is g_strlcpy (see there). + +str_unconst: We use many libraries that do not know about "const char *" + and thus declare their functions to require "char *". If you + know for sure that an external function does not modify the + string, you can "unconst" a string using the function + str_unconst(). If you are not sure whether the function modifies + the string, you should use g_strdup() to pass a copy of a string + to the function. Don't forget to call g_free() after work is done. + +unused: Unused arguments of a function can be marked like this: + + void do_nothing(int data) + { + (void) &data; + } + + This tells the GNU C Compiler not to emit a warning, and has no + side effects for other compilers. diff --git a/doc/INSTALL b/doc/INSTALL new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3881c52 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/INSTALL @@ -0,0 +1,453 @@ +This file contains: + +- Build requirements for GNU Midnight Commander +- Installation instructions for GNU Midnight Commander +- Where to get more information on GNU Midnight Commander +- Notes about GNU Midnight Commander installation +- Obtaining related software + +Build requirements for GNU Midnight Commander +---------------------------------------------------- + +- glibc +- gcc +- make +- autoconf >= 2.64 +- automake >= 1.12 +- libtool +- glib2 >= 2.30 +- slang2 or ncurses +- gettext >= 0.18.2 +- libssh2 >= 1.2.8 is required only for sftp vfs +- libaspell to support spell checking in the internal editor +- ext2fs >= 1.42.4 to support ext{2,3,4}fs extended attributes + + +Installation instructions for GNU Midnight Commander +---------------------------------------------------- + +The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for +various system-dependent variables used during compilation, and creates +the makefiles. It also creates a file `config.status' that you can run +in the future to recreate the current configuration. + +To compile this package: + +1. Configure the package for your system. + +Normally, you just `cd' to the directory containing the package's source +code and type `./configure'. If you're using `csh' on an old version of +SystemV, you might need to type `sh configure' instead to prevent `csh' +from trying to execute `configure' itself. Under AIX, you may need to +use ksh instead of sh. + +Running `configure' takes a while. While it is running, it prints some +messages that tell what it is doing. If you don't want to see any +messages, run `configure' with the `--quiet' option. + +To compile the package in a different directory than the one containing +the source code, you must use a version of `make' supporting the `VPATH' +variable, such as GNU `make'. Change to the directory where you want +the object files and executables to go and run the `configure' script +with the full path. If for some reason `configure' cannot find the +source code directory, run `configure' with the option `--srcdir=DIR', +where DIR is the directory that contains the source code. + +By default, `make install' will install the package's files in +`/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. You can specify an +installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the +option `--prefix=PATH'. + +You can specify separate installation prefixes for architecture specific +files and architecture-independent files. If you give `configure' the +option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use PATH as the prefix for +installing binary programs and libraries. Data files and documentation +will still use the regular prefix. Normally, all files are installed +using the same prefix. + +If compiled on GNU/Linux, Midnight Commander detects if you have the gpm +library installed. If you installed the gpm mouse library in a +non-standard place, you will need to use the --with-gpm-mouse flag with +the directory base where you installed the gpm package. + +`configure' recognizes the following options (the list may be +incomplete, use `configure --help' to get the full list): + +`--help' + Print a summary of the options to `configure' and exit. + +`--quiet' +`--silent' + Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. + +`--version' + Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure' + script, and exit. + +`--without-edit' + Configure GNU Midnight Commander to be compiled without the + built-in file editor. The built-in editor is compiled in by + default. + +`--enable-aspell' + This option adds spell check support in the internal editor using + libaspell. Disabled by default. + +`--without-gpm-mouse' + Use this flag to disable gpm mouse support (e.g. if you want to + use mouse only on X terminals). + +`--with-glib-static' + Force linking against glib statically. This option is intended for + building binaries for distribution purposes and may not work on + some operating systems. + +`--with-mmap', `--without-mmap' + Force using or not using the mmap function. It is currently used + in the internal viewer. `--with-mmap' may be useful on some + versions of AIX where the `configure' script decides that mmap is + broken, but it's actually suitable for the internal viewer. + +`--with-subshell[=optional]', `--without-subshell' + The subshell support is by default turned on, you can disable + this by using the --without-subshell option. If you pass the + =optional parameter, then the subshell support is turned off by + default. To turn it on, specify the `-U' option to the program. + +`--without-x' + By default, the Midnight Commander tries to connect to the X Window + System events to query the status of the keyboard modifiers, such + as Control, Shift and Alt, when invoked in a terminal emulator + under X11. This is necessary (but not always sufficient) to + recognize some optional but handy key combinations like Ctrl-Home + and Shift-Cursor keys. Use `--without-x' if the dependency on + X11 libraries is not desired. + +`--disable-largefile' + This option disables support for large files (2 gigabytes and more) + on the systems where file operations use 32-bit offsets by default, + but support for 64-bit offsets is available. May be useful for + slow processors and embedded systems. + +`--enable-charset' + This option adds support for selecting character set of the text in + the internal viewer and editor and converting it on the fly. The + implementation of this option is currently incomplete. + +`--disable-background' + This option disables support for background operations. Background + operations allow to perform some tasks such as copying files in a + separate background process. Any messages from the background + process are forwarded to the foreground process. More advanced + dialogs cannot be forwarded yet, so the background process uses the + default. Background code is known to be less stable than the rest + of the code, so you may want to disable it at the compile time. + +`--with-homedir' + This option allow users to place user config directories in any + place. By default value is 'XDG', this mean, mc will respect XDG + standards. If other value is specified, this will used as directory + name (relative to $HOME if path is relative, or as is if path is + absolute). + +VFS options: +- - - - - - + +`--disable-vfs' + This option disables the Virtual File System switch code in the + Midnight Commander and uses the standard file system calls for + file access. If you specify this option, you won't get the + transparent access to archives and remote directories. + +`--enable-vfs-cpio' + (on by default) + Support for cpio filesystem + +`--enable-vfs-tar' + (on by default) + Support for tar filesystem + +`--enable-vfs-ftp' + (on by default) + Support for FTP vfs + +`--enable-vfs-fish' + (on by default) + Support for FISH vfs + +`--enable-vfs-sftp' + (auto) + Support for SFTP vfs + +`--enable-vfs-extfs' + (on by default) + Support for extfs + +`--enable-vfs-sfs` + (on by default) + Support for sfs + +`--enable-vfs-undelfs' + (off by default) + Support for ext2 undelete filesystem. + On systems that use the ext2 or ext3 file system and have the + libext2fs library available, this option adds support for + recovering deleted files (the undel virtual file system). + +Screen library: +- - - - - - - - + +You may also tell configure which screen library you want to use with +the Midnight Commander. The configure script will use S-Lang as +default, and prefers an already installed S-Lang library over the +included one, but you can override this by using the following flag +(please note that since S-Lang is default, it is tested better than +ncurses): + +`--with-screen={slang|ncurses}' + Choose the library used to manage interaction with the terminal. + `slang' means S-Lang library already installed on the system, + `ncurses' means ncurses library already installed on the system. + The S-Lang library is used by default if found. + +`--with-ncurses-includes=[DIR]' + Set path to ncurses includes [default=/usr/include]; make + sense only if --with-screen=ncurses is used; + for /usr/local/include/ncurses specify /usr/local/include. + +`--with-ncurses-libs=[DIR]' + Set path to ncurses library [default=/usr/lib]; make sense + only if --with-screen=ncurses is used. + +Compiler options: +- - - - - - - - - + +On systems that require unusual options for compilation or linking that +the package's `configure' script does not know about, you can give +`configure' initial values for variables by placing them in the command +line: + +./configure CC='gcc -traditional' LIBS=-lposix + +Here are the variables that you might want to override when running +`configure'. + + - Variable: CC + C compiler program. The default is `gcc' if found, otherwise `cc'. + + - Variable: CFLAGS + The default flags used to build the program. + + - Variable: INSTALL + Program to use to install files. The default is `install' if you + have it, `cp' otherwise. + +For these variables, any value given in the command line is added to the +value that `configure' decides to use: + + - Variable: LIBS + Libraries to link with, in the form `-lfoo -lbar...'. + + - Variable: LDFLAGS + Linker flags, e.g. -L<lib dir> if you have libraries in a + nonstandard directory <lib dir> + + - Variable: CPPFLAGS + C/C++ preprocessor flags, e.g. -I<include dir> if you have + headers in a nonstandard directory <include dir> + +If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, we encourage +you to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and +mail diffs or instructions to the address given in the README so we can +include them in the next release. + +2. Type `make' to compile the package. + +3. Type `make install' to install programs, data files, and the +documentation. On GNU/Linux the console screen saver is installed as +well. + +4. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the source +directory by typing `make clean'. If you want to clean the source tree +completely, so that it contains only those files that should be packaged +in the archive, issue `make distclean'. If you've run configure in a +different directory than the source tree, distclean won't remove your +*.o and linked programs in that directory. + +5. GNU Midnight Commander allows you to stay in the last current +directory after exiting MC. This is done with a shell function, the man +page has more information about this. + +The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program +called `autoconf'. You only need it if you want to regenerate +`configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'. + + +Where to get more information on GNU Midnight Commander +------------------------------------------------------- + +There are two mailing lists for the program: + +mc@lists.midnight-commander.org: Discussion on GNU Midnight Commander file manager. +mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org: Discussion between the developers of the program. + +To subscribe to the mailing lists, visit their respective pages: + +https://lists.midnight-commander.org/mailman/listinfo/mc/ +https://lists.midnight-commander.org/mailman/listinfo/mc-devel/ + + +Notes about GNU Midnight Commander installation +----------------------------------------------- + +GNU Midnight Commander has been run in the following configurations: + +i386-*-linux +sparc-*-linux +alpha-*-linux +powerpc-*-linux +mips-dec-{open,net}bsd1.0 +mips-sgi-irix5.2 +mips-sgi-irix5.3 +powerpc-ibm-aix5.3.0.0 (IBM XL C, IBM XL C/C++) +sparc-sun-sunos4.1 +sparc-sun-netbsd1.0 +sparc-sun-solaris2.3 +hppa-hp-hpux9 +hppa-hp-hpux7 +m68k-apple-aux +mc88110-aviion-dgux5.4 +i386-*-bsdi2 +i386-*-freebsd4.3 +i386-*-openbsd2.9 + +Midnight Commander is written in a portable manner and uses GNU Autoconf +for configuration, so it is expected to compile without changes on many +other operating systems. + +You will need an ANSI C Compiler (such as GCC) and glib library to +compile the source. GNU Midnight Commander now comes with the S-Lang +screen manager, a fast screen manager, but you may want to use the +already installed S-Lang or ncurses library. + +If you insist on using ncurses, it's recommended to use ncurses 4.1 and +above, since the older versions don't support resizing in the xterm +window. + +GNU Midnight Commander comes with the mouse support on xterms and in the +Linux console. In order to take advantage of the mouse support on the +Linux console you will need the gpm mouse server (see the section +"Obtaining related software" in this file). + +Once you get gpm, compile it and install it, then you will have to +specify the `--with-gpm-mouse' flag to the configure program if you +installed it in a non-standard directory. If you installed the gpm +package under /usr or /usr/local, you don't need to specify this flag; +configure will find gpm for you. The support for mice on xterms is +always compiled in. + +We are working on further enhancements to the program, but we're not +sure which ones must go first. If you would like to point us in the +Right Direction we will be glad to hear from you. + +If you happen to find a feature that doesn't do what you expect, please +write to mc@lists.midnight-commander.org telling as much as you can +about the problem you're experiencing. Please don't send personal +messages to the maintainers. + + +Obtaining related software +-------------------------- + +glib +---- + +The only "hard" dependency of GNU Midnight Commander is glib. You can +get glib from + +ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/glib/ + +Minimal version of glib: 2.30.0 +Recommended version: 2.30.x and higher. + +Newer versions may work, but haven't been tested. + +PCRE +---- + +Both PCRE and PCRE2 libraries are supported. + +You can get PCRE from + +http://www.pcre.org/ + +Terminal database +----------------- + +There are many incomplete terminal databases out there, however, a +complete terminfo is bundled with ncurses. (It is simple to generate +the termcap database using the infocmp utility in ncurses). + +Some terminfo data are included with the mc distribution (lib/*.ti). +Particularly linux, xterm and vt100. Use e.g. ''tic linux.ti'' to use +them. + +If you want to run mc on xterm/color_xterm/ansi_xterm (not rxvt), then +you might read lib/README.xterm for further information. + +Screen libraries +---------------- + +GNU Midnight Commander can use the included version of S-Lang, but you +can get the latest version here: + +http://www.s-lang.org/ + +Alternatively, you can use ncurses: + +http://www.gnu.org/software/ncurses/ncurses.html + +Mouse support +------------- + +The general purpose mouse (gpm) daemon is available from + +http://unix.schottelius.org/gpm/ + +Compiler +-------- + +If your C compiler is not powerful enough to compile GNU Midnight +Commander, you should report is as a bug to the GNU Midnight Commander +team. Sometimes there is no solution than upgrading to a modern and +free compiler - GCC (Compiler Collection): + +http://gcc.gnu.org/ + +AIX +--- +Currently you can not use gcc 4.2.4 (and probably other versions) on +AIX to compile the S-Lang version. Please use IBM XL C or IBM XL C/C++ +instead. + +If you compile a ncurses version you need to set TERM=dtterm to get +working color support. Furthermore it is important to specify the +--with-ncurses-includes/--with-ncurses-lib parameters because otherwise +mc will pick up term.h from AIX which does not work with the ncurses +library. + +The AIX S-Lang build was tested with S-Lang 2.0.7. Later versions may +also work but are not tested yet. + +Here is an example for S-Lang, it is assumed that the S-Lang library +is installed under /user/local and that you also want want to install +to /usr/local: + + export CC=cc_r + export CXX=xlC_r + export CONFIG_SHELL=/usr/bin/bash (if installed) + export SHELL=/usr/bin/bash (if installed) + + ./configure \ + --prefix=/usr/local \ + --with-screen=slang diff --git a/doc/INSTALL.FAST b/doc/INSTALL.FAST new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77d97fe --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/INSTALL.FAST @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +Read the INSTALL file for the complete instructions. + +GNU Midnight Commander requires glib2. + +GNU Midnight Commander uses the S-Lang screen library by default. It +tries the S-Lang library installed on the system. If it's not found, +the included S-Lang sources are used. It is also possible to use +ncurses as the screen library. + +1. Configure the package for your system. + +Normally, you just `cd' to the package main directory and type +`./configure'. + +The most often needed options to configure are following: + +`--prefix=PATH' + By default, `make install' will install the package's files + in `/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. or to `/usr/bin', + `/usr/man', etc. depending on the location of an old mc binary. + If you have none in your system, default will be `/usr/local'. + You can specify an installation prefix other than default by + giving `configure' the option `--prefix=PATH'. + +`--with-screen={slang|ncurses}' + Choose the library used to manage interaction with the terminal. + `slang' means S-Lang library already installed on the system, + `ncurses' means ncurses library already installed on the system. + The installed S-Lang library is used by default if found. + +You may also want to specify CFLAGS for the compiler, even if it finds +itself some defaults by typing e.g. + +./configure CFLAGS=-O3 + +2. Type `make' to compile the package. + +3. Type `make install' to install programs, data files, and +documentation. You may need to run this command as root. + +If you're on a GNU/Linux system, this will install the `cons.saver' +utility, which allows the Midnight Commander to save and restore the +screen contents. This utility can be installed setuid root, but it's +only needed on systems where users cannot access /dev/vcsaN, where N is +the virtual console number, on which the uses is logged on. + +If you're making a mc binary distribution for other people and want to +package the whole installed tree, use `make install DESTDIR=PATH', which +will make PATH the root for installation. + +4. Type `mc' and enjoy! diff --git a/doc/MAINTAINERS b/doc/MAINTAINERS new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c2ab66 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/MAINTAINERS @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Email: mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org diff --git a/doc/MIRRORS.txt b/doc/MIRRORS.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..751f834 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/MIRRORS.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +This is a list of sites known to mirror the Midnight Commander release. + +---------- + +The Midnight Commander distribution is placed at: + + * http://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/midnightcommander/ + * ftp://ftp.osuosl.org/pub/midnightcommander/ + +----------- diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c192da1 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +DIST_SUBDIRS = hints man hlp +SUBDIRS = hints man hlp + +DOCS = FAQ HACKING INSTALL INSTALL.FAST MAINTAINERS README.QNX MIRRORS.txt +EXTRA_DIST = $(DX_CONFIG) doxygen-include.am $(DOCS) + +include doxygen-include.am diff --git a/doc/Makefile.in b/doc/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..771f873 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,879 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +# --------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more +# contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed with +# this work for additional information regarding copyright ownership. +# The ASF licenses this file to You under the Apache License, Version 2.0 +# (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with +# the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at +# +# http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 +# +# Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software +# distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, +# WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. +# See the License for the specific language governing permissions and +# limitations under the License. +# --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# Copyright (C) 2004 Oren Ben-Kiki +# This file is distributed under the same terms as the Automake macro files. + +# Generate automatic documentation using Doxygen. Goals and variables values +# are controlled by the various DX_COND_??? conditionals set by autoconf. +# +# The provided goals are: +# doxygen-doc: Generate all doxygen documentation. +# doxygen-run: Run doxygen, which will generate some of the documentation +# (HTML, CHM, CHI, MAN, RTF, XML) but will not do the post +# processing required for the rest of it (PS, PDF, and some MAN). +# doxygen-man: Rename some doxygen generated man pages. +# doxygen-ps: Generate doxygen PostScript documentation. +# doxygen-pdf: Generate doxygen PDF documentation. +# +# Note that by default these are not integrated into the automake goals. If +# doxygen is used to generate man pages, you can achieve this integration by +# setting man3_MANS to the list of man pages generated and then adding the +# dependency: +# +# $(man3_MANS): doxygen-doc +# +# This will cause make to run doxygen and generate all the documentation. +# +# The following variable is intended for use in Makefile.am: +# +# DX_CLEANFILES = everything to clean. +# +# This is usually added to MOSTLYCLEANFILES. +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +RECURSIVE_TARGETS = all-recursive check-recursive cscopelist-recursive \ + ctags-recursive dvi-recursive html-recursive info-recursive \ + install-data-recursive install-dvi-recursive \ + install-exec-recursive install-html-recursive \ + install-info-recursive install-pdf-recursive \ + install-ps-recursive install-recursive installcheck-recursive \ + installdirs-recursive pdf-recursive ps-recursive \ + tags-recursive uninstall-recursive +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS = mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive \ + distclean-recursive maintainer-clean-recursive +am__recursive_targets = \ + $(RECURSIVE_TARGETS) \ + $(RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS) \ + $(am__extra_recursive_targets) +AM_RECURSIVE_TARGETS = $(am__recursive_targets:-recursive=) TAGS CTAGS \ + distdir distdir-am +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +# Read a list of newline-separated strings from the standard input, +# and print each of them once, without duplicates. Input order is +# *not* preserved. +am__uniquify_input = $(AWK) '\ + BEGIN { nonempty = 0; } \ + { items[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ + END { if (nonempty) { for (i in items) print i; }; } \ +' +# Make sure the list of sources is unique. This is necessary because, +# e.g., the same source file might be shared among _SOURCES variables +# for different programs/libraries. +am__define_uniq_tagged_files = \ + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + unique=`for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ + done | $(am__uniquify_input)` +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(srcdir)/doxygen-include.am \ + COPYING INSTALL NEWS README TODO +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +am__relativize = \ + dir0=`pwd`; \ + sed_first='s,^\([^/]*\)/.*$$,\1,'; \ + sed_rest='s,^[^/]*/*,,'; \ + sed_last='s,^.*/\([^/]*\)$$,\1,'; \ + sed_butlast='s,/*[^/]*$$,,'; \ + while test -n "$$dir1"; do \ + first=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first" != "."; then \ + if test "$$first" = ".."; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_last"`/"$$dir2"; \ + dir0=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_butlast"`; \ + else \ + first2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first2" = "$$first"; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + else \ + dir2="../$$dir2"; \ + fi; \ + dir0="$$dir0"/"$$first"; \ + fi; \ + fi; \ + dir1=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + done; \ + reldir="$$dir2" +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +DIST_SUBDIRS = hints man hlp +SUBDIRS = hints man hlp +DOCS = FAQ HACKING INSTALL INSTALL.FAST MAINTAINERS README.QNX MIRRORS.txt +EXTRA_DIST = $(DX_CONFIG) doxygen-include.am $(DOCS) +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_html_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_HTML = @DX_DOCDIR@/html +@DX_COND_chm_TRUE@@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_CHM = @DX_DOCDIR@/chm +@DX_COND_chi_TRUE@@DX_COND_chm_TRUE@@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_CHI = @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.chi +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_man_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_MAN = @DX_DOCDIR@/man +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_rtf_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_RTF = @DX_DOCDIR@/rtf +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_xml_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_XML = @DX_DOCDIR@/xml +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_PS = @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.ps +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@DX_PS_GOAL = doxygen-ps +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_PDF = @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.pdf +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@DX_PDF_GOAL = doxygen-pdf +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_latex_TRUE@DX_CLEAN_LATEX = @DX_DOCDIR@/latex +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@DX_CLEANFILES = \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ -r \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_HTML) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_CHM) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_CHI) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_MAN) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_RTF) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_XML) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_PS) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_PDF) \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_CLEAN_LATEX) + +all: all-recursive + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/doxygen-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/doxygen-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs + +# This directory's subdirectories are mostly independent; you can cd +# into them and run 'make' without going through this Makefile. +# To change the values of 'make' variables: instead of editing Makefiles, +# (1) if the variable is set in 'config.status', edit 'config.status' +# (which will cause the Makefiles to be regenerated when you run 'make'); +# (2) otherwise, pass the desired values on the 'make' command line. +$(am__recursive_targets): + @fail=; \ + if $(am__make_keepgoing); then \ + failcom='fail=yes'; \ + else \ + failcom='exit 1'; \ + fi; \ + dot_seen=no; \ + target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ + case "$@" in \ + distclean-* | maintainer-clean-*) list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + *) list='$(SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + esac; \ + for subdir in $$list; do \ + echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ + if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ + dot_seen=yes; \ + local_target="$$target-am"; \ + else \ + local_target="$$target"; \ + fi; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ + || eval $$failcom; \ + done; \ + if test "$$dot_seen" = "no"; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) "$$target-am" || exit 1; \ + fi; test -z "$$fail" + +ID: $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); mkid -fID $$unique +tags: tags-recursive +TAGS: tags + +tags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + set x; \ + here=`pwd`; \ + if ($(ETAGS) --etags-include --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ + include_option=--etags-include; \ + empty_fix=.; \ + else \ + include_option=--include; \ + empty_fix=; \ + fi; \ + list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + test ! -f $$subdir/TAGS || \ + set "$$@" "$$include_option=$$here/$$subdir/TAGS"; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + shift; \ + if test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$*$$unique"; then :; else \ + test -n "$$unique" || unique=$$empty_fix; \ + if test $$# -gt 0; then \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + "$$@" $$unique; \ + else \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique; \ + fi; \ + fi +ctags: ctags-recursive + +CTAGS: ctags +ctags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + test -z "$(CTAGS_ARGS)$$unique" \ + || $(CTAGS) $(CTAGSFLAGS) $(AM_CTAGSFLAGS) $(CTAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique + +GTAGS: + here=`$(am__cd) $(top_builddir) && pwd` \ + && $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) \ + && gtags -i $(GTAGS_ARGS) "$$here" +cscopelist: cscopelist-recursive + +cscopelist-am: $(am__tagged_files) + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + case "$(srcdir)" in \ + [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) sdir="$(srcdir)" ;; \ + *) sdir=$(subdir)/$(srcdir) ;; \ + esac; \ + for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then \ + echo "$(subdir)/$$i"; \ + else \ + echo "$$sdir/$$i"; \ + fi; \ + done >> $(top_builddir)/cscope.files + +distclean-tags: + -rm -f TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done + @list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + $(am__make_dryrun) \ + || test -d "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || $(MKDIR_P) "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || exit 1; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(distdir)/$$subdir"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_distdir=$$reldir; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(top_distdir)"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_top_distdir=$$reldir; \ + echo " (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" distdir="$$new_distdir" \\"; \ + echo " am__remove_distdir=: am__skip_length_check=: am__skip_mode_fix=: distdir)"; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ + top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" \ + distdir="$$new_distdir" \ + am__remove_distdir=: \ + am__skip_length_check=: \ + am__skip_mode_fix=: \ + distdir) \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-recursive +all-am: Makefile +installdirs: installdirs-recursive +installdirs-am: +install: install-recursive +install-exec: install-exec-recursive +install-data: install-data-recursive +uninstall: uninstall-recursive + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-recursive +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-recursive + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic distclean-tags + +dvi: dvi-recursive + +dvi-am: + +html: html-recursive + +html-am: + +info: info-recursive + +info-am: + +install-data-am: + +install-dvi: install-dvi-recursive + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-recursive + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-recursive + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-recursive + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-recursive + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-recursive + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-recursive + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: + +.MAKE: $(am__recursive_targets) install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: $(am__recursive_targets) CTAGS GTAGS TAGS all all-am check \ + check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool cscopelist-am ctags \ + ctags-am distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool \ + distclean-tags distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps install-ps-am \ + install-strip installcheck installcheck-am installdirs \ + installdirs-am maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags tags-am uninstall uninstall-am + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@doxygen-ps: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.ps + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@@DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.ps: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ cd @DX_DOCDIR@/latex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ rm -f *.aux *.toc *.idx *.ind *.ilg *.log *.out; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ $(DX_LATEX) refman.tex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ $(MAKEINDEX_PATH) refman.idx; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ $(DX_LATEX) refman.tex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ countdown=5; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ while $(DX_EGREP) 'Rerun (LaTeX|to get cross-references right)' \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ refman.log > /dev/null 2>&1 \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ && test $$countdown -gt 0; do \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ $(DX_LATEX) refman.tex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ countdown=`expr $$countdown - 1`; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ done; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_ps_TRUE@ $(DX_DVIPS) -o ../@PACKAGE@.ps refman.dvi + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@doxygen-pdf: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.pdf + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@@DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.pdf: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ cd @DX_DOCDIR@/latex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ rm -f *.aux *.toc *.idx *.ind *.ilg *.log *.out; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ $(DX_PDFLATEX) refman.tex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ $(DX_MAKEINDEX) refman.idx; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ $(DX_PDFLATEX) refman.tex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ countdown=5; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ while $(DX_EGREP) 'Rerun (LaTeX|to get cross-references right)' \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ refman.log > /dev/null 2>&1 \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ && test $$countdown -gt 0; do \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ $(DX_PDFLATEX) refman.tex; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ countdown=`expr $$countdown - 1`; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ done; \ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_COND_pdf_TRUE@ mv refman.pdf ../@PACKAGE@.pdf + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@.PHONY: doxygen-run doxygen-doc $(DX_PS_GOAL) $(DX_PDF_GOAL) + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@.INTERMEDIATE: doxygen-run $(DX_PS_GOAL) $(DX_PDF_GOAL) + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@doxygen-run: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@doxygen-doc: doxygen-run $(DX_PS_GOAL) $(DX_PDF_GOAL) + +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@@DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag: $(DX_CONFIG) $(pkginclude_HEADERS) +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ rm -rf @DX_DOCDIR@ +@DX_COND_doc_TRUE@ $(DX_ENV) $(DX_DOXYGEN) $(srcdir)/$(DX_CONFIG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/NEWS b/doc/NEWS new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bef3cd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/NEWS @@ -0,0 +1,1633 @@ +Version 4.8.30 + +- Core + + * Support PCRE2 as search engine (via ----with-search-engine=pcre2) (#4450) + * Implement panelization buffers for both file panels (#4370) + +- VFS + + * tar: support extended headers (including long file names and sparse files) (#1952, #2201) + * extfs helpers: replace "perl -w" with "use warnings" (MidnightCommander/mc#174) + * extfs/patchfs: be more specific in error message (#4485) + +- Editor + + * Add syntax highlighting: + - Jenkinsfiles (#4469) + - B language (#4470) + * Improve syntax highlighting: + - ECMAScript (MidnightCommander/mc#172) + - ECMAScript in TypeScript (MidnightCommander/mc#172) + - use diff syntax highlighting for git commit messages (COMMIT_EDITMSG) (MidnightCommander/mc#85) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#4426, #4438) + * Filehighlight: + - recognize vsix files as zip files (MidnightCommander/mc#171) + * Skin updates: + - julia256 (#4441, #4445) + +- Fixes + + * Usage of 'sed' in build system/makefiles is not portable (#4459, #4466) + * Unportable '$<' in Makefiles (#4460) + * FTBFS if ncurses used without --with-ncurses-includes= configure parameter (#4462) + * Ncurses library is duplicated in MCLIBS (#4463, #4465) + * FTBFS without ext2fs attributes support (#4464) + * Wrong sort order after swapping panels (#4432) + * Incorrect time delimiter in the copy/move progress window (#4437) + * Incorrect redraw of overlapped file panels (#4408) + * Subshell/Command line prompt is empty/missing (#3121) + * Find file: relative ignore directory is applied to the start search directory (#4235) + * Diff viewer: options are not applied on second run (#4486) + * mc.ext.ini: 'Edit' command from 'Default' section is ignored (#4434) + * mc.ext.ini: .md files are not recognized as Markdown ones by extension (#4444) + * mcedit: off-by-one error in paragraph formatting (#4446) + * ftp: incomplete file listing: block and character devices, pipes, sockets are missed (#4472) + * Various typos in the source code (MidnightCommander/mc#177, MidnightCommander/mc#178) + + +Version 4.8.29 + +- Core + + * Add more options for panel filter (#1373): + - "Files only" (#4209) + - "Case sensitive" (#4334) + - "Using shell patterns" + * Continue copy after interrupt (#4409) + * Restore menu accelerator for "Sort order": back to "S"; change menu accelerator for "SFTP link" to "N" (#4373) + * Add support for cross-compilation with PERL path different between --build and --host (#4399) + * Bootstrap with autotools providing direct support for Apple M1 + * Port mc.ext to INI format and rename to mc.ext.ini (#4141, #3742, #3191) + - Implement compound (AND) conditions (Type/Shell and Type/Regex pairs) to disambiguate overloaded extensions + - There is no fallback to previous mc.ext format + +- Editor + + * Change location of all user's syntax related stuff to ~/.local/share/mc/syntax/ directory (#4413) + * syntax/Syntax: document location of syntax files (#4320) + * Improvements of syntax highlighting: + - YAML: improve multiline blocks highliting (#4059) + * New syntax highlighting: + - Privoxy (https://www.privoxy.org) actions files (#4384) + - TOML (Tom's Obvious Minimal Language) (#4412) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#4357, #4397, #4425) + * sqlite3 view: use 'immutable=1' URI parameter to prevent leaving wal/shm files after viewing sqlite database (#4369) + * Support of contour terminal emulator (https://github.com/contour-terminal/contour) (#4396) + * mc.ext.ini: clarify regex for makefiles (#4419) + * Remove empty hints translations by setting 5% threshold (#3608) + +- Fixes + + * Fail to build with only SFTP network VFS is enabled (#4420) + * Crash on quick view of archives (#4398) + * Wrong description of --enable-configure-args option (#4400) + * Wrong version sort (#4374) + * No subshell if subshell is initializing more than 1 second (#3121) + * Filter keyboard shortcut only affects left panel (#4383) + * File type check does not work with special character in filename (#4377) + * Select files keeping the right mouse button pressed doesn't select all files (#4381) + * Cannot scroll panel listing upwards using mouse (#4119) + * "Directory Compare" doesn't correct work with panelization (#3220) + * Wrong decompressing of zip files in quick view panel (#4404) + * mc.ext: 'include' keyword (for command class def) have no effect if it was defined before 'Include' keyword (for command def) (#2773) + * mcedit: infinite loop when deleting a macro (#4391) + * mcviewer: segfault when switching from raw to parsed mode and back (#4401) + * Broken handling of zip archives (#4368) + * FISH subshell: commands don't work after window resize (#4372) + * FTP VFS: doesn't reconnect to server after timeout (#3670) + * FISH VFS: cannot remove non-empty directory (#4364) + * EXTFS VFS: segfault if archive contains file(s) in the parent directory (#4422, #4427) + * Tests: variable redeclaration in filevercmp_test5 (#4358) + + +Version 4.8.28 + +- VFS + + * Remove SMB support (#1) + +- Editor + + * Add syntax highlighting: + - Ngspice/SPICE (http://ngspice.sourceforge.net/) (#4316, #4319) + - DOT/Graphviz (https://graphviz.org/doc/info/lang.html) (#4322) + +- Viewer + + * Support file/dir macros from mc.ect for standalone viewer (#4150) + +- Misc + + * Minimal version of "check" utility is 0.9.10. + * Code cleanup (#4270, #4330) + * Support Shift+Fn keys for KiTTY (#4325) + * Filehighlight: + - graphical formats: avif, jp2, jxl, heic, heif, psb, psd (#4328) + - Markdown (#4351) + +- Fixes + + * FTBFS with ncurses build with --disable-widec (#4200) + * There is no exit on Ubuntu PPC64 big endian (#3887) + * Segfault on change panel mode (#4323) + * Accelerator conflict in Left/Right menu (#4284) + * move a lot of files across filesystems is slow (#4287) + * mc.ext: wrong order of rules: general matches are made before more specific ones (#4273) + * mc.ext: compressed man pages are shown unformatted (#4272) + * ext.d/misc.sh: invoking /bin/cat on systems that have no /bin/cat (like NixOS) (#4298) + * mcedit: errors in syntax definitions (#4286) + * VFS: FISH: when uploading a symbolic link, it creates both the link and its target (#4281) + * VFS: SFTP: timestamps are not preserved for uploaded symlink (#4285) + * VFS: EXTFS: incorrect test of isoinfo (#4326) + * Typo in skin files (#3146) + + +Version 4.8.27 + +- Core + + * Minimal version of Autoconf is 2.64 (#3603) + * Minimal version of Automake is 1.12 (#3986) + * Minimal version of Gettext is 0.18.2 (#3603) + * Minimal version of libssh2 is 1.2.8 (#4259) + * Reimplement version detection (#3603, #4249) + * Significantly reduce rebuilt time after version change (#2252, #4266) + * Drop automatic migration of configuration from ~/.mc to XDG-based directories (#3682) + * zsh: support custom configuration file: ~/.local/share/mc/.zshrc (#4203) + * Widgets: implement WST_VISIBLE state to show/hide widgets (#2919) + * "Find File": add "Follow symlinks" option (#2020) + +- VFS + + * extfs: support unrar-6 (#4154) + * extfs: support official 7z binary (7zz) (#4239) + * ftpfs: apply file list parser from lftp project (#2841, #3174) + +- Editor + + * Word completion: get candidates from all open files (#4160) + * etags: get rid of hardcoded list length and window width (#4132) + * Update syntax files: + - Python (#4140) + * Add syntax highlighting: + - Verilog and SystemVerilog header files (#4215) + - JSON (#4250) + - openrc-run scripts (#4246) + +- Misc + + * Code clean up (#4179, #4173, #4269) + * Filehighlight of c++ and h++ files as sources (#4194) + * Filehighlight of JSON files as documents (#4250) + * Support of alacritty terminal emulator (https://github.com/alacritty/alacritty) (#4248) + * Support of foot terminal emulator (https://codeberg.org/dnkl/foot) (#4251) + * Support of (alt+)shift+arrow keys in st terminal emulator (st.suckless.org) (#4267) + * Mouse support in screen: don't check $DISPLAY variable (#4233) + * mc.ext: support fb2 e-books (#4167) + * ext.d: use mediainfo to view info about various media files (#4167) + * Remove OS/distro-specific package-related stuff from source tree (#4217) + +- Fixes + + * FTBFS against NCurses on OS X 10.9.5 (#4181) + * Segfault on dialog before panels get visible (#4244) + * Crash if shadow is out of screen (build against NCurses) (#4192) + * Crash in search (#4222) + * Crash on startup with enabled subshell in FreeBSD (workaround) (#4213) + * Hang on start randomly with zsh as subshell (#4198) + * If command line is invisible it's partially displayed (#4182) + * Broken handling of zip archives (#4180, #4183) + * Broken handling of jar files as zip archives (#4223) + * Timestamps of symlinks, sockets, fifos, etc are not preserved after copy/move (#3985) + * %view action in the user menu doesn't work on no-exec filesystem (#4242) + * Hardlinks are not colored by file type or extension (#3375) + * mcedit: silent macro makes terminal disrupted (#4171) + * mcedit: disrupting of TAGS file path (#4207) + * vfs: unable to browse compressed tar archives (#4191) + * sftpfs vfs: CVE-2021-36370: server fingerprint isn't verified (discovered by AUT-milCERT during an audit of open source software) (#4259) + * ftpfs vfs: month of file is always January (#4260) + * Tests: log files are written by libcheck and automake simultaneously (#3986) + + +Version 4.8.26 + +- Core + + * Support file names of any length (#4145) + * Implement persistent command line buffer for subshell (bash >= 4, zsh and fish are supported) (#4114, #4124, #4126) + * Implement shadows of dialog windows and menus (#4102) + * Allow running clipboard commands if DISPLAY is not set (#4133) + * Add support of "alacritty", "tmux", and "tmux-256color" terminals (#4149) + +- VFS + + * Support wim archive format (using wimtools (https://wimlib.net/)) (#4100) + * Support pak archive format (using unar (https://theunarchiver.com/)) (#4130) + +- Editor + + * Add Swift syntax highlighting (MidnightCommander/mc#159) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#4103, #4127, #4131) + * ext.d/sound.sh: replace xmms with audacious (part of #4127) + * mc.ext: improve handling of compressed content (#4128, #2117) + * mc.ext: add support for OpenDocument flax xml formats: fodt, fods, fodp, fodg (#4157) + * Filehighlight fodg, fodp, fods, fodt, odg files as documents + * modarcon16 skin: make consistent with whitespaces (#4158) + +- Fixes + + * 0000 permissions are not preserved on copy/move file (#4155) + * Chattr dialog doesn't work with mouse (#4104) + * Wrong copy ETA displaying if "Follow links" option is set (#4101) + * C-i ("change panel" shortcut) has no effect (#4107) + * C-l ("refresh screen") and A-` ("switch screens") shortcuts have no effect (#4142, #4153) + * Cancel of history or completion window marks input lines as modified (#4152) + * Unexpected subshell execution at panel switch (#2110) + * Lock up after pressing Tab in subshell (#2269) + * tcsh: error: "The Commander can't change to the directory" (#4120) + * vfs: extfs: cannot handle files with name started with dash or space (#4077) + * vfs: hang on accessing files within a nested VFS for first 60 seconds (#4147) + * vfs: lose content of the current directory on a mounted CIFS share (on Linux >= 5.1) (#3987) + + +Version 4.8.25 + +- Core + + * Minimal version of GLib is 2.30.0 + * Avoid subshell warning for standalone mcedit/mcview/mcdiffview run from mc (#4056) + * Implement chattr command (change ext{2,3,4}fs extended attributes). Default shortcut is "C-x e" (#3847) + * Implement a WGroup widget -- a base class for widgets which contain other widgets (#2919, #4075) + * Implement key bindings for radiobuttons (#212) + +- VFS + + * RPM VFS improvements: + - Support weak dependency tags: ENHANCES, SUGGESTS, RECOMMENDS, SUPPLEMENTS (#4091) + +- Editor + + * Improvements of syntax highlighting: + - php (#4060) + - tcl: add shebangs with wish and tclsh (#4062) + - Cobol (#1987) + - Verilog/SystemVerilog (#4087) + * New syntax highlighting: + - Kotlin (#4088) + - ino (Arduino IDE and a number of other IDEs) (#4098) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#4050, #4085) + * Add support for opus audio (#4061) + * mc-wrapper: don't cd to the same directory (#3355) + * Improve archive support: more binaries to view archive content (#4086) + - lha: jlha, lhasa + - arj: 7za + - cab: 7za + - zip; 7z + - zipx: 7za + - iso: 7za + * Clean up in video.sh handler (#4045) + - RealPlayer is a proprietary application which can't be installed in most distros and has long been abandoned. + - gtv hasn't been developed since 2003. + - xanim barely plays anything. + * Various fixups and updates of man page + +- Fixes + + * FTBFS on OSes w/o O_CLOEXEC (#4052) + * FTBFS with glib2 >= 2.63.3 (#4053) + * Undefined "__linux__" macro on non-Linux systems (#4058) + * Mouse is not handled with ncurses-6 (#3954) + * Mouse is not handled with S-Lang on some old terminal emulators (#4063) + * Terminal size is always 80x24 in subshell on Solaris 11.4 SPARC (#4099) + * Double clicking on empty area of file panel executes last item (#3722) + * Garbage in input line history (#4064) + * Speed of file copy is not displayed for single file (#4081) + * mcedit: blank screen with invisible error (#4057) + * mcedit: broken syntax highlighting for shell scripts (#4054) + * VFS: broken browsing of .deb packages (#4055) + * mc.lib installed twice (#4070) + + +Version 4.8.24 + +- Core + + * Drop bundled gettext (#3629) + * Implement the file edit and view history. Default shortcut is alt-shift-e (#2733) + * Enable subshell in standalone mceditor, mcviewer, and mcdiffviewer (#3380) + * Refactoring of SIGWINCH handling (#117, #4019) + * Prevent run/open files with double right click (#4016) + * Improve support of Windows 1251 encoding on Solaris (#3992) + * Support binary reproducible builds (via --disable-configure-args configure option) (#4031) + +- VFS + + * sftpfs: support keyboard interactive authentication (#3921) + * uc1541 extfs: update up to 3.3 version (#3936) + +- Editor + + * Syntax: + - add yabasic (Yet Another BASIC) syntax highlighting (#4005) + - improve YAML syntax highlighting (#4010) + - add "https://" to Debian sources.list syntax (#4018) + - add .desktop files (#4022) + - improve RPM spec file syntax highlighting (#4037) + - improve Debian sources.list syntax highlighting (#4041) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3997, #4030, #4038, #4039) + * menu.mc: handle symbolic links to compressed archives (#4009) + * File highlighting updates (#4015) + - part - partial files, e.g. used by many download managers ([temp]) + - apk - Android packages, deb - Debian packages ([archive]) + - ts - MPEG-TS streams ([media]) + * New skins: + - julia256: a dark skin with calm colors and good contrast. + +- Fixes + + * Compile failure on AIX 7.2 (#4033) + * Compile failure on OS X 10.9 (#4035) + * Enter key works as Down one in menu (#4006) + * Menubar: incorrect mouse click coordinate (#4013) + * Rotating dash generates way too much output (#3859) + * Totals aren't computed before move of a single directory (#4027) + * Editor: unusable dynamic paragraphing (#3996) + * VFS: iso9660 does not report listing errors (#3993) + * VFS: extfs: nested archives are not removed from temporary directory (#4000) + + +Version 4.8.23 + +- Core + + * Modify "File exists" query dialog (#3935): + - change layout + - rename "Update" button to "If older" + - add new "If smaller" button": overwrite file with smaller one + - add "Don't overwrite with zero length file" checkbox + * Speed up of large directory structures delete (#3958) + * Support key binding for menu (#212) + +- Editor + + * Expanded syntax highlighting rules (#3975): + - expanded file name regexp for sh.syntax + - use ini.syntax for systemd configuration files + * Syntax updates: + - shell (#3981) + - ebuild (#3988) + - RPM spec (#3991) + +- Viewer + + * Quick one-off backwards search with N. New action SearchOppositeContinue for key bind (default is shift-n) (#3452) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3955) + * Use Geeqie (a fork of GQview) as main image viewer, fallback to GQview (#3962) + * File highlighting updates (#3966) + - .go, .s: highlight as source + - .m4v: highlighting as media + * New skins: + - featured-plus: featured skin with alternative directory and file select/mark colors (#3973) + +- Fixes + + * Compilation fail on AIX (#3960) + * Incorrect file version sort (#3965, #3905) + * Garbage in the hardlink error creation message window (#3990) + * Cannot shell, or FTP, or SFTP link when the file panel is tree, or info, or quick view (#3948) + * Failed gpm connect attempt ... for vc /dev/tty0 (#3208, #3614) + * Incorrect include/editor order in mc.ext (#3965) + * mcedit: incorrect C/C++ syntax highlighting in some cases (#3487) + * Unknown type name 'sighandler_t' on Illumos (#3971) + + +Version 4.8.22 + +- Core + + * Support BTRFS's file clone operation (#1983) + * Find file: show pattern and content in the results window title (#3453) + * Find file: remember state (empty or not) of Content field (#3924) + * Improve support IBM i (#3927) + * Improve handling of hard link creation errors (#3678) + * Support user-defined prompt in the Fish subshell (#3944) + +- VFS + + * sftp: preserve atime and mtime (#3917) + +- Editor + + * man page cleanup (#3918) + * syntax: + - PHP - highlight keyword 'null' (#3920) + - Meson - initial implementation (#3940) + +- Misc + + * ext.d: use MPV as a fallback for mplayer -identify (#3919) + * ext.d: improve recognition of MS Office formats (#3929) + * Code cleanup (#3915) + * Cleanup hint files + +- Fixes + + * Won't compile for Apple (#3930) + * "Cannot create target file" when target has backslash space in the name (#3923) + * Quiet single file overwrite (#3908) + * Show error message for each not-installed program when view documents in MS Word and Excel formats (#3926) + * Crash when trying some sftp connections (#3937) + * Crash when return to filemanager from subshell (#3943) + + +Version 4.8.21 + +- Core + + * Cancel Chmod/Chown/Advanced chown operation for large group of files when operation is not permitted (#3850) + * Mouse support in the "Advanced chown" dialog window (#3148) + * File highlighting by extension is case insensitive by default (#1620) + * Safe file overwrite (#3913) + +- VFS + + * Support zstd compression format (#3906) + +- Editor + + * Syntax: + - Rust support (#3884) + - JavaScript modules support (#3890) + - Improve Markdown support (#3893) + +- Misc + + * Add JavaScript module support to `filehighlight.ini` (MidnightCommander/mc#132) + * Add Excel xlsx file format support to `mc.ext.in` (MidnightCommander/mc#135) + * i18n of argument type names in --help blocks (#3879) + * Code cleanup: (#3857, #3914) + +- Fixes + + * Fail to link to ncurses built as two libraries: ncurses+tinfo (#3880) + * Garbage in displaying of summary of file sizes for selected files (#3883) + * "Compute totals" unnecessarily done for moves (#3149, #3908) + * mc.ext: allow Java class files to be viewed even if JAD isn't on PATH (MidnightCommander/mc#134) + * mcedit: broken extended key mode (#3897) + * mcedit doesn't save all opened files (#3898) + * extfs: sftps: -31 SFTP Protocol Error when transferring file (#3406) + * extfs: rpm: truncated script content in the viewer (#3865) + * extfs: rpm helper misses CONFLICTS field (#3789) + + +Version 4.8.20 + +- Core + + * Rename key bindings: + - [main].PanelListingSwitch -> [panel].CycleListingFormat + - [main].PanelListingChange -> [main].SetupListingFormat + * Speed up of UTF-8 normalization for frequent cases (#3616) + +- VFS + + * extfs helpers tester: + - diff of failed tests is now included in output to ease bug reporting (#3784) + +- Editor + + * Syntax: + - ES2015 support (#3793) + - TypeScript support (#3794) + - Ada 95 updates (#3804) + - Apache Hive QL support (#3828) + - SQL & PHP keyword updates (MidnightCommander/mc#129) + - Simplification of case insensitive file name patterns in /usr/share/mc/syntax/Syntax file (#3829) + - Markdown (initial support) (#3864) + - Protocol Buffers and gRPC support (#3868) + * Add %c (cursor offset from BOF) support for user menu macros (#3867) + +- Misc + + * Unify curses initialization for various curses implementations (#3697) + * Highlight txz extension as archive like tgz, etc. (#3782) + * Add new media extensions to `filehighlight.ini` (#3834) + +- Fixes + + * Wrong --help message for mcview, mcedit and mcdiff (#3805) + * Compression from menu broken due to bad quoting (#3840) + * `--with-homedir` gives "yes" as config directory (#3836) + * External panelize: opening a file with an absolute path fails (#2942) + * Filter isn't cleared when entering empty string (#3813) + * Panelization is not kept while switching panel listing mode (#3810) + * Cannot tab out of a QuickView panel (#3815) + * Cannot use the F10 key in a QuickView panel (#3816) + * Wrong INPUT_COMPLETE_CD flag handling in the QuickDialog engine (#3870) + * mcview: file interpreted as latin1 instead of utf8 (#3783) + * mcview: incomplete read of filtering data (#3817) + * mcview: search doesn't grow file as much as needed (#3819, #3855) + * mcview: goto doesn't grow file as much as needed (#3826) + * mcview: quick view panel: crash on slow startup while switching panel mode (#3846) + * mcedit: fix broken encoding into UTF-8 for 8-bit displays (#3843) + * mcedit: incorrect %f macro substitution in the user menu (#3861) + * man pages: wrong paths of mc.hint and mc.hlp (#3806) + * subshell: fix broken tcsh 6.20+ cd escaping (#3852) + * VFS: incremental tar doesn't contain empty directories (#2297) + * VFS: incremental tar: wrong directories owner for tar --numeric-owner -g (#3709) + * VFS: timestamps not being preserved due to uninitialized struct stat st_[acm]tim.tv_nsec (#3821) + * VFS: ftp: can't retrieve password from .netrc when user is in URL (#3869) + * VFS: tests: locale issue causing helpers using 'sort' to fail (#3787) + * VFS: tests: unportable 'echo' use causing one rpm helper test to fail (#3786) + * Spelling errors in the manual page (#3839) + + +Version 4.8.19 + +- Core + + * Replace $MC_HOME with $MC_PROFILE_ROOT (#3684) + * Allow rebind TAB key to change panel (#3672) + * Support for True Color (16 millions colors) (#3145) + * Color aliases in skin files (#3711) + +- VFS + + * Support timestamps with nanosecond precision for copy/move operations (#3575) + * Introduce EXTFS helpers tester (#3730, #3744, #3752, #3753, #3751) + * Teach u7z to parse archive listings w/o sizes and/or dates (#2707) + * Teach rpm helper about transaction scripts (#3750) + * Fix hp48, uace & uarc extfs which used an obsolete date format (#3729, #3747) + +- Editor + + * Syntax: + - updates of HTML and ebuild highlighting + - highlight *.t (Perl test) files as Perl scripts + - disassociate .cl file extension from LISP syntax (#3691) + * Add syntax highlighting: + - OpenCL (#3690) + - OpenShadingLanguage (#3762) + - R + - YAML (#3293) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3693, #3703, #3721, #3763) + * Add true color skins: 'Four seasons' (#3724) + * Activate `--enable-tests` by default if `check` is found (#3708) + * Added new skin: YADT (MidnightCommander/mc#115) + +- Fixes + + * Segfault on switching left panel to Info (#3700) + * Broken compatibility with ncurses (#3697) + * Setting MC_HOME makes mc ignore ~/.bashrc (#3684) + * mc_tmpdir() use a buffer of only 64 characters (#3736) + * Some bugs in the parsing of hexadecimal search patterns (#3694) + * Hexadecimal search fails on binary data (#3589) + * Broken file list resorting on double click on panel header line (#3715) + * Wrong dialog resizing and positioning (#3714, #3723) + * Widget's 'disabled' status is not toggled immediately (#3716) + * Last item of 'Options/Layout/Horizontal' radiobuttons remains highlighted (#3717) + * 'Options/Layout/Equal split' checkbox gets reverted (#3718) + * Panels: cannot show more than one "column" in user defined listing mode (#3757) + * Mix of MSG_NOTIFY and MSG_FOCUS messages (#3731) + * skins: 'window-state-char' and 'window-close-char' are parsed as colors (#3710) + * Pressing <right> and <left> in the hotlist dialog doesn't refresh it (#3775) + * mcview: an error message about bad regexp isn't shown (#3720) + * mcedit: fix etags filenames parsing (#3698) + * mcedit: fix mouse active area for maximize / close buttons (#3774) + * mcedit: frames (MDI interface) don't reflect the focus state (#3766) + * mcedit: frames (MDI interface) sometimes obscure the buttonbar (#3760) + * mcedit doesn't show search error messages when searching backwards (#3735) + * help viewer: tab characters handled incorrectly (#3754) + * VFS: incorrect zoo archive listing (#3696) + * VFS: segfault in VFSs not setting block size in stat (#3749) + + +Version 4.8.18 + +- Core + + * Alt-Enter, Ctrl-Enter and Ctrl-Shift-Enter shortcuts are bindable in file manager (#3075) + * Internals: + - Refactoring of widget subsystem (#2919, #3632) + +- Editor + + * Add syntax highlighting: + - GLSL (#3683) + - CUDA (#3686) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3641, #3652) + +- Fixes + + * Build failure on FreeBSD (#3643) + * Incompatibility with NetBSD curses (#3665) + * Memory leaks (#3637) + * Subshell output lost on window resize under tmux, GNU screen (#3639) + * --with-subshell=optional does not work (#3642) + * Backward search is not interruptible (#3648) + * "Output lines" has no effect (#3655) + * Wrong handling of mouse clicks in long listing mode (#3661) + * Panelize resets marks on marked files in many cases (#3663) + * Cannot change directory in the active panel in some cases (#3669) + * Filtered View doesn't work (#3646, #3660) + * mcedit: don't kill bookmarks when open file from "Find File" dialog (#3668) + * man pages use "the MC" instead of "MC" (#3644) + + +Version 4.8.17 + +- Core + + * Minimal version of Gettext is 0.18.1 (#1885) + * Optimization of copy/move operations (use adaptive buffer as in coreutils) (#2193) + * Recognize csh as tcsh (#2742) + * Centered scrolling of file panel (#3130) + * Internals: + - Switch to new high-level mouse API (#3571) + +- VFS + + * FISH helpers: remove executable bit (#3610) + +- Editor + + * Improvements of syntax highlighting: + - F90 (#3618) + - Java (MidnightCommander/mc#95) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3598, #3607) + * Install mc.keymap as a symlink to mc.default.keymap (#3609) + * File highlight: add more common file formats + +- Fixes + + * Segfault due to incorrect value of SHELL environment variable (#3606) + * Segfault when copying files under FreeBSD 9.3 (#3617) + * Segfault when entering into some cpio archives (#3621) + * Subshell output lost on window resize under tmux, GNU screen (#3639) + * Subshell cursor position lost after window resizing (#3640) + * Listbox no longer scrolls when dragging outside widget (#3559) + * VFS: extfs: incorrect date parsing in unzip (#3622) + * VFS: extfs: buffer overflow (#3605) + * VFS: patchfs: syntax error (#3620) + * VFS: fish: mistakes in ls Perl helper (#3611) + + +Version 4.8.16 + +- Core + + * Support for ash + bugfixes for bash, fish (#2742) + * Find file: empty file name matches any file name (#3593) + * Find file: empty value of "Content" is used instead of "Search for content" checkbox to disable search for content (#3594) + * Listbox: don't wraparound on mouse scroll (#3554) + * Internals: + - Listbox: various fixups (#3569: #3562, #3563, #3565, #3161) + - Split MSG_ACTION into MSG_ACTION and MSG_NOTIFY (#3566) + +- VFS + + * Support lzip compression format (#2673, #1541) + * Support lz4 compression format (#3523) + * patchfs: support xz compression (#3443) + * Update uc1541 version (#3527) + * Add mc.ext patterns for initramfs / initrd (#3115) + +- Editor + + * Add golang syntax (MidnightCommander/mc#84) + * Update Puppet syntax (MidnightCommander/mc#86) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3555, #3547, #3587) + * Better subshell documentation (#3556) + * Fixes to the English man pages by Denys Vlasenko + +- Fixes + + * Insufficient quoting in `mc.menu` (#2947) + * Broken ./configure --without-internal-edit (#3601) + * Memory leaks (#3547, #3561, #3567, #3572) + * No preallocation if appending during file copy (#3577) + * Cannot set mini-format for "brief" listing type (#3588) + * Info panel: incorrect inode information in some cases (#3214) + * Info panel: wrong device name with symbolic link (#3412) + * Info panel: buffer overflow (#3582) + * Regression: match filename, not full path in mc.ext (#3578) + * Broken case insensitive search in non-unicode locale (#3491) + * Error message prefixed with no sense "0:" (#3269) + * mcedit: buffer overflow (#3579) + * mcedit: "Lower case selection" command in User Menu (#3586) + * mcedit: close on ctrl-g (#3557) + * mcview: "Not found" result isn't reported in some cases (#3543) + * VFS: isofs doesn't show .dotfiles (#3537) + * VFS: isofs: cannot copy file from iso when Joliet without RockRidge is used (#2851) + * VFS: extfs/unzip: enter into zip file fails with "inconsistent extfs archive" (#3433) + * VFS: SFTP: various bugs (#3581) + * VFS: FISH: provide major/minor info for block/char devices (#3599) + * Bashism in gitfs+ extfs helper (#3379) + * Non-portable invocation of man (#3509) + * mc-wrapper leaves MC_USER set (#3550) + * Broken silent opening of files in background (#3574) + * Run `identify` on JPEGs even if `exif` is not installed (#3568) + + +Version 4.8.15 + +- Core + + * Minimal version of GLib is 2.26.0 + * Use the PATH environment variable to search for the executable when opening pipe (#3444) + * Support more than 2 (up to 9) columns in file panel in brief mode (#3212) + * Clarify file sorting in "Unsorted" mode (#3496) + * WGroupbox: respect dialog's colors (#3468) + * Highlight find file's result in internal viewer (#3530) + +- VFS + + * s3 extfs vfs: bugfixes and improvements (#3470, #3502) + +- Editor + + * Add hidden option to choose full or base file name in the status line (#3445) + * Improvements of syntax highlighting: + - Lua (#3471) + - PKGBUILD (#3484) + +- Misc + + * Text alignment in Info panel (#3155) + * Select of menu file edit: change default button to "User" (#3493) + * Recognize .gmo files as well as .mo ones (#3422) + * Fix mc.pot comment tripping up Transifex and unportable inplace sed (#3479) + * A lot of code clean up (#3420, #3424, #3426, #3427, #3428, #3429, #3430, #3431, #3434, #3435, #3437, #3463, #3464, #3465, #3466, #3467, #3494, #3495, #3539) + * Documentation updates: + - Spanish man and help: Diff Viewer section and minor fixes (#3477) + - VFS garbage collection (#3472) + +- Fixes + + * Various memory leaks (#3438, #3439, #3440, #3457, #3458, #3459, #3460, #3461, #3462, #3475, #3520, #3521, #3522) + * Linux kernel-specific segfault on startup (#3441) + * Lost of Panelize contents in some cases (#3032, #3489, #3498, #3507) + * Wrong highlight of search result in case of "Regular expression" and "Whole words" (#3524) + * "Whole words" search works only in Normal mode (#3525) + * View find results doesn't jump to match line if file is too short to scroll page (#3530) + * SFTP VFS: segfault (#3456) + * Segfault in "Find file" due to invalid UTF-8 sequences (#3449) + * Bash variable 'PROMPT_COMMAND' in pantheon-terminal (#3534) + + +Version 4.8.14 + +- Core + + * Minimal version of GLib is 2.14.0 + * Add new panel binding "SelectExt" to select/unselect files with the same extension as the current file (#3228) + * Speed up of directory size calculation (#3247) + * Support of italic text (#3065) + +- Editor + + * New syntax highlighting support: + - puppet (#3266) + +- Viewer + + * Rewrite mcview's rendering and scrolling (#3250, #3256) + - no more partial lines at the top and failure to scroll when Up or Down is pressed; + - better handling of CJK characters; + - handle combining accents; + - improved nroff support; + - more conventional scrolling behavior at the end of the file. + * Use VIEW_SELECTED_COLOR in plain mode (#3405) + * In QuickView panel, don't pass any chars to command line to avoid unexpected command execution (#3253) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3265, #3262) + * Bind poedit to Edit action for .po files (#3287) + * Better grammar mcedit user menu (#3246) + +- Fixes + + * Fail to build against musl libc (#3267) + * Error compiling with glib 2.20.3 (#3333) + * Overwrite of the PROMPT_COMMAND bash variable (#2027) + * contrib/*.?sh are not recreated after rerun of configure (#3181) + * File rename handles zero-length substitutions incorrectly (#2952) + * Lose files on "Skip" when "Cannot preallocate space for target file" (#3297) + * Info panel can't obtain file system statistics on Solaris (#3277) + * "Shell patterns" broken beyond repair (#2309) + * File selection by patterns uses bytes instead of unicode characters (#2743) + * Copy files doesn't work as expected, when copying to a directory with the special symbol in its name (#3235) + * Wrong order of old_colors table items (#3404) + * Input line: Alt+Backspace on one-letter word erases too much (#3390) + * "Directory scanning" window is too narrow (#3162) + * No Help for User Menu (#3409) + * mcedit: paste from clipboard does not work (#3339) + * mcviewer: hang when viewing broken man page (#2966) + * mcview hex: incorrect highlight when search string not found (#3263) + * mcview hex edit: UTF-8 chars are not updated (#3259) + * mcview hex edit: can't enter certain UTF-8 characters (#3260) + * mcview hex edit: CJK overflow (#3261) + * mcedit: status line doesn't show full path to file (#3285) + * Freeze when copying from one FTP location to another (#358) + + +Version 4.8.13 + +- Core + + * New engine of user-friendly interruption of long-time operations (#2136) + +- Editor + + * Improvements of syntax highlighting: + - CMake (#3216) + - PHP (#3230) + * Translate language names in the spelling assistant dialogue (#3233) + +- Viewer + + * Add separate normal(default) colour pair for viewer (#3204) + * Dealing with utf-8 man pages in view/open (#1539) + * "Goto line" is 1-based now (#3245) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3189, #3223, #3242) + * Add new skins: gray-green-purple256 and gray-orange-blue256 (#3190) + +- Fixes + + * First Backspace/Delete is ignored after mouse click in an input widget (#3225) + * Recursive find file doesn't work on Samba share (#3097) + * Recursive find file doesn't work on Windows NFS share (#3202) + * Incorrect file counter in move operation (#3196, #3209) + * "Directory scanning" window is too narrow (#3162) + * Colon is not recognized inside escape seq in prompt (#3241) + * Quick view doesn't grab focus on mouse click (#3251) + * fish subshell: overridden prompt (#3232, #3237) + * mcviewer: broken switch between raw and parse modes (#3219) + * mcviewer: incorrect percentage in mcview hex mode (#3258) + * RAR VFS incorrectly recognizes UnRAR version (#3240) + * viewbold and viewselected are missing from some skins (#3244) + * Incorrect encoding name for manual page (#3239) + * "User menu -> View manual page" doesn't do coloring (#3243) + + +Version 4.8.12 + +- Core + + * Speed up of file find (#2290) + * If cwd is a symlink it is kept at startup (#3093) + * Improve support of Zsh (#3121, #3124, #3125, #3177) + * Launch external editor/viewer without passing line number (#3117) + * Exit without confirmation by default (#3132) + * Simple user-friendly skin selector (#2165, #3178) + * Use Joliet and RockRidge in ISO9660 image view action (#3187) + +- VFS + + * Use .zip extension as preferred way to recognize ZIP archives (#2857) + +- Editor + + * Configurable selection reset on CK_Store (#3111) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3113, #3151) + * Adjust script permissions to installed ones (#2274) + * Fix name of FSF in add source files (#3167) + * Skin cleanups (#3180, #3184) + * Do not consider "String not found" message as error (#3179) + +- Fixes + + * Broken build with NCurses (#3114) + * Incorrect tilde expansion in copy/rename/move dialog (#3131) + * Advanced chown: Escape on user list accepts value (#3150) + * Toggling hidden files using mouse doesn't update the other panel (#3156) + * Question mark in delete confirmation is on its own line (#3123) + * Popup dialogs wander upwards upon resize (#3173) + * Keypad '*' doesn't work with numlock off (#3133) + * Some inconsistencies in "Learn keys" UI (#3134) + * Unconventional behavior of "Display bits" dialog (#3152) + * Shift-Fn keys don't work in 256-color mode of tmux (#2978) + * mcedit: format paragraph produces inconsistent wrapping (#3119) + * mcedit: file out-of-date check on saving is botched (#3142) + * mcedit: 1st line is shifted after paragraph format (#1666) + * mcedit: trailing newline check applied too early when exiting (#3140) + * Inconsistency of the arrow's direction in the panel header line across skins (#3157) + * Possible segfault while passing messages to widgets (#3116) + * Possible segfault when freeing a VFS (#3116) + * Segfault in cpio VFS while reading corrupted RPM (#3116) + * Segfault in sftpfs VFS when trying to view a file (#3176) + * Incorrect handling of filenames with unrar v5 (#3073) + * FISH VFS: remote panel confused by filenames with '%' (#2983) + * iso9660: xorriso shows only one depth (#3122) + * Nicedark skin looks bad on black-on-white terminals (#3154) + * Incorrect definition of "topmiddle" and "bottommiddle" characters (#3183) + + +Version 4.8.11 + +- Core + + * Live update of panels size when editing layout (#3060) + * Support "Compute totals" option in move file operation (#2075) + +- VFS + + * rpm extfs + - show dependency version (#2812) + - support tar payload (#3064) + - improve support for EPOCH tag (#1588) + - add support for PREINPROG/POSTINPROG/PREUNPROG/POSTUNPROG, VERIFYSCRIPTPROG and TRIGGERSCRIPTS/TRIGGERSCRIPTPROG tags (#1588) + +- Editor + + * Support "bracketed paste mode" of xterm (#2661) + * Clarify Java syntax highlighting (#3057) + +- Misc + + * Print warnings about unknown '--with-' / '--enable-' configure options (#3029) + * Code cleanup and refactoring (#3051, #3066) + +- Fixes + + * FTBFS on GNU Hurd (#3053, #3071) + * Segfault while moving files (#3059, #3105) + * Broken handling of mc command line arguments (#3047) + * Copy/move doesn't work if num_history_items_recorded=0 (#3076) + * No subdir path completion in current dir, if stub is not starting with './' (#3018) + * Deprecated "find -perm +xxx" syntax is used (#3089) + * Home, End, Shift-Fn keys don't work in tmux (#2978) + * Improper [en|dis]abling of layout dialog split adjustment buttons (#3061) + * Bogus strings in 'Confirmation' config dialog (#2271) + * "Configure options" first entry not highlighted (#3084) + * "Setup saved to ~/.config/mc/ini" message is misleading (#3096) + * F3 doesn't work on .so files in FreeBSD 9.x (#3101) + * Typo in mc.lib: "less=%filename +%linenog" instead of "+%lineno" (part of #3044) + * Wrong order of filename and line number for external editor (part of #3044) + * mcedit: tabs are lost when text is pasted (#1797 as part of #2661) + * mcedit: question on large file treats Escape as Yes (#3107) + * Broken case-sensitive search in editor/viewer/diffviewer (#3069) + * Changes to files in nested .zip archives are lost (#3070) + * Incorrect handling of filenames with spaces with unrar v5 (#3073) + * iso9660 VFS: filenames truncating in ISO file listing (#3091) + * vfs_path_from_str_flags() doesn't support VPF_STRIP_HOME (#3098) + * Bright colors are used as background colors in 16-color skins (#3050) + * Various defects in documentation (#3052, #3092) + + +Version 4.8.10 + +- Core + + * Do not link GModule if it is not required (save space on embedded systems) (#2995) + * Behavior of the 'Right' key in the 'Directory hotlist' was changed: now 'Right' key is used only to enter into the group (#3045) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#3035) + +- Fixes + + * Build failure on Cygwin (#3041) + * Broken NCurses detection (#3043) + * Broken handling of mc command line arguments (#3047) + * Cannot enter into zip archive in tar one (#3034) + * Cannot open some jar files + * mcedit: file descriptor leak (#3040) + * mcedit: paragraph format doesn't respect multibyte characters (#2713) + * Crash after entering a wrong SFTP password (#3036) + + +Version 4.8.9 + +- VFS + + * extfs: support unrar-5 (#3015) + * extfs: use xorriso (if exists) for writing into ISO images (#3027) + +- Editor + + * Support unlimited file size (#1743) + +- Misc + + * Lot of code cleanups (#2990, #2071, #2164, #2998, #3003, #3005, #3022) + * Display additional info while viewing (by F3) *.iso files (#2006) + * New skins: + - modarin256: set of 256-color skins from Oliver Lange (#2737) + +- Fixes + + * Fail to link if system lib does not contain strverscmp (#2992) + * Segfault when mc's temporary directory doesn't belong to the correct user (#3021) + * Race condition when creating temporary directory (#3025) + * Mouse doesn't work in screen and tmux (#3011) + * Incorrect file size in copy/move overwrite query dialog (#3000) + * Garbage in subshell prompt (#3001) + * Incorrect WLabel redraw after text change (#2991) + * Find File: "All charsets" options don't work (#3026) + * When an unknown key is pressed, it is interpreted as garbage (#2988) + * Segfault on creating new file in external editor (#3020) + * Rotating dash is not removed when mc finishes reading the directory (#2163) + * mcedit: word completion failed if word to be completed is begun from begin of file (#2245) + * mcview: broken switch between raw and parse modes (#2968) + * Hex viewer: continue search doesn't work (#2706) + * sftpfs: broken SSH aliases (#2923) + + +Version 4.8.8 + +- Core + + * Make copy/move progress dialog window wider up to 2/3 of screen width (#2076) + * Ask file name before create new file in editor (#2585) + * Support newer extended mouse protocol SGR-1006 instead of URXVT-1015 (#2956) + * Allow skip directory scanning before file operation. Print directory count and size in addition to directory name (#2101) + * Add jump support to target line in some external editors and viewers (#2206) + +- Editor + + * Update syntax highlighting: + - Jal programming language (#2855) + - gplink configuration files (.lkr extension) (#2855) + - Makefile with .mak extension (#2896) + - ZSH configuration files (#2950) + - Fortran (#2962) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#2944, #2954) + * Report real compiler in MC_CHECK_ONE_CFLAG instead of 'gcc' + * Hints files now translated via Transifex (#2980) + +- Fixes + + * Segfault in file operation due to unhandled regexp error (#2493) + * Tab completion vs. spaces and escaping (#55)\ + * Special chars are not escaped in autocompletion of filenames (#2626) + * Buttons in the 'Directory hotlist' window are placed incorrectly (#2958) + * Mouse doesn't select text in subshell in native console (#2964) + * Mouse click below non-droppeddown menubar activates menu box (#2971) + * Insufficient quoting and wrong message in user menu (#2947) + * mcedit: floating point exception (division by zero) (#2953) + * mcedit: broken autocompletion (#2957) + * mcview: broken magic mode (#2976) + * Broken opening of .war archives (#2974) + + +Version 4.8.7 + +- Core + + * Minimal GLib version is 2.12.0 + * Implementation of suspend/resume in copy/move file operations (#2111) + * Start of widget subsystem reimplementation (#2919) + +- VFS + + * uc1541 extfs plug-in updated up to version 2.5 (#2935) + +- Editor + + * Reset selection after text paste (only in non-persistent selection mode) (#2660) + * Don't indent blank lines (#303). + * Add .psgi as Perl syntax highlighting (#2912) + * Place cursor after inserted chars (#319) + * Add option in ini file to save spelling language (spell_language=NONE for disable aspell support) (#2914) + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#2888, #1950) + * Minimal "check" utility version is 0.9.8 + * Remove the empty contrib/dist/debian/ since it maintained separately in Debian (#2871) + * mc.ext updates: + - add support of SVG images (#2895) + - add support of .asm file extension (#2892) + - add support of .hh file extension (#2892) + - all file extension for source files now are case insensitive (#2892) + - add support of JNG and MNG images (#2893) + - add support of Gnumeric's spreadsheets (#2894) + - add support of .war archives (#2891) + - make a choice between arj and unarj archivers (#2890) + - make a choice between 7z and 7za archivers (#2890) + - add support of ape, aac and wvm4a media formats (#2767) + - add support of cbr and cbz comic books (#2739) + - add support of epub e-book format (#2739) + - add support of PAR archives (#2739) + - use libreoffice instead of ooffice, if found, to open ODT files (#2723) + - use dvicat if dvi2tty not found to view DVI files (#1686) + - use 'see' utility as default pdf viewer, if found (#1686) + - use 'see' utility to view images in console (#1686) + * Highlight OGV files as media (#2934) + * Added new translations: + - Persian (fa) + - Croatian (hr) + +- Fixes + + * Build failure on Cygwin (#2917) + * Fail to check ncurses library if --with-ncurses-inc and --with-ncurses-libs options are used (#2926) + * Crash on Solaris while trying to copy a file (#2906) + * CVE-2012-4463: Does not sanitize MC_EXT_SELECTED variable properly (#2913) + * Attributes of existing directories are never preserved when copying (#2924) + * Broken path completion on paths starting with ~/ (#2898) + * Terminal settings are not changed when window is resized (#2198) + * Enter into symlink to compressed patch shows empty patch (#2910) + * Test failure on Cygwin due to incorrect linkage flag (#2918) + * Non-portable test (#2883) + + +Version 4.8.6 + +- Fixes + + * mcedit: two-columns extra offset of cursor after tab character (#2881) + * diffviewer: cannot open file if name contains '$' (#2873) + + +Version 4.8.5 + +- Core + + * Implemented case-insensitive patterns in mc.ext bindings (#2250) + +- Editor + + * Code refactoring and cleanup (#1977) + +- Diff viewer + + * Bidirectional merge (F5 merge left-to-right, F15 - merge right-to-left) (#2863) + +- Misc + + * Syntax highlighting news and updates: + - update assembler.syntax: x86 AMD64 registers highlighting (#2542) + - new cmake.syntax: preliminary and incomplete syntax file for CMakeLists.txt files (#2084) + - new dlink.syntax: syntax highlighting for D-Link switches command set (#2649) + - update properties.syntax: more nice look-and-feel (#1869) + * mc.ext enhancement (#2103): + - use chm_http text-mode handler for CHM files + - play sounds only from videos in text mode + - use pdftotext -layout -nopgbrk switches + - try to use elinks before links for HTML + - soffice2html text-mode handler for SXW files + - wvHtml text-mode handler for doc files + - xlhtml text-mode handler for XLS files + - ppthtml text-mode handler for PPT/PPS files + - open=view+pager fallback (noX) for PostScript, PDF, OD[PST] and DVI + - standardized $DISPLAY checks + * File extension support: + - SQLite database files (#2103) + - compiled Java files (*.class) (#2103) + - m4a for MP4 containers with audio data in the Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) or its own Apple Lossless (ALE, ALAC) formats (#2869) + - .ogm extension was deprecated in favor of .ogv (#2664) + +- Fixes + + * Bad EXTHELPERSDIR substitution if --prefix is not set (#2849) + * Partially broken loading of user-defined keymap file (#2848) + * Enter on directory named '~' goes to the home one (#2874) + * Cannot Copy/Move files with filename encoding change (#2791) + * Cannot view compressed files named like log.1.gz (with digit in name) (#2852) + * Panel is not refreshed if panel history is called using mouse (#2854) + * Duplicate entities in panel with 'tree view' mode (#2835) + * Broken synchronization with filelist and tree panels (#2862) + * Standalone mcedit doesn't load saved file position (#2853) + * mcedit segfaults when aspell (en) dictionary is not installed (#2856) + * mcedit segfaults after "Back from declaration" call (#2859) + * mcedit: unable to save changes in "Safe save" mode(#2832) + * Segfault when viewing HTML files with "mc -v" (#2858) + * Broken 'Enter' action on a rpm file containing space character in filename (#2838) + * extfs: uc1541 broken handling (#2864) + * mc.ext: OGV format handled as audio (#2869) + + +Version 4.8.4 + +- Core + + * Use xdg-open by default in mc.ext.in if present to open files, fallback on current scheme otherwise (#2118) + * Improve of mouse event handling in dialogs (#2817) + * Show extended info about compiled-in paths for internal/external macros in the "mc -F" output (2495) + +- VFS + + * Added SFTP support (#1535) + +- Editor + + * Multieditor: allow edit many files in one mcedit window (#2261, #2839) + * Aspell support for spell check (#2788) + +- Viewer + + * Handle CK_FileNext/CK_FilePrev actions inside mcviewer (#2814) + +- Misc + + * Tweak and cleanup of code in case of --disable-charset option usage (#2827) + * File extension support: + - .gem - rubygems (#2797) + - .cpio.xz - compressed cpio archives (#2798) + - .webm - WebM video (#2746) + - .lib - gputils artifacts (#2751) + +- Fixes + + * Build failure on FreeBSD 6 (#2808) + * src/filemanager/filegui.c does not compile on Solaris due to missing macros (#2825) + * Loss of data on copy to full partition (#2829) + * Crash at Chown command (#2784) + * Crash when creating relative symlink (#2787) + * Misinterpretation of dirs as command line arguments (#2783, #2805) + * Number of panelized files was limited to 127 (#2813) + * CK_History removes CK_HistoryNext entries (#2313) + * URL with port was stored wrong in history (#2833) + * Can't find 00 (zeroes) in patterns in hex search (#2795) + * Hotkey conflicts in 'Search' dialog (#2843) + * Error message when entering into compressed tar and cpio archives (#2785) + * Garbage directory listing in ftpfs (#2800) + * Incomplete sand256 skin (#2807) + * mcedit scripts are installed as data files (#1437) + * Fails to build from source with --enable-tests (#2786) + * Tests failure on PowerPC,S390,S390x (#2804) + * Fail to compile if --without-vfs configure option specified (#2834) + * do_panel_cd: FTBFS with --enable-tests on [kfreebsd-i386,kfreebsd-amd64,ia64,armhf] (#2803) + + +Version 4.8.3 + +- Misc + + * Code cleanup (#2780) + +- Fixes + + * Broken support of XDG_* shell variables (#1851) + * Segmentation fault while background copying (#2663) + * MC ignores second directory argument (#2762) + * Interpretation of LANG variable needs to be case insensitive (#2386) + * Cannot copy zero-length files with "Preallocate space" option (#2755) + * Problem in the Copy operation with unchecked the "Preserve attributes" option (#2278) + * * Cursor position reset after update when panel is panelized, but doesn't (#2766) + * File selection reset after exit from the archive in the root (#2776) + * Hotlist: broken newly added entries if old-style path is present (#2753) + * Can't rebind Fx keys in the file manager (#2384) + * "justified" menu alignment (#2756) + * The last (or single) word of hyperlinks in the interactive help don't act on mouse clicks (#2763) + * 'cd' command is not working in shell link (#2758) + * mc hangs on switching screens (#2608) + * Case sensitive search with SEARCH_TYPE_PCRE is broken (#2764) + * mcedit can't run w/o file as parameter (#2754) + * mcedit can't record input char (#2757) + * mcedit: save file on top of existing directory changes dir's permissions (#2761) + * Unable to edit gzipped files (#2759) + * mcedit hangs up on replace with regexp contains '^' or '$' (#1868) + * Segfault after open incorrect archive (#2775) + * mcdiff crashes if one panel is not in the listing mode (#2769) + * The password for vfs sessions remains in input history (#2760) + * Showing directory sizes is broken in VFS'es (#2765) + * Stale symlinks in vfs (#2777) + * Active VFS directories list contain incorrect current path (#2779) + * Date not set properly in manpage (#2692) + * Empty texinfo rule in mc.ext (#2774) + * Test failure if 'HOME' contains trailing slashes (#2768) + + +Version 4.8.2 + +- Core + + * Added new flag -X (--no-x11) to allow don't use X11 to get the state of modifiers Alt, Ctrl, Shift (#86) + * Support of '~' as home dir in 'Start at:' field in 'Find File' dialog (#2694) + * Support of '~' as home dir in hotlists (#2747) + * Learn of 'Back Tab' is possible now in 'Learn keys' dialog (#2628) + * Optional '0x' prefix for hexadecimal search (#2705) + * Dynamically resize panels (#2465) + * New bindings (ScrollLeft, ScrollRight) for scroll long filenames in panels (#2731) + +- VFS + + * Internal VFS reorganization (#2695) + +- Editor + + * Added as.syntax (#2708) + +- Viewer + + * Added action bindings for backward search (#2105) + +- Misc + + * Added hotkeys for all radio/check-buttons in search/replace dialogs (#2704) + * New file bindings: + - .m4v, .ts - video (#2702) + - djv - DjVu? (#2645) + * Simplify mc.menu - remove LZMA|LZ and change p7 to 7z (#2703) + * Updated list of known browsers: gnome-moz-remote mozilla firefox konqueror opera (#2725) + * Added MC_HOME environment variable to set up home directory of MC (as part of #2738) + * Lot of code cleanup (#2740) + +- Fixes + + * Compile failure of 4.8.1 on xBSD because "Undefined symbols: _posix_fallocate" (#2689) + * MC deletes the wrong file because of forced panel reload before file operation (#2736) + * Cannot chdir to directory if directory name contains the dollar sign (#2451) + * Incorrect panel size after change panel split type (#2521) + * Wrong total bytes counter for subdirs in copy/move dialog (#2503) + * Display corruption in panels after window shrink (#2684) + * Command line is unaccessible from tree panel (#2714) + * Extra confirmation before delete an empty hotlist group (#1576) + * Can't open an edit zero-length file from VFS in mcedit (#2710) + * mcedit crashes when ~/.config is a file (#2738) + * mcedit: reset selection after END/HOME/PgDn/PgUp (#2726) + * 'make check' fails on arm and alpha (-z muldefs) (#2732) + + +Version 4.8.1 + +- Core + + * Use posix_fallocate64() when copying files/moving to a new mount point (#2610) + * Faster startup (#2637) + * Support of extended mouse clicks beyond 223 (#2662) + +- VFS + + * Added exit point ("..") at the top of file list (after external panelization) (#275, #278) + +- Editor + + * Lex/Flex sources (extension .l) handled by yxx.syntax file. Yacc/Bison syntax completed with all symbols (#1647) + * Updated syntax files: + - lua + +- Misc + + * Updated skins: + - sand256 (#2640) + - xoria256 (#2641) + * Added ability to move MC config files to specified place instead of multiple places in $HOME (#2636) + * Added configure option --with-homedir (default value: XDG) (#2636) + * Respect traditional placement of user preferences on Mac OS X (#2658 as part of #2636) + * A few useful additions to filehighlight.ini (#2646) + +- Fixes + + * Doesn't compile when using --disable-nls (#2639) + * Can't compile on OpenIndiana (Solaris) (#2643) + * Moving content of bindings to mc.ext during 4.7 -> 4.8 upgrade breaks mc + * Free space on filesystems >2TB is not displayed properly (#2338) + * Not all errors are skipped after "Ignore all" choose (#71) + * Input field in password mode is fully masked with asterisks (#2653) + * In "Copy File" dialog the "preserve Attributes" checkbox is always unchecked for filesystems mounted with FUSE (#2254) + * Command line cursor misplaced after a resize in viewer/editor (#2678) + * Save of some learned keys is broken (#2676) + * Editor sometimes shows two dots instead of letter (#2372) + * Editor: word completion should ignore the current word (#2614) + * Viewer sometimes shows two dots instead of letter (#1730) + * Viewer shows two dialogs when searcj hot found (#2677) + * Cannot navigate over spftp servers (#2634) + * mc adds spaces at the beginning of all files/dirs on ftp servers (#2635) + * VFS: broken SMB (#2652) + * man page lies about mc.keymap (#2675) + * mc does not preserve file mtime when copying over ssh (#2625) + + +Version 4.8.0 + +- Misc + * Code cleanup (#2620) + * License version updated to GPL3+ (#1551) + * Added new translation: + - Interlingua + +- Fixes + * Viewer: cursor position is not restored in hex mode (#2543) + * fish: broken panels drawing after entering password (#2611) + * fish: content of modified file is appended instead of overwritten in the remote host (#2632) + * extfs: broken navigation in archives if current path is encoded (#2621) + * extfs: strange error message when opening a 7z file if p7zip is not installed (#2598) + + +Version 4.8.0-pre2 + +- Core + + * Added -g/--oldmouse option to support of NORMAL/BUTTON_EVENT mouse type (useful for screen/tmux) (#2601) + +- VFS + + * New extfs plugin: gitfs (#2467) + * patchfs enhancement: join several hunks of the same file into one VFS entry (#2573) + +- Misc + + * mc.ext: use "include" for $EDITOR entries (#1689) + * New file bindings: + - .3gp - video (#2583) + +- Fixes + + * Cannot compile 4.8.0-pre1 and 4.7.5.3 on Solaris (#2587) + * Recent autoconf displays warnings about missing AC_LANG_SOURCE (#2589) + * Duplication of variable declarations (#2576) + * Incorrect TTY layer initialization (#2601) + * Wrong Backspace key behavior in QuickSearch mode if BS key is mapped to CdParentSmart action (#2522) + * M-o works unexpectedly on symlink shortcuts (#2590) + * Panelize doesn't honour current sorting (#2175) + * Hintbar jumps to the top of the screen and overwrites main menu (#2593) + * File size column is bogus for widths above 9 (#2580) + * Hex search: incorrect length usage in hexadecimal search (#2579) + * Editor: Incorrect Pascal syntax highlighting (#2531) + * Editor: mouse clicks are ignored on the bottom line (#2591) + * Editor: extended keybingings are broken (#2586) + * Viewer: Fixed search finds bold/underlined strings twice and highlight search results (#265) + * Broken listing in ExtFS VFS module (#81) + * File name length is limited in tar archive (#2201) + * Crash when copying symlink over ssh (#2582) + * Broken panels recode (#2595) + * ftp failures - leading white space in file name (#2594) + * FISH hangs while copiyng a lot of small files (#2605) + + +Version 4.8.0-pre1 + +WARNING: Configuration files was moved from your $HOME/.mc directory into +XDG_CONFIG_* directories to respect FDO standard +(http://standards.freedesktop.org/basedir-spec/basedir-spec-0.7.html). +To get more information, see ticket #1851. + +WARNING: VFS paths now handled as vfsprefix1://vfsdata/vfsprefix2://vfsdata +(see #2361). Also, 'bindings' user file was renamed to 'mc.ext', so you need +search in this file all + + Open=file.ext#vfsprefix + +and replace them to + + Open=file.ext/vfsprefix:// + +After this you should rename your 'bindings' file to 'mc.ext'. +Old-style paths are handled just in 'Directory hotlist' dialog, but you couldn't +mix URL-like and old style path elements in one path string. Support of old-style +paths will be removed in next major release (probably in 4.9, who knows...) + +WARNING: keybinding names was renamed to provide some unification (see #2511). +The correspondence of old and new keybinging names are described in doc/keybind-migration.txt +file and in doc/keybindMigration web page. + +Be aware. + +- Core + + * Added 256 colours support (#2169, #2173, #2475) + * Changed default text in filtered view (alt-!) to input command line (if not empty) + or stay old behaviour (current file under cursor) (#2266) + * Added simple swap mode that means the swap of panel locations, in addition to current swap + of panel content (#2368) + * Configuration files now moved to directory specified in XDG_CONFIG_HOME environment variable (#1851) + * Panel options are read now from [Panels] section only. [Midnight-Commander] section is not read (#2305) + * "Show mini info" checkbox was moved from the "Layout" dialog window to the "Panel options" one (#2305) + * Select files by shift-left/right in file panel (#2534) + * Added support of skip all errors on multi-file/dir operation (#71) + * 'Find Files' improvements: + - support relative ignored directories (#2275); + - handle of ignored directories in dialog window (#2275); + - "Search for content" checkbox is enabled by default (#2462) + * Added hardlinks detection for filehighlight (#2478) + * Unification of keybind names (#2511): + - most of keybinding names are changes to unify that names. Table of old and new names + is available in doc/keybind-migration.txt; + - improve of key rebinding: previously, to rebind some keys, used must redefine the entire section + where that bindings are placed in user keymap file. New merge algorithm doesn't require that + and allows rebind only wanted keys; + - added --nokeymap command line option to disable external keymaps + * Sources in 'lib' directory now independent to sources in 'src' one (#2501) + * Added configure parameter --enable-mclib for build libmc.so shared library (#2501) + * Added new engine for universal event system (as part of #2501) + * Optimized loading and saving of configurations and histories (#2541, #2545) + * Reimplemented i18n support in 'Chmod' dialog window (#2557) + +- VFS + + * VFS structure changes (as part of #2501): + - moved from lib/vfs/mc-vfs to lib/vfs; + - split VFS-modules by directories and moved to src/vfs; + - lib/vfs/vfs-impl.h was merged into lib/vfs/vfs.h + * VFS now used URL-like paths (#2361) + +- Editor + + * New engine of the editor macro (#323) + * Multiply repeat of the recorded actions (#323) + * Call external scripts from the editor (#323, #2512) + * Added REDO action (#25) + * Group UNDO by action (#27) + * Selection is not reset after execute user menu (#2463) + * Vertical selection is not reset after copy/move (#2504) + * More intuitive word left/right action (now the cursor stop beside EOL/BOL) (#2483) + * Duble-click marks the current word. Added action MarkWord to mark word, MarkLine + to mark current line (#2499) + * Regexp search&replace: support escape sequences in replacement string (#1882) + +- Misc + + * Minor enhancement in mc.ext: + * added -C key to nm utility in View action for static libraries (#2485) + * New file bindings: + - .torrent: view using ctorrent (#2562); + - .mts: handle as videofile (#2566) + * Added new entries in cedit.menu: "Sort selection", "Upper case", "Lower case" + * New skins: + - Xoria256 (#2469) + - mc-4.6 (#2524) + * Updated skins: + * Nice dark (#1791) + * Added support for check unit test framework (http://check.sourceforge.net) (as part of #2501) + * Added -F/--datadir-info option to show extended information about used data dirs (#2495) + * Added --configure-options to easy update & reconfigure existing mc (#2495) + * Language-specific man pages and hint and help files are not installed + if mc is built with --disable-nls option (#2514) + * Added new translation: + - Esperanto + * Code cleanup (#2481, #2515, #2518, #2560, #2570) + +- Fixes + + * Build failure on DragonFly BSD (#2516) + * Broken Del & Backspace in dialogs (in locale CP866) (#1634) + * Screen and input corruption under xterm in non-UTF locales (#1668) + * Alt-Backspace shortcut doesn't work (#2455) + * Broken command autocompletion (#2458) + * Swap panels doesn't respect sort options (#2368) + * File list format of panel is initialized incorrectly after switch back from quick view + or info mode to file list one (#2390) + * Main menu is not drawn correctly after change of it visibility and activity (#2466) + * MC switches to left panel after call of command history using mouse (#2459) + * Find file: don't check content regexp if search for content is not used (#2464) + * Find file: broken lynx-like navigation in panelization of search result (#2491) + * Dialog trims leading spaces in input field (#2544) + * Panelize content is lost when doing F5/F6/F8 on a file on the other panel (#2312) + * Color of panel header cannot be set in the command line (#2170) + * ctrl-g key closes file panels (#2520) + * Incorrect files mark by mouse (#2556) + * Editor: incorrect restore selection after UNDO (#2456) + * Editor: segfault after getting the previous char in utf8 (#2484) + * Editor: incorrect detection of the word boundary (added '{', '}' as end of word) (#2500) + * Bold and selected colors of viewer cannot be set in the command line (#2489) + * Viewer: fixed incorrect starting offset for 'search again' (#2294) + * Viewer: fixed problems while displaying UTF-8 manual pages (#1629) + * Diff viewer: quick left/right movements don't work in non-default key maps (#2509) + * AI_ADDRCONFIG is not optional for RFC 3493 non-compliant systems (#2401) + * FTP directories containing @ result severe security risks (eg. deletion of homedir) (#2220) + * Builtin ftp client can't download files with apostrophe in a file name (#2251) + * Unable to show FTP listing if password contains # (#2360) + * FTP: fixed access to file names starting with space (#81) + * Bashisms in extfs (#2569) + * Browsing *.deb files is broken with latest Perl (#2552) + * isoinfo adds ";1" to the end of file name when Joliet without Rock Ridge is used (#2471) + * patchfs incorrectly works with filenames containing spaces (#2572) + * cd to ~ processed incorrectly in the command line if more than one space is separating + the "cd" and "~" (#2120) diff --git a/doc/README b/doc/README new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71d69d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/README @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ +Contents +-------- + +Introduction +Dependencies +Features +Mini-documentation +Where to get more information +Reporting problems + + +Introduction +------------ + +GNU Midnight Commander (also referred to as MC) is a user shell with +text-mode full-screen interface. It can be run on the OS console, +in xterm and other terminal emulators. + +GNU Midnight Commander allows you to manage files while making the most of +your screen and giving you a clear representation of the filesystem, yet +it's simple enough to be run over a telnet or ssh session. + +GNU Midnight Commander is released under the GNU General Public +License version 3 or any later version. A copy of the file is +included with this distribution package. + + +Dependencies +------------ + +Please read the file INSTALL for installation instructions +and full list of dependencies. + + +Features +-------- + +GNU Midnight Commander was conceived as a free clone of John Socha's +Norton Commander (TM). It also takes the best from more recent software +with similar interfaces. GNU Midnight Commander comes with mouse support +on xterm and optionally on the Linux console. + +Some features are specific to the POSIX environment MC runs on, some are +familiar to the users of similar software for other operating systems. +The features include: + + * Built in Virtual File System: manipulate remote file systems + through the FTP and SFTP protocols or over secure shell, browse + contents of tar, ar, rpm, zip, cpio, lha and rar archives just + like local files. + + * Almost all operations work with the virtual file system, + enabling you to do complex tasks, like viewing files in + archives on an FTP server. + + * Mouse support on most terminal emulators for X Window System + as well as on the Linux console. + + * Learn Keys: GNU Midnight Commander may be configured at run + time to support any kind of input keys for a given terminal, + making its operation possible even on most weird terminals. + + * Text and hex editors are available for you to use (hex editor + is a part of the viewer). + + * Hotlist allows you to keep a list of common visited locations, + including remote sites and directories inside archives. + + * Command completion: By pressing Alt-Tab in any place where a + filename or an executable are expected, GNU Midnight Commander + will complete the name for you. If you press Alt-Tab for the + second time, you get a list box with all possible completions. + + * Subshell support: Run your commands by a real shell + interpreter. GNU Midnight Commander interacts with bash, + tcsh and zsh to provide you with all of the facilities + available in your preferred shell. + + * Find file command can search for the file contents. + + * Background operations allow you to copy or move files from + any virtual file system while you do other tasks (i.e., you + can do background FTP copies). + + * FTP proxy is supported. + + * Linux file recovery: If you are using Linux, you can recover + deleted files from an ext2 or ext3 partition with the undelete + file system. This is a low level file recovery function that + can recover files deleted by any program on Linux. + + * External panelization: You can run any arbitrary external + command and GNU Midnight Commander will display the output + generated as a file listing that can be manipulated as a + regular directory. + + * Emacs-like key bindings are used in all widgets. + + * Context dependent actions (open, view, edit) are available. + + * The built-in file viewer, together with the context dependent + actions is used to format man pages on the fly, coloring mail + messages and more. + + * The built-in editor supports syntax highlighting and external + actions, such as spell checking and formatting. + + +Mini-documentation +------------------ + +These are hints for the text mode edition: + +* Use the F-Keys for invoking the commands in the function key bar. + If your terminal doesn't support F-keys, you can use the <ESC digit> + sequence to invoke the corresponding F-digit key. + +* Tab changes the current panel. + +* All input lines have emacs-like key-bindings (command history is + accessed through the M-p and M-n keys). + +* The panels accept C-n, C-p for browsing the panel (like in Emacs). + +* M-Enter copies the currently selected file name to the input line. + +* M-Tab completes the current word (or tries to). + +* The Virtual File System is a cute addition to the project, you may + browse in tar and compressed tar files as well as browsing remote + machines with the fish file system. + +* Please read the manual page. + +You can access the whole documentation online with the F1 key, +although it's not as nice as the groff printed manual page :-) + + +Where to get more information +----------------------------- + +There is a webpage for GNU Midnight Commander at + +https://www.midnight-commander.org/ + +This page also has current information about mailing lists and some +useful advices how to report bugs. + +You can download the latest version of GNU Midnight Commander from + +https://www.midnight-commander.org/downloads/ + + +Reporting problems +------------------ + +You can report bug on our site, please read + +https://www.midnight-commander.org/wiki/doc/reportDefects + +Also you can use mc mailing lists to discuss problems. + +There are two mailing lists: + + - mc@lists.midnight-commander.org + - mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Use mc-devel@ if you are prepared for a more technical discussion +with the developers of the package, otherwise use mc@. + +Please don't sent HTML e-mail to either of those mailing lists. + +Include the output of "mc --version", the operating system and the +distribution (if applicable) you are using, the compiler and the +configure flags used to compile the program (if you know them). + +If the program crashed and produced a core dump, please provide a +stack trace of the program. + +You can do this by running gdb like this: + +gdb mc core +(gdb) where diff --git a/doc/README.QNX b/doc/README.QNX new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4675d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/README.QNX @@ -0,0 +1,313 @@ +Midnight Commander for QNX (not QNX Neutrino) +--------------------------------------------- + +1. Compiling +2. Running 'mc' under QNX +3. List of modifications on mc-4.1.33 +4. TODO +5. Contact information + +1. Compiling +------------ + +1.1 Make utility +---------------- + +Use 'gmake'. (This is the default 'make' under QNX 4.23+). [The old 'qmake' +cannot handle the makefiles in the mc-source.] + +1.2 Configuring +--------------- + +If you don't have an installed TCP/IP development kit, you have to 'hide' +the library file 'socket3r.lib' (can be installed by e.g. Watcom C 10.6) +in /usr/lib or /usr/watcom/10.6/usr/lib, because the existence of this file +will confuse 'configure': it will erroneously assume you have the complete +TCP/IP development kit (with headers) and will enable compiling of the +network-related VFS code (not only tarfs). +[A patch would be required in the configure-script to check the existence +of the TCP/IP-related headers also...] + +Use '--disable-nls' option, if you don't have the binary utilities of +GNU 'gettext' package (e.g. 'msgfmt'). ['--with-included-gettext' doesn't +really work in 4.1.33, there are configuration/compiling problems...] + +1.3 Compiler +------------ + +It is advised to use Watcom C 10.6+ to compile the source, because older +compilers (e.g. 9.52) do not support some convenient/required features. +[e.g. 'ar'-compatible 'wlib',...] + +1.4 "No prototype found for '<function>'" warnings +-------------------------------------------------- + +It is advised to use high warning level (e.g. 'CFLAGS="-w4" ./configure'), +when compiling the source, because Watcom C uses a special parameter passing +convention for functions with fixed number of arguments only. So if the +compiler doesn't see the correct prototype of a function with variable +number of arguments (like printf()), it will produce a warning about the +missing prototype, but generates function call code according to the special +parameter passing convention, not the required CDECL convention (it is used +by default for functions with variable number of arguments). So the calling +convention of the function call code and the function code itself will not +match! So you MUST provide the correct prototype for function with variable +number of arguments! (Or you can force using the stack-based calling +convention as a default, if you have the stack-call-conv version of all of the +required libraries ('<name>3s.lib')...[Watcom C 10.6 required!]) + +[The latest release version (4.1.33/qnx) is checked against these types of +missing prototypes...] + +1.5 Tested configuration +------------------------ + +QNX 4.24 +Watcom C 10.6 (release version, no newer beta patches) +Photon 1.12 +no TCP/IP development kit (-> VFS: tarfs only!) +mc-4.1.33, mc-4.1.34 + +2. Running 'mc' under QNX +------------------------- + +Using 'qnx*' terminals: + + You cannot use your keyboard correctly, if you disable the "Full 8 bits + input" feature in the 'Options|Display bits...' dialog. + + On 'qnx*' terminals 'mc' will run in black and white mode by default, + because these types of terminals use non-ANSI-compatible color sequences. + +Accessing remote nodes via the native QNX-network: + + [The problem exists under the older versions of 'mc' only...] + If directory panels cannot handle '//<node-id>' prefix in directory names, + use directory links in order to access remote nodes on the native QNX + network: + + mkdir /net + ln -sf //1/ /net/1 + ... + +Extension and menu files: + + Default 'tar' uses 'stderr' (and not 'stdout' as its 'normal' output with + '-t' option. + + Default 'tar' is not a GNU 'tar', so does not understand '-z' option. + +Special key-mappings: + + Restrictions of the META-? as Alt-? functionality: + [META-? as ESC-? will always work!!!] + + Alt-TAB -> Ctrl-TAB (Alt-TAB reserved in Photon [1.12+]) + Alt-ENTER -> Ctrl-ENTER ('qnx*' terminals only) + + Alt-<uppercase letter>: doesn't work + +'qansi*' terminals: + + Problem [QNX 4.23+ only]: screen corruption (strange line-drawing character + set handling) on 'qansi*' terminals, if linked with mc/Slang/terminfo + terminal management. (Older versions of QNX and Slang/termcap not affected.) + + This problem is solved, see the comments in slang/sldisply.c about + SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH and QNX_QANSI_SLANG_COMPAT_ACS! + +other terminals: + + I have tested 'mc' under QNX on 'qnx*' and 'qansi*' terminals only. + +toggle panels on/off (CTRL-o): + + Currently not supported, but could be implemented later... + +3. List of modifications on mc-4.1.33/mc-4.1.34 +----------------------------------------------- + +edit/ + + syntax.c: (4.1.33 only, fixed in 4.1.34) + + line 100,191: WCC 10.6 doesn't like "<label>: }" construct ("no statement + after the label"), modified to "<label>: /*nop*/; }". + +lib/ + + mc.menu: + + 'Z' on 'tar.Z' and 'tar.z' files: '%f' -> '$1'. + + mc.ext.in.qnx.diff: + + QNX: modified 'mc.ext.in'. [tar -t: output to stderr,...] + + (No automatic install implemented: patch must be applied before + running 'configure' [->mc.ext.in.qnx.diff!]; this patch can be not + only QNX-specific...) + + Makefile.in: + + 'mc.ext.in.qnx.diff' added to DISTLIB. + +slang/ + + sldisply.c: + + SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH dependent code: + + The problem: some terminals (e.g. QNX/qansi*) map the whole upper half of + the ASCII table to the lower half, when alt-char-set is activated with + the smacs/as string-sequence. This means, that if 0 <= ch < 128 written + to the terminal, it will be translated to (ch+128) automatically by the + terminal: so not only the line-drawing characters can be written, when + the alt-char-set is activated. It implicitly means, that space, NL, CR, + etc. characters (exactly: anything besides the "standard" line drawing + characters) cannot be written directly to the terminal, when the + alt-char-set is activated, because writing these characters doesn't cause + an implicit/temporary switching-back to the standard char-set! + + The original code in SLang assumes that space, NL, CR, etc. can be + printed when alt-char-set is activated. If SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH is + defined, the modified code will not use this assumption. + [Remark: the patch-code is not the most exact solution, but works...] + + QNX_QANSI_SLANG_COMPAT_ACS_PATCH dependent code: + + A more OS/terminal-specific solution for the problem mentioned above + (->SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH). + + If QNX_QANSI_SLANG_COMPAT_ACS is defined, the default smacs/sa, rmacs/ae, + acsc/ac [and sgr/sa, if it would be used!] command sequences will be + replaced internally with the "old style" (pre-QNX 4.23) sequences in case + of QNX/qansi terminals. Using these optional command sequences the terminal + remains compatible with the original SLang code (without using the + workaround-code enabled by defining SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH). + + Remark: + + Currently SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH is not auto-configured by 'configure'. + (Must be manually defined...) + + There is some (QNX-specific) auto-configuration hand-coded in the source: + + #ifdef SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH + # if defined(__QNX__) && defined(QNX_QANSI_SLANG_COMPAT_ACS) + # undef SLTT_TRANSP_ACS_PATCH + # endif + #else + # if defined(__QNX__) && !defined(QNX_QANSI_SLANG_COMPAT_ACS) + # define QNX_QANSI_SLANG_COMPAT_ACS 1 + # endif + #endif + + slutty.c: + + "newtty.c_iflag &= ~(ECHO | INLCR | ICRNL);" + + ECHO(0x08) is a c_lflag bit, it means PARMRK(0x08) in c_iflag. (!?!) + +src/ + + file.c: + + 'do_reget' can be extern if (ENABLE_VFS && USE_NETCODE), not if (ENABLE_VFS). + + find.c: + + search_content(): + + variable 'i' "must be" 'int', not 'char'. ["i == -1": (buggy?) WCC 10.6 + doesn't convert automatically (int)(-1) to (char)(-1) (GCC does), so + "comparison result always 0" warning produced. It is cleaner to define + 'i' as 'int', than cast '-1' to 'char', because 'read()' returns 'int'.] + + key.c: + + init_key(): + + Call load_xtra_key_defines() and clear 'use_8th_bit_as_meta' by default + under QNX, if a 'qnx*' terminal detected. (A saved config file (mc.ini) + can override it later...) + + key.h: + + Declare load_xtra_key_defines(). + + keyxdef.c: + + Provides a method to define some platform-specific additional key + mappings. (e.g. QNX terminals can handle most of META-? combinations as + ALT-?...) + + (Currently not listed in doc/FILES...) + + layout.c: + + TIOCGWINSZ must be available (<sys/ioctl.h> included), because window- + resizing code doesn't work, if not defined. + + main.c: + + print_usage(): reserved name in the QNX run-time library! + print_usage() -> print_mc_usage() + + mouse.c: + + QNX: ncurses 1.9.8a ported to QNX doesn't provide the 'SP' pointer as a + global symbol in the library, so the keyok() emulation currently cannot + be used under QNX (4.24 & Watcom C 10.6 release version). + + slint.c: + + QNX: 'qansi*' terminals added to the color_terminals[] list. + + subshell.c: + utilunix.c: + + QNX: include <unix.h> to get prototype for exec*()!!! + [See README.QNX/Section 1.4!] + + Makefile.in: + + 'keyxdef' module added to SRCS and OBJS. + +vfs/ + +<mc-src-root>/ + + README.QNX: + + QNX-specific notes... + + configure (line 3369): + configure.in (line 88): + + (mc-4.1.34 only) + 'test x$CCOPTS = x;' => 'test "x$CCOPTS" = x;' + + Makefile.in: + + README.QNX added to DISTMAIN. + +4. TODO +------- + +Because of limited time and resources now I can define a 'wish list' only: +(maybe somebody in the QNX community can help...) + +subshell support with panel switch on/off ? +mouse under Photon (with qnxm, qansi-m terminals) ? +... + +5. Contact information +---------------------- + +Please report QNX-specific bugs and comments via e-mail to: gt_cosy@usa.net + + +------------- +Tamasi Gyorgy +------------- diff --git a/doc/TODO b/doc/TODO new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6253fd --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/TODO @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ +mc manual: Add Environment Variables section + +Clean up #include's in all files. + +Remove all instances of type casts on function pointers. Run the +following command to get a list of function pointer types. + grep -r 'typedef.*(\*' . \ + | sed -n 's/.*(\*\([[:alnum:]_]*\)).*/(\1)/p' \ + | sort -u \ + > fn-types.txt +Then use fgrep to find illegal uses of these types. + fgrep -r "`cat fn-types.txt`" . +Fix these uses by writing small wrapper functions. + +When saving a file is not possible, mcedit should ask the user what to +do: +- su(1) to another user and try again +- sudo +- change permissions of the file or the containg directory +- other smart things + +Due to problems in the VFS, files are not written back after being edited +over VFS with an external editor. + +Allow pathnames starting with spaces in vfs/extfs. + +Broken pipe warning when viewing large *.tar.gz files. Warnings should +be shown before the viewer is started if possible. + +Cannot spell check unsaved files in the editor. + +Dynamic loading for libgpm, libext2fs. + +Check if the archive was changed for extfs, tar and cpio. Free the data +associated with the old archive. + +Ctrl-q Ctrl-m in input dialog should enter \r, not a newline. + +Allow entering archives in VFS by Ctrl-PgDown with non-empty command +line. Right now, there is no convenient way to enter an archive when +the command line is not empty. + +Allow switching between histories of two panels. It's convenient to +change to a directory from the history of the other panel. + +Allow calling the directory hotlist from Copy, Move and Find File +dialogs. Recent directories are the obvious candidates for copying and +looking for files. + +Allow modifiers for keys in mc.lib, like "shift-up". Right now, +modifiers can be read from the terminal (if supported), but not from the +config file. This change would make it possible to use modifiers even +if they can only be identified by the escape sequences. + +When saving config files, write to a copy, then replace the file. This +would avoid the problem of partly written config files. Consider using +locking of the config files. + +Totals should only be omitted for single files. + +Recheck all mouse handlers, make sure that they check button number. We +don't want mouse scrolling to be interpreted as mouse click. + +Smooth mouse scrolling on panels. Scrolling one page per step is too +fast. + +Don't read prompt from the subshell, because it's unreliable. Interpret +environment variable MC_PS1 (or PS1) in the same way as bash. + +Support an environment variable (also like PS1 in bash) for setting the +window title. + +Better date parser - don't allow seconds and year in ftp listings on the +same line. + +Report errors in fish operations and recover from them. + +Allow colors to be defined in the mc.lib file. Make it possible to +avoid using a super-long line to redefine all colors. + +Filters in the editor should operate on the open file - don't close and +reopen the file. They don't work on VFS now. For example, a gzipped +files on FTP cannot be edited. + +ftp and fish with home != '/' - readjust directory to the home. + +Make "Find File" dialog more responsive. Keep state in a structure and +preserve it when the search is suspended. + +Use KDGKBENT ioctl on Linux console to find the mapping for shifted +functional keys. Two mappings are widely used (Shift-F1 = F11 and +Shift-F1 = F13). mc should adjust the keys to the mapping. + +Make the internal editor reentrant. + +Consistent support for mc.lib. + +Consistent support for terminal-specific settings. + +New syntax for mc.ext - path check, desktop environment check. Detach X +programs into a separate process group. Allow forcing the full path on +local files. + +Click on an image doesn't always work on remote vfs - local copy may +be deleted before the application has time to load it. + +Allow running executables from remote VFS. Possibly warn the user. + +Add print dialog in the internal editor. + +Implement logging, not just for VFS. + +Eliminate all pipes in subshell.c, run pwd after kill. Add support for +more shells (e.g. ksh). + +Internal terminal - no more console saving. + +Implement a really Advanced Chown/Chmod. + +fxp support in VFS. + +New listing mode keyword "time": mtime or the time (atime, ctime) used +to sort files. + +Provide "patch" and "diff" editors. The patch editor will automatically +adjust the line numbers of the following chunks when lines are deleted +or inserted at the beginning of the file. + +Provide context menus for files. Possible actions include: [compile], +[CVS commit], [CVS diff -up], [pack], [unpack], [grep]. + +More standard Widgets: WTreeView, WDirectoryList, WGroupBox, WTextArea, +WOpenDialog, WSaveDialog, WPrintDialog, WKeyBar. + +======================================================================== +Everything below this point is the old TODO list. It doesn't reflect +the current priorities of the developers, but may contain interesting +ideas still waiting for their implementation. +======================================================================== + + +* Bugs + + - "Files" message flickers a lot when copying files. + + - Make the extfs handle re-reads. + + - Check that all the help contexts exist on the help file. + + - Make the buttonbar for the tree box work. + + - In the incremental search mode, when backspacing, select the + correct file, do not stop in current file. + + - In learn keys, warn the user if he is trying to + i) define a same sequence as an already defined (if the keycode differs) + ii) define a sequence, which is a prefix of other longer and already + defined sequence + +* Documentation + + - Convert the source mc.1 to mc.sgml and create automagically from it + mc.1, mc.html, mc.hlp, mc.info, mc.tex, mc.txt etc. + +* Extensions + + - Hotlist should allow people to edit the entry (like we do in the external + panelize thing). + + - Change ext.c to allow the %{..} to recursively expand any other %thingies. + + - Write a general grow_string routine. This code is used in the internal + viewer and would also be used in the profile.c code. + + - A command to set the line length to a fixed value for viewing + fixed length binary files. LIST does this with Ctrl-B and then + prompts for a "record" length. + + - Viewer: Mark all found matches, and when 'n' is pressed go to the + next page, not the next match on the same screen (when there is + more than one). + + - In ftpfs_open, extfs_open, if we set local_filename to tmpnam, use + a mechanism to set local_filename to another place on the local + diskspace (this would be useful for copying, so that we would save + some tmp space). This would require special care in file.c afterwards. + + - In Listing mode... give at least three user-definable formats + (using Janne's Listing mode editor) and assign hot-keys to both + standard and user defined (what about c-x f [fbl123] ?). + + - Shift-Home, Shift-End for the input line: home and end. + + - Make a mechanism to lock all the mouse events and send them to + the locking widget until unlocking is done. + + - Allow the program to execute a command even when we are on a vfs, maybe + a special box, or make subshell code ignore the change directory + request. Perhaps each vfs should store a local path attached to it, + like in tarfs, extfs it would be the directory which contains the + topmost tararchive, in ftpfs it would be the directory which we entered + to ftp from. + + - auto_hint_lines: a variable that would choose to use hint mode when + at least auto_hint_lines are visible. + + - Listbox: Mouse handler for the scrollbar: this will be hard with + the current approach (since the listbox scrollbar is drawn *outside* + the listbox control area). + + - In file.c, we shouldn't need to get a full path name in order to + work, we should instead canon the file name inside the tar.c (the + only fs that relies on this), tar.c should know about the cwd (i + think). + + - Panelize the selected files. + + - Recursive delete should (perhaps as an option) delete files just after + they have been copied and not to delay deleting until everything was + moved. + + - When copying a tree (or moving or deleting), as an option act primarily + on the regular files and at the end on directories recursively, so that + we get complete high parts of the tree if something fails (useful for + ftpfs). + + - Put into a new and bigger Options/Configuration dialog all the options + we have now to set using .mc/ini manually. + + - When after deleting there are no files in a panelized panel, restore + it automagically to the real directory content. + + - Files/Symlink and Link should be able to do multiple links (if the + target is a directory). + + - Directory sizes should work in background using try_channels. + + - Support of non-UNIX ls in ftpfs. Perhaps using an ascii configuration + file similar to moxftp. + + - Add an option that will let listboxes do incremental searches. + +* Optimizations and cleanup + + - When verbose is off, remove all the clutter on the screen about + the files being copied. + + - The viewer is calling view_update in many places, I call + view_update after handling a key, should all the other + view_updates be removed? + + - If the viewer is too slow, some caching could be done. + width and cols are currently computed each time they are needed. + + ++ In the user menu, don't use the entries array, we can now grow + dynamically. I should take a look at this one day, it's easy to + fix. + diff --git a/doc/doxygen-include.am b/doc/doxygen-include.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab87a45 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/doxygen-include.am @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ +# --------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more +# contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed with +# this work for additional information regarding copyright ownership. +# The ASF licenses this file to You under the Apache License, Version 2.0 +# (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with +# the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at +# +# http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 +# +# Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software +# distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, +# WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. +# See the License for the specific language governing permissions and +# limitations under the License. +# --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# Copyright (C) 2004 Oren Ben-Kiki +# This file is distributed under the same terms as the Automake macro files. + +# Generate automatic documentation using Doxygen. Goals and variables values +# are controlled by the various DX_COND_??? conditionals set by autoconf. +# +# The provided goals are: +# doxygen-doc: Generate all doxygen documentation. +# doxygen-run: Run doxygen, which will generate some of the documentation +# (HTML, CHM, CHI, MAN, RTF, XML) but will not do the post +# processing required for the rest of it (PS, PDF, and some MAN). +# doxygen-man: Rename some doxygen generated man pages. +# doxygen-ps: Generate doxygen PostScript documentation. +# doxygen-pdf: Generate doxygen PDF documentation. +# +# Note that by default these are not integrated into the automake goals. If +# doxygen is used to generate man pages, you can achieve this integration by +# setting man3_MANS to the list of man pages generated and then adding the +# dependency: +# +# $(man3_MANS): doxygen-doc +# +# This will cause make to run doxygen and generate all the documentation. +# +# The following variable is intended for use in Makefile.am: +# +# DX_CLEANFILES = everything to clean. +# +# This is usually added to MOSTLYCLEANFILES. + +## --------------------------------- ## +## Format-independent Doxygen rules. ## +## --------------------------------- ## + +if DX_COND_doc + +## ------------------------------- ## +## Rules specific for HTML output. ## +## ------------------------------- ## + +if DX_COND_html + +DX_CLEAN_HTML = @DX_DOCDIR@/html + +endif DX_COND_html + +## ------------------------------ ## +## Rules specific for CHM output. ## +## ------------------------------ ## + +if DX_COND_chm + +DX_CLEAN_CHM = @DX_DOCDIR@/chm + +if DX_COND_chi + +DX_CLEAN_CHI = @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.chi + +endif DX_COND_chi + +endif DX_COND_chm + +## ------------------------------ ## +## Rules specific for MAN output. ## +## ------------------------------ ## + +if DX_COND_man + +DX_CLEAN_MAN = @DX_DOCDIR@/man + +endif DX_COND_man + +## ------------------------------ ## +## Rules specific for RTF output. ## +## ------------------------------ ## + +if DX_COND_rtf + +DX_CLEAN_RTF = @DX_DOCDIR@/rtf + +endif DX_COND_rtf + +## ------------------------------ ## +## Rules specific for XML output. ## +## ------------------------------ ## + +if DX_COND_xml + +DX_CLEAN_XML = @DX_DOCDIR@/xml + +endif DX_COND_xml + +## ----------------------------- ## +## Rules specific for PS output. ## +## ----------------------------- ## + +if DX_COND_ps + +DX_CLEAN_PS = @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.ps + +DX_PS_GOAL = doxygen-ps + +doxygen-ps: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.ps + +@DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.ps: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag + cd @DX_DOCDIR@/latex; \ + rm -f *.aux *.toc *.idx *.ind *.ilg *.log *.out; \ + $(DX_LATEX) refman.tex; \ + $(MAKEINDEX_PATH) refman.idx; \ + $(DX_LATEX) refman.tex; \ + countdown=5; \ + while $(DX_EGREP) 'Rerun (LaTeX|to get cross-references right)' \ + refman.log > /dev/null 2>&1 \ + && test $$countdown -gt 0; do \ + $(DX_LATEX) refman.tex; \ + countdown=`expr $$countdown - 1`; \ + done; \ + $(DX_DVIPS) -o ../@PACKAGE@.ps refman.dvi + +endif DX_COND_ps + +## ------------------------------ ## +## Rules specific for PDF output. ## +## ------------------------------ ## + +if DX_COND_pdf + +DX_CLEAN_PDF = @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.pdf + +DX_PDF_GOAL = doxygen-pdf + +doxygen-pdf: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.pdf + +@DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.pdf: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag + cd @DX_DOCDIR@/latex; \ + rm -f *.aux *.toc *.idx *.ind *.ilg *.log *.out; \ + $(DX_PDFLATEX) refman.tex; \ + $(DX_MAKEINDEX) refman.idx; \ + $(DX_PDFLATEX) refman.tex; \ + countdown=5; \ + while $(DX_EGREP) 'Rerun (LaTeX|to get cross-references right)' \ + refman.log > /dev/null 2>&1 \ + && test $$countdown -gt 0; do \ + $(DX_PDFLATEX) refman.tex; \ + countdown=`expr $$countdown - 1`; \ + done; \ + mv refman.pdf ../@PACKAGE@.pdf + +endif DX_COND_pdf + +## ------------------------------------------------- ## +## Rules specific for LaTeX (shared for PS and PDF). ## +## ------------------------------------------------- ## + +if DX_COND_latex + +DX_CLEAN_LATEX = @DX_DOCDIR@/latex + +endif DX_COND_latex + +.PHONY: doxygen-run doxygen-doc $(DX_PS_GOAL) $(DX_PDF_GOAL) + +.INTERMEDIATE: doxygen-run $(DX_PS_GOAL) $(DX_PDF_GOAL) + +doxygen-run: @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag + +doxygen-doc: doxygen-run $(DX_PS_GOAL) $(DX_PDF_GOAL) + +@DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag: $(DX_CONFIG) $(pkginclude_HEADERS) + rm -rf @DX_DOCDIR@ + $(DX_ENV) $(DX_DOXYGEN) $(srcdir)/$(DX_CONFIG) + +DX_CLEANFILES = \ + @DX_DOCDIR@/@PACKAGE@.tag \ + -r \ + $(DX_CLEAN_HTML) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_CHM) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_CHI) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_MAN) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_RTF) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_XML) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_PS) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_PDF) \ + $(DX_CLEAN_LATEX) + +endif DX_COND_doc diff --git a/doc/doxygen.cfg b/doc/doxygen.cfg new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1118062 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/doxygen.cfg @@ -0,0 +1,254 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 +PROJECT_NAME = $(PROJECT)-$(VERSION) +PROJECT_NUMBER = +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = $(DOCDIR) +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = YES +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES +STRIP_FROM_PATH = $(SRCDIR) +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = $(SRCDIR) +SHORT_NAMES = NO +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = YES +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO +INHERIT_DOCS = YES +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = YES +TAB_SIZE = 8 +ALIASES = +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO +SIP_SUPPORT = NO +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO +SUBGROUPING = YES +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +EXTRACT_ALL = YES +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = NO +EXTRACT_STATIC = NO +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES +INLINE_INFO = YES +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO +GENERATE_TODOLIST = YES +GENERATE_TESTLIST = YES +GENERATE_BUGLIST = YES +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES +ENABLED_SECTIONS = +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = NO +SHOW_FILES = YES +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = +LAYOUT_FILE = +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +QUIET = YES +WARNINGS = YES +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = NO +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" +WARN_LOGFILE = +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +INPUT = $(SRCDIR) +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 +FILE_PATTERNS = *.c \ + *.h +RECURSIVE = YES +EXCLUDE = +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */tests/* */.git/* +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = +EXAMPLE_PATH = $(SRCDIR) +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO +IMAGE_PATH = +INPUT_FILTER = +FILTER_PATTERNS = +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +SOURCE_BROWSER = YES +INLINE_SOURCES = NO +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = YES +REFERENCES_RELATION = YES +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = YES +USE_HTAGS = NO +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 +IGNORE_PREFIX = +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_HTML = YES +HTML_OUTPUT = html +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html +HTML_HEADER = +HTML_FOOTER = +HTML_STYLESHEET = +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = NO +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO +CHM_FILE = ../$(PROJECT).chm +HHC_LOCATION = $(HHC_PATH) +GENERATE_CHI = NO +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = +BINARY_TOC = NO +TOC_EXPAND = NO +GENERATE_QHP = NO +QCH_FILE = +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc +QHG_LOCATION = +DISABLE_INDEX = NO +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 4 +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_LATEX = NO +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex +COMPACT_LATEX = NO +PAPER_TYPE = $(PAPER_SIZE) +EXTRA_PACKAGES = +LATEX_HEADER = +PDF_HYPERLINKS = NO +USE_PDFLATEX = NO +LATEX_BATCHMODE = YES +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_RTF = NO +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf +COMPACT_RTF = NO +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_MAN = NO +MAN_OUTPUT = man +MAN_EXTENSION = .1 +MAN_LINKS = NO +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_XML = NO +XML_OUTPUT = xml +XML_SCHEMA = +XML_DTD = +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES +MACRO_EXPANSION = NO +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = NO +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES +INCLUDE_PATH = +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = +PREDEFINED = +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +TAGFILES = +GENERATE_TAGFILE = $(DOCDIR)/$(PROJECT).tag +ALLEXTERNALS = NO +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES +PERL_PATH = $(PERL_PATH) +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = YES +MSCGEN_PATH = +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES +HAVE_DOT = YES +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 +DOT_FONTPATH = +CLASS_GRAPH = YES +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = YES +GROUP_GRAPHS = YES +UML_LOOK = NO +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO +INCLUDE_GRAPH = YES +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = YES +CALL_GRAPH = NO +CALLER_GRAPH = NO +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = YES +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = YES +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png +DOT_PATH = $(DOT_PATH) +DOTFILE_DIRS = +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 550 +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 0 +DOT_TRANSPARENT = NO +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES +DOT_CLEANUP = YES +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/doc/hints/Makefile.am b/doc/hints/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2920c35 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +if USE_NLS +SUBDIRS = l10n +endif + +DIST_SUBDIRS = l10n + +HINTFILE = mc.hint + +hintdir = $(pkgdatadir)/hints + +hint_DATA = $(HINTFILE) + +# Files processed by configure don't need to be here +EXTRA_DIST = $(HINTFILE) diff --git a/doc/hints/Makefile.in b/doc/hints/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9499176 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,819 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hints +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +RECURSIVE_TARGETS = all-recursive check-recursive cscopelist-recursive \ + ctags-recursive dvi-recursive html-recursive info-recursive \ + install-data-recursive install-dvi-recursive \ + install-exec-recursive install-html-recursive \ + install-info-recursive install-pdf-recursive \ + install-ps-recursive install-recursive installcheck-recursive \ + installdirs-recursive pdf-recursive ps-recursive \ + tags-recursive uninstall-recursive +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)" +DATA = $(hint_DATA) +RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS = mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive \ + distclean-recursive maintainer-clean-recursive +am__recursive_targets = \ + $(RECURSIVE_TARGETS) \ + $(RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS) \ + $(am__extra_recursive_targets) +AM_RECURSIVE_TARGETS = $(am__recursive_targets:-recursive=) TAGS CTAGS \ + distdir distdir-am +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +# Read a list of newline-separated strings from the standard input, +# and print each of them once, without duplicates. Input order is +# *not* preserved. +am__uniquify_input = $(AWK) '\ + BEGIN { nonempty = 0; } \ + { items[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ + END { if (nonempty) { for (i in items) print i; }; } \ +' +# Make sure the list of sources is unique. This is necessary because, +# e.g., the same source file might be shared among _SOURCES variables +# for different programs/libraries. +am__define_uniq_tagged_files = \ + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + unique=`for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ + done | $(am__uniquify_input)` +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +am__relativize = \ + dir0=`pwd`; \ + sed_first='s,^\([^/]*\)/.*$$,\1,'; \ + sed_rest='s,^[^/]*/*,,'; \ + sed_last='s,^.*/\([^/]*\)$$,\1,'; \ + sed_butlast='s,/*[^/]*$$,,'; \ + while test -n "$$dir1"; do \ + first=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first" != "."; then \ + if test "$$first" = ".."; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_last"`/"$$dir2"; \ + dir0=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_butlast"`; \ + else \ + first2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first2" = "$$first"; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + else \ + dir2="../$$dir2"; \ + fi; \ + dir0="$$dir0"/"$$first"; \ + fi; \ + fi; \ + dir1=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + done; \ + reldir="$$dir2" +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +@USE_NLS_TRUE@SUBDIRS = l10n +DIST_SUBDIRS = l10n +HINTFILE = mc.hint +hintdir = $(pkgdatadir)/hints +hint_DATA = $(HINTFILE) + +# Files processed by configure don't need to be here +EXTRA_DIST = $(HINTFILE) +all: all-recursive + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hints/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hints/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hintDATA: $(hint_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hint_DATA)'; test -n "$(hintdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hintDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hint_DATA)'; test -n "$(hintdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) + +# This directory's subdirectories are mostly independent; you can cd +# into them and run 'make' without going through this Makefile. +# To change the values of 'make' variables: instead of editing Makefiles, +# (1) if the variable is set in 'config.status', edit 'config.status' +# (which will cause the Makefiles to be regenerated when you run 'make'); +# (2) otherwise, pass the desired values on the 'make' command line. +$(am__recursive_targets): + @fail=; \ + if $(am__make_keepgoing); then \ + failcom='fail=yes'; \ + else \ + failcom='exit 1'; \ + fi; \ + dot_seen=no; \ + target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ + case "$@" in \ + distclean-* | maintainer-clean-*) list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + *) list='$(SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + esac; \ + for subdir in $$list; do \ + echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ + if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ + dot_seen=yes; \ + local_target="$$target-am"; \ + else \ + local_target="$$target"; \ + fi; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ + || eval $$failcom; \ + done; \ + if test "$$dot_seen" = "no"; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) "$$target-am" || exit 1; \ + fi; test -z "$$fail" + +ID: $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); mkid -fID $$unique +tags: tags-recursive +TAGS: tags + +tags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + set x; \ + here=`pwd`; \ + if ($(ETAGS) --etags-include --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ + include_option=--etags-include; \ + empty_fix=.; \ + else \ + include_option=--include; \ + empty_fix=; \ + fi; \ + list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + test ! -f $$subdir/TAGS || \ + set "$$@" "$$include_option=$$here/$$subdir/TAGS"; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + shift; \ + if test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$*$$unique"; then :; else \ + test -n "$$unique" || unique=$$empty_fix; \ + if test $$# -gt 0; then \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + "$$@" $$unique; \ + else \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique; \ + fi; \ + fi +ctags: ctags-recursive + +CTAGS: ctags +ctags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + test -z "$(CTAGS_ARGS)$$unique" \ + || $(CTAGS) $(CTAGSFLAGS) $(AM_CTAGSFLAGS) $(CTAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique + +GTAGS: + here=`$(am__cd) $(top_builddir) && pwd` \ + && $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) \ + && gtags -i $(GTAGS_ARGS) "$$here" +cscopelist: cscopelist-recursive + +cscopelist-am: $(am__tagged_files) + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + case "$(srcdir)" in \ + [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) sdir="$(srcdir)" ;; \ + *) sdir=$(subdir)/$(srcdir) ;; \ + esac; \ + for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then \ + echo "$(subdir)/$$i"; \ + else \ + echo "$$sdir/$$i"; \ + fi; \ + done >> $(top_builddir)/cscope.files + +distclean-tags: + -rm -f TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done + @list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + $(am__make_dryrun) \ + || test -d "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || $(MKDIR_P) "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || exit 1; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(distdir)/$$subdir"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_distdir=$$reldir; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(top_distdir)"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_top_distdir=$$reldir; \ + echo " (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" distdir="$$new_distdir" \\"; \ + echo " am__remove_distdir=: am__skip_length_check=: am__skip_mode_fix=: distdir)"; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ + top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" \ + distdir="$$new_distdir" \ + am__remove_distdir=: \ + am__skip_length_check=: \ + am__skip_mode_fix=: \ + distdir) \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-recursive +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: installdirs-recursive +installdirs-am: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-recursive +install-exec: install-exec-recursive +install-data: install-data-recursive +uninstall: uninstall-recursive + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-recursive +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-recursive + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic distclean-tags + +dvi: dvi-recursive + +dvi-am: + +html: html-recursive + +html-am: + +info: info-recursive + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hintDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-recursive + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-recursive + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-recursive + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-recursive + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-recursive + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-recursive + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-recursive + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hintDATA + +.MAKE: $(am__recursive_targets) install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: $(am__recursive_targets) CTAGS GTAGS TAGS all all-am check \ + check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool cscopelist-am ctags \ + ctags-am distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool \ + distclean-tags distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hintDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs installdirs-am maintainer-clean \ + maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic \ + mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am ps ps-am tags tags-am uninstall \ + uninstall-am uninstall-hintDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/Makefile.am b/doc/hints/l10n/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95ad62d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +hintdir = $(pkgdatadir)/hints + +HINTFILES_LANG = $(srcdir)/mc.hint.* + +hint_DATA = $(HINTFILES_LANG) + +# Files processed by configure don't need to be here +EXTRA_DIST = $(HINTFILES_LANG) diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/Makefile.in b/doc/hints/l10n/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5309b2b --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,639 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hints/l10n +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)" +DATA = $(hint_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +hintdir = $(pkgdatadir)/hints +HINTFILES_LANG = $(srcdir)/mc.hint.* +hint_DATA = $(HINTFILES_LANG) + +# Files processed by configure don't need to be here +EXTRA_DIST = $(HINTFILES_LANG) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hints/l10n/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hints/l10n/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hintDATA: $(hint_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hint_DATA)'; test -n "$(hintdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hintDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hint_DATA)'; test -n "$(hintdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hintdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hintDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hintDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hintDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hintDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.be b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.be new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d77b227 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.be @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Падказка. «C-x t» перапісвае ў загадны радок назвы пазначаных файлаў. + +Падказка. «C-x p» перапісвае у загадны радок дзейны шлях. + +Падказка. «M-Tab» ці «Esc+Tab» дапаўняе набранае. Каб убачыць сьпіс, націсьніце двойчы. + +Падказка. «M-p» і «M-n» дае доступ да гісторыі загадаў. + +Падказка. Трэба ўставіць знак літаральна? Цісьніце «Control-q» і знак. + +Падказка. Стаміліся ад гэтах парадаў? Забараніце іх у мэню «Налады» → «Выгляд». + +Падказка. Каб пазначыць каталёґі, дадайце касую рысу ( / ) ў канец шаблёну. + +Падказка. Калі тэрмінал ня мае функцыянальных клявішаў, ужывайце «ESC+лічба». + +Падказка. Сайт «Міднайт Камандэра» — https://www.midnight-commander.org. + +Падказка. Пра хібы паведамляйце на mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org. + +Падказка. «Tab» пераключае дзейную панэль. + +Падказка. VFS — гэта зручна: націсьніце «Ўвод» на архіве, і ўбачыце яго зьмесьціва. + +Падказка. У нас ёсьць даведка ў man. + +Намінка. Хочаце перасоўвацца, як у «Lynx»? Вызначце гэта ў «Настаўленьнях». + +Падказка. Макрасы «%» працуюць нават у камандным радку. + +Падказка. «M-!» дазваляе выконваць праґрамы, а вывад бачыць у праглядніку. + +Падказка. Выгляд пераліку файлаў можна зьмяніць — глядзіце «man mc». + +Падказка. «%D» і «%T» выводзіць каталёґ насупраць і пазначаныя ў ім файлы. + +Падказка. Хочаце звычайную абалонку? Цісьніце «C-o», а каб вярнуцца — «C-o» яшчэ раз. + +Падказка. Каб хутчэй набіраць загады «cd …», вызначце зьменную «CDPATH». + +Падказка. Калі хочаце бачыць схаваныя файлы «.*», вызначце гэта ў «Настаўленьнях». + +Падказка. Хочаце бачыць файлы адноўкі «*~»? Вызначце гэта ў «Настаўленьнях». + +Падказка. Ва ўсіх радках уводу і дыялёґах можна дапаўняць: націсьніце «M-Tab». + +Падказка. На павольных тэрміналах можа дапамагчы пазнака «-s». + +Намінка. Шукаць файл: кнопка «На панэль» дазваляе працаваць са знойдзеным. + +Падказка. Калі патрэбны складаны пошук, ужывайце загад «На вонкавую панэль». + +Падказка. Каб хутка зьмяніць каталёґ, калі набіраеце загад, цісьніце «M-c». + +Падказка: загады абалонкі могуць не працаваць на немясцовых файлавых сыстэмах. + +Падказка. «C-y» вяртае страчаны тэкст. + +Падказка. Пэўныя клявішы не працуюць? Зірніце «Налады» → «Вывучыць клявішы». + +Падказка. Каб пабачыць вывад загаду ў праглядніку, цісьніце «M-!» + +Падказка. «F13» (або «Shift-F3») праглядае файл наўпрост. + +Падказка. Зьменная «EDITOR» вызначае рэдактар, які выклікаецца праз «F4». + +Падказка. Зьменныя «VIEWER» або «PAGER» вызначаюць вонкавы прагляднік. + +Падказка. Забараніць спробы пацьвярджаць можна ў «Наладах» → «Пацьвярджаць». + +Падказка. Пераскокваць да каталёґаў, якія часта ўжываюцца, можна праз па «C-\». + +Падказка. Можна ўвайсьці на FTP ананімна, набраўшы «cd ftp://machine.edu» + +Падказка. «Midnight Commander» мае ўбудаваны FTP — глядзіце «Панэль» → «Злучыцца праз FTP». + +Падказка. «M-t» хутка зьмяняе выгляд пераліку ў панэлі. + +Падказка. На FTPS можна пазначаць імя карыстальніка: «cd ftp://user@machine.edu». + +Падказка. Можна зазірнуць у зьмесьціва архіву RPM, калі націснуць на ім «Увод». + +Падказка. Каб у дыялёґу выбару пазначыць каталёґі, дадайце / . + +Падказка. Каб выразаць і ўстаўляць мышкаю, можа спатрэбіцца націснуць і трымаць «Shift». + +Падказка. Захавайце сайты FTP, якія часта наведваеце: націсьніце «C-\». diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.bg b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.bg new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f67f969 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.bg @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Подсказка: Използвайте C-x за копиране на имената на избраните файлове на командния ред. + +Подсказка: Използвайте C-x за копиране на имената на избраните файлове на командния ред. + +Подсказка: Дописване: използвайте M-Tab (или Esc+Tab). Натиснете го повторно за списък. + +Подсказка: Използвайте M-p и M-n за достъп до историята на командите. + +Подсказка: Ако искате да ползвате знак буквално, ползвайте Control-q и знака. + +Подсказка: Ако не искате тези съобщения, ги изключете от Настройки → Разположение. + +Подсказка: Изберете директории като добавите наклонена черта на края на поредицата от метасимволи. + +Подсказка: Ако терминалът няма функционални клавиши, използвайте последователността ESC+число. + +Подсказка: Главната страница на GNU Midnight Commander е https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Подсказка: Молим, изпращайте всякакви доклади за грешки на mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Подсказка: Tab преминава към другия панел. + +Подсказка: Удобства при виртуалните ФС: настинете ENTER върху архив tar, за да разгледате съдържанието му. + +Подсказка: Страницата на MC в ръководството на потребителя е много полезна, вижте я. + +Подсказка: Ако искате навигация като в Lynx, задайте това в Настройки…. + +Подсказка: Макросите с % работят дори и на командния ред. + +Подсказка: M-! позволява да изпълните команда и да видите изхода във визуализатора. + +Подсказка: Форматът за показване на файлове може да се настрои. За подробности: „man mc“. + +Подсказка: %D/%T се заменя с избраните файлове от отсрещната директория. + +Подсказка: За да работите с обвивка, натиснете C-o, и се отново върнете обратно в Midnight Commander пак с C-o . + +Подсказка: Задаването на променливата CDPATH спестява време при командите за смяна на директория. + +Подсказка: Ако искате да виждате скритите (.*) файлове в панела, задайте това в Настройки на панел…. + +Подсказка: Ако искате да виждате резервните (*~) файлове в панела, задайте това в Настройки на панел…. + +Подсказка: Дописването работи с всички входни полета във всички диалози. Просто натиснете M-Tab. + +Подсказка: На бавни терминали опцията -s може да помогне. + +Подсказка: Търсене на файл: може да оперирате върху намерените файлове с командата за Външен панел. + +Подсказка: Искате сложни търсения? Използвайте командата за Външен панел. + +Подсказка: За промяна на директория по време на писане на команда, ползвайте M-c (Бърза смяна — cd). + +Подсказка: Командите на обвивката не работят, когато не сте в локална файлова система. + +Подсказка: Може да възстановите текст с C-y. + +Подсказка: Ако някои от клавишите не работят, погледнете в Настройки → Задаване на клавиши…. + +Подсказка: За да разглеждате изходната информация на команда във визуализатора, използвайте M-!. + +Подсказка: F13 (или Shift-F3) отваря визуализатора в режим без обработка. + +Подсказка: Може да зададете редактор чрез F4 с променливата на обвивката EDITOR. + +Подсказка: Може да зададете външен визуализатор с променливите на обвивката VIEWER и PAGER. + +Подсказка: Може да изключите всички запитвания за потвърждение чрез Настройки → Потвърждения…. + +Подсказка: Преминавайте в често използваните директории с C-\. + +Подсказка: За да установите връзка по FTP, ползвайте адрес като: „cd ftp://machine.edu“. + +Подсказка: FTP (и др.) са вграден в Midnight Commander, погледнете менюто Вляво/Вдясно → FTP. + +Подсказка: M-t променя режима на показване на списъка с файлове. + +Подсказка: За да укажете потребителско име при връзка по FTP, ползвайте адрес като: „cd ftp://ПОТРЕБИТЕЛ@machine.edu“. + +Подсказка: Разглеждайте съдържанието на файлове във формат RPM като натиснете ENTER върху тях. + +Подсказка: За да изберете директории в диалога за избор, добавете наклонена черта. + +Подсказка: За изрязване и поставяне с мишката трябва да задържите клавиша SHIFT. + +Подсказка: Клавиш за често използваните ftp сайтове: натиснете C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ca b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ca new file mode 100644 index 0000000..811a881 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ca @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Consell: Empreu «Ctrl-x» per a copiar els fitxers marcats a la línia d'ordres. + +Consell: Empreu «Ctrl-x» per a copiar tot el camí a la línia d'ordres. + +Consell: Compleció: empreu «M-Tab» (o «Esc+Tab»). Dues vegades per a mostrar una llista. + +Consell: Empreu «M-p» i «M-n» per accedir a l'historial de les ordres. + +Consell: Us cal un caràcter especial? Empreu «Ctrl-q» i el caràcter. + +Consell: Cansat d'aquests missatges? Es treuen des del menú «Opcions/Format». + +Consell: Seleccionar directoris: afegiu «/» al final del patró de coincidència. + +Consell: Si no funcionen les tecles de funció, empreu la seqüència «ESC+número». + +Consell: La pàgina inicial del Midnight Commander de GNU és https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Consell: Si us plau, envieu qualsevol informe d'error a «mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org». + +Consell: El tabulador canvia de plafó. + +Consell: El millor VFS: toqueu «Retorn» en un fitxer TAR per examinar el seu contingut. + +Consell: També tenim una bona pàgina de manual. + +Consell: Voleu navegar a l'estil del Lynx? Establiu-ho al diàleg de configuració. + +Consell: Les macros amb % funcionen fins i tot a la línia d'ordres. + +Consell: Amb «M-!» podreu executar programes i veure la sortida en el visor. + +Consell: El format del llistat es pot personalitzar, per a més detalls feu «man mc». + +Consell: %D/%T representa els fitxers marcats al directori oposat. + +Consell: Voleu un intèrpret d'ordres pla? Premeu «Ctrl-o», el mateix per tornar al MC. + +Consell: Establint la variable CDPATH podreu estalviar pulsacions de teclat en les ordres «cd». + +Consell: Si voleu veure els fitxers «.*», digueu-ho al diàleg de configuració. + +Consell: Voleu veure els fitxers de còpia de seguretat «.~»? Establiu-ho al diàleg de configuració. + +Consell: La compleció funciona en totes les línies d'entrada en tots els diàlegs. Simplement premeu «M-Tab». + +Consell: En terminals lents, l'indicador «-s» pot ajudar. + +Consell: Trobar fitxers: podeu treballar en trobar fitxers amb el botó «Quadre de cerca». + +Consell: Voleu fer cerques complexes? Empreu l'ordre «Quadre de cerca externa». + +Consell: Canvieu a meitat de camí del directori escrivint una ordre, empreu «M-c» («cd» ràpid). + +Сonsell: Les ordres de l'intèrpret d'ordres no funcionaran quan s'està en un sistema de fitxers no local. + +Consell: Recupereu el text esborrat amb «Ctrl-y». + +Consell: Alguna de les tecles no funciona? Mireu «Opcions/Aprendre les tecles». + +Consell: Mireu la sortida d'una ordre al visor, empreu «M-!». + +Consell: «F13» (o «Maj-F3») invocareu el visor en el mode sense format. + +Consell: Podeu especificar l'editor per a «F4» amb la variable d'entorn EDITOR. + +Consell: Podeu especificar el visor extern amb la variable d'entorn VIEWER o PAGER. + +Consell: Podeu inhabilitar tots els missatges de confirmació a «Opcions/Confirmació». + +Consell: Aneu als directoris emprats sovint amb «Ctrl-\». + +Consell: Podeu fer FTP anònim amb mc escrivint «cd ftp://màquina.edu». + +Consell: L'FTP està integrat al Midnight Commander, comproveu el menú «Fitxer/Enllaç FTP». + +Consell: «M-t» canvia ràpidament entre els modes de llistat. + +Consell: Podeu especificar el nom d'usuari quan feu FTPS: «cd ftp://usuari@màquina.domini» + +Consell: Podeu navegar pels fitxers RPM prement «Retorn» a sobre d'un fitxer RPM. + +Consell: Per a marcar directoris al diàleg de selecció, afegiu-l'hi un «/». + +Consell: Per a tallar i enganxar amb el ratolí, podria requerir mantenir premuda la tecla «Maj». + +Consell: Els FTP visitats sovint es poden desar a Favorits: escriviu «Ctrl-\». diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.cs b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b2ae60 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.cs @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Tip: Ctrl-x t vloží názvy označených souborů na příkazový řádek. + +Tip: Ctrl-x p vloží na příkazový řádek název složky, ve které se nacházíte. + +Tip: Doplňování: použijte Meta-Tab (nebo Esc+Tab). Dalším stiskem se vypíše seznam možností. + +Tip: V historii příkazů se pohybuje pomocí Meta-p a Meta-n. + +Tip: Chcete zadat speciální znak (např. tabulátor)? Použijte Ctrl-q a pak daný znak. + +Tip: Nechcete už vidět tipy? Vypněte je v nabídce Nastavení/Rozvržení. + +Tip: Složky vyberete přidáním lomítka na konec vzoru pro hledání shody v názvu. + +Tip: Pokud váš terminál nezná nebo nemá funkční (F1-12) klávesy, použijte Esc+číslo. + +Tip: Domovská stránka GNU Midnight Commander je: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Tip: Chyby hlaste na mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org (v angličtině). + +Tip: Pomocí klávesy Tab přejdete na další panel. + +Tip: Stiskem Enter na souboru .tar nebo .tar.gz si prohlédnete jeho obsah. + +Tip: Existuje také manuálová stránka [mc(1)]. + +Tip: Přejete si klávesy stejně jako v prohlížeči Lynx? Přepněte si to v Nastavení. + +Tip: Makra uvozená % fungují i na příkazovém řádku. + +Tip: Pomocí Meta-! můžete spustit příkaz a prohlédnout si výstup v prohlížeči. + +Tip: Zobrazení v panelech může být upraveno. Z „man mc“ se dozvíte více. + +Tip: %D/%T se rozvine na soubory označené v druhém panelu. + +Tip: Chcete opět váš shell? Stiskněte Ctrl-o. Do MC se vrátíte opět přes Ctrl-o. + +Tip: Nastavením proměnné CDPATH si můžete ušetřit psaní na klávesnici. + +Tip: Pokud chcete vidět soubory začínající tečkou, povolte to v Nastavení. + +Tip: Chcete vidět zálohy svých souborů (končí ~)? Použijte Nastavení. + +Tip: Doplňování funguje ve vstupních řádcích všech dialogů. Použijte Meta-Tab. + +Tip: Na terminálech s pomalou odezvou zkuste parametr -s (mc -s). + +Tip: S nalezenými soubory je možné dále pracovat. Stiskněte tlačítko Panelizace. + +Tip: Pro opravdu složité vyhledávání zkuste příkaz příkaz Externí panelizace. + +Tip: Pokud chcete změnit složku při práci na příkazovém řádku, zkuste Meta-c. + +Tip: Příkazy shellu nefungují, pokud nepracujete na lokálním systému souborů. + +Tip: Smazaný text obnovíte Ctrl-y. + +Tip: Pokud některé klávesy nefungují, použijte menu Nastavení/Učení kláves. + +Tip: K zobrazení výstupu příkazu v okně použijte Meta-! + +Tip: F13 (nebo Shift-F3) vyvolá prohlížení bez zpracování obsahu souboru. + +Tip: Editor pro klávesu F4 určíte pomocí proměnné prostředí EDITOR. + +Tip: Externí prohlížeč určíte proměnnými VIEWER nebo PAGER + +Tip: Všechny žádosti o potvrzení je možné vypnout v Nastavení/Potvrzování. + +Tip: K seznamu často používaných složek se můžete dostat i přes Ctrl-\. + +Tip: Na anonymní FTP se připojíte pomocí „cd ftp://stroj.domena.cz“. + +Tip: MC má vestavěný FTP. Podívejte se do nabídka Levý/FTP spojení na počítač. + +Tip: Meta-t rychle mění formát zobrazení panelů. + +Tip: Při FTP spojení můžete zadat i jméno: „cd ftp://jmeno@stroj.domena.cz“. + +Tip: RPM soubory si prohlédnete stiskem Enter. + +Tip: Pro označení složek v dialogovém okně výběru souborů, přidejte lomítko. + +Tip: Chcete-li použít myš pro zkopírování nebo vložení textu, stiskněte Shift. + +Tip: V seznamu složek můžete mít i často navštěvované FTP servery. Zkuste Ctrl-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.da b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.da new file mode 100644 index 0000000..44f2755 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.da @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Fif: Brug C-x t til at kopiere filnavne til kommandolinjen. + +Fif: Brug C-x p for at kopiere det nuværende stinavn til kommandolinjen. + +Fif: Fuldførelse: brug M-Tab (eller Esc+Tab). Skriv det to gange for at få en liste. + +Fif: Brug M-p og M-n for at tilgå kommandohistorikken. + +Fif: Har du brug for at sætte citationstegn om et tegn? Brug Control-q og tegnet. + +Fif: Træt af disse meddelelser? Slå dem fra i Indstillinger/Layout-menuen. + +Fif: Valg af mapper: tilføj en skråstreg til slutningen af det matchende mønster. + +Fif: Hvis din terminal mangler funktionstaster, så rug ESC+talsekvensen. + +Fif: Hjemmesiden for GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Fif: Send venligst eventuelle fejlrappporter til mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Fif: Tabulator skifter dit nuværende panel. + +Fif: Cool VFS: tryk på enter på en tar-fil for at undersøge dens indhold. + +Fif: Vi har også en fin manualside. + +Fif: Vil du have navigation i Lynx-stil? Sæt det i konfigurationsdialogen. + +Fif: %-makroer virker også på kommandolinjen. + +Fif: M-! giver dig mulighed for at udføre programmer og se outputtet i fremviseren. + +Fif: Fillistningsformatet kan tilpasses; brug "man mc" for detaljer. + +Fif: %D/%T udvidder til de mærkede filer i den modsatte mappe. + +Fif: Vil du have en almindelig skal? Tryk på C-o, og vend tilbage til MC med C-o. + +Fif: Hvis CDPATH-variablen sættes kan du spare tastetryk i cd-kommandoer. + +Fif: Hvis du vil se dine .*-filer, så sig det i konfigurationsdialogen. + +Fif: Vil du se dine *~-backupfiler? Sæt det i konfigurationsdialogen. + +Fif: Fuldførelse virker på alle inputlinjer i alle dialoger. Tryk blot på M-Tab. + +Fif: På langsomme maskiner kan flaget -s hjælpe. + +Fif: Find fil: du kan arbejde på de fundne filer med Panelisér-knappen. + +Fif: Vil du foretage komplekse søgninger? Brug Ekstern panelisering-kommandoen. + +Fif: Brug M-c (hurtig cd), til at skifte mappe halvvejs gennem indtastningen af en kommando. + +Fif: Skalkommandoer virker ikke når du er på et ikke-lokalt filsystem. + +Fif: Bring tekst tilbage fra de døde med C-y. + +Fif: Er der nogen af dine taster som ikke virker? Kig i Indstillinger/Lær taster. + +Fif: Brug M-!, til at se på outputtet af en kommando i fremviseren. + +Fif: F13 (eller Skift-F3) viser fremviseren i rå tilstand. + +Fif: Du kan angive editoren til F4 med skalvariablen EDITOR. + +Fif: Du kan angive den eksterne fremviser med skalvariablerne VIEWER eller PAGER. + +Fif: Du kan deaktivere alle anmodninger om bekræftelse i Indstillinger/Bekræftelse. + +Fif: Hop hurtigt til mapper som ofte bruges med C-\. + +Fif: Du kan brug anonym FTP i mc ved at skrive 'cd ftp://maskine.edu' + +Fif: FTP er indbygget i Midnight Commander, tjek Fil/FTP-link-menuen. + +Fif: M-t ændre hurtigt listningstilstanden. + +Fif: Du kan angive brugernavnet når ftps bruges: 'cd ftp://bruger@maskine.edu' + +Fif: Du kan gennemse RPM-filer ved at trykke på enter, på en rpm-fil. + +Fif: Tilføj en skråstreg, til at markere mapper i den valgte dialogboks. + +Fif: Brug at klip og indsæt med musen kan kræve at skift-tasten holdes nede + +Fif: Tilknyt taster i hotlisten med ftp-steder som ofte bruges: skriv C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.de b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.de new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b51509 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.de @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hinweis: Benutze C-x t, um markierte Dateinamen in die Kommandozeile zu kopieren. + +Hinweis: Benutze C-x p, um den aktuellen Pfadnamen in die Kommandozeile zu kopieren. + +Hinweis: Vervollständigung: Benutze M-Tabulator (oder Esc+Tabulator). Drücke zweimal, um eine Liste zu bekommen. + +Hinweis: Benutze M-p und M-n für die Befehlshistorie. + +Hinweis: Möchtest du ein Zeichen zitieren? Benutze C-q und das Zeichen. + +Hinweis: Langweilen dich diese Nachrichten? Stelle sie in den Optionen im Layoutmenü ab. + +Hinweis: Verzeichnisse auswählen: Füge am Ende des Mustervergleichs einen Schrägstrich hinzu. + +Hinweis: Wenn dein Terminal keine Funktionstasten unterstützt, benutze die Kombination Esc+Nummer. + +Hinweis: Die Homepage von GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hinweis: Bitte sende alle Fehlerberichte an mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hinweis: Tabulator wechselt das aktuelle Panel. + +Hinweis: Cooles VFS: Drücke Enter auf einer TAR-Datei, um den Inhalt zu sehen. + +Hinweis: Wir haben auch eine schöne Handbuchseite. + +Hinweis: Möchtest du eine Lynx-artige Navigation? Setze dies im Konfigurationsfenster. + +Hinweis: %-Makros funktionieren auch auf der Kommandozeile. + +Hinweis: M-! erlaubt es, Programme zu starten und die Ausgabe im Viewer zu sehen. + +Hinweis: Das Format der Dateiliste kann angepasst werden; siehe "man mc" für Details. + +Hinweis: %D/%T wird auf die markierten Dateien im gegenüberliegenden Verzeichnis erweitert. + +Hinweis: Möchtest du eine einfache Shell? Drücke C-o, zurück zum MC nochmals C-o. + +Hinweis: Das Setzen der Variablen CDPATH kann dir in cd-Kommandos Tastenschläge ersparen. + +Hinweis: Wenn du die .*-Dateien sehen möchtest, setze dies im Konfigurationsdialog. + +Hinweis: Möchtest du die *~-Sicherungsdateien sehen? Setze dies im Konfigurationsdialog. + +Hinweis: Vervollständigung funktioniert auf allen Eingabezeilen in allen Dialogen. Drücke M-Tabulator. + +Hinweis: Bei langsamen Terminals hilft vielleicht der Parameter -s. + +Hinweis: Datei suchen: Du kannst mit den Suchergebnissen über das Befehlsmenü arbeiten. + +Hinweis: Möchtest du eine erweiterte Suche? Benutze den Menübefehl "Datei suchen". + +Hinweis: Um das Verzeichnis auf halbem Weg durch Eingabe eines Befehls zu ändern, verwende M-c (schnelles cd). + +Hinweis: Shell-Befehle funktionieren nicht, wenn du auf einem nichtlokalen Dateisystem bist. + +Hinweis: Bringe den Text von einem totem Display zurück mit C-y. + +Hinweis: Funktionieren einige Tasten nicht? Sieh dir das Menü Optionen / Tasten lernen an. + +Hinweis: Benutze M-!, um die Ausgabe eines Befehls im Anzeiger zu sehen. + +Hinweis: F13 (oder Shift-F3) ruft den Betrachter im RAW-Modus auf. + +Hinweis: Du kannst den Editor für F4 mit der Shellvariable EDITOR setzen. + +Hinweis: Du kannst den externen Viewer mit den Shellvariablen VIEWER oder PAGER setzen. + +Hinweis: Du kannst alle Bestätigungsanfragen unter Optionen / Nachfragen deaktivieren. + +Hinweis: Springe mit C-\ direkt zu häufig verwendeten Verzeichnissen. + +Hinweis: Du kannst eine anonyme FTP-Verbindung im MC mit der Eingabe von 'cd ftp://machine.edu' starten. + +Hinweis: FTP ist im Midnight Commander eingebaut, Menüeintrag: Datei/FTP-Verbindung. + +Hinweis: M-t wechselt schnell den Listenmodus. + +Hinweis: Du kannst den Benutzernamen verwenden, wenn du bei FTP 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' eingibst. + +Hinweis: Du kannst eine RPM-Datei mit Enter auf die Datei durchsuchen. + +Hinweis: Um Verzeichnisse in der Auswahlbox zu markieren, füge einen Schrägstrich hinzu. + +Hinweis: Um mit der Maus Ausschneiden und Einfügen nutzen zu können, muss evtl. die Umschalttaste gedrückt werden. + +Hinweis: Speichere häufig verwendete FTP-Seiten mit C-\ in der Hotlist. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.el b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.el new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b931ebe --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.el @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: Use C-x t to copy tagged file names to the command line. + +Συμβουλή: Πατώντας C-x p μπορείτε να αντιγράψετε την τρέχουσα τοποθεσία στη γραμμή εντολών. + +Συμβουλή: Πατήστε M-Tab (ή Esc+Tab) για συμπλήρωση. Πατήστε το δύο φορές για να δείτε μια λίστα. + +Συμβουλή: Πατήστε M-p και M-n για να δείτε το ιστορικό εντολών. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +Hint: Tired of these messages? Turn them off from the Options/Layout menu. + +Hint: Selecting directories: add a slash to the end of the matching pattern. + +Hint: If your terminal lacks functions keys, use the ESC+number sequence. + +Συμβουλή: Η ιστοσελίδα του GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Συμβουλή: Παρακαλούμε στείλτε μας αναφορές σφαλμάτων στο mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Tab changes your current panel. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +Hint: We also have a nice manual page. + +Συμβουλή: Θέλετε περιήγηση στο στυλ του Lynx; Ρυθμίστε το στο διάλογο Ρυθμίσεις. + +Hint: % macros work even on the command line. + +Συμβουλή: Το M-! θα σας επιτρέψει να εκτελέσετε προγράμματα και να δείτε την έξοδο στον προβολέα. + +Συμβουλή: Η μορφή της λίστας αρχείων μπορεί να προσαρμοστεί. Πατήστε "man mc" για λεπτομέρειες. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +Συμβουλή: Θέλετε ένα σκέτο κέλυφος; Πατήστε C-o, και ελάτε πίσω στο MC με C-o ξανά. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +Συμβουλή: Αν θέλετε να βλέπετε τα αρχεία .* , πείτε το στο διάλογο ρυθμίσεων. + +Συμβουλή: Θέλετε να βλέπετε τα αρχεία *~; Ρυθμίστε το στο διάλογο ρυθμίσεων + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +Συμβουλή: Για αργά τερματικά ίσως μπορεί να βοηθήσει η σημαία -s. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelize button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelize command. + +Συμβουλή: Για να αλλάξετε κατάλογο ενώ έχετε ήδη ξεκινήσει να πληκτρολογείτε μία εντολή, χρησιμοποιήστε το M-c (γρήγορο cd). + +Συμβουλή: Οι εντολές κελύφους δε θα λειτουργήσουν όταν βρίσκεστε σε ένα μη τοπικό σύστημα αρχείων. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +Συμβουλή: Μήπως κάποια από τα πλήκτρα σας δε λειτουργούν; Δείτε το Επιλογές/Εκμάθηση πλήκτρων. + +Συμβουλή: Για να δείτε την έξοδο μιας εντολής στον προβολέα, χρησιμοποιήστε το M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +Hint: You may specify the editor for F4 with the shell variable EDITOR. + +Συμβουλή: Μπορείτε να ρυθμίσετε τον εξωτερικό προβολέα με τις μεταβλητές κελύφους VIEWER ή PAGER. + +Συμβουλή: Μπορείτε να απενεργοποιήσετε όλα τα ερωτήματα επιβεβαίωσης στο Επιλογές/Επιβεβαίωση + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Συμβουλή: Μπορείτε να κάνετε ανώνυμο FTP με το mc πληκτρολογώντας 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Συμβουλή: Το Midnight Commander έχει ενσωματωμένο FTP, δείτε το μενού Αρχείο/FTP. + +Συμβουλή: Το M-t αλλάζει γρήγορα τη λειτουργία λίστας. + +Συμβουλή: Μπορείτε να ρυθμίσετε το όνομα χρήστη όταν κάνετε ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Συμβουλή: Μπορείτε να περιηγηθείτε σε αρχεία RPM πατώντας enter πάνω σε ένα αρχείο rpm. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialog box, append a slash. + +Συμβουλή: Η χρήση αντιγραφής και επικόλλησης με το ποντίκι μπορεί να απαιτεί να πατάτε το πλήκτρο shift + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.en_GB b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.en_GB new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b9bc8a --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.en_GB @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: Use C-x t to copy tagged file names to the command line. + +Hint: Use C-x p to copy the current pathname to the command line. + +Hint: Completion: use M-Tab (or Esc+Tab). Type it twice to get a list. + +Hint: Use M-p and M-n to access the command history. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +Hint: Tired of these messages? Turn them off from the Options/Layout menu. + +Hint: Selecting directories: add a slash to the end of the matching pattern. + +Hint: If your terminal lacks functions keys, use the ESC+number sequence. + +Hint: The homepage of GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Please send any bug reports to mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Tab changes your current panel. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +Hint: We also have a nice manual page. + +Hint: Do you want Lynx-style navigation? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: % macros work even on the command line. + +Hint: M-! will allow you to execute programs and see the output in the viewer. + +Hint: The file listing format can be customised; do "man mc" for details. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +Hint: Want your plain shell? Press C-o, and get back to MC with C-o again. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +Hint: If you want to see your .* files, say so in the Configuration dialogue. + +Hint: Want to see your *~ backup files? Set it in the Configuration dialogue. + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +Hint: On slow terminals the -s flag may help. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelise button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelise command. + +Hint: To change directory halfway through typing a command, use M-c (quick cd). + +Hint: Shell commands will not work when you are on a non-local file system. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +Hint: Are some of your keys not working? Look at Options/Learn keys. + +Hint: To look at the output of a command in the viewer, use M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +Hint: You may specify the editor for F4 with the shell variable EDITOR. + +Hint: You may specify the external viewer with the shell vars VIEWER or PAGER. + +Hint: You can disable all requests for confirmation in Options/Confirmation. + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Hint: You can do anonymous FTP with mc by typing 'cd ftp://machine.example.com' + +Hint: FTP is built in the Midnight Commander, check the File/FTP link menu. + +Hint: M-t changes quickly the listing mode. + +Hint: You can specify the username when doing ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.example.com' + +Hint: You can browse RPM files by tapping enter on top of an rpm file. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialogue box, append a slash. + +Hint: To use the mouse cut and paste may require holding the shift key + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.eo b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.eo new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d10e18 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.eo @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Konsilo: Stir-x t por kopii markitajn dosiernomojn al la komandlinio. + +Konsilo: Stir-x p por kopii la nunan vojnomon al la komandlinio. + +Konsilo: Reg-Tabo (aŭ Esk-Tabo) por finigi tajpatan frazon. Dufoje por listo. + +Konsilo: Reg-p kaj Reg-n por atingi la komandan historion. + +Konsilo: Stir-q por citi signon. + +Konsilo: Ĉu vi ne plu volas vidi ĉi tiujn mesaĝojn? Malaktivigi ilin en Agordo/Aranĝo. + +Konsilo: Aldoni oblikvon al la fino de ŝablono por elekti dosierujon. + +Konsilo: Se via terminalo malhavas funkciajn klavojn, uzu la kombinon Esk+numero. + +Konsilo: La ĉefpaĝo de Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Konsilo: Sendi raportojn pri eraroj (anglalingve) al mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Konsilo: Tabo ŝanĝas la nunan flankon. + +Konsilo: Mirinde, klavi la Enen-klavon super tar-dosiero por esplori ĝian enhavon. + +Konsilo: Ankaŭ ekzistas manlibra paĝo. + +Konsilo: Ĉu vi volas navigadon laŭ la modelo de Lynx? Agordi en la agorda dialogujo. + +Konsilo: makrooj kun % funkcias eĉ ĉe la komandlinio. + +Konsilo: Reg-! por plenumigi programon kaj vidi la eligon en la dokumento-legilo. + +Konsilo: La aranĝon en la dosiera listo agordeblas. + +Konsilo: %D/%T etendiĝas al la markitaj dosieroj en la kontraŭa dosierujo. + +Konsilo: Stir-o por inversigi inter la flankoj kaj ŝelo. + +Konsilo: Agordi la medivariablon CDPATH por malplia klavado. + +Konsilo: Deklari en la agorda dialogujo tian, se vi volas vidi kaŝitajn dosierojn. + +Konsilo: Deklari en la agorda dialogujo tian, se vi volas vidi provizorajn dosierojn. + +Konsilo: Kompletigo funkcias ĉe tekstaj kampoj en ĉiuj dialogujoj. Premu: Reg-Tabo. + +Konsilo: La komandlinia parametro -s eble estus helpa por malrapidaj terminaloj. + +Konsilo: Eblas prilabori la trovitajn dosierojn per la butono "Flankigi". + +Konsilo: Ĉu vi volas fari malsimplajn serĉojn? "Eksterigi Flankojn" uzeblas. + +Konsilo: Reg-c por ŝanĝi dosierujon dum tajpi komandon. + +Konsilo: Ŝelaj komandoj ne funkcias ĉe foraj dosiersistemoj. + +Konsilo: Stir-y por revivigi tekston. + +Konsilo: Agordu/Lernu klavojn por certigi, ke ĉiuj klavoj funkcias. + +Konsilo: Reg-! por rigardi la eligon de komando en la dokumento-legilo. + +Konsilo: F13 (aŭ Reg-F3) por la dokumento-legilo en kruda reĝimo. + +Konsilo: Specifi la tekstoredaktilon por F4 per la medivariablo EDITOR. + +Konsilo: Specifi la eksteran dokumento-legilon per la medivariablon VIEWER aŭ PAGER. + +Konsilo: Ĉiuj konfirmo-petoj estas malaktivigeblaj en Agordo/Konfirmo. + +Konsilo: Stir-\ por ofte uzataj dosierujoj. + +Konsilo: 'cd ftp://machine.edu' por sennoma FTP-konekto al machine.org + +Konsilo: Dosiero/FTP por apriora FTP-kliento. + +Konsilo: Reg-t por rapide ŝanĝi la listan reĝimon. + +Konsilo: Specifi la salutnomon ĉe FTP-servilo per 'cd ftp://salutnomo@machine.edu' + +Konsilo: Klavi la enen-klavon super RPM-dosieron por rigardi ĝian enhavon. + +Konsilo: Por marki dosierujojn ĉe elektiloj almetu oblikvon. + +Konsilo: Eble vi devas premadi la registrumon por kopii kaj alglui per la muso + +Konsilo: Stir-\ por memori oftajn FTP-servilojn. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.es b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.es new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7060f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.es @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Consejo: Ctrl-x t pone los archivos marcados en la línea de órdenes. + +Consejo: Ctrl-x p copia la trayectoria completa en la línea de órdenes. + +Consejo: Alt-Tab (o Esc+Tab) completa nombres; dos veces y muestra una lista. + +Consejo: Alt-p y Alt-n permiten acceder a la historia de órdenes. + +Consejo: Para introducir un carácter especial: Ctrl-q y el carácter. + +Consejo: ¿Harto de mensajitos? Se quitan en el menú Opciones/Presentación. + +Consejo: Para seleccionar directorios añadir «/» tras el patrón a buscar. + +Consejo: Si no funcionan las teclas de función, ESC+número sirve. + +Consejo: El sitio oficial del Midnight Commander es https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Consejo: Comunique cualquier defecto a mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Consejo: El tabulador cambia de panel. + +Consejo: ¡El mejor VFS! Al «entrar» en un archivo comprimido se ve su contenido. + +Consejo: El Midnight Commander tiene manual: «man mc» + +Consejo: ¿Desea navegar con las flechas al estilo Lynx? Está en Configuración. + +Consejo: Las macros con % funcionan incluso en la línea de órdenes. + +Consejo: Con Alt-! puede ejecutar programas y ver la salida en el visor. + +Consejo: El formato del listado se puede personalizar; «man mc» para ver pistas. + +Consejo: %D/%T representa los archivos seleccionados en el panel opuesto. + +Consejo: Con C-o se puede ir y volver a la shell de siempre. + +Consejo: La variable CDPATH ahorra teclas al cambiar de directorios. + +Consejo: Para ver los archivos «.*» basta indicarlo en Configuración. + +Consejo: Para ver los archivos de seguridad tipo *~ ir a Configuración. + +Consejo: Se puede auto-completar nombres también en los diálogos con Alt-Tab. + +Consejo: En terminales lentos la opción -s puede ayudar. + +Consejo: Puede «Llevar al panel» los resultados de «Buscar archivos» y usarlos. + +Consejo: Puede hacer y guardar búsquedas complejas con «Búsquedas externas». + +Consejo: Con M-c cambiar de directorio es un poco más cómodo. + +Consejo: Las instrucciones de la Shell no funcionan fuera del sistema local. + +Consejo: Con C-y puede recuperar texto eliminado. + +Consejo: ¿Alguna tecla rebelde? Puede educarla con «Redefinir teclas». + +Consejo: Para ver la salida de una orden por el visor M-! + +Consejo: F13 (o Mayúsculas-F3) invoca el visor en modo primitivo, sin formatos. + +Consejo: F4 puede usar cualquier editor que indiquemos en la variable EDITOR. + +Consejo: Se puede usar un visor externo indicado en la variable PAGER. + +Consejo: Para deshabilitar los mensajes de Confirmación vaya al menú Opciones. + +Consejo: Apunte los directorios y sitios más usados en «Favoritos». + +Consejo: Para hacer un FTP anónimo con mc: «cd ftp://maquina.dominio» + +Consejo: FTP está integrado en Midnight Commander, en «conexión por FTP...» + +Consejo: M-t permite cambiar rápidamente entre varios modos de listado. + +Consejo: Para hacer un FTP no-anónimo: «cd ftp://usuario@maquina.dominio» + +Consejo: Para examinar un archivo RPM basta pulsar «intro» sobre él. + +Consejo: Para marcar directorios en el dialogo de selección, añadirle «/». + +Consejo: Para copiar y pegar con ratón mantener presionada la tecla MAYÚSCULAS. + +Consejo: Los ftp habituales se pueden guardar en «Favoritos». diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.et b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.et new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7c19b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.et @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Vihje: Kasuta C-x, et kopeerida märgitud failide nimed käsureale. + +Vihje: Kasuta C-x p, et kopeerida aktiivne otsingurada käsureale. + +Vihje: Lõpetamiseks kasuta M-Tab (või Esc-Tab). Topeltsisestus kuvab listi. + +Vihje: Käskude ajaloo kasutamiseks kasuta M-p ja M-n. + +Vihje: Täht vajab tsiteeringut? Sisesta C-q ja täht. + +Vihje: Oled tüdinud neist teadetest? Lülita need välja menüüst Seaded/Paigutus. + +Vihje: Kataloogide valimiseks lisa sobiva mustri lõppu kaldkriips. + +Vihje: Kui terminalil puuduvad funktsiooniklahvid, siis kasuta ESC+number jadasid. + +Vihje: GNU Midnight Commanderi koduleht: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Vihje: Palun saada vearaportid aadressile mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Vihje: TAB vahetab aktiivset paneeli. + +Vihje: VFS võimalused: tar-faili sisuga tutvumiseks vajuta ta peal ENTER. + +Vihje: Olemas on ka meeldiv manuaal. + +Vihje: Soovid Lynxi stiilis navigeerimist? Luba see konfiguratsiooni dialoogist. + +Vihje: %-makrod töötavad ka käsureal. + +Vihje: M-! lubab käivitada programme ja vaadata väljundit vaatajas. + +Vihje: Faililistingu formaati saab muuta; lähemalt vaata manuaalist. + +Vihje: %D/%T laiendab märgitud failid vastaskataloogis. + +Vihje: Soovid harilikku kesta? Vajuta C-o; tagasipöördumiseks vajuta uuesti C-o. + +Vihje: Muutujale CDPATH väärtuse omistamine võib vähendada klahvivajutusi cd käskudes. + +Vihje: Kui soovid näha peidetud faile, siis luba see konfiguratsiooni dialoogis. + +Vihje: Kui soovid näha varukoopia faile, siis luba see konfiguratsiooni dialoogis. + +Vihje: Lõpetamine töötab iga dialoogi sisestusväljadel; lihtsalt vajuta M-Tab. + +Vihje: Parameeter -s võib aidata aeglase terminali kasutamisel. + +Vihje: Failiotsing: sa saad töötada leitud failidega kasutades nuppu Paneelile. + +Vihje: Soovid teha keerulisi otsinguid? Kasuta käsku Väline paneelile. + +Vihje: Kataloogi kiirvahetuseks käsu sisestamise ajal kasuta M-c (quick cd). + +Vihje: Kesta käsud töötavad ainult kohalikus failisüsteemis. + +Vihje: C-y taastab kustutatud teksti. + +Vihje: Kas mõned klahvid ei tööta? Vaata Seaded/Õpi klahve. + +Vihje: Käsu väljundi vaatamiseks vaatajas kasuta M-! + +Vihje: F13 (või Shift-F3) käivitab kuvaja toorrežiimis. + +Vihje: Klahvile F4 saad redaktori määrata keskkonna muutujaga EDITOR. + +Vihje: Välise vaataja saad määrata keskkonna muutujaga VIEWER või PAGER. + +Vihje: Kinnituse küsimise kõigile päringutele saad keelata Seaded/Kinnitused. + +Vihje: Hüppa sageli kasutatud kataloogidesse ühe seotud C-\'ga. + +Vihje: Anonüümse FTP kasutamiseks mc-ga sisesta 'cd ftp://masin.ee' + +Vihje: FTP on Midnight Commanderisse sisse ehitatud; vaata menüüst Fail/FTP link. + +Vihje: M-t võimaldab listingu režiimi kiiret muutmist. + +Vihje: Kasutaja määramine FTP ühenduses: 'cd ftp://kasutaja@masin.ee' + +Vihje: RPM faili sisuga tutvumiseks vajuta sellel Enter. + +Vihje: Kataloogide märkimiseks valiku dialoogis lisa kaldkriips. + +Vihje: Hiirega lõikamiseks ja asetamiseks võib olla vajalik vajutada klahvi Shift. + +Vihje: Sisesta tihti külastatud FTP saidid kiirvalikust: tipi C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.eu b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.eu new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c389d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.eu @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Aholkua: Erabili Ktrl-x t hautatutako fitxategi izenak komando lerrora kopiatzeko. + +Aholkua: Erabili Ktrl-x p uneko bide-izena komando lerrora kopiatzeko. + +Aholkua: Osatzea: erabili Alt-Tab (edo Ihes+Tab; X ingurunean Ktrl+Alt+Tab). Tekleatu bitan zerrenda bat jasotzeko. + +Aholkua: Erabili Alt-p eta Alt-n komandoen historia atzitzeko. + +Aholkua: Karaktere bat txertatzeko? Erabili Kontrol-q eta karakterea (adibidez '+' txertatzeko Ktrl-q +). + +Aholkua: Mezu hauekin gogaituta? Itzali itzazu Aukerak/Diseinua menutik. + +Aholkua: Direktorioak hautatzea: erantsi «/» barra zeiharra bilaketa ereduaren amaieran. + +Aholkua: Zure terminalari funtzio teklak falta bazaizkio, erabili Ihes+zenbakia sekuentzia. + +Aholkua: GNU Midnight Commander-ren atariko orria: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Aholkua: Mesedez bidali akats txosten oro hona: mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Aholkua: Tab teklak zure uneko panela aldatzen du. + +Aholkua: VFS-ren onurak: sakatu sartu tar fitxategi batean bere edukia aztertzeko. + +Aholkua: Eskuliburu orrialde ederra ere badaukagu. + +Aholkua: Lynx tankerako nabigazioa nahi duzu? Ezarri ezazu Konfigurazio elkarrizketan. + +Aholkua: % makroak komando lerroan ere erabili daitezke. + +Aholkua: Alt-! erabili programak exekutatu eta irteera erakuslean ikusteko. + +Aholkua: Fitxategiak zerrendatzeko formatua egokitu daiteke; egin "man mc" xehetasunak ikusteko. + +Aholkua: %D/%T pareko direktorioan hautatutako fitxategietara hedatzen da. + +Aholkua: Zure shell soila nahi duzu? Sakatu Ktrl-o, eta itzuli MC-ra Ktrl-o berriz erabiliz. + +Aholkua: CDPATH aldagaia ezarrita cd komandoetan teklak sakatzea aurreztu dezakezu. + +Aholkua: Zure .* fitxategiak ikusi nahi badituzu, horrela adierazi Konfigurazio elkarrizketan. + +Aholkua: Zure *~backup fitxategiak ikusi nahi dituzu? Ezarri ezazu Konfigurazio elkarrizketan. + +Aholkua: Osatzea elkarrizketa guztietako sarrera lerro guztietan dabil. Sakatu Alt-Tab (X ingurunean Ktrl+Alt+Tab). + +Aholkua: Terminal moteletan -s banderak lagundu dezake. + +Aholkua: Aurkitu fitxategia: Aurkitutako fitxategietan lan egin dezakezu Panelatu botoia erabiliz. + +Aholkua: Bilaketa konplexuak egin nahi? Erabili Kanpora Paneleratu komandoa. + +Aholkua: Direktorioz aldatzeko komando bat tekleatzen erdibidean zaudela, erabili M-c (cd azkarra). + +Aholkua: Shell komandoak ez dira ibiliko bertakoa ez den fitxategi-sisteman zaudenean. + +Aholkua: Ekarri atzera testua heriotzatik Ktrl-y erabilita. + +Aholkua: Zure teklatako batzuk ez dabiltza? Begiratu Aukerak/Teklak ikasi. + +Aholkua: Komando baten irteera erakuslean ikusteko, erabili Alt-! + +Aholkua: F13 (edo Maius-F3), erakuslea deitzen du modu gordinean. + +Aholkua: F4-rentzako editorea zehaztu dezakezu EDITOR shell aldagaiarekin. + +Aholkua: Kanpoko erakuslea zehaztu dezakezu VIEWER edo PAGER shell aldagaiekin. + +Aholkua: Berresteko eskaera guztiak ezgaitu ditzakezu Aukerak/Berrespena-tik. + +Aholkua: Iritsi maiz erabilitako direktorioetara jauzi bakarrean C-\ erabiliz. + +Aholkua: FTP anonimoa egin dezakezu mc-rekin 'cd ftp://machine.edu' tekleatuta. + +Aholkua: FTP barneratua dag Midnight Commanderren, frogatu «Fitxategia/FTP esteka» menua. + +Aholkua: Alt-t zerrendatze modua azkar aldatzeko. + +Aholkua: Erabiltzaile izena zehaztu dezakezu ftp-ak egiterakoan: 'cd ftp://erabiltzailea@machine.edu' + +Aholkua: RPM fitxategiak arakatu ditzakezu rpm fitxategi baten gainean sartu sakatuta. + +Aholkua: Hautatu elkarrizketa-koadroan direktorioak markatzeko, erantsi «/» bat. + +Aholkua: Saguaren ebaki eta itsatsi erabiltzeko maius tekla sakatu behar izan dezakezu + +Aholkua: Txertatu maiz bisitatutako ftp lekuak gogokoetan: tekleatu C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.fa b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.fa new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2cb919 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.fa @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +راهنمایی: از ترکیب C-x t برای کپی کردن نام فایلهای انتخاب شده به خط فرمان استفاده کنید. + +راهنمایی: از ترکیب C-x p برای کپی کردن مسیر پوشهی فعلی به خط فرمان استفاده کنید. + +راهنمایی: تکمیل: از ترکیب M-Tab (یا Esc+Tab) استفاده کنید. | دوبار تایپ کنید تا فهرستی نشان داده شود. + +راهنمایی: برای دسترسی به تاریخچهی فرمانها از M-p و M-n استفاده کنید. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +راهنمایی: از این راهنماییها خسته شدهاید؟ در منوی تنظیمات/طرحبندی آنها را خاموش کنید. + +راهنمایی: برای انتخاب پوشهها در آخر الگوی تطبیق یک کاراکتر خط مورب اضافه کنید. + +راهنمایی: اگر ترمینال شما از کلیدهای فانکشن پشتیبانی نمیکند، از Esc+عدد استفاده کنید. + +راهنمایی: نشانی وبگاه فرماندار نیمهشب: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +راهنمایی: لطفا هرگونه باگ را به mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org گزارش دهید. + +راهنمایی: Tab قاب فعلی را عوض میکند. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +Hint: We also have a nice manual page. + +Hint: Do you want Lynx-style navigation? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: % macros work even on the command line. + +Hint: M-! will allow you to execute programs and see the output in the viewer. + +Hint: The file listing format can be customized; do "man mc" for details. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +راهنمایی: خط فرمان سادهی خودتان را میخواهید؟ با فشردن C-o بین خط فرمان و MC جابجا شوید. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +راهنمایی: میخواهید فایلهای پنهان را که با . شروع میشوند ببینید، به پنجرهی پیکربندی بروید. + +راهنمایی: میخواهید فایلهای پشتیبان را که با ~ به پایان میرسند را ببینید؟ به پنجرهی پیکربندی بروید. + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +Hint: On slow terminals the -s flag may help. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelize button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelize command. + +راهنمایی: اگر خواستید در حین تایپ یک دستور پوشه را عوض کنید از ترکیب M-c استفاده کنید (quick cd). + +Hint: Shell commands will not work when you are on a non-local file system. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +راهنمایی: برخی از کلیدهای شما کار نمیکنند؟ به منوی تنظیمات/یادگیری کلیدها بروید. + +Hint: To look at the output of a command in the viewer, use M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +راهنمایی: برای تعیین ویرایشگری که با F4 باز میشود متغیر EDITOR را در شل مقداردهی کنید. + +Hint: You may specify the external viewer with the shell vars VIEWER or PAGER. + +راهنمایی: شما میتوانید تمام درخواستهای تایید را در منوی تنظیمات/تایید غیرفعال کنید. + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Hint: You can do anonymous FTP with mc by typing 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +راهنمایی: FTP در فرماندار نیمهشب گنجانده شده است. منوی فایل/FTP link را ببینید. + +Hint: M-t changes quickly the listing mode. + +Hint: You can specify the username when doing ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Hint: You can browse RPM files by tapping enter on top of an rpm file. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialog box, append a slash. + +راهنمایی: برای بریدن و چسباندن با استفاده از موشواره باید دکمهی shift را نگهدارید + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.fr b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.fr new file mode 100644 index 0000000..553c011 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.fr @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Astuce : Faire C-x t pour copier les noms des fichiers sélectionnés vers la ligne de commande. + +Astuce : Faire C-x p pour copier le chemin courant vers la ligne de commande. + +Astuce : Complétion: faire M-Tab (ou Esc+Tab). Réfaire une deuxième fois pour avoir une liste. + +Astuce : Faire M-p et M-n pour accéder à l’historique des commandes. + +Astuce : Besoin de quoter un caractère ? Faire C-q suivi du caractère. + +Astuce : Lassé de lire ces messages ? Désactivez les dans le menu Options/Présentation. + +Astuce : Sélection de répertoires: ajouter une barre oblique à la fin de motif de recherche. + +Astuce : Si votre clavier n’a pas de touche de fonction, utilisez la combinaison ESC+nombre. + +Astuce : Site officiel de GNU Midnight Commander : https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Astuce : Envoyez vos rapports de bogues à l’adresse mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Astuce : La touche Tab permute le panneau courant. + +Astuce : VFS : taper Entrée sur une archive tar pour en visualiser son contenu. + +Astuce : Une documentation complète est disponible : « man mc ». + +Astuce : Vous cherchez une navigation à la Lynx ? Activez-là dans le menu Options/Configuration. + +Astuce : Les macros % fonctionnent également dans la ligne de commande. + +Astuce : M-! permet d’exécuter un programme et d’afficher le résultat dans la visionneuse. + +Astuce : Le listing des fichiers peut-être customisée ; consultez « man mc » pour plus d’informations. + +Astuce : %D/%T substitue le répertoire et la liste des fichiers sélectionnés dans le panneau opposé. + +Astuce : Vous voulez un shell plein écran ? Tapez C-o, puis revenez à MC en tapant C-o à nouveau. + +Astuce : Assigner des répertoires à la variable d’environnement CDPATH peut rendre plus concise la commande cd. + +Astuce : Pour visualiser les fichiers cachés, paramétrez-le dans le menu Options/Configuration. + +Astuce : Visualiser les fichiers de sauvegardes *~ ? Paramétrez-le dans le menu Options/Configuration. + +Astuce : La complétion fonctionne sur toutes les saisies dans toutes les fenêtres. Taper M-Tab. + +Astuce : Pour les terminaux lents, lancer MC avec l’argument -s peut aider. + +Astuce : Recherche de fichier : travaillez avec les fichiers trouvés en utilisant la fonction « Mettre en panneau ». + +Astuce : Vous souhaitez faire des recherches complexes ? Rendez-vous dans le menu Commande/Panneau externe. + +Astuce : Pour changer de répertoire rapidement, utiliser M-c (cd rapide). + +Astuce : Les commandes shell ne fonctionnent que sur des systèmes de fichiers locaux. + +Astuce : Coller du texte dans la ligne de commande avec C-y. + +Astuce : Tous les raccourcis claviers ne fonctionnent pas ? Vérifiez dans le menu Options/Apprendre les touches. + +Astuce : Pour voir le résultat d’une commande dans la visionneuse, utilisez M-! + +Astuce : F13 (ou Shift-F3) exécute la visionneuse en mode brut. + +Astuce : Vous pouvez définir l’éditeur utilisé avec la touche F4 via la variable d’environnement EDITOR. + +Astuce : Vous pouvez définir la visionneuse externe via les variables d’environnement VIEWER ou PAGER dans un shell. + +Astuce : Vous pouvez désactiver toutes les demandes de confirmation dans le menu Options/Confirmation. + +Astuce : Allez dans vos répertoires favoris rapidement avec C-backslash. + +Astuce : Vous pouvez faire du FTP anonyme avec MC en tapant « cd ftp://machine.edu ». + +Astuce : Le support FTP est intégré à Midnight Commander, voir le menu « Lien FTP ». + +Astuce : M-t change le mode de listing courant. + +Astuce : Vous pouvez définir l’utilisateur quand vous utilisez FTP : « cd ftp://user@machine.edu ». + +Astuce : VFS: parcourez le contenu des fichiers RPM en tapant Entrée sur le fichier. + +Astuce : Pour ne sélectionner que les répertoires dans la fenêtre, sélectionnez (menu Fichiers/Sélectionner les groupes), ajoutez un « / ». + +Astuce : Le copier-coller par la souris peut nécessiter de maintenir la touche Shift. + +Astuce : Définissez vos sites FTP favoris dans la hotlist : taper C-backslash. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ga b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ga new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9201d65 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ga @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Leid: Bain úsáid as C-x t chun ainmneacha comhaid clibáilte a chóipeáil chuig an líne ordaithe. + +Leid: Bain úsáid as C-x p chun an luíainm reatha a chóipeáil chuig an líne ordaithe. + +Leid: Críochnú: bain úsáid as M-Tab (nó Esc + Tab). Déan é a thaifeadadh faoi dhó chun liosta a fháil. + +Leid: Bain úsáid as M-p agus M-n chun rochtain a fháil ar stair na gceannasaí. + +Leid: An gá duit carachtar a lua? Bain úsáid as Rialú-q agus an carachtar. + +Leid: Tuirseach de na teachtaireachtaí seo? Cas iad as an roghchlár Roghanna / Leagan amach. + +Leid: Eolairí a roghnú: cuir slais isteach go dtí deireadh an patrún meaitseála. + +Leid: Má níl do críochfort eochracha feidhmeanna, bain úsáid as an ESC + seicheamh uimhir + +Leid: Leathanach baile GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Leid: Seol tuairiscí ar bith chuig mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Leid: Athraíonn an tábla do phainéal reatha. + +Leid: VFS coolness: tap a chur isteach ar chomhad tarra chun scrúdú a dhéanamh ar a n-ábhar. + +Leid: Tá leathanach láimhe deas againn freisin. + +Leid: An bhfuil tú ag iarraidh loingseoireacht stíl Lynx? Socraigh é sa dialóg Cumraíochta. + +Leid: % Macraí ag obair fiú ar na n-orduithe. + +Leid: M-! beidh deis agat cláir a fhorghníomhú agus an t-aschur a fheiceáil sa lucht féachana. + +Leid: Is féidir an fhormáid liostaithe comhad a shaincheapadh; dhéanamh "man mc" le haghaidh sonraí. + +Leid: leathnaíonn% D /% T na comhaid clib sa chomhadlann eile. + +Leid: Want do bhlaosc plain? Brúigh C-o, agus téigh ar ais chuig MC le C-o arís. + +Leid: Is féidir le hathraithe an athróg CDPATH keystrokes tú a shábháil in orduithe cd. + +Leid: Más mian leat do chuid comhad. * A fheiceáil, mar sin sa dialóg Cumraíochta. + +Leid: Ar mhaith leat do * chomhaid cúltaca a fheiceáil? Socraigh é sa dialóg Cumraíochta. + +Leid: Oibríonn an chríochnú ar gach línte ionchuir i ngach dialóg. Just brúigh M-Tab. + +Leid: Ar críochfoirt mall an bhratach -s cabhrú. + +Leid: Faigh Comhad: is féidir leat oibriú ar na comhaid a fuarthas ag baint úsáide as an gcnaipe Painéal. + +Leid: An bhfuil tú ag iarraidh cuardach casta a dhéanamh? Bain úsáid as an ordú Painéal Seachtrach. + +Leid: A athrú leathbhealach eolaire trí clóscríobh a dtoil, a úsáid M-c (cd tapaidh). + +Leid: Ní oibreoidh orduithe Shell nuair a bhíonn tú ar chóras comhaid neamh-áitiúil. + +Leid: Cuir téacs ar ais ó na marbh le C-y. + +Leid: An bhfuil cuid de do chuid eochracha nach bhfuil ag obair? Féach ar eochracha Roghanna / Foghlaim. + +Leid: Chun féachaint ar aschur ordú sa lucht féachana, bain úsáid as M-! + +Leid: Tugann F13 (nó Shift-F3) an breathnóir i mód amh. + +Leid: Is féidir leat a shonrú ar an eagarthóir don F4 leis an EDITOR bhlaosc athróg. + +Leid: Féadfaidh tú an breathnóir seachtrach a shonrú leis an vars bhlaosc VIEWER nó PAGER. + +Leid: Is féidir leat gach iarratas a dhíchumasú ar dheimhniú i Roghanna / Dearbhaithe. + +Leid: Luaigh eolairí a úsáidtear go minic i gceangal le C-\. + +Leid: Is féidir leat FTP gan ainm a dhéanamh le mc trí chlóscríobh 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Leid: tógtar FTP sa Cheannasaí Meán Oíche, seiceáil an roghchlár nasc File / FTP. + +Leid: Athraíonn M-t go tapa ar an mód liostaithe. + +Leid: Is féidir leat an t-ainm úsáideora a shonrú nuair a dhéanann tú ftps: 'cd ftp: //user@machine.edu' + +Leid: Is féidir leat brabhsáil comhaid RPM trí scanadh a chur isteach ar bharr comhad rpm. + +Leid: Chun comharthaí a mharcáil ar an mbosca dialóige roghnaigh, cuir slash ar. + +Leid: Úsáid a bhaint as an gearrtha luch agus greamaigh theastóidh a bhfuil an eochair-athrú + +Leid: Eochair láithreáin ftp a thugtar cuairt orthu go minic sa hotlist: cineál C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.gl b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.gl new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d683dd --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.gl @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Consello: Use C-x t para copiar os nomes dos ficheiros marcados na liña de ordes. + +Consello: C-x p copia a ruta actual na liña de ordes. + +Consello: M-Tab (ou ESC+Tab) completa ordes/nomes Dúas veces devolve unha lista. + +Consello: Use M-p e M-n para acceder ao historial de ordes. + +Consello: para introducir un carácter especial: Ctrl-q e o carácter. + +Consello: canso desas mensaxes? Desactíveos desde o menú Opcións/Deseño. + +Consello: para seleccionar directorios: engada unha barra «/» na fin do patrón de busca. + +Consello: se o seu terminal non ten teclas de función, use ESC+número. + +Consello: a páxina principal de GNU Midnight Commander é: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Consello: informe de calquera erro a mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Consello: a tecla Tab cambia o seu panel actual. + +Consello: o mellor VFS! Prema Intro nun arquivo «tar» para examinar o seu contido. + +Consello: temos tamén unha páxina de manual: «man mc» + +Consello: quere navegar ao estilo «Lynx» coas frechas? axústeo no cadro de diálogo de configuración. + +Consello: as macros con % funcionan incluso na liña de ordes. + +Consello: con M-! poderá executar programas e ver a saída no visor. + +Consello: pode personalizar o formato de listado de ficheiros; vexa «man.mc» para obter máis detalles. + +Consello: %D/%T expande os ficheiros marcados no panel oposto. + +Consello: quere o shell normal? prema C-o, e para volver a MC prema C-o de novo. + +Consello: configurar a variable CDPATH pode aforrarlle escritura nas ordes «cd». + +Consello: para ver os ficheiros «.*» abonda indicalo no dialogo de configuración. + +Consello: para ver os ficheiros de copia de seguranza tipo *~ fagao no dialogo de configuración. + +Consello: Tamén se poden auto-completar nomes nos diálogos con lt-Tab. + +Consello: en terminais lentos pode ser de axuda a opción -s. + +Consello: pode poñer no panel os resultados de «Buscar ficheiro» e usalos. + +Consello: pode facer e gardar buscas complexas con «Buscas externas». + +Consello: escribindo M-c cambiar de directorio é un chisco máis doado. + +Consello: as ordes da consola non funcionan fora do sistema local. + +Consello: Con C-y pode recuperar texto eliminado. + +Consello: algunha tecla rebelde? Pode educala con «Redefinir teclas». + +Consello: para ver a saída dunha orde, use M-! + +Consello: F13 (ou Maiús-F3) invoca ao visor en modo «sen formato». + +Consello: F4 pode usar calquera editor que lle indiquemos na variábel EDITOR. + +Consello: pódese empregar un visor externo indicándoo na variábel PAGER. + +Consello: Para desactivar as mensaxes de confirmación fagao no menú Opcións. + +Consello: marque os directorios e sitios máis usados en «Favoritos». + +Consello: para facer un FTP anónimo con mc: «cd ftp://maquina.dominio» + +Consello: FTP está integrado en Midnight Commander, en «Conexión por FTP». + +Consello: M-t cambia rapidamente entre varios modos de listaxe. + +Consello: para especificar o nome de usuario ao facer un FTP: «cd ftp://usuario@maquina.dominio» + +Consello: pode examinar un ficheiro RPM premendo Intro sobre del. + +Consello: para marcar os directorios no cadro de diálogo de selección, engada unha barra «/». + +Consello: para cortar e pegar co rato manteña premida a tecla Maiús. + +Consello: os sitios FTP habituais poden marcarse como «preferidos»: escriba C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.hu b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.hu new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bb3108 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.hu @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Tipp: A kijelölt fájlnevek parancssorba való másolása: C-x t + +Tipp: Az aktuális elérési út parancssorba való másolása: C-x p + +Tipp: Kiegészítés: M-Tab (vagy Esc Tab). Kétszer lenyomva listát ad. + +Tipp: Korábbi parancsok előhozása: M-p illetve M-n + +Tipp: Speciális karakter beírásához használja ezt: Control-q E<lt>karakterE<gt> + +Tipp: Az itt megjelenő üzenetek kikapcsolhatók a "Beállítások/Megjelenés"-nél. + +Tipp: Könyvtárak kijelölése a minta végére / jelet írva lehetséges. + +Tipp: Ha a terminálon nincsenek funkcióbillentyűk, használja ezt: Esc E<lt>számE<gt> + +Tipp: A Midnight Commander honlapja: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Tipp: Hibabejelentéseket a következő címre lehet küldeni: mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Tipp: A Tab billentyűvel lehet panelt váltani. + +Tipp: VFS-funkció: egy Tar-fájlon Entert nyomva megjelenik annak tartalma. + +Tipp: A Midnight Commandernek van "man" (kézikönyv) lapja is. + +Tipp: Szeretne Lynx-stílusú navigációt? Be lehet állítani az Alapbeállításoknál. + +Tipp: A % makrók még a parancssorban is használhatók. + +Tipp: Program végrehajtása a kimenetnek a fájlmegjelenítőbe való küldésével: M-! + +Tipp: A fájlok listázási módja beállítható; részletek a "man mc" paranccsal. + +Tipp: A %D/%T sztring a másik panel kijelölt fájljaival lesz helyettesítve. + +Tipp: A sima shell-t szeretné? Használja ezt: C-o (visszatérés MC-be: ugyanígy). + +Tipp: A CDPATH változó beállításával egyszerűbbé tehető a "cd" parancsok kiadása. + +Tipp: Ha látni szeretné a .* rejtett fájlokat, állítsa be az Alapbeállításoknál. + +Tipp: Ha látni szeretné a *~ másolatfájlokat, állítsa be az Alapbeállításoknál. + +Tipp: A kiegészítés minden ablak összes beviteli mezőjében működik: M-Tab + +Tipp: Lassú terminálokon a -s opció hasznos lehet. + +Tipp: Fájlkeresés: műveletek végzése a megtalált fájlokkal: "Listát a panelra". + +Tipp: Komplex keresések végzéséhez a "Külső panel-parancs" funkció javasolt. + +Tipp: Könyvtárváltás egy parancs begépelése közben: M-c (gyors könyvtárváltás). + +Tipp: A shell-parancsok távoli fájlrendszereken nem használhatók. + +Tipp: A pufferben levő (például "C-k"-val oda tett) szöveg visszahozása: C-y + +Tipp: Ha nem működnek bizonyos billentyűk: "Beállítások/Billentyűk". + +Tipp: Egy parancs kimenetének megjelenítése a fájlmegjelenítőben: M-! + +Tipp: Az F13 (vagy Shift-F3) a fájlmegjelenítőt "nyers" módban indítja el. + +Tipp: Az F4-re használandó szerkesztőt az EDITOR shell-változóval lehet megadni. + +Tipp: A külső fájlmegjelenítőt a PAGER shell-változóval lehet megadni. + +Tipp: Az összes megerősítéskérés kikapcsolható: "Beállítások/Megerősítések". + +Tipp: Egyszerű módon elérhetők a gyakran használt könyvtárak: C-\. + +Tipp: "Anonymous" FTP-zés végezhető ezzel a paranccsal: "cd ftp://gépnév.edu". + +Tipp: Az FTP be van építve a Midnight Commanderbe: "FTP-kapcsolat" menüpontok. + +Tipp: A listázási mód gyorsan váltható a következő billentyűkombinációval: M-t. + +Tipp: FTP-zésnél felhasználónév is megadható: "cd ftp://felhasználó@gépnév.edu". + +Tipp: Az RPM-csomagfájlok böngészhetők, ehhez Entert kell nyomni az adott fájlon. + +Tipp: Könyvtárak kijelölése a "Kijelölés" ablakban: / jel hozzáfűzésével. + +Tipp: Az egérrel való szövegkimásoláshoz szükség lehet a Shift lenyomására. + +Tipp: A gyakran látogatott FTP-helyek betehetők a gyorslistába: C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.id b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.id new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a8f48e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.id @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Petunjuk: Gunakan C-x untuk menyalin nama berkas yang ditandai ke command line. + +Petunjuk: Gunakan C-x untuk menyalin nama path saat ini ke command line. + +Petunjuk: Pelengkapan: gunakan M-Tab (atau Esc+Tab). Ketikkan dua kali untuk memperoleh daftar. + +Petunjuk: Gunakan M-p dan M-n untuk mengakses riwayat perintah. + +Petunjuk: Perlu mengutip suatu karakter? Gunakan Contrl-q dan karakter tersebut. + +Petunjuk: Bosan dengan pesan-pesan ini? Matikan mereka dari menu Opsi/Tata Letak. + +Petunjuk: Memilih direktori: tambahkan garis miring di akhir pola yang cocok. + +Petunjuk: Bila terminal Anda tak punya tombol fungsi, gunakan urutan ESC+angka. + +Petunjuk: Laman web GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Petunjuk: Harap kirim laporan bug ke mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Petunjuk: Tab mengubah panel Anda saat ini. + +Petunjuk: VFS itu keren: ketuk enter pada suatu file tar untuk memeriksa isinya. + +Petunjuk: Kami juga memiliki halaman manual yang bagus. + +Petunjuk: Apakah Anda ingin navigasi gaya Lynx? Atur itu dalam dialog Konfigurasi. + +Petunjuk: makro bekerja bahkan pada command line. + +Petunjuk: M-! memungkinkan Anda mengeksekusi program dan melihat keluaran dalam penampil. + +Petunjuk: Format daftar file dapat dikustomisasi; jalankan "man mc" untuk rincian. + +Petunjuk: %D/%T mengembang menjadi file yang di-tag di direktori yang berlawanan. + +Petunjuk: Ingin shell polos? Tekan C-o, dan kembali lagi ke MC dengan C-o lagi. + +Petunjuk: Menata variabel CDPATH dapat menghemat ketukan tombol dalam perintah cd. + +Petunjuk: Bila Anda ingin melihat file .*, nyatakan saja dalam dialog Konfigurasi. + +Petunjuk: Ingin melihat file cadangan *~? Atur itu dalam dialog Konfigurasi. + +Petunjuk: Pelengkapan bekerja pada semua baris masukan dalam semua dialog. Tekan M-Tab saja. + +Petunjuk: Pada terminal yang lambat flag -s mungkin membantu. + +Petunjuk: Cari File: Anda dapat bekerja pada file yang ditemukan memakai tombol Panelkan. + +Petunjuk: Ingin melakukan pencarian rumit? Pakai perintah Panelkan Eksternal. + +Petunjuk: Untuk pindah direktori saat tengah mengetikkan suatu perintah, gunakan M-c (cd cepat). + +Petunjuk: Perintah shell tak akan bekerja bila Anda berada pada sistem file bukan lokal. + +Petunjuk: Panggil kembali teks dari kematian dengan C-y. + +Petunjuk: Apakah beberapa tombol Anda tak bekerja? Lihat pada tombol-tombol Opsi/Belajar. + +Petunjuk: Untuk melihat keluaran dari suatu perintah dalam penampil, pakai M-! + +Petunjuk: F13 (atau Shift-F3) memanggil penampil dalam mode mentah. + +Petunjuk: Anda boleh menyatakan penyunting bagi F4 dengan variabel shell EDITOR. + +Petunjuk: Anda boleh menyatakan penampil eksternal dengan variabel shell VIEWER atau PAGER. + +Petunjuk: Anda dapat menonaktifkan semua permintaan konfirmasi dalam Opsi/Konfirmasi. + +Petunjuk: Melompatlah ke direktori yang sering dipakai dengan C-\. + +Petunjuk: Anda dapat melakukan FTP anonim memakai mc dengan mengetikkan 'cd ftp://server.ftp.yang.dituju' + +Petunjuk: FTP sudah ada dalam Midnight Commander, periksalah menu File/Taut FTP. + +Petunjuk: M-t mengubah secara cepat mode penampilan daftar. + +Petunjuk: Anda dapat menyatakan nama pengguna ketika melakukan ftp: 'cd ftp://pengguna@server.ftp.yang.dituju' + +Petunjuk: Anda dapat meramban file RPM dengan mengetuk enter pada suatu file rpm. + +Petunjuk: Untuk menandai direktori pada kotak dialog pilihan, tambahkan suatu garis miring. + +Petunjuk: Untuk memakai potong dan tempel tetikus mungkin perlu menahan tombol shift. + +Petunjuk: Masukkan situs-situs ftp yang sering dikunjungi ke daftar pintas: ketikkan C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.it b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.it new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a09fc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.it @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Suggerimento: Ctrl-x t per copiare i nomi di file selezionati nella linea di comando. + +Suggerimento: Ctrl-x p per copiare il percorso attuale nella linea di comando. + +Suggerimento: Completamento: M-Tab (o Esc+Tab). Due volte per ottenere la lista. + +Suggerimento: M-p e M-n per accedere alla storia dei comandi. + +Suggerimento: Quotare un carattere? Ctrl-q seguito dal carattere. + +Suggerimento: Disattivare questi messaggi? Opzioni/menu di Layout/ barra aiuti. + +Suggerimento: Selezionare cartelle: aggiungere una barra dopo i caratteri di confronto. + +Suggerimento: Se nel terminale mancano i tasti di funzione, utilizzare la sequenza ESC+numero. + +Suggerimento: La pagina principale su Internet di GNU Midnight Commander é: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Suggerimento: Inviare i rapporti d'errore a mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Suggerimento: Tab modifica il pannello corrente. + +Suggerimento: La forza dei VFS: Invio su un tar file permette di esaminarne il contenuto. + +Suggerimento: Abbiamo anche un bel manuale manpage. + +Suggerimento: Si vuole una navigazione stile Lynx? Basta settarla in Opzioni/Configurazione/movimenti tipo Lynx. + +Suggerimento: le % macro funzionano anche nella linea di comando. + +Suggerimento: M-! permette l'esecuzione di programmi avendo mostrato l'output nel visualizzatore. + +Suggerimento: Il formato di visualizzazione dei documenti è personalizzabile; "man mc" per i dettagli + +Suggerimento: %D/%T espande i documenti selezionati nella cartella opposta. + +Suggerimento: Si vuole la shell intera? Ctrl-o, e ancora Ctrl-o per tornare a mc. + +Suggerimento: Impostare la variabile CDPATH permette di salvare la sequenza di tasti premuti nei comandi cd. + +Suggerimento: Se si vogliono vedere i propri file .*, specificarlo nel menù Opzioni/Configurazione. + +Suggerimento: Se si vogliono vedere i propri file di backup *~, specificarlo nel menù Opzioni/Configurazione. + +Suggerimento: Il completamento funziona su tutte le righe di immissione, in tutti i menù. Basta premere M-Tab. + +Suggerimento: L'opzione -s aiuta con i terminali lenti. + +Suggerimento: Trovare documento: è possibile lavorare sui documenti trovati tramite il pulsante Pannellizza. + +Suggerimento: Si vogliono eseguire ricerche complicate? Usare il comando Pannellizza Esternamente. + +Suggerimento: Per cambiare la cartella attuale mentre si sta componendo un comando: M-c (cd rapido). + +Suggerimento: I comandi della shell non sono disponibili in un file-system non locale. + +Suggerimento: Riprendere del testo con Ctrl-y. + +Suggerimento: Qualche tasto non funziona? Guarda Opzioni/Impara tasti. + +Suggerimento: Per leggere l'output del comando nel visualizzatore usare M-!. + +Suggerimento: F13 (o Shift-F13) invoca il visualizzatore in modalità base. + +Suggerimento: Si può specificare l'editor richiamabile con F4, tramite la variabile d'ambiente EDITOR. + +Suggerimento: Si può specificare il visualizzatore esterno tramite le variabili d'ambiente VIEWER o PAGER. + +Suggerimento: È possibile disabilitare tutte le richieste di conferma + +Suggerimento: Si può saltare verso cartelle usate frequentemente mediante Ctrl-\. + +Suggerimento: È possibile creare una connessione FTP anonima con mc digitando 'cd ftp://host.edu'. + +Suggerimento: L'FTP è implementato in mc nel menu DESTRO/SINISTRO/FTP Link. + +Suggerimento: M-t modifica velocemente la modalità di lista. + +Suggerimento: È possibile specificare il nome utente per una sessione FTP: 'cd ftp://utente@host.edu'. + +Suggerimento: È possibile vedere il contenuto di un file RPM mediante Invio. + +Suggerimento: Per segnare delle cartelle nel riquadro di selezione, appendere una barra. + +Suggerimento: per utilizzare il mouse per il taglia e incolla premere il tasto Shift. + +Suggerimento: Per richiamare la lista degli indirizzi FTP più utilizzati: Ctrl-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ja b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ja new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd61868 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ja @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +ヒント：C-x t で、タグ付けされたファイル名をコマンドラインにコピーできます。 + +ヒント：C-x p で、現在のパス名をコマンドラインにコピーできます。 + +Hint: Completion: use M-Tab (or Esc+Tab). Type it twice to get a list. + +Hint: Use M-p and M-n to access the command history. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +Hint: Tired of these messages? Turn them off from the Options/Layout menu. + +Hint: Selecting directories: add a slash to the end of the matching pattern. + +Hint: If your terminal lacks functions keys, use the ESC+number sequence. + +Hint: The homepage of GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Please send any bug reports to mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Tab changes your current panel. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +ヒント：ナイスなマニュアルページの英語版もありますよ。 + +Hint: Do you want Lynx-style navigation? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: % macros work even on the command line. + +Hint: M-! will allow you to execute programs and see the output in the viewer. + +Hint: The file listing format can be customized; do "man mc" for details. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +Hint: Want your plain shell? Press C-o, and get back to MC with C-o again. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +Hint: If you want to see your .* files, say so in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Want to see your *~ backup files? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +Hint: On slow terminals the -s flag may help. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelize button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelize command. + +Hint: To change directory halfway through typing a command, use M-c (quick cd). + +Hint: Shell commands will not work when you are on a non-local file system. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +Hint: Are some of your keys not working? Look at Options/Learn keys. + +Hint: To look at the output of a command in the viewer, use M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +Hint: You may specify the editor for F4 with the shell variable EDITOR. + +Hint: You may specify the external viewer with the shell vars VIEWER or PAGER. + +Hint: You can disable all requests for confirmation in Options/Confirmation. + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Hint: You can do anonymous FTP with mc by typing 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Hint: FTP is built in the Midnight Commander, check the File/FTP link menu. + +Hint: M-t changes quickly the listing mode. + +Hint: You can specify the username when doing ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Hint: You can browse RPM files by tapping enter on top of an rpm file. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialog box, append a slash. + +ヒント：マウスでカットアンドペーストするときはシフトキーを押しっぱなしにして下さい + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ka b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ka new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fde0971 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ka @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: Use C-x t to copy tagged file names to the command line. + +Hint: Use C-x p to copy the current pathname to the command line. + +Hint: Completion: use M-Tab (or Esc+Tab). Type it twice to get a list. + +Hint: Use M-p and M-n to access the command history. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +Hint: Tired of these messages? Turn them off from the Options/Layout menu. + +Hint: Selecting directories: add a slash to the end of the matching pattern. + +Hint: If your terminal lacks functions keys, use the ESC+number sequence. + +Hint: The homepage of GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Please send any bug reports to mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +მინიშნება: ტაბი მიმდინარე პანელს შეცვლის. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +მინიშნება:ჩვენ ძალიან კარგი man გვერდი გვაქვს. + +მინიშნება: გნებავთ Lynx-ის ნაირი ნავიგაცია? ჩართეთ ის მორგების ფანჯარაში. + +მინიშნება: % მაკროები ბრძანების სტრიქონიდანაც მუშაობს. + +Hint: M-! will allow you to execute programs and see the output in the viewer. + +Hint: The file listing format can be customized; do "man mc" for details. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +Hint: Want your plain shell? Press C-o, and get back to MC with C-o again. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +Hint: If you want to see your .* files, say so in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Want to see your *~ backup files? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +მინიშნება: ნელ ტერმინალებზე შეიძლება -s პარამეტრი დაგეხმაროთ. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelize button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelize command. + +Hint: To change directory halfway through typing a command, use M-c (quick cd). + +Hint: Shell commands will not work when you are on a non-local file system. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +Hint: Are some of your keys not working? Look at Options/Learn keys. + +Hint: To look at the output of a command in the viewer, use M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +Hint: You may specify the editor for F4 with the shell variable EDITOR. + +Hint: You may specify the external viewer with the shell vars VIEWER or PAGER. + +Hint: You can disable all requests for confirmation in Options/Confirmation. + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Hint: You can do anonymous FTP with mc by typing 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Hint: FTP is built in the Midnight Commander, check the File/FTP link menu. + +Hint: M-t changes quickly the listing mode. + +Hint: You can specify the username when doing ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Hint: You can browse RPM files by tapping enter on top of an rpm file. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialog box, append a slash. + +Hint: To use the mouse cut and paste may require holding the shift key + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ko b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ko new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d4c4c94 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ko @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +힌트: C-x t를 사용하여 태그가 지정된 파일 이름을 명령줄에 복사합니다. + +힌트: C-x p를 사용하여 현재 경로 이름을 명령줄에 복사합니다. + +힌트: 완성: M-Tab(또는 Esc+Tab)을 사용합니다. 목록을 가져오려면 이 항목을 두 번 입력합니다. + +힌트: M-p 및 M-n을 사용하여 명령 히스토리에 액세스합니다. + +힌트: 문자를 인용해야 합니까? Control-q와 문자를 사용합니다. + +힌트: 이 메시지들에 지쳤나요? Options/Layout 메뉴에서 해당 기능을 끕니다. + +힌트: 디렉터리 선택: 일치하는 패턴의 끝에 슬래시를 추가합니다. + +힌트: 터미널에 기능 키가 없는 경우 ESC+숫자 시퀀스를 사용합니다. + +힌트: GNU 미드나잇 커맨더 홈페이지: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +힌트: mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org 으로 버그 보고서를 보내주십시오. + +힌트: 탭이 현재 패널을 변경합니다. + +힌트: VFS cool: tar 파일을 입력하여 내용을 검토합니다. + +힌트 : 우리는 또한 멋진 매뉴얼 페이지를 가지고 있습니다. + +힌트 : Lynx 스타일 탐색을 원하십니까? 구성 대화 상자에서 설정하십시오. + +힌트: % 매크로는 명령줄에서도 작동합니다. + +힌트: M-!를 사용하면 프로그램을 실행하고 뷰어에서 출력을 볼 수 있습니다. + +힌트: 파일 목록 형식을 사용자 지정할 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 "man mc"를 참조하십시오. + +힌트: %D/%T는 반대편 디렉터리의 태그가 지정된 파일로 확장됩니다. + +힌트 : 평범한 쉘을 원하십니까? C-o를 누르고 C-o를 사용하여 MC로 다시 돌아갑니다. + +힌트: CDPATH 변수를 설정하면 cd 명령에 키 입력을 저장할 수 있습니다. + +힌트 : .* 파일을 보려면 환경설정 대화 상자에서 설정합니다. + +힌트: *~ 백업 파일을 보고 싶습니까? 환경설정 대화 상자에서 설정합니다. + +힌트: 완성은 모든 대화 상자의 모든 입력 라인에서 작동합니다. M-Tab을 누르면 됩니다. + +힌트: 느린 터미널에서 -s 플래그가 도움이 될 수 있습니다. + +힌트 : 파일 찾기 : 패널 크기조정 버튼을 사용하여 찾은 파일을 작업할 수 있습니다. + +힌트 : 복잡한 검색을 원하십니까? 기타 패널 크기조정 명령을 사용하십시오. + +힌트: 명령 입력을 중간에 수행하려면 M-c(빠른 cd)를 사용합니다. + +힌트: 로컬이 아닌 파일 시스템에 있는 경우 셸 명령이 작동하지 않습니다. + +힌트: C-y와 함께 죽은 것들로부터 문자를 가져옵니다. + +힌트 : 당신의 열쇠 중 일부가 작동하지 않습니까? 옵션 / 학습 키를보십시오. + +힌트: 뷰어에서 명령의 출력을 보려면 M-를 사용합니다! + +힌트: F13(또는 Shift-F3)은 원시 모드에서 뷰어를 호출합니다. + +힌트: 셸 변수 편집기를 사용하여 F4의 편집기를 지정할 수 있습니다. + +힌트: 쉘 바 뷰어 또는 페이지도구를 사용하여 외부 뷰어를 지정할 수 있습니다. + +힌트: 옵션 / 확인에서 확인 요청을 모두 비활성화할 수 있습니다. + +힌트 : C- \를 사용하여 단일 바인딩된에서 자주 사용 하는 디렉터리로 이동합니다. + +힌트: 'cd ftp://machine.edu'를 입력하여 mc에서 익명 FTP를 할 수 있습니다. + +힌트: FTP는 Midnight Commander에 내장되어 있습니다. 파일 / FTP 링크 메뉴를 확인하십시오. + +힌트: M-t는 목록 모드를 빠르게 변경합니다. + +힌트: ftps를 실행할 때 사용자 이름을 지정할 수 있습니다: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +힌트 : rpm 파일의 맨 위에서 Enter를 눌러 RPM 파일을 탐색 할 수 있습니다. + +힌트: 선택 대화상자에서 디렉터리를 표시하려면 슬래시를 추가합니다 + +힌트: 마우스 잘라내기 및 붙여넣기를 사용하려면 Shift 키를 누르고 있어야 할 수 있습니다. + +힌트: 단축목록에서 자주 방문하는 ftp 사이트 키: C-\ 를 입력하세요. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.lt b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.lt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca3775d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.lt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: Use C-x t to copy tagged file names to the command line. + +Hint: Use C-x p to copy the current pathname to the command line. + +Hint: Completion: use M-Tab (or Esc+Tab). Type it twice to get a list. + +Hint: Use M-p and M-n to access the command history. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +Patarimas: Atsibodo šios žinutės? Išjunkite jas Nustatymai/Išdėstymas meniu. + +Hint: Selecting directories: add a slash to the end of the matching pattern. + +Hint: If your terminal lacks functions keys, use the ESC+number sequence. + +Patarimas: GNU Midnight Commander internetinė svetainė: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Please send any bug reports to mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Patarimas: Tab klavišas pakeičia esamą panelę. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +Patarimas: Mes taip pat turime gražų vadovo puslapį. + +Hint: Do you want Lynx-style navigation? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: % macros work even on the command line. + +Hint: M-! will allow you to execute programs and see the output in the viewer. + +Hint: The file listing format can be customized; do "man mc" for details. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +Hint: Want your plain shell? Press C-o, and get back to MC with C-o again. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +Hint: If you want to see your .* files, say so in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Want to see your *~ backup files? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +Patarimas: Lėtuose terminaluose reikšmė -s gali padėti. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelize button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelize command. + +Hint: To change directory halfway through typing a command, use M-c (quick cd). + +Hint: Shell commands will not work when you are on a non-local file system. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +Hint: Are some of your keys not working? Look at Options/Learn keys. + +Hint: To look at the output of a command in the viewer, use M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +Patarimas: Galite nustatyti F4 redaktorių naudodami „shell“ EDITOR kintamąjį. + +Hint: You may specify the external viewer with the shell vars VIEWER or PAGER. + +Hint: You can disable all requests for confirmation in Options/Confirmation. + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Hint: You can do anonymous FTP with mc by typing 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Hint: FTP is built in the Midnight Commander, check the File/FTP link menu. + +Hint: M-t changes quickly the listing mode. + +Hint: You can specify the username when doing ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Hint: You can browse RPM files by tapping enter on top of an rpm file. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialog box, append a slash. + +Hint: To use the mouse cut and paste may require holding the shift key + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.nb b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.nb new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d1a0c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.nb @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: Hurtigtasten C-x t kopierer de valgte filnavnene til kommandolinja. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten C-x p kopierer dette filnavnet til kommandolinja. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten M-Tab (eller Esc + Tab) fullfører. Bruk hurtigtasten to ganger for å få opp en liste. + +Hint: Hurtigtastene M-p og M-n gir tilgang til kommandohistorikken. + +Hint: For å sitere et tegn kan du bruke hurtigtasten Control + Q og deretter tegnet. + +Hint: Du kan slå av disse hintene i menyen Innstillinger/Utforming. + +Hint: For å velge mapper kan du legge til en skråstrek til slutt i søkemønsteret. + +Hint: Hvis terminalen mangler funksjonstaster så kan du bruke ESC + tallet. + +Hint: Hjemmesiden til GNU Midnight Commander er https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Du kan sende feilrapporter til mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Tabulatoren endrer det aktive panelet. + +Hint: VFS lar deg trykke Enter på et tar-arkiv for å undersøke innholdet. + +Hint: Se også manualsiden. + +Hint: Du kan slå på Lynx-lignende navigering i Innstillinger/Oppsett. + +Hint: %-makroer virker også i kommandolinja. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten M-! lar deg kjøre programmer og se resultatet i visningen. + +Hint: Utlistingsformatet kan endres. Se «man mc» for flere detaljer. + +Hint: %D/%T erstattes med de utvalgte filene i mappa i det andre panelet. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten C-o veksler mellom det vanlige skallet og MC. + +Hint: CDPATH-variabelen kan korte ned tastetrykk i cd-kommandoer. + +Hint: Du kan slå på visning av .*-filer i Innstillinger/Oppsett. + +Hint: Du kan slå på visning av *~-reservekopier i Innstillinger/Oppsett. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten M-Tab fullfører i alle skrivefelt i alle dialogvinduer. + +Hint: Du kan bruke flagget -s hvis terminalen er treig. + +Hint: Du kan jobbe med funnede filer ved å velge «Legg til i panel». + +Hint: Du kan bruke «Legg til eksternt i panel» for å utføre komplekse søk. + +Hint: Du kan skifte mappe mens du holder på å skrive en kommando med hurtigtasten M-c + +Hint: Skallkommandoer vil ikke virke i eksterne filsystemer. + +Hint: Du kan hente tilbake tekst med C-y. + +Hint: Virker ikke noen av tastene? Forsøk Innstillinger/Lær taster. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten M-! legger resultatet av en kommando i visningen. + +Hint: F13 eller (Shift + F13) viser filinnhold rått. + +Hint: Du kan velge F4s tekstprogram med skallvariabelen EDITOR. + +Hint: Du kan velge eksternt visningsprogram med skallvariablene VIEWER eller PAGER. + +Hint: Du kan slå av bekreftelsesforespørsler i Innstillinger/Bekreftelser. + +Hint: Hurtigtasten C-\ åpner en liste over favorittmappene dine. + +Hint: Du kan koble til anonym FTP med mc ved å skrive «cd ftp://tjener.edu» + +Hint: FTP er bygd inn i Midnight Commander. Se «Koble til FTP». + +Hint: Hurtigtasten M-t endrer utlistingsformatet. + +Hint: Du kan angi FTP-brukernavn: «cd ftp://bruker@tjener.edu» + +Hint: Du kan se innholdet i RPM-filer ved å trykke Enter på den. + +Hint: Legg til en skråstrek for å markere mapper i utvalgsdialogen. + +Hint: Du må kanskje holde inn Shift-tasten for å klippe ut og lime inn med musa. + +Hint: Du kan legge til ofte besøkte FTP-steder i favorittmapper, C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.nl b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.nl new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fcd8bf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.nl @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: C-x t zet de geselecteerde filenamen in de commando lijn. + +Hint: Gebruik C-x p om de huidige padnaam naar de commando lijn te kopieren. + +Hint: Completeren: gebruik M-Tab (of Esc+Tab). Herhaal voor een lijst. + +Hint: Gebruik M-p en M-n voor de commando lijn historie. + +Hint: Een character quoten? Gebruik Control-q en dan het character. + +Hint: Moe van deze hints? Zet ze uit in Opties/Vormgeving. + +Hint: Directories selecteren: zet een slash aan het eind van het zoekpatroon. + +Hint: Als je terminal geen functietoetsen ondersteunt, gebruik dan ESC+nummer. + +Hint: Midnight Commander home page: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Stuur bug rapporten naar mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Tab verandert focus huidig paneel (links/rechts). + +Hint: VFS-coolheid: druk op 'enter' op een tar file om de inhoud ervan te zien. + +Hint: We hebben ook een aardige handleiding. + +Hint: Wil je Lynx-achtige navigatie? Stel het in bij Configuratie. + +Hint: % macros werken zelf op de commando lijn. + +Hint: Met M-! kun je programmas draaien en de uitvoer in de viewer bekijken. + +Hint: Het bestandslijst formaat kan aangepast worden; doe "man mc" voor details. + +Hint: %D/%T expandeert naar de geselcterde bestanden in de andere directory. + +Hint: Wil je een gewone shell? Druk C-o, en ga terug naar MC met nogmaals C-o. + +Hint: De CDPATH variabele kan je een hoop typewerk met cd commandos besparen. + +Hint: Als je .* bestanden wilt zien, stel dat dan in in het Configuratie scherm. + +Hint: Wil je *~ backup bestanden zien? Ga naar het Configuratie scherm. + +Hint: Completering met M-Tab werkt op alle invoer regels in alle dialogen. + +Hint: Op trage terminals zou de -s vlag weleens kunnen helpen. + +Hint: Vinden bestanden: gebruik de gevonden bestanden met de optie Extern Venster. + +Hint: Wil je complexe zoekopdrachten? Gebruik het commando Externe Venster. + +Hint: M-c (snelle cd) is om middenin een commando van directorie te wisselen. + +Hint: Shell-commandos werken niet in niet-locale bestandssystemen. + +Hint: Laat tekst herleven met C-y. + +Hint: Werken sommige toetsen niet? Kijk naar Opties/Leer toetsen. + +Hint: Om naar de uitvoer van een commando in d viewer te kijken, drukke men M-! + +Hint: F13 (of Shift-F3) roept de viewer aan in ruwe modus. + +Hint: Je kunt een editor onder F4 specificeren met de shell variabele EDITOR. + +Hint: Je kunt een externe viewer specificeren met de shell variabele PAGER. + +Hint: Je kunt alle aanvragen voor bevestiging instellen in Opties/Bevestiging. + +Hint: Spring naar veel gebruikte directories in een keer met C-\. + +Hint: Je kunt anonieme FTP draaien met mc door middel van 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Hint: FTP is in de Midnight Commander gebouwd, check het Bestand/FTP link menu. + +Hint: M-t verandert snel van lijst modus. + +Hint: Geef alsvolgt je gebruikersnaam op met ftps: 'cd ftp://naam@machine.edu' + +Hint: Je kunt RPM-bestanden bekijken door er op te enteren. + +Hint: Om directories toe te voegen aan de selectie, moet je een slash toevoegen. + +Hint: Voor de normale cut-and-paste muisfuncties moet je de shift key inhouden. + +Hint: Voer frequent bezochte ftp-sites toe aan je hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pl b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pl new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a3bfeff --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pl @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Porada: C-x t skopiuje nazwy zaznaczonych plików do wiersza poleceń. + +Porada: C-x p skopiuje nazwę bieżącej ścieżki do wiersza poleceń. + +Porada: uzupełnianie: M-Tab (lub Esc+Tab). Dwukrotne naciśnięcie wywołuje listę. + +Porada: M-p i M-n udostępni historię poleceń. + +Porada: cytowanie znaku można uzyskać przez Ctrl-q i odpowiedni znak. + +Porada: te komunikaty można wyłączyć w menu Opcje/Układ. + +Porada: zaznaczanie katalogów: należy dodać ukośnik na końcu wzorca dopasowania. + +Porada: jeśli w terminalu nie ma klawiszy funkcyjnych, można użyć Esc+numer. + +Porada: witryna programu GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Porada: raporty błędów (w języku angielskim) proszę wysłać na mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Porada: klawisz Tab zmienia bieżący panel. + +Porada: VFS: naciśnięcie klawisza Enter na pliku tar wyświetli jego zawartość. + +Porada: warto zajrzeć także na stronę podręcznika. + +Porada: nawigację w stylu programu Lynx można ustawić w oknie konfiguracji. + +Porada: makra % działają także w wierszu poleceń. + +Porada: M-! umożliwia wyświetlenie wyjścia wykonywanych programów w podglądzie. + +Porada: format wyświetlania listy plików można dostosować (więcej w „man mc”). + +Porada: %D/%T oznacza zaznaczone pliki w drugim panelu. + +Porada: dostęp do zwykłej powłoki można uzyskać przez C-o, a powrót tak samo. + +Porada: ustawienie zmiennej CDPATH może zaoszczędzić pisania przy cd. + +Porada: wyświetlanie plików .* można wybrać w oknie konfiguracji. + +Porada: wyświetlanie plików zapasowych *~ można ustawić w oknie konfiguracji. + +Porada: uzupełnianie działa wszędzie. Wystarczy nacisnąć M-Tab. + +Porada: na powolnych terminalach może pomóc flaga -s. + +Porada: wyszukanie plików: można pracować na znalezionych plikach przez Filtruj. + +Porada: złożone wyszukiwanie można wykonać za pomocą polecenia Filtr zewnętrzny. + +Porada: można zmienić katalog w połowie podawania polecenia za pomocą M-c. + +Porada: polecenia powłoki działają tylko na lokalnych systemach plików. + +Porada: można przywrócić usunięty tekst za pomocą C-y. + +Porada: jeśli jakiś klawisz nie działa, należy zobaczyć Opcje/Określ klawisze. + +Porada: aby zobaczyć wyjście polecenia w podglądzie, należy użyć M-!. + +Porada: F13 (lub Shift-F3) wywołuje podgląd w trybie oryginalnym. + +Porada: można określić edytor dla klawisza F4 za pomocą zmiennej powłoki EDITOR. + +Porada: można określić zewnętrzny podgląd za pomocą zmiennych VIEWER lub PAGER. + +Porada: można wyłączyć wszystkie żądania potwierdzenia w Opcje/Potwierdzenia. + +Porada: do listy często używanych katalogów można przejść za pomocą C-\. + +Porada: można połączyć się z anonimowym FTP wpisując „cd ftp://komputer.edu”. + +Porada: FTP jest wbudowane w mc, proszę zobaczyć menu Plik/Połączenie FTP. + +Porada: M-t szybko zmienia tryb wyświetlania. + +Porada: można podać użytkownika dla ftps: „cd ftp://użytkownik@komputer.edu”. + +Porada: można przeglądać pakiety RPM naciskając na nich klawisz Enter. + +Porada: aby zaznaczyć katalogi w oknie zaznaczania, należy dodać ukośnik. + +Porada: użycie wycinania i wklejania za pomocą myszy wymaga klawisza Shift. + +Porada: wpisując C-\ można dodać często używane zasoby FTP do listy podręcznej. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pt b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7adb4cf --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Dica: Use C-x t para copiar nomes de ficheiro etiquetados para a linha de comandos. + +Dica: Use C-x p para copiar o caminho atual para a linha de comandos. + +Dica: Preenchimento: use M-Tab (ou Esc+Tab). Duas vezes para obter a lista. + +Dica: Use M-p e M-n para aceder ao histórico de comandos. + +Dica: Necessita colocar carater entre plicas? Use Control-q e o carater. + +Dica: Cansado destas mensagens? Desligue-as no menu Opções/Disposição. + +Dica: Seleção de diretórios: adicione uma barra no fim do padrão correspondente. + +Dica: Se o seu terminal não tem algumas teclas de função, use a sequência ESC+número. + +Dica: A página do GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Dica: Por favor envie relatórios de bugs para mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Dica: O tab altera o painel atual. + +Dica: VFS coolness: pressione enter num ficheiro tar para examinar o seu conteúdo. + +Dica: Também temos uma página manual interessante. + +Dica: Deseja navegação tipo Lynx? Ative-a no diálogo de Configuração. + +Dica: % macros funcionam mesmo na linha de comandos. + +Dica: M-! irá permitir-lhe a execução de programas e ver o output no visualizador. + +Dica: A listagem de formato de ficheiros pode ser personalizada; faça "man mc" para detalhes. + +Dica: %D/%T expande para os ficheiros etiquetados no diretório oposto. + +Dica: Deseja a sua simples shell? Pressione C-o, e volte para o MC com C-o outra vez. + +Dica: Definir a variável CDPATH pode poupar-lhe escrita nos comandos cd. + +Dica: Se deseja ver os seus ficheiros .*, faça isso no diálogo de Configuração. + +Dica: Deseja ver os seus ficheiros de backup *~? Ative isso no diálogo de Configuração. + +Dica: Preenchimento funciona em todas as linhas de entrada em todos os diálogos. Pressione apenas M-Tab. + +Dica: Em terminais lentos o parâmetro -s pode ajudar. + +Dica: Procurar Ficheiro: pode trabalhar nos ficheiros encontrados usando o botão Panelize. + +Dica: Deseja efetuar procuras complexas? Use o comando Externo Panelize. + +Dica: Para mudar de diretório a meio de um comando, use M-c (cd rápido). + +Dica: Comandos shell não funcionarão quando estiver num sistema de ficheiros não local. + +Dica: Traga de volta o texto dos mortos com C-y. + +Dica: Algumas das suas teclas não funcionam? Veja em Opções/Aprender teclas. + +Dica: Para ver o output de um comando no visualizador, use M-! + +Dica: F13 (ou Shift-F3) invoca o visualizador em modo raw. + +Dica: Pode especificar o editor para F4 com a variável de shell EDITOR. + +Dica: Pode especificar o visualizador externo com as vars de shell VIEWER ou PAGER. + +Dica: Pode desabilitar todos os pedidos de confirmação em Opções/Confirmação. + +Dica: Salte para diretórios frequentemente usados de uma só vez através de C-\. + +Dica: Pode efetuar FTP anónimo com o mc digitando 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Dica: FTP está incluído no Midnight Commander, verifique o menu Ficheiro/FTP. + +Dica: M-t muda rapidamente o modo de listagem. + +Dica: Pode especificar o nome de utilizador ao efetuar ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Dica: Pode fazer browse em ficheiros RPM pressionando enter num ficheiro rpm. + +Dica: Para marcar diretórios na caixa de diálogo de seleção, acrescente uma barra slash. + +Dica: Para usar o rato cortar e colar pode ser necessário prender a tecla shift + +Dica: Sites ftp chave frequentemente visitados na hotlist: digite C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pt_BR b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pt_BR new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be2ff37 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.pt_BR @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Dica: Pressione Ctrl+x para copiar os nomes dos arquivos marcados para a linha de comando. + +Dica: Pressione a tecla Ctrl junto com a tecla X, em seguida, pressione a tecla P para copiar o nome do caminho atual para a linha de comando. + +Dica: Para concluir: Pressione a tecla M junto com a tecla Tab (ou a tecla Esc junto com a tecla Tab). Pressione duas vezes para obter uma lista. + +Dica: Pressione a tecla M junto com a tecla P ou a tecla M junto com a tecla N para acessar o histórico de comandos. + +Dica: Para inserir um caractere especial, pressione a tecla Ctrl junto com a tecla Q e o caractere desejado. + +Dica: Para não exibir as mensagens das dicas de ferramentas, desative-as no menu Opções, Leiaute. + +Dica: Selecionando diretórios: Adicione uma barra ao final do padrão correspondente. + +Dica: Se o seu terminal não for compatível com as teclas de função, utilize a sequência com a tecla Esc junto com a tecla do número. + +Dica: A página eletrônica do Midnight Commander do GNU é https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Dica: Por favor, envie os relatórios de erros ou falhas para o endereço mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Dica: A tecla Tab altera o seu painel atual. + +Dica: Coisas legais do VFS: Pressione a tecla Enter em um arquivo com a extensão .tar para examinar o seu conteúdo. + +Dica: Nós também temos um ótimo manual na página do Midnight Commander. + +Dica: Você deseja uma navegação do tipo Lynx? Ative-a na caixa de diálogo das Configurações. + +Dica: Os macros % funcionam mesmo na linha de comando. + +Dica: Pressione a tecla M junto com a tecla ! para executar os programas aplicativos e exibir a saída no visualizador. + +Dica: O formato da listagem de arquivos pode ser personalizada; execute o comando "man mc" para obter mais informações. + +Dica: %D/%T expande para os arquivos marcados no diretório oposto. + +Dica: Para ter o Shell básico, pressione a tecla Ctrl junto com a tecla O e volte novamente para o Midnight Commander pressionando a tecla C junto com a tecla O. + +Dica: Ao definir a variável CDPATH, você economizará digitações dos comandos cd. + +Dica: Para exibir os seus arquivos .*, defina esta opção na caixa de diálogo das Configurações. + +Dica: Para exibir os seus arquivos de cópia de segurança (backup) *~, defina esta opção na caixa de diálogo nas Configurações. + +Dica: A conclusão funciona em todas as linhas de entrada em todas as caixas de diálogos, pressione as teclas M+Tab. + +Dica: Em emuladores de terminais lentos, a opção -s pode ajudar. + +Dica: Encontrar um Arquivo: você pode trabalhar em arquivos encontrados utilizando o botão de Painelização. + +Dica: Para fazer pesquisas complexas, pressione o comando de Painelização Externo. + +Dica: Para alterar o diretório por meio de um comando, pressione a tecla M junto com a tecla C (equivale ao preenchimento rápido do comando cd). + +Dica: Comandos shell não funcionarão quando estiver num sistema de ficheiros não local. + +Dica: Para recuperar o texto de volta, pressione a tecla Ctrl junto com a tecla Y. + +Dica: Se algumas das suas teclas não estão funcionando, verifique no menu Opções, Aprender as Teclas. + +Dica: Para exibir a saída de um comando no visualizador, pressione a tecla M junto com a tecla !. + +Dica: Pressione a tecla F13 (ou Shift junto com F3) para invocar o visualizador no modo bruto. + +Dica: Para especificar o editor, pressione com a tecla F4 com a variável EDITOR do Shell. + +Dica: Para especificar o visualizador externo, utilize as variáveis VIEWER ou PAGER do Shell. + +Dica: Para desativar todas as solicitações de confirmação, defina esta opção no menu Opções, Confirmações. + +Dica: Para pular para os diretórios utilizados com mais frequência, pressione a tecla Ctrl junto com a tecla \. + +Dica: Para utilizar o FTP anonimamente com o Midnight Commander, insira o endereço 'cd ftp://maquina.edu'. + +Dica: O FTP está embutido no Midnight Commander, verifique o menu Arquivo, FTP. + +Dica: Para alterar rapidamente para o modo de listagem ou de lista, pressione a tecla M junto com a tecla T. + +Dica: Para especificar o nome de usuário quando for utilizar o ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu'. + +Dica: Para acessar os arquivos com a extensão .RPM, pressione a tecla Enter após selecionar um arquivo .rpm. + +Dica: Para marcar diretórios na caixa de diálogo selecionada, adicione ao final uma barra. + +Dica: Para utilizar os comandos "recortar" e "colar" com o cursor, pode ser necessário segurar a tecla Shift. + +Dica: Para definir a tecla de atalho para os endereços de FTP que são visitados com mais frequência no 'hotlist', pressione a tecla Ctrl junto com a tecla \. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ro b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ro new file mode 100644 index 0000000..647e229 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ro @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Sfat: Utilizați C-x t pentru a copia în linia de comandă numele fișierelor marcate. + +Sfat: Utilizați C-x p pentru a copia în linia de comandă calea curentă. + +Sfat: Completare: Utilizați M-Tab (sau Esc+Tab). Tastați de două ori pentru a obține lista. + +Sfat: Utilizați M-p și M-n pentru a accesa istoricul comenzilor. + +Sfat: Trebuie sa citați un caracter? Folosiți Control-q și caracterul. + +Sfat: Aceste mesaje sunt sâcâitoare? Puteți să le opriți din meniul Opțiuni/Aspect. + +Sfat: Selectarea dosarelor: adăugați slash la sfârșitul criteriului de selectare + +Sfat: Dacă terminalul nu dispune de taste funcționale, folosiți ESC+ numărul de ordine. + +Sfat: Pagină de start pentru GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Sfat: Vă rugăm semnalați orice bug la adresa mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Sfat: Tasta Tab schimbă panoul curent. + +Sfat: facilități VFS: Apăsați ENTER pe un fișier tar pentru a examina conținutul său. + +Sfat: Avem de asemenea și o pagină de manual. + +Sfat: Dorești navigare în stilul Lynx? Poți seta în dialogul Configurare. + +Sfat: macro-urile funcționează și în linia de comandă. + +Sfat: M-! vă dă posibilitatea să rulați programe și să afișați rezultatul în vizualizator. + +Sfat: Formatul listării de fișiere poate fi modificat; rulați "man mc" pentru detalii. + +Sfat: %D/%T se extinde pe fișierele marcate din dosarul opus. + +Sfat: Doriți un shell simplu? Apăsați C-o, iar pentru a revenit în MC apăsați din nou C-o. + +Sfat: Configurând variabila CDPATH puteți minimiza numărul de taste apăsate pentru comenzi CD. + +Sfat: Dacă doriți să vedeți fișierele .*, specificați acest lucru în dialogul Configurare. + +Sfat: Doriți să vedeți fișierele de backup *~ ? Specificați acest lucru în dialogul Configurare. + +Sfat: Funcția de completare funcționează în toate liniile de intrare din toate dialogurile. Trebuie doar să apăsați M-Tab. + +Sfat: Pentru terminalele lente, opțiunea -s ar putea ajuta. + +Sfat: Căutare fișier: puteți lucra cu fișierele găsite folosind butonul de panelizare. + +Sfat: Doriți căutări complexe? Folosiți comanda de panelizare externă. + +Sfat: Pentru a schimba dosarul curent în timpul tastării unei comenzi, folosiți M-c (cd rapid). + +Sfat: Comenzile shell nu funcționează în sisteme de fișiere care nu sunt locale. + +Sfat: Puteți recupera textul șters cu C-y. + +Sfat: Unele taste nu funcționează? Verificați meniul Opțiuni/Învață taste. + +Sfat: Pentru vedea în vizualizator rezultatul unei comenzi, folosiți M-! + +Sfat: F13 (sau Shift-F3) apelează vizualizatorul în mod brut. + +Sfat: Puteti specifica editorul pentru F4 cu ajutorul variabilei de shell EDITOR. + +Sfat: Puteți specifica vizualizatorul extern cu ajutorul variabilelor de shell VIEWER sau PAGER. + +Sfat: Puteți dezactiva toate cererile de confirmare în meniul Opțiuni/Confirmări. + +Sfat: Săriți la dosarele utilizate frecvent într-un singur pas cu C-\. + +Sfat: Puteți să vă conectați la FTP în mod anonim din MC tastând 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Sfat: Serviciul FTP este încorporat în Midnight Commander, verificați meniul Fișier/Legătură FTP. + +Sfat: M-t schimbă rapid modul de listare. + +Sfat: Puteți specifica numele utilizatorului pentru ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Sfat: Puteți parcurge fișierele RPM apăsând ENTER pe fișier. + +Sfat: Pentru a marca dosarele în dialogul de selecție, adăugați slash. + +Sfat: Pentru a folosi mouse-ul pentru a decupa și insera, trebuie să țineți tasta Shift apăsată. + +Sfat: Pentru a păstra în lista rapida site-urile ftp vizitate frecvent: tastați C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ru b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ru new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41ea2d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.ru @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Совет: Используйте C-x t для копирования помеченных файлов в командную строку. + +Совет: Используйте C-x p для копирования текущего пути в командную строку. + +Совет: Автодополнение: M-Tab (или Esc+Tab). Для получения списка нажать дважды. + +Совет: Используйте M-p и M-n для доступа к истории команд. + +Совет: Требуется вставить литерал? Нажмите Control-q и литерал. + +Совет: Устали от этих сообщений? Отключите их в меню Настройки/Внешний вид. + +Совет: Отметка каталогов: добавьте косую черту в конец соответствующего шаблона. + +Совет: Если ваш терминал без функц. клавиш, вам поможет ESC+цифра. + +Совет: Домашняя страница Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Совет: Пожалуйста, шлите любые сообщения об ошибках на mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Совет: Tab меняет текущую панель. + +Совет: Удобство ВФС: нажать Enter на файле tar для получения его содержимого. + +Совет: У нас также имеется толковая страница руководства. + +Совет: Хотите навигацию в стиле Lynx? Настройте её в диалоге Конфигурация. + +Совет: Макросы % работают даже в командной строке. + +Совет: M-! позволит вам выполнять программы и видеть вывод в просмотрщике. + +Совет: Формат списка файлов можно изменить; наберите "man mc" для подробностей. + +Совет: %D/%T распространяется на отмеченные файлы в противоположном каталоге. + +Совет: Хотите простую оболочку? Нажмите C-o, и снова C-o для возврата в МС. + +Совет: Установив переменную CDPATH, вы сбережёте усилия при наборе команды cd. + +Совет: Вы сможете видеть скрытые файлы .*, установив опцию в меню Конфигурация. + +Совет: Хотите видеть резервные файлы .~ ? Установите опцию в меню Конфигурация. + +Совет: Автодополнение работает во всех строках ввода. Просто нажмите M-Tab. + +Совет: На медленных терминалах может помочь флаг -s. + +Совет: Поиск файла: вы можете работать с найденными файлами при Панелизации. + +Совет: Используйте команду "Внешняя панелизация" для сложного поиска. + +Совет: Для смены каталога во время набора команды нажмите M-c (быстрая смена). + +Совет: Команды оболочки не выполняются, если вы не в локальной файл. системе. + +Совет: Удалённый текст можно вернуть с помощью C-y. + +Совет: Некоторые клавиши не работают? Зайдите в Настройки/Определение клавиш. + +Совет: Для получения вывода команды в окне просмотра наберите M-! + +Совет: F13 (или Shift-F3) вызывают просмотрщик в режиме необработанных данных. + +Совет: Вы можете выбрать редактор для F4 с помощью переменной оболочки EDITOR. + +Совет: Внешний просмотрщик можно выбрать с помощью переменной оболочки PAGER. + +Совет: Вы можете отменить запросы на подтверждение в Настройки/Подтверждение. + +Совет: Переходите к часто используемым каталогам из справочника, набрав C-\. + +Совет: Вы можете использовать анонимный FTP с mc, набрав 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Совет: FTP встроен в Midnight Commander: меню Панель/FTP-соединение. + +Совет: M-t быстро изменяет формат списка панели. + +Совет: Вы можете задать имя пользователя в команде: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu'. + +Совет: Вы можете просматривать файлы RPM, нажав Enter на файле RPM. + +Совет: Для отметки каталогов в диалоге выбора добавьте косую черту. + +Совет: Вырезание и вставка с помощью мыши может требовать удержания клавиши Shift. + +Совет: Храните список часто посещаемых FTP в справочнике каталогов: нажмите C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sk b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sk new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e794380 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sk @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Tip: Pomocou C-x t skopírujete označené názvy súborov do príkazového riadka. + +Tip: Pomocou C-x p skopírujete aktuálnu cestu do príkazového riadka. + +Tip: Dopĺňanie pomocou M-Tab (alebo Esc+Tab). Ak ho napíšete dvakrát, zobrazí sa zoznam. + +Tip: Pomocou M-p a M-n zobrazíte históriu príkazov. + +Tip: Potrebujete vložiť znak? Stlačte Control-q a napíšte znak. + +Tip: Už vás tieto správy unavujú? Vypnite ich v menu Možnosti/Rozmiestnenie. + +Tip: Výber adresárov: pridajte lomku na koniec vyhľadávacieho vzoru. + +Tip: Ak váš terminál nemá funkčné klávesy, použite ESC+číselnú postupnosť. + +Tip: Domovská stránka GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Tip: Hlásenia chýb posielajte na mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Tip: Tabulátor mení váš aktuálny panel. + +Tip: VFS: stlačením Enter na súbore .tar preskúmate jeho obsah. + +Tip: Máme aj peknú manuálovú stránku. + +Tip: Chcete navigáciu v štýle Lynx? Nastavte si ju v dialógu Konfigurácia. + +Tip: Makrá % fungujú aj na príkazovom riadku. + +Tip: M-! vám umožní spúšťať programy a vidieť výstup v prehliadači. + +Tip: Formát výpisu súborov je možné prispôsobiť. Podrobnosti nájdete v „man mc“. + +Tip: %D/%T expanduje označené súbory v náprotivnom adresári. + +Tip: Chcete čistý shell? Stlačte C-o a späť do MC sa prepnite oäť pomocou C-o. + +Tip: Nastavenie premennej CDPATH vám ušetrí písanie pri príkazoch cd. + +Tip: Ak chcete vidieť súbory .*, zapnite si to v dialógu Konfigurácia. + +Tip: Ak chcete vidieť záložné súbory *~, zapnite si to v dialógu Konfigurácia. + +Tip: Dopĺňanie funguje vo vstupných poliach všetkých dialógov. Stačí stlačiť M-Tab. + +Tip: Na pomalých termináloch môže pomôcť prepínač -s. + +Tip: Nájdenie súboru: s nájdenými súbormi môžete pracovať pomocou tlačidla Panelizovať. + +Tip: Chcete využiť komplexné hľadanie? Použite príkaz Externá panelizácia. + +Tip: Ak chcete zmeniť adresár uprostred písania príkazu, použite M-c (rýchle cd). + +Tip: príkazy shellu nebudú fungovať, keď sa nachádzate na nelokálnom súborovom systéme. + +Tip: Vráťte späť zmazaný text pomocou C-y. + +Tip: Nefungujú niektoré z vašich klávesov? Pozrite sa na Možnosti/Učenie klávesov. + +Tip: Pomocou M-! zobrazíte výstup príkazu v prehliadači. + +Tip: F13 (alebo Shift-F3) vyvolá prehliadač v nespracovanom režime. + +Tip: Premennou prostredia EDITOR môžete určiť editor pre F4. + +Tip: Premennými prostredia VIEWER alebo PAGER môžete určiť externý prehliadač. + +Tip: Môžete zakázať všetky žiadosti o potvrdenie pomocou Možnosti/Konfigurácia. + +Tip: Do často používaných adresárov môžete skákať pomocou C-\. + +Tip: Prístup k anonymnému FTP z mc získate napísaním „cd ftp://machine.edu“ + +Tip: FTP je súčasťou aplikácie Midnight Commander, pozrite si menu Súbor/Pripojenie FTP. + +Tip: M-t rýchlo zmení režim výpisu. + +Tip: Môžete uviesť meno používateľa v príkaze ftps: 'cd ftp://používateľ@počítač' + +Tip: Stlačením Enter na súbore .rpm môžete prechádzať súbory v RPM. + +Tip: Adresáre v dialógovom okne výberu môžete označiť pridaním lomky. + +Tip: Na kopírovanie a vkladanie pomocou myši môže byť potrebné podržať Shift. + +Tip: Uložte si často navštevované servery FTP do hotlistu: C-\ diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sr b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sr new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9da447 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sr @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Савет: Користите „C-x t“ да умножите означене називе датотека у линији наредби. + +Савет: Користите „C-x p“ да умножите назив текуће путање у линији наредби. + +Савет: Довршавање: користите „M-Tab“ (или „Esc+Tab“). Укуцајте га два пута да добавите списак. + +Савет: Користите „M-p“ и „M-n“ да приступите историјату наредби. + +Савет: Треба да цитирате знак? Користите „Ctrl-q“ и знак. + +Савет: Ове поруке вас излуђују? Искључите их у изборнику „Опције/Распоред“. + +Савет: Бирање директоријума: додајте косу црту на крај обрасца за поређење. + +Савет: Ако вашем терминалу недостају функцијски тастери, користите низ „ЕСЦ+број“. + +Савет: Матична страница Гнуовог Поноћног наредника: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Савет: Све извештаје о грешкама пошаљите на „mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org“ + +Савет: Табулатор мења ваш текући панел. + +Савет: Смиреност ВСД-а: лупните тастер „Унеси“ на тар датотеци да испитате њен садржај. + +Савет: Такође имамо и лепу страницу упутства. + +Савет: Да ли желите кретање у стилу Lynx? Поставите га у прозорчету подешавања. + +Савет: % макрои раде чак и на линији наредби. + +Савет: „M-!“ ће вам омогућити да извршите програме и да видите излаз у прегледачу. + +Савет: Запис исписивања датотека може бити прилагођен; упишите „man mc“ за појединости. + +Савет: „%D/%T“ се проширује ка означеним датотекама у супротном директоријуму. + +Савет: Желите вашу обичну љуску? Притисните „C-o“, и вратите се Поноћном нареднику опет са „C-o“. + +Савет: Постављањем променљиве „CDPATH“ може да вам уштеди пречице тастатуре у „cd“ наредбама. + +Савет: Ако желите да видите ваше „.*“ датотеке, реците тако у прозорчету подешавања. + +Савет: Желите да видите ваше датотеке резерви „*~“? Поставите то у прозорчету подешавања. + +Савет: Довршавање ради на свим улазним редовима у свим прозорчићима. Само притисните „M-Tab“. + +Савет: На спорим терминалима заставица „-s“ може бити од користи. + +Савет: Налажење датотеке: можете да радите на налажењу датотека користећи дугме „У окно“. + +Савет: Желите да обавите сложене претраге? Користите наредбу „Спољним програмом у окно“. + +Савет: Да промените директоријум на пола пута куцајући наредбу, користите „M-c“ (брза промена директоријума). + +Савет: Наредбе љуске неће радити када нисте на месном систему датотека. + +Савет: Вратите текст у живот са „C-y“. + +Савет: Да ли неки од ваших тастера не раде? Погледајте „Опције/Научи тастере“. + +Савет: Да погледате излаз наредбе у прегледачу, користите „M-!“. + +Савет: Ф13 (или Помак-Ф3) призива прегледача у сировом режиму. + +Савет: Можете да наведете уређивача за Ф4 променљивом љуске „УРЕЂИВАЧ“. + +Савет: Можете да наведете спољног прегледача променљивима љуске „ПРЕГЛЕДАЧ“ или „СТРАНИЧНИК“. + +Савет: Можете да искључите све захтеве за потврђивањем у изборнику „Опције/Потврђивање“. + +Савет: Скокните до често коришћених директоријума користећи „C-\“. + +Савет: Можете да одрадите безимени протокол преноса датотека са „cd ftp://machine.edu“ + +Савет: Протокол преноса датотека је изграђен у Поноћном нареднику, проверите изборник „Датотека/ФТП веза“. + +Савет: „M-t“ мења брзо режим исписивања. + +Савет: Можете да наведете име корисника када обављате фтпс: „cd ftp://user@machine.edu“ + +Савет: Можете да разгледате РПМ датотеке ако лупнете тастером „Унеси“ по рпм датотеци. + +Савет: Да означите директоријуме у пољу прозорчета за избор, прикачите косу црту. + +Савет: Исецање и убацивање мишем може да захтева држање тастера помака + +Савет: За често посећиване фтп странице у врућем списку: укуцајте „C-\“. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sv b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sv new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f70c882 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.sv @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Tips: Använd C-x t för att kopiera markerade filers namn till kommandoraden. + +Tips: Använd C-x p för att kopiera nuvarande katalognamn till kommandoraden. + +Tips: Komplettering: anv M-Tab (el Esc+Tab). Tryck två ggr för att få en lista. + +Tips: Använd M-p och M-n för att komma åt kommandohistoriken. + +Tips: Behöver du skriva ett kontrolltecken? Använd Control-q och tecknet. + +Tips: Är du trött på dessa meddelanden? Stäng av dem från Alternativ/Layout-menyn. + +Tips: Välja kataloger: Lägg till snedstreck i slutet av det matchande mönstret. + +Tips: Om din terminal saknar funktionstangenter, använd ESC+siffersekvens. + +Tips: Hemsidan för GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Tips: Skicka felrapporter till mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Tips: Tab ändrar din nuvarande panel. + +Tips: VFS användbarhet: tryck enter på en tar-fil för att se dess innehåll. + +Tips: Vi har också en trevlig manualsida. + +Tips: Vill du ha navigation i Lynx-stil? Ställ in det i konfigurationsdialogen. + +Tips: %-makron fungerar även på kommandoraden. + +Tips: M-! tillåter dig att exekvera program och se utskriften i filvisaren. + +Tips: Fillistningsformatet kan anpassas; kör "man mc" för detaljer. + +Tips: %D/%T expanderar till de markerade filerna i katalogen mitt emot. + +Tips: Vill du ha ditt vanliga skal? Tryck C-o och gå tillbaks med C-o igen. + +Tips: Att sätta CDPATH-variabeln kan spara tangenttryckningar i cd-kommandon. + +Tips: Om du vill se dina .*-filer, ställ in det i konfigurations-dialogen. + +Tips: Vill du se dina *~-backupfiler? Ställ in det i konfigurations-dialogen. + +Tips: Komplettering funkar på alla inmatningsrutor i dialoger. Tryck på M-Tab. + +Tips: På långsamma terminaler kan -s-flaggan hjälpa. + +Tips: Sök fil: du kan arbeta med funna filer med panelisera-knappen. + +Tips: Vill du göra komplexa sökningar? Använd kommandot Extern panelisering. + +Tips: För att ändra katalog under kommandoinmatning, använd M-c (snabb-cd). + +Tips: Skalkommandon funkar inte när du är på ett icke-lokalt filsystem. + +Tips: Ta tillbaks text från de döda med C-y. + +Tips: Fungerar vissa tangenter inte? Se Alternativ/Lär in tangenter. + +Tips: för att se utmatningen från ett kommando i filvisaren, använd M-! + +Tips: F13 (eller Skift-F3) startar filvisaren i rått läge. + +Tips: Du kan specificera editorn för F4 med skalvariabeln EDITOR. + +Tips: Du kan välja den externa filvisaren med skalvariabeln VIEWER eller PAGER. + +Tips: Du kan slå av alla är-du-säker-frågor i Alternativ/Konfirmation. + +Tips: Hoppa till ofta använda kataloger i ett steg med C-\. + +Tips: Du kan använda anonym FTP i mc genom att skriva 'cd ftp://dator.se' + +Tips: FTP är inbyggt i Midnight Commander, se Fil/FTP-länk-menyn. + +Tips: M-t ändrar snabbt listningsläget. + +Tips: Du kan specificera användarnamnet med ftps: 'cd ftp://användare@dator.se' + +Tips: Du kan bläddra i RPM-filer genom att trycka enter på en RPM-fil. + +Tips: För att markera kataloger i markera-dialogrutan, lägg till snedstreck. + +Tips: Skift kan behöva hållas ned för att använda klipp och klistra med musen. + +Tips: Mata in ofta använda ftp-sajter i favoriter: tryck C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.tr b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.tr new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8dfa32 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.tr @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +İpucu: C-x t ile işaretlenmiş dosyaların isimlerini komut satırına kopyalayabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: C-x p ile komut satırına aktif yolu kopyalayabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Tamamlamak için M-Tab (veya Esc+Tab) kullanın. Liste için iki kere basın. + +İpucu: M-p ve M-n ile komut geçmişine ulaşabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Bir karakteri alıntılamanız mı gerekiyor? Control-q yapın ve karakteri kullanın. + +İpucu: Bu mesajlardan sıkıldınız mı? Seçenekler/Görünüm menüsünden kapatabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Dizinleri seçmek için eşleştirme kalıbının sonuna bölü ekleyin. + +İpucu: Eğer klavyenizde fonksiyon tuşları yoksa, ESC+numara kombinasyonunu kullanabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: GNU Midnight Commander web adresi: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +İpucu: Tüm hata raporlarını mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org adresine gönderebilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Tab aktif paneli değiştirir. + +İpucu: VFS rahatlığı: tar dosyalarının içeriğine bakmak için üzerindeyken Enter tuşuna basın. + +İpucu: Aynı zamanda güzel bir kullanım kılavuzumuz da var. + +İpucu: Lynx-tarzı dolaşım ister misiniz? Yapılandırma diyaloğundan ayarlayabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: % makroları komut satırında bile çalışır. + +İpucu: M-! uygulamaları çalıştırmanızı ve çıktılarını görüntüleyicide görmenizi sağlar. + +İpucu: Dosya listeleme biçimi özelleştirilebilir. Detaylar için "man mc" + +İpucu: %D/%T işaretlenmiş dosyaları karşı klasöre çıkarır. + +İpucu: Düz kabuk mu gerekli? C-o kombinasyonuna basın, sonra MC'ye geri dönmek için tekrar C-o yapın. + +İpucu: CDPATH değişkenini ayarlamak cd komutlarında sizi fazladan tuşa basmaktan kurtarabilir. + +İpucu: .* dosyalarını görmek isterseniz, yapılandırma diyaloğundan ayarlayabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: *~ yedek dosyalarını görmek ister misiniz? Yapılandırma diyaloğundan ayarlayabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Tamamlama dialoglardaki tüm girişlerde çalışır. M-Tab yapın. + +İpucu: Yavaş uçbirimlerde -s bayrağı işe yarayabilir. + +İpucu: Dosya Arama: Panelleştir düğmesini kullanarak bulunan dosyalar üzerinde çalışabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Karmaşık aramalar mı yapmak istiyorsunuz? Dış Panelleştir komutunu kullanın. + +İpucu: Komut yazarken arada klasör değiştirmek için M-c (çabuk cd) kullanın. + +İpucu: Yerel olmayan bir dosya sistemindeyseniz, kabuk komutları çalışmayacaktır. + +İpucu: C-y ile metni kurtarabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Bazı tuşlarınız çalışmıyor mu? Seçenekler/Tuşları öğren menüsüne bakın. + +İpucu: Görüntülüyecide bir komutun çıktısına bakmak için M-! kullanabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: F13 (veya Shift-F3) görüntüleyicisi ham modda çalıştırır. + +İpucu: EDITOR kabuk değişkeni ile F4 tuşuna basınca kullanılacak düzenleyiciyi belirtebilirsiniz. + +İpucu: VIEWER veya PAGER kabuk değişkenleri ile dış görüntüleyicileri belirtebilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Seçenekler/Onaylar menüsünden tüm onay isteklerini devre dışı bırakabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Sık kullanılan dizinlere tek hareketle geçmek için C-\ kullanabilirsiniz. + +İpucu: mc ile anonim FTP bağlantısı kurabilirsiniz. Örn: 'cd ftp://sunucu.edu.tr' + +İpucu: Midnight Commander içinde FTP desteği mevcuttur, menüden Dosya/FTP bağlantısı seçin. + +İpucu: M-t kombinasyonu ile hızlıca listeleme modunu değiştirebilirsiniz. + +İpucu: FTP bağlantısı kurarken kullancı adını belirtebilirsiniz. Örn: 'cd ftp://kullanıcı@sunucu.edu.tr' + +İpucu: RPM dosyalarının üzerinde Enter tuşuna basarak içine girebilirsiniz. + +İpucu: Seçim dialoğunda dizinleri işaretlemek için bölü ekleyin. + +İpucu: Fare ile kopyalamak/yapıştırmak için Shift tuşunu basılı tutmanız gerekebilir. + +İpucu: Sıklıklar ziyaret edilen FTP sitelerini kısayollara eklemek için C-\ kullanın. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.uk b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.uk new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d561e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.uk @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Підказка. Натисніть C-x t, щоб скопіювати позначені файли в командний рядок. + +Підказка. Натисніть C-x p, щоб скопіювати поточний шлях у командний рядок. + +Підказка. Автодоповнення: натисніть M-Tab (Esc+Tab). Щоб отримати список, натисніть двічі. + +Підказка. Натисніть M-p і M-n, щоб отримати доступ до історії команд. + +Підказка. Потрібно вставити літерал? Натисніть Control+q, а потім літерал. + +Підказка. Набридли ці підказки? Вимкніть їх у вікні Параметри|Зовнішній вигляд. + +Підказка. Щоб вибрати каталоги, додайте скісну риску в кінець відповідного шаблону. + +Підказка. Якщо термінал не має функціональних клавіш, використовуйте комбінацію клавіш Esc+цифра. + +Підказка. Домашня сторінка Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Підказка. Надсилайте повідомлення про помилки на адресу mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Підказка. Клавіша Tab змінює поточну панель. + +Підказка. Зручність VFS: щоб отримати вміст файлу tar, натисніть клавішу Enter на файлі. + +Підказка. Можна прочитати непогану сторінку посібника. + +Підказка. Щоб увімкнути навігацію у стилі Lynx, виберіть параметр у вікні Параметри|Конфігурація. + +Підказка. Макроси % працюють навіть у командному рядку. + +Підказка. Щоб виконати програму й побачити результат у вікні перегляду, натисніть M-!. + +Підказка. Формат списку файлів можна змінити. Введіть «man mc», щоб дізнатися більше. + +Підказка. %D/%T означає вибрані файли на протилежній панелі. + +Підказка. Щоб отримати звичайний shell, натисніть C-o, а потім знову C-o для повернення в МС. + +Підказка. Щоб зберегти зусилля під час набору команди cd, установіть змінну оточення CDPATH + +Підказка. Щоб побачити приховані файли .*, увімкніть параметр у вікні Параметри|Конфігурація. + +Підказка. Щоб побачити резервні файли .*~, увімкніть параметр у вікні Параметри|Конфігурація. + +Підказка. Автодоповнення працює у всіх рядках введення. Просто натисніть M-Tab. + +Підказка. На повільних терміналах скористайтеся опцією -s. + +Підказка. Щоб працювати із знайденими файлами після їх пошуку, виберіть команду «Панелізувати». + +Підказка. Щоб виконати складний пошук, скористайтеся командою «Зовнішня панелізація». + +Підказка. Щоб змінити каталог під час набору команди, натисніть M-c (швидка зміна). + +Підказка. Команди shell не виконуються, якщо ви не в локальній файловій системі. + +Підказка. Видалений текст можна повернути за допомогою C-y. + +Підказка. Якщо деякі клавіші не працюють, скористайтеся вікном Параметри|Вивчення клавіш. + +Підказка. Щоб отримати результат виконання команди у вікні перегляду, натисніть M-! + +Підказка. F13 (або Shift-F3) відкриває переглядач у режимі необроблених даних. + +Підказка. Можна вибрати редактор для F4 за допомогою змінної оточення EDITOR. + +Підказка. Зовнішній переглядач можна вибрати за допомогою змінної оточення PAGER. + +Підказка. Можна вимкнути запити на підтвердження дій у вікні Параметри|Підтвердження. + +Підказка. Щоб перейти до часто використовуваних каталогів, натисніть C-\. + +Підказка. Щоб відкрити анонімний FTP, введіть команду «cd ftp://machine.edu». + +Підказка. Щоб скористатися вбудованим у Midnight Commander клієнтом FTP, відкрийте вікно Панель|FTP-з’єднання. + +Підказка. Щоб швидко змінити формат списку панелі, натисніть M-t. + +Підказка. Щоб указати ім’я користувача ftpfs, введіть «cd ftp://user@machine.edu». + +Підказка. Щоб переглянути файл RPM, натисніть на ньому Enter. + +Підказка. Щоб відмітити каталоги в діалоговому вікні вибору, додайте похилу риску. + +Підказка. Щоб вирізати або вставити за допомогою мишки, утримуйте клавішу Shift. + +Підказка. Щоб зберегти часто відвідувані FTP у списку каталогів, натисніть C-\. diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.zh_CN b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.zh_CN new file mode 100644 index 0000000..63ed69e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.zh_CN @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +提示：使用 C-x t 来复制已选择的文件名称到命令行。 + +提示：使用 C-x p 来将目前的路径名称复制到命令行。 + +提示：补全：使用 M-Tab（或 Esc+Tab）。按两次看整个列表。 + +提示：使用 M-p 和 M-n 来访问指令使用纪录。 + +提示：要使用转义字符（escape cahracter）？可使用 Control-q 再加上要输入的字符。 + +提示：是否对这些消息厌倦了？可在「选项/配置」菜单中关闭它。 + +提示：选择目录：在要搜索的样本后加入 "/"。 + +提示：如果你的终端机没有功能键，可以使用 ESC + 数字按键。 + +提示：Midnight Commander 网页：https://www.midnight-commander.org + +提示：请发送错误报告到 mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +提示：Tab 会切换使用中的面板。 + +提示：VFS 的好处：在 tar 文件上按 enter 可查看它的内容。 + +提示：我们有一个不错的手册页。 + +提示：你是否想使用 Lynx 的浏览方式？请到设置对话窗中设置。 + +提示：% 宏在命令行也可使用。 + +提示：M-! 可让你运行指令并在查看器看到它的输出。 + +提示：你可自定义文件列表的格式；输入 "man mc" 可获得更多细节。 + +提示：%D/%T 会扩展成另一边皮肤中已标记的文件。 + +提示：想使用平常的 Shell？可按 C-o，再按一次就会返回 MC。 + +提示：设置 CDPATH 环境变量可以令使用 cd 指令时省却一点按键。 + +提示：若想看你的 .* 文件，请到设置对话窗中设置。 + +提示：想查看你的 *~ 备份档？请到设置对话窗中设置。 + +提示：补全可在任何对话窗中的任何输入字段中使用。只要按下 M-Tab 就可以了。 + +提示：在缓慢的终端机里使用 -s 选项或会有帮助。 + +提示：搜索文件：你可以使用「面板化」选项来处理搜索到的文件。 + +提示：想处理较复杂的文件搜索？可使用「外部皮肤化」指令。 + +提示：要在输入命令时改变目录，可使用 M-c（快速切换目录）。 + +提示：在非本机的文件系统里无法使用 Shell 指令。 + +提示：可用 C-y 将已删除的文本重新显示出来。 + +提示：是否有些按键无法使用？可看看「选项/认识按键」中的按键。 + +提示：要在查看器里看到指令的输出，使用 M-! + +提示：F13（或 Shift-F3）会使用原始模式开启查看器。 + +提示：你可以使用环境变量 EDITOR 来指定按下 F4 后开启的编辑器。 + +提示：你可以使用环境变量 PAGER 来指定外部的查看器。 + +提示：你可以在「选项/确认」里关闭所有确认的要求。 + +提示：使用 C-\ 可以即时跳到经常使用的目录。 + +提示：你可以在 mc 使用匿名模式的 FTP，方法是输入 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +提示：FTP 是 Midnight Commander 的内置功能，请检查「文件/FTP 连接」菜单。 + +提示：M-t 可快速地切换列表模式。 + +提示：你可以在使用 ftp 时指定用户名，例如：'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +提示：你可以在 rpm 归档上按 enter 来浏览 rpm 里的文件。 + +提示：在选择对话框中选取目录时，要在后面加一个 "/"。 + +提示：要使用鼠标剪贴功能需要你按下 shift 键 + +提示：要将常到的网站输入常用列表里：键入 C-\。 diff --git a/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.zh_TW b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.zh_TW new file mode 100644 index 0000000..305ab28 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/l10n/mc.hint.zh_TW @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +提示: 使用 C-x 來複製已選擇的檔案名稱到命令列。 + +提示: 使用 C-p 來複製目前的路徑到命令列。 + +提示: 補齊: 使用 M-Tab ( 或 Esc+Tab)。 按兩次來查看列表。 + +提示: 使用 M-p 和 M-n 來存取指令紀錄。 + +提示: 要使用跳脫字元嗎? 使用 Control-q 再加上要輸入的字即可。 + +提示: 是否對這些訊息感到厭倦了? 可在選單中的【選項/樣式】來關閉它。 + +提示: 選取資料夾: 在比對結果的後方加上 "/" + +提示: 若您的終端機沒有功能鍵，可使用【ESC+數字鍵】來代替。 + +提示：Midnight Commander 网页：https://www.midnight-commander.org + +提示：请发送错误报告到 mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +提示: Tab 可切換使用中的面板。 + +提示: VFS 的好處: 在 tar 檔案上按 Enter 按鍵可查看它的內容。 + +提示: 我們有一個很棒的手冊頁。 + +提示：你是否想使用 Lynx 的浏览方式？请到设置对话窗中设置。 + +提示: % 巨集也可在命令列中使用。 + +提示: M-! 可讓您執行程式並在檢視器中查看輸出結果。 + +提示: 您可以自訂檔案列表的格式；輸入 "mac mc" 指令查看更多資訊。 + +提示: %D/%T 會改變成另一側資料夾中被標記的檔案。 + +提示: 您想要使用一般的 shell 嗎? 按一下 C-o 即可，再按一下 C-o 又可回到 MC。 + +提示: 設定 CDPATH 環境變數可讓您儲存一些 cd 指令。 + +提示: 若您想要查看 .* 的檔案，請到設定中進行更改。 + +提示: 想查看您的 *~ 備份檔? 請到設定中進行更改。 + +提示: 補齊可以在任何對話框中，輸入任何文字時使用。只要按下 M-Tab 即可。 + +提示: 在反應較慢的終端機裡使用 -s 選項或許會有幫助。 + +提示: 尋找檔案: 您可以使用面板上的按鈕來進行檔案的尋找。 + +提示: 想要做較複雜的搜尋? 可使用外部面板的指令來進行。 + +提示: 要在輸入指令時中途改變目錄，可使用 M-c 指令 (快速的 cd) + +提示：在非本机的文件系统里无法使用 Shell 指令。 + +提示: 可使用 C-y 將已刪除的文字重新顯示出來。 + +提示: 是否有功能鍵無法使用? 可看看 【選項/學習快捷鍵】中的功能鍵是否設定正確。 + +提示: 要在檢視器中查看指令輸出的結果，請使用 M-! + +提示: F13 (或 Shift-F3) 會使用原生模式開啟檢視器。 + +提示: 您可以使用環境變數 EDITOR 來指定按下 F4 後的檔案編輯器。 + +提示: 您可以使用環境變數 VIEWER 或 PAGER 來指定外部的檔案檢視器。 + +提示: 您可以在【選項/確認】中關閉所有的確認請求。 + +提示: 可使用 C-\ 跳轉到常用的目錄。 + +提示: 您可以在 mc 中使用匿名模式的 FTP，方法是輸入 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +提示: FTP 是 Midnight Commander 的內建功能，可在【檔案 / 連結到 FTP ...】中察看。 + +提示: M-t 可快速切換列表模式。 + +提示: 您可以在使用 FTP 時指定使用者，例如: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +提示: 您可以在 rpm 格式的檔案上按 Enter 來瀏覽 RPM 裡的檔案。 + +提示: 在選取對話框中標記目錄，需在後方加入一個 "/" + +提示: 要使用滑鼠來剪下和貼上需同時按住 Shift 鍵。 + +提示: 若要將常用的 ftp 站點加入至常用列表中請按 C-\ diff --git a/doc/hints/mc.hint b/doc/hints/mc.hint new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a65580 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hints/mc.hint @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +Hint: Use C-x t to copy tagged file names to the command line. + +Hint: Use C-x p to copy the current pathname to the command line. + +Hint: Completion: use M-Tab (or Esc+Tab). Type it twice to get a list. + +Hint: Use M-p and M-n to access the command history. + +Hint: Need to quote a character? Use Control-q and the character. + +Hint: Tired of these messages? Turn them off from the Options/Layout menu. + +Hint: Selecting directories: add a slash to the end of the matching pattern. + +Hint: If your terminal lacks functions keys, use the ESC+number sequence. + +Hint: The homepage of GNU Midnight Commander: https://www.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Please send any bug reports to mc-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org + +Hint: Tab changes your current panel. + +Hint: VFS coolness: tap enter on a tar file to examine its contents. + +Hint: We also have a nice manual page. + +Hint: Do you want Lynx-style navigation? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: % macros work even on the command line. + +Hint: M-! will allow you to execute programs and see the output in the viewer. + +Hint: The file listing format can be customized; do "man mc" for details. + +Hint: %D/%T expands to the tagged files in the opposite directory. + +Hint: Want your plain shell? Press C-o, and get back to MC with C-o again. + +Hint: Setting the CDPATH variable can save you keystrokes in cd commands. + +Hint: If you want to see your .* files, say so in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Want to see your *~ backup files? Set it in the Configuration dialog. + +Hint: Completion works on all input lines in all dialogs. Just press M-Tab. + +Hint: On slow terminals the -s flag may help. + +Hint: Find File: you can work on the files found using the Panelize button. + +Hint: Want to do complex searches? Use the External Panelize command. + +Hint: To change directory halfway through typing a command, use M-c (quick cd). + +Hint: Shell commands will not work when you are on a non-local file system. + +Hint: Bring text back from the dead with C-y. + +Hint: Are some of your keys not working? Look at Options/Learn keys. + +Hint: To look at the output of a command in the viewer, use M-! + +Hint: F13 (or Shift-F3) invokes the viewer in raw mode. + +Hint: You may specify the editor for F4 with the shell variable EDITOR. + +Hint: You may specify the external viewer with the shell vars VIEWER or PAGER. + +Hint: You can disable all requests for confirmation in Options/Confirmation. + +Hint: Leap to frequently used directories in a single bound with C-\. + +Hint: You can do anonymous FTP with mc by typing 'cd ftp://machine.edu' + +Hint: FTP is built in the Midnight Commander, check the File/FTP link menu. + +Hint: M-t changes quickly the listing mode. + +Hint: You can specify the username when doing ftps: 'cd ftp://user@machine.edu' + +Hint: You can browse RPM files by tapping enter on top of an rpm file. + +Hint: To mark directories on the select dialog box, append a slash. + +Hint: To use the mouse cut and paste may require holding the shift key + +Hint: Key frequently visited ftp sites in the hotlist: type C-\. diff --git a/doc/hlp/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57c0985 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +DIST_SUBDIRS = es hu it pl ru sr +if USE_NLS +SUBDIRS = $(DOC_LINGUAS) +endif + +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp + +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) + +mc.hlp: $(top_builddir)/doc/man/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp + - $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp $(top_builddir)/doc/man/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp diff --git a/doc/hlp/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9762d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,821 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +RECURSIVE_TARGETS = all-recursive check-recursive cscopelist-recursive \ + ctags-recursive dvi-recursive html-recursive info-recursive \ + install-data-recursive install-dvi-recursive \ + install-exec-recursive install-html-recursive \ + install-info-recursive install-pdf-recursive \ + install-ps-recursive install-recursive installcheck-recursive \ + installdirs-recursive pdf-recursive ps-recursive \ + tags-recursive uninstall-recursive +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS = mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive \ + distclean-recursive maintainer-clean-recursive +am__recursive_targets = \ + $(RECURSIVE_TARGETS) \ + $(RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS) \ + $(am__extra_recursive_targets) +AM_RECURSIVE_TARGETS = $(am__recursive_targets:-recursive=) TAGS CTAGS \ + distdir distdir-am +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +# Read a list of newline-separated strings from the standard input, +# and print each of them once, without duplicates. Input order is +# *not* preserved. +am__uniquify_input = $(AWK) '\ + BEGIN { nonempty = 0; } \ + { items[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ + END { if (nonempty) { for (i in items) print i; }; } \ +' +# Make sure the list of sources is unique. This is necessary because, +# e.g., the same source file might be shared among _SOURCES variables +# for different programs/libraries. +am__define_uniq_tagged_files = \ + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + unique=`for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ + done | $(am__uniquify_input)` +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +am__relativize = \ + dir0=`pwd`; \ + sed_first='s,^\([^/]*\)/.*$$,\1,'; \ + sed_rest='s,^[^/]*/*,,'; \ + sed_last='s,^.*/\([^/]*\)$$,\1,'; \ + sed_butlast='s,/*[^/]*$$,,'; \ + while test -n "$$dir1"; do \ + first=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first" != "."; then \ + if test "$$first" = ".."; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_last"`/"$$dir2"; \ + dir0=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_butlast"`; \ + else \ + first2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first2" = "$$first"; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + else \ + dir2="../$$dir2"; \ + fi; \ + dir0="$$dir0"/"$$first"; \ + fi; \ + fi; \ + dir1=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + done; \ + reldir="$$dir2" +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +DIST_SUBDIRS = es hu it pl ru sr +@USE_NLS_TRUE@SUBDIRS = $(DOC_LINGUAS) +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-recursive + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) + +# This directory's subdirectories are mostly independent; you can cd +# into them and run 'make' without going through this Makefile. +# To change the values of 'make' variables: instead of editing Makefiles, +# (1) if the variable is set in 'config.status', edit 'config.status' +# (which will cause the Makefiles to be regenerated when you run 'make'); +# (2) otherwise, pass the desired values on the 'make' command line. +$(am__recursive_targets): + @fail=; \ + if $(am__make_keepgoing); then \ + failcom='fail=yes'; \ + else \ + failcom='exit 1'; \ + fi; \ + dot_seen=no; \ + target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ + case "$@" in \ + distclean-* | maintainer-clean-*) list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + *) list='$(SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + esac; \ + for subdir in $$list; do \ + echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ + if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ + dot_seen=yes; \ + local_target="$$target-am"; \ + else \ + local_target="$$target"; \ + fi; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ + || eval $$failcom; \ + done; \ + if test "$$dot_seen" = "no"; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) "$$target-am" || exit 1; \ + fi; test -z "$$fail" + +ID: $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); mkid -fID $$unique +tags: tags-recursive +TAGS: tags + +tags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + set x; \ + here=`pwd`; \ + if ($(ETAGS) --etags-include --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ + include_option=--etags-include; \ + empty_fix=.; \ + else \ + include_option=--include; \ + empty_fix=; \ + fi; \ + list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + test ! -f $$subdir/TAGS || \ + set "$$@" "$$include_option=$$here/$$subdir/TAGS"; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + shift; \ + if test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$*$$unique"; then :; else \ + test -n "$$unique" || unique=$$empty_fix; \ + if test $$# -gt 0; then \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + "$$@" $$unique; \ + else \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique; \ + fi; \ + fi +ctags: ctags-recursive + +CTAGS: ctags +ctags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + test -z "$(CTAGS_ARGS)$$unique" \ + || $(CTAGS) $(CTAGSFLAGS) $(AM_CTAGSFLAGS) $(CTAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique + +GTAGS: + here=`$(am__cd) $(top_builddir) && pwd` \ + && $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) \ + && gtags -i $(GTAGS_ARGS) "$$here" +cscopelist: cscopelist-recursive + +cscopelist-am: $(am__tagged_files) + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + case "$(srcdir)" in \ + [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) sdir="$(srcdir)" ;; \ + *) sdir=$(subdir)/$(srcdir) ;; \ + esac; \ + for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then \ + echo "$(subdir)/$$i"; \ + else \ + echo "$$sdir/$$i"; \ + fi; \ + done >> $(top_builddir)/cscope.files + +distclean-tags: + -rm -f TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done + @list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + $(am__make_dryrun) \ + || test -d "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || $(MKDIR_P) "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || exit 1; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(distdir)/$$subdir"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_distdir=$$reldir; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(top_distdir)"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_top_distdir=$$reldir; \ + echo " (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" distdir="$$new_distdir" \\"; \ + echo " am__remove_distdir=: am__skip_length_check=: am__skip_mode_fix=: distdir)"; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ + top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" \ + distdir="$$new_distdir" \ + am__remove_distdir=: \ + am__skip_length_check=: \ + am__skip_mode_fix=: \ + distdir) \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-recursive +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: installdirs-recursive +installdirs-am: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-recursive +install-exec: install-exec-recursive +install-data: install-data-recursive +uninstall: uninstall-recursive + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-recursive +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-recursive + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic distclean-tags + +dvi: dvi-recursive + +dvi-am: + +html: html-recursive + +html-am: + +info: info-recursive + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-recursive + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-recursive + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-recursive + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-recursive + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-recursive + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-recursive + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-recursive + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: $(am__recursive_targets) install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: $(am__recursive_targets) CTAGS GTAGS TAGS all all-am check \ + check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool cscopelist-am ctags \ + ctags-am distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool \ + distclean-tags distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs installdirs-am maintainer-clean \ + maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic \ + mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am ps ps-am tags tags-am uninstall \ + uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp: $(top_builddir)/doc/man/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp + - $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp $(top_builddir)/doc/man/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/es/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/es/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ede2aa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/es/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +HLP_LANG=es + +include ../hlp-lang-include.am diff --git a/doc/hlp/es/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/es/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b329d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/es/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,645 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp/es +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +HLP_LANG = es +MAN2HLP = $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/es/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/es/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/es/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/es/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..569c9ae --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/es/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,632 @@ + +[main] + lqwqk k k + x x x . x . x + x x x k lqu wqk k lqw tqk n + x x x x x x x x x x x x x x + v v v mqv v v v mqu v v mj + qqqqqqCommander qj + +Esta es la pantalla principal de ayuda de GNU Midnight Commander . + +Puede pulsar la tecla «Intro»How to use help para aprender a navegar por el sistema de ayuda, o acceder directamente a los contenidosContents. + +GNU Midnight Commander es obra de sus autoresAUTHORS. + +GNU Midnight Commander NO INCLUYE NINGÚN TIPO DE GARANTÍAWarranty. Es un producto de software libre, y su redistribución es bienvenida en los términos y condiciones establecidas por la Licencia Pública General de GNU (GPL)Licencia GNU, de la que existe una traducción no oficial al españolLicencia GNU (Español). + +[Licencia GNU] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + +The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + +The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + +When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + +To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + +For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + +Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + +For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + +Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + +Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + +The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + +“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + +“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + +“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + +To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + +A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + +To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + +To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + +An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + +The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + +A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + +The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + +The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + +The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + +The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + +All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + +You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + +Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + +When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + +You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + +You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + +You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + +A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + +You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + +A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + +A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + +“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + +If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + +The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + +Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + +“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + +When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + +Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + +All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + +If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + +Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + +You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + +However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + +Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + +Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + +You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + +Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + +An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + +You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + +A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + +A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + +Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + +In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + +If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + +If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + +A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + +Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + +If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + +Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + +If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + +Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + +THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + +IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + +If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + +If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + +To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details. + +The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[Licencia GNU (Español)] + +LICENCIA PÚBLICA GENERAL DE GNU (GPL) + +Esta es la conocida como «GNU General Public License (GPL)», versión 3 (de junio de 2007), que cubre la mayor parte del software de la «Free Software Foundation», y muchos más programas. + +--- + +IMPORTANT NOTICE: +This is an unofficial translation of the GNU General Public License into spanish. It was not published by the Free Software Foundation, and does not legally state the distribution terms for software that uses the GNU GPL —only the original English text of the GNU GPL does that. However, we hope that this translation will help spanish speakers understand the GNU GPL better. + +NOTA IMPORTANTE: +Esta es una traducción no oficial de la Licencia Pública General GNU (GNU GPL) al español. No fue publicada por la Fundación para el Software Libre, y no establece legalmente los términos de distribución para software que utiliza la GNU GPL —sólamente el texto original en inglés de la GNU GPL hace eso. De todas formas, esperamos que esta traducción ayude a los hispanohablantes a comprender mejor la GNU GPL. + +--- + + LICENCIA PÚBLICA GENERAL GNU + Versión 3, 29 de junio de 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + +Se permite la copia y distribución de copias literales de esta licencia, pero no está permitido modificarla. + + Preámbulo + +La Licencia Pública General GNU (GNU GPL) es una licencia libre, sin derechos para software y otro tipo de trabajos. + +Las licencias para la mayoría del software y otros trabajos prácticos están destinadas a suprimir la libertad de compartir y modificar esos trabajos. Por el contrario, la Licencia Pública General GNU persigue garantizar su libertad para compartir y modificar todas las versiones de un programa--y asegurar que permanecerá como software libre para todos sus usuarios. Nosotros, La Fundación de Software Libre, usamos la Licencia Pública General GNU para la mayoría de nuestro software; y también se aplica a cualquier trabajo realizado de la misma forma por sus autores. Usted también puede aplicarla a sus programas. + +Cuando hablamos de software libre, nos referimos a libertad, no a precio. Nuestras Licencias Públicas Generales están destinadas a garantizar la libertad de distribuir copias de software libre (y cobrar por ello si quiere), a recibir el código fuente o poder conseguirlo si así lo desea, a modificar el software o usar parte del mismo en nuevos programas libres, y a saber que puede hacer estas cosas. + +Para proteger sus derechos, necesitamos evitar que otros le nieguen esos derechos o le pidan renunciar a ellos. Por lo tanto, usted tiene ciertas responsabilidades cuando distribuye copias del software, o si lo modifica: responsabilidades que persiguen respetar la libertad de otros. + +Por ejemplo, si distribuye copias de tales programas, gratuitamente o no, debe transmitir a los destinatarios los mismos derechos que usted recibió. Debe asegurarse que ellos también reciban o puedan conseguir el código fuente. Y debe mostrarles estos términos y condiciones para que conozcan sus derechos. + +Los desarrolladores que usen la GPL GNU protegen sus derechos de dos formas: (1) imponen derechos al software, y (2) le ofrecen esta Licencia para que legalmente lo copie, distribuya y/o modifique. + +Para proteger a desarrolladores y autores, la GPL expone claramente que no existe garantía alguna para este software libre. Para beneficio de ambos, usuarios y autores, la GPL establece que las versiones modificadas deberán estar identificadas como tales, para que cualquier problema no sea atribuido por error a los autores de versiones anteriores. + +Algunos dispositivos están diseñados para negar al usuario la instalación o la ejecución de versiones modificadas del software que usan internamente, aunque el fabricante sí pueda hacerlo. Esto es completamente incompatible con el objetivo de proteger la libertad de los usuarios para modificar el software. Este tipo de abuso sistemático ocurre con productos de uso personal, que es precisamente donde es menos aceptable. Por tanto, hemos diseñado esta versión de la GPL para prohibir estas prácticas en esos productos. Si apareciesen problemas similares en otros ámbitos, estaremos preparados para extender estas prestaciones a las próximas versiones de la GPL, tanto como sea necesario para proteger la libertad de los usuarios. + +Por último, todo programa está constantemente amenazado por las patentes de software. Los estados no deberían permitir que las patentes restrinjan el desarrollo y el uso de software en ordenadores de uso general; pero en aquellos que lo hagan, esperamos evitar el especial peligro que suponen las patentes, que aplicadas a un programa libre puedan hacerlo propietario en la práctica. Para prevenir eso, la GPL establece que las patentes no pueden usarse para convertir un programa en no-libre. + +A continuación se exponen los términos y condiciones para la copia, distribución y modificación. + + TÉRMINOS Y CONDICIONES + +0. Definiciones. +---------------- + +En adelante «Esta Licencia» se refiere a la versión 3 de la Licencia Pública General GNU. + +«Copyright» también significa «leyes similares al copyright» que son aplicables a otro tipo de trabajos, tales como las máscaras de semiconductores. + +«El Programa» se refiere a cualquier trabajo con copyright al que se haya aplicado esta Licencia. Cada beneficiario es asimilable a «usted». «Beneficiarios» y «destinatarios» pueden ser personas físicas u organizaciones. + +«Modificar» un trabajo significa copiar o adaptar todo o parte de un trabajo, exceptuando la copia exacta, de manera que se requiera permiso de copyright. El trabajo resultante se denomina «versión modificada» de un trabajo anterior o trabajo «basado en» el trabajo anterior. + +Un «trabajo amparado» puede ser tanto el Programa no modificado como un trabajo basado en el Programa. + +«Difundir» un trabajo significa hacer cualquier cosa con él, sin permiso, que le haga directa o indirectamente responsable de infringir leyes cubiertas por copyright, excepto la ejecución en un ordenador o la modificación de una copia privada. La difusión incluye la copia, distribución (con o sin modificaciones), distribución pública, y en algunos países también otras actividades. + +«Distribuir» un trabajo implica cualquier tipo de difusión que permite a la otra parte hacer o recibir copias. La mera interacción con un usuario mediante una red de ordenadores, sin transferir copia alguna, no se considera «distribución». + +Una interfaz de usuario interactiva muestra «Avisos Legales Apropiados» siempre y cuando incluya características visuales apropiadas y destacadas que (1) muestren un aviso de copyright apropiado, y (2) indiquen al usuario que no existe garantía alguna para el trabajo (exceptuando las garantías que se hayan podido establecer), que los beneficiarios deben distribuir el trabajo según se establece en la presente Licencia, y cómo se puede ver una copia de esta Licencia. Si la interfaz muestra una lista de opciones o comandos, tales como menús, un elemento destacado en dicha lista cumple estos criterios. + +1. Código Fuente. +----------------- + +El «código fuente» de un trabajo es el formato preferido para realizar modificaciones sobre él. «Código objeto» se refiere a cualquier formato del trabajo que no sea código fuente. + +Una «Interfaz Estándar» se refiere a una interfaz que sea o bien un estándar oficial definido por una institución de estándares reconocida, o bien, en el caso de interfaces específicos para una determinado lenguaje de programación, una cuyo uso esté generalizada entre los desarrolladores que trabajan con ese lenguaje. + +Las «Bibliotecas de Sistema» de un trabajo ejecutable incluyen a cualquier elemento, que no sea el trabajo completo, que (a) esté incluida/o de la misma forma que un componente principal, pero que no forme parte de ese componente principal, y (b) sólo sirva para habilitar la utilización del trabajo a través de ese componente principal, o para implementar un Interfaz Estándar para el cual está disponible una implementación pública en código fuente. Un «Componente Principal», en este contexto, se refiere a un componente principal y esencial (núcleo, sistema de ventanas y similares) del sistema operativo particular (en su caso) sobre el cual funcione el ejecutable, o un compilador utilizado para generar el trabajo, o un intérprete del código objeto utilizado para ejecutarlo. + +La «Fuente Correspondiente» de un trabajo en código objeto se refiere a todo código fuente necesario para generar, instalar, y (en el caso de trabajos ejecutables) ejecutar el código objeto y modificar el trabajo, incluyendo guiones que controlen esas actividades. Sin embargo, no se incluyen las Bibliotecas de Sistema del trabajo, o herramientas de propósito general o programas gratuitos habitualmente disponibles y usados sin ninguna modificación para realizar estas actividades pero que no forman parte del trabajo. Por ejemplo, la Fuente Correspondiente incluye los archivos de definición de interfaz asociados con archivos fuente del trabajo, y el código fuente de las bibliotecas compartidas o subprogramas enlazados dinámicamente que el programa requiere por diseño, como la comunicación de datos intrínseca o el control de flujo entre esos subprogramas y otras partes del trabajo. + +La Fuente Correspondiente no incluye necesariamente aquello que los usuarios pueden regenerar automáticamente a partir de otras partes de la Fuente Correspondiente. + +La Fuente Correspondiente de un trabajo en código fuente es ese mismo trabajo. + +2. Permisos Básicos. +-------------------- + +Todos los derechos garantizados por esta Licencia se otorgan como copyright del Programa, y se proporcionan de manera irrevocable siempre y cuando se cumplan las condiciones establecidas. Esta Licencia afirma explícitamente su permiso ilimitado para ejecutar el Programa sin modificaciones. El resultado de la ejecución de un programa amparado está cubierto por esta Licencia sólo en el caso de que la salida, por su contenido, constituya un trabajo amparado. Esta Licencia reconoce sus derechos de uso razonable u otro equivalente, tal y como determina la ley de copyright. + +Usted podrá realizar, ejecutar y difundir trabajos amparados que no distribuya, sin condición alguna, siempre y cuando no tenga otra licencia más restrictiva. Podrá distribuir trabajos amparados a terceros con el mero objetivo de que ellos hagan modificaciones exclusivamente para usted, o para que le proporcionen ayuda para ejecutar esos trabajos, siempre que cumpla los términos de esta Licencia distribuyendo todo el material de cuyo copyright no posee el control. Aquellos que realicen o ejecuten los trabajos amparados para usted deben hacerlo exclusivamente en su nombre, bajo su dirección y control, con términos que les prohíban realizar copias de su material con copyright al margen de la relación con usted. + +La distribución bajo otras circunstancias se permite únicamente bajo las condiciones establecidas más abajo. No está permitido sublicenciar; la claúsula 10 lo hace innecesario. + +3. Protección de Derechos Legales de los Usuarios frente a Leyes Anti-Burla. +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Ningún trabajo amparado debe considerarse parte de una medida tecnológica efectiva, a tenor de lo establecido en cualquier ley aplicable que cumpla las obligaciones expresas en el artículo 11 del tratado de copyright WIPO adoptado el 20 de diciembre de 1996, o leyes similares que prohíben o restringen la burla de tales medidas. + +Cuando distribuya un trabajo amparado, renuncia a cualquier poder legal para prohibir la burla de medidas tecnológicas mientras tales burlas se realicen en ejercicio de derechos amparados por esta Licencia respecto al trabajo amparado; además, usted negará cualquier intención de limitar el uso o modificación del trabajo con el objetivo de imponer, al trabajo de los usuarios, sus derechos legales o de terceros para prohibir la burla de medidas tecnológicas. + +4. Distribución de copias literales. +------------------------------------ + +Usted podrá distribuir copias literales del código fuente del Programa tal y como lo ha recibido , por cualquier medio, siempre que publique de forma clara y llamativa en cada copia el correspondiente aviso de copyright ; mantenga intactos todos los avisos que establezcan que esta Licencia y cualquier término no-permisivo añadido y acorde con la cláusula 7 son aplicables al código; mantenga intactos todos los avisos de ausencia de garantía; y proporcione a todos los destinatarios una copia de esta Licencia junto con el Programa. + +Usted podrá cobrar cualquier importe o no cobrar nada por cada copia que distribuya, y podrá ofrecer soporte o protección de garantía mediante un pago. + +5. Distribución de Versiones Modificadas de Código. +--------------------------------------------------- + +Usted podrá distribuir un trabajo basado en el Programa, o las modificaciones que lo producen a partir del Programa, como código fuente en virtud de los términos establecidos en la cláusula 4, siempre que cumpla todas las condiciones siguientes: + + a) El trabajo debe incluir avisos destacados indicando que usted lo ha modificado y dando una fecha pertinente. + + b) El trabajo debe incluir avisos destacados indicando que está realizado a tenor de lo dispuesto en la presente Licencia y en cualquier otra condición añadida en virtud de la cláusula 7. Este requisito modifica el requisito de «mantener intactos todos los avisos» expuesto en la claúsula 4. + + c) En virtud del presente documento, usted deberá aplicar la licencia al trabajo completo, como un todo, a cualquier persona que esté en posesión de una copia. Por lo tanto, esta Licencia se aplicará junto con cualquier otra condición adicional aplicable de la cláusula 7, al conjunto completo del trabajo y todas y cada una de sus partes, independientemente de como sean agrupadas o empaquetadas. Esta Licencia no permite ser aplicada al trabajo de ninguna otra forma, pero no se anula dicho permiso si usted lo ha recibido por separado. + + d) Si el trabajo tiene interfaces de usuario interactivos, cada uno debe mostrar Avisos Legales Apropiados; sin embargo, si el Programa tiene interfaces interactivos que no muestran Avisos Legales Apropiados, su trabajo no tiene porqué modificarlos para que lo hagan. + +Un conjunto o recopilación formado por un trabajo amparado y otros trabajos distintos e independientes, que por su naturaleza no sean ampliaciones del trabajo amparado, que no se combinen con él de alguna forma para dar lugar a un programa mayor, y que estén ubicados en un medio de distribución o almacenamiento, se denomina «paquete» si la recopilación y su copyright al completo no son usados para limitar el acceso o los derechos legales de los usuarios de la recopilación, más allá de lo que permita el trabajo individual. La inclusión de un trabajo amparado en un paquete no hace aplicable esta Licencia al resto de elementos del paquete. + +6. Distribución de código No-fuente. +------------------------------------ + +Usted podrá distribuir el código objeto de un trabajo amparado en virtud de los términos de las cláusulas 4 y 5, siempre que también distribuya las Fuentes Correspondientes en código máquina, de acuerdo con los términos establecidos en esta Licencia, de alguna de las siguientes maneras: + + a) Distribuir el código objeto en, o embebido en, un producto físico (incluyendo medios de distribución físicos), acompañado de las Fuentes Correspondientes en un medio físico duradero y que sea utilizado habitualmente para el intercambio de software. + + b) Distribuir el código objeto en, o embebido en, un producto físico (incluyendo medios de distribución físicos), acompañado de una oferta por escrito, válida al menos durante tres años y válida durante el tiempo en el que usted ofrezca recambios o soporte para ese modelo de producto, con el fin de ofrecer al poseedor del código objeto (1) una copia de las Fuentes Correspondientes a todo el software del producto que esté cubierto por esta Licencia, en un medio físico duradero habitual para el intercambio de software, a un precio no mayor que su coste razonable por distribuir físicamente las fuentes, o (2) acceso para copiar las fuentes correspondientes desde un servidor de red sin coste alguno. + + c) Distribuir copias individuales del código objeto junto con una copia de la oferta por escrito para/con el fin de proporcionar las Fuentes Correspondientes. Esta alternativa sólo está permitida ocasionalmente, pero no de forma comercial, y solamente si usted recibió el código objeto junto con una oferta parecida, de acuerdo con la subcláusula 6b. + + d) Distribuir el código objeto ofreciendo acceso desde un lugar determinado (gratuitamente o mediante pago), y ofrecer acceso equivalente a las Fuentes Correspondientes de la misma forma y en el mismo lugar sin cargo añadido. No es necesario exigir a los destinatarios que copien las Fuentes Correspondientes junto con el código objeto. Si el lugar para copiar el código objeto es un servidor de red, las Fuentes Correspondientes pueden estar en un servidor diferente (gestionado por usted o terceros) que ofrezca facilidades de copia equivalentes, siempre que mantenga instrucciones claras junto al código objeto especificando dónde encontrar las Fuentes Correspondientes. Independientemente de qué servidores alberguen las Fuentes Correspondientes, usted seguirá obligado a asegurar que estarán disponibles durante el tiempo necesario para cumplir estos requisitos. + + e) Distribuir el código mediante transferencias entre usuarios, siempre que informe a otros usuarios dónde se ofrecen el código objeto y las Fuentes Correspondientes de forma pública sin cargo alguno, tal y como se establece en la subcláusula 6d. + +Una parte separable del código objeto, cuyo código fuente esté excluido de las Fuentes Correspondientes como Biblioteca de Sistema, no necesita ser incluida en la distribución del código objeto del trabajo. + +Un «Producto de Usuario» es tanto (1) un «producto de consumo», que se refiere a cualquier propiedad personal tangible habitualmente utilizada para fines personales, familiares o domésticos, o (2) cualquier cosa diseñada o vendida para ser incorporada como extensión/expansión para otro producto. Para determinar si un producto es un producto de consumo, los casos dudosos se resolverán favoreciendo el amparo. En el caso de un producto concreto recibido por un usuario particular, «de uso habitual» se refiere al uso típico o corriente de ese tipo de producto, independientemente de la situación del usuario particular o de la forma en que el usuario concreto utilice, o pretenda o se espere que pretenda utilizar, el producto. Un producto es un producto de consumo independientemente de si el producto tiene usos sustancialmente comerciales, industriales o distintos del consumo, a menos que tales usos representen la única forma posible de utilizar el producto. + +Las «Instrucciones de Instalación» para un Producto de Usuario se refieren a cualquier método, procedimiento, clave de autorización, u otro tipo de información necesaria para instalar y ejecutar una versión modificada de un trabajo amparado en ese Producto de Usuario a partir de una versión modificada de las Fuentes Correspondientes. Las instrucciones deben ser suficientes para asegurar el funcionamiento continuo del código objeto modificado sin ningún tipo de condicionamiento o intromisión por el simple hecho de haber sido modificado. + +Si, bajo las premisas de esta cláusula, usted distribuye el código objeto de un trabajo en, o con un Producto de Usuario o específicamente para ser usado en el mismo, y la distribución forma parte de una transacción donde los derechos de posesión y uso del Producto de Usuario se transfieren al destinatario a perpetuidad o durante un plazo fijo de tiempo (independientemente de las características de la transacción), las Fuentes Correspondientes distribuidas bajo estos supuestos deben acompañarse de las Instrucciones de Instalación. Sin embargo, estos requerimientos no se aplican si ni usted ni terceros tienen posibilidad de instalar el código objeto modificado en el Producto de Usuario (por ejemplo, el trabajo ha sido instalado en memoria de sólo lectura, ROM): + +El requerimiento de proporcionar Información de Instalación no incluye el hecho de continuar proporcionando servicio de soporte, garantía, o actualizaciones para un trabajo que haya sido modificado o instalado por el destinatario, o para el Producto de Usuario en el que se haya modificado o instalado. El acceso a la red puede ser denegado cuando la propia modificación afecte materialmente y de forma adversa a la operación de la red o viole las reglas y protocolos de comunicación en la red. + +Las Fuentes Correspondientes distribuidas, y las Instrucciones de Instalación proporcionadas de acuerdo con esta cláusula, deben figurar en un formato documentado públicamente (y con una implementación disponible para el público en código fuente), y no deben necesitar claves de acceso especiales para la descompresión, lectura o copia. + +7. Condiciones adicionales. +--------------------------- + +Los «Permisos Adicionales» son condicionantes que amplían los términos de esta Licencia permitiendo excepciones a una o más de sus condiciones. Los Permisos Adicionales que son aplicables al Programa completo deberán ser tratados como si estuviesen incluidos en esta Licencia, hasta los límites de validez impuestos por las leyes aplicables. Si los permisos adicionales se aplicasen sólo a una parte del Programa, esa parte podría ser usada de forma independiente en virtud de dichos permisos, pero el Programa completo seguiría estando afectado por esta Licencia con independencia de los permisos adicionales. + +Cuando distribuya una copia de un trabajo amparado, usted podrá opcionalmente eliminar cualquier permiso adicional de esa copia, o de alguna parte del mismo. (Los permisos adicionales pueden haber establecido que sea requerida su eliminación en ciertos supuestos si usted modifica el trabajo.) Usted puede establecer permisos adicionales en material añadido por usted a un trabajo amparado, sobre el cual tiene o podrá aportar sus permisos de copyright correspondientes. + +Sin contravenir cualquier otra estipulación en esta Licencia, usted podrá, para el material que añada a un trabajo amparado, (si está autorizado por los poseedores de copyright de ese material) añadir condiciones a esta Licencia con los siguientes términos: + + a) Ausencia de garantía o limitación de responsabilidad diferente de los términos establecidos en las cláusulas 15 y 16 de esta Licencia; u + + b) Obligación de mantener determinados avisos legales razonables o atribuciones de autoría en el material o en los Avisos Legales Correspondientes mostrados por los trabajos que lo contengan; o + + c) Prohibir la tergiversación del origen del material, o solicitar que las diferencias respecto a la versión original sean señaladas de forma apropiada en las versiones modificadas del material; o + + d) Limitar la utilización de los nombres de los autores o beneficiarios del material con fines divulgativos; o + + e) Negarse a ofrecer derechos afectados por leyes de registro para el uso de marcas empresariales, registradas o de servicio; o + + f) Exigir indemnización a los autores y poseedores de la licencia de ese material, por parte de cualquier persona que distribuya el material (o versiones modificadas del mismo), estableciendo obligaciones contractuales de responsabilidad sobre el destinatario, para cualquier responsabilidad que estas obligaciones contractuales impongan directamente sobre los autores y poseedores de licencia. + +Cualesquiera otras condiciones adicionales no-permisivas son consideradas «otras restricciones» en el contexto de la cláusula 10. Si el Programa, tal cual lo recibió, o cualquier parte del mismo, contiene un aviso indicando que está amparado por esta Licencia junto a una cláusula de restricción posterior específica, usted podrá suprimir esa cláusula. Si un documento de licencia contiene una restricción de este tipo pero permite modificar la licencia o la distribución en virtud de la presente Licencia, usted podrá añadirla al material de un trabajo amparado por los términos de ese documento de licencia, siempre que dicha restricción no se mantenga tras la modificación de la licencia o la distribución. + +Si añade condiciones para un trabajo amparado, a tenor de lo establecido en la presente cláusula, usted deberá ubicar, en los archivos fuente involucrados, una declaración de los términos adicionales aplicables a esos archivos, o un aviso indicando dónde localizar los términos aplicables. + +Las condiciones adicionales, permisivas o no, deben aparecer por escrito como licencias separadas, o figurar como excepciones; de todas formas, los requisitos anteriores siempre son aplicables. + +8. Cancelación. +--------------- + +Usted no podrá distribuir o modificar un trabajo amparado salvo de la forma en la que se ha previsto expresamente en esta Licencia. Cualquier intento diferente de distribución o modificación será considerado nulo, y automáticamente cancelará sus derechos respecto a esta Licencia (incluyendo cualquier patente conseguida según el párrafo tercero de la cláusula 11). + +Sin embargo, si deja de violar esta Licencia, entonces su licencia desde el poseedor del copyright correspondiente será restituida (a) provisionalmente, a menos que y hasta que el poseedor del copyright dé por terminada explícita y permanentemente su licencia, y (b) permanentemente, si el poseedor del copyright no le ha notificado por algún cauce de la violación no después de los 60 días posteriores al cese. + +Además, su licencia desde el poseedor del copyright correspondiente será restituida permanentemente si el poseedor del copyright le notifica de la violación por algún cauce, es la primera vez que recibe la notificación de violación de esta Licencia (para cualquier trabajo) de ese poseedor de copyright, y usted subsana la violación antes de 30 días desde la recepción del aviso. + +La cancelación de sus derechos según esta cláusula no da por canceladas las licencias de terceros que hayan recibido copias o derechos a través de usted con esta Licencia. Si sus derechos han finalizado y no han sido restituidos de forma permanente, usted no está capacitado para recibir nuevas licencias para el mismo material en virtud de la cláusula 10. + +9. Aceptación no obligatoria por tenencia de copias. +---------------------------------------------------- + +No está obligado a aceptar esta Licencia por recibir o ejecutar una copia del Programa. La distribución de un trabajo amparado surgida simplemente como consecuencia de la transmisión entre usuarios para obtener una copia tampoco requiere aceptación. Sin embargo, únicamente esta Licencia le otorga permiso para distribuir o modificar cualquier trabajo amparado. Estas acciones infringen el copyright si usted no acepta las los términos y condiciones de esta Licencia. Por lo tanto, al modificar o distribuir un trabajo amparado, usted indica que acepta la Licencia. + +10. Herencia automática de licencia para destinatarios. +------------------------------------------------------- + +Cada vez que distribuya un trabajo amparado, el destinatario recibirá automáticamente una licencia desde los poseedores originales, para ejecutar, modificar y distribuir ese trabajo, al amparo de los términos de esta Licencia. Usted no será responsable de asegurar el cumplimiento por terceros de esta Licencia. + +Una «transacción de entidad» es una transacción que transfiere el control de una organización, o todos los bienes sustanciales de una, o subdivide una organización, o fusiona organizaciones. Si la distribución de un trabajo amparado surge de una transacción de entidad, cada parte involucrada en esa transacción que reciba una copia del trabajo, también recibe todas y cada una de las licencias existentes del trabajo que la parte interesada tuviese o pudiese ofrecer según el párrafo anterior, además del derecho a tomar posesión de las Fuentes Correspondientes del trabajo a través de la parte interesada, si está en poder de dicha parte o se puede conseguir con un esfuerzo razonable. + +Usted no podrá imponer restricciones posteriores en el ejercicio de los derechos otorgados o concedidos en virtud de la presente Licencia. Por ejemplo, usted no puede imponer a la licencia pagos, derechos u otros cargos por el ejercicio de los derechos otorgados según esta Licencia; además no podrá iniciar litigios (incluyendo demandas o contrademandas en pleitos) alegando que se infringen patentes por cambiar, usar, vender, ofrecer en venta o importar el Programa, o cualquier parte del mismo. + +11. Patentes. +------------- + +Un «colaborador» es un poseedor de copyright que autoriza el uso del Programa o un trabajo en el que se base el Programa bajo los términos y condiciones establecidos en la presente Licencia. El trabajo con esta licencia se denomina «versión en colaboración» con el colaborador. + +Todas las reivindicaciones de patentes en posesión o controladas por el colaborador se denominan «demandas de patente original», ya sean existentes o adquiridas con posterioridad, que hayan sido infringidas de alguna forma permitida por esta Licencia, al hacer, usar o vender la versión en colaboración, pero sin incluir demandas que sólo sean infracciones como consecuencia de modificaciones posteriores de la versión en colaboración. Para aclarar esta definición, «control» incluye el derecho de conceder sublicencias de patente de forma que no contravenga los requisitos establecidos en la presente Licencia. + +Cada colaborador le concede a usted una licencia de la patente no-exclusiva, global y libre de derechos bajo las reivindicaciones de patente de origen del colaborador, para el uso, modificación, venta, ofertas de venta, importación y otras formas de ejecución, modificación y redistribución del contenido de la versión en colaboración. + +En los siguientes tres párrafos, una «licencia de patente» se refiere a cualquier acuerdo o compromiso expreso y manifiesto, cualquiera que sea su denominación, que no imponga una patente (como puede ser el permiso expreso para ejecutar una patente o acuerdos para no imponer demandas por infracción de patente). «Conceder» estas licencias de patente a un tercero significa llegar a tal tipo de acuerdo o compromiso que no imponga una patente al tercero. + +Si usted distribuye un trabajo amparado, conociendo que está afectado por una licencia de patente, y no están disponibles de forma pública para su copia las Fuentes Correspondientes, sin cargo alguno y bajo los términos de esta Licencia, ya sea a través de un servidor de red público o mediante cualquier otro medio, entonces usted deberá o bien (1) permitir que sean públicas las Fuentes Correspondientes, o (2) tratar de eliminar los beneficios de la licencia de patente para este trabajo en particular, o (3) tratar de extender, de una forma que no contravenga los requisitos de esta Licencia, la licencia de patente a terceros. «Conocer que está afectado» significa que usted tiene conocimiento real de que, para la licencia de patente, la distribución del trabajo amparado en un determinado país, o el uso del trabajo amparado por sus destinatarios en un determinado país, infringiría una o más patentes existentes en ese país que usted considera aplicables por algún motivo. + +Si, de conformidad con alguna transacción o acuerdo(o en un proceso relacionado con ellos), usted distribuye o distribuye con fines de distribución , un trabajo amparado, concediendo una licencia de patente para algún tercero que reciba el trabajo amparado, y autorizándole a usar, distribuir, modificar o distribuir una copia específica del trabajo amparado, entonces la licencia de patente que usted otorgue se extiende automáticamente a todos los receptores del trabajo amparado y cualquier trabajo basado en el mismo. + +Una licencia de patente es «discriminatoria» si no incluye dentro de su ámbito de cobertura, prohíbe el ejercicio, o está condicionada a no ejercitar uno o más de los derechos que están específicamente otorgados por esta Licencia. Usted no debe distribuir un trabajo amparado si está implicado en un acuerdo con terceros que estén relacionados con el negocio de la distribución de software, en el que usted haga pagos relacionados con su actividad de distribución del trabajo, y donde se otorgue, a cualquier receptor del trabajo amparado, una licencia de patente discriminatoria (a) en relación con las copias del trabajo amparado distribuido por usted (o copias hechas a partir de éstas), o (b) directa o indirectamente relacionadas con productos específicos o paquetes que contengan el trabajo amparado, a menos que usted forme parte del acuerdo, o que esa licencia de patente fuese otorgada antes del 28 de marzo de 2007. + +Ninguna disposición de esta Licencia se considerará como excluyente o limitante de la aplicación de cualquier otra licencia o defensas legales contra la violación de las leyes de propiedad intelectual a que pudiera tener derecho bajo la ley de propiedad intelectual vigente. + +12. No condicionamiento de la libertad de terceros. +--------------------------------------------------- + +Si a usted le son impuestas condiciones que contravienen las estipuladas en la presente Licencia (ya sea por orden judicial, acuerdo u otros), no quedará eximido de cumplir las condiciones de esta Licencia. Si usted no puede distribuir un trabajo amparado cumpliendo simultáneamente sus obligaciones con esta Licencia y con cualquier otra pertinente, entonces no podrá distribuirlo de ninguna forma. Por ejemplo, si usted se compromete con términos que le obligan a obtener derechos por la distribución a terceros, la única forma de satisfacer ambos condicionantes y esta Licencia es abstenerse completamente de distribuir el Programa. + +13. Uso conjunto con la Licencia Pública General Affero GNU. +------------------------------------------------------------ + +Sin contravenir las disposiciones de la presente Licencia, usted tendrá permiso para enlazar o combinar cualquier trabajo amparado con otro trabajo amparado por la versión 3 de la Licencia Pública General Affero GNU y formar un solo trabajo combinado, y distribuir el trabajo resultante. Los términos de esta Licencia seguirán siendo aplicables a la parte formada por el trabajo amparado, pero los condicionantes especiales de la Licencia Pública General Affero GNU, en su cláusula 13, relativos a la interacción mediante redes, serán aplicables a la combinación de ambas partes. + +14. Versiones Revisadas de esta Licencia. +----------------------------------------- + +La Fundación para el Software Libre podrá publicar revisiones y/o nuevas versiones de la Licencia Pública General GNU de vez en cuando. Esas versiones serán similares en espíritu a la versión actual, pero podrán diferir en algunos detalles para afrontar nuevos problemas o situaciones. + +A cada versión se le da un número distintivo. Si el Programa especifica que le es aplicable cierto número de versión de la Licencia Pública General o «cualquier versión posterior», usted tendrá la posibilidad de adoptar los términos y condiciones de la versión indicada o de cualquier otra versión posterior publicada por la Fundación para el Software Libre. Si el Programa no especifica un número de versión de la Licencia Pública General, usted podrá elegir cualquier versión que haya sido publicada por la Fundación para el Software Libre. + +Si el Programa especifica que un apoderado/representante puede decidir qué versiones de la Licencia Pública General pueden aplicarse en el futuro, la declaración pública de aceptación que el apoderado/representante haga de una versión le autoriza a usted con carácter permanente a elegir esa versión para el Programa. + +Versiones posteriores de la licencia podrán otorgarle permisos adicionales o diferentes. Sin embargo, no podrán imponerse obligaciones adicionales a cualquier autor o poseedor de copyright como consecuencia de que usted adopte una versión posterior. + +15. Ausencia de Garantía. +------------------------- + +EL PROGRAMA NO TIENE GARANTÍA ALGUNA, HASTA LOS LÍMITES PERMITIDOS POR LAS LEYES APLICABLES. SALVO CUANDO SE ESTABLEZCA LO CONTRARIO POR ESCRITO, EL POSEEDOR DEL COPYRIGHT Y/O TERCEROS PROPORCIONARÁN EL PROGRAMA «TAL CUAL» SIN GARANTÍA DE NINGÚN TIPO, YA SEA EXPLÍCITA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS MERCANTILES Y DE APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO DETERMINADO. USTED ASUMIRÁ CUALQUIER RIESGO RELATIVO A LA CALIDAD Y RENDIMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA. SI EL PROGRAMA FUESE DEFECTUOSO, USTED ASUMIRÁ CUALQUIER COSTE DE SERVICIO, REPARACIÓN O CORRECCIÓN. + +16. Limitación de Responsabilidad. +---------------------------------- + +EN NINGÚN CASO, SALVO REQUERIMIENTO POR LEYES APLICABLES O MEDIANTE ACUERDO POR ESCRITO, PODRÁ UN POSEEDOR DE COPYRIGHT, O UN TERCERO QUE MODIFIQUE O DISTRIBUYA EL PROGRAMA SEGÚN LO INDICADO ANTERIORMENTE, HACERLE A USTED RESPONSABLE DE DAÑO ALGUNO, INCLUYENDO CUALQUIER DAÑO GENERAL, ESPECIAL, OCASIONAL O DERIVADO QUE SURJA DEL USO O LA INCAPACIDAD DE USO DEL PROGRAMA (INCLUYENDO PERO SIN LIMITARSE A LA PÉRDIDA DE DATOS O LA PRESENTACIÓN NO PRECISA DE LOS MISMOS O A PÉRDIDAS SUFRIDAS POR USTED O TERCEROS O AL FALLO DEL PROGRAMA AL INTERACTUAR CON OTROS PROGRAMAS), INCLUSO EN EL CASO DE QUE EL POSEEDOR O UN TERCERO HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDO DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. + +17. Interpretación de las cláusulas 15 y 16. +-------------------------------------------- + +Si la ausencia de garantía y la limitación de responsabilidad descrita anteriormente no tuviesen efecto legal a nivel local en todos sus términos, los juzgados aplicarán las leyes locales que más se aproximen a la exención de responsabilidad civil en lo relativo al Programa, a menos que la copia del Programa esté acompañada mediante pago de una garantía o compromiso de responsabilidad. + + FIN DE TÉRMINOS Y CONDICIONES + + + Cómo aplicar estas condiciones a sus nuevos programas + +Si usted desarrolla un nuevo programa, y quiere darle al público el mayor uso posible del mismo, la mejor forma de conseguirlo es hacerlo software libre para que cualquiera pueda redistribuirlo y modificarlo bajo estas condiciones. + +Para ello, adjunte los siguientes avisos al programa. Es más seguro adjuntarlos al inicio de cada archivo fuente para hacer más explícita la ausencia de garantía; y cada archivo debería tener al menos la línea de «copyright» y un enlace a la versión completa del aviso. + + <una línea con el nombre del programa y una breve idea de su objetivo.> + Copyright (C) <año> <nombre del autor> + + Este programa es software libre: usted puede redistribuirlo y/o modificarlo + bajo los términos de la Licencia Pública General GNU publicada + por la Fundación para el Software Libre, ya sea la versión 3 + de la Licencia, o (a su elección) cualquier versión posterior. + + Este programa se distribuye con la esperanza de que sea útil, pero + SIN GARANTÍA ALGUNA; ni siquiera la garantía implícita + MERCANTIL o de APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO DETERMINADO. + Consulte los detalles de la Licencia Pública General GNU para obtener + una información más detallada. + + Debería haber recibido una copia de la Licencia Pública General GNU + junto a este programa. + En caso contrario, consulte <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +Incluya además información de cómo contactar con usted por correo electrónico y ordinario. + +Si el programa es interactivo, haga que muestre un breve aviso como el siguiente cuando se inicie en modo interactivo: + + <programa> Copyright (C) <año> <nombre del autor> + Este programa se ofrece SIN GARANTÍA ALGUNA; + escriba ‘show w’ para consultar los detalles. + Es software libre, y usted puede redistribuirlo bajo ciertas condiciones; + escriba ‘show c’ para más información. + +Los hipotéticos comandos ‘show w’ y ‘show c’ deberían mostrar las partes correspondientes de la Licencia Pública General. Por supuesto, los comandos en su programa podrían ser diferentes; en un interfaz gráfico de usuario, podría usar un mensaje del tipo «Acerca de». + +También debería conseguir que su empresa (si trabaja como programador) o escuela, en su caso, firme una «renuncia de copyright» sobre el programa, si fuese necesario. Para más información a este respecto, y saber cómo aplicar y cumplir la licencia GNU GPL, consulte <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +La Licencia Pública General GNU no permite incorporar sus programas como parte de programas propietarios. Si su programa es una subrutina en una biblioteca, resultaría mucho más útil habilitar el enlace de aplicaciones propietarias a la biblioteca. Si es esto lo que quiere hacer, utilice la Licencia Pública General Reducida GNU en vez de esta Licencia. Pero por favor, consulte primero <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[QueryBox] +Cuadros de diálogo + +En los cuadros de diálogo puede desplazarse con el teclado usando las flechas o las teclas de las letras resaltadas. + +También se pueden pulsar los botones con el ratón. + +[How to use help] +Uso de la ayuda + +Se pueden utilizar las flechas o el ratón para navegar por el sistema de ayuda. + +La flecha de abajo cambia al siguiente elemento o baja. La tecla de arriba vuelve al elemento anterior o sube. La tecla derecha sigue el enlace activo. La tecla izquierda vuelve a la última página visitada. + +Si el terminal no es compatible con las flechas de cursor se puede avanzar con la barra espaciadora y retroceder con la tecla b (back). El tabulador activa el elemento siguiente y con INTRO se puede entrar al enlace correspondiente. La tecla l (last) permite volver a la última página. + +ESC pulsada dos veces permite salir de la ayuda. + +El botón izquierdo del ratón avanza o sigue enlaces y el botón derecho retrocede o vuelve a la última página. + +La función de todas las teclas en la ayuda: + +Las teclas de desplazamiento genéricasGeneral Movement Keys son válidas. + +tabulador Avanzar al elemento posterior. +Alt-tabulador Retroceder al elemento anterior. +abajo Avanzar elemento o bajar una línea. +arriba Retroceder elemento o subir una línea. +derecha , INTRO Seguir enlace. +izquierda , l Volver a la última página visitada. +F1 Mostrar la ayuda del sistema de ayuda. +n Pasar a la página siguiente. +p Pasar a la página anterior. +c Pasar a la página de contenidos. +F10 , ESC Salir de la ayuda. + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/hlp/hlp-lang-include.am b/doc/hlp/hlp-lang-include.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a23996f --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/hlp-lang-include.am @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +MAN2HLP=$(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp + +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) diff --git a/doc/hlp/hu/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/hu/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8626d46 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/hu/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +HLP_LANG=hu + +include ../hlp-lang-include.am diff --git a/doc/hlp/hu/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/hu/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bce7a8a --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/hu/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,645 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp/hu +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +HLP_LANG = hu +MAN2HLP = $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/hu/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/hu/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/hu/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/hu/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc6053c --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/hu/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,332 @@ +[main] + lqwqk k k + x x x . x . x + x x x k lqu wqk k lqw tqk n + x x x x x x x x x x x x x x + v v v mqv v v v mqu v v mj + qqqqqqCommander qj + +Ez a GNU Midnight Commander súgója. + +Az interaktív súgó használatának megismeréséhez csak üss egy entertHow to use help. Itt közvetlenül a súgó tartalomjegyzékébeContents juthatsz. + +A Midnight Commander-t a következő szerzőkAUTHORS készítették. + +A Midnight Commander mindenféle garanciaWarranty nélkül kerül kiadásra. Ez szabad szoftver, így továbbadhatod azt a Felhasználási engedélybenLicense meghatározott feltételekkel. + +[License] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuseoccurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is +that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modificationsto produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to applyto the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[QueryBox] +Lekérdező box + +A lekérdező boxban kezeléséhez a nyíl billentyűket, a szövegrész elejének magadásást, vagy a gombokra történő egérkattintást használhatod. + +[How to use help] +Hogyan használjuk a súgót + +A súgóban a navigációhoz a billentyűzet gombjait és az egér gombjait is használhatod. A lefelé mutató nyíl lenyomására a következő bejegyzésre ugorhatsz, vagy legördítheted azt. A felfelé mutató nyíl lenyomására ez előző bejegyzésre ugorhatsz, vagy felhúzhatod azt. A jobbra mutató nyíl lenyomására a linknek megfelelő címre lép. A balra mutató nyíl lenyomására az előzőleg meglátogatott címre lépsz vissza. + +Ha az általad használt terminál nem támogatja a kurzor gombok használatát, használd a szóköz billentyűt az előre lépésre, a 'b' gombot a visszalépésre. Használd a TAB gombot a következő bejegyzésre való ugráshoz és az ENTER-t a jelenlegi link által megadott címre történő lépéshez. Az 'l' (last=utolsó) gombot az előzőleg látogatott oldalra való visszalépésre használhatod. Az ESC lenyomásával kiléphetsz a Súgóból. + +A bal egérgomb lenyomásával követheted a linket, vagy gördíthetsz. A jobb gomb lenyomásával visszatérhetsz az előzőleg látogatott pontra. + +A Súgóban használható összes gomb listája: + +Általános mozgási lehetőségek billentyűzettelGeneral Movement Keys. + +tab Mozgás a következő elemre. +M-tab Mozgás az előző elemre. +down Mozgás a következő elemre; a sorokat lefelé + gördíti. +up Mozgás az előző elemre; a sorokat felfelé + gördíti. +right, enter Követi a jelenlegi linket. +left, l Visszalép az előzőleg meglátogatott pontra. +F1 Megjeleníti a Súgót a Súgó nézővel. +n Átlép a következő pontra. +p Átlép az előző pontra. +c A Tartalomjegyzékhez ugrik. +F10, esc Kilép a Súgóból. + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/hlp/it/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/it/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd0ed3b --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/it/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +HLP_LANG=it + +include ../hlp-lang-include.am diff --git a/doc/hlp/it/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/it/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c9c441 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/it/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,645 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp/it +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +HLP_LANG = it +MAN2HLP = $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/it/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/it/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/it/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/it/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3fccc3d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/it/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,334 @@ + +[main] + lqwqk k k + x x x . x . x + x x x k lqu wqk k lqw tqk n + x x x x x x x x x x x x x x + v v v mqv v v v mqu v v mj + qqqqqqCommander qj + +Questa è la principale schermata della guida interattiva del GNU Midnight Commander . + +Per saperne di più su come usare la guida interattiva, premere semplicemente invioHow to use help. Se lo si desidera, è possibile consultare direttamente il sommarioContents della guida. + +Il Midnight Commander è stato scritto dai suoi autoriAUTHORS. + +Il Midnight Commander NON E' COPERTO DA ALCUNA GARANZIAWarranty. Questo è software libero, lo si può ridistribuire sotto certe condizioniLicenza. + +[Licenza] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuseoccurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is +that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modificationsto produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to applyto the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[QueryBox] +Finestre di dialogo di richiesta dati + +Nelle finestre di dialogo di richiesta dati è possibile usare i tasti freccia o la prima lettera per selezionare una voce o cliccare con il mouse sul bottone. + +[How to use help] +Come usare la guida interattiva + +Usare i tasti del cursore o il mouse per navigare nel visualizzatore della guida. + +Premere freccia in giù per spostarsi alla voce successiva o per spostarsi in basso. Premere freccia in su per spostarsi alla voce precedente o per spostarsi in alto. Premere freccia a destra per seguire il collegamento corrente. Premere freccia a sinistra per tornare indietro nello storico dei nodi visitati. + +Se il terminale non supporta i tasti del cursore si può usare la barra spaziatrice per spostarsi in avanti ed il tasto 'b' per tornare indietro. Usare il tasto TAB per spostarsi sulla prossima voce e premere INVIO per seguire il collegamento corrente. Usare il tasto 'l' per tornare indietro nello storico dei nodi visitati. Premere ESC per uscire dal visualizzatore della guida. + +Il tasto sinistro del mouse segue il collegamento o sfoglia le pagine. Il tasto destro del mouse torna indietro nello storico dei nodi visitati. + +Elenco completo dei tasti del visualizzatore della guida: + +Sono accettati i tasti generali di movimentoGeneral Movement Keys. + +tab Va alla voce successiva. +M-tab Va alla voce precedente. +giù Va alla voce successiva o una riga in basso. +su Va alla voce precedente o una riga in alto. +destra, invio Segue il collegamento corrente. +sinistra, l Torna indietro nello storico dei nodi visitati. +F1 Mostra la guida per il visualizzatore della + guida stessa. +n Va al nodo successivo. +p Va al nodo precedente. +c Va al nodo del sommario. +F10, esc Esce dal visualizzatore della guida. + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/hlp/pl/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/pl/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8823913 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/pl/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +HLP_LANG=pl + +include ../hlp-lang-include.am diff --git a/doc/hlp/pl/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/pl/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f88cc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/pl/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,645 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp/pl +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +HLP_LANG = pl +MAN2HLP = $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/pl/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/pl/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/pl/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/pl/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fbaedc --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/pl/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ + +[main] + lqwqk k k + x x x . x . x + x x x k lqu wqk k lqw tqk n + x x x x x x x x x x x x x x + v v v mqv v v v mqu v v mj + qqqqqqCommander qj + +Główny ekran pomocy programu GNU Midnight Commander . + +Aby dowiedzieć się, jak używać interaktywnej pomocy, należy nacisnąć klawisz EnterHow to use help. Można też przejść bezpośrednio do spisu treściContents. + +Program GNU Midnight Commander został napisany przez jego autorówAUTHORS. + +Program GNU Midnight Commander jest dostarczany BEZ JAKIEJKOLWIEK GWARANCJIWarranty. Niniejszy program jest wolnym oprogramowaniem; można go rozprowadzać dalej na warunkach GNU General Public LicenseLicense. + +[License] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuseoccurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is +that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modificationsto produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to applyto the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[QueryBox] +Okna zapytań + +W oknach dialogowych zapytań można używać klawiszy strzałek lub pierwszych liter, aby wybrać element albo kliknąć na przycisku. + +[How to use help] +Jak używać pomocy + +Do obsługi przeglądarki można używać klawiszy kursora lub myszy. Naciśnięcie strzałki w dół przeniesie do następnego elementu lub przewinie w dół. Naciśnięcie strzałki w górę przeniesie do poprzedniego elementu lub przewinie w górę, Naciśnięcie strzałki w prawo podąży za zaznaczonym odnośnikiem. Naciśnięcie strzałki w lewo powróci do poprzednio odwiedzonego węzła. + +Jeśli terminal nie obsługuje klawiszy kursora, można używać spacji do przewijania do przodu i klawisz B , aby przewijać do tyłu. Można używać klawisza Tab , aby przechodzić do następnego elementu i klawisza Enter , aby podążyć za zaznaczonym odnośnikiem. Klawisz L może być używany do przechodzenia do poprzednio odwiedzonego węzła. Naciśnięcie klawisza Esc zakończy przeglądarkę pomocy. + +Lewy przycisk myszy podąży za odnośnikiem lub przewinie ekran. Prawy przycisk myszy może być używany, aby przechodzić do poprzednio odwiedzonego węzła. + +Pełna lista klawiszy przeglądarki pomocy: + +Ogólne klawisze ruchuGeneral Movement Keys są akceptowane. + +Tab Następny element. +M-Tab Poprzedni element. +Dół Następny element lub przewijanie o wiersz w dół. +Góra Poprzedni element lub przewijanie o wiersz w górę. +Prawo , Enter Podążanie za zaznaczonym odnośnikiem. +Lewo , l Ostatnio odwiedzony węzeł. +F1 Pomoc dla przeglądarki pomocy. +N Następny węzeł. +P Poprzedni węzeł. +C Przejście do Spisu treści. +F10 , Esc Zakończenie działanie przeglądarki pomocy. + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/hlp/ru/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/ru/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c7bd58e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/ru/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +HLP_LANG=ru + +include ../hlp-lang-include.am diff --git a/doc/hlp/ru/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/ru/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab357fb --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/ru/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,645 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp/ru +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +HLP_LANG = ru +MAN2HLP = $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/ru/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/ru/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/ru/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/ru/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c2dcfc --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/ru/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,339 @@ +[main] + lqwqk k k + x x x . x . x + x x x k lqu wqk k lqw tqk n + x x x x x x x x x x x x x x + v v v mqv v v v mqu v v mj + qqqqqqCommander qj + +Вы сейчас видите главное окно интерактивной подсказки программы GNU Midnight Commander . + +Чтобы узнать, как пользоваться подсказкой, нажмите клавишу EnterHow to use help, иначе переходите к перечню разделовContents подсказки. + +Программа Midnight Commander поставляется АБСОЛЮТНО БЕЗ ВСЯКИХ ГАРАНТИЙГарантия. Это свободно распространяемое программное обеспечение, созданное группой авторовAUTHORS. Вы можете передавать его другим при условии соблюдения требований лицензии GNUЛицензия (оригинал на английском) (прочитайте неофициальный переводЛицензия этой лицензии). + +Русский перевод текста подсказки - Костромин В.А., 1999 г. + +[Лицензия (оригинал на английском)] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuseoccurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is +that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modificationsto produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to applyto the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[Лицензия] + +См. оригинальную версию. + +[QueryBox] +Диалоговые окна запросов + +В окнах запросов для выбора какого-либо варианта ответа (которые обычно задаются в виде экранных кнопок) Вы можете использовать либо клавиши со стрелками, либо выбрать ответ путем нажатия клавиши с выделенной в названии кнопки буквой, либо щелкнув по нужной кнопке мышкой. + + +[How to use help] +Как пользоваться помощью + +При работе с программой Midnight Commander практически в любой момент можно обратиться к интерактивной подсказке, вызов которой осуществляется нажатием клавиши F1. Для перемещения в окне просмотра подсказки Вы можете использовать клавиши перемещения курсора (стрелки) или мышь. Стрелка вниз вызывает переход к следующей ссылке (выделены голубым фоном) или сдвиг текста на одну строку вверх. Стрелка вверх вызывает переход к предыдущей ссылке или сдвиг текста на одну строку вверх. Стрелка вправо вызывает переход по ссылке, которая в данный момент выделена синим фоном (текущая ссылка). По стрелке влево происходит переход к ранее просмотренным разделам подсказки. + +Если Ваш терминал не поддерживает клавиши-стрелки, Вы можете использовать клавишу пробела для перехода к следующей странице подсказки и клавишу 'b' для перехода к предыдущей странице. Клавиша TAB вызывает переход к следующей ссылке, а нажатие ENTER - переход по текущей ссылке. При просмотре подсказки программа запоминает последовательность переходов по ссылкам и позволяет вернуться к ранее просмотренным разделам, воспользовавшись клавишей 'l' (last). Нажатие на ESC вызывает выход из окна подсказки. + +По щелчку левой клавиши мыши происходит переход по ссылке или перемещение по тексту подсказки. Щелчок правой кнопкой мыши используется для переход к ранее просмотренным разделам. + +Полный список управляющих комбинаций для окна просмотра подсказки: + +Работают все клавиши управления перемещениемGeneral Movement Keys. + +tab Переход на следующую ссылку. +M-tab Переход на предыдущую ссылку. +down Переход на следующую ссылку или смещение + текста на одну строку вверх. +up Переход на следующую ссылку или смещение + текста на одну строку вниз. +right, enter Переход по текущей ссылке. +left, l Переход к ранее просмотренным разделам. +F1 Помощь по использованию самой подсказки. +n Переход к следующему разделу помощи. +p Переход к предыдущему разделу помощи. +c Переход к оглавлению подсказки. +F10, esc Выход из окна просмотра подсказки. + + + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/hlp/sr/Makefile.am b/doc/hlp/sr/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04e13d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/sr/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +HLP_LANG=sr + +include ../hlp-lang-include.am diff --git a/doc/hlp/sr/Makefile.in b/doc/hlp/sr/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec1160f --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/sr/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,645 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ + +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/hlp/sr +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" +DATA = $(hlp_DATA) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +HLP_LANG = sr +MAN2HLP = $(top_builddir)/src/man2hlp/man2hlp +hlpdir = $(pkgdatadir)/help +hlp_DATA = mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) +EXTRA_DIST = xnc.hlp +CLEANFILES = $(hlp_DATA) +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/sr/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/hlp/sr/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../hlp-lang-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-hlpDATA: $(hlp_DATA) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + if test -n "$$list"; then \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + for p in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; \ + done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)" || exit $$?; \ + done + +uninstall-hlpDATA: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list='$(hlp_DATA)'; test -n "$(hlpdir)" || list=; \ + files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(DATA) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(hlpdir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-hlpDATA + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-hlpDATA + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-hlpDATA \ + install-html install-html-am install-info install-info-am \ + install-man install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-hlpDATA + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG): $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp $(MAN2HLP) + - $(MAN2HLP) $(top_builddir)/doc/man/$(HLP_LANG)/mc.1 $(srcdir)/xnc.hlp mc.hlp.$(HLP_LANG) + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/hlp/sr/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/sr/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e478741 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/sr/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,338 @@ + +[main] + + lqqk nq + x x x + x x lqk w w lqk tqk w w w w + x x x x tqu x x x x tqu x x + v x mqj v v mqj x v v v mqv + mqqqнаредник qqj + +Ово је главни екран помоћи за ГНУ-овог поноћног наредника . + +Да бисте сазнали више о томе како да користите интерактивни систем помоћи потребно је да притиснете EnterHow to use help. Можете и одмах отићи на садржајContents помоћи. + +ГНУ-овог поноћног наредника су написали његови ауториAUTHORS. + +ГНУ-ов поноћни наредник се испоручује БЕЗ ИКАКВЕ ГАРАНЦИЈЕWarranty. Ово је слободни софтвер, а ви сте позвани да га расподелите под одредбама ГНУ-ове опште јавне лиценцеЛиценца (оригинал на енглеском). Погледајте и незваничан превод ГНУ-ове ОЈЛ на српскиЛиценца (на српском). + +Превод Поноћног наредника и ове датотеке помоћи на српски: Страхиња Радић, <mr99164@alas.matf.bg.ac.yu > СРД `Уликс', http://uliks.sourceforge.net + +[Лиценца (оригинал на енглеском)] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuseoccurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is +that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modificationsto produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to applyto the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[Лиценца (на српском)] + +See original License. + +[QueryBox] +Прозори упита + +У дијалозима упита можете да користите тастере са стрелицама или прво слово да бисте изабрали ставку или можете да притиснете дугме миша када се показивач налази изнад дугмета на екрану. + +[How to use help] +Како користити помоћ + +Можете да користите курсорске тастере да бисте се кретали у оквиру прегледача помоћи. Притисните стрелицу надоле да бисте се померили на следећу ставку или клизали надоле. Притисните стрелицу нагоре да бисте се померили на претходну ставку или клизали нагоре. Притисните стрелицу надесно да бисте пратили текућу везу. Притисните стрелицу налево да бисте се вратили уназад у оквиру историје посећених чворова. + +Ако ваш терминал не подржава курсорске тастере, можете да користите размакницу да бисте клизали унапред и b (латинично б) да бисте клизали уназад. Користите тастер TAB да бисте прешли на следећу ставку а ENTER да бисте пратили текућу везу. Тастер l (латинично л) се може користити за враћање уназад у историји чворова које сте посетили. Притисните тастер ESC да бисте изашли из прегледача помоћи. + +Притиском на лево дугме миша ћете пратити везу или клизати. Притиском на десно дугме миша ћете се враћати уназад у историји чворова. + +Потпун списак тастера прегледача помоћи: + +Дозвољене су опште пречице за кретањеGeneral Movement Keys. + +tab Помери се на следећу ставку. +M-tab Помери се на претходну ставку. +доле Помери се на след. ставку или клизај 1 ред надоле. +горе Помери се на прет. ставку или клизај 1 ред нагоре. +десно , enter Прати текућу везу. +лево , l Врати се уназад у историји посећених чворова. +F1 Прикажи помоћ око прегледача помоћи. +n Иди на следећи чвор. +p Иди на претходни чвор. +c Иди на чвор `садржај'. +F10 , esc Излаз из прегледача помоћи. + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/hlp/xnc.hlp b/doc/hlp/xnc.hlp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4c4ec4 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/hlp/xnc.hlp @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ + +[main] + lqwqk k k + x x x . x . x + x x x k lqu wqk k lqw tqk n + x x x x x x x x x x x x x x + v v v mqv v v v mqu v v mj + qqqqqqCommander qj + +This is the main help screen for GNU Midnight Commander . + +To learn more on how to use the interactive help facility just press EnterHow to use help. You may want to go directly to the help contentsContents. + +GNU Midnight Commander is written by its authorsAUTHORS. + +GNU Midnight Commander comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTYWarranty. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under terms of GNU General Public LicenseLicense. + +[License] + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + +Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +<http://fsf.org/> + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuseoccurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + +0. Definitions. +--------------- + + “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. + + “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. + + To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. + + A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. + + To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + +1. Source Code. +--------------- + + The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. + + A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is +that same work. + +2. Basic Permissions. +--------------------- + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. + +3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. +-------------------------------------------------------------- + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. + +4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. +----------------------------- + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + +5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. +-------------------------------------- + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modificationsto produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, +which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not +combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a +storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and +its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the +compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a +covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to applyto the other +parts of the aggregate. + +6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. +------------------------------ + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. + + A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. + + “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. + +7. Additional Terms. +-------------------- + + “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. + +8. Termination. +--------------- + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. + +9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. +--------------------------------------------- + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + +10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. +------------------------------------------------- + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + +11. Patents. +------------ + + A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”. + + A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. + + A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + +12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. +------------------------------------ + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + +13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. +--------------------------------------------------- + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. + +14. Revised Versions of this License. +------------------------------------- + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. + +[Warranty] +15. Disclaimer of Warranty. +--------------------------- + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +16. Limitation of Liability. +---------------------------- + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. +----------------------------------------- + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + + + The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + +[QueryBox] +Query boxes + +In the query dialog box you can use the arrow keys or the first letter to select an item or click with the mouse on the button. + +[How to use help] +How to use help + +You can use the cursor keys or mouse to navigate in the help viewer. Press down arrow to move to the next item or scroll down. Press up arrow to move to the previous item or scroll up. Press right arrow to follow the current link. Press left arrow to go back in the history of nodes that you have visited. + +If you terminal doesn't support the cursor keys you can use the space bar to scroll forward and the b (back) key scroll back. Use the TAB key to move to the next item and press ENTER to follow the current link. The l (last) key can be used to go back in the history of nodes you have visited. Press ESC to exit the help viewer. + +The left mouse button will follow the link or scroll. The right mouse button can be used to go back in the history of nodes. + +The full key list of the help viewer: + +General movement keysGeneral Movement Keys are accepted. + +tab Move to the next item. +M-tab Move to the previous item. +down Move to the next item or scroll a line down. +up Move to the previous item or scroll a line up. +right , enter Follow the current link. +left , l Go back in the history of visited nodes. +F1 Show the help for the help viewer. +n Go to the next node. +p Go to the previous node. +c Go to the Contents node. +F10 , esc Exit the help viewer. + +Local variables: +fill-column: 58 +end: diff --git a/doc/man/Makefile.am b/doc/man/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d33b9ab --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +DIST_SUBDIRS = es hu it pl ru sr +if USE_NLS +SUBDIRS = $(DOC_LINGUAS) +endif + +man_MANS = mc.1 mcedit.1 mcview.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +EXTRA_DIST = \ + date-of-man-include.am \ + mc.1.in \ + mcedit.1.in \ + mcview.1.in + +DATE_LANG=en_US.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%B %Y + +include date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/Makefile.in b/doc/man/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c7bf84 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,876 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +RECURSIVE_TARGETS = all-recursive check-recursive cscopelist-recursive \ + ctags-recursive dvi-recursive html-recursive info-recursive \ + install-data-recursive install-dvi-recursive \ + install-exec-recursive install-html-recursive \ + install-info-recursive install-pdf-recursive \ + install-ps-recursive install-recursive installcheck-recursive \ + installdirs-recursive pdf-recursive ps-recursive \ + tags-recursive uninstall-recursive +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS = mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive \ + distclean-recursive maintainer-clean-recursive +am__recursive_targets = \ + $(RECURSIVE_TARGETS) \ + $(RECURSIVE_CLEAN_TARGETS) \ + $(am__extra_recursive_targets) +AM_RECURSIVE_TARGETS = $(am__recursive_targets:-recursive=) TAGS CTAGS \ + distdir distdir-am +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +# Read a list of newline-separated strings from the standard input, +# and print each of them once, without duplicates. Input order is +# *not* preserved. +am__uniquify_input = $(AWK) '\ + BEGIN { nonempty = 0; } \ + { items[$$0] = 1; nonempty = 1; } \ + END { if (nonempty) { for (i in items) print i; }; } \ +' +# Make sure the list of sources is unique. This is necessary because, +# e.g., the same source file might be shared among _SOURCES variables +# for different programs/libraries. +am__define_uniq_tagged_files = \ + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + unique=`for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ + done | $(am__uniquify_input)` +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in \ + $(srcdir)/date-of-man-include.am +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +am__relativize = \ + dir0=`pwd`; \ + sed_first='s,^\([^/]*\)/.*$$,\1,'; \ + sed_rest='s,^[^/]*/*,,'; \ + sed_last='s,^.*/\([^/]*\)$$,\1,'; \ + sed_butlast='s,/*[^/]*$$,,'; \ + while test -n "$$dir1"; do \ + first=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first" != "."; then \ + if test "$$first" = ".."; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_last"`/"$$dir2"; \ + dir0=`echo "$$dir0" | sed -e "$$sed_butlast"`; \ + else \ + first2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_first"`; \ + if test "$$first2" = "$$first"; then \ + dir2=`echo "$$dir2" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + else \ + dir2="../$$dir2"; \ + fi; \ + dir0="$$dir0"/"$$first"; \ + fi; \ + fi; \ + dir1=`echo "$$dir1" | sed -e "$$sed_rest"`; \ + done; \ + reldir="$$dir2" +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +DIST_SUBDIRS = es hu it pl ru sr +@USE_NLS_TRUE@SUBDIRS = $(DOC_LINGUAS) +man_MANS = mc.1 mcedit.1 mcview.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +EXTRA_DIST = \ + date-of-man-include.am \ + mc.1.in \ + mcedit.1.in \ + mcview.1.in + +DATE_LANG = en_US.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %B %Y +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-recursive + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) + +# This directory's subdirectories are mostly independent; you can cd +# into them and run 'make' without going through this Makefile. +# To change the values of 'make' variables: instead of editing Makefiles, +# (1) if the variable is set in 'config.status', edit 'config.status' +# (which will cause the Makefiles to be regenerated when you run 'make'); +# (2) otherwise, pass the desired values on the 'make' command line. +$(am__recursive_targets): + @fail=; \ + if $(am__make_keepgoing); then \ + failcom='fail=yes'; \ + else \ + failcom='exit 1'; \ + fi; \ + dot_seen=no; \ + target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ + case "$@" in \ + distclean-* | maintainer-clean-*) list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + *) list='$(SUBDIRS)' ;; \ + esac; \ + for subdir in $$list; do \ + echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ + if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ + dot_seen=yes; \ + local_target="$$target-am"; \ + else \ + local_target="$$target"; \ + fi; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ + || eval $$failcom; \ + done; \ + if test "$$dot_seen" = "no"; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) "$$target-am" || exit 1; \ + fi; test -z "$$fail" + +ID: $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); mkid -fID $$unique +tags: tags-recursive +TAGS: tags + +tags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + set x; \ + here=`pwd`; \ + if ($(ETAGS) --etags-include --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ + include_option=--etags-include; \ + empty_fix=.; \ + else \ + include_option=--include; \ + empty_fix=; \ + fi; \ + list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + test ! -f $$subdir/TAGS || \ + set "$$@" "$$include_option=$$here/$$subdir/TAGS"; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + shift; \ + if test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$*$$unique"; then :; else \ + test -n "$$unique" || unique=$$empty_fix; \ + if test $$# -gt 0; then \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + "$$@" $$unique; \ + else \ + $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique; \ + fi; \ + fi +ctags: ctags-recursive + +CTAGS: ctags +ctags-am: $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) $(am__tagged_files) + $(am__define_uniq_tagged_files); \ + test -z "$(CTAGS_ARGS)$$unique" \ + || $(CTAGS) $(CTAGSFLAGS) $(AM_CTAGSFLAGS) $(CTAGS_ARGS) \ + $$unique + +GTAGS: + here=`$(am__cd) $(top_builddir) && pwd` \ + && $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) \ + && gtags -i $(GTAGS_ARGS) "$$here" +cscopelist: cscopelist-recursive + +cscopelist-am: $(am__tagged_files) + list='$(am__tagged_files)'; \ + case "$(srcdir)" in \ + [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) sdir="$(srcdir)" ;; \ + *) sdir=$(subdir)/$(srcdir) ;; \ + esac; \ + for i in $$list; do \ + if test -f "$$i"; then \ + echo "$(subdir)/$$i"; \ + else \ + echo "$$sdir/$$i"; \ + fi; \ + done >> $(top_builddir)/cscope.files + +distclean-tags: + -rm -f TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done + @list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ + if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ + $(am__make_dryrun) \ + || test -d "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || $(MKDIR_P) "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ + || exit 1; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(distdir)/$$subdir"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_distdir=$$reldir; \ + dir1=$$subdir; dir2="$(top_distdir)"; \ + $(am__relativize); \ + new_top_distdir=$$reldir; \ + echo " (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" distdir="$$new_distdir" \\"; \ + echo " am__remove_distdir=: am__skip_length_check=: am__skip_mode_fix=: distdir)"; \ + ($(am__cd) $$subdir && \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ + top_distdir="$$new_top_distdir" \ + distdir="$$new_distdir" \ + am__remove_distdir=: \ + am__skip_length_check=: \ + am__skip_mode_fix=: \ + distdir) \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-recursive +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: installdirs-recursive +installdirs-am: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-recursive +install-exec: install-exec-recursive +install-data: install-data-recursive +uninstall: uninstall-recursive + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-recursive +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-recursive + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic distclean-tags + +dvi: dvi-recursive + +dvi-am: + +html: html-recursive + +html-am: + +info: info-recursive + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-recursive + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-recursive + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-recursive + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-recursive + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-recursive + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-recursive + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-recursive + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: $(am__recursive_targets) install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: $(am__recursive_targets) CTAGS GTAGS TAGS all all-am check \ + check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool cscopelist-am ctags \ + ctags-am distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool \ + distclean-tags distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs installdirs-am maintainer-clean \ + maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic \ + mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am ps ps-am tags tags-am uninstall \ + uninstall-am uninstall-man uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/date-of-man-include.am b/doc/man/date-of-man-include.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96f9f10 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/date-of-man-include.am @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' diff --git a/doc/man/es/Makefile.am b/doc/man/es/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..22a2d1d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/es/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +LANG=es +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in + +man_MANS = mc.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +DATE_LANG=es_ES.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%B de %Y + +include ../date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/es/Makefile.in b/doc/man/es/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e9890e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/es/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man/es +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +LANG = es +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in +man_MANS = mc.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +DATE_LANG = es_ES.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %B de %Y +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/es/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/es/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man \ + uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/es/mc.1.in b/doc/man/es/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2c3db7 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/es/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,4213 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\" Traducido el 6 de septiembre de 1998 por +.\" Francisco Gabriel Aroca Tapia <fgat1@alu.um.es> +.\" +.\" Actualizado desde el 6 agosto de 2002 por +.\" David H. Martín Alonso <david.martin@telefonica.net> +.\" +.\"TOPICS "Índice de Contenidos:" +.TH MC 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Versión %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "NOMBRE" +mc \- entorno visual para sistemas tipo Unix. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "SINOPSIS" +.B mc +.RB [ \-abcCdfFhPstuUVx "] [" \-l +.IR reg "] [" dir1 " [" dir2 ]] +.RB [ \-e +.RI [ arch "] " ... ] +.RB [ \-v +.IR arch ] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH "DESCRIPCIÓN" +"Midnight Commander" (Comandante de Medianoche) es +un navegador de directorios/gestor de archivos para +sistemas operativos tipo Unix. +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.SH "OPCIONES" +.TP +.I \-a, \-\-stickchars +Deshabilita el uso de caracteres gráficos para el dibujo de líneas. +.TP +.I \-b, \-\-nocolor +Fuerza el uso de la pantalla de Blanco y Negro. +.TP +.I \-c, \-\-color +Fuerza el uso del modo color. Véase la sección +.\"LINK2" +Colores +.\"Colors" +para más información. +.TP +.I \-C arg, \-\-colors=arg +Usado para especificar un juego de colores diferentes desde la línea de +órdenes. El formato de arg está documentado en la sección +.\"LINK2" +Colores\&. +.\"Colors" +.TP +.I \-\-configure\-options +Muestra opciones de configuración compiladas. +.TP +.I \-d, \-\-nomouse +Deshabilita el soporte de ratón. +.TP +.I \-e [arch], \-\-edit[=arch] +Iniciar el editor interno. Si se indica un archivo, editarlo. Véase la +página de manual de +.BR "mcedit (1)" . +.TP +.I \-f, \-\-datadir +Muestra las rutas de búsqueda compiladas para archivos de Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I \-F, \-\-datadir\-info +Muestra información más extensa sobre las rutas de búsqueda compiladas +en Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Fuerza el uso de ratón en modo de seguimiento «normal». Se usa para +terminales compatibles con xterm (tmux/screen). +.TP +.I \-k, \-\-resetsoft +Restablece las softkeys a su valor por defecto según la base de datos de +termcap/terminfo. Solo útil en terminales HP cuando las teclas de función +no funcionan. +.TP +.I \-K arch, \-\-keymap=arch +Carga desde un archivo la configuración de teclas para la línea de órdenes. +.TP +.I \-l reg, \-\-ftplog=reg +Guarda el diálogo FTPfs con el servidor en el archivo. +.TP +.I \-\-nokeymap +No cargar asociaciones de teclas desde ningún archivo, utilizar las +teclas nativas del sistema. +.TP +.I \-P arch, \-\-printwd=arch +Al salir del programa, Midnight Commander registrará el último +directorio de trabajo en el archivo indicado. Esta opción no debe ser +usada directamente, sino desde un guión de shell adecuado, para dejar +como directorio activo el directorio que estaba en uso dentro de +Midnight Commander. Consúltese en los archivos +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.sh +(usuarios de bash y zsh) y +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.csh +(usuarios de tcsh) la manera de definir +.B mc +como un alias para el correspondiente guión de shell. +.TP +.I \-s, \-\-slow +Activa el modo para terminales lentos. En este modo el programa no +dibuja bordes con líneas de caracteres y desactiva el modo detallado. +Si no se rellena la sección [Lines] el marco pseudo\-gráfico estará +formado por espacios; en caso contrario el marco se contruye con +caracteres de texto según los parámetros siguientes: +.TP +.B lefttop +esquina superior izquierda +.TP +.B righttop +esquina superior derecha +.TP +.B centertop +cruz superior central +.TP +.B centerbottom +cruz inferior central +.TP +.B leftbottom +esquina inferior izquierda +.TP +.B rightbottom +esquina inferior derecha +.TP +.B leftmiddle +cruz central izquierda +.TP +.B rightmiddle +cruz central derecha +.TP +.B centermiddle +cruz central +.TP +.B horiz +línea horizontal por defecto +.TP +.B vert +línea vertical por defecto +.TP +.B thinhoriz +línea horizontal fina +.TP +.B thinvert +línea vertical fina +.TP +.I \-S arg, \-\-skin=arg +Permite elegir un «skin» o apariencia para mc. La configuración de las +características de visualización (colores, líneas, etc.) se explica +detalladamente en la sección +.\"LINK2" +Skins\&. +.\"Skins" +.TP +.I \-t, \-\-termcap +Usado solo si el código fue compilado con S\-Lang y terminfo: hace que +Midnight Commander use el valor de la variable de entorno +.B TERMCAP +para obtener la información del terminal, en vez de la base de datos de +terminales del sistema. +.TP +.I \-u, \-\-nosubshell +Deshabilita el uso de shell concurrente (solo tiene sentido si este +Midnight Commander fue construido con soporte de shell concurrente). +.TP +.I \-U, \-\-subshell +Habilita el uso de shell concurrente (solo tiene sentido si este +Midnight Commander fue construido con soporte de subshell opcional). +.TP +.I \-v arch, \-\-view=arch +Iniciar el visor interno para ver el archivo indicado. Véase la página +de manual de +.BR "mcview (1)" . +.TP +.I \-V, \-\-version +Muestra la versión del programa. +.TP +.I \-x, \-\-xterm +Fuerza el modo xterm. Usado cuando se ejecuta en terminales con características de xterm (dos +modos de pantalla, y pueden enviar secuencias de escape de ratón). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +No utilizar X11 para obtener el estado de Mayús, Ctrl, Alt. +.PP +Si se especifican los dos directorios, el primer nombre se usará para el directorio a mostrar +en el panel activo; el segundo nombre para el directorio a mostrar en el otro panel. +.PP +Si solo se especifica un directorio, el nombre se usará para el directorio a mostrar en el +panel activo; el valor de «other_dir» de panels.ini será el nombre del directorio mostrado +en el panel pasivo. +.PP +Si no se especifica ningún directorio, el directorio actual se mostrará en el +panel activo; el valor de «other_dir» de panels.ini será el nombre del directorio mostrado +en el panel pasivo. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH "Introducción" +La pantalla de Midnight Commander está divida en cuatro partes. La mayor +parte de la pantalla está ocupada por los dos paneles de directorio. Por defecto, +la segunda línea más inferior de la pantalla es la línea de órdenes del sistema, y +la línea inferior muestra las etiquetas de las teclas de función. La línea superior es la +.\"LINK2" +barra de menú\&. +.\"Menu Bar" +La línea de la barra de menú podría no ser visible, pero aparece si pulsamos +en la primea línea de la pantalla con el ratón o pulsamos la tecla F9. +.PP +Midnight Commander pone a la vista dos directorios al mismo +tiempo. Uno de los paneles es el panel actual (hay una barra de selección +en el panel actual). La mayoría de las operaciones tienen lugar en el +panel actual. Algunas operaciones con archivos como Renombrar y Copiar utilizan +por defecto el directorio del panel no seleccionado como destino, pero +siempre solicitan una confirmación previa y podemos cambiarlo. Para más +información, ver las secciones sobre los +.\"LINK2" +Paneles de Directorio\&, +.\"Directory Panels" +los +.\"LINK2" +Menús Izquierdo y Derecho +.\"Left and Right Menus" +y el +.\"LINK2" +Menú de Archivo\&. +.\"File Menu" +.PP +Podemos ejecutar comandos del sistema desde el Midnight Commander simplemente +escribiéndolos. Todo lo que escribamos aparecerá en la línea de órdenes del sistema +y cuando pulsemos +.IR Intro , +Midnight Commander ejecutará estos comandos; ver las secciones +.\"LINK2" +Línea de Órdenes del Sistema +.\"Shell Command Line" +y +.\"LINK2" +Teclas de la Línea de Entrada +.\"Input Line Keys" +para aprender más sobre la línea de órdenes. +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Soporte de Ratón" +Se puede utilizar Midnight Commander con un ratón o mouse. Se activa cuando +estamos ejecutándolo en un entorno gráfico con un terminal tipo +.B xterm(1) +(funciona incluso si realizamos una conexión de telnet, ssh o rlogin a +otra máquina desde el xterm) o si estamos ejecutándolo en una consola Linux +y tenemos el servidor +.B gpm +cargado. +.PP +Cuando pulsamos el botón izquierdo del ratón sobre un archivo en los paneles +de directorios, ese archivo es seleccionado; si lo hacemos con el botón derecho, +el archivo es marcado (o desmarcado, dependiendo del estado previo). +.PP +Una doble pulsación sobre un archivo intentará ejecutar el comando si se trata de +un programa ejecutable; y si la extensión del archivo tiene un programa +.\"LINK2" +asociado a esa extensión\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +se ejecuta el programa especificado. +.PP +Además, es posible ejecutar los comandos asignados a las teclas de función +pulsando con el ratón sobre las etiquetas de la línea inferior de la pantalla. +.PP +El valor por defecto de auto repetición para los botones del ratón es 400 +milisegundos. Este valor se puede modificar editando el archivo +.\"LINK2" +\&~/.config/mc/ini +.\"Save Setup" +y cambiando el parámetro +.IR mouse_repeat_rate . +.PP +Si estamos ejecutando Midnight Commander con soporte para ratón, podemos +recuperar el comportamiento habitual del ratón (cortar y pegar texto) +manteniendo pulsada la tecla Mayúsculas. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Teclas" +Algunos comandos en Midnight Commander implican el uso de las teclas +.I Control +(etiquetada habitualmente CTRL o CTL) y +.I Meta +(identificada como ALT o incluso Compose). En este manual usaremos las +siguientes abreviaturas: +.TP +.B Ctrl\-<car> +significa mantener pulsada la tecla Control mientras se pulsa el carácter +<car>. Así, Ctrl\-f sería: manteniendo pulsada la tecla Control teclear f. +.TP +.B Alt\-<car> +significa mantener pulsada la tecla Alt o Meta mientras pulsamos el +carácter <car>. Si no hay tecla Alt ni Meta, pulsar +.IR Esc , +soltar, y entonces pulsar el carácter <car>. +.TP +.B Mayús\-<car> +significa mantener pulsada la tecla de Mayúsculas (o Shift) y teclear +<car>. +.PP +Todas las líneas de entrada en Midnight Commander usan una aproximación +a las asociaciones de teclas del editor GNU Emacs. +.PP +Se pueden redefinir las asociaciones de las teclas. El resto de los +comportamientos de las teclas que se describen aquí hacen referencia al +comportamiento original. Para más información, +véase la sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +.IR "redefinición de teclas" . +.\"Keys_redefine" +.PP +Hay bastantes secciones que hablan acerca de las teclas. Las siguientes +son las más importantes. +.PP +La sección +.\"LINK2" +Menú de Archivo +.\"File Menu" +documenta los atajos de teclado para los comandos que aparecen en +el Menú de Archivo. Esta sección incluye las teclas de función. La mayor parte +de esos comandos realizan alguna acción, normalmente sobre el archivo seleccionado +o sobre los archivos marcados. +.PP +La sección +.\"LINK2" +Paneles de Directorio +.\"Directory Panels" +documenta las teclas que seleccionan un archivo o marcan archivos como +objetivo de una acción posterior (la acción normalmente es una del +menú de archivo). +.PP +La sección +.\"LINK2" +Línea de Órdenes del Sistema +.\"Shell Command Line" +lista las teclas que son usadas para introducir o editar líneas de +comandos. La mayor parte de ellas copian nombres de archivos y demás desde +los paneles de directorio a la línea de órdenes (para evitar un tecleado excesivo) +o acceden al historial de la línea de órdenes. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Teclas de línea de Entrada +.\"Input Line Keys" +Son usadas para editar líneas de entrada. Esto implica la línea de órdenes +y las líneas de entrada en las ventanas de preguntas. +.\"NODE " Keys_redefine" +.SH " Redefinición de teclas" +La función de ciertas teclas se puede alterar a partir de un mapa de teclado +almacenado en un archivo externo. Inicialmente el programa asigna esas funciones +según el mapa definido en el código fuente. Posteriormente se cargan siempre +los archivos +.B %pkgdatadir%/mc.keymap +y +.BR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.keymap , +reasignando en el orden marcado las definiciones anteriores. Se cargan después +posibles mapas de teclado creados por el usuario atendiendo por orden de prioridad +a: +.IP +.br +1) Opción de ejecución en línea de órdenes +.B \-K <mapa> +o +.B \-\-keymap=<mapa> +.br +2) Variable de entorno +.B MC_KEYMAP +.br +3) Parámetro +.B keymap +en la sección +.B [Midnight\-Commander] +del archivo de configuración. +.br +4) Archivo +.B ~/.config/mc/mc.keymap +.br +.PP +La opción de línea de órdenes, la variable de entorno y el parámetro en el +archivo de configuración pueden proporcionar la ruta absoluta al archivo +de mapa de teclado (con o sin la extensión .keymap). En caso contrario +se procede a realizar una búsqueda por directorios hasta encontrarlo en: +.IP +.br +1) +.B ~/.config/mc +.br +2) +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/ +.br +3) +.B %pkgdatadir%/ +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH " Otras Teclas" +Se incluyen aquí las teclas que no encajan en ninguna categoría concreta: +.PP +.B Intro. +Si hay algún texto en la línea de órdenes (la de la parte inferior de +los paneles), entonces ese comando es ejecutado. Si no hay texto en la línea +de comandos entonces si la barra de selección está situada sobre un directorio +Midnight Commander realiza un +.B chdir(2) +al directorio seleccionado y recarga la información en el panel; +si la selección es un archivo ejecutable entonces es ejecutado. Por último, +si la extensión del archivo seleccionado coincide con una de las +extensiones en el +.\"LINK2" +archivo de extensiones +.\"Edit Extension File" +entonces se ejecuta la aplicación correspondiente. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-l +redibuja toda la pantalla de Midnight Commander. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x c +.\"LINK2" +Cambiar permisos +.\"Chmod" +de un archivo o un conjunto de archivos marcados. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x o +.\"LINK2" +Cambiar dueño +.\"Chown" +del archivo actual o de los archivos marcados. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x l +crea enlaces. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x s +crea enlaces simbólicos con rutas absolutas. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x v +crea enlaces simbólicos con rutas relativas. Para más información +sobre enlaces simbólicos véase la sección +.\"LINK2" +Menú de Archivo\&. +.\"File Menu" +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x Ctrl\-s +edita enlaces simbólicos. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x i +cambia el panel opuesto al modo de información. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x q +cambia el panel opuesto al modo de vista rápida. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x ! +ejecuta +.\"LINK2" +búsquedas externas\&. +.\"External panelize" +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x h +añade el sitio actual a la lista de +.\"LINK2" +favoritos\&. +.\"Hotlist" +.TP +.B Alt\-! +ejecuta una orden del sistema y muestra su salida en el +.\"LINK2" +visor de archivos\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.TP +.B Alt\-? +.\"LINK2" +buscar archivos\&. +.\"Find File" +.TP +.B Alt\-c +permite +.\"LINK2" +cambiar de directorio\&. +.\"Quick cd" +.TP +.B Ctrl\-o +en la consola de Linux o FreeBSD o bajo un xterm, se muestra la salida +de la orden anterior. En la consola de Linux, Midnight Commander usa un +programa externo (cons.saver) para controlar la copia y restauración de +la pantalla. +.PP +Cuando se haya creado Midnight Commander con soporte de subshell +incluido, podemos pulsar +.I Ctrl\-o +en cualquier momento y volver a la pantalla principal; +para volver a nuestra aplicación bastará con volver a pulsar +.IR Ctrl\-o . +Si tenemos una aplicación suspendida en esta situación, no podremos +ejecutar otros programas desde Midnight Commander hasta que terminemos +la aplicación suspendida. +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Paneles de Directorio" +Esta sección enumera las teclas que operan en los paneles de directorio. +Si queremos saber cómo cambiar la apariencia de los paneles, deberemos +echar un vistazo a la sección +.\"LINK2" +Menús Izquierdo y Derecho\&. +.\"Left and Right Menus" +.TP +.B Tab, Ctrl\-i +cambia el panel actual. El panel activo deja de serlo y el no activo +pasa a ser el nuevo panel activo. La barra de selección se mueve del +antiguo panel al nuevo, desaparece de aquel y aparece en este. +.TP +.B Insertar, Ctrl\-t +para marcar archivos (y/o directorios) como seleccionados podemos usar +la tecla +.I insertar +(secuencia kich1 de terminfo). Para deseleccionar, +basta repetir la operación sobre los archivos y/o directorios antes +marcados. +.TP +.B Alt\-e +permite mostrar nombres en el panel con otra codificación de caracteres. +Los nombres se convierten a la codificación del sistema para mostrarlos. +Para desactivar esta recodificación basta seleccionar la entrada (..) +para el directorio superior. Para cancelar las conversiones en cualquier +directorio seleccionar +.I «Sin traducción» +en el diálogo de selección de código. +.TP +.B Alt\-g, Alt\-r, Alt\-j +usadas para seleccionar el archivo superior en un panel, el archivo central y el inferior del +panel, respectivamente. +.TP +.B Alt\-t +rota el listado de pantalla actual para mostrar el siguiente modo +de listado. Con esto es posible intercambiar rápidamente de un listado +completo al regular o breve, así como al modo de listado definido por el usuario. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-\\\\ (control\-Contrabarra) +muestra la lista de sitios +.\"LINK2" +Favoritos +.\"Hotlist" +y permite cambiar al directorio seleccionado. + +.TP +.PP +.B * N. del T.: +En el teclado castellano, existe un pequeño inconveniente, dado que la +contrabarra, no se consigue con una sola pulsación, por lo que este +método no funciona directamente. + +.TP +.B + \ (más) +usado para seleccionar (marcar) un grupo de archivos. Midnight Commander +ofrecerá distintas opciones. Indicando +.I Solo archivos +los directorios no se seleccionan. Con los +.I Caracteres Comodín +habilitados, se pueden introducir expresiones regulares del tipo empleado en +los patrones de nombres de la shell (poniendo * para cero o más caracteres y ? +para uno o más caracteres). Si los +.I Caracteres Comodín +están deshabilitados, entonces la selección de archivos se realiza con expresiones +regulares normales. Véase la página de manual de +.BR "ed (1)" . +Finalmente, si no se activa +.I Distinguir May/min +la selección se hará sin distinguir caracteres en mayúsculas o minúsculas. +.TP +.B \- (menos) o \\\\ (contrabarra) +usaremos las teclas «\-» o «\\» para deseleccionar un grupo de archivos. Esta es +la operación opuesta a la realizada por la tecla «+». + +.TP +.PP +.B * N. del T.: +La tecla que realiza originalmente la función descrita es la «\-» (menos) +ya que es la utilizada en la aplicación originaria, Comandante Norton. + +.TP +.B Arriba, Ctrl\-p +desplaza la barra de selección a la entrada anterior en el panel. +.TP +.B Abajo, Ctrl\-n +desplaza la barra de selección a la entrada siguiente en el panel. +.TP +.B Inicio, Alt\-< +desplaza la barra de selección a la primera entrada en el panel. +.TP +.B Fin, Alt\-> +desplaza la barra de selección a la última entrada en el panel. +.TP +.B AvPág (Página adelante), Ctrl\-v +desplaza la barra de selección a la página siguiente. +.TP +.B RePág (Página atrás), Alt\-v +desplaza la barra de selección a la página anterior. +.TP +.B Alt\-o +si el otro panel es un panel con lista de archivos y estamos situados en un +directorio en el panel activo actual, entonces otro panel se posiciona +dentro del directorio del panel activo (como la tecla de Emacs +.IR Ctrl\-o ) +en otro caso el otro panel es posicionado el directorio padre +del directorio seleccionado en el panel activo. +.TP +.B Alt\-i +cambiar el directorio en el panel opuesto de manera que coincida con el +panel actual. Si es necesario se cambiará también el panel opuesto a modo +listado, pero si el panel actual no está en modo listado no se cambiará +de modo el otro. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-RePág, Ctrl\-AvPág +solamente bajo la consola Linux: realiza un chdir ".." o al +directorio actualmente seleccionado respectivamente. +.TP +.B Alt\-y +cambia al anterior directorio visitado, equivale a pulsar +.I < +con el ratón. +.TP +.B Alt\-u +cambia al siguiente directorio visitado, equivale a pulsar +.I > +con el ratón. +.TP +.B Alt\-Mayús\-h, Alt\-H +muestra el historial de directorios visitados, equivale a pulsar la +.I v +con el ratón. +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH " Búsqueda rápida" +El modo de Búsqueda rápida permite localizar rápidamente nombres de archivos en +los paneles de directorio. Pulsando +.I Ctrl\-s +o +.I Alt\-s +se inicia la búsqueda de un archivo en el panel activo. +.P +Estando activada la búsqueda, las teclas pulsadas se van añadiendo a la cadena +de texto en búsqueda y no a la línea de órdenes. Si la opción +.I Mostrar Mini\-estado +está habilitada, la cadena a buscar se podrá ver en la línea de estado. +Conforme tecleemos, dentro del panel activo la barra de selección se desplazará +al siguiente archivo o directorio cuyo nombre coincida con las letras +introducidas. Se pueden usar las teclas +.I borrar +o +.I suprimir +para corregir errores de escritura. Si pulsamos +.I Ctrl\-s +de nuevo, se busca la siguiente coincidencia. +.P +Si se inicia la búsqueda rápida pulsando dos veces +.I Ctrl\-s +se recuperará el último patrón de búsqueda utilizado. +.P +Aparte de los caracteres propios de los nombres se pueden utilizar también los +caracteres comodín '*' y '?'. +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Línea de Órdenes del Sistema" +Esta sección enumera las teclas útiles para evitar la excesiva escritura +cuando se introducen órdenes del sistema. +.TP +.B Alt\-Intro +copia el nombre de archivo seleccionado a la línea de órdenes. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-Intro +igual que +.IR Alt\-Intro . +Puede no funcionar en ciertos sistemas o con algunos terminales. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-Mayús\-Intro +copia la ruta completa del archivo actual en la línea de órdenes. Puede +no funcionar en ciertos sistemas o con algunos terminales. +.TP +.B Alt\-Tab +realiza una +.\"LINK2" +terminación automática +.\"Completion" +del nombre de archivo, comando, variable, nombre de usuario y host. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x t, Ctrl\-x Ctrl\-t +copia los archivos marcados (o si no los hay, el archivo +seleccionado) del panel activo (Ctrl\-x t) o del otro panel (Ctrl\-x Ctrl\-t) a +la línea de órdenes. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-x p, Ctrl\-x Ctrl\-p +la primera secuencia de teclas copia el nombre de la ruta de acceso actual +a la línea de órdenes, y la segunda copia la ruta del otro panel a la +línea de órdenes. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-q +el comando cita (quote) puede ser utilizado para insertar caracteres +que de otro modo serían interpretados por Midnight Commander (como el símbolo '+') +.TP +.B Alt\-p, Alt\-n +usaremos esas teclas para navegar a través del histórico de comandos. Alt\-p devuelve +la última entrada, Alt\-n devuelve la siguiente. +.TP +.B Alt\-h +visualiza el historial para la línea de entrada actual. +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " Teclas Generales de Movimiento" +El visor de ayuda, el visor de archivo y el árbol de directorios usan +un código de control de movimiento común. Por consiguiente, reconocen las +mismas teclas. Además, cada uno reconoce algunas otras teclas propias. +.PP +Otras partes de Midnight Commander utilizan algunas de las mismas +teclas de movimiento, por lo que esta sección podría ser aplicada a ellas también. +.TP +.B Arriba, Ctrl\-p +mueve una línea hacia arriba. +.TP +.B Abajo, Ctrl\-n +mueve una línea hacia abajo. +.TP +.B RePág (Página atrás), Alt\-v +mueve una página completa hacia atrás. +.TP +.B AvPág (Página adelante), Ctrl\-v +mueve una página hacia delante. +.TP +.B Inicio +mueve al principio. +.TP +.B Fin +mueve al final. +.PP +El visor de ayuda y el de archivo reconocen las siguientes teclas +aparte de las mencionadas anteriormente: +.TP +.B b, Ctrl\-b, Ctrl\-h, Borrar, Suprimir +mueve una página completa hacia atrás. +.TP +.B Barra espaciadora +mueve una página hacia delante. +.TP +.B u, d +mueve la mitad de la página hacia atrás o adelante. +.TP +.B g, G +mueve al principio o al final. +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Teclas de la Línea de Entrada" +Las líneas de entrada (usadas en la +.\"LINK2" +línea de órdenes +.\"Shell Command Line" +y para los cuadros de diálogo en el programa) reconocen esas teclas: +.TP +.B Ctrl\-a +coloca el cursor al comienzo de la línea. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-e +coloca el cursor al final de la línea. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-b, Izquierda +desplaza el cursor una posición a la izquierda. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-f, Derecha +desplaza el cursor una posición a la derecha. +.TP +.B Alt\-f +avanza una palabra. +.TP +.B Alt\-b +retrocede una palabra. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-h, Borrar +borra el carácter anterior. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-d, Suprimir +elimina el carácter de la posición del cursor. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-@ +sitúa una marca para cortar. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-w +copia el texto entre el cursor y la marca a la caché de eliminación y elimina +el texto de la línea de entrada. +.TP +.B Alt\-w +copia el texto entre el cursor y la marca a la caché de eliminación. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-y +restaura el contenido de la caché de eliminación. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-k +elimina el texto desde el cursor hasta el final de la línea. +.TP +.B Alt\-p, Alt\-n +usaremos esas teclas para desplazarnos a través del historial de comandos. Alt\-p nos lleva +a la última entrada, Alt\-n nos sitúa en la siguiente. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-Alt\-h, Alt\-Borrar +borra la palabra anterior. +.TP +.B Alt\-Tab +realiza una +.\"LINK2" +terminación +.\"Completion" +del nombre de archivo, comando, variable, nombre de usuario o host. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Barra de Menú" +La barra de menú aparece cuando pulsamos F9 o pulsamos el botón del ratón +sobre la primera fila de la pantalla. La barra de menú tiene cinco submenús: "Izquierdo", "Archivo", +"Utilidades", "Opciones" y "Derecho". +.PP +Los +.\"LINK2" +Menús Izquierdo y Derecho +.\"Left and Right Menus" +nos permiten modificar la apariencia de los paneles de directorio +izquierdo y derecho. +.PP +El +.\"LINK2" +Menú de Archivo +.\"File Menu" +lista las acciones que podemos realizar sobre el archivo actualmente seleccionado +o sobre los archivos marcados. +.PP +El +.\"LINK2" +Menú de Utilidades +.\"Command Menu" +lista las acciones más generales y que no guardan relación con +la selección actual de archivos. +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH " Menús Izquierdo y Derecho (Arriba y Abajo)" +La presentación de los paneles de directorio puede ser cambiada desde los menús +.B Izquierdo +y +.B Derecho +(denominados +.B Arriba +y +.B Abajo +si hemos elegido la disposición horizontal de paneles en las opciones de +.\"LINK2" +presentación\&). +.\"Layout" +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Listado..." +La vista en modo +.B "Listado" +se usa para mostrar la lista de archivos. Hay cuatro modos disponibles: +.BR Completo , +.BR Breve , +.BR Largo , +y +.BR "Definido por el usuario" . +.PP +En modo completo se muestra el nombre del archivo, su tamaño y la fecha +y hora de modificación. +.PP +En modo breve se muestran solo los nombres de archivo usando entre 1 y 9 +columnas. Esto permite ver muchas más entradas que en los otros modos. +.PP +El modo largo es similar a la salida de la orden +.BR "ls \-l" . +Este modo requiere todo el ancho de la pantalla. +.PP +Si se elige el modo definido por el usuario, hay que especificar el +formato de presentación. Un formato personalizado tiene que comenzar con +la indicación de tamaño de panel, que puede ser "half" (medio) o "full" +(completo) para tener respectivamente dos paneles de media pantalla o +un único panel a pantalla completa. Tras el tamaño se puede colocar el +número "2" para dividir el panel en dos columnas. +.PP +A continuación van los campos deseados con especificación opcional del +tamaño. Los campos que se pueden emplear son: +.TP +.B name +nombre del archivo. +.TP +.B size +tamaño del archivo. +.TP +.B bsize +forma alternativa para +.BR size . +Muestra el tamaño de los archivos y SUB\-DIR o DIR\-ANT para directorios. +.TP +.B type +carácter de tipo de archivo. Este carácter se asemeja a lo mostrado por +la orden +.BR "ls \-F" : +.B * +para archivos ejecutables, +.B / +para directorios, +.B @ +para enlaces, +.B = +para sockets, +.B \- +para los dispositivos en modo carácter, +.B + +para dispositivos en modo bloque, +.B | +para tuberías, +.B ~ +para enlaces simbólicos a directorios y +.B ! +para enlaces rotos (enlaces que no apuntan a nada). +.TP +.B mark +un asterisco si el archivo está marcado, o un espacio si no lo está. +.TP +.B mtime +fecha y hora de la última modificación del contenido del archivo. +.TP +.B atime +fecha y hora del último acceso al archivo. +.TP +.B ctime +fecha y hora del último cambio del archivo. +.TP +.B perm +cadena representando los permisos del archivo. +.TP +.B mode +valor en octal representando los permisos del archivo. +.TP +.B nlink +número de enlaces al archivo. +.TP +.B ngid +Identificador de Grupo, GID (numérico). +.TP +.B nuid +Identificador de Usuario, UID (numérico). +.TP +.B owner +propietario del archivo. +.TP +.B group +grupo del archivo. +.TP +.B inode +número de inodo del archivo. +.PP +Además, podemos ajustar la apariencia del panel con: +.TP +.B space +un espacio. +.TP +.B | +añadir una línea vertical. +.PP +Para fijar el tamaño de un campo basta añadir +.B : +seguido por el número de caracteres que se desee. Si tras el número +colocamos el símbolo +.B + +el tamaño indicado será el tamaño mínimo, y si hay espacio de sobra se +extenderá más el campo. +.PP +Como ejemplo, el listado +.B Completo +corresponde al formato: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +Y el listado +.B Largo +corresponde a: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +Este es un bonito formato de pantalla definido por el usuario: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +Los paneles admiten además los siguientes modos: +.TP +.B "Información" +La vista de información muestra detalles relativos al archivo seleccionado +y, si es posible, sobre el sistema de archivos usado. +.TP +.B "Árbol" +La vista en árbol es bastante parecida a la utilidad +.\"LINK2" +árbol de directorios\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +Para más información véase la sección correspondiente. +.TP +.B "Vista Rápida" +En este modo, en el panel aparece un +.\"LINK2" +visor +.\"Internal File Viewer" +reducido que muestra el contenido del archivo seleccionado. Si se activa +el panel (con el tabulador o con el ratón), se dispone de los funciones +usuales del visor. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH " Modo de Ordenación..." +Los ocho modos de ordenación son por nombre, por extensión, por hora de modificación, +por hora de acceso, por la hora de modificación de la información del inodo, por tamaño, +por inodo y desordenado. En el cuadro de diálogo del modo de ordenación podemos elegir +el modo de ordenación así como especificar si deseamos que este se realice en orden inverso +chequeando la casilla Invertir. +.PP +Por defecto, los directorios se colocan ordenados antes que los archivos. +Esto se puede cambiar en Configuración dentro del +.\"LINK2" +Menú de Opciones +.\"Options Menu" +activando la opción +.BR "Mezclar archivos y directorios" . +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Filtro..." +La utilidad filtro nos permite seleccionar con un patrón (por ejemplo +.BR "*.tar.gz" ) +los archivos a listar. Indiferentes al patrón de filtro, siempre se +muestran todos los directorios y enlaces a directorios. +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Releer" +El comando releer recarga la lista de archivos en el directorio. Esto es +útil si otros procesos han creado, borrado o modificado archivos. Si +hemos panelizado los nombres de los archivos en un panel, esto recargará +los contenidos del directorio y eliminará la información panelizada. +Véase la sección +.\"LINK2" +Búsquedas externas +.\"External panelize" +para más información. +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH " Menú de Archivo" +Midnight Commander utiliza las teclas de función +.I F1 +\- +.I F10 +como atajos de teclado para los comandos que aparecen en el menú de +Archivo. Las secuencias de escape para las Fkeys son características de +terminfo desde kf1 hasta kf10. En terminales sin soporte de teclas de +función, podemos conseguir la misma funcionalidad pulsando la tecla +.I Esc +seguido de un número entre 1 y 9 ó 0 (correspondiendo a las teclas +.I F1 +a +.I F9 +y +.I F10 +respectivamente). +.PP +El menú de Archivo recoge las siguientes opciones (con los atajos de +teclado entre paréntesis): +.PP +.B Ayuda (F1) +.PP +Invoca el visor hipertexto de ayuda interno. Dentro del +.\"LINK2" +visor de ayuda\&, +.\"Contents" +podemos usar la tecla +.I Tab +para seleccionar el siguiente enlace y la tecla +.I Intro +para seguir ese enlace. Las teclas +.I Espacio +y +.I Borrar +son usadas para mover adelante y atrás en una página de ayuda. Pulsando +.I F1 +de nuevo para obtener la lista completa de teclas válidas. +.PP +.B Menú de Usuario (F2) +.PP +Invoca el +.\"LINK2" +Menú de usuario +.\"Edit Menu File" +El menú de usuario otorga una manera fácil de tener usuarios con un menú +y añadir asimismo características extra a Midnight Commander. +.PP +.B Ver (F3, Mayús\-F3) +.PP +Visualiza el archivo seleccionado. Por defecto invoca el +.\"LINK2" +Visor de Archivos Interno +.\"Internal File Viewer" +pero si la opción "Usar visor interno" está desactivada, invoca un visor +de archivos externo especificado por la variable de entorno +.B VIEWER. +Si +.B VIEWER +no está definida se aplica la variable +.B PAGER +y si esta tampoco, se invoca al comando «view». Con Mayús\-F3, se abre +directamente el visor interno, pero sin realizar ningún tipo de formateo +o preprocesamiento del archivo. +.P +Véanse los +.\"LINK2" +parámetros para el visor externo +.\"Parameters for external editor or viewer" +para saber cómo proporcionar opciones adicionales en línea de órdenes +para visores externos. +.PP +.B Ejecutar y Ver (Alt\-!) +.PP +El comando con los argumentos indicados se ejecuta, y la salida se +muestra usando el visor de archivos interno. Como argumento se ofrece, +por defecto, el nombre seleccionado en el panel. +.PP +.B Editar (F4) +.PP +Invoca el editor +.BR vi , +u otro especificado en la variable de entorno +.BR EDITOR , +o el +.\"LINK2" +Editor de Archivos Interno +.\"Internal File Editor" +si la opción +.I use_internal_edit +está activada. +.P +Véanse los +.\"LINK2" +parámetros para el editor externo +.\"Parameters for external editor or viewer" +para saber cómo proporcionar opciones adicionales en línea de órdenes +para ediotres externos. +.PP +.B Copiar (F5) +.PP +Sobreimpresiona una ventana de entrada con destino por defecto al directorio del +panel no seleccionado y copia el archivo actualmente seleccionado (o +los archivos marcados, si hay al menos uno marcado) al directorio especificado +por el usuario en la ventana. Space for destination file may be preallocated +relative to preallocate_space configure option. Durante este proceso, podemos +pulsar +.IR Ctrl\-c " o " Esc +para anular la operación. Para más detalles sobre la máscara de origen +(que será normalmente * o ^\\(.*\\)$ dependiendo +de la selección de Uso de los patrones del shell) y los posibles comodines en destino +véase +.\"LINK2" +Máscara copiar/renombrar\&. +.\"Mask Copy/Rename" +.PP +En algunos sistemas, es posible hacer la copia en segundo plano pulsando en el botón +de segundo plano con el ratón (o pulsando +.I Alt\-b +en el cuadro de diálogo). Los +.\"LINK2" +Trabajos en Segundo Plano +.\"Background jobs" +son utilizados para controlar los procesos en segundo plano. +.PP +.B Crear Enlace (Ctrl\-x l) +.PP +Crea un enlace al archivo actual. +.PP +.B Crear Enlace Simbólico (Ctrl\-x s) +.PP +Crea un enlace simbólico al archivo actual. Un enlace es como una copia +del archivo, salvo que el original y el destino representan un único +archivo físico, los mismos datos reales. En consecuencia, si editamos +cualquiera de los archivos, los cambios que realicemos aparecerán en +todos los archivos. Reciben también el nombre de alias o accesos +directos. +.PP +Un enlace aparece como un archivo real. Después de crearlo, no hay modo +de decir cuál es el original y cuál el enlace. Si borramos uno de ellos +el otro aún seguirá intacto. Es muy difícil advertir que los archivos +representan la misma imagen. Usaremos estos enlaces cuando no +necesitemos saberlo. +.PP +Un enlace simbólico es, en cambio, solo una referencia al nombre del +archivo original. Si se borra el archivo original, el enlace simbólico +queda sin utilidad. Es bastante fácil advertir que los archivos +representan la misma imagen. Midnight Commander muestra un símbolo "@" +delante del nombre del archivo si es un enlace simbólico a alguna parte +(excepto a un directorio, caso en que muestra una tilde (~)). El archivo +original al cual apunta el enlace se muestra en la línea de estado si la +opción +.I Mostrar Mini\-estado +está habilitada. Usaremos enlaces simbólicos cuando queramos evitar la +confusión que pueden causar los enlaces físicos. +.PP +.B Renombrar/Mover (F6) +.PP +Presenta un diálogo de entrada proponiendo como directorio de destino el +directorio del panel no activo, y mueve allí, o bien los archivos marcados +o en su defecto el archivo seleccionado. El usuario puede introducir en +el diálogo un destino diferente. Durante el proceso, se puede pulsar +.IR Ctrl\-c " o " Esc +para abortar la operación. Para más detalles, véase más arriba la +operación Copiar, dado que la mayoría de los aspectos son similares. +.PP +En algunos sistemas, es posible hacer la copia en segundo plano pulsando +con el ratón en el susodicho botón de segundo plano (o pulsando +.I Alt\-o +en el cuadro de diálogo). Con +.\"LINK2" +Procesos en 2º plano +.\"Background jobs" +se puede controlar estas tareas. +.PP +.B Crear Directorio (F7) +.PP +Presenta un diálogo de entrada y crea el directorio especificado. +.PP +.B Borrar (F8) +.PP +Borra, o bien los archivos marcados o en su defecto el archivo +seleccionado en el panel activo. Durante el proceso, se puede pulsar +.IR Ctrl\-c " o " Esc +para abortar la operación. +.PP +.B Cambiar Directorio (Alt\-c) +Usaremos el comando +.\"LINK2" +Cambiar de directorio +.\"Quick cd" +si tenemos llena la línea de órdenes y queremos hacer un cd a algún lugar. +.PP +.B Seleccionar Grupo (+) +.PP +Se utiliza para seleccionar (marcar) un grupo de archivos. Midnight Commander +ofrecerá distintas opciones. Indicando +.I Solo archivos +los directorios no se seleccionan. Con los +.I Caracteres Comodín +habilitados, se pueden introducir expresiones regulares del tipo empleado en +los patrones de nombres de la shell (poniendo * para cero o más caracteres y ? +para uno o más caracteres). Si los +.I Caracteres Comodín +están deshabilitados, entonces la selección de archivos se realiza con expresiones +regulares normales. Véase la página de manual de +.BR "ed (1)" . +Finalmente, si no se activa +.I Distinguir May/min +la selección se hará sin distinguir caracteres en mayúsculas o minúsculas. +.PP +.B De\-seleccionar Grupo (\\\\) +.PP +Utilizado para deseleccionar un grupo de archivos. Es la operación antagonista al comando +.IR "Selecciona grupo" . +.PP +.B Salir (F10, Mayús\-F10) +.PP +Finaliza Midnight Commander. Mayús\-F10 es usado cuando queremos +salir y estamos utilizando la envoltura del shell. Mayús\-F10 no nos llevará +al último directorio visitado con Midnight Commander, en vez de eso +nos llevará al directorio donde fue invocado Midnight Commander. +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Cambiar de directorio" +Este comando es útil si tenemos completa la línea de órdenes y +queremos hacer un +.\"LINK2" +cd +.\"The cd internal command" +a algún lugar sin tener que cortar y pegar sobre la línea. Este comando +sobreimpresiona una pequeña ventana, donde introducimos todo aquello que +es válido como argumento del comando +.B cd +en la línea de órdenes y después pulsamos intro. Este comando caracteriza +todas las cualidades incluidas en el +.\"LINK2" +comando cd interno\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Menú de Utilidades" +.\"LINK2" +Árbol de directorios +.\"Directory Tree" +muestra una figura con estructura de árbol con los directorios. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Buscar archivos +.\"Find File" +permite buscar un archivo específico. El comando "Intercambiar paneles" +intercambia los contenidos de los dos paneles de directorios. +.PP +El comando "Activa/desactiva paneles" muestra la salida del último +comando del shell. Esto funciona solo en xterm y en una consola Linux y +FreeBSD. +.PP +El comando Compara directorios (Ctrl\-x d) compara los paneles de directorio +uno con el otro. Podemos usar el comando Copiar (F5) para hacer ambos +paneles idénticos. Hay tres métodos de comparación. El método rápido +compara solo el tamaño de archivo y la fecha. El método completo realiza +una comparación completa octeto a octeto. El método completo no está disponible si +la máquina no soporta la llamada de sistema mmap(2). El método de comparación +de solo tamaño solo compara los tamaños de archivo y no chequea los +contenidos o las fechas, solo chequea los tamaños de los archivos. +.PP +El comando Histórico de comandos muestra una lista +de los comandos escritos. El comando seleccionado es copiado a la línea de órdenes. +El histórico de comandos puede ser accedido también tecleando Alt\-p ó Alt\-n. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Favoritos (Ctrl\-\\) +.\"Hotlist" +permite acceder con facilidad a directorios y sitios utilizados con frecuencia. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Búsquedas Externas +.\"External panelize" +nos permite ejecutar un programa externo, y llevar la salida de ese +programa al panel actual. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Editar el archivo de extensiones +.\"Edit Extension File" +nos permite especificar los programas a ejecutar para intentar +ejecutar, ver, editar y realizar un montón de cosas sobre archivos +con ciertas extensiones (terminaciones de archivo). Por ejemplo, asociar la extensión +de los archivos de audio de SUN (.au) con el programa reproductor adecuado. +.\"LINK2" +Editar archivo de menú +.\"Edit Menu File" +se puede utilizar para editar el menú de usuario (el que aparece al +pulsar F2). +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Árbol de Directorios" +El comando Árbol de directorios muestra una figura con la estructura de los directorios. +Podemos seleccionar un directorio de la figura y Midnight Commander cambiará +a ese directorio. +.PP +Hay dos modos de invocar el árbol. El comando de árbol de directorios +está disponible desde el menú Utilidades. El otro modo es seleccionar la vista en árbol +desde el menú Izquierdo o Derecho. +.PP +Para evitar largos retardos Midnight Commander crea la figura de árbol +escaneando solamente un pequeño subconjunto de todos los directorios. Si +el directorio que queremos ver no está, nos moveremos hasta su directorio padre +y pulsaremos Ctrl\-r (o F2). +.PP +Podemos utilizar las siguientes teclas: +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Teclas de Movimiento General +.\"General Movement Keys" +válidas. +.PP +.B Intro. +En el árbol de directorios, sale del árbol de directorios y cambia al +directorio en el panel actual. En la vista de árbol, cambia a este directorio +en el otro panel y permanece en el modo de vista Árbol en el panel actual. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-r, F2 (Releer). +Relee este directorio. Usaremos este comando cuando el árbol de directorios esté anticuado: +hay directorios perdidos o muestra algunos directorios que no existen ya. +.PP +.B F3 (Olvidar). +Borra ese directorio de la figura del árbol. Usaremos esto para eliminar +desorden de la figura. Si queremos que el directorio vuelva a la figura del árbol +pulsaremos F2 en su directorio padre. +.PP +.B F4 (Estático/Dinámico, Dinam/Estát). +Intercambia entre el modo de navegación dinámico (predefinido) y el modo estático. +.PP +En el modo de navegación estático podemos usar las teclas del cursor Arriba y Abajo +para seleccionar un directorio. Todos los directorios conocidos serán mostrados. +.PP +En el modo de navegación dinámico podemos usar las teclas del cursor Arriba y Abajo +para seleccionar el directorio hermano, la tecla Izquierda para situarnos en el directorio +padre, y la tecla Derecha para situarnos en el directorio hijo. Solo los directorios +padre, hijo y hermano son mostrados, el resto son dejados fuera. La figura de árbol cambia +dinámicamente conforme nos desplazamos sobre ella. +.PP +.B F5 (Copiar). +Copia el directorio. +.PP +.B F6 (Renombrar/Mover, RenMov). +Mueve el directorio. +.PP +.B F7 (Mkdir). +Crea un nuevo directorio por debajo del directorio actual. El directorio creado +será así el hijo del directorio del cual depende jerárquicamente (Padre). +.PP +.B F8 (Eliminar). +Elimina este directorio del sistema de archivos. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-s, Alt\-s. +Busca el siguiente directorio coincidente con la cadena de búsqueda. Si no hay +tal directorio esas teclas moverán una línea abajo. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-h, Borrar. +Borra el último carácter de la cadena de búsqueda. +.PP +.B Cualquier otro carácter. +Añade el carácter a la cadena de búsqueda y se desplaza al siguiente directorio +que comienza con esos caracteres. En la vista de árbol debemos primero +activar el modo de búsqueda pulsando +.IR Ctrl\-s . +La cadena de búsqueda se muestra en la línea de estado. +.PP +Las siguientes acciones están disponibles solo en el árbol de directorios. No +son funcionales en la vista de árbol. +.PP +.B F1 (Ayuda). +Invoca el visor de ayuda y muestra esta sección. +.PP +.B Esc, F10. +Sale del árbol de directorios. No cambia el directorio. +.PP +El ratón es soportado. Un +.I doble click +se comporta como pulsar +.IR Intro . +Véase también la sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +soporte de ratón\&. +.\"Mouse Support" +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Buscar Archivos" +La utilidad para Buscar Archivos primero pregunta por el directorio de inicio +y el nombre de archivo a buscar. Pulsando el botón Árbol podemos seleccionar +el directorio inicial en el +.\"LINK2" +Árbol de directorios\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +.PP +El campo de contenidos puede aceptar expresiones regulares similares a egrep(1). En +ese caso podremos proteger caracteres con significado especial para egrep anteponiendo «\\», +p.ej. si buscamos «strcmp (» tendremos que introducir «strcmp \\(". +.PP +Con la opción «Palabras completas» se puede limitar la búsqueda a archivos donde +la parte coincidente forme una palabra completa. Eso se corresponde con la función +de la opción «\-w» de grep. +.PP +Podemos iniciar la búsqueda pulsando el botón Aceptar. +Durante el proceso de búsqueda podemos detenerla desde el botón Terminar. +.PP +Podemos navegar por la lista de archivos con las teclas del cursor Arriba y Abajo. El botón Chdir +cambiará al directorio del archivo actualmente seleccionado. El botón "Otra vez" preguntará los parámetros para una nueva +búsqueda. El botón Terminar finaliza la operación de búsqueda. El botón Panelizar +colocará los archivos encontrados en el panel actual y así +podremos realizar más operaciones con ellos (ver, copiar, mover, +borrar y demás). Después de panelizar podemos pulsar Ctrl\-r para regresar al listado +normal de archivos. +.PP +Es posible tener una lista de directorios que el comando Buscar Archivo +debería saltar durante la búsqueda (por ejemplo, podemos querer +evitar búsquedas en un CDROM o en un directorio NFS que está montado a través de un +enlace lento). +.PP +Los directorios a ser omitidos deberían ser enumerados en la variable +.B ignore_dirs +en la sección +.B FindFile +de nuestro archivo +.IR ~/.config/mc/ini . +.PP +Los componentes del directorio deberían ser separados por dos puntos, como en +el ejemplo que sigue: +.PP +.nf +[FindFile] +ignore_dirs=/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +Debemos valorar la utilización de +.\"LINK2" +Búsquedas externas +.\"External panelize" +en ciertas situaciones. La utilidad Buscar archivos es solo para consultas +simples, pero con Búsquedas externas se pueden hacer exploraciones tan +complejas como queramos. +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " Búsquedas Externas" +Búsquedas externas nos permite ejecutar un programa externo, y +tomar la salida de ese programa como contenido del panel actual. +.PP +Por ejemplo, si queremos manipular en uno de los paneles todos los enlaces +simbólicos del directorio actual, podemos usar búsquedas externas para +ejecutar el siguiente comando: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +.PP +Hasta la finalización del comando, el contenido del directorio del panel no +será el listado de directorios del directorio actual, pero sí todos los archivos +que son enlaces simbólicos. +.PP +Si queremos panelizar todos los archivos que hemos bajado de nuestro servidor ftp, +podemos usar el comando awk para extraer el nombre del archivo +de los archivos de registro (log) de la transferencia: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +Tal vez podríamos necesitar guardar los comandos utilizados frecuentemente bajo un nombre descriptivo, +de manera que podamos llamarlos rápidamente. Haremos esto tecleando el comando +en la línea de entrada y pulsando el botón "Añadir nuevo". Entonces introduciremos un nombre +bajo el cual queremos que el comando sea guardado. La próxima vez, bastará elegir +ese comando de la lista y no habrá que escribirlo de nuevo. +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Favoritos" +Muestra una lista de sitios y directorios guardados y abre en el panel +el lugar seleccionado. Desde el cuadro de diálogo podemos también crear y +eliminar entradas. Para añadir se puede igualmente utilizar Añadir Actual +(Ctrl\-x h), que añade el directorio actual (no el seleccionado) a la lista +de favoritos. Se pide al usuario una etiqueta para identificar la entrada. +.PP +Esto hace más rápido el posicionamiento en los directorios usados +frecuentemente. Deberíamos considerar también el uso de la variable +CDPATH tal y como se describe en +.\"LINK2" +comando cd interno\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Editar el Archivo de Extensiones" +Abre el archivo +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +en nuestro editor. +If this file does not exist and you are not root, it will be copied from +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If you are root, you can choose the file to edit: user's +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +or system\-wide +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +The format of this file is described in detail in it. +.\"NODE " Background jobs" +.SH " Trabajos en Segundo Plano" +Nos permite controlar el estado de cualquier proceso de Midnight Commander +en segundo plano (solo las operaciones de copiar y mover archivos pueden realizarse +en segundo plano). Podemos parar, reiniciar y eliminar procesos en segundo plano desde +aquí. +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Edición del Archivo de Menú" +El menú de usuario es un menú de acciones útiles que puede ser personalizado +por el usuario. Cuando accedemos al menú de usuario se utiliza, si existe, +el archivo .mc.menu del directorio actual, pero solo si es propiedad del +usuario o del superusuario y no es modificable por todos. +Si no se encuentra allí el archivo, se intenta de la misma manera con ~/.config/mc/menu, +y si no, mc utiliza el menú por defecto para todo el sistema +%pkgdatadir%/mc.menu. +.PP +El formato del menú de archivo es muy simple. Todas las líneas, salvo +las que empiezan con espacio o tabulación, son consideradas entradas +para el menú (para posibilitar su uso como atajo de teclado, el primer +carácter sí deberá ser una letra). Las líneas que comienzan con una +tabulación o espacio son los comandos que serán ejecutados cuando la +entrada es seleccionada. +.PP +Cuando se selecciona una opción todas las líneas de comandos de esa +opción se copian en un archivo temporal en el directorio temporal +(normalmente /usr/tmp), y se ejecuta ese archivo. Esto permite al +usuario utilizar en los menús construcciones normales de la shell. +También tiene lugar una sustitución simple de macros antes de ejecutar +el código del menú. Para mayor información, ver +.\"LINK2" +Sustitución de macro\&. +.\"Macro Substitution" +.PP +He aquí un ejemplo de archivo mc.menu: +.PP +.nf +A Vuelca el contenido del archivo seleccionado + od \-c %f + +B Edita un informe de errores y lo envía al superusuario + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Error Midnight Commander" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Lee al correo + emacs \-f rmail + +N Lee las noticias de Usenet + emacs \-f gnus + +H Realiza una llamada al navegador hypertexto info + info + +J Copia recursivamente el directorio actual al otro panel + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + +K Realiza una versión del directorio actual + echo \-n "Nombre del archivo de distribución: " + read tar + ln \-s %d `dirname %d`/$tar + cd .. + tar cvhf ${tar}.tar $tar + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X Extrae los contenidos de un archivo tar comprimido + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Condiciones por Defecto +.PP +Cada entrada del menú puede ir precedida por una condición. La condición debe +comenzar desde la primera columna con un carácter '='. Si la condición es +verdadera, la entrada del menú será la entrada por defecto. +.PP +.nf +Sintaxis condicional: = <sub\-cond> + o: = <sub\-cond> | <sub\-cond> ... + o: = <sub\-cond> & <sub\-cond> ... + +Sub\-condición es una de las siguientes: + + f <patrón> ¿el archivo actual encaja con el patrón? + F <patrón> ¿otro archivo encaja con el patrón? + d <patrón> ¿el directorio actual encaja con el patrón? + D <patrón> ¿otro directorio encaja con el patrón? + t <tipo> ¿archivo actual es de tipo <tipo>? + T <tipo> ¿otro archivo es de tipo <tipo>? + ! <sub\-cond> niega el resultado de la sub\-condición +.fi +.PP +Patrón es un patrón normal del shell o una expresión regular, de acuerdo +con la opción de patrones del shell. Podemos cambiar el valor global de +la opción de los patrones del shell escribiendo "shell_patterns=x" en la primera línea +del archivo de menú (donde "x" es 0 ó 1). +.PP +Tipo es uno o más de los siguientes caracteres: +.PP +.nf + n no directorio + r archivo regular + d directorio + l enlace + c dispositivo tipo carácter + b dispositivo tipo bloque + f tubería (fifo) + s socket + x ejecutable + t marcado (tagged) +.fi +.PP +Por ejemplo 'rlf' significa archivo regular, enlace o cola. El tipo 't' +es un poco especial porque actúa sobre el panel en vez de sobre +un archivo. La condición '=t t' es verdadera si existen archivos marcados en el +panel actual y falsa si no los hay. +.PP +Si la condición comienza con '=?' en vez de '=' se mostrará un trazado de +depuración mientras el valor de la condición es calculado. +.PP +Las condiciones son calculadas de izquierda a derecha. Esto significa que +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +es calculado como +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +He aquí un ejemplo de uso de condiciones: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L Lista el contenido de un archivo tar comprimido + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Condiciones aditivas +.PP +Si la condición comienza con '+' (o '+?') en lugar de '=' (o '=?') es +una condición aditiva. Si la condición es verdadera la entrada de menú será +incluida en el menú. Sin embargo, si la condición es falsa, la entrada de menú no será +incluida en el menú. +.PP +Podemos combinar condiciones por defecto y aditivas comenzando la condición con +\&'+=' o '=+' (o '+=?' o '=+?' si queremos depurar). Si nosotros queremos +condiciones diferentes, una para añadir y otra por +defecto, una entrada de menú con dos líneas de condición, una +comenzando con '+' y otra con '='. +.PP +Los comentarios empiezan con '#'. Las líneas adicionales de comentarios deben empezar +con '#', espacio o tabulación. +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH " Menú de Opciones" +Midnight Commander tiene opciones que pueden ser activadas o desactivadas +a través de una serie de diálogos a los que se accede desde este menú. Una +opción está activada cuando tiene delante un asterisco o una "x". +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Configuración +.\"Configuration" +se pueden cambiar la mayoría de opciones de Midnight Commander. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Presentación +.\"Layout" +está un grupo de opciones que determinan la apariencia de mc en la +pantalla. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Paneles +.\"Panel options" +se pueden configurar los paneles del gestor de archivos. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Confirmación +.\"Confirmation" +podemos especificar qué acciones requieren una confirmación del usuario +antes de ser realizadas. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Aspecto +.\"Appearance" +podemos seleccionar un «skin» o apariencia para el programa. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Juego de Caracteres +.\"Display bits" +podemos seleccionar qué caracteres es capaz de mostrar nuestro terminal. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Aprender Teclas +.\"Learn keys" +podemos verificar teclas que no funcionan en algunos terminales y +solucionarlo. +.PP +En +.\"LINK2" +Sistema de Archivos Virtual (VFS) +.\"Virtual FS" +podemos especificar algunas opciones relacionadas con el VFS (Sistema +de Archivos Virtual). +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Guardar Configuración +.\"Save Setup" +guarda los valores actuales de los menús Izquierdo, Derecho y Opciones. +También se guardan algunos otros valores. +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Configuración" +Este diálogo presenta una serie de opciones divididas en tres grupos: +«Operaciones con Archivos», «Tecla de Escape», «Pausa Después de +Ejecutar» y «Otras Opciones». +.PP +.B Operaciones con Archivos +.PP +.I Operación Detallada. +Controla la visualización de detalles durante las operaciones de +Copiar, Mover y Borrar (i.e., muestra un cuadro de diálogo para cada +operación). Si tenemos un terminal lento, podríamos querer desactivar +la operación detallada. Se desactiva automáticamente si la velocidad de +nuestro terminal es menor de 9600 bps. +.PP +.I Calcular Totales. +Hace que Midnight Commander calcule el total de bytes y el número de +archivos antes de iniciar operaciones de Copiar, Mover y Borrar. Esto +proporciona una barra de progreso más precisa a costa de cierta +velocidad. Esta opción no tiene efecto si la +.I Operación Detallada +no está seleccionada. +.PP +.I Barra de Progreso Clásica. +Con esta opción la barra de progreso para las operaciones de Copiar, +Mover o Borrar avanza de izquierda a derecha. Si se deshabilita, el +sentido de crecimiento refleja el sentido de la copia: del panel +izquierdo al derecho o viceversa. Por defecto, está activa. +.PP +.I Proponer Nombre Mkdir. +Al pulsar F7 para crear un directorio nuevo, la línea de entrada +del diálogo incorpora como sugerencia el nombre del archivo o +directorio actual en el panbel activo. Está deshabilitado por defecto. +.PP +.I Reservar Espacio. +Antes de comenzar una copia reserva espacio para el archivo destino +completo. Por defecto está desactivado. +.PP +.B Tecla de Escape. +.PP +Midnight Commander utiliza la tecla ESC como prefijo para ciertas teclas. +Por ello hay que pulsar ESC dos veces para abandonar los diálogos. Se +puede configurar para que esto se pueda realizar con una única pulsación. +.I Pulsación Única +Por defecto, está deshabilitada. Permite que ESC actúe como prefijo durante +un cierto tiempo (véase abajo la opción +.IR Tiempo ) +al cabo del cual se interpreta ESC para cancelar (ESC ESC). +.PP +.I Tiempo. +Permite configurar el intervalo (en microsegundos) para una pulsación +de ESC autónoma. Por defecto es de un segundo (1000000 microsegundos). +Este intervalo también se puede fijar a través de la variable de entorno +KEYBOARD_KEY_TIMEOUT_US (también en microsegundos) que tiene prioridad +sobre el valor de esta opción Tiempo. +.PP +.B Pausa Después de Ejecutar. +.PP +Después de ejecutar comandos, Midnight Commander puede realizar una pausa, +y darnos tiempo a examinar la salida del comando. Hay tres posibles +valores para esta variable: +.PP +.IR Nunca . +Significa que no queremos ver la salida de nuestros comandos. Si estamos +utilizando la consola Linux o FreeBSD o un xterm, podremos ver la salida +del comando pulsando +.IR Ctrl\-o . +.PP +.IR Solo en Terminales Tontas . +Obtendremos el mensaje de pausa solo en terminales que no sean capaces +de mostrar la salida del último comando ejecutado (en realidad, cualquier +terminal que no sea un xterm o una consola de Linux). +.PP +.IR Siempre . +El programa realizará siempre una pausa después de ejecutar comandos. +.PP +.B Otras Opciones +.PP +.I Usar Editor Interno. +Emplear el editor de archivos interno. Si está desactivada, se editarán +los archivos con el editor especificado por la variable de entorno +.B EDITOR +y si no se especifica ninguno, se usará +.B vi. +Véase la sección sobre el +.\"LINK2" +editor de archivos interno\&. +.\"Internal File Editor" +.PP +.I Usar Visor Interno. +Emplear el visor de archivos interno. Si la opción está desactivada, +el paginador especificado en la variable de entorno +.B PAGER +será el utilizado. +Si no se especifica ninguno, se usará el comando +.B view. +Véase la sección sobre el +.\"LINK2" +visor de archivos interno\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.PP +.I Pedir Nombre al Editar Nuevos. +Si está activada, se pedirá al usuario el nombre de archivo antes de abrir +un archivo nuevo en el editor. +.PP +.I Auto Menús. +Si está activada, el menú de usuario aparece automáticamente al arrancar. +Útil en menús construidos para personas sin conocimientos de Unix. +.PP +.I Menús Desplegables. +Mostrar el contenido de los menús desplegables inmediatamente al presionar +F9. Si está desactivada solo la barra de títulos de los menús está +visible, y será necesario abrir cada menú con las flechas de movimiento +o con las teclas de acceso rápido. +.I Completar: Mostrar Todos. +Por defecto, al completar nombres en situaciones de ambigüedad, Midnight +Commander completa todo lo posible al pulsar +.B Alt\-Tab +y produce un pitido; al intentarlo por segunda vez se muestra una lista +con las posibilidades que han dado lugar a la ambigüedad. Con esta opción, +la lista aparece directamente tras pulsar +.B Alt\-Tab +por primera vez. +.PP +.I Patrones «shell». +Por defecto, las funciones Selección, Deselección y Filtro emplean +expresiones regulares al estilo del shell. Para realizar esto se +realizan las siguientes conversiones: '*' se cambia por '.*' (cero o +más caracteres); '?' por '.' (exactamente un carácter) y '.' por un +punto literal. Si la opción está desactivada, entonces las expresiones +regulares son las descritas en ed(1). +.PP +.I Completar: Mostrar Todos. +Por defecto Midnight Commander presenta todas las posibilidades de +.\"LINK2" +terminación +.\"Completion" +si la compleción es ambigua solo al pulsar +.B Alt\-Tab +por segunda vez. La primera, solo completa todo lo posible y emite +un pitido en caso de ambigüedad. Activando esta opción se muestran +todas las posibilidades directamente con la primera pulsación de +.BR Alt\-Tab . +.PP +.I Hélice de actividad. +Mostrar un guión rotatorio en la esquina superior derecha a modo de +indicador de progreso. +.PP +.I Cd Sigue los Enlaces. +Esta opción, si está seleccionada, hace que Midnight Commander siga la +secuencia de directorios lógica al cambiar el directorio actual, tanto en +el panel como usando el comando cd. Este es el comportamiento por defecto +de la shell bash. Sin esto, Midnight Commander sigue la estructura real +de directorios, y cd .. nos trasladará al padre real del directorio +actual aunque hayamos entrado en ese directorio a través de un enlace, +y no al directorio donde se encontraba el enlace. +.PP +.I Precauciones de Borrado. +Dificulta el borrado accidental de archivos. La opción por defecto en el +diálogo de confirmación de borrado se cambia a "No". Por defecto, esta +opción está desactivada. +.PP +.I Auto\-Guarda Configuración. +Si esta opción está activada, cuando salimos de Midnight Commander las +opciones configurables de Midnight Commander se guardan en el archivo +.IR ~/.config/mc/ini . +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Presentación" +La ventana de presentación nos da la posibilidad de cambiar la +presentación general de la pantalla. Podemos configurar si son visibles +la barra de menú, la línea de órdenes, la línea de sugerencias o la +barra de teclas de Función. En la consola Linux o FreeBSD podemos +especificar cuántas líneas se muestran en la ventana de salida. +.PP +El resto del área de pantalla se utiliza para los dos paneles de +directorio. Podemos elegir si disponemos los paneles vertical u +horizontalmente. La división puede ser simétrica o bien podemos indicar +una división asimétrica. +.PP +Por defecto, todos los contenidos de los paneles se muestran en el mismo +color, pero se puede indicar que +.I permisos +y +.I tipos de archivos +se resalten empleando +.\"LINK2" +colores +.\"Colors" +diferentes. Si se activa el resaltado de permisos, las partes de los +campos de +.I permisos +del +.\"LINK2" +Modo de Listado +.\"Listing Format..." +aplicables al usuario actual de Midnight Commander serán resaltados +usando el color indicado por medio de la palabra clave +.I selected. +Si se activa el resaltado de tipos de archivos, los nombres aparecerán +coloreados según las reglas almacenadas en el archivo +.IR %pkgdatadir%/filehighlight.ini . +Para más información, véase la +sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +Resaltado de nombres\&. +.\"Filenames Highlight" + +.PP +Si se está ejecutando en X Window dentro de un emulador de terminal, +Midnight Commander toma control del titulo de la ventana mostrando allí +el nombre del directorio actual. El título se actualiza cuando sea preciso. +Podemos desactivar la opción de +.I Titular las ventanas Xterm +si el emulador de terminal empleado falla y no se muestran o actualizan +correctamente estos textos. +.\"NODE " Panel options" +.SH " Paneles" +.B Opciones principales +.PP +.I Mostrar Mini\-estado +Si está activa se muestra en la parte inferior de cada panel una línea +con información sobre el archivo seleccionado en cada momento. Por defecto, +está activado. +.PP +.I Tamaños en unidades SI. +Mostrar tamaños de archivos en bytes con prefijos según el SI, Sistema +Internacional de Unidades, o sea, en base de 10. Por defecto, está +desactivada: los tamaños se calculan con prefijos según el IEC, empleando +base de 2. Véase al respecto ISO/IEC 80000-13. +.PP +.I Mezclar Archivos y Directorios. +Cuando esta opción está habilitada, todos los archivos y directorios +se muestran mezclados. Por defecto esta opción está desactivada: los directorios +(y enlaces a directorios) aparecen al principio de la lista, y el resto +de archivos a continuación. +.PP +.I Mostrar Archivos de Respaldo. +Mostrar los archivos terminados en tilde '~'. Si se desactiva no se muestran +(como la opción \-B de ls de GNU). Por defecto, está activo. +.PP +.I Mostrar Archivos Ocultos. +Mostrar los archivos que comiencen con un punto (como ls \-a). Por defecto, +está desactivado. +.PP +.I Recarga Rápida de Directorios. +Hace que Midnight Commander emplee una pequeña trampa al determinar +si los contenidos del directorio han cambiado. El truco consiste en +recargar el directorio solo si el inodo del directorio ha cambiado. Las +recargas se producen si se crean o borran archivos, pero si lo que cambia +es solo el inodo de un archivo del directorio (cambios en el tamaño, +permisos, propietario, etc.) la pantalla no se actualiza. En esos casos, +si tenemos la opción activada, será preciso forzar la recarga de forma +manual (con Ctrl\-r). Por defecto, está desactivado. +.PP +.I Marcar y Avanzar. +Hacer avanzar la barra de selección tras marcar un archivo (con la tecla +.BR insertar ). +Por defecto, está activo. +.PP +.I Invertir Solo Archivos. +Permite invertir la selección solo sobre los archivos. Por defecto, está activo. +Al invertir la selección se aplica solo a archivos, quedando los directorios +como estaban. Si se desactiva, todos los elementos no seleccionados se seleccionan +y viceversa, sean archivos o directorios. +.PP +.I Intercambio de Paneles Simple. +Si los dos paneles contienen listados de directorios, el intercambio simple +supone que ambos paneles intercambian sus posiciones: izquierda por derecha. +Si se desactiva, que es el estado por defecto, los contenidos de los paneles +se intercambian pero se mantienen las opciones de formato y orden de archivos. +.PP +.I Auto Guardar Configuración +Por defecto está desactivado. Si se activa, la configuración de los paneles +se guardará en +.I ~/.config/mc/panels.ini +al salir del programa. +.PP +.B Navegación +.PP +.I Navegación al Estilo Lynx. +Cuando la selección es un directorio y la línea de órdenes está vacía +permite cambiar a él con las flechas de movimiento. Esta opción está +inactiva por defecto. +.PP +.I Avance de Página. +Por defecto, cuando el cursor llega al final o al comienzo del panel +este se desplaza el equivalente a media pantalla. Al desactivarlo el +avance o retroceso se hace línea a línea. +.PP +.I Avance de Página con Ratón. +Controla si el avance en los paneles con la rueda del ratón se hace +por páginas o por líneas. +.PP +.B Resaltar +.PP +Permite que los +.I permisos +y +.I tipos de archivos +queden resaltados con +.\"LINK2" +colores +.\"Colors" +distintivos. Si se habilita el resaltado de permisos, los +.\"LINK2" +campos del listado +.\"Listing Format..." +.I perm +y +.I mode +aplicables al usuario que ejecuta MC se mostrarán destacados en el +color indicado con la clave +.IR selected . +Si se habilita el resaltado de tipo de archivo, los nombres de archivo +se mostrarán coloreados según las reglas contenidas en el archivo de +configuración +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/filehighlight.ini . +Véase +.\"LINK2" +Resaltado de nombres\&. +.\"Filenames Highlight" +.PP +.B Búsqueda rápida +.PP +Permite configurar si la +.\"LINK2" +Búsqueda rápida +.\"Quick search" +distingue o no mayúsculas en los nombres: ignorar, distinguir o aplicar el mismo +criterio elegido en el orden de los nombres en el panel. +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Confirmación" +En este diálogo configuramos las opciones de confirmación de eliminación de archivos, +sobreescritura, ejecución pulsando intro y salir del programa. +.\"NODE " Appearance" +.SH " Aspecto" +Aquí se puede elegir un «skin» o apariencia para usar. +.PP +Véase la sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +Skins +.\"Skins" +para conocer los detalles de los archivos de definición de estos «skins». +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Juego de caracteres" +Esta opción permite configurar el conjunto de caracteres visibles en la +pantalla. Este puede ser 7\-bits si nuestro terminal/curses soporta +solo siete bits de salida, alguna de las tablas del estándar ISO\-8859 y +diversas codificaciones comunes de PC con ocho bits por carácter, o UTF\-8 +para Unicode. +.PP +Para soportar teclados con caracteres locales debemos marcar la opción de +.IR "Aceptar entrada de 8 bits" . +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Aprender teclas" +Este diálogo nos permite comprobar si nuestras teclas F1\-F20, Inicio, Fin, etc. funcionan adecuadamente +en nuestro terminal. A menudo fallan, dado que muchas bases de datos de terminales están mal. +.PP +Podemos movernos alrededor con la tecla Tab, con las teclas de movimiento de vi ('h' izquierda, 'j' +abajo, 'k' arriba y 'l' derecha) y después de pulsar cualquier tecla del cursor (esto +las marcará con OK), entonces podremos usar esa tecla también. +.PP +Para probarlas basta con pulsar cada una de ellas. Tan pronto como pulsamos una tecla y +esta funciona adecuadamente, la marca «✓» debería aparecer junto al nombre de la susodicha +tecla. Una vez que cada tecla queda marcada vuelve a funcionar con normalidad, p. ej. F1 la +primera vez comprobará que F1 funciona perfectamente, pero a partir de ese momento mostrará +la ayuda. Esto mismo es aplicable a las teclas del cursor. La tecla Tab debería funcionar +siempre. +.PP +Si algunas teclas no funcionan adecuadamente, entonces no veremos el OK tras el nombre de la tecla +después de haberla pulsado. Podemos entonces intentar solucionarlo. Haremos esto +pulsando el botón de esa tecla (con el ratón o usando +.IR Tab " e " Intro ). +Entonces un mensaje rojo aparecerá y se nos pedirá que pulsemos la tecla en cuestión. +Si deseamos abortar el proceso, bastará con pulsar +.I Esc +y esperar hasta que el mensaje +desaparezca. Si no, pulsaremos la tecla que nos pide y esperaremos hasta que +el diálogo desaparezca. +.PP +Cuando acabemos con todas las teclas, podríamos Guardar nuestras teclas +en nuestro archivo +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +dentro de la sección [terminal:TERM] (donde TERM es el +nombre de nuestro terminal actual) o descartarlas. Si todas nuestras teclas funcionan +correctamente y no debemos corregir ninguna, entonces (lógico) no se grabará. +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " Sistema de Archivos Virtual (VFS)" +Este diálogo permite ajustar opciones del +.\"LINK2" +Sistema de Archivos Virtual (VFS)\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.PP +Midnight Commander guarda en memoria o en disco información de algunos +de los sistemas de archivos virtuales con el fin de acelerar el acceso +a sus archivos. Ejemplo de esto son los listados descargados desde +servidores FTP o los archivos temporales descomprimidos creados para +acceder rápidamente a los contenidos de archivos tipo tar comprimidos. +.PP +Esas informaciones se conservan para permitirnos navegar, salir y volver a +entrar rápidamente en los correspondientes sistemas de archivos virtuales. +Al cabo de un cierto tiempo sin usarlos deben ser liberados y recuperar +los recursos utilizados. Por defecto ese tiempo es de un minuto, pero +se puede configurar por el usuario. +.PP +También podemos adelantar la liberación de los VFS desde el diálogo de +control de +.IR "Directorios virtuales (VFS)" . +.PP +El +.\"LINK2" +Sistema de Archivos FTP (FTPfs) +.\"FTP File System" +permite navegar por los directorios de servidores FTP remotos. Admite +diversas opciones. +.PP +.I Contraseña de FTP anónimo +es la contraseña a utilizar en conexiones en modo anónimo, esto es, +empleando el nombre de usuario "anonymous". Algunos sitios exigen que +esta sea una dirección de correo electrónico válida, pero tampoco es +conveniente dar nuestra dirección real a desconocidos para protegernos +de los envíos de correo masivo. +.PP +FTPfs conserva en caché los listados de los directorios consultados. +La duración de la caché es el valor indicado tras +.IR "Descartar el caché FTPfs" . +Un valor pequeño ralentiza el proceso porque cualquier pequeña operación +iría siempre acompañada de una conexión con el servidor FTP. +.PP +Se puede configurar un sistema proxy para FTP, aunque los cortafuegos +modernos son transparentes (al menos para FTP pasivo, ver más abajo) +y está opción es generalmente innecesaria. +.PP +Si la opción +.I Usar siempre proxy +no está activa, aún se puede emplear el proxy en casos concretos. Véanse +los ejemplos en la sección +.\"LINK2" +Sistema de Archivos FTP (FTPfs)\&. +.\"FTP File System" +.PP +Si la opción +.I Usar siempre proxy +está puesta, el programa asume que cualquier nombre de máquina +sin puntos es accesible directamente y también consulta el archivo +%sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy en busca de nombres de máquinas locales (o +dominios completos si el nombre empieza con un punto). En todos los +demás casos se usará siempre el proxy de FTP indicado arriba. +.PP +Se puede usar el archivo +.IR ~/.netrc , +que contiene información de usuarios y contraseñas para determinados +servidores FTP. Para conocer el formato de los archivos .netrc véase la +página de manual sobre +.BR "netrc (5)" . +.PP +.I Usar FTP pasivo +habilita el modo de tranferencia FTP pasivo (la conexión para +transferencia de datos es iniciada por la máquina cliente, no por el +servidor). Esta opción es la recomendada, y de hecho está activada +por defecto. Si se desactiva, la conexión la inicia el servidor, +y puede ser impedida por algún cortafuegos. +.PP +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Guardar Configuración" +Al arrancar Midnight Commander se carga la información de inicio del +archivo +.IR ~/.config/mc/ini . +Si este no existe, se cargará la información del +archivo de configuración genérico del sistema, +.IR %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini . +Si el archivo de configuración genérico del sistema no existe, MC utiliza +la configuración por defecto. +.PP +El comando +.I Guardar Configuración +crea el archivo +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +guardando la configuración actual de los menús +.\"LINK2" +Izquierdo, Derecho +.\"Left and Right Menus" +y +.\"LINK2" +Opciones\&. +.\"Options Menu" +.PP +Si se activa la opción +.IR "Auto\-guarda configuración" , +MC guardará siempre la configuración actual al salir. +.PP +Existen también configuraciones que no pueden ser cambiadas desde +los menús. Para cambiarlas hay que editar manualmente el archivo de +configuración. Para más información, véase la sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +Ajustes Especiales\&. +.\"Special Settings" +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Ejecutando Órdenes del Sistema Operativo" +Podemos ejecutar comandos tecleando en la línea de órdenes de Midnight +Commander, o seleccionando el programa que queremos ejecutar +en alguno de los paneles y pulsando +.IR Intro . +.PP +Si pulsamos +.I Intro + sobre un archivo que no es ejecutable, Midnight +Commander compara la extensión del archivo seleccionado con las extensiones +recogidas en el +.\"LINK2" +Archivo de Extensiones\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +Si se produce una coincidencia se ejecutará el código asociado con esa extensión. +Tendrá lugar una +.\"LINK2" +expansión +.\"Macro Substitution" +muy simple antes de ejecutar el comando. +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH " Comando cd Interno" +El comando +.I cd +es interpretado directamente por Midnight Commander, en vez de pasarlo +al interprete de comandos para su ejecución. Por ello puede que no todas +las posibilidades de expansión y sustitución de macro que hace nuestro +shell estén disponibles, pero sí algunas de ellas: +.PP +.I Sustitución de tilde. +La tilde (~) será sustituida por nuestro directorio de inicio. Si +añadimos un nombre de usuario tras la tilde, entonces será sustituido +por el directorio de entrada al sistema del usuario especificado. +.PP +Por ejemplo, ~coco sería el directorio de un supuesto usuario denominado +"coco", mientras que ~/coco es el directorio coco dentro de nuestro +propio directorio de inicio. +.PP +.I Directorio anterior. +Podemos volver al directorio donde estábamos anteriormente empleando el +nombre de directorio especial '\-' del siguiente modo: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I Directorios en CDPATH. +Si el directorio especificado al comando +.B cd +no está en el directorio actual, entonces Midnight Commander utiliza el +valor de la variable de entorno +.B CDPATH +para buscar el directorio en cualquiera de los directorios enumerados. +.PP +Por ejemplo, podríamos asignar a nuestra variable +.B CDPATH +el valor ~/src:/usr/src, lo que nos permitiría cambiar de directorio +a cualquiera de los directorios dentro de ~/src y /usr/src, desde +cualquier lugar del sistema de archivos, usando solo su nombre relativo +(por ejemplo cd linux podría llevarnos a /usr/src/linux). +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Sustitución de Macro" +Cuando se accede al +.\"LINK2" +menú de usuario\&, +.\"Edit Menu File" +o se ejecuta un +.\"LINK2" +comando dependiente de extensión\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +o se ejecuta un comando desde la línea de entrada de comandos, +se realiza una simple sustitución de macro. +.PP +Las macros son: +.PP +.I "%f" +.IP +Archivo actual. +.PP +.I "%d" +.IP +Nombre del directorio actual. +.PP +.I "%F" +.IP +Archivo actual en el panel inactivo. +.PP +.I "%D" +.IP +Directorio del panel inactivo. +.PP +.I "%t" +.IP +Archivos actualmente marcados. +.PP +.I "%T" +.IP +Archivos marcados en el panel inactivo. +.PP +.I "%u" +y +.I "%U" +.IP +Similar a las macros %t y %T, salvo que los archivos quedan desmarcados. +Solo se puede emplear esta macro una vez por cada entrada del archivo de menú +o archivo de extensiones, puesto que para la siguiente vez no quedaría ningún +archivo marcado. +.PP +.I "%s" +y +.I "%S" +.IP +Archivos seleccionados: Los archivos marcados si los hay y si no el +archivo actual. +.PP +.I "%cd" +.IP +Esta es una macro especial usada para cambiar del directorio actual +al directorio especificado frente a él. Esto se utiliza principalmente +como interfaz con el +.\"LINK2" +Sistema de Archivos Virtual\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.PP +.I "%view" +.IP +Esta macro es usada para invocar al visor interno. Puede ser utilizada +en solitario, o bien con argumentos. Si pasamos algún argumento a esta +macro, deberá ser entre paréntesis. +.IP +Los argumentos son: +.I ascii +para forzar al visor a modo ascii; +.I hex +para forzar al visor a modo hexadecimal; +.I nroff +para indicar al visor que debe interpretar las secuencias de negrita y +subrayado de nroff; +.I unformated +para indicar al visor que no interprete los comandos nroff referentes a texto +resaltado o subrayado. +.PP +.I "%%" +.IP +El carácter % +.PP +.I "%{cualquier texto}" +.IP +Pregunta sobre la sustitución. Un cuadro de entrada es mostrado y el texto dentro +de las llaves se usa como mensaje. La macro es sustituida por el texto +tecleado por el usuario. El usuario puede pulsar +.IR Esc " o " F10 +para cancelar. Esta macro no funciona aún sobre la línea de órdenes. +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " Soporte de Subshell" +El soporte del subshell es una opción de tiempo de compilación, que funciona con los +shells: bash, tcsh y zsh. +.PP +Cuando el código del subshell es activado Midnight Commander +engendrará una copia de nuestro shell (la definida en la variable +.B SHELL +y si no está definida, el que aparece en el archivo /etc/passwd) +y lo ejecuta en un pseudoterminal, en lugar de invocar un nuevo shell +cada vez que ejecutamos un comando, el comando será pasado al +subshell como si lo hubiésemos escrito. Esto además permite cambiar las +variables de entorno, usaremos las funciones del shell y los alias definidos +que serán válidos hasta salir de Midnight Commander. +.PP +Si estamos usando +.B bash +podremos especificar comandos de arranque +para el subshell en nuestro archivo ~/.local/share/mc/bashrc y +mapas de teclado especiales en el archivo ~/.local/share/mc/inputrc. +Los usuarios de +.B tcsh +podrán especificar los comandos de arranque en el archivo ~/.local/share/mc/tcshrc. +.PP +Cuando utilizamos el código del subshell, podemos suspender aplicaciones en +cualquier momento con la secuencia +.I Ctrl\-o +y volver a Midnight Commander, si interrumpimos una aplicación, no +podremos ejecutar otros comandos externos hasta que quitemos la +aplicación que hemos interrumpido. +.PP +Una característica extra añadida de uso del subshell es que el prompt +mostrado por Midnight Commander es el mismo que estamos usando en +nuestro shell. +.PP +La sección +.\"LINK2 +OPCIONES +.\"OPTIONS" +tiene más información sobre cómo controlar el código del subshell. +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Cambiar Permisos" +Cambiar Permisos se usa para cambiar los bits de permisos en un grupo de +archivos y directorios. Puede ser invocado con la combinación de teclas Ctrl\-x c. +.PP +La ventana de Cambiar Permisos tiene dos partes \- +.I Permisos +y +.I Archivo +.PP +En la sección Archivo se muestran el nombre del archivo o directorio +y sus permisos en formato numérico octal, así como su propietario y grupo. +.PP +En la sección de Permisos hay un grupo de casillas de selección +que corresponden a los posibles permisos del archivo. Conforme los cambiamos +podemos ver cómo el valor octal va cambiando en la sección Archivo. +.PP +Para desplazarse entre las casillas y botones de la ventana podemos +usar las +.I teclas del cursor +o la +.I tecla de tabulación. +Para marcar o desmarcar casillas y para pulsar los botones +usaremos la +.I barra espaciadora. +Podemos usar los atajos de teclado (las letras destacadas) para accionar +directamente los elementos. +.PP +Para aceptar y aplicar los permisos, usaremos la tecla +.IR Intro . +.PP +Si se trata de un grupo de archivos o directorios, podemos cambiar parte +de los permisos marcándolos (las marcas son los asteriscos a la izquierda de las +casillas) y pulsando el botón +.B [* Poner] +o +.B [* Quitar] +para indicar la acción deseada. Los permisos no marcados conservan, en este +caso, los valores previos. +.PP +Podemos también fijar todos los permisos iguales en todos los archivos +con el botón +.B [Todos] +o solo los permisos marcados con el botón +.B [* Todos]. +En estos casos las casillas indican el estado en que queda cada permiso, igual +que para archivos individuales. +.PP +.B [Todos] +actúa sobre todos los permisos de todos los archivos +.PP +.B [* Todos] +actúa solo sobre los atributos marcados de los archivos +.PP +.B [* Poner] +activa los permisos marcados en los archivos seleccionados +.PP +.B [* Quitar] +desactiva los permisos marcados en los archivos seleccionados +.PP +.B [Aplicar] +actúa sobre todos los permisos de cada archivo, uno a uno +.PP +.B [Cancelar] +cancela Cambiar Permisos +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Cambiar Dueño" +Cambiar Dueño permite cambiar el propietario y/o grupo de un archivo. La tecla +rápida para este comando es Ctrl\-x o. +.\"NODE "Advanced Chown" +.SH "Cambiar Dueño y Permisos" +Cambiar Dueño y Permisos combina +.\"LINK2" +Cambiar Dueño +.\"Chown" +y +.\"LINK2" +Cambiar Permisos +.\"Chmod" +en una única ventana. Se puede así cambiar los permisos, propietario y grupo +del archivo de una sola vez. +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "Operaciones con Archivos" +Cuando copiamos, movemos o borramos archivos, Midnight Commander muestra el +diálogo de operaciones con archivos. En él aparecen los archivos que se estén procesando +y hasta tres barras de progreso. La barra de archivo indica qué parte del archivo actual +va siendo copiada, la barra de contador indica cuántos de los archivos marcados +han sido completados y la barra de bytes nos dice qué parte del tamaño total de archivos +marcados ha sido procesado hasta el momento. Si la operación detallada está desactivada +no se muestran las barras de archivo y bytes. +.PP +En la parte inferior hay dos botones. Pulsando el botón Saltar se +ignorará el resto del archivo actual. Pulsando el botón +Abortar se detendrá la operación y se ignora el resto de archivos. +.PP +Hay otros tres diálogos que pueden aparecer durante operaciones de +archivos. +.PP +El diálogo de error informa sobre una condición de error y tiene tres +posibilidades. Normalmente seleccionaremos el botón Saltar para evitar el archivo +o Abortar para detener la operación. También podemos seleccionar el botón +Reintentar si hemos corregido el problema desde otro terminal. +.PP +El diálogo Reemplazar aparece cuando intentamos copiar o mover un archivo +sobre otro ya existente. El mensaje muestra fechas y tamaños de ambos archivos. +Pulsaremos el botón Sí para sobreescribir el archivo, el botón No +para saltarlo, el botón Todos para sobreescribir todos los archivos, +Ninguno para no sobreescribir en ningún caso y Actualizar para sobreescribir +si el archivo origen es posterior al archivo objeto. Podemos abortar toda la +operación pulsando el botón Abortar. +.PP +El diálogo de eliminación recursiva aparece cuando intentamos borrar +un directorio no vacío. Pulsaremos Sí para borrar el directorio recursivamente, +No para saltar el directorio, Todo para borrar recursivamente todos los directorios +marcados no vacíos y Ninguno para saltarlos todos. Podemos abortar toda la +operación pulsando el botón Abortar. Si seleccionamos el botón Sí o Todo +se nos pedirá confirmación. Diremos "sí" solo si estamos realmente seguros +de que queremos una eliminación recursiva. +.PP +Si hemos marcado archivos y realizamos una operación sobre ellos, solo +los archivos sobre los que la operación fue exitosa son desmarcados. Los archivos +saltados y aquellos en los que la operación falló permanecen marcados. +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Copiar/Renombrar con Máscara" +Las operaciones de copiar/mover permiten transformar los nombres de los archivos +de manera sencilla. Para ello, hay que procurar una máscara correcta para el +origen y normalmente en la terminación del destino algunos caracteres comodín. +Todos los archivos que concuerden con la máscara origen son copiados/renombrados +según la máscara destino. Si hay archivos marcados, solo aquellos que encajen con +la máscara de origen serán renombrados. +.PP +Hay otras opción que podemos seleccionar: +.PP +Seguir Enlaces indica si los enlaces simbólicos o físicos en el directorio +origen (y recursivamente en sus subdirectorios) producen nuevos enlaces en el +directorio destino o si queremos copiar su contenido. +.PP +Copiar Recursivamente indica qué hacer si en el directorio +destino existe ya un directorio con el mismo nombre que el +archivo/directorio que está siendo copiado. La acción por defecto +es copiar su contenido sobre ese directorio. Habilitando esto +podemos copiar el directorio de origen dentro de ese directorio. +Quizás un ejemplo pueda ayudar: +.PP +Queremos copiar el contenido de un directorio denominado coco a /blas +donde ya existe un directorio /blas/coco. Por defecto, mc copiaría el +contenido en /blas/coco, pero con esta opción se copiaría como +/blas/coco/coco. +.PP +Preservar Atributos indica que se deben conservar los permisos originales +de los archivos, marcas temporales y si somos superusuario también el +propietario y grupo originales. +Si esta opción no está activa se aplica el valor actual de umask. +.PP +.B "Usando Patrones Shell activado" +.PP +Usando Patrones Shell nos permite usar los caracteres comodín '*' y '?' +en la máscara de origen. Funcionará igual que en la línea de órdenes. En +la máscara destino, solo están permitidos los comodines '*' y '\\<número>'. +El primer '*' en la máscara destino corresponde al primer grupo del comodín +en la máscara de origen, el segundo '*' al segundo grupo, etcétera. +El comodín '\\1' corresponde al primer grupo en la máscara de origen, +el comodín '\\2' al segundo y así sucesivamente hasta '\\9'. El comodín '\\0' +es el nombre completo del archivo fuente. +.PP +Dos ejemplos: +.PP +Si la máscara de origen es "*.tar.gz", el destino es "/blas/*.tgz" y el +archivo a copiar es "coco.tar.gz", la copia se hará como "coco.tgz" +en "/blas". +.PP +Supongamos que queremos intercambiar el nombre y la extensión de modo que +"archivo.c" se convierta en "c.archivo". La máscara origen será "*.*" y +la de destino "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Usando Patrones Shell desactivado" +.PP +Cuando la opción de Patrones Shell está desactivada MC no realiza una +agrupación automática. Deberemos usar expresiones '\\(...\\)' en la máscara +origen para especificar el significado de los comodines en la máscara destino. +Esto es más flexible pero también necesita más escritura. Por lo demás, +las máscaras destino son similares al caso de Patrones Shell activos. +.PP +Dos ejemplos: +.PP +Si la máscara de origen es "^\\(.*\\)\\.tar\\.gz$", el destino es +"/blas/*.tgz" y el archivo a ser copiado es "coco.tar.gz", la copia +será "/blas/coco.tgz". +.PP +Si queremos intercambiar el nombre y la extensión para que "archivo.c" +sea "c.archivo", la máscara de origen puede ser +"^\\(.*\\)\\.\\(.*\\)$" y la de destino "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Capitalización" +.PP +Podemos hacer cambios entre mayúsculas y minúsculas en los nombres de archivos. +Si usamos '\\u' o '\\l' en la máscara destino, el siguiente carácter será convertido a +mayúsculas o minúsculas respectivamente. +.PP +Si usamos '\\U' o '\\L' en la máscara destino, los siguientes caracteres +serán convertidos a mayúsculas o minúsculas respectivamente hasta encontrar +\&'\\E' o un segundo '\\U' o '\\L' o el fin del nombre del archivo. +.PP +\&'\\u' y '\\l' tienen prioridad sobre '\\U' y '\\L'. +.PP +Por ejemplo, si la máscara fuente es '*' (con Patrones Shell activo) o '^\\(.*\\)$' +(Patrones Shell desactivado) y la máscara destino es '\\L\\u*' los nombres de archivos +serán convertidos para que tengan su inicial en mayúscula y el resto del nombre en +minúsculas. +.PP +También podemos usar '\\' como carácter de escape evitando la interpretación de todos +estos caracteres especiales. Por ejemplo, '\\\\' es +una contrabarra y '\\*' es un asterisco. +.\"NODE "Select/Unselect Files" +.SH "Seleccionar/Deseleccionar Archivos" +El diálogo permite seleccionar o deseleccionar grupos de archivos y +directorios. La +.\"LINK2" +línea de entrada +.\"Input Line Keys" +permite introducir una expresión regular para los nombres de los +archivos a seleccionar/deseleccionar. +.PP +Indicando +.I Solo archivos +los directorios no se seleccionan. Con los +.I Caracteres Comodín +habilitados, se pueden introducir expresiones regulares del tipo empleado en +los patrones de nombres de la shell (poniendo * para cero o más caracteres y ? +para uno o más caracteres). Si los +.I Caracteres Comodín +están deshabilitados, entonces la selección de archivos se realiza con expresiones +regulares normales. Véase la página de manual de +.BR "ed (1)" . +Finalmente, si no se activa +.I Distinguir May/min +la selección se hará sin distinguir caracteres en mayúsculas o minúsculas. +.\"NODE "Diff Viewer" +.SH "Comparador de Archivos Interno" +El comparador de archivos interno permite comparar dos archivos y editarlos +en el sitio quedando la comparación actualizada sobre la marcha. Se puede +navegar y ver copias de trabajos desde los sistemas de control de versiones +populares (GIT, Subversion, etc). +.PP +El comparador ofrece los siguientes atajos de teclado: +.TP +.B F1 +Invoca el visor de ayuda y muestra esta sección. +.TP +.B F2 +Guarda los archivos modificados. +.TP +.B F4 +Edita el archivo del panel izquierdo. +.TP +.B F14 +Edita el archivo del panel derecho. +.TP +.B F5 +Combina el fragmento actual. Solo se combina el fragmento actual. +.TP +.B F7 +Comenzar una búsqueda. +.TP +.B F17 +Repetir la búsqueda previa. +.TP +.B F10, Esc, q +Salir del comparador. +.TP +.B Alt\-s, s +Mostrar/ocultar el estado de los fragmentos. +.TP +.B Alt\-n, l +Mostrar/ocultar números de línea. +.TP +.B f +Maximizar el panel izquierdo. +.TP +.B = +Igualar el ancho de los paneles. +.TP +.B > +Reducir el panel derecho. +.TP +.B < +Reducir el panel izquierdo. +.TP +.B c +Mostrar/ocultar «^M» para los saltos de línea con carácter de retorno (CR). +.TP +.B 2, 3, 4, 8 +Fijar ancho de tabulaciones. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-u +Intercambia el contenido de los paneles. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-r +Actualizar la pantalla. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-o +Alternar con la pantalla de órdenes del sistema. +.TP +.B Intro, Espacio, n +Avanzar al siguiente fragmento diferente. +.TP +.B Backspace, p +Retroceder al fragmento diferente anterior. +.TP +.B g +Saltar a la línea indicada. +.TP +.B Abajo +Avanzar una línea. +.TP +.B Ariba +Retroceder una línea. +.TP +.B AvPág (Página adelante) +Avanza una página hacia abajo. +.TP +.B RePág (Página atrás) +Retrocede una página hacia arriba. +.TP +.B Inicio, A1 +Va al comienzo de la línea. +.TP +.B Fin +Va al final de la línea. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-Inicio +Vuelve al comienzo del archivo. +.TP +.B Ctrl\-Fin, C1 +Avanza hasta el final del archivo. +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Visor de Archivos Interno" +El visor de archivos interno ofrece dos modos de presentación: ASCII y +hexadecimal. Para alternar entre ambos modos, se emplea la tecla F4. +.PP +El visor intenta usar el mejor método disponible en el sistema, según +el tipo de archivo, para mostrar información. Los archivos comprimidos +se descomprimen automáticamente si los programas correspondientes (GNU +gzip ó bzip2) están instalados en el sistema. El propio visor es capaz +de interpretar ciertas secuencias de caracteres que se emplean para +activar los atributos de negrita y subrayado, mejorando la presentación +de los archivos. +.PP +En modo hexadecimal, la función de búsqueda admite texto entre comillas o +valores numéricos. El texto entrecomillado se busca tal cual (retirando +las comillas) y cada número se corresponde a un byte. Unos y otros se +pueden entremezclar como en: +.PP +.nf +"Cadena" \-1 0xBB 012 "otro texto" +.fi +.PP +Nótese que 012 es un número octal y \-1 se convierte en 0xFF. +.PP +Algunos detalles internos del visualizador: En sistemas con acceso a la llamada +del sistema mmap(2), el programa mapea el archivo en vez de cargarlo; +si el sistema no provee de la llamada al sistema mmap(2) o el archivo +realiza una acción que necesita de un filtro, entonces el visor usará +sus cachés de crecimiento, cargando solo las partes del archivo +a las que actualmente estamos accediendo (esto incluye a los archivos comprimidos). +.PP +He aquí una lista de las acciones asociadas a cada tecla que +Midnight Commander gestiona en el visor interno de archivos. +.PP +.B F1 +Invoca el visor de ayuda de hipertexto interno. +.PP +.B F2 +Cambia el modo de ajuste de líneas en pantalla. + +.TP +.PP +.B * N. del T.: +Envuelta (Ajustada), se muestra toda la información de la línea en la pantalla, de +modo que si esta ocupa más del ancho de la pantalla aparece como si fuese +otra línea aparte o bien desenvuelta (desajustada), truncando el contenido +de la línea que sobresale de la pantalla. Este contenido puede ser +consultado utilizando las teclas del cursor. + +.PP +.B F4 +Cambia entre el modo hexadecimal y el Ascii. +.PP +.B F5 +Ir a la línea. Nos pedirá el número de línea en el que deseamos posicionarnos y +mostrará el archivo a partir de esa línea. +.PP +.B F6, /. +Búsqueda de expresión regular desde la posición actual hacia adelante. +.PP +.B ?, +Búsqueda de expresión regular desde la posición actual hacia atrás. +.PP +.B F7 +Búsqueda normal/ búsqueda en modo hexadecimal. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-s. +Comienza una búsqueda normal si no existe una expresión de búsqueda previa si no +busca la próxima coincidencia. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-r. +Comienza una búsqueda hacia atrás si no había expresión de búsqueda anterior si no +busca la próxima coincidencia. +.PP +.B n. +Buscar la próxima coincidencia. +.PP +.B F8 +Intercambia entre el modo crudo y procesado: esto mostrará el archivo como se encuentra en disco +o si se ha especificado un filtro de visualización en el archivo mc.ext.ini, entonces +la salida filtrada. El modo actual es siempre el contrario al mostrado +en la etiqueta del botón, en tanto que el botón muestra el modo en el que entraremos +con la pulsación de esa tecla. +.PP +.B F9 +Alterna entre la visualización con y sin formato: en el modo con formato +se interpretan algunas secuencias de caracteres para mostrar texto en +negrita y subrayado con diferentes colores. Como en el caso anterior, +la etiqueta del botón muestra el estado contrario al actual. +.PP +.B F10, Esc. +Sale del visor interno. +.PP +.B AvPág, espacio, Ctrl\-v. +Avanza una página hacia abajo. +.PP +.B RePág, Alt\-v, Ctrl\-b, Borrar. +Retrocede una página hacia arriba. +.PP +.B Cursor Abajo +Desplaza el texto una línea hacia arriba, mostrando en la línea inferior de +la pantalla una nueva línea que antes quedaba oculta. +.PP +.B Cursor Arriba +Desplaza una línea hacia abajo. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-l +Redibuja el contenido de la pantalla. +.PP +.B ! +Engendra un nuevo shell en el directorio de trabajo actual. +.PP +.B "[n] m" +Coloca la marca n. +.PP +.B "[n] r" +Salta hasta la marca n. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-f +Salta al archivo siguiente. +.PP +.B Ctrl\-b +Ídem al archivo anterior. +.PP +.B Alt\-r +Intercambia entre los diferentes modos de regla: desactivado, arriba, abajo. +.PP +Es posible adiestrar al visor de archivos sobre cómo mostrar un archivo, mírese +la sección +.\"LINK2" +Editar Archivo de Extensiones\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Editor de Archivos Interno" +El editor de archivos interno es un editor a pantalla completa de +avanzadas prestaciones. Puede editar archivos de hasta 64 MB y también +permite modificar archivos binarios. Se inicia pulsando +.B F4 +supuesto que la variable +.I use_internal_edit +esté presente en el archivo de inicialización. +.PP +Las características soportadas actualmente son: copia, desplazamiento, +borrado, corte, y pegado de bloques; deshacer paso a paso; menús +desplegables; inserción de archivos; definición de macros; buscar y +reemplazar usando expresiones regulares); selección de texto con +mayúsculas\-cursor (si el terminal lo soporta); alternancia +insertar\-sobreescribir; plegado de líneas; sangrado automático; tamaño +de tabulación configurable; realce de sintaxis para varios tipos de +archivos; y la opción de pasar bloques de texto por filtros externos +como indent o ispell. +.PP +El editor es muy fácil de usar y no requiere aprendizaje alguno. +Para conocer las teclas asignadas a cada función, basta consultar los +menús correspondientes. Además, las teclas de desplazamiento con la +tecla de mayúsculas seleccionan texto. Se puede seleccionar con el ratón, +aunque podemos recuperar su funcionamiento habitual en terminales (copiar +y pegar) manteniendo pulsada la tecla mayúsculas. +.B Ctrl\-Ins +copia al archivo +.B mcedit.clip +y +.B Mayús\-Ins +pega desde +.BR mcedit.clip . +.B Mayús\-Supr +corta y copia en +.BR mcedit.clip , +y +.B Ctrl\-Supr +elimina el texto resaltado. La tecla +.B Intro +produce un salto de línea con sangrado automático opcional. +.PP +Para definir una macro, pulsar +.B Ctrl\-r +y entonces teclearemos las secuencias de teclas que deseamos sean +ejecutadas. Pulsaremos +.B Ctrl\-r +de nuevo al finalizar. Podemos asignar la macro a la tecla que queramos +pulsando sobre ella. La macro será ejecutada cuando pulsemos +.B Ctrl\-a +seguido de la tecla asignada. También será ejecutada si +pulsamos Meta (Alt), Ctrl, o Escape y la tecla asignada, siempre y cuando +la tecla no sea usada por ninguna otra función. Una vez definida, los comandos de +macro irán al archivo +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +en nuestro directorio de inicio. Podemos eliminar una macro borrando +la línea adecuada en este archivo. +.PP +.B F19 +formateará el bloque seleccionado (sea texto, código +.B C +o +.B C++ +u otro). Esto está controlado por el archivo +.B %pkgdatadir%/edit.indent.rc +que se copia la primera vez que se usa en +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +en el directorio personal. +.PP +El editor también visualiza caracteres no estadounidenses (160+). Al editar +archivos binarios, debemos configurar los +.B bits de pantalla +a 7 bits en el menú de opciones para mantener el espaciado saneado. +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH "Terminación" +Permite a Midnight Commander escribir por nosotros. +.PP +Intenta completar el texto escrito antes de la posición +actual. Midnight Commander intenta la terminación tratando +el texto como si fuera una variable (si el texto comienza con +.BR $ ), +nombre de usuario (si el texto empieza por +.BR ~ ), +nombre de máquina (si el texto comienza con +.BR @ ) +o un comando (si estamos en la línea de órdenes en una posición +donde podríamos escribir un comando; las terminaciones posibles entonces +incluyen las palabras reservadas del shell así como comandos internos +del shell) en ese orden. Si nada de lo anterior es aplicable, se intenta +la terminación con nombres de archivo. +.PP +La terminación de nombres de archivo, usuario y máquina funciona en +todas las líneas de entrada; la terminación de comandos es específica de +la línea de órdenes. Si la terminación es ambigua (hay varias +posibilidades diferentes), Midnight Commander pita, y la acción siguiente +depende de la opción +.I Completar: Mostrar Todos +en el diálogo de +.\"LINK2" +Configuración\&. +.\"Configuration" +Si está activada, se despliega inmediatamente junto a la posición actual +una lista con todas las posibilidades donde se puede seleccionar con +las flechas de movimiento e +.B Intro +la entrada correcta. También podemos seguir escribiendo caracteres con lo +que la línea se sigue completando tanto como sea posible y simultáneamente +la primera entrada coincidente de la lista se va resaltando. Si volvemos +a pulsar +.BR Alt\-Tab , +solo las coincidencias permanecen en la lista. Tan pronto +como no haya ambigüedad, la lista desaparece; también podemos quitarla +con las teclas de cancelación +.BR Esc ", " F10 +y las teclas de movimiento a izquierda y derecha. Si +.\"LINK2" +Completar: Mostrar Todos +.\"Configuration" +está desactivado, la lista aparece cuando pulsamos +.B Alt\-Tab +por segunda vez; con la primera Midnight Commander solo emite un pitido. +.PP +Aplica escapes a los símbolos +.BR ? ", " * " y " & +(como \fB\\?\fR, \fB\\*\fR, \fB\\&\fR ) +en los nombres de archivo para evitar su interpretación en expresiones +regulares al realizar sustituciones en la línea de entrada. +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "Sistemas de Archivos Virtuales (VFS)" +Midnight Commander dispone de una capa de código de acceso al sistema +de archivos; esta capa se denomina Sistema de Archivos Virtual (VFS). +El Sistema de Archivos Virtual permite a Midnight Commander manipular +archivos no ubicados en el sistema de archivos Unix. +.PP +Midnight Commander incluye actualmente varios Sistemas de Archivos +Virtuales: el sistema de archivos +.IR local , +utilizado para acceder al sistema de archivos Unix habitual; +.I tarfs +para manipular archivos empaquetados con el comando tar y acaso +comprimidos; +.I undelfs +para recuperar archivos borrados en sistemas de archivos de tipo ext2 +(sistema de archivos habitual en Linux); +.I ftpfs +para manipular archivos en sistemas remotos a través de FTP; +.I fish +para manipular archivos a través de conexiones a shell como rsh o ssh. +.PP +Dependiendo de la forma en que fue compilado, puede disponer también de: +.I sftpfs +para manipular archivos en sistemas remotos a través de SFTP. +.PP +Se facilita también un sistema de archivos genérico +.I extfs +(EXternal virtual File System) para extender con facilidad las +posibilidades de VFS empleando guiones y programas externos. +.PP +El código VFS interpretará todos los nombres de ruta usados y los dirigirá +al sistema de archivos correcto. El formato usado para cada uno de los +sistemas de archivos se describe más adelante en su propia sección. +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH " Sistema de archivos Tar (tarfs)" +El sistema de archivos tar y los archivos tar comprimidos pueden consultarse usando +el comando chdir. Para mostrar en el panel el contenido de un archivo tar, cambiamos +de directorio empleando la siguiente sintaxis: +.PP +.I /archivo.tar/utar://[directorio\-dentro\-tar] +.PP +El archivo mc.ext.ini también ofrece un atajo para los archivos tar, esto quiere decir +que normalmente basta con apuntar a un archivo tar y pulsar Intro para entrar en el +archivo tar. Véase la sección +.\"LINK2" +Edición del Archivo de Extensiones +.\"Edit Extension File" +para obtener más detalles sobre cómo hacer esto. +.PP +Ejemplos: +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +En este último se indica la ruta completa hasta el archivo tar. + +.\"NODE " FTP File System" +.SH " Sistema de archivos FTP" +FTPfs permite manipular archivos en máquinas remotas. Para utilizarlo +se puede emplear la opción de menú +.I Conexión por FTP +o simplemente emplear la orden +.I cd +como cuando cambiamos habitualmente de directorio, pero indicando +como ruta: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][usuario[:clave]@]maquina[:puerto][dir\-remoto] +.PP +Los elementos +.IR usuario , +.I puerto +y +.I directorio\-remoto +son opcionales. Si especificamos el elemento +.IR usuario , +entonces Midnight Commander intentará conectarse con la máquina remota +como ese usuario, y si no, establecerá una conexión en modo anónimo o +con el nombre de usuario indicado en el archivo +.IR ~/.netrc . +El elemento +.I clave +también es opcional, y si está presente, se emplea como contraseña +de acceso. Esta forma de colocar la contraseña como parte del nombre +del directorio virtual no es muy recomendable porque eventualmente puede +aparecer en pantalla y guardarse en el histórico de directorios. +.PP +Si es necesario utilizar un proxy de FTP, se añade un símbolo de exclamación +.B ! +delante del nombre de la máquina. +.PP +Ejemplos: +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!detras.barrera.edu/pub + ftp://guest@pcremoto.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@servidor/pub + ftp://ftp.um.es/pub +.fi +.PP +La opciones de FTPfs se encuentran entre las opciones de configuración del +.\"LINK2" +Sistema de Archivos Virtual (VFS)\&. +.\"Virtual FS" + +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " Sistema de archivos a través de SHell" +El FISH es un sistema de archivos por red que permite manipular archivos +en una máquina remota como si estuvieran almacenados localmente. Para +ello es preciso que el sistema remoto esté ejecutando el servidor FISH +o permitir la conexión a una shell de tipo bash. +.PP +Para conectar con la máquina remota basta cambiar de directorio a un +directorio virtual cuyo nombre sea de la forma: +.PP +.I sh://[usuario@]maquina[:opciones]/[directorio\-remoto] +.PP +Los elementos +.IR usuario , +.I opciones +y +.I directorio\-remoto +son opcionales. Si se especifica el elemento +.I usuario +Midnight Commander intentará entrar en la máquina remota como ese +usuario, y si no usará nuestro nombre. +.PP +Como +.I opciones +se puede poner 'C' para usar compresión y 'r' para utilizar una +conexión rsh en vez de ssh. Si se indica el +.IR directorio\-remoto , +se buscará este como primer directorio al conectar con la máquina +remota. +.PP +Ejemplos: +.PP +.nf + sh://solorsh.es:r/linux/local + sh://pepe@quiero.comprension.edu:C/privado + sh://pepe@sincomprimir.ssh.edu/privado +.fi +.\"NODE " SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) filesystem" +.SH " Sistema de archivos SFTP (FTP sobre SSH)" +El sistema de archivos SFTP es un sistema de archivos sobre red +que permite manipular archivos en una máquina remota como si fueran +locales. +.PP +Para conectar con la máquina remota basta cambiar de directorio a un +directorio virtual cuyo nombre sea de la forma: +.PP +.I sftp://[usuario@]maquina:[puerto]/[directorio\-remoto] +.PP +Los elementos +.IR usuario , +.I puerto +y +.I directorio\-remoto +son opcionales. Si se especifica el elemento +.I usuario +Midnight Commander intentará acceder a la máquina remota como ese +usuario, y si no usará nuestro nombre. El +.I puerto +indica el puerto utilizado por el servidor remoto, por defecto 22. +El +.I directorio\-remoto +será el directorio actual tras la conexión. +.PP +Ejemplos: +.PP +.nf + sftp://solorsh.es/linux/local + sftp://pepe:k1abe@quiero.comprension.edu/privado + sftp://pepe@sincomprimir.ssh.edu/privado + sftp://pepe@maquina.ssh.edu:2222/privado +.fi + +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Sistema de archivos de Recuperación" +En sistemas Linux, si el programa de configuración nos preguntó si queríamos usar +las facilidades de recuperación de archivos de ext2fs, tendremos el sistema de archivos +recuperables accesible. +La recuperación de archivos borrados está disponible solo en los sistemas de archivos ext2. El +sistema de archivos recuperable es solo un interface de la librería ext2fs con: +restaurar todos los archivos borrados en un ext2fs y proporciona +la extracción selectiva de archivos en una partición regular. +.PP +Para usar este sistema de archivos, tendremos que hacer un chdir a un nombre de archivo especial +formado por el prefijo "/undel://" y el nombre de archivo donde se encuentra el +sistema de archivos actual. +.PP +Por ejemplo, para recuperar archivos borrados en la segunda partición del +primer disco scsi en Linux, usaríamos el siguiente nombre de ruta: +.PP +.nf + undel://sda2 +.fi +.PP +Esto le llevaría un tiempo a undelfs para cargar la información +antes de empezar a navegar por los archivos allí contenidos. + +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " Sistema de archivos EXTerno (extfs)" +.B extfs +permite incorporar a GNU Midnight Commander numerosas utilidades y tipos +de archivos de manera sencilla, simplemente escribiendo guiones +(scripts). +.PP +Los sistemas de archivos Extfs son de dos tipos: +.PP +1. Sistemas de archivos autónomos, que no están asociados a ningún +archivo existente. Representan algún tipo de información relacionada con +el sistema en forma de árbol de directorios. Se accede a ellos ejecutando +.RI ' "cd nombrefs://" ' +donde nombrefs es el nombre corto que identifica el extfs (ver más +adelante). Ejemplos de estos son audio (lista de pistas de sonido en +el CD) o apt (lista de paquetes de tipo Debian en el sistema). +.PP +Por ejemplo, para listar las pistas de música del CD, escribir +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. Sistemas de archivos en un archivo (como rpm, patchfs y más), que +muestran los contenidos de un archivo en forma de árbol de directorios. +Puede tratarse de archivos reales empaquetados o comprimidos en un archivo +(urar, rpm) o archivos virtuales, como puede ser el caso de mensajes +en un archivo de correo electrónico (mailfs) o partes de un archivo de +modificaciones o parches (patchfs). Para acceder a ellos se añade +.RI ' nombrefs:// ' +al nombre del archivo a abrir. Este archivo podría él mismo estar en +otro sistema de archivos virtual. +.PP +Por ejemplo, para listar los contenidos de un archivo documentos.zip +comprimido hay que escribir +.PP +.nf + cd documentos.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +En muchos aspectos, se puede tratar un sistema de archivos externo como +cualquier otro directorio. Podríamos añadirlo a la lista de favoritos o +cambiar a él desde la historia de directorios. Una limitación importante +es que, estando dentro de él, no se puede ejecutar órdenes del sistema, +como por otra parte ocurre en cualquier sistema de archivos VFS no local. +.PP +Midnigth Commander incluye inicialmente guiones para algunos sistemas de +archivos externos: +.TP +.B a +acceder a un disquete DOS/Windows 'A:' +.RI ( "cd a://" ). +.TP +.B apt +monitor del sistema de gestión de paquetes APT de Debian +.RI ( "cd apt://" ). +.TP +.B audio +acceso y audición de CDs +.RI ( "cd audio://" +o +.IR "cd dispositivo/audio://" ). +.TP +.B bpp +paquete de la distribución GNU/Linux Bad Penguin +.RI ( "cd archivo.bpp/bpp://" ). +.TP +.B deb +paquete de la distribución GNU/Linux Debian +.RI ( "cd archivo.deb/deb://" ). +.TP +.B dpkg +paquetes instalados en Debian GNU/Linux +.RI ( "cd deb://" ). +.TP +.B hp48 +ver o copiar archivos a/desde una calculadora HP48 +.RI ( "cd hp48://" ). +.TP +.B lslR +navegación en listados lslR empleados en bastantes sitios FTP +.RI ( "cd filename/lslR://" ). +.TP +.B mailfs +soporte para archivos de correo electrónico tipo mbox +.RI ( "cd archivo_mbox/mailfs://" ). +.TP +.B patchfs +manipulación de archivos de cambios/parches tipo diff +.RI ( "cd archivo/patchfs://" ). +.TP +.B rpm +paquete RPM +.RI ( "cd archivo/rpm://" ). +.TP +.B rpms +base de datos de paquetes RPM instalados +.RI ( "cd rpms://" ). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +herramientas de compresión +.RI ( "cd archivo/xxxx://" +siendo xxxx uno de estos: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +Se pueden asociar extensiones o tipos de archivo a un determinado sistema +de archivos externo tal como se describe en la sección sobre cómo +.\"LINK2" +Editar el Archivo de Extensiones +.\"Edit Extension File" +de Midnight Commander. He aquí, a modo de ejemplo, una entrada para +paquetes Debian: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Open=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH "Colores" +Midnight Commander intentará determinar si nuestro terminal soporta +el uso de color utilizando la base de datos de terminales y nuestro nombre de terminal. Algunas veces +estará confundido, por lo que deberemos forzar el modo en color o deshabilitar el modo de color +usando el argumento \-c y \-b respectivamente. +.PP +Si el programa está compilado con el gestor pantallas S\-Lang +en lugar de ncurses, también chequeará la variable +.BR COLORTERM , +si existe, lo que tiene el mismo efecto que la opción \-c. +.PP +Podemos especificar a los terminales que siempre fuercen el modo en color +añadiendo la variable +.I color_terminals +a la sección Colors del archivo de inicialización. Esto evitará que +Midnight Commander intente la detección de soporte de color. Ejemplo: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +.fi +.nf +color_terminals=nombre\-terminal1,nombre\-terminal2... +.fi +.PP +El programa puede compilarse con ncurses y S\-Lang, ncurses no +ofrece la posibilidad de forzar el modo en color: ncurses utiliza la +información de la base de datos de terminales. +.PP +Midnight Commander ofrece una forma de cambiar los colores por defecto. +Actualmente los colores se configuran a través de la variable de entorno +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +o en la sección Colors del archivo de inicialización. +.PP +En la sección Colors, el mapa de colores por defecto se carga desde la variable +.IR base_color . +Podemos especificar un mapa de colores alternativo para un terminal +utilizando el nombre del terminal como clave en esta sección. Ejemplo: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +El formato de la definición de color es: +.PP +.nf + <PalabraClave>=<ColorTexto>,<ColorFondo>:<PalabraClave>= ... +.fi +.PP +los colores son opcionales, y las palabras claves son: normal, selected, +disabled, marked, markselect, errors, input, inputmark, inputunchanged, +commandlinemark, reverse, gauge, header, inputhistory, commandhistory; +los colores de la barra de botones: bbarhotkey, bbarbutton; los colores +de la barra de estado: statusbar; los colores de menú: menunormal, +menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, menuinactive; los colores de los diálogos: +dnormal, dfocus, dhotnormal, dhotfocus, dtitle; los colores de los diálogos +de error: errdfocus, errdhotnormal, errdhotfocus, errdtitle; los colores +de la ayuda: helpnormal, helpitalic, helpbold, helplink, helpslink, +helptitle; los colores del visor: viewnormal, viewbold, viewunderline, +viewselected; loc colores del editor: editnormal, editbold, editmarked, +editwhitespace, editlinestate; los colores de los menús desplegables: +pmenunormal, pmenusel, pmenutitle. +.PP +.I header +determina el color del encabezado de los paneles, la línea con los +títulos de columna y el modo de ordenación. +.PP +.I input +determina el color de las líneas de entrada de texto en los diálogos. +.PP +.I gauge (indicador) +determina el color de la parte completada de la barra de progresión (gauge), que muestra +qué porcentaje de archivos fueron copiados etc. de modo gráfico. +.PP +.I disabled +detemina el color de los componentes inactivos. +.PP +Los cuadros de diálogo usan los siguientes colores: +.I dnormal +usado para el texto normal, +.I dfocus +usado para el componente actualmente seleccionado, +.I dhotnormal +usado para diferenciar el color de la tecla activa +en los componentes normales, mientras que el color +.I dhotfocus +se utiliza para el color resaltado en el componente seleccionado. +.PP +Los menús utilizan el mismo esquema equivalente con los nombres menunormal, +menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel and menuinactive en lugar de los anteriores. +.PP +La ayuda utiliza los siguientes colores: +.I helpnormal +texto normal, +.I helpitalic +utilizado para el texto enfatizado con letra itálica en la página del manual, +.I helpbold +usado para el texto enfatizado en negrita en la página del manual, +.I helplink +usado para los hiperenlaces no seleccionados y +.I helpslink +es utilizado para el hiperenlace seleccionado. +.PP +En los menús desplegables: +.I pmenunormal +se usa como color del fondo y de los elementos no seleccionados, +.I menusel +se usa para el elemento seleccionado, +.I pmenutitle +se usa para el titulo del menú. + +.PP +Los colores posibles son: negro (black), gris (gray), rojo (red), rojo brillante (brightred), verde (green), +verde claro (brightgreen), marrón (brown), amarillo (yellow), azul oscuro (blue), azul brillante (brightblue), +rosa (magenta), rosa claro (brightmagenta), +azul celeste (cyan), celeste claro (brightcyan), gris claro (lightgray) y blanco (white). +Hay una palabra clave especial para obtener un fondo transparente. Se trata de 'default'. 'default' +solo se puede utilizar como color de fondo. Otra palabra especial es 'base' que hace referencia a los +colores generales. Cuando se puede disponer de 256 colores se pueden referir como color16 hasta +color255. Ejemplo: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color=normal=white,default:marked=magenta,default +.fi + +.\"NODE "Skins" +.SH "Skins" +Con los «skins» (pieles, caretas) se puede cambiar la apariencia global de +Midnight Commander. Para ello hay que proporcionar un archivo que contenga +descripciones de colores y formas de trazar las líneas de borde de los +paneles y diálogos. La redefinición de colores es completamente compatible +con la configuración tradicional detallada en la sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +Colores\&. +.\"Colors" +.PP +El archivo se busca, en orden, de varias maneras: +.IP +.br +1) La opción +.B \-S <skin> +o +.B \-\-skin=<skin> +al ejecutar mc. +.br +2) La variable de entorno +.BR MC_SKIN . +.br +3) El parámetro +.B skin +en la sección +.B [Midnight\-Commander] +del archivo de configuración. +.br +4) El archivo +.BR %sysconfdir%/mc/skins/default.ini . +.br +5) El archivo +.BR %pkgdatadir%/skins/default.ini . + +.PP +En línea de órdenes, en la variable de entorno o el parámetro de la +configuración pueden contener la ruta absoluta al archivo de skin con +o sin su extensión \.ini. De no indicar la ruta se realiza la búsqueda, +en orden, en: +.IP +1) +.BR ~/.local/share/mc/skins/ . +.br +2) +.BR %sysconfdir%/mc/skins/ . +.br +3) +.BR %pkgdatadir%/skins/ . +.br + +.PP +Para más información consultar: +.IP +.\"LINK2" +Descripción de secciones y parámetros +.\"Skins sections" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Definiciones de pares de colores +.\"Skins colors" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Trazado de líneas +.\"Skins lines" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Compatibilidad +.\"Skins oldcolors" +.br + +.\"NODE " Skins sections" +.SH " Descripción de secciones y parámetros" + +La sección +.B [skin] +contiene metadatos del archivo. El parámetro +.I description +proporciona un pequeño texto descriptivo. + +.PP +La sección +.B [filehighlight] +contiene descripciones de pares de colores para el resaltado de nombres +de archivo. Los nombres de parámetros de esta sección tienen que coincidir +con los nombres de sección del archivo +.IR filehighlight.ini . + +Para más información, véase la sección sobre +.\"LINK2" +Resaltado de nombres\&. +.\"Filenames Highlight" + +.PP +La sección +.B [core] +permite definir elementos que se utilizan en otras partes. +.TP +.I _default_ +Colores por defecto. Se utilizará en todas las secciones que +no contengan definición de colores. +.TP +.I selected +cursor. +.TP +.I marked +elementos seleccionados. +.TP +.I markselect +cursor sobre elementos seleccionados. +.TP +.I gauge +color de la parte completada en las barras de progreso. +.TP +.I input +color de los recuadros de texto editable en los dialogos. +.TP +.I inputmark +color de los textos editables en los dialogos. +.TP +.I inputunchanged +color original de los textos editables antes de tocarlos. +.TP +.I commandlinemark +color del texto seleccionado en la línea de órdenes. +.TP +.I reverse +color inverso. + +.PP +La sección +.B [dialog] +define elementos de las ventanas de diálogo salvo los diálogos de error. +.TP +.I _default_ +Colores por defecto para esta sección. Se utilizará [core]._default_ +si no se especifica +.TP +.I dfocus +Color del elemento activo, con el foco. +.TP +.I dhotnormal +Color de las teclas de acceso rápido. +.TP +.I dhotfocus +Color de las teclas de acceso rápido del elemento activo. + +.PP +La sección +.B [error] +define elementos de las ventanas de diálogo de error. +.TP +.I _default_ +Colores por defecto para esta sección. Se utilizará [core]._default_ +si no se especifica. +.TP +.I errdhotnormal +Color de las teclas de acceso rápido. +.TP +.I errdhotfocus +Color de las teclas de acceso rápido del elemento activo. + +.PP +La sección +.B [menu] +define elementos de menú. Esta sección afecta al menú general (activado +con F9) y a los menús de usuario (activados con F2 en la pantalla general +y con F11 en el editor). +.TP +.I _default_ +Colores por defecto para esta sección. Se utilizará [core]._default_ +si no se especifica +.TP +.I entry +Color de las entradas de menú. +.TP +.I menuhot +Color de las teclas de acceso rápido en menú. +.TP +.I menusel +Color de la entrada de menú activa, con el foco. +.TP +.I menuhotsel +Color de las teclas de acceso rápido en la entrada activa de menú. +.TP +.I menuinactive +Color de menú inactiva. + +.PP +La sección +.B [help] +define los elementos de la ventana de ayuda. +.TP +.I _default_ +Colores por defecto para esta sección. Se utilizará [core]._default_ +si no se especifica. +.TP +.I helpitalic +Par de color para elementos en +.BR cursiva . +.TP +.I helpbold +Par de color para elementos +.BR resaltados . +.TP +.I helplink +Color de los enlaces +.TP +.I helpslink +Color del enlace activo, con el foco. + +.PP +La sección +.B [editor] +define los colores de los elementos que se encuentran en el editor. +.TP +.I _default_ +Colores por defecto para esta sección. Se utilizará [core]._default_ +si no se especifica. +.TP +.I editbold +Par de color para elementos +.BR resaltados . +.TP +.I editmarked +Color del texto seleccionado. +.TP +.I editwhitespace +Color de las tabulaciones y espacios al final de línea resaltados. +.TP +.I editlinestate +Color de la línea de estado. + +.PP +La sección +.B [viewer] +define los colores de los elementos que se encuentran en el visor. +.TP +.I viewunderline +Par de color para elementos +.BR subrayados . + +.\"NODE " Skins colors" +.SH " Definiciones de pares de colores" +Cualquier parámetro del archivo de skin puede contener definiciones de +pares de color. +.PP +Un par de colores está formado por el nombre de los dos colores separados +por ';'. El primer color establece el color de frente y el segundo el +color de fondo. Se puede omitir alguno de los dos colores, en cuyo caso +se utilizará el color del par de color por defecto (par de color general +o del par de color por defecto en la sección). +.PP +Ejemplo: +.br +.nf +[core] + # verde sobre negro + _default_=green;black + # verde (por defecto) sobre azul + selected=;blue + # amarillo sobre negro (por defecto) + marked=yellow; +.fi + +.PP +Los nombres de colores permitidos son los que aparecen en la sección +.\"LINK2" +Colores\&. +.\"Colors" + +.\"NODE " Skins lines" +.SH " Trazado de líneas" +Trazos de líneas de la sección +.B [Lines] +del archivo de skins. Por defecto se utilizan líneas sencillas, pero +se pueden redefinir empleando cualquier símbolo utf\-8 (por ejemplo, +líneas dobles). +.PP +.I ¡¡¡ATENCIÓN!!! +Si se compila Midnight Commander empleando la biblioteca de pantalla +ncurses, entonces el trazado de líneas está limitado. Es posible que +solo se puedan utilizar líneas simples. Para consultas y comentarios +contactar con los desarrolladores de ncurses. + +.PP +Descripción de parámetros de la sección +.BR [Lines] : +.TP +.I lefttop +esquina superior izquierda. +.TP +.I righttop +esquina superior derecha. +.TP +.I centertop +unión central en el borde superior. +.TP +.I centerbottom +unión central en el borde inferior. +.TP +.I leftbottom +esquina inferior izquierda. +.TP +.I rightbottom +esquina inferior derecha. +.TP +.I leftmiddle +unión central en el borde izquierdo. +.TP +.I rightmiddle +unión central en el borde derecho. +.TP +.I centermiddle +cruz central. +.TP +.I horiz +línea horizontal. +.TP +.I vert +línea vertical. +.TP +.I thinhoriz +línea horizontal fina. +.TP +.I thinvert +línea vertical fina. + + +.\"NODE " Skins oldcolors" +.SH " Compatibilidad" +Compatibilidad de la asignación de colores empleando archivos de skin +con la configuración general de +.\"LINK2" +Colores\&. +.\"Colors" +.PP +La compatibilidad es completa. En este caso la redefinición de colores +tiene prioridad sobre las definiciones de skin y se completa con esta. + + +.\"NODE "Filenames Highlight" +.SH "Resaltado de nombres" +La sección [filehighlight] de un archivo de skin contiene como claves +los nombres que identificarán cada grupo de resaltado y como valor el +par de colores que le corresponda. El formato de estas parejas se explica +en la sección +.\"LINK2" +Skins\&. +.\"Skins" +.PP +Las reglas de resaltado de nombres en el archivo se encuentran en +.IR %pkgdatadir%/filehighlight.ini . +Los nombres de sección en este archivo tienen que ser iguales a los nombres +empleados en la sección [filehighlight] del archivo de skin en uso. +PP. +Los nombres de los parámetros en estos grupos podrán ser: +.TP +.I type +tipo de archivo. Si existe se ignoran otras opciones. +.TP +.I regexp +expresión regular. Si existe se ignora la opción 'extensions'. +.TP +.I extensions +lista de extensiones de archivos. Separadas por punto y coma. +.TP +.I extensions_case +hace la regla 'extensions' sensible o no a mayúsculas (true o false). +.PP +`type' puede tomar los valores: +.nf +\- FILE (todos los archivos) + \- FILE_EXE +\- DIR (todos los directorios) + \- LINK_DIR +\- LINK (todos los enlaces excepto los rotos) + \- HARDLINK + \- SYMLINK +\- STALE_LINK +\- DEVICE (todos los archivos de dispositivo) + \- DEVICE_BLOCK + \- DEVICE_CHAR +\- SPECIAL (todos los archivos especiales) + \- SPECIAL_SOCKET + \- SPECIAL_FIFO + \- SPECIAL_DOOR +.fi + +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Ajustes Especiales" +La mayoría de las opciones de Midnight Commander pueden cambiarse desde +los menús. Sin embargo, hay un pequeño número de ajustes para los que +es necesario editar el archivo de configuración. +.PP +Estas variables se pueden cambiar en nuestro archivo +.IR ~/.config/mc/ini : +.TP +.I clear_before_exec +Por defecto Midnight Commander limpia la pantalla antes de ejecutar un +comando. Si preferimos ver la salida del comando en la parte inferior +de la pantalla, editaremos nuestro archivo +.I ~/mc.ini +y cambiaremos el +valor del campo clear_before_exec a 0. +.TP +.I confirm_view_dir +Al pulsar F3 en un directorio, normalmente Midnight Commander entra +en ese directorio. Si este valor está a 1, entonces el programa +nos pedirá confirmación antes de cambiar el directorio si tenemos +archivos marcados. +.TP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds +Este valor es el número de segundos que Midnight Commander esperará +antes de intentar volver a conectar con un servidor de ftp que ha denegado el +acceso. Si el valor es cero, el programa no reintentará el acceso. +.TP +.I max_dirt_limit +Especifica cuántas actualizaciones de pantalla pueden saltarse al menos en el visor +de archivos interno. Normalmente este valor no es significativo, porque +el código automáticamente ajusta el número de actualizaciones a saltar de acuerdo +al volumen de pulsaciones de teclas recibidas. Empero, en máquinas muy lentas o +en terminales con autorepetición de teclado rápida, un valor grande puede hacer +que la pantalla se actualice dando saltos. +.IP +Parece ser que poniendo max_dirt_limit a 10 produce el mejor comportamiento, +y este es el valor por defecto. +.TP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer +Controla cuándo el desplazamiento de pantalla realizado con el ratón se realiza por páginas o línea +a línea en el visor de archivos interno. +.TP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +Produce un tratamiento especial para '+', '\-', '*' en la línea de órdenes (seleccionar, +deseleccionar, selección inversa) solo si la línea de órdenes está vacía. No necesitamos +entrecomillar estos caracteres en la línea de órdenes. Pero no podremos +cambiar la selección cuando la línea de órdenes no esté vacía. +.TP +.I show_output_starts_shell +Esta variable solo funciona si no se utiliza el soporte de subshell. +Cuando utilizamos la combinación +.I Ctrl\-o +para volver a la pantalla de usuario, si está activada, tendremos un +nuevo shell. De otro modo, pulsando cualquier tecla nos devolverá a +Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I timeformat_recent +Cambiar el formato de fecha y hora empleado para fechas dentro de los seis +últimos meses. Véanse las páginas de manual de strftime o date para la descripción +del formato a emplear. Sin esta opción se emplea el formato por defecto. +.TP +.I timeformat_old +Cambiar el formato de fecha y hora empleado para fechas más antiguas que seis +meses. Véanse las páginas de manual de strftime o date para la descripción del formato a +emplear. Sin esta opción se emplea el formato por defecto. +.TP +.I torben_fj_mode +Si este modificador existe, entonces las teclas Inicio y Fin funcionarán de manera +diferente en los paneles, en lugar de mover la selección al primer +o último archivo en los paneles, actuarán como sigue: +.IP +La tecla Inicio: Irá a la línea central del panel, si está bajo ella; sino va a +la primera línea a menos que ya esté allí, en este caso +irá al primer archivo del panel. +.IP +La tecla Fin tiene un comportamiento similar: Irá a la línea central del panel, si +está situada en la mitad superior del panel; si no irá a la línea inferior del panel a menos que +ya estemos ahí, en cuyo caso moverá la selección al último nombre de archivo del panel. +.TP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +Si esta variable está activada (por defecto lo está) se recurrirá al +comando «file» para reconocer los tipos de archivo referidos en el archivo +.\"LINK2" +mc.ext.ini\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.TP +.I xtree_mode +Si esta variable está activada (por defecto no) cuando naveguemos +por el sistema de archivos en un panel en árbol, se irá actualizando +automáticamente el otro panel con los contenidos del directorio +seleccionado en cada momento. +.TP +.I fish_directory_timeout +Tiempo de vida por defecto de la caché de directorio. El valor por defecto +de 900 segundos. +.TP +.I clipboard_store +Ruta de acceso y opciones a una utilidad de portapapeles externa como 'xclip' +para cargar texto de un archivo como selección en X Window. +Por ejemplo: +.PP +.nf +clipboard_store=/usr/bin/xclip \-i +.fi +.TP +.I clipboard_paste +Ruta de acceso y opciones a una utilidad de portapapeles externa como 'xclip' +para volcar la selección de X Window a la salida estándar. +Por ejemplo: +.PP +.nf +clipboard_paste=/usr/bin/xclip \-o +.fi +.TP +.I autodetect_codeset +Esta opción permite emplear la orden 'enca' para autodetectar el juego de +caracteres de los archivos de texto para el visor y el editor interno. La +lista de valores posibles se puede obtener con +`enca \-\-list languages | cut \-d : \-f1'. Esta opción tiene que estar +dentro de la sección [Misc]. +.PP +For example: +.PP +.nf +autodetect_codeset=russian +.fi +.\"NODE "Parameters for external editor or viewer" +.SH "Parámetros para editor o visor externo" +Midnight Commander permite especificar opciones para editores y visores +externos. Midnight Commander busca la sección +.I [External editor or viewer parameters] +en el archivo de inicialización del sistema +.B %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +o en el del usuario +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini . +El nombre de la opción debe coincidir con el nombre (ruta completa) del editor +o visor externo. Su valor puede contener las siguientes variables: +.TP +.I %filename +El nombre del archivo a editar/ver. +.TP +.I %lineno +La línea de comienzo donde abrir el archivo. +.PP +Por ejemplo: +.PP +.nf +[External editor or viewer parameters] + vi=%filename +%lineno + joe=%filename +%lineno + more=%filename +%lineno +.fi +.PP +La línea de comienzo solo se pasa al editor o visor externo cuando se llama +desde la ventana de resultados de +.\"LINK2" +buscar archivo\&. +.\"Find File" +.PP +Si el editor o visor externo se lanza mediante las teclas F3/F4, MC confía en que +el programa (al menos «joe», pero puede que otros también) se comporte abriendo por +defecto el archivo donde se abrió la última vez. MC no evita que el editor o visor +externo pueda guardar y restaurar posiciones en los archivos abiertos. +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH "Ajustes del Terminal" +Midnight Commander permite hacer ajustes a la base de datos de terminales +del sistema sin necesidad de privilegios de superusuario. El programa +busca definiciones de teclas en el archivo de inicialización del sistema +.B %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +o en el del usuario +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini , +en la sección "terminal:nuestro\-terminal" y si no en "terminal:general". +Cada línea comienza con el identificador de la tecla, seguido de un signo +de igual y la definición de la tecla. Para representar el carácter de escape +se utiliza \\e y ^x para el carácter control\-x. +.PP +Los identificadores de tecla son: +.PP +.nf +f0 a f20 teclas de función f0 a f20 +bs tecla de borrado +home tecla de inicio +end tecla de fin +up tecla de cursor arriba +down tecla de cursor abajo +left tecla de cursor izquierda +right tecla de cursor derecha +pgdn tecla de avance de página +pgup tecla de retroceso de página +insert tecla de insertar +delete tecla de suprimir +complete tecla para completar +.fi +.PP +Ejemplo: para indicar que la secuencia Escape + [ + O + p corresponde +a la tecla de insertar, hay que colocar en el archivo +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini : +.PP +.nf +insert=\\e[Op +.fi +.PP +También se pueden usar +.IR "secuencias avanzadas" . +Por ejemplo: + +.nf + ctrl\-alt\-right=\\e[[1;6C + ctrl\-alt\-left=\\e[[1;6D +.fi + +.PP +Esto significa que Ctrl + Alt + Izquierda envía la secuencia de escape +\\e[[1;6D y que entonces Midnight Commander debe interpretar "\\e[[1;6D" +como Ctrl\-Alt\-Izquierda. +.PP +El identificador +.I complete +representa la secuencia usada para invocar el mecanismo de completar +nombres. Esto se hace habitualmente con +.IR Alt\-Tab , +pero podemos configurar otras teclas para esta función, especialmente en +teclados que incorporan tantas teclas especiales (bonitas pero inútiles +o infrautilizadas). +.SH "" +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH "ARCHIVOS AUXILIARES" +Los directorios indicados a continuación pueden variar de una +instalación a otra. También se pueden modificar con la variable de +entorno +.BR MC_DATADIR , +que de estar definida se emplearía en vez de %pkgdatadir%. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +Archivo de ayuda. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Archivo de extensiones por defecto del sistema. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Archivo de usuario de extensiones y configuración de visor y editor. Si +está presente prevalece sobre el contenido de los archivos del sistema. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +Archivo de configuración del sistema para Midnight Commander, solo si +el usuario no dispone de su propio +.IR ~/.config/mc/ini . +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Opciones globales de Midnight Commander. Se aplican siempre a todos los +usuarios, tengan +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +o no. Actualmente solo se emplea para los +.\"LINK2" +ajustes de terminal\&. +.\"Terminal databases" +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +Configuración personal del usuario. Si este archivo está presente entonces +se cargará la configuración desde aquí en lugar de desde el archivo de +configuración del sistema. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +Este archivo contiene los mensajes cortos de ayuda mostrados por el +programa. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +Este archivo contiene el menú de aplicaciones por defecto para el sistema. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +Menú de aplicaciones personal del usuario. Si está presente será utilizado +en lugar del menú por defecto del sistema. +.PP +.I ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.IP +La lista de directorios para el árbol de directorios y la vista en árbol. +.PP +.I ./.mc.menu +.IP +Menú local definido por el usuario. Si este archivo +está presente será usado en lugar del menú de aplicaciones +personal o de sistema. +.PP +Para cambiar el directorio de incio de MC se puede utilizar la variable de +entorno +.BR MC_PROFILE_ROOT . +El valor de MC_PROFILE_ROOT tiene que ser una ruta absoluta. Si MC_PROFILE_ROOT +no existe o está vacía se usa la variable HOME. Si HOME no existe o está vacía +se recurre a la biblioteca GLib para obtener los directorios de MC. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "LICENCIA" +Este programa se distribuye en los términos que recoge la Licencia Pública +General de GNU (GNU General Public License) tal como fue publicada por +la Fundación de Software Libre (Free Software Foundation). La ayuda +integrada con el programa contiene detalles sobre la Licencia y la +carencia de garantía. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH "DISPONIBILIDAD" +La última versión de este programa se puede encontrar en +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH "VÉASE TAMBIÉN" +mcedit(1), sh(1), bash(1), tcsh(1), zsh(1), ed(1), view(1), +terminfo(1), gpm(1). +.PP +.nf +La página web de Midnight Commander está en: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.PP +La presente documentación recoge información relativa a la versión 4.8 +(mayo de 2015). Esta traducción no está completamente actualizada con +la versión original en inglés. Para acceder a información sobre +versiones recientes consultar la página de manual en inglés que contiene +información más completa y actualizada. Para ver el susodicho manual +original ejecutar en la línea de órdenes: +.nf + LANG= LC_ALL= man mc +.fi +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH "AUTORES" +Los autores y contribuciones se recogen en el archivo AUTHORS de la +distribución. +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH "ERRORES" +Véase el archivo "TODO" en la distribución para saber qué falta por hacer. +.PP +Para informar de problemas con el programa, introducir una nueva incidencia +en https://www.midnight\-commander.org/. +.PP +Se debe proporcionar una descripción detallada del problema, la +versión del programa (que se obtiene con +.RI ' "mc \-V" ') +y el sistema operativo utilizados. Si el programa «revienta», sería +también útil disponer del estado de la pila. +.\"NODE "TRANSLATION" +.SH "TRADUCCIÓN" +Francisco Gabriel Aroca, 1998. Reformateado y actualizado por David +Martín, 2002\-2015. +.PP +Midnight Commander traducido a castellano por David Martín. diff --git a/doc/man/hu/Makefile.am b/doc/man/hu/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ef142b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/hu/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +LANG=hu +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in + +man_MANS = mc.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +DATE_LANG=hu_HU.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%Y. %B + +include ../date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/hu/Makefile.in b/doc/man/hu/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83cb00f --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/hu/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man/hu +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +LANG = hu +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in +man_MANS = mc.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +DATE_LANG = hu_HU.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %Y. %B +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/hu/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/hu/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man \ + uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/hu/mc.1.in b/doc/man/hu/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f26f62 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/hu/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,3226 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\"TOPICS "Tartalomjegyzék" +.TH MC 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "NÉV" +mc \- Fájlkezelő Unix típusú rendszerekhez +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "ALKALMAZÁSA" +.B mc +[\-abcCdfhPstuUVx] [\-l log] [dir1 [dir2]] [\-v file] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH "LEÍRÁS" +A Midnight Commander Unix típusú operációs rendszerekhez készített +könyvtár böngésző és filekezelő eszköz +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.SH "OPCIÓK" +.I "\-a" +A kereteket és vonalakat egyszerűsített karakterekkel rajzolja ki +.TP +.I "\-b" +Fekete\-fehér megjelenítés kérése +.TP +.I "\-c" +Engedélyezi a színes megjelenítést; nézd meg a +.\"LINK2" +Színek +.\"Colors" +részt további információkért. +.TP +.I "\-C opció" +Saját parancssori színválaszték beállításához használható. Az +.B opció +használatáról a +.\"LINK2" +Színek +.\"Colors" +részben olvashatsz. +.TP +.I "\-d" +Nem engedélyezi az egér használatát. +.TP +.I "\-f" +Megjeleníti a Midnight Commander fájlainak elérési útvonalát, ahogy azt +a fordításnál beállítottuk. +.TP +.I "\-k" +Törli azon gyorsbillentyűket, amelyek alapértelmezésben a termcap/terminfo +adatbázisból töltődnek be. Csak HP terminálokon érdemes használni, +ahol a funkció billentyűk nem működnek. +.TP +.I "\-l fájl" +Fájlba menti a szerverrel lebonyolított ftpfs dialógus adatait. +.TP +.I "\-P" +A program befejezésekor a Midnight Commander kiírja az utolsó +munkakönyvtárat, ez nem használható közvetlenül, csak olyan különleges +shell funkcióval, amely lehetővé teszi az aktuális shell könyvtár +helyett a Midnight Commander által utoljára meglátogatott könyvtárra való +átváltást (köszönet a funkcióért és a funkcióhoz szükséges kódért Torben +Fjerdingstad\-nek és Sergey\-nek közreműködésükért). Kérlek, ne csinálj +szó szerinti másolatot a funkció beállításairól. A fájlok forrása a +.I %pkglibexecdir%/mc.sh +(bash és zsh felhasználóknak), illetőleg a +.I %pkglibexecdir%/mc.csh +(tcsh felhasználóknak) fájl. Ilyenkor, amikor a funkció beállításokat +változtatod, a profil értékeket nem szükséges megváltoztatnod, csak +arról gondoskodj, hogy az MC\-t ne fordítsd eltérő beállításokkal. +.PP +A bash és zsh funkciók lehetnének rövidebbek is, de a bash környezete +nem fogadja el a program C\-z háttérbe helyezését. A temp fájlok a saját +~/.mc/tmp könyvtáradban találhatók, mert ez biztonságosabb, mint a közös +írható /tmp könyvtár. +.TP +.I "\-s" +Bekapcsolja a lassú terminál módot, ebben a módban a program nem használja +a sok energiát felemésztő vonal karaktereket és az un. bővített módot +kikapcsolja. +.TP +.I "\-t" +Ezt csak akkor használd, ha S\-Lang\-gel és terminfo\-val fordítottad a +programot: a +.B TERMCAP +váltózó értékét használja, és nem a rendszer szintű terminál adatbázist. +.TP +.I "\-u" +Nem engedélyezi a konkurrens shell\-ek használatát (csak akkor használható, +ha a Midnight Commandert a "concurrent shell" támogatással fordították). +.TP +.I "\-U" +Engedélyezi a konkurens shell támogatást (csak akkor használható ha +a Midnight Commander fordításakor beállították a subshell támogatást, +mint választható lehetőséget). +.TP +.I "\-v fájl" +Belép a belső fájlnézőbe a kiválasztott fájl megtekintéséhez. +.TP +.I "\-V" +Megmutatja a program verziószámát. +.TP +.I "\-x" +Belép xterm módba. (Két képernyős módban használható, és az egér escape +szekvenciái is használhatóak). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +Do not use X11 to get the state of modifiers Alt, Ctrl, Shift +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Force a "normal tracking" mouse mode. Used when running on +xterm\-capable terminals (tmux/screen). +.PP +Ha megadtad, akkor az első útvonal tartalma jelenik meg az aktuális +panelen; a második könyvtár útvonal pedig a másik panelen jelenik meg. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH "Áttekintés" +A Midnight Commander képernyőjének négy része van. Csaknem az egész +képernyőt a két könyvtár panelre tölti ki. Alapértelmezésben a képernyőn +alulról a második sor a parancssor, a legalsó sor pedig a funkció gombok +elnevezéseit jeleníti meg. A legfelső sor a +.\"LINK2" +Menüsor +.\"Menu Bar" +A menüsor esetleg nem látható, de könnyen megjeleníthető úgy, hogy a +felső sorra kattintasz az egérrel, vagy lenyomod az F9\-et. +.PP +A Midnight Commander lehetővé teszi, hogy egyszerre két panelt +láthassunk. Az egyik a panelek közül az aktív "current" panel +(a kiválasztó sáv az aktív panelen található). Majdnem minden +művelet a jelenlegi panelben történik. Néhány fájlművelet, úgy, mint +átnevezés\-áthelyezés és másolás alapértelmezésben a kiválasztatlan panelt +használja rendeltetési helyként (ne aggódj, végrehajtás előtt erre mindíg +rákérdez a megerősítés műveletnél). További információkért nézd meg a +.\"LINK2" +Könyvtár panelek\&, +.\"Directory Panels" +a +.\"LINK2" +Bal és Jobb oldali menük +.\"Left and Right Menus" +és a +.\"LINK2" +Fájl menü +.\"File Menu" +részt. +.PP +Futtathatsz rendszer parancsot is a Midnight Commander\-ből, annak egyszerű +begépelésével. A megjelenő shell parancssorba mindíg begépelheted a +parancsot és az Enter lenyomásakor a Midnight Commander lefuttatja azt; +olvasd el a +.\"LINK2" +Shell parancssor +.\"Shell Command Line" +és a +.\"LINK2" +Beviteli gombok +.\"Input Line Keys" +részt, hogy többet is megtudhass a parancssorról. +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Egér kezelés" +A Midnight Commander eredendően tartalmazza az egér támogatást. Ez +aktiválódik, ha +.B xterm(1) +terminálon futtatod (akkor is működik, amikor telnet, vagy rlogin +kapcsolatban vagy egy másik géppel az xterm\-ből), vagy, ha Linux konzolon +használod, és a +.B gpm +egér szerver fut. +.PP +Amikor bal gombbal kattintasz a fájlra, a könyvtár panalben a fájl +kiválasztódik; ha a jobb gombbal kattintasz, a fájlt ezzel megjelölöd +(vagy megszünteted azt, az azt megelőző állapotnak megfelelően). +.PP +A fájlra történő dupla kattintásra az MC megpróbálja futtani +azt, ha futtatható fájlról van szó; ha a +.\"LINK2" +fájl kiterjesztését +.\"Edit Extension File" +egy adott programhoz már hozzá rendelted, a fájl kiterjesztéséhez +hozzárendelt program lefut. +.PP +Továbbá rájuk kattintva láthatóvá teszi a parancs futtatásához megadott +funkció billentyű elnevezéseket is. +.PP +Ha az egérrel a könyvtár panel legfelső sorára kattintunk, az egy +oldalnyit lapozik visszafelé. Ennek megfelelően az alsó sorra kattintva +egy oldalnyit ugrasz előre. Ez az eszköze használható a +.\"LINK2" +Súgó néző +.\"Contents" +és a +.\"LINK2" +Könyvtárfa +.\"Directory Tree" +esetén is. +.PP +Az egérgomb automatikus ismétlésének határértéke alapesetben 400 +ezredmásodpercnyi. Ez megváltoztatható az +.\"LINK2" +~/.config/mc/ini +.\"Save Setup" +fájlban a +.I mouse_repeat_rate +paraméter értékének megváltoztatásával. +.PP +Ha a Commander\-t egér támogatással indítottad az eredeti egér +tulajdonságok (szöveg kivágás és beillesztés) a Shift gomb lenyomásával +érhetők el. +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Billentyűzet" +Néhány Midnight Commander parancshoz szükséges a +.I Control (~vezérlő) +(ezeket CTRL\-lal vagy CTL\-lel jelöljük) és a +.I Meta (~Váltó) +(ezeket ALT\-tal vagy néha Compose\-zal jelöljük) gombok használata. Ebben +a leírásban a következő rövidítéseket használjuk: +.PP +C\-<kar> ilyenkor lenyomva kell tartanod a Control billentyűt addíg, amíg +a megadott karaktert <kar> le nem ütöd. Így például a C\-f esetén: tartsd +lenyomva a Control billentyűt, amíg az f\-et begépeled. +.PP +M\-<kar> ilyenkor lenyomva kell tartanod a Meta, vagy az Alt billentyűt +addíg, amíg a megfelelő karaktert <kar> be nem gépeled. Ha ez nem a +Meta, vagy az Alt billentyű, akkor használd az ESC\-et, a megfelelő +karakter <kar> begépelésekor. A Meta funkció Linux alatt úgy érhető el, +hogy megnyomjuk, majd elengedjük az ESC billentyűt. A Meta funkció az +ezután megnyomott billentyűre vonatkozik! +.PP A Midnight Commander +beviteli eszköze a GNU Emacs szerkesztő billentyűzet\-kombinációihoz +hasonlóan működik. +.PP +Több részben is beszélünk majd ezekről a gombokról. Az itt következők a +legfontosabbak ezek közül. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Fájl menü +.\"File Menu" +rész tartalmazza a Fájl menü parancsainak billentyűzet gyorskapcsolóit. +Ez a rész tartalmazza még a funkció billentyűket is. Ezen parancsok +jobbára valamilyen műveletet végeznek el, általában a kiválasztott +fájlon, vagy a kijelölt fájlokon. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Könyvtár panelek +.\"Directory Panels" +rész tartamazza azokat a billentyűket, amelyek a későbbi műveletekhez +kiválasztják, vagy kijelölik a fájlokat (a művelet általában a Fájl +menüben megtalálható). +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Shell Parancssor +.\"Shell Command Line" +felsorolja azokat a gombokat, amelyeket használhatsz a begépeléshez és a +parancssor szerkesztéshez. Ezek átmásolják a fájlnevet a könyvtár +panelből a parancssorba (a túlságosan sok gépelést elkerülendő), vagy +hozzáférést enged a parancssor előzményeihez. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Beviteli gombok +.\"Input Line Keys" +a beviteli sorok szerkesztésére szolgálnak. Ezen eszközök a +parancssorban és lekérdező dialógus (query dialog) beviteli soraihoz +szükségesek. +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH " Különleges gombok" +Itt azon billentyűket találhatod meg, amelyek nem tartoznak bele +egyetlen más kategóriába sem: +.PP +.B Enter. +Ha található valamilyen szöveg a parancssorban (az egyik sor a panelek +aljánál), akkor azt lefuttatja, mint parancsot. Ha nem található szöveg +a parancssorban, és a kiválasztás egy könyvtár felett van a Midnight +Commander\-ben, akkor végrehajtja a +.B chdir(2) +(könyvtárváltás) parancsot a kiválasztott könyvtárra és újraolvassa a +panel információit; ha a kiválasztás egy futtatható fájlon van, akkor +lefuttatja azt. Végül, ha a kiválasztott fájl kiterjesztése szerepel a +.\"LINK2" +társításoknál\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +akkor a kijelölt parancs fut le. +.PP +.B C\-l +Frissít minden információt a Midnight Commander. +.PP +.B C\-x c +Futtatja a +.\"LINK2" +Chmod +.\"Chmod" +parancsot a fájlon, vagy a kijelölt fájlokon. +.PP +.B C\-x o +Futtatja a +.\"LINK2" +Chown +.\"Chown" +parancsot a fájlon, vagy a kijelölt fájlokon. +.PP +.B C\-x l +Futtatja a link parancsot. +.PP +.B C\-x s +Futtatja a szimbolikus link parancsot. +.PP +.B C\-x i +Beállítja a másik panel információ megjelenítési +módját. +.PP +.B C\-x q +Beállítja a másik panelt a quick view\-ra (villámnézetre). +.PP +.B C\-x ! +Futtatja a +.\"LINK2" +Parancskimenet panel +.\"External panelize" +parancsot. +.PP +.B C\-x h +Futtatja a +.\"LINK2" +könyvtár hozzáadása a Könyvjelzőkhöz +.\"Hotlist" +parancsot. +.PP +.B M\-! +Futtatja a Szűrés (Filtered view) parancsot, a +.\"LINK2" +Belső fájlnézőnek +.\"Internal File Viewer" +megfelelően. +.PP +.B M\-? +Futtatja a +.\"LINK2" +Fájl keresés +.\"Find File" +parancsot. +.PP +.B M\-c +Beugrik a +.\"LINK2" +Gyors cd +.\"Quick cd" +dialógboxba. +.PP +.B C\-o +A parancs futtatásakor xterm\-en Linux, vagy FreeBSD konzolon, megmutatja +az előzö parancs kimeneteit. Linux konzolon történő futtatáskor a +Midnight Commander egy beépített programot használ (cons.saver) a +képernyő\-információk elmentésére és visszaállítására. Tehát az MC +képernyőjét bármikor kikapcsolhatjuk, és visszakapcsolhatjuk. +.PP +Ha a subshell támogatást is befordították, bármikor begépelheted a C\-o +gombokat ahhoz, hogy visszatérhess a Midnight Commander saját +képernyőjéhez, majd a C\-o gombok használatával visszatérhetsz a +parancsodhoz. Ha az alkalmazásod felfüggesztett állapotba kerül, ennek a +trükknek a használatakor, nem leszel képes futtatni más parancsot a +Midnight Commander\-ből addíg, amíg a felfüggesztett alkalmazást meg nem +szakítod. +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Könyvtár panelek" +Ez a rész azon billentyűket sorolja fel, amelyek a könyvtár panelekben +használhatóak. Ha tudni akarod azt, hogy hogyan tudod megváltoztatni a +panelek külső megjelenését, akkor nézd meg a +.\"LINK2" +Bal és jobboldali menük +.\"Left and Right Menus" +részt. +.PP +.B Tab, C\-i +Váltja az aktuális panelt. Az előzőleg inaktív panel lesz a jelenlegi +panel és az előzőleg aktív panel lesz az inaktív panel. A kiválasztó sáv +az előzőleg aktívról átugrik az újonnan aktív panelre. +.PP +.B Insert, C\-t +DEPRECATED! A fájlok kijelölésére az Insert gombot használhatod (a kich1 terminfo +kombináció), vagy a C\-t (Control\-t) kombinációt. A kijelölés +megszüntetéséhez csak újra ki kell jelölni a kijelölt fájlt. +.TP +.B Insert +to tag files you may use the Insert key (the kich1 terminfo sequence). +To untag files, just retag a tagged file. +.TP +.B M\-e +to change charset of panel you may use M\-e (Alt\-e). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding you may select "directory up" (..) in active panel. +To cancel the charsets in all directories, select "No translation " in +the dialog of encodings. +.PP +.B M\-g, M\-r, M\-j +A panel legfelső, középső és alsó fájljának kiválasztásához használd +sorban a megfelelő billentyű\-kombinációt. Linuxban M\-h a "history" +bekapcsolására szolgál. +.PP +.B M\-t +Vált a jelenlegi lista megjelenítési módról a következő megjelenítési +módra. Ezzel gyorsan át tudsz váltani a hosszú listáról a rendezett +listára és a felhasználó által definiált listázási módra. +.PP +.B C\-\\\\ (control\-backslash) +Megjeleníti a +.\"LINK2" +Könyvjelzőket +.\"Hotlist" +és átvált a kiválasztott könyvtárra. +.PP +.B + \ (plusz) +Ez használható a fájlok csoportjainak kiválasztásához (kijelöléséhez). A +Midnight Commander megjelenít egy ablakot a jelölendő csoport pontos +kiterjesztésének megadásához. Ha a +.I Shell kifejezések +opció engedélyezve van, csak a pontos kiterjesztések használhatók a +shell\-ben kiterjesztésként (* jelent egy, vagy több karaktert, a ? +egyetlen karaktert). Ha a +.IR "Shell kifejezések" \-et +kikapcsolva tartjuk, a fájlok kijelölésére a normál kifejezések +használhatóak (lásd +.IR "ed (1)" ). +.PP +.B \\\\ (backslash). +Használd a "\\" gombot a fájlcsoportok kiválasztásának megszüntetéséhez. +Ez a Plusz gomb ellentettje. +.PP +.B crsr up, C\-p +Az előző panel\-bejegyzésre mozgatja a kiválasztó sávot. +.PP +.B crsr down, C\-n +A következő bejegyzésre lépteti a kiválasztó sávot a panelben. +.PP +.B home, a1, M\-< +A kiválasztó sávot a panel első bejegyzésére mozgatja. +.PP +.B end, c1, M\-> +A kiválasztó sávot a panel utolsó bejegyzésére mozgatja. +.PP +.B Page Down, C\-v +A kiválasztó sávot egy oldallal lejjebb viszi. +.PP +.B Page Up, M\-v +A kiválasztó sávot egy oldallal feljebb viszi. +.PP +.B M\-o +Ha a másik panel a lista panel és te a könyvtárodon vagy az aktív +panelen, akkor a másik panel tartalma állítódik be a jelenleg aktív +könyvtárban (hasonlóan az Emacs C\-o gombjához), egyébként a másik panel +tartalma állítódik be a jelenlegi könyvtár eredeti könyvtárába. Ha a +kurzor könyvtáron áll, akkor az inaktív panelen megnyitja. +.PP +.B C\-PageUp, C\-PageDown +Csak Linux konzolon történő futtatáskor: könyvtárat vált felfelé (..) a +jelenleg kiválasztott könyvtárnak megfelelően. +.PP +.B M\-y +Az előzőleg látogatott könyvtárba lép vissza, ami azonos a panel tetején +látható '<' jelre egérrel történő kattintással. +.PP +.B M\-u +A következő látogatott könyvtárba lép át, azonos a '>' +egérrel történő lenyomásával. +.PP +.B M\-S\-h, M\-H +Megjeleníti a könyvtár előzményeket, azonos a 'v' egérrel történő +lenyomásával. +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH " Quick search" +.PP +.B C\-s, M\-s +Elindítja a fájl keresést a könyvtár listában. Amikor a keresés +aktív, a billentyűlenyomások hozzáadódnak a keresett szöveghez a +parancssorban. Ha a +.I Mini fájlinfó +opció engedélyezve van, a kereső szöveg a mini\-fájlinfó sorban jelenik +meg. Amikor gépelsz, a mini kiválasztó sáv átlép a következő fájlra, +amely a begépelt szöveggel egyezik. A +.IR backspace , +vagy a +.I DEL +gombokat használhatod a gépelési hibák javítására. Ha a C\-s gombokat +használod újra, új keresés kezdhető. +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Shell parancssor" +Ez a rész tartalamazza azokat a billentyű\-kombinációkat, +amiket a túlságosan sok gépelés elkerülésére használhatunk a +shell parancsok begépelésénél. +.PP +.B M\-Enter +A jelenleg kiválasztott parancs nevét átmásolja a parancssorba. +.PP +.B C\-Enter +Azonos az M\-Enter\-rel, de ez csak Linux konzolon működik. +.PP +.B M\-Tab +Fájlnév, parancs, változó, felhasználónév és hostnév +.\"LINK2" +Kiegészítés +.\"Completion" +készítés. A hiányosan bebillenyűzött filenevet kiegészíti. +.PP +.B C\-x t, C\-x C\-t +A parancssorba másolja az aktív panel kijelölt fájlait (ha nincsennek +kijelölt fájlok, a kiválasztott fájlt) (C\-xt), vagy a másik paneléit +(C\-x C\-t). +.PP +.B C\-x p, C\-x C\-p +Az első billentyű\-sorozat az aktív panel elérési útját átmásolja a +parancssorba, a második billentyű\-sorozat pedig az inaktív panel +könyvtárának elérési útját másolja át a parancssorba. +.PP +.B C\-q +A quote (idézet) parancsot olyan karakterek beillesztésére használhatod, +amelyeket egyébként a Midnight Commander használ (ilyen pl. a '+' +szimbólum). Például a C\-+ elindítja a fájlkijelőlést ahelyett, hogy +beíródna a parancssorba. A +.B C\-q +segítségével viszont be lehet írni. +.PP +.B M\-p, M\-n +Ezeket a gombokat az előzőleg kiadott parancsok (a history) közötti +böngészésre használhatod. Az M\-p átléptet az előző bejegyzésre, az M\-n +átléptet a következő bejegyzésre. +.PP +.B M\-h +Megjeleníti a jelenlegi beviteli sor előzményeit (history). +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " Általános mozgási lehetőségek billentyűzettel" +A Súgó néző, a Fájl néző és a Könyvtárfa azonos kódokat használ a +mozgáshoz. Emiatt ezek pontosan ugyanazokat a billentyűket fogadják el. +Ezeken túl néhány olyan van, amely csak az adott eszköz számára +fogadható el. +.PP +A Midnight Commander többi része is használ néhány billentyűt a +mozgáshoz, ezért ebben a részben ezek is használhatók a mozgáshoz. +.PP +.B crsr Up, C\-p +Egy sort ugrik vissza. +.PP +.B crsr Down, C\-n +Egy sort ugrik előre. +.PP +.B Prev Page, Page Up, M\-v +Egy teljes oldalnyit ugrik vissza. +.PP +.B Next Page, Page Down, C\-v +Egy teljes oldalnyit ugrik előre. +.PP +.B Home, A1 +A fájl elejére ugrik. +.PP +.B End, C1 +A fájl végére ugrik. +.PP +A Súgó néző és a Fájl néző az itt látható további billentyű\-kombinációk +használatát teszi lehetővé: +.PP +.B b, C\-b, C\-h, Backspace, Delete +Egy teljes oldalnyit ugrik hátra. +.PP +.B Space bar +Egy teljes oldalnyit ugrik előre. +.PP +.B u, d +Egy fél oldalnyit ugrik vissza, vagy előre. +.PP +.B g, G +Az elejére, vagy a végére ugrik. +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Beviteli gombok" +A beviteli sorok (ezek azok, amelyeket a +.\"LINK2" +Shell parancssor +.\"Shell Command Line" +és a programok lekérdező dialógusablakai használnak) a következő +billyentyűk használatát engedélyezik: +.PP +.B C\-a +a kurzor a sor elejére ugrik. +.PP +.B C\-e +a kurzor a sor végére ugrik. +.PP +.B C\-b, a kurzort egy pozícióval balra mozgatja. +.PP +.B C\-f, a kurzort egy pozicióval jobbra mozgatja. +.PP +.B M\-f +egy szónyit ugrik előre. +.PP +.B M\-b +egy szónyit ugrik vissza. +.PP +.B C\-h, backspace +törli az előző (balra eső) karaktert. +.PP +.B C\-d, Delete +törli az adott pontban lévő karaktert (a kurzor alól). +.PP +.B C\-@ +beállítja a kijelölés helyét. +.PP +.B C\-w +kimásolja a szöveget a kurzor és a kijelölt rész közül a kill bufferbe +és a bemeneti sorokat törli a szövegből. +.PP +.B M\-w +kimásolja a szöveget a kurzor és a kijelölt rész közül a kill bufferbe. +.PP +.B C\-y +visszateszi a kill bufferben lévő bejegyzést. +.PP +.B C\-k +törli a szöveget a kurzortól a sor végéig. +.PP +.B M\-p, M\-n +Ezen billentyűk segítségével közvetlenül böngészhetünk az előzőleg +kiadott parancsok közt. Az M\-p visszaléptet az előző bejegyzésre, az M\-n +pedig átléptet a következőre. +.PP +.B M\-C\-h, M\-Backspace +egy szót töröl visszafelé. +.PP +.B M\-Tab +Fájlnév, parancs, változó, felhasználónév és hostname +.\"LINK2" +Kiegészítést +.\"Completion" +csinál. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Menüsor" +A menüsor akkor jelenik meg, ha az F9\-es gombot lenyomod, vagy ha a +képernyő legfelső sorára kattintasz. A menüsor öt menüt tartalmaz: +"Bal", "Fájl", "Parancsok", "Beállítások" és "Jobb". +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Bal és jobboldali menük +.\"Left and Right Menus" +lehetővé teszik a bal és jobb oldali könyvtár panelek külső +megjelenítésének módosítását. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Fájl menü +.\"File Menu" +felsorolja a kiválasztott fájlon, vagy a kijelölt fájlokon végrehajtható +parancsokat. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Parancsok menü +.\"Command Menu" +felsorolja az általános és a jelenleg kiválasztott fájltól, kijelölt +fájloktól függetlenül végrehajtható parancsokat. +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH " Bal és jobboldali menük" +A könyvtárpanelek megjelenése változtatható a +.B "Bal" +és +.B "Jobb" +menükben. +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Fájllista..." +A fájllista módozatok a fájlok megjelenítésének beállítására szolgálnak, +négy különböző listázási mód használható: +.BR Hosszúlista , +.BR Rövidlista , +.B Részleteslista +és a +.BR Felhasználói . +A hosszú könyvtár nézet megmutatja a fájlneveket, a méretüket és a +módosításuk idejét. +.PP +A rövid lista nézet csak a fájl nevét és ezt két oszlopban (ekkor +kétszer, vagy többször annyi fájlt láthatsz mint a többi nézetekben). A +részletes lista tisztán az +.B "ls \-l" +parancs kimenetét jeleníti meg. A részletes lista helyenként képernyő +széles is lehet. +.PP +Ha a "Felhasználói" megjelenítési formátumot választod, akkor te tudod +meghatározni azt, hogy mi is jelenjen meg a panelekben. +.PP +A felhasználói megjelenítésnek a panel méretét megadó bejegyzéssel kell +kezdődnie. Ez lehet "half" (fél), vagy "full" (teljes), ezek határozzák +meg azt, hogy a panelek fél, illetve teljes képernyő szélesen +jelenjenek\-e meg. +.PP +A panel méretének magadása után, meghatározhatod azt, hogy a panel két +oszlopot tartalmazzon, egy "2"\-es hozzáadásával a felhasználói +formátumot megadó szöveghez. +.PP +Ezután az opcionális fájl jellemzők neveit kell megadnod. Az itt +megjelenített értékek használhatóak: +.TP +.B name +a fájl nevét jeleníti meg. +.TP +.B size +a fájl méretét jeleníti meg. +.TP +.B bsize +ez a +.B size +formátum egyik formája. Megjeleníti a fájlok és könyvtárak méretét, ha +az utóbbi tartalmaz SUB\-DIR\-t vagy UP\-\-DIR\-t. +.TP +.B type +megjelenít egy egykarakteres érték típust. Ez a karakter állítja be azt, +hogy mit jelenítsen meg az +.B "ls \-F" +flaggel. A csillag\-jel a futtatható fájlokhoz, a "slash" jel (törtvonal) +a könyvtárakhoz, a "at\-sign" a linkekhez, az "equal" (egyenlőség) jel a +socket\-ekhez, a "hyphen" a karakteres eszközökhöz, a pluszjel a blokk +eszközökhöz, a "pipe" a fifo\-hoz, a "tilde" a könyvtárak szimbolikus +linkjeihez és a felkiáltójel a stalled szimlinkekhez (linkek, amik +sehova sem mutatnak) használhatók. +.TP +.B mark +a kijelölt fájl megjelölése, csillagozása, space, ha a fájl nem +kijelölt. +.TP +.B mtime +a fájl utolsó módosításának (modify) ideje. +.TP +.B atime +a fájl utolsó hozzáférésének (access) ideje. +.TP +.B ctime +a fájl készítésének (create) ideje. +.TP +.B perm +a megjelenített szöveg a fájl jelenlegi hozzáférési jogainak +(permission) bitjeit mutatja. +.TP +.B mode +a fájl jelenlegi nyolcas számrendszerbeli hozzáférését mutató bit +értéke. +.TP +.B nlink +a fájlra mutató linkek száma. +.TP +.B ngid +a GID (a csoport azonosító kódja; szám). +.TP +.B nuid +a UID (felhasználó azonosító kódja; szám). +.TP +.B owner +a fájl tulajdonosa. +.TP +.B group +a fájl csoportja. +.TP +.B inode +a fájl inódja (helyfoglalása a harddiszken). +.PP +Ezeken kívül még a következő érték megnevezések adhatók meg az értékek +megjelenítéskori rendezéséhez: +.TP +.B space +helykitöltő a megjelenítési formátumban. +.TP +.B | +ez a karakter használható arra, hogy függőleges vonalat jelenítsünk meg. +.PP +Egy érték fix méretének megadásához (mezőszélesség megadás), csak egy +\&':'\-ra van szükséged és azt követően a megjelenített érték karaktereinek +számára, ha a szám egy '+' jelet követ, akkor a méret meghatározás a +minimum érték szélességet adja meg, ha a program több helyet talál a +képernyőn, mint ami az alap megjelenítéshez szükséges, ki tudja +használni a maradékot is, az értékek helyének kinyújtásával. +.PP +Például a +.B Hosszú lista +megjelenítés ehhez a formátumhoz hasonló: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +A +.B Részletes lista +megjelenítés ennek a formátumnak megfelelő: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +Érdemes például ezt kipróbálni: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +A Paneleket még a következő módokba lehet állítani: +.TP +.B Infó +Az infó nézet a jelenleg kiválasztott fájlra vonatkozó adatokat mutatja, +és, ha látható információ a jelenlegi fájlrendszerről, akkor azt is. +.TP +.B Könyvtárfa +A könyvtárfa nézet azonos a +.\"LINK2" +Könyvtárfa +.\"Directory Tree" +eszközzel. Lásd az erről szóló részt további információkért. +.TP +.B Gyorsnézőke +Ebben a módban a panel átvált +.\"LINK2" +Belső fájlnézőre\&, +.\"Internal File Viewer" +amely megjeleníti a jelenleg kiválasztott fájl tartalmát, ha a panelt +választod ki (a tab billentyűvel, vagy az egérrel), elérhetővé válnak a +fájlnéző parancsai. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH " Rendezés..." +Nyolc rendezési sorrend található itt: Név szerinti, Kiterjesztés +szerinti, Módosítás ideje szerinti, Elérés ideje szerinti, az inode +információk módosítása szerinti, Méret szerinti, az Inode szerinti és a +Rendezetlen elrendezés. A Rendezés dialógus ablakban választhatsz a +rendezési szabályok közül és megadhatod azt is, hogy a megjelenítés a +kijelölt rendezési sorrenddel ellentétes legyen a megfelelő box +kijelölésével. +.PP +Alapértelmezésben a könyvtárak a fájlok előtt találhatók, de ez +megváltoztatható a +.\"LINK2" +Beállításokban +.\"Options Menu" +.RB ( "Minden fájl vegyesen" +opciójával). +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Szűrés" +A szűrés parancs engedélyezi számodra azt, hogy meghatározhasd a shell +mintát (például +.BR *.tar.gz ), +ha csak az ilyen fájlokat szeretnéd megjeleníteni. Tekintet nélkül +a filter kiegészítésre, a könyvtárak, és a könyvtárakra mutató linkek +megjelennek a könyvtár panelben. +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Frissít" +A frissítés parancs újraolvassa a könyvtár fájl listáját. Ez más +processzekben is használható, amikor készítünk egy új fájlt, vagy törlünk +fájlokat. Ha a panelbe mentett fájlneveket használod, a panel újra fogja +olvastatni a könyvtár bejegyzéseket és törli ezen információkat (Lásd a +.\"LINK2" +Parancskimenet panel +.\"External panelize" +részt további információkért). +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH " Fájl menü" +A Midnight Commander az F1 \- F10 gombokat, mint gyorsbillentyűket +használja a Fájl menü parancsainak végrehajtásához. Az F\-es gombok +(funkciógombok) a TERMINFO kf1 ... kf10 escape szekvenciáit használják. Ha +a terminálon nincs funkciógomb támogatás, neked kell néhány funkciót +végrehajtanod az ESC (META) gomb és az 1\-től 9\-ig terjedő és a 0 számok +használatával ( F1\-től F9\-ig és F10 egyenként megfelelően). +.PP +A Fájl menü a következő parancsokat tartalmazza (a gyorsbillentyűk +megjegyzésként megtalálhatóak): +.PP +.B Súgó (F1) +.PP +Segítségül hívja a beépített hypertext Súgó nézőt. A +.\"LINK2" +Súgó nézőn\&, +.\"Contents" +belül a Tab gombot használhatod a következő link kiválasztására és az +Enter gombot a link követésére. A Space és a Backspace gombok az előre\- +és hátralépésre használhatóak a súgó oldalon belül. Az F1 újbóli +lenyomására egy teljes listát kapsz az elérhető gombokról. +.PP +.B Menü (F2) +.PP +Ez segítségül hívja a +.\"LINK2" +felhasználói menüt\&. +.\"Edit Menu File" +A felhasználói menü könnyű használatot biztosít az új menükkel és az +extra eszközökkel a Midnight Commander\-hez. +.PP +.B Megnéz (F3, Shift\-F3) +.PP +Megmutatja a jelenlegi fájlt. Alapértelmezésben ehhez a +.\"LINK2" +Belső fájlnézőt +.\"Internal File Viewer" +használja, de ha a "Belső Nézegető" opció ki van kapcsolva, a +.B PAGER +környezeti változóban megadott külső fájlnézőt fogja használni. Ha a +.B PAGER +értéke sincs megadva, a "view" parancsot fogja használni. Ha a +Shift\-F3\-at használod, a fájlnéző minden formázás, vagy átszerkesztés +nélkül nyitja meg a fájlt. +.PP +.B Szűrés... (M\-!) +.PP +Ez egy parancssort jelenít meg a kiadandó parancshoz és a hozzá tartozó +kiegészítés magadásához (a kiegészítés alapértelmezésben a jelenleg +kiválasztott fájl neve), a parancs kimeneteit a belső fájl nézővel +nézhetjük meg. +.PP +.B Szerkesztés (F4) +.PP +Alapértelmezésben a +.B vi +editort használja, vagy az +.B EDITOR +környezeti változóban megadott szerkesztőt, vagy a +.\"LINK2" +Belső fájl szerkesztőt\&, +.\"Internal File Editor" +ha a belső szerkesztő be van kapcsolva. +.PP +.B Másol (F5) +.PP +Egy beviteli ablakot jelenít meg, amely alapértelmezésben a nem +kiválasztott panel könyvtárát adja meg rendeltetési helyként, majd +átmásolja a kiválasztott fájlt (vagy kijelölt fájlokat, ha egynél több +fájlról van szó) a beviteli ablakban megadott könyvtárba. Space for +destination file may be preallocated relative to preallocate_space +configure option. A folyamat +futását a C\-c, vagy ESC lenyomásával szakíthatod meg. A forrás maszk +beállításairól (ami általában a *, vagy a ^\\(.*\\)$ közül valamelyik. +Ezekről a "Shell kifejezések" beállításnál, illetve a +.\"LINK2" +Kijelölt fájlok másolása vagy áthelyezése +.\"Mask Copy/Rename" +rendeltetésénél olvashatsz. +.PP +Néhány rendszeren a láthatóság beállítható a háttérben történő +másoláshoz a background gomb kijelölésével (vagy a M\-b lenyomásával a +dialógboxban). A +.\"LINK2" +Háttérmunkák +.\"Background jobs" +a háttér processzek beállítására használható. +.PP +.B Link (C\-x l) +.PP +Hard linket csinál a fájlhoz. +.PP +.B SymLink (C\-x s) +.PP +Szimbolikus linket készít a jelenlegi fájlhoz. Azoknak, amik nem tudják +mire jók ezek a linkek: kapcsolatot hoz létre a fájlhoz a fájl egy +kicsiny másolatával, ám a forrás fájlnév és a célfájl fájlneve ugyanazt +a fájlt jeleníti meg. Például, ha szerkeszted ezeket a fájlokat, minden +változtatás, amit elvégzel, mindkét fájlban végrehajtódik. Néhányan a +linkeket alias\-nak (~álnév), vagy gyorsbillyentyűnek hívják. +.PP +A hard link valós fájlként látszik. Elkészítése után nem lehet megmondani +azt, hogy melyik az eredeti és melyik a link. Ha ezek közül az egyiket +törlöd, a másik sértetlen marad. Ez nagyon eltér attól, hogy egy fájl +önmaga másolataként jelenjen meg. Akkor használj hard linket, amikor +nem igazán tudod mit akarsz csinálni. +.PP +A szimbolikus link az eredeti fájl nevére vonatkozik. Ha az eredeti fájlt +töröljük, a szimbolikus link használhatatlan lesz. Ezt elég egyszerű +úgy megjegyezni, hogy ez a fájlok megjelenítése más néven. A Midnight +Commander "@"\-jelet jelenít meg a fájlnév előtt, ha az szimbolikus linkkel +mutat valahova (a könyvtárakat kivéve, ahol tilde (~) jelet mutat). Az +eredeti fájl, ahova mutat a link, láthatóvá válik a mini\-fájlinfó sorban, +ha a +.I "Mini fájlinfó" +opciót engedélyezted. Használj szimbolikus linket, ha el akarod kerülni +az összevisszaságot, amit a hard link okozhat. +.PP +.B Átnevezés, vagy mozgatás (F6) +.PP +Egy beviteli ablakot jelenít meg, amely alapértelmezésben a nem +kiválasztott panel könyvtárát adja meg rendeltetési helyként, és +átmásolja a kiválasztott fájlt (vagy kijelölt fájlokat, ha egynél +több fájlról van szó) a beviteli ablakban megadott könyvtárba úgy, +hogy az eredeti helyéről letörli. A folyamat futását a C\-c, vagy az +ESC lenyomásával megszakíthatod. További részletekért lásd a Másolás +műveletet az elöbbiekben, mivel több dolog azonos. +.PP +Néhány rendszeren a láthatóság beállítható a háttérben történő másolás a +.B Háttérben gomb +kijelölésével (vagy a M\-b lenyomásával a dialógboxban). A +.\"LINK2" +Háttérmunkák +.\"Background jobs" +használható a háttér processzek beállítására is. +.PP +.B Új könyvtár (F7) +.PP +Megnyit egy beviteli dialógus ablakot, amelyben megadhatod a készítendő +könyvtár jellemzőit. +.PP +.B Törlés (F8) +.PP +Törli a kiválasztott fájlt, vagy kijelölt fájlokat, vagy könyvtárakat +az aktuális panelben. A folyamatot a C\-c, vagy az ESC lenyomásával +megszakíthatod. +.PP +.B Gyors cd (M\-c) +Használd a +.\"LINK2" +Gyors cd +.\"Quick cd" +parancsot, ha teljes parancssort akarsz alkalmazni a könyvtárváltáshoz. +.PP +.B Csoport kiválasztás (+) +.PP +Ez a fájlok csoportjainak kiválasztására (kijelölésére) használható. A +Midnight Commander promptot (dialógus ablakot) jelenít meg a csoport +meghatározásának leírására. Ha a +.I Shell kifejezések +et engedélyezted, a pontos beírásnak megfelelő fájlnevek választódnak +ki a shell\-ben (*\-ot helyezve az üres\-, vagy a több karakterhez és ?\-et +helyezve egy adott karakter helyére). Ha a +.IR "Shell kifejezések" \-et +kikapcsoltad, akkor a fájlok kijelölése a szabványos kifejezésekkel +(regular expression) történik (lásd +.IR "ed (1)" ). +.PP +.B Csoport kiválasztás megszüntetése (\) +.PP +A fájlcsoportok kiválasztottságának megszüntetésére szolgál. Ez a +.I "Csoport kiválasztás" +parancs ellentéte. +.PP +.B Kilépés (F10, Shift\-F10) +.PP +Leállítja a Midnight Commander\-t. A Shift\-F10 akkor használható a +kilépéshez, ha rejtett shellt használsz. A Shift\-F10 nem a Midnight +Commander\-rel utoljára meglátogatott könyvtárat őrzi meg, hanem a Midnight +Commander induláskori könyvtárát. +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Gyors cd" +Ez a parancs akkor használható, amikor a teljes parancssort akarod a +.\"LINK2" +cd +.\"The cd internal command" +parancshoz használni, parancssor nélkül. Ez a parancs egy kis dialógus +ablakot jelenít meg, amelybe bármit begépelhetsz, amit a parancssorban a +.B cd +parancs után begépeltél volna, és ezután használd az entert.Ez az eszkőz +mindenben ugyanaz, mint a +.\"LINK2" +belső cd parancs\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Parancsok menü" +A +.\"LINK2" +Könyvtárfa +.\"Directory Tree" +parancs lehetővé teszi számodra azt, hogy fa szerkezetben jelenítsd meg +a könyvtárakat. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Fájl keresés +.\"Find File" +parancs lehetővé teszi számodra a speciális fájlok megkeresését. A +"Panelek felcserélése" parancs felcseréli a két könyvtár panel +tartalmát. +.PP +A "Panelok ki\-be" parancs megmutatja az utolsó shell parancs kimenetét. +Ez csak xterm\-en, Linux\-on és FreeBSD konzolon működik. +.PP +A Könyvtár összehasonlítás (C\-x d) parancs összehasonlítja a könyvtár +paneleket egymással. Ilyenkor használható a Másol (F5) parancs a panelek +azonossá tételére. Ennek három formája van. A gyors változat csak a fájlok +méretét, és dátumát vizsgálja meg. Az alapos változat teljesen, byte\-ról +byte\-ra végzi el a vizsgálatot. Az alapos változat nem használható, +ha a gép nem támogatja az mmap(2) rendszerhívást. A 'Csak fájlhossz' +szerinti változat csak a fájlméretet hasonlítja össze és nem ellenőrzi +le a dátumukat. +.PP +A Parancssor előzmények parancs megmutatja a begépelt parancsok +listáját. Az itt kiválasztott parancs átmásolódik a parancssorba. A +Parancssor előzmények a M\-p, vagy a M\-n begépelésével is elérhető. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Könyvjelzők (C\-\\) +.\"Hotlist" +parancs felveszi a jelenlegi könyvtárat a gyakran használt könyvtárak +közé. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Parancskimenet panel +.\"External panelize" +lehetővé teszi számodra külső parancsok futtatását, majd a program +tartalmát a jellegi panelbe teszi. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Társítások +.\"Edit Extension File" +lehetővé teszik számodra a futtatandó programok meghatározását, a +kiválasztott fájl kiterjesztésének (fájlnév vége) megfelelően akkor, ha +futtatod, megtekinted a tartalmát, átszerkeszted vagy más egyéb dolgot +szeretnél vele csinálni. A +.\"LINK2" +Menu editor edit +.\"Edit Menu File" +parancs a felhasználói menü szerkesztésére használható (ami az F2 +lenyomásával elérhető). +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Könyvtárfa" +A Könyvtárfa parancs fa formában mutatja meg a könyvtárakat. Ebből a +listából kiválaszthatsz egy könyvtárat és a Midnight Commander abba a +könyvtárba lép át. +.PP +Két lehetőség van a fa megjelenítésére. Az igazi könyvtárfa parancs +elérhető a Parancsok menüből. A másik mód a Bal, vagy a Jobb menüben a +fa nézet kiválasztása. +.PP +A Midnight Commander a fa nézet készítéséhez csak minden könyvtár belső +beállításait szkenneli le, így magszabadít téged a hosszú várakozástól. Ha +megtalálod a megtekinteni kívánt könyvtárat, menj rá a szülökönyvtárára +és nyomd le a C\-r\-t (vagy az F2\-t). +.PP +A következő gombokat használhatod: +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Általános mozgási lehetőségek billentyűzettel\&. +.\"General Movement Keys" +.PP +.B Enter. +A Könyvtárfánál kilép a Könyvtárfából és a jelenlegi panelben átváltja +a könyvtárat. Fa nézetben átvált erre a könyvtárra a másik panelben és +a jelenlegi panelben marad a fa nézet. +.PP +.B C\-r, F2 (Újraolvasás). +Újraolvassa ezt a könyvtárat. Ezt akkor használd, ha a fa nézet +aktualitását vesztette: ez megkeresi a belső könyvtárakat és megmutat +néhány belső könyvtárat, amely eddig nem létezett. +.PP +.B F3 (Elfelejt). +Törli ezt a könyvtárat a fa nézetből. Ezt az összevisszaság eltüntetésére +használhatod a fa nézetben. Ha vissza akarsz tenni egy könyvtárat a fa +nézetbe, nyomd le az F2\-t a szülő könyvtáron állva. +.PP +.B F4 (Statikus\-Dinamikus). +Vált a dinamikus (alapértelmezett) és a statikus böngésző mód között. +.PP +A statikus böngésző módban a Fel és Le gombokat használhatod a könyvtár +kiválasztására. Minden ismert könyvtár látható. +.PP +A dinamikus böngésző módban a Fel és Le gombokat a testvér könyvtárak +kiválasztására, a Bal gombot a szülő könyvtárra való lépéshez és a Jobb +gombot az alárendelt könyvtárra lépéshez. Csak a szülő, a testvér és +az alárendelt könyvtár látható, a többi nem. A fa nézet a dinamikus +váltáshoz használhatod. +.PP +.B F5 (Másolás). +A könyvtárat másolja. +.PP +.B F6 (Átnevezés vagy mozgatás). +Áthelyezi a könyvtárat. +.PP +.B F7 (Létrehoz Könyvtárat). +Új könyvtárat készít a könyvtár +alá. +.PP +.B F8 (Töröl). +Törli a könyvtárat a fájlrendszerből. +.PP +.B C\-s, M\-s +Megkeresi a következő könyvtárat, amely megfelel a keresett szövegnek. +Ha nincs ilyen könyvtár, akkor egy sorral lejjebb lép. +.PP +.B C\-h, Backspace +Törli az utolsó karaktert a keresési +szövegben. +.PP +.B Bármely más karakter. +Karaktert tesz hozzá a keresési szöveghez és átlép a következő olyan +könyvtárra, amely ezekkel a karakterekkel kezdődik. A fa nézetben +először a C\-s\-sel tudod aktiválni a keresést. A keresett szöveg a mini +fájlinfó sorban jelenik meg. +.PP +A további műveletek csak a könyvtárfában érhetőek el. Ezeket a fa nézet +nem támogatja. +.PP +.B F1 (Súgó) +Belép a Súgó nézőbe és megjeleníti ezt a részt. +.PP +.B Esc, F10 +Kilép a Könyvtárfából. Nem vált könyvtárat. +.PP +Az egér használható. A dupla kattintás egy Enter\-nek felel meg. További +információkat az +.\"LINK2" +Egér kezelés +.\"Mouse Support" +részben találhatsz. +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Fájl keresés" +A Fájl keresés eszköz először megkérdezi a keresés induló könyvtárát, +majd a keresett fájlnevet. A Könyvtárfa gomb lenyomásával kiválaszthatod +az induló könyvtárat a +.\"LINK2" +Könyvtárfa +.\"Directory Tree" +nézetből. +.PP +A tartalom mezőben szabványos kifejezéseket is használhatunk megadásával +(man egrep(1)). Használd az egrep escape (kilépés) karakterét (backslash, +\\). Például, ha az "strcmp (" szöveget keresed, ezt így add meg: +"strcmp \\(" (a dupla idézőjel nélkül). +.PP +Az Oké gomb lenyomásával indíthatod el a keresést. Keresés közben a +keresés leállítható a Felfüggeszt gombbal és folytatható a Folytatás +gombbal. +.PP +Böngészhetsz a fájllistában a le és fel gombok használatával. Az Ugrás +gombbal a jelenlegi könyvtárat fel tudod cserélni a kiválasztott +fájléval. Az Újra gomb az új keresés paramétereit megkérdezi tőled. A +Kilép gomb bezárja a keresés műveletet. A Panelba gomb a elhelyezi a +jelenlegi könyvtárban a keresett fájlokat, így további műveletek +végezhetőek velük (megtekintés, másolás, mozgatás, törlés és a többi). A +panelba helyezés művelet után a C\-r lenyomásával visszatérhetsz a normál +fájl listához. +.PP +Lehetséges azon könyvtárak listájának megadása, amelyeket át szeretnénk +ugrani a Fájl Keresés parancs használata során (például ha a keresés +során el szeretnéd kerülni a CDROM\-ot, vagy az NFS könyvtárait amelyeket +slow linkkel csatoltak). +.PP +Az átlépendő könyvtárakat a +.B ignore_dirs +változó állítja be az ~/.config/mc/ini fájlod +.B FindFile +részében. +.PP +A könyvtár elemeket kettősponttal tudod elválasztani egymástól, emire +itt egy példát is láthatsz: +.PP +.nf +[FindFile] +ignore_dirs=/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Parancskimenet panel +.\"External panelize" +parancs használatos néhány műveletben. +.PP +A Fájl keresés parancs egyszerű lekérdező eljárás, amely a +Parancskimenet panelt használja a szükséges fájlok megkeresésére. +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " Parancskimenet panel" +A Parancskimenet panel lehetvé teszi számodra külső program futtatását, +és a parancs kimenetének megjelenítését a jelenlegi panelben. +.PP +Például, ha egyszerre szeretnéd módosítani a jelenlegi könyvtár összes +szimbolikus linkjét a jelenlegi panelben, a következő parancsot is +használhatod a parancskimenet panelben: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +.PP +A parancs befejeztével a panelban lévő könyvtár\-bejegyzések száma nem +nagyobb mint a jelenlegi könyvtáré, de minden szimbolikus link fájlt +tartalmaz. +.PP +Ha minden olyan fájlt meg akarsz jeleníteni a panelben, amelyet ftp +szerverről töltöttél le, használhatod az awk parancsot az átmásolt +fájlok neveit tartalmazó log fájl tartalmának megjelenítésére: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +A gyakran használt parancsokat elmentheted egy számodra egyértelmű +néven, így azokat gyorsan újra előhívhatod a későbbiekben is. Úgy tudsz +ilyen parancsokat létrehozni, hogy begépeled a parancsot a beviteli +mezőbe, és lenyomod az Új gombot. Ekkor begépelheted azt a nevet, +amilyen néven el szeretnéd menteni a parancsot. Következő alkalommal +csak ki kell választanod a parancsot a listából ahhoz, hogy ne kelljen +mégegyszer begépelned azt. +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Könyvjelzők" +A Könyvjelzők parancs megmutatja a gyorslistában szereplő könyvtárakat. +A Midnight Commander a kiválasztott értéknek megfelelő könyvtárra +váltja át a panel tartalmát. A Könyvjelzők dialógus ablakból kiveheted a +már létező elnevezés\-\-könyvtár párokat, és hozzáadhatsz újakat is. +Továbbiak hozzáadásához a Hozzáadás a kedvencekhez parancsot +használhatod (C\-x h), amely a jelenlegi könyvtárat hozzáadja a +könyvjelzőkhöz. A felhasználó ezután egyéni megnevezéssel hivatkozhat a +könyvtárra. +.PP +Ezzel a gyakran használt könyvtárakhoz ugorhatunk. A CDPATH változó +használatát megtekintheted a +.\"LINK2" +A cd belső parancs +.\"The cd internal command" +leírásánál. +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Társítások" +Ez az +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +szerkesztéséhez segítségül fogja hívni a szövegszerkesztődet. +If this file does not exist and you are not root, it will be copied from +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If you are root, you can choose the file to edit: user's +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +or system\-wide +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +The format of this file is described in detail in it. +.\"NODE " Background jobs" +.SH " Háttérmunkák" +Ezzel szabályozhatod néhány Commander háttérfolyamat állapotát (csak a +másolás és a mozgatás fájlműveletek tehetők háttérbe). Ezeket a +háttérmunkákat állíthatod le, indíthatod újra, lőheted ki itt. A +linuxban futó background processzekre hatástalan. +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Menü szerkesztés" +A felhasználói menüt a felhasználó testre szabhatja. Ez az aktulis +könyvtár .mc.menu fájlja, ha az létezik, de csak, ha az a felhasználó +(illetve a root) a tulajdonosa, és nem lehet bárki számára írható. Ha +nem talál ilyen fájlt, az +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +keresése a következő lépés, egyébként pedig az mc az alapértelmezett +rendszerszintű menüt használja, pl.: +.IR %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu , +esetleg %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.menu. +.PP +A menü fájl formátuma nagyon egyszerű. A sorok, amelyek bármivel +kezdődhetnek, de a space, vagy a tab megkülönböztetett menübejegyzések +(gyorsbillentyűként definiálható az első karakter). Minden olyan sor ami +szóközzel, tabulátorral kezdődik, parancs, amit lefuttat az mc, ha +kiválasztottad a bejegyzést. +.PP +Ha az opciót kiválasztod, a parancssor bemásolódik egy ideiglenes fájlba +a temp könyvtárba (ez vagy az /usr/tmp, vagy a /tmp), és ilyenkor a fájl +lefut. Ez lehetővé teszi a felhasználónak normál shell parancslista +(script) készítését a menüben. Továbbá egyszerű Makrók helyezhetők el +benne, amelyek a menü kód futtatása előtt futnak le. További +információkért lásd a +.\"LINK2" +Macro Helyettesítő +.\"Macro Substitution" +részt. +.PP +Egy példa az mc.menu fájlra: +.PP +.nf +A A kiválasztott fájlok listázása oktális formában + od \-c %f + +B A hiba leírás szerkesztése és elküldése a root\-nak + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Midnight Commander bug" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Levél olvasás + emacs \-f rmail + +N A Usenet hírek elolvasása + emacs \-f gnus + +H Az info hypertext böngésző elindítása + info + +J A jelenlegi könyvtár rekurzív átmásolása a másikba + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + +K Az aktuális könyvtárról archiválása + echo \-n "Name of distribution file: " + read tar + ln \-s %d `dirname %d`/$tar + cd .. + tar cvhf ${tar}.tar $tar + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X A kijelölt tömörített tar fájl kicsomagolása + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Alapértelmezett Feltételek +.PP +Néhány menü bejegyzés irányadó feltételként szerepelhet. A feltétel eslő +oszlopában az '=' karakternek kell lennie. Ha a feltétel igaz, a +menüpont alapértelmezett bejegyzéssé fog válni. +.PP +.nf +Feltétel szintaktika: = <belső\-felt.> + vagy: = <belső\-felt.> | <belső\-felt.> ... + vagy: = <belső\-felt.> & <belső\-felt.> ... + +A belső feltétel az alábbiak közül valamelyik: + + y <minta> a jelenlegi fájlminta szintaktikusan + illeszkedik? + csak menüszerkesztéshez + f <minta> jelenlegi fájlminta egyezik? + F <minta> egyéb fájlminta egyezik? + d <minta> jelenlegi könyvtár minta egyezik? + D <minta> más könyvtár minta egyezik? + t <type> jelenlegi fájltípus? + T <type> más fájltípus? + x <fájlnév> ez futtatható fájlnév? + ! <belső\-felt.> a belső feltételek ellentéte +.fi +.PP +A minta lehet a shell által értelmezett, vagy lehet szabványos +kifejezés. Felülírhatod a rendszerszintű értékeket a Shell kifejezések +opcióval a "shell_patterns=x" beírásával a menü fájl első sorában (ahol az +"x" a 0 és 1 közül valamelyik lehet). +.PP +A következő karakterek közül egyet, vagy többet is begépelhetsz: +.PP +.nf + n nem könyvtár + r szabályos fájl + d könyvtár + l link + c speciális karakter + b speciális blokk + f fifo + s socket + x futtatható fájl + t fájl kijelölve +.fi +.PP +Például az 'rlf' bejegyzés esetén lehet fájl, link, vagy fifo. A 't' +típus egy kicsit különleges, mert nem fájlon, hanem panelen dolgozik. A +\&'=t t' feltétel igaz akkor, ha a jelenlegi panelben vannak kijelölt +fájlok és hamis, ha nincsennek. +.PP +Ha a feltétel '=?'\-lel kezdődik '=' helyett, a hibakereső (debug) +kimenete jelenik meg, mialatt akkor a feltétel eredményét a program +kiértékeli. +.PP +A feltételek kiértékelése balról\-jobbra történik. Ennek megfelelően: +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +kibontva: +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +Egy példa a feltételek használatára: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L Listázza az aktuális tar archívumot + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Járulékos feltételek +.PP +Ha a feltétel '+'\-szal (vagy '+?'\-lel) kezdődik az '=' (vagy '=?') +helyett, ez járulékos feltétel. Ha a feltétel igaz, a menü bejegyzés +megjelenik a menüben. Ha a feltétel hamis, a menü bejegyzés nem jelenik +meg. +.PP +Kombinálhatod is az alapértelmezett és a járulékos feltételeket a +feltétel sorának '+='\-lel, vagy '=+'\-szal (vagy '+=?'\-lel és '=+?\-lel', +ha hiba követőt is szeretnél) kezdésével. Ha két eltérő feltételt +szeretnél használni, egyet járulékosként és egyet alapértelmezettként, +két feltételsort kell készítened; egyet '+'\-szal kezdődően és egy +másikat '='\-lel kezdődően. +.PP +A magyarázat sorát '#'\-kal kell kezdened. A kiegészítő magyarázat sorait +\&'#'\-kal, space\-szel, vagy tab\-bal kell kezdened. +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH " Beállítások" +A Midnight Commander rendelkezik néhány olyan opcióval, amely lehetővé +teszi a be\- illetve a kikapcsolását néhány dialógus eszköznek, amely az +adott menüből elérhető. Az opció engedélyezett, ha csillag, vagy "x" áll +előtte. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Beállítások +.\"Configuration" +parancs dialógus ablakot nyit meg, amelyben a Midnight Commander főbb +beállításait elvégezheted. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Megjelenés +.\"Layout" +parancs dialógus ablakot jelenít meg, amelyben az mc képernyőn történő +megjelenésének opcióit találod egy csokorban. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Megerősítés +.\"Confirmation" +parancs dialógus ablakot jelenít meg, amelyben meg tudod adni azt, hogy +mely műveletekhez kell megerősítést kérni. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Képernyőbitek +.\"Display bits" +parancs dialógus ablakot nyit meg, amellyel beállíthatod azt, hogy +milyen karakterek jelenhessenek meg a terminálodon. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Billentyűzet tanítás +.\"Learn keys" +dialódus ablakot jelenít meg, amelyben megvizsgálhatod azokat a +gombokat, amelyek nem működnek néhány terminálon, és kijavíthatod őket. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Csatolt fájlrendszer... +.\"Virtual FS" +parancs olyan dialógus ablakot jelenít meg, amelyben VFS\-hez kapcsolódó +opciókat adhatod meg. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Beállítások mentése +.\"Save Setup" +parancs elmenti a Bal, Jobb és a Beállítások jelenlegi értékeit. Néhány +egyéb beállítás is elmentődik. +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Az MC konfigurálása" +A dialógus ablalban lévő opciók három csoportra bonthatók: Panel +Beállítások, Futtatás után vár... és Egyéb. +.PP +.B Panel Beállítások +.PP +.I Backup fájlt mutat. +Alapértelmezésben a Midnight Commander nem mutatja a '~'\-re végzödő +fájlokat (a GNU' \-B opciójának megfelelően). +.PP +.I Rejtett fájlt mutat. +Alapértelmezésben a Midnight Commander láthatóvá teszi a ponttal kezdődő +fájlokat (az ls \-a \-hoz hasonlóan). +.PP +.I Kijelölés után lefele lép +Alapértelmezésben, amikor kijelölsz egy fájlt (a Insert +gomb közül valamelyikkel,) a kiválasztó sáv lefelé mozdul el. +.PP +.I Legördülő menük. +Amikor ezt az opciót engedélyezed, az +.B F9 +gomb lenyomásakor a menü le fog ereszkedni, egyébként te csak a menü +címét tudod megjeleníteni és ezek után tudod kiválasztani a menü +bejegyzést a nyíl gombokkal, vagy annak megjelölt betűjével, és csak +ekkortól tudsz menüpontot kiválasztani. +.PP +.I Minden fájl vegyesen. +Ha ezt az opciót engedélyezted, a fájlok és könyvtárak vegyesen jelennek +meg. Ha az opció ki van kapcsolva, a felsorolás a könyvtárakkal (és a +könyvtár linkekkel) fog kezdődni, és ezeket az egyéb fájlok követik. +.PP +.I Gyors könyvtárlista. +Ez az opció alapértelmezésben ki van kapcsolva. Ha bekapcsolod a gyors +könyvtárlista funkciót, a Midnight Commander egy trükköt fog használni +akkor, ha a könyvtár tartalma megváltozik. A trükk az, hogy csak +akkor olvassa újra a könyvtárat, ha a könyvtár inode\-ja megváltozott; +ez azt jelenti, hogy csak fájl létrehozásakor, és törlésekor kerül +újraolvasásra. Ha valami a könyvtárban lévő fájl inode\-jában történik +(fájlméret\-változás, módok, és tulajdonosok változnak, stb.) a +megjelenítés nem kerül frisítésre. Ebben az esetben, ha az opció be van +kapcsolva, kézzel tudod újraolvastatni a könyvtár tartalmát (a +.IR C\-r \-rel). +.PP +.B Futtatás után vár +.PP +Az általad kiadott parancs lefutása után a Midnight Commander várhat +amiatt, hogy meg tudd vizsgálni a parancs kimenetét. Három beállítás +adható meg ennek a változónak: +.I Soha +Abban az esetben, ha te nem kívánod látni azt, hogy mit írt ki a +parancs. Ha Linux, vagy FreeBSD konzolt, vagy xterm\-et használsz, a +parancs kimenete a +.I C\-o +begépelésével megjeleníthető. +.I Buta terminálokon +várakozási üzenetet fogsz kapni azon a terminálon, amely nem képes +megmutatni az utolsóként kiadott parancs kimenetét (bármilyen terminálon, +amely nem xterm, vagy nem Linux konzol). +.I Mindig +A program mindig vár, miután a parancsod lefutott. +.PP +.B Egyéb beállítások +.PP +.I Részletes műveletinfó. +Ez van bejelölve akkor, ha a fájl +Másolás, Átnevezés és Törlés műveletek részletesek (pl., egy +dialógus ablakot jelenít meg néhány művelethez). Ha lassú +terminálod van, beállíthatod azt, hogy ne legyenek részletes +műveletek. Automatikusan kikapcsolódik ez a beállítás, ha a +terminálod sebessége kissebb mint 9600 bps. +.PP +.I Byteok számítása +Ha ez az opció engedélyezve van, a Midnight Commander számítja a teljes +byte méretet és a teljes fájlszámot a Másolás, Átnevezés és a Törlés +műveleteknél. Ez a funkció ellát téged több pontos folyamat sávval, +kiegészítve azt néhány sebességgel. Ez az opció nem látható, ha a +.IR "Részletes műveletinfó" t +nem engedélyezted. +.PP +.I Shell mintázatok +Alapesetben a Kiválasztás, Kiválasztás megszüntetése és a Szűrés +parancsok a shell\-nek megfelelő pontos kiterjesztéseket használják. A +következő konverzió átalakítások vannak jelenleg: a '*' kicserélődik +a '.*'\-gal (zeró, vagy több karakter); a '?' kicserélődik a '.'\-tal +(pontosan egy karakter) és a '.' a szó szerinti ponttal. Ha az opció nem +engedélyezett, akkor a szokásos kiterjesztések azonosak a ed\-ben lévőkkel: +.IR "man ed" . +.PP +.I Beállítások automatikus mentése +Ha ez az opciót bekapcsoltad, amikor kilépsz a Midnight Commander\-ből, +az MC opcióinak beállításait az ~/.config/mc/ini fájlba menti. +.PP +.I Auto menük. +Ha ez az opció engedélyezett, a felhasználói menü megjelenik az mc +indításkor. Különösen azok számára ajánlott, akik nem szoktak hozzá a +UNIX\-os környezethez. +.PP +.I Belső szövegszerkesztő +Ha ez az opció engedélyezve van, a beépített fájlszerkesztőt használja a +fájlok szerkesztésére. Ha az opciót nem engedélyezzük, az mc az +.B EDITOR +környezeti változóban megadottat használja. Ha ez sincs megadva, a +.BR vi \-t +fogja használni. Lásd a +.\"LINK2" +Belső fájlszerkesztő\&. +.\"Internal File Editor" +részben. +.PP +.I Belső nézegető. +Ha ezt az opciót engedélyeztük, a beépített fájlnézőt fogja a fájlok +tartalmának megtekintéséhez használni a program. Ha nem engedélyeztük, a +.B PAGER +környezeti változóban megadott pager értéket használja. Ha nincs megadva +a pager értéke, a +.B Megnéz +parancsot használja. Lásd a +.\"LINK2" +Belső fájlnéző +.\"Internal File Viewer" +részben. +.PP +.I Kiegészítés: minden mutat +Alapértelmezésben a Midnight Commander megjelenít minden elem +.\"LINK2" +Kiegészítést\&. +.\"Completion" +Ha a kiegészítésben bizonytalan vagy, nyomd le az +.BR M\-Tab \-ot +és a második alkalommal kiegészíti, első alkalommal csak annyit jelenít +meg, mint amennyit lát, és ebben az esetben a kétértelműség miatt egy +beep hangot is kapsz. Ha látni szeretnéd az összes kiegészítést, az első +.B M\-Tab +lenyomása után, engedélyezd ezt az opciót. +.PP +.I Forgó törtjel +Ha ezt az opciót engedélyezted, a Midnight Commander forgó törtjelet +jelenít meg a jobb felső sarokban, mutatva ezzel azt, hogy munka van +folyamatban. +.PP +.I Mozgás, mint lynx\-ben +Ha ezt az opciót engedélyezted, a nyíl gombokat, mint automatikus +könyvtárváltókat használhatod ha az aktuális kiválasztás egy belső +könyvtár és a shell parancssor elérhető. Alapértelmezésben ez a +beállítás ki van kapcsolva. +.PP +.I Cd követi a linket +Ez az opció, ha be van állítva, akkor a Midnight Commander követi a +könyvtárak logikai kapcsolatait ha könyvtárat váltasz valamelyik +panelben, vagy a cd parancsot használod. Ez alapértelmezésben a bash +jellemzője. Amikor ez nincs beállítva, a Midnight Commander a valós +könyvtárszerkezetet követi, úgy, mint amikor a cd..\-t gépeled be, a +könyvtáron keresztül átlépsz a "szülő" könyvtárba, és nem abba a +könyvtárba, amelyre a link mutat. +.PP +.I Biztonságos törlés +Ha ezt az opciót engedélyezted, a fájlok közvetlen szándék nélkül +törlését megnehezíted. Alapesetben egy "Megerősítés" dialógus ablaknan +választhatunk az "Igen" és "Nem" gombok között törléskor. Alapesetben ez +az opció nem engedélyezett. +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Megjelenés" +A Megjelenés dialógus ablakban megváltoztathatod a képernyő\-megjelenés +beállításait. Beállíthatod azt, hogy a menüsor, a parancssor, a tippek +és a funkcióbillentyűk láthatóak legyenek\-e. Linux, vagy FreeBSD +konzolon megadhatod azt, hogy hány sorban legyen látható a megjelenő +ablak. +.PP +A képernyő nyugalomban lévő részén két panelt használhatunk. Megadhatod +azt, hogy vízszintesen, vagy függőlegesen ossza\-e fel a képernyőt a +két panel. A felosztás lehet egyenlő arányú, vagy te is megadhatod az +arány mértékét. +.PP +Alapesetben a könyvtár panelokban lévő fájlok csak néhány színnel kerülnek +megjelenítésre, de te azt is megadhatod, hogy a +.I jogosultságok +vagy a +.I fájltípusok +jelenjenek\-e meg speciális +.\"LINK2" +Színekkel\&. +.\"Colors" +Ha pl. a jogosultságokat kérted, a +.I jogok +és a +.I mode +értékek a Midnight Commander\-t futtató felhasználó jogainak megfelelően +láthatók a +.\"LINK2" +Fájllistában +.\"Listing Format..." +a +.I kiválasztás +színével. Ez különösen előnyös, ha a könyvtárunkban más felhasználó +fájljai is előfordulnak. Ha a fájltípus megjelölést engedélyezted, +a fájlok a fájltípusuknak megfelelően jelennek meg (pl. könyvtár, core +fájl, futtatható fájl, stb.). +.PP +Ha a +.I Mini fájlinfó +opciót engedélyezted, egy sor lesz látható a panel alján, a látható, +jelenleg is kiválasztott bejegyzések információival. +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Megerősítés" +Ebben a menüben tudod beállítani enter lenyomására a törlés, +felülírás, futtatás, és programból történő kilépés +Megerősítésének opcióit. +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Képernyőbitek" +Ez az ablak a megjelenített karakterek tartományának beállítására +szolgál. Ez a beállítás lehet 7\-bites, ha terminálod, vagy +megjelenítésed csak a hét bites karaktereket támogatja; az +ISO\-8859\-1\-ben az ISO\-8859\-1\-es karaktetábla valamennyi karaktere +megjeleníthető; végül teljes 8 biten azokon a terminálokon, ahol teljes +8 bitet meg tudsz jeleníteni. A két utolsó megjelenítési forma képes az +ő és ű betűk kivételével az összes magyar betűt kijelezni a Belső +filenézőben. +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Billentyűzet tanítás" +Ebben a dialógus ablakban tudod letesztelni azt, hogy terminálodon az +F1\-F20, Home, End, stb. gombok megfelelően működnek\-e. Ezek gyakran nem +működnek, mióta néhány Terminál adatbázis megváltozott. +.PP +A mezőket a Tab gombbal és a vi mozgató gombjaival ('h' balra, 'j' le, +\&'k' fel és 'l' jobbra) járhatod körbe. Ha egy kurzor gombot legalább +egyszer megnyomsz, OK\-val jelöli; kilépéskor ez a állapot elmenthető. +.PP +Ezek közül bármelyiket tesztelheted a gomb lenyomásával. Amint +lenyomtad, a gomb megfelelően fog működni, és egy OK jelenik meg a gomb +neve mellett. Amelyik gomb OK\-val jelölődik meg, általában az +használható. Az F1 az első alkalommal csak le fogja ellenőrizni, hogy +megfelelően műkődik\-e, másodszor már a súgót jeleníti meg. A tab gomb +továbbra is működni fog. +.PP +Ha néhány gomb nem működik megfelelően, akkor nem jelenik meg OK a gomb +neve után. Ilyenkor lehetőséged van kijavítani ezt. Ezt ennek a gombnak +a lenyomásával (egér, vagy a Tab gombbal és az Enter\-rel) tudod +kijavítani. Ekkor egy piros színű üzenet jelenik meg amely arra kér +téged, hogy üsd le a megfelelő gombot. Ha ezt meg akarod szakítani, csak +nyomd le az Esc\-et, és várj amíg az üzenet el nem tűnik. Egyébként a +begépelt gomb lesz az megkérdezett gombbal azonosított. Ezután a +dialógus ablak eltűnik. +.PP +Amikor végeztél minden gombbal, ezt elmentheted a Mentés gombbal az +~/.config/mc/ini fájlba, a [terminal:TERM] részbe (ahol a TERM a jelenlegi +terminál neve), vagy elvetheted. Ha minden gombod megfelelően működik, +és nem javítottál semmit, akkor (természetesen) nem fog menteni semmit +sem. +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " Csatolt (látszólagos) fájlrendszer" +Ez az opció lehetővé teszi számodra a +.\"LINK2" +Csatolt fájlrendszer +.\"Virtual File System" +informcáció cache\-ének beállítását. +.PP +A Midnight Commander a memóriában tárolja a csatolt fájlrendszer +információit a fájlrendszeren lévő fájlok gyorsabb elérése érdekében +(Például, könyvtár listázás trükkje távoli ftp szerverek esetén). +.PP +Azonfelül a tömörített fájlok tartalmához való hozzáféréskor (például, +tömörített tar fájlok) a Midnight Commander készít egy kitömörített temp +fájlt a merevlemezeden. +.PP +A memóriában és a temp fájlban lévő információk között van némi időbeni +különbség, te a hozzáférési sebesség maximalizálása miatt átállíthatod a +cached információk újraolvasási paramétereit. +.PP +A Tar Fájlrendszer elég ügyesen kezeli a tar fájlokat: csak beolvassa a +könyvtár bejegyzéseket, és amikor szükséges a tar fájlban tárolt +információk használata, újraolvassa azokat, és kinyeri a szükséges +infókat. +.PP +Igazából a tar fájlok tömörítettek maradnak (alap tar fájlok fajtái +esetében), és mivel ezek a fájlok természetes fájlok (a tar fájlok +könyvtár\-bejegyzéseinek kiolvasására nem kell várni), a tar fájlrendszer +a fájlt a lemez temp könyvtárba kitömöríti, ilyenkor a kitömörített +tarfájl hozzáférhető, mint szabványos tar fájl. +.PP +Ha elkezdjük böngészni a merevlemezen található tar fájlokat, majd +elkezdjük nézni a többit, elveszne a rájuk vonatkozó információ. A +Midnight Commander a memória cache\-ben tárolja ezeket egy időre, hogy +gyorsabb legyen az újraolvasásuk. Az alap frissítési idő egy perc. +.PP +Az +.\"LINK2" +FTP fájlrendszer +.\"FTP File System" +az ftp szerverről beolvasott könyvtárszerkezetet éppígy a cache\-ben +tárolja. A cache frissítési ideje az +.I ftpfs cache elévülési idő +opcióban konfigurálható. Alacsony érték esetén minden művelet nagyon +lassúvá válhat az FTP fájlrendszeren, mivel minden művelet az ftp szerver +lekérdezésével történik. +.PP +Ezenfelül definiálhatod a proxy host\-ot az ftp adatforgalomhoz, és +beállíthatod a Midnight Commander\-t, hogy mindíg használja a proxy +host\-ot. Az ezzel kapcsolatos információkat lásd az +.\"LINK2" +FTP fájlrendszernél\&. +.\"FTP File System" +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Beállítások mentése" +A Midnight Commander indításkor megpróbálja az indítási információkat +beolvasni az +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +fájlból. Ha ez a fájl nem létezik, ezeket az információkat a +rendszerszintű konfigurációs fájlból fogja beolvasni, amelyek a +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +fájlban találhatóak meg. Ha ez a rendszerszintű konfigurációs fájl sem +létezik, a MC az alapértelmezett beállításokat használja. +.PP +A +.I Beállítások mentése +parancs elmenti a +.\"LINK2" +Bal és Jobb oldali menü +.\"Left and Right Menus" +és a +.\"LINK2" +Beállítások +.\"Options Menu" +menü beállításait az ~/.config/mc/ini fájlba. +.PP +Ha aktiválod az +.I Auto Beállításmentés +opciót a MC mindíg elmenti a beállításait kilépéskor. +.PP +Még vannak beállítások, amelyek nem állíthatóak be a menükből. Ezek +beállításához használd a kedvenc fájlszerkesztődet. Lásd a +.\"LINK2" +Speciális Beállítások +.\"Special Settings" +részt a további információkért. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Az operációs rendszer parancsainak futtatása" +Közvetlenül futtathatod a parancsokat azok begépelésével a Midnight +Commander beviteli sorába, vagy a futtatandó program kiválaszátásval +valamely panelben a kiválasztó sáv segítségével, és az Enter +használatával. +.PP +Ha az Enter\-t az adott fájl felett lenyomod, nem indul el azonnal, hanem +a Midnight Commander leellenőrzi a kiválasztott fájl kiterjesztését a +.\"LINK2" +Társításokban +.\"Edit Extension File" +találhatónak megfelelően. Ha talál egyezést, akkor a kódnak megfelelő +bejegyzést futtatja. Egy nagyon egyszerű +.\"LINK2" +Macro Helyettesítő +.\"Macro Substitution" +végzi ezt el a parancs futtatása előtt. +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH " A cd belső parancs" +A +.I cd +parancs végrehajtását a Midnight Commander nem adja át a shellnek. Tehát +a shellben értelmezett makrók és helyettesítések helyett a saját +beállításai szerint dolgozik: +.PP +.I Tilde helyettesítés +A (~) karakter helyettesíti a home könyvtár nevét, ha hozzáfűzöl bármely +felhasználói nevet, akkor az MC a megadott felhasználó saját HOME +könyvtárára ugrik. +.PP +Például a ~guest a guest felhasználó könyvtárára mutat, amíg a ~/guest a +guest könyvtárra a te home könyvtáradban. +.PP +.I Előző könyvtár +Vissza tudsz ugrani abba a könyvtárba, ahol előzőleg voltál a '\-' +speciális könyvtárnévvel így: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I CDPATH könyvtárak +Ha a könyvtármeghatározás a +.B cd +parancs és nem a jelenlegi könyvtár, akkor a Midnight Commander a +.B CDPATH +környezeti változót keresi a könyvtárnevek között. +.PP +Például te beállítod a +.B CDPATH +változót az ~/src:/usr/src\-re, lehetővé teszi számodra azt, hogy bármely +könyvtárról a fájlrendszeren belül a relatív név használatával bárhonnan +átléphess az ~/src\-be, vagy az /usr/src\-be bárhonnan (például a +.I cd linux +az /usr/src/linux könyvtárba léptet át). +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Makro helyettesítő" +Amikor belépsz a +.\"LINK2" +felhasználói menübe\&, +.\"Edit Menu File" +vagy a +.\"LINK2" +társítások parancsot\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +futtatod, illetve a parancsot a parancssorból futtatod, a Makró +Helyettesítőt használod. +.PP +A makrók: +.PP +.I "%i" +.IP +A space\-szel jelölt rész, amely azonos a kurzor oszlop pozíciójával. +Csak menü szerkesztéshez. +.PP +.I "%y" +.IP +A jelenlegi fájl szintaktikájának típusa. Csak menü szerkesztéshez. +.PP +.I "%k" +.IP +A blokk fájl neve. +.PP +.I "%e" +.IP +A hiba fájl neve. +.PP +.I "%m" +.IP +A jelenlegi menu neve. +.PP +.I "%f" +és +.I "%p" +.IP +A jelenlegi fájl neve. +.PP +.I "%n" +.IP +Csak a jelenlegi fájlnév kiterjesztés nélkül. +.PP +.I "%x" +.IP +A jelenlegi fájl kiterjesztése. +.PP +.I "%d" +.IP +A jelenlegi könyvtár neve. +.PP +.I "%F" +.IP +A jelenlegi fájl a nem kijelölt panelben. +.PP +.I "%D" +.IP +A könyvtár neve a nem kiválasztott panelben. +.PP +.I "%t" +.IP +A jelenleg kijelölt fájlok. +.PP +.I "%T" +.IP +A kijelölt fájlok a nem aktív panelben. +.PP +.I "%u" +és +.I "%U" +.IP +Azonos a %t és a %T makrókkal, de hozzáadáskor a fájlok nem kerülnek +kijelölésre. Ezt a makrót csak egyszer használhatod egy menü fájlon +belül, vagy fájl kiterjesztésben bekezdés esetén, mivel a következő +alkalommal ezek nem lesznek kijelölt fájlok. +.PP +.I "%s" +és +.I "%S" +.IP +A kiválasztott, kijelölt fájlok, ha vannak ilyenek. Egyébként a jelenlegi +fájlok. +.PP +.I "%cd" +.IP +Ez a speciális makro, ami arra használható, hogy a jelenlegi könyvtárat +lecserélhessük az előtte levő könyvtárra. Ezt elsősorban a +.\"LINK2" +Csatolt fájlrendszernél +.\"Virtual File System" +használhatjuk. +.PP +.I "%view" +.IP +Ez a makro használható a belső fájlnéző meghívására. Ez a makro +használható egyedül, vagy kiegészítésekkel is. Ha ezen makro bármely +kiegészítését használod, akkor annak zárójelen belül kell lennie. A +kiegészítések a következők: +.I ascii +a fájlnéző ascii módú használatához; +.I hex +a hex mód használatához; a +.I nroff +mondja meg a fájlnézőnek az nroff a félkövér és az aláhúzás +szekvenciáját; az +.I unformated +mondja meg a fájlnézőnek azt, hogy az nroff paranccsal készített +vastagítása és aláhúzása nem használható. +.PP +.I "%%" +.IP +A % karakter +.PP +.I "%{valamilyen szöveg}" +.IP +Súgó a kiegészítéshez. Beviteli ablak jelenik meg, és a szöveg +magyarázatként jelenik meg. A makró a felhasználó által begépelendő +szöveget helyettesíti. Ezt az ESC, vagy az F10 lenyomásával tudja törölni +a felhasználó. Ez a makró jelenleg még nem működik a parancssorban. +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " A subshell támogatás" +A subshell támogatás fordításkori opció, amely a shellek alkalmazásával +működik: bash, tcsh and zsh. +.PP +Amikor a subshell kódot aktiváljuk, a Midnight Commander létrehozza a +shell\-ed másolatát (azét, amelyik a +.B SHELL +változóban definiálva van, vagy ilyen nincs, akkor az /etc/passwd fájlban +találhatóét) és egy ál\-terminált fog futtatni, ahelyett, hogy minden +parancsfuttatáskor az új shellt aktiválná, a parancs a subshellt fogja +használni, ha megadtál ilyet. Ez lehetővé teszi számodra azt is, hogy +megváltoztasd a környezeti változókat is, a shell funkciók használatával +és megadva az értéküket, amelyeket a Midnight Commander\-ből való kilépésig +használni fog. +.PP +Ha +.BR bash \-t +használsz, a subshell indító parancsait megadhatod az ~/.local/share/mc/bashrc +fájlban, és tetszőleges billentyűzet térképet az ~/.local/share/mc/inputrc fájlban. A +.B tcsh +felhasználóknak az indítási parancsokat az ~/.local/share/mc/tcshrc fájlban van +lehetőségük megadni. +.PP +Amikor a subshell kódot használod, bármikor megszakíthatod az +alkalmazásokat +.BR C\-o \-val, +és visszaugrasz a Midnight Commander\-be. Ha félbeszakítod az alkalmazást, +nincs lehetőséged más külső parancsot futtatni, amíg ki nem lépsz a +megszakított alkalmazásból. +.PP +A subshell által használt további eszköz a Midnight Commander által +megjelenített prompt, amely ugyanaz, mint amit a jelenleg használt shell +is használ. +.PP +Az OPTIONS részben további információkat olvashatsz arról, hogy hogyan +vezérelheted a subshell kódot. +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Chmod (hozzáférési jogosultság)" +A Chmod ablak a fájlok, könyvtárak attribútum bitjeinek beállítására +szolgál. A +.I C\-x c +billenytűkombinációval is indítható ez a funkció. +.PP +A Chmod ablak két részből áll \- +.I Jogosultság +és +.I Állomány +(Az Állomány szó itt fájlt, vagy könyvtárnevet jelent). +.PP +Az Állomány részben megjelenik a fájlok, illetve könyvtárak neve, és a +hozzáférési jogok nyolcas számrendszerbeli formátumban, úgyanúgy mint a +tulajdonos és a csoport neve. +.PP +A Jogosultság részben az Állomány attribútumbitjének megfelelő sorban a +check gombot kell kijelölni. Változtatáskor a nyolcas számrendszerbeli +atribútumbitek megváltozott értékét az Állomány részben láthatod. +.PP +A widgetek közötti mozgáshoz (gombok, és check gombok) a +.IR "kurzor billentyűket" , +vagy a +.I Tab +gombot használhatod. A check gombok kijelöléséhez, vagy a gombok +kijelöléséhez használd a +.I Space +gombot. Ezeken kívül még használhatsz gyorsbillentyűket is, a gombok +gyorsabb kiválasztásához (a megjelölt betük a gombokon). +.PP +Az attribútum bitek beállítására használd az Enter gombot. +.PP +Amikor könyvtárak, vagy fájlok csoportjával dolgozol, csak rá kell +kattintanod a megfelelő bitre annak kijelöléséhez, vagy a kijelölés +törléséhez. Amikor kiválasztottad azokat a biteket, amiket meg akarsz +változtatni, válasz ki egy gombot a művelet gombok közül (Bekapcsol, +vagy Töröl). +.PP +Végül, az itt megadott beállításoknak megfelelően állítsuk be +az attribútumokat a +.B [Mind] +gombbal, ami az összes kijelölt fájlon végrehajtja a beállítást. +.PP +A +.B [Beállít] +csak a kijelölt attribútumokat állítja be a fájlokhoz. +.PP +A +.B [Bekapcsol] +a megjelölt biteket állítja be az összes fájlhoz. +.PP +A +.B [Töröl] +a megjelölt attribútum biteket törli a kiválasztott fájloknál. +.PP +Az +.B [Ok] +egyetlen fájlhoz állítja be az attributumot. +.PP +A +.B [Mégsem] +kilép Chmod parancs módból. +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Chown (Tulajdonos változtatása)" +A Chown parancs a fájl tulajdonos, vagy csoport azonosítójának +beállítására szolgál. A parancs gyorsbillentyűje a C\-x o. +.\"NODE "Chown\-advanced" +.SH "Haladó (bővített) Chown" +A Haladó Chown parancs a +.\"LINK2" +Chmod +.\"Chmod" +és a +.\"LINK2" +Chown +.\"Chown" +parancsok kombinációja egyetlen ablakban. Egyszerre tudod megváltoztatni +a fájlok jogosultságait, és tulajdonos, vagy csoport azonosítóját. +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "Fájl műveletek" +Amikor fájlokat másolsz, mozgatsz, vagy törölsz, a Midnight Commander a +Fájl műveletek dialógus ablakot jeleníti meg. Majd megjeleníti az +elkezdett művelet fájljait, ahol jobbára három folyamatsávot jelenít +meg. A fájl sáv azt mutatja meg, hogy a kijelölt fájlok közül a jelenleg +másolt fájlnak mekkora részén hajtotta végre a művelet. A Darab sáv azt +mutatja meg, hogy a kijelölt fájlok közül hányat dolgozott fel eddig. A +bájt sáv azt mutatja meg, hogy a kijelölt fájlok teljes méretének +mekkora része került már átmásolásra. Ha a Részletes műveletinfó ki van +kapcsolva, a fájl és a bájtok sáv nem jelenik meg. Két gomb található a +dialógus ablak alján. A Következő gomb lenyomásával át tudod lépni a +jelenlegi fájlt. A Megszakít gomb megszakítja a műveletet, a fájlok +visszamaradó részével nem történik semmi. +.PP +Van három másik dialógus ablak is, amelyekkel a fájl műveleteknél +találkozhatsz. +.PP +A hiba dialógus ablak a hiba körülményeiröl értesít bennünket, és három +választási lehetőséget tartalmaz. Normálisan a Következő gomb, amellyel +átlépheted a jelenlegi fájlt, vagy a Megszakít gomb, amellyel +megszakíthatod a további műveleteket, között választhatsz. Választhatod +még az Újra gombot is, ha egy másik virtuális terminálról ki tudtad +javítani a hibát. +.PP +"A fájl már létezik" dialógus ablak jelenik meg, ha megpróbálod +másolással, vagy áthelyezéssel felülírni a már létező fájlt. A dialógus +ablak megmutatja mindkét fájl méretét és dátumát. Az Igen gombbal +felüliratod a fájlt, a Nem gombbal átléped a fájlt, a Mind gombbal +felüliratod az összes fájlt, a Nem gombbal átléped az összes hasonló +fájlt és a Frissít gombbal felüliratod a fájlt, ha a célfájl nem azonos +dátumú a forrás fájllal. A Megszakít gomb lenyomásával bárhol +megszakíthatod a műveletet. +.PP +A rekurzív törlés dialógus ablak jelenik meg akkor, amikor egy olyan +könyvtárat akarsz törölni, amely nem üres. Az Igen gomb lenyomásakor +rekurzívan törli a könyvtárat, a Nem lenyomásakor átlépi a könyvtárat, a +Mind gomb lenyomásakor törli az összes könyvtárat, és a nem gomb átlépi +az összes olyan könyvtárat, amely nem üres. A Megszakít gomb +lenoymásával bárhol megállíthatod a folyamatot. Ha az Igen, vagy a Mind +gombot választod egy Megerősítés. Az "Igen"\-t csak akkor válaszd, ha +teljesen biztos vagy abban, hogy rekurzívan akarsz törölni. +.PP +Ha vannak kijelölt fájlok, azok kijelöltsége a művelet sikeres +végrehajtása után megszűnik. A művelet megszakításkor a kihagyott fájlok +kijelöltek maradnak. +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Kijelölt fájlok másolása vagy áthelyezése" +A másolás, vagy mozgatás művelet a fájlok átnevezésének legegyszerűbb +módja. Ennek elvégzéséhez meg kell határoznod a megfelelő forrás +maszkot, és általában a cél részben a rendeltetés szerinti maszknak +megfelelően. Minden forrás maszkkal azonos fájl átmásolásra vagy +átnevezésre kerül a cél maszknak megfelelően. Ha vannak kijelölt fájlok, +csak a kijelölt fájlokra vonatkozik a átnevezett forrás maszk. +.PP +Ezen kívül vannak egyéb opciók is, amiket még beállíthatsz: +.PP +A link követés megadja vajon symlink, vagy hardlink készült\-e a forrás +könyvtárban (rekurzívan belső könyvtáraknál), és új linket kell\-e +csinálni a cél könyvtárba, vagy csak át kell másolnod a bejegyzést. +.PP +"Létező könyvtárba belép" megmondja azt, hogy történjék, ha azonos nevű +célkönyvtár létezik, mint amelyet elkezdtünk másolni. Az alapértelmezett +művelet ilyenkor az, hogy ebbe a könyvtárba történő átmásoláskor, +lehetővé teszi számodra azt, hogy a forrás könyvtárat átmásold. Talán +egy példa segíteni fog: +.PP +Neked a foo könyvtár tartalmát át kell másolnod a /bla/foo könyvtárba, +amely már létezik. Normálisan (amikor az Ugrás (Dive) nincs beállítva), +az mc be fogja másolni ezt a /bla/foo könyvtárba. Az opció +engedélyezésekor a bejegyzéseket a /bla/foo/foo könyvtárba fogod +másolni, mivel a könyvtár már létezik. +.PP +Az "Attributumok megőrzése" megmondja azt, vajon az eredeti fájlok +jogosultságait, időadatait, és (ha root vagy) az eredeti fájlok UID és +GID értéekit. Ha ez az opció nincs beállítva, az umask jelenlegi értékét +fogja használni a funkció. +.PP +.B "Shell kifejezések be" +.PP +Amikor a "Shell mintát használ" kifejezések opció be van kapcsolva, a +forrás maszkhoz használhatsz használhatod a '*' és a '?' maszkokat. Ezek +használhatóak a shellben is. A cél maszkhoz csak '*' és '\\<szám>' maszk +használható. A célmaszk első '*' maszkja megfelel a forrás maszk első +maszk csoportjának, a második '*' megfelel a második csoportnak, és így +tovább. A '\\1' maszk megfelel a forrás maszk első maszk csoportjának, a +\&'\\2' maszk megfelel a második csoportnak, és ez így megy '\\9'\-ig. A +\&'\\0' maszk jelentése: a forrás fájl teljes neve. +.PP +Két példa: +.PP +Ha a forrás maszk, "*.tar.gz" a rendeltetésé a "/bla/*.tgz", a másolandó +fájl a "foo.tar.gz", \- a másolat a "/bla" könyvtárban található +"foo.tgz" lesz. +.PP +Tételezzük fel azt, hogy fel akarod cserélni a fájlnevet a +kiterjesztéssel, például a "file.c"\-t a "c.file"\-lal, és a többit. Ennek +a forrásmaszkja a "*.*" lesz, a rendeltetésé pedig a "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Shell kifejezések ki" +.PP +Amikor a shell kifejezések opció ki van kapcsolva az MC a továbbiakban +nem csoportosít automatikusan. Az '\\(...\\)' kiegészítést kell +használnod a forrásmaszkban, a célmaszk specifikációnak meagadásához. Ez +jóval gördülékenyebb módszernel tűnik, de több gépelést igényel. +Egyébként a cél maszk használata egyszerűbb, ha a Shell kifejezések +opció be van kapcsolva. +.PP +.B Kisbetű\-nagybetű csere" +.PP +Magváltoztathatod a fájlnév betűnagyságát. Ha a '\\u'\-t, vagy a '\\l'\-t +használod a cél maszkban, a következő karaktert naggyá, vagy kicsivé +konvertálja. +.PP +Ha a '\\U'\-t, vagy '\\L'\-t használod a cél maszkban a következő +karakterek naggyá, illetve kicsivé fognak változni egészen addig, amíg +\&'\\E', vagy '\\U', '\\L', vagy a fájlnév vége következik. +.PP +Az '\\u' és '\\l' erősebb az '\\U'\-nál és az '\\L'\-nél. +.PP +Például, ha a forrás maszk '*' (Shell kifejezés be van kapcsolva), vagy +\&'^\\(.*\\)$' (Shell kifejezés ki van kapcsolva) és a célmaszk '\\L\\u*' +a fájl nevek eleje nagybetűsre konvertálódik, a többi betű pedig +kicsire. +.PP +Ezeken kívül még használhatod a '\\' karaktert, mint hivatkozó +karaktert. Például a '\\\\'\-t a backslash\-hez és a '\\*'\-et a +csillaghoz. +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Belső fájlnéző" +A Belső fájlnéző két megjelenítési módra képes: ASCII és hex. A két mód +közötti váltásra használd az F4\-es billentyűt. Ha a GNU gzip programot +telepítetted, szükség esetén ezzel automatikusan kitömöríti a fájlokat. +.PP +A fájlnéző megpróbálja megállapítani a legjobb módot az információk +megjelenítéséhez a rendszerednek, vagy a fájl típusának megfelelően. A +Belső fájlnéző használ néhány szövegrészletet a vastag, és az aláhúzott +szövegattribútumok megjelenítésére azért, hogy a fájl megjelenítése +szebb legyen. +.PP +Amikor hex módban vagy, a keresés funkcióban lehetővé teszi +hexadecimális értékek használatát. +.PP +Használhatsz kevert hivatkozást is ezen értékeknek megfelelően: "Szöveg" +0xFE 0xBB "további szöveg". A szöveg értékek közötti részt és a +hivatkozás szövegét nem veszi figyelembe. +.PP +Néhány belső részlet a fájlnézőről: Azokon a rendszereken, ahol létezik +az mmap(2) rendszerhívás, a fájl programtérképe olvasódik be ehelyett; +ha a rendszer nem tartalmazza az mmap(2) rendszerhívást, vagy a fájl +tartalmaz olyan műveletet, mint ami megfelel a szűrőnek, a fájlnéző egy +növekvő buffert fog használni, amely csak azokat a részeit tartalmazza a +fájlnak, amelyekhez jelenleg hozzáférsz (ez tömörített fájlokra is +vonatkozik). +.PP +Ez a lista tartalmazza azokat a gombokat, amelyekhez művelet kapcsolódik +a Midnight Commander belső fájlnézőjében. +.PP +.B F1 +Elindítja a beépített hypertext súgót. +.PP +.B F2 +Átvált sortörés módba. +.PP +.B F4 +Átvált hex módba. +.PP +.B F5 +Sorra lép. Egy promptot jelenít meg a sor számának megadására, és +magjeleníti azt. +.PP +.B F6, /. +Szabványos kifejezés keresése. +.PP +.B ?, +Szabványosos kifejezés keresése visszafelé. +.PP +.B F7 +Normál keresés / hex módú keresés. +.PP +.B C\-s +Normál keresést indít el, ha nem volt megelőző kifejezés keresés, +egyébként a következő előfordulást keresi meg. +.PP +.B C\-r. +Keresés visszafelé, ha nem volt megelőző kifejezés keresés, egyébként a +következő előfordulást keresi meg. +.PP +.B n. +A következő egyezőt keresi. +.PP +.B F8 +Vált a Nyers és Feldolgozott mód között: ez a fájlt, úgy mutatja meg, +ahogy megtalálta, vagy, ha folyamatszűrő meg van adva az mc.ext.ini fájlban, +akkor a szűrő kimenetét. A Jelenlegi mód mindig a másik, mit amit a gomb +felirata mutat. +.PP +.B F9 +Vált a formázott\-nem formázott mód között: amikor a formázott mód be van +kapcsolva, néhány szöveg elemet, a vastagítást és az aláhúzást eltérő +színnel jelenít meg. A menüsorban mindíg a másik felirat látható, +jelezve, hogy milyen módba lehet átkapcsolni. +.PP +.B F10, Esc. +Kilép a Belső fájlnézőből. +.PP +.B next\-page, space, C\-v. +Egy lapot lapoz előre. +.PP +.B prev\-page, M\-v, C\-b, backspace. +Egy lapot lapoz vissza. +.PP +.B down\-gomb +Egy sort gördít elöre. +.PP +.B up\-gomb +Egy sort gördít vissza. +.PP +.B C\-l +Frissíti képernyőt. +.PP +.B "[n] m" +Beállítja az n kijelölést. +.PP +.B "[n] r" +Az n kijelölésre ugrik. +.PP +.B C\-f +A következő fájlra ugrik. +.PP +.B C\-b +Az elöző fájlra ugrik. +.PP +.B M\-r +Ki\- és bekapcsolja a vonalzót. +.PP +Ez a rész a fájl fájlnézővel történő megjelenítésének leírását +tartalmazta, lásd még a +.\"LINK2" +Társítások +.\"Edit Extension File" +részt. +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Belső fájlszerkesztő" +A Belső fájlszerkesztő egy rengeteg eszközzel ellátott, de egyszerű +teljes képernyős szerkesztő. Az +.B F4 +gomb segítségével lehet elindítani az inicializáló fájl +.I use_internal_edit +opciójának megfelelő beállításokkal. A kezelt fájlnál 16 MByte\-os +mérethatárral rendelkezik, és hibátlanul lekezeli a bináris fájlokat is. +.PP +Az eszközök, amielyek használhatók: Blokk másolás, mozgatás, törlés, +kivágás, beillesztés; +.I "billentyű a billentyű visszavonására"; +legördülő menük; fájl beillesztés; makró készítés; szabványos kifejezés +keresés és csere; shift\-kurzor MSW\-MAC szöveg kijelölés (csak linux konzolon); +beillesztés\-felülírás beállítás váltása; és a pipe szöveg blokkokkal a +shell parancsok közvetlen elérése. +.PP +A szerkesztő használata nagyon egyszerű és nem igényel magyarázatot. +Annak megtekintéséhez, hogy melyik gomb mit csinál, a megfelelő +legördülő menü megtekintése szükséges. Egyéb gombok: Shift és nyíl +billentyűk a szöveg kijelöléséhez. A +.B Ctrl\-Ins +kimásolja a szöveget a +.BR mcedit.clip \-be +és a +.B Shift\-Ins +beilleszti azt a mcedit.clip\-ből. A +.B Shift\-Del +kivágja a szöveget a +.BR mcedit.clip \-be, +és a +.B Ctrl\-Del +törli a kijelölt szöveget. A lezáró billentyűként szintén használható a +Return az automatikus bekezdéssel. Az egér kijelölés is működik, +kijelölhetsz egérrel a shift gomb lenyomásával, amíg a normál terminál +egeret csak a szöveg megjelölésére használhatod. +.PP +Macró megadásához nyomd le a +.BR Ctrl\-R \-t +és ekkor add meg a vezérlő gombokat a futtatandó folyamat megadásához. +Nyomd le a +.BR Ctrl\-R \-t +újra, ha ezt be akarod fejezni. Ekkor a makróhoz bármilyen billentyűt +hozzárendelhetsz az adott gomb lenyomásával. A makró lefut a +.B Ctrl\-A +és a megadott gomb lenyomásakor. A makró lefuttatható még akkor is, ha +lenyomod a Váltó (Alt), Ctrl, vagy az Esc\-et és a megadott gombot, +feltételezve azt, hogy a gombot nem használja más funkció. Miután +megadtad, a makro parancs a home könyvtárad +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +fájljába kerül. A makrót a fájl megfelelő sorának törlésével végezheted +el. +.PP +Az +.B F19 +formázza a szöveget +.RB ( C ", " C++ , +vagy más kódra) amikor ez a rész +.BR kijelölt . +Ennek használatához elöször egy futtatható fájlt kell készítened +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +néven. Szerkeszd ezt szkriptet, ha szükséges. +.PP +A szerkesztő megjeleníti még a nem\-amerikai karaktereket is (160 +fölött). Amikor bináris fájlokat szerkesztesz, a Beállításoknál +beállíthatod a +.B Képernyőbiteket +7 bitre a térközök tisztasága miatt. +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH "Kiegészítés" +A Midnight Commander begépeli neked a kívánt szöveget. +.PP +Megkísérli kiegészíteni a szöveget a jelenlegi pozíciótól. Az MC +kiegészíti a szöveget (ha a szöveg +.BR $ \-ral +kezdődik), felhasználónevet (ha a szöveg +.BR ~ \-vel +kezdődik), hostnevet (ha a szöveg +.BR @ \-lel +kezdődik), vagy parancsot (ha a parancssor azon részén állsz, ahova +a parancsot kell begépelni, megjeleníti a kiegészítést, ha a shell +tartalmazza a szót, és az a shell beépített parancsa). Ha ezek közül +egyik sem egyezik, akkor fájlnév kiegészítéssel próbálkozik. +.PP +A fájlnév, felhasználónév, változó és hostnév kiegészítése működik az +összes beviteli sorban, a parancskiegészítés csak a parancssorban. Ha +a kiegészítés kétértelmű (több érték megjelenítése lehetséges), a MC +hangjelzést ad és a +.\"LINK2" +Beállítások +.\"Configuration" +dialogbox +.I kiegészítés: összes +opciójának megfelelően hajtja végre a további műveleteket. Ha ez az +opció be van állítva, az összes megjeleníthető elem egy listában jelenik +meg a jelenlegi pozíciótól kezdődően, a fel\-le nyilak segítségével, és +az +.BR Enter \-rel +tudod kiegészíteni a bejegyzésed. Ezen kívűl, még begépelhetsz az első +helyre akkor, amikor a listában megjelenített összes kiegészítés eltér +az általad kívánttól. Ha újra lenyomod a +.BR M\-Tab \-ot, +egy listarészlet jelenik meg a listában, egyébként pedig csak az első +egyező elem, amely az összes kijelölt karakterrel egyezik. Hamarosan a +kétértelműség meg fog szűnni, a dialógus ablak eltűnik, amit az +.B Esc +.B F10 +és a bal, illetve a jobb nyíl billentyűkkel is megtehetsz. Ha a +.\"LINK2" +kiegészítés: összes +.\"Configuration" +nincs beállítva, a dialógus ablak csak a +.B M\-Tab +második lenyomására jelenik meg, az első lenyomáskor, az MC csak +hangjelzést ad. +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "Csatolt (látszólagos) fájlrendszer" +A Midnight Commander kód rétegekkel biztosítja azt, hozzáférj a +fájlrednszerhez; Ez a kód réteg arra képes, hogy átváltson csatolt +fájlrendszerre. A csatolt fájlrendszerre történő átváltás lehetővé teszi +a Midnight Commander számára azt, hogy a fájl műveleteket végezzen akkor +is, ha a fájlok nincsenek a UNIX fájlrendszeren. +.PP +Jelenleg a Midnight Commander a következő Csatolt Fájlrendszerekkel +rendelkezik (VFS): a helyi fájlrendszert a szokásos Unix fájlrendszeren +lévő fájlokhoz használja; az ftpfs\-t, az FTP protokollal rendelkező +távoli gépek fájlainak módosítására használja; a tarfs\-t a tar +és tömörített tar fájlok módosítására használja; az undelfs\-t, a +törölt fájlok visszaállítására használja az ext2\-es fájlrendszeren +(az alapértelmezett fájlrendszer Linux rendszereken), a fish (a fájlok +shellen keresztüli módosításához, mint pl. rsh és ssh) és végül az mcfs +(a Midnight Commander fájlrendszere), amely hálózat alapú fájlrendszer. +.PP +A VFS kódváltója minden elérési útvonal leírást értelmez és +követi azt a megfelelő fájlrendszerrel, azt, hogy melyik +rendszeren melyik használatos, azt a későbbiekben a +megfelelő résznél találhatod meg. +.\"NODE " FTP File System" +.SH " FTP fájlrendszer" +Az ftpfs lehetővé teszi számodra azt, hogy távoli gépeken +használjunk fájlokat, ennek használatához, próbáld ki a +panel FTP kapcsolat... parancsát (elérhető a menüből), vagy +közvetlenül átválthatsz a jelenlegi könyvtárból a cd +parancs használatával, valahogy így: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][felhasználó[:jelszó]@]machine[:port][távoli\-könyvtár] +.PP +A +.I felhasználó, port +és a +.I távoli\-könyvtár +elemek opcionálisak. Ha megadod a +.I felhasználó +elemet, akkor a Midnight Commander a távoli gépre megpróbál ezzel a +felhasználónévvel belépni, egyébként a te bejelentkező nevedet fogja +használni. Opcionális a +.I jelszó +elem, ha meg van adva akkor ezt a jelszót fogja használni a +bejelentkezéshez. Ajánlott ennek használata (soha ne tartsd ezeket a +gyorslistádban, kivéve ha beállítod a megfelelő jogosultságokat, és még +ekkor sem lesz minden esetben tökéletesen biztonságos megoldás). +.PP +Példák: +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!behind.firewall.edu/pub + ftp://guest@remote\-host.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@server/pub +.fi +.PP +Tűzfalon keresztüli kapcsolat létrehozásához, az ftp://! kiegészítés +használatára van szükséged (pl., felkiáltójel a dupla perjel után) +ahhoz, hogy a Midnight Commander használni tudja a proxy host\-ot az ftp +átvitelhez. A +.\"LINK2" +Csatolt fájlrendszer... +.\"Virtual FS" +dialógus ablakban tudod beállítani a proxy host tulajdonságait. +.PP +A +.\"LINK2" +Csatolt fájlrendszer... +.\"Virtual FS" +dialógus ablak másik beállítandó opciója az +.I ftp proxy\-n keresztül +opció. Ez beállítja a program számára azt, hogy mindig használja a proxy +host\-ot. Ha ez a változó be van állítva, akkor a program két dolgot +csinál: konzultál a %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy fájl soraival, hogy azok +tartalmazzák\-e a host nevet, mint helyi eszközt (ha a host neve ponttal +kezdődik, akkor ezt domainként tartja számon), és feltételezi azt, hogy +a pont nélküli hostnevek közvetlenül felodhatók. +.PP +Ha ftpfs kódot használsz csomagszűrő router esetén, akkor nincs +lehetőséged a fájlok megszokott módon történő megnyitására, ezért neked +kell a program számára megadnod azt, hogy a fájlokat passzív módon +nyissa meg. Ennek használatához állítsd be az +ftpfs_use_passive_connections opciót az indító fájlban. +.PP +A Midnight Commander a könyvtárlistát a cache\-ben tárolja. A +cache frissítésének ideje a +.\"LINK2" +Csatolt fájlrendszer... +.\"Virtual FS" +dialógus ablakban végezhető el. Ez komikus helyzetet idézhet elő akkor, +amikor változtatást hajtasz végre a könyvtárban, és az nem jelenik meg +addíg, amíg a cache\-t nem iratod újra a C\-r gombbal. Ez sajátos +jellegzetesség (amikor tapasztalod ezt a hibát, gondolj arra, hogy az +ftpfs\-el megváltoztatott fájlok esetleg az Atlanti\-óceán másik oldalán +vannak). +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH " Tar fájlrendszer" +A Tar fájlrendszer gondoskodik arról, hogy csak olvasható módon a chdir +parancs használatával hozzáférhess a tar fájlaidhoz és tömörített tar +fájljaidhoz. A könyvtár tar fájlra történő átváltásához a tar fájlodat a +következő szintaktikájú parancs segítségével tudod átváltani könyvtárrá: +.PP +.I /filename.tar:utar/[dir\-inside\-tar] +.PP +Az mc.ext.ini fájl már tartalmaz gyorsbillentyűket a tar fájlokhoz, ezért +csak rá kell mutatnod a tar fájlra és le kell nyomnod az entert ahhoz, +hogy beléphess a tar fájlba, ehhez nézd meg a +.\"LINK2" +Társítások +.\"Edit Extension File" +részt, hogy megismerhesd az ezzel kapcsolatos információkat: +.PP +Példák: +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +Az utóbbi meghatározás a tar arhívum teljes elérési útját tartalmazza. +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " Fájl áthelyezése a Shell fájlrendszeren túlra" +A fish fájlrendszer hálózat alapú fájlrendszer, amely lehetővé teszi +műveletek végrehajtását a távoli gépeken, mintha azok a saját gépeden +lennének. Ennek használatához a másik oldali gépnek futtatnia kell a +fish szervert, vagy bash kompatibilis shellel kell rendelkeznie. +.PP +A távoli géphez történő kapcsolódáshoz csak könyvtárat kell váltanod a +következő formátumnak megfelelő könyvtárba: +.PP +.nf +sh://[felhasználó@]machine[:opciók];/[távoli\-könyvtár];</em> +.fi +.PP +A +.IR felhasználó , +.I opciók +és a +.I távoli\-könyvtár +elemek opcionálisak. Ha megadod a +.I felhasználó +elemet, akkor a Midnight Commander megpróbál belépni a távoli gépre +ezzel a felhasználó névvel, egyébként pedig a te belépő nevedet +használja. +.PP +A 'C' +.I opció +a tömörítéshez használatos; a 'rsh' az rsh használatához az ssh helyett. +Ha a +.I távoli\-könyvtár +elemet beírtad, a távoli gépnek ezt a könyvtárát állítod be. +.PP +Példák: +.PP +.nf + sh://onlyrsh.mx:r/linux/local + sh://joe@want.compression.edu:C/private + sh://joe@noncompressed.ssh.edu/private +.fi +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Törlés visszaállítása" +(csak ext2; second extended filesystem) +.PP +Linux rendszereken, ha azt válaszolod a konfiguráláskor, hogy használni +akarod az ext2fs törlés visszavonás lehetőségét, akkor lehetőséged lesz +a törlés művelet visszavonására. A Törlés visszaállítása funkció csak +ext2 fájlrendszeren végezhető el. A Törlés visszaállítása csak +csatlakozó eszköz az ext2fs library\-hoz: helyrehozza az összes törölt +fájlnevet az ext2fs\-en, megjeleníti őket és a kiválasztott fájlokat a +kiteszi a megadott partícióra. +.PP +Ezen fájlrendszer használatához abba a speciális fájlrendszerbe kell +belépned, amely "undel://" meghatározással kezdődik, és annak az aktuális +fájlrendszernek a nevét tartalmazza, ahol a visszaállítani kívánt file +található. +.PP +Például, ha a törölt fájlokat az első scsi lemez második partícióján +szeretnénk visszaállítani, akkor a következő elérési utat kell +megadnunk: +.PP +.nf + undel://sda2 +.fi +.PP +Persze várakozni kell, amíg az undelfs a szükséges információkat +beolvassa, a fájl böngészés megkezdése előtt. +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " EXTernal File System" +.B extfs +allows to integrate numerous features and file types into GNU Midnight +Commander in an easy way, by writing scripts. +.PP +Extfs filesystems can be divided into two categories: +.PP +1. Stand\-alone filesystems, which are not associated with any existing +file. They represent certain system\-wide data as a directory tree. +You can invoke them by typing +.RI ' "cd fsname://" ' +where fsname is an extfs short name (see below). Examples of such +filesystems include audio (list audio tracks on the CD) or apt (list of +all Debian packages in the system). +.PP +For example, to list CD\-Audio tracks on your CD\-ROM drive, type +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. 'Archive' filesystems (like rpm, patchfs and more), which represent +contents of a file as a directory tree. It can consist of 'real' files +compressed in an archive (urar, rpm) or virtual files, like messages +in a mailbox (mailfs) or parts of a patch (patchfs). To access such +filesystems +.RI ' fsname:// ' +should be appended to the archive name. Note that the archive itself +can be on another vfs. +.PP +For example, to list contents of a zip archive documents.zip type +.PP +.nf + cd documents.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +In many aspects, you could treat extfs like any other directory. For +instance, you can add it to the hotlist or change to it from directory +history. An important limitation is that you cannot invoke shell +commands inside extfs, just like any other non\-local VFS. +.PP +Common extfs scripts included with Midnight Commander are: +.TP +.B a +access 'A:' DOS/Windows diskette +.RI ( "cd a://" ). +.TP +.B apt +front end to Debian's APT package management system +.RI ( "cd apt://" ). +.TP +.B audio +audio CD ripping and playing +.RI ( "cd audio://" +or +.IR "cd device/audio://" ). +.TP +.B bpp +package of Bad Penguin GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.bpp/bpp://" ). +.TP +.B deb +package of Debian GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.deb/deb://" ). +.TP +.B dpkg +Debian GNU/Linux installed packages +.RI ( "cd deb://" ). +.TP +.B hp48 +view and copy files to/from a HP48 calculator +.RI ( "cd hp48://" ). +.TP +.B lslR +browsing of lslR listings as found on many FTPs +.RI ( "cd filename/lslR://" ). +.TP +.B mailfs +mbox\-style mailbox files support +.RI ( "cd mailbox/mailfs://" ). +.TP +.B patchfs +extfs to handle unified and context diffs +.RI ( "cd filename/patchfs://" ). +.TP +.B rpm +RPM package +.RI ( "cd filename/rpm://" ). +.TP +.B rpms +RPM database management +.RI ( "cd rpms://" ). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +archivers +.RI ( "cd archive/xxxx://" +where xxxx is one of: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +You could bind file type/extension to specified extfs as described in the +.\"LINK2" +Edit Extension File +.\"Edit Extension File" +section. Here is an example entry for Debian packages: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Open=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH "Színek" +A Midnight Commander megpróbálja megállapítani azt, hogy a terminál +amelyet használsz, támogatja\-e a színhasználatot a terminál adatbázis és +a terminál név segítségével. Néha ez összezavarodhat, ezért +előfordulhat, hogy neked kell megmondanod azt, hogy színes, vagy +színtelen módot használjon a \-c illetve a \-b kiegészítéssel. +.PP +Ha a programot a S\-Lang képernyő kezelővel fordították az ncurses +helyett, szintén le fogja ellenőrizni a +.B COLORTERM +változó értékét, ha be van állítva, ez olyan hatású, mintha a \-c flaggal +indítottál volna. +.PP +Magadhatod azt a terminálnak, hogy mindíg a színes módot használja a +Colors részben +.I color_terminals +változónál az indító fájlban. Így a terminál színtámogatásának vizsgálatát +a Midnight Commander nem végzi el. Például: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +color_terminals=terminal\-name1,terminal\-name2... +.fi +.PP +A program mindkét opcióval fordítható (ncurses és S\-Lang). Az ncurses nem +jelent feltétlenül színes üzemmódot; csak a terminál adatbázist használja. +.PP +A Midnight Commander lehetőséget nyújt az alapértelmezett színek +beállítására. Jelenleg a színek a +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +környezeti változóban, vagy a Colors részben definiálhatók az indító +fájlban. +.PP +Az alapértelmezett színtérképet a Colors rész a +.I base_color +változójából olvassa ki. Megadhatsz ettől eltérő színtérképet is, a +terminál nevének kulcsszóként való használatával. Példa: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +A színmeghatározás formátuma: +.PP +.nf + <kulcsszó>=<előtérszín>,<háttérszín>:<kulcsszó>= ... +.fi +.PP +A színek opcionálisak, a kulcsszavak a következők: normal, selected, +marked, markselect, errors, input, reverse, gauge; A menü színek: menunormal, +menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, menuinactive; A dialog színek: dnormal, dfocus, +dhotnormal, dhotfocus; Súgó színek: helpnormal, helpitalic, helpbold, +helplink, helpslink; Fájlnéző színek: viewunderline; Speciális kijelölés +színei: executable, directory, link, stalelink, device, special, core; +Viewer colors are: viewnormal, viewbold, viewunderline, viewselected. +Szerkesztő színei: editnormal, editbold, editmarked. +.PP +.I input +maghatározza a beviteli sorok színét a dialogus ablakora vonatkozóan. +.PP +.I gauge +meghatározza a folyamat\-mutató sáv (gauge) kitöltött részének, amely pl. +azt mutatja, hogy a fájl másolásakor annak hány százaléka másolásolódott +már át a grafikus megjelenítésben. +.PP +A dialógus ablakok a következő színeket használják: +.I dnormal +a normál szöveghez, +.I dfocus +a jelenleg kiválasztott szövegelemekhez, +.I dhotnormal +a gyorsbillentyűk színei, amelyek eltérnek a normál szöveg színétől, +aholis a +.I dhotfocus +színt használjuk a jelenleg kiválasztott komponensekhez. +.PP +A menük azonos sémát használnak a menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel és a +menuinactive részeknél. +.PP +A súgó a következő színeket használja: +.I helpnormal +a normál szöveghez, +.I helpitalic +ahhoz a szöveghez, amelyet dőlt betűvel szeretnénk nyomatékosítani +akarunk a manualban, +.I helpbold +ahhoz a szöveghez, amelyet félkövérrel szeretnénk nyomatékosítani a man +oldalon, +.IR helplink \-et +a nem kiválaszott hyperlinkekhez használjuk és a +.IR helpslink \-et +a kiválasztott hyperlinkekhez. +.PP +A kiemelés színei azt határozzák meg, a fájlok hogyan jelenjenek meg +akkor, ha a kiemelés engedélyezve van (lásd a +.\"LINK2" +Megjelenés részt\&). +.\"Layout" +.I directory +a könyvtárakhoz, és a könyvtárak szimbolikus linkjeihez használatos; +.I executable +a futtatható fájlokhoz; +.I link +a szimbolikus linkekhez, amelyekk még létezőek, és nem könyvtárra +mutató linkek; +.I stalelink +az elvesztett szimbolikus linkekhez; +.I device +\- karakter és blokk eszközökhöz; +.I special +a speciális fájlokhoz, mint pl.FIFO\-k és az IPC socket\-ek; +.I core +a core fájlokhoz. +.PP +A megjeleníthető színek: black (fekete), gray (szürke), red (piros), +brightred (világospiros), green (zöld), brightgreen (világoszöld), brown +(barna), yellow (sárga), blue (kék), brightblue (világoskék), magenta +(bíborvörös), brightmagenta (világos bíborvörös), cyan, brightcyan +(világos zöldeskék), lightgray (világosszürke) és a white (fehér). Van +külön speciális kulcsszó az átlátszó háttérhez. Ez a 'default' +(alapértelmezett). Csak a 'default'\-ot tudod háttérszínként használni. +Példa: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color=normal=white,default:marked=magenta,default +.fi +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Speciális Beállítások" +A legtöbb Midnight Commander beállítás a menükből is elérhető. Ám van +néhány beállítás, ami csak a setup fájl szerkesztésével állítható be. +.PP +Ezeket a változókat az ~/.config/mc/ini fájlban állíthatod be: +.PP +.I clear_before_exec +.IP +Alapértelmezésben a Midnight Commander törli a képernyőt, mielőtt +futtatna egy parancsot. Ha a parancs kimenetét a képernyő alján +szeretnéd látni, az ~/mc.ini fájlban javítsd ki a clear_before_exec +értékét 0\-ra. +.PP +.I confirm_view_dir +.IP +Ha lenyomod az F3 gombot a könyvtár felett állva, normálisan a MC belép +a könyvtárba. Ha ez a flag 1\-re van állítva, akkor az MC kijelölt fájlok +esetén megerősítő kérdést fog feltenni, mielőtt könyvtárat váltana. +.PP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds +.IP +Ez az érték az a szám, amely megadja azt, hogy Commander mennyit várjon +mielőtt megpróbál újra kapcsolódni az ftp szerverre, elutasítás esetén. +Ha az érték nulla, akkor nem próbálkozik újra a kapcsolatteremtéssel. +.PP +.I ftpfs_use_passive_connections. +.IP +Ez az opció alapesetben ki van kapcsolva. Ez teszi az ftpfs kódot +használhatóvá passzív megnyitás módúvá a letöltött fájloknál. Ezt akkor +használják, ha csomagszűrő routert használnak. Ez az opció csak akkor +működik, ha a nem használsz ftp proxy\-t. +.PP +.I max_dirt_limit +.IP +Meghatározza azt, hogy hány képernyőfrissítést tudjon átlépni a Belső +fájlnéző. Normálisan ez az érték nem meghatározott, mivel a kód +automatikusan módosítja a képfrissítés sebességét, ha túl gyosran ütöd +le egymás után a billentyűket. Habár a nagyon lassú gépeken, vagy, ha +nagy billenty\ ismétlési sebességet állítottunk, a nagy érték tudja +megfelelően frissíteni a képernyőt. A legjobb az ha a max_dirt_limit +értékét 10\-re állítod, és ez az alapértelmezett érték. +.PP +.I mouse_move_pages +.IP +Vezérel akkor, amikor a panelben az egérrel legördítesz oldalanként, +vagy sorról sorra. +.PP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer +.IP +Vezérel akkor, amikor a panelben az egérrel legördítesz egy oldala +oldalanként, vagy sorról sorra a Belső fájlnézőben. +.PP +.I old_esc_mode +.IP +Alapesetben a Midnight Commander az ESC gombot a gomb rendeltetésének +megfelelően használja (Meta) (old_esc_mode=0), ha beállítod ezt az +opciót, (old_esc_mode=1), akkor az ESC gomb egy másodpercig vár, és, ha +ilyenkor nem nyomsz le egy kiegészítő gombot, az ESC műveletet +megszakító gombként fog működni (ESC ESC). +.PP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +.IP +speciálisan kezeli a '+', '\-', '*' karaktereket a parancssorban +(kiválasztás, kiválasztás megszüntetése, megfordítja a kiválasztást), de +csak akkor, ha a parancssor üres. A parancssorban nem kell idézőjelek +közé tenni. Amikor a parancssor nem üres, nem tudjuk megváltoztatni a +kiválasztást. +.PP +.I panel_scroll_pages +.IP +Ha be van állítva (alapértelmezésben), a panel egy fél képernyőnyit fog +fel\-le gördülni, ha a kurzor eléri a panel végét, vagy elejét, egyébként +csak egy fájlt fog legördítani ilyenkor. +.PP +.I show_output_starts_shell +.IP +Ez a változó csak akkor működik, ha a subshell támogatást nem használod. +Amikor a C\-o billentyű kombinációt használod, visszalépsz a felhasználói +képernyőre, ha "egy" a beállítás, akkor a shellt frissíted. Egyébként +bármely gomb lenyomásával visszatérhetsz a Midnight Commander\-hez. +.PP +.I torben_fj_mode +.IP +Ha ez a flag be van állítva, akkor a home és az end gombok kissé +eltérően fognak működni a panelekben, a kiválasztást a panel első és +utolsó fájljára mozgatja, s a következőképp működik: A home gombnál: +Felmegy a középső sorra, ha lejjebb volt; egyébként a felső sor lép +addíg, amíg el nem éri a legfelső sort, ebben ez esetben ez lesz a panel +első fájlja. Az end gomb működése hasonló: Lemegy a középső sorra, ha +felette volt; egyébként a legalsó sorra lép addíg, amíg el nem éri az +utolsó fájl a panelben. +.PP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +.IP +Ha ez a változó be van állítva (alapértelmezésben) meg foja jelölni azt +a fájl parancsot, amelyhez a +.\"LINK2" +Társításokban +.\"Edit Extension File" +a fájl típusnál egyezőt talált. +.PP +.I xtree_mode +.IP +Ha ez a változó be van kapcsolva (alapértelmezésben ki van kapcsolva), +akkor, amikor a fájlrendszert a Fa panelben böngészed, az automatikusan +újraolvassa a másik panelt a kiválasztott könyvtárnak megfelelő +tartalommal. +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH "Terminál adatbázisok" +A Midnight Commander lehetőséget nyújt a terminál adatbázis root jogok +használata nélküli módosítására. A Midnight Commander a rendszer indító +fájlban (az mc.lib fájlt a Midnight Commander library könyvtárában +találjuk), vagy az ~/.config/mc/ini file "terminal:your\-terminal\-name" részében +keres, és, a "terminal:general" rész minden sora tartalmazza azokat a +billentyűzet szimbólumokat az egyenlőségjelet és a definiált szimbólumot +követően, amelyeket te mag akarsz határozni. A \\e speciális formátumot +az escape és a ^x\-t a control\-x karakter megjelenítésére használhatod. +.PP +A látható billentyű szimbólumok: +.PP +.nf +f0\-tól f20\-ig Funkció billentyűk f0\-f20 +bs backspace +home home gomb +end end gomb +up kurzor fel gomb +down kurzor le gomb +left kurzor balra gomb +right kurzor jobbra gomb +pgdn page down gomb +pgup page up gomb +insert az insert karakter +delete a delete karakter +complete a lezáró +.fi +.PP +Például ahhoz, hogy az insert gomb az Escape + [+ O + p\-pel legyen +azonos, az alábbiakat állítsd be az ini fájlban: +.PP +.nf +insert=\\e[Op +.fi +.PP +A +.I complete +billentyű szimbólum megjeleníti az escape szekvenciát, amely a leállító +folyamatot indítja el, az M\-tab\-bal indítható el, de definiálhatsz más +gombokat is ugyanerre a folyamatra (azokon a billentyűzeteken, ahol +valamelyik gomb nem használható). +.SH "" +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH "Fájlok" +A progam minden ezzel kapcsolatos infomációt az +.BR MC_DATADIR +környezeti változóban tárol. Ha ezt a változót nem állítottuk be, akkor +ez vissza fog állítódni a /usr könyvtárra. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +A program súgó fájlja. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Az alapértelmezett rendszerszintű kiterjesztés fájl. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +A felhasználó saját kiterjesztései, nézet beállítások és szerkesztési +beállítások. Ezek felülbírálják a rendszerszintű fájl bejegyzéseit, ha +van ilyen. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +Az alapértelmezett rendszerszintű Midnight Commander beállítás, amelyet +csak akkor használ, ha a felhasználónak nincs saját ~/.config/mc/ini fájlja. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +A Midnight Commander globális beállításai. Az ebben a fájlban elvégzett +beállítások minden felhasználó Midnight Commander\-jére vonatkoznak, ez +használható a site\-globális terminál beállításaihoz. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +A felhasználó saját beállításai. Ha ez a fájl elérhető, akkor a +beállítások ebből a fájlból olvasódnak be a rendszerszintű indító fájl +helyett. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +Ez a fájl tartalmazza a program által megjelenített útmutattásokat +(cookie\-kat). +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +Ez a fájl azonos a rendszerszintű alkalmazás menüvel. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +A falhasználó saját alkalmazás menüje. Ha ez a fájl elérhető a +rendszerszintű alkalmazás menü helyett ezt fogja használni. +.PP +.I ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.IP +A könyvtárlista a Könyvtárfa és a Fa nézethez. Minden sor egy +bejegyzés. Minden sor perjellel kezdik a teljes könyvtár neveknél. A +sorok egy számmal kezdődnek, amik azonosak az elöző könyvtáréval. Ha ezt +a fájlt el akarod készíteni a következő parancsot használd: +.nf +find / \-type d \-print | sort > ~/.cache/mc/Tree" +.fi +Normálisan nincs erre szükséged, mert a Midnight Commander automatikusan +frissíti ezt. +.PP +.I ./.mc.menu +.IP +Helyi felhasználó által definiált menü. Ha ez a fájl létezik, ezt +használja a home, vagy rendszerszintű alkalmazás menü helyett. +.PP +To change default home directory of MC, you can use +.BR MC_PROFILE_ROOT +environment variable. The value of MC_PROFILE_ROOT must be an absolute path. +If MC_PROFILE_ROOT is unset or empty, HOME variable is used. If HOME is unset +or empty, MC directories are get from GLib library. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH "A Midnight Commander frissítése" +A program legutolsó verzióját az ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx címen a +/linux/local könyvtárban találhatod meg, Európából pedig a +sunsite.mff.cuni.cz címen a /GNU/mc könyvtárban és az ftp.teuto.de címen +az /lmb/mc könyvtárban. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH "Lásd még..." +ed(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), view(1), sh(1), bash(1), tcsh(1), +zsh(1). +.PP +.nf +A Midnight Commander World Wide Web oldalának címe a +következő: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH "Szerzők" +Miguel de Icaza (miguel@roxanne.nuclecu.unam.mx), Janne Kukonlehto +(jtklehto@paju.oulu.fi), Radek Doulik (rodo@ucw.cz), Fred Leeflang +(fredl@nebula.ow.org), Dugan Porter (dugan@b011.eunet.es), Jakub Jelinek +(jj@sunsite.mff.cuni.cz), Ching Hui (mr854307@cs.nthu.edu.tw), Andrej +Borsenkow (borsenkow.msk@sni.de), Norbert Warmuth +(nwarmuth@privat.circular.de), Mauricio Plaza +(mok@roxanne.nuclecu.unam.mx), Paul Sheer (psheer@icon.co.za) and Pavel +Machek (pavel@ucw.cz) are the developers of this package; Alessandro +Rubini (rubini@ipvvis.unipv.it) has been especially helpful debugging +and enhancing the program's mouse support, John Davis +(davis@space.mit.edu) also made his S\-Lang library available to us under +the GPL and answered my questions about it, and the following people +have contributed code and many bug fixes (in alphabetical order): +.PP +Adam Tla/lka (atlka@sunrise.pg.gda.pl), alex@bcs.zp.ua (Alex I. +Tkachenko), Antonio Palama, DOS port (palama@posso.dm.unipi.it), Erwin +van Eijk (wabbit@corner.iaf.nl), Gerd Knorr (kraxel@cs.tu\-berlin.de), +Jean\-Daniel Luiset (luiset@cih.hcuge.ch), Jon Stevens +(root@dolphin.csudh.edu), Juan Francisco Grigera, Win32 port +(j\-grigera@usa.net), Juan Jose Ciarlante (jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), +Ilya Rybkin (rybkin@rouge.phys.lsu.edu), Marcelo Roccasalva +(mfroccas@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), Massimo Fontanelli (MC8737@mclink.it), +Pavel Roskin (proski@gnu.org), Sergey Ya. Korshunoff +(seyko2@gmail.com), Thomas Pundt (pundtt@math.uni\-muenster.de), Timur +Bakeyev (timur@goff.comtat.kazan.su), Tomasz Cholewo +(tjchol01@mecca.spd.louisville.edu), Torben Fjerdingstad +(torben.fjerdingstad@uni\-c.dk), Vadim Sinolitis (vvs@nsrd.npi.msu.su) +and Wim Osterholt (wim@djo.wtm.tudelft.nl). +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH "Hibák bejelentése" +Nézd meg a disztribúció TODO fájlát, hogy megtudhasd, milyen teendők +vannak még vissza. +.PP +Ha a programmal kapcsolatos problémád van, akkor azt küld el az alábbi +levélcímre: mc\-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org. +.PP +Gondoskodj arról, hogy tartalmazza a hiba minél pontosabb +meghatározását, a futtatott program verziószámát (az mc \-V parancs meg +fogja jeleníttetni ezt), az operációs rendszert, amin futtatod a +programot amikor az összeomlott, méltányolni fogjuk a részletes leírást. diff --git a/doc/man/it/Makefile.am b/doc/man/it/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51ae6a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/it/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +LANG=it +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in + +man_MANS = mc.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +DATE_LANG=it_IT.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%B %Y + +include ../date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/it/Makefile.in b/doc/man/it/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7fbfc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/it/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man/it +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +LANG = it +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in +man_MANS = mc.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +DATE_LANG = it_IT.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %B %Y +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/it/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/it/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man \ + uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/it/mc.1.in b/doc/man/it/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a45893 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/it/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,3224 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\" Tradotto dal 15 agosto 2002 da +.\" Marco Ciampa <ciampix@libero.it> +.\" Chi vuole contribuire aggiunga il nome qui sotto. +.\" Yuri <yuri@sociol.unimi.it> +.\" +.\" Come succede per tutte le traduzioni ho dovuto fare dei compromessi. +.\" Il più importante (e che mi provoca tuttora dei dubbi) è stato la +.\" traduzione dei comandi Chmod, Chown e Advanced Chown con Permessi, +.\" Proprietario e Proprietario avanzato rispettivamente. Lo spirito che +.\" mi ha mosso in questa direzione è stato il desiderio di rendere mc più +.\" user frendly che coerente con altre traduzioni, visto il ruolo che si +.\" è conquistato soprattutto nei nuovi utenti. +.\" Altro esempio è l'uso (per questioni 'estetiche') indifferente di +.\" selezionato e marcato, quando il contesto rendeva ovvio il significato. +.\" E ancora (ma vedo che è diventata una saggia abitudine anche nella +.\" traduzione di altri programmi) il non rispettare l'uso delle maiuscole +.\" per marcare particolari comandi, uso che crea soprattutto confusione +.\" secondo il mio modesto parere. +.\" +.\" Prego mantenere la linea di traduzione generale (per quanto possibile). +.\" +.\"TOPICS "Indice degli argomenti:" +.TH MC 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "NOME" +mc \- interfaccia visuale per sistemi tipo Unix. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "USO" +.B mc +[\-abcCdfhPstuUVx] [\-l log] [dir1 [dir2]] [\-e [file]] [\-v file] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH "DESCRIZIONE" +Il Midnight Commander è un file manager per sistemi operativi di tipo Unix. +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.SH "OPZIONI" +.TP +.I "\-a" +Disabilita l'uso dei caratteri grafici per il disegno delle linee. +.TP +.I "\-b" +Forza la visualizzazione in bianco e nero. +.TP +.I "\-c" +Forza la modalità colore; consultare la sezione +.\"LINK2" +colori +.\"Colors" +per ulteriori informazioni. +.TP +.I "\-C arg" +Usato per specificare un set di colori differente a riga di comando. +Il formato di arg è documentato nella sezione +.\"LINK2" +colori\&. +.\"Colors" +.TP +.I "\-d" +Disabilita il supporto mouse. +.TP +.I "\-e [file]" +Esegue l'editor interno. Se il file viene specificato, lo apre alla +partenza. Vedere anche +.BR "mcedit (1)" . +.TP +.I "\-f" +Mostra i percorsi di ricerca compilati per i file del Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I "\-k" +Reimposta i softkeys ai valori predefiniti dal database termcap/terminfo. +Utile solo su terminali HP quando non vanno i tasti funzione. +.TP +.I "\-l file" +Salva il dialogo ftpfs con il server in file. +.TP +.I "\-P file" +Quest'opzione indica al Midnight Commander di stampare l'ultima +directory di lavoro sul file specificato. +Questa funzione non è fatta per un uso diretto, ma dovrebbe essere +utilizzata da una speciale funzione shell che imposti automaticamente +l'ultima directory corrente della shell come l'ultima directory in cui +stava il Midnight Commander. Prelevate i file +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.sh +(utenti bash e zsh) o rispettivamente +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.csh +(utenti tcsh) per definire +.B mc +come un alias allo script di shell appropriato. +.TP +.I "\-s" +Abilita il modo terminale lento, in questa modalità il programma +non disegna le linee e disabilita la modalità prolissa. +.TP +.I "\-t" +Usata solo se il codice è stato compilato con S\-Lang e terminfo: fa +in modo che il Midnight Commander usi il valore della variabile +.B TERMCAP +per le informazioni sul terminale invece delle informazioni di sistema +sul database terminali. +.TP +.I "\-u" +Disabilita l'uso della shell concorrente (ha senso solo se il +Midnight Commander è stato compilato con il supporto per la shell +concorrente). +.TP +.I "\-U" +Abilita l'uso della shell concorrente (ha senso solo se il +Midnight Commander è stato compilato con il supporto per la shell +concorrente impostato come una caratteristica opzionale). +.TP +.I "\-v file" +Lancia il visualizzatore interno per il file specificato. +.TP +.I "\-V" +Mostra la versione del programma. +.TP +.I "\-x" +Forza la modalità xterm. Usata quando è in funzione su terminali +abilitati\-xterm (due modalità video e in grado di spedire sequenze +mouse di escape). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +Do not use X11 to get the state of modifiers Alt, Ctrl, Shift +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Force a "normal tracking" mouse mode. Used when running on +xterm\-capable terminals (tmux/screen). +.PP +Se specificato, il primo percorso è la directory mostrata nel +pannello selezionato; il secondo è la directory mostrata nell'altro +pannello. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH "Panoramica" +Lo schermo del Midnight Commander è diviso in quattro parti. Quasi tutto +lo spazio è occupato dai due pannelli directory. Come impostazione +predefinita la seconda riga dal fondo è la riga di comando, mentre +quella in basso mostra le etichette dei tasti funzione. La riga più in +alto è la +.\"LINK2" +riga dei menu\&. +.\"Menu Bar" +La barra dei menu può essere invisibile, ma compare se clicchi la +riga più in alto con il mouse o se premi il tasto F9. +.PP +Il Midnight Commander fornisce la vista di due directory +contemporaneamente. Uno dei due pannelli è quello corrente (la barra +di selezione è presente solo in questo). Quasi tutte le operazioni +hanno luogo nel pannello corrente. Alcune azioni come Rinomina e +Copia usano la directory del pannello non selezionato come valore +predefinito di destinazione (ma si richiede sempre una conferma prima). +Per informazioni aggiuntive, vedere le sezioni sui +.\"LINK2" +pannelli directory\&, +.\"Directory Panels" +i +.\"LINK2" +menu sinistra e destra +.\"Left and Right Menus" +e +.\"LINK2" +menu file\&. +.\"File Menu" +.PP +E' possibile eseguire comandi di sistema dal Midnight Commander +semplicemente battendoli. Ogni cosa scritta apparirà sulla riga di +comando e quando si preme l'invio il Midnight Commander eseguirà la +riga di comando appena battuta; leggere le sezioni +.\"LINK2" +shell a riga di comando +.\"Shell Command Line" +e +.\"LINK2" +tasti della riga di ingresso +.\"Input Line Keys" +per saperne di più sulla riga di comando. +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Supporto mouse" +Il Midnight Commander è fornito di supporto mouse. Esso viene +attivato ogniqualvolta lo si esegue in un terminale +.B xterm(1) +(funziona anche se si fa una connessione telnet, ssh o rlogin con +un'altra macchina da un xterm) o se sta funzionando su una console Linux +e si ha il mouse server +.B gpm +in funzione. +.PP +Quando si fa clic con il tasto sinistro in un file nel pannello +directory, il file viene selezionato; se si fa clic con il tasto destro +il file viene marcato (o smarcato, a seconda dello stato precedente). +.PP +Se il file è un programma eseguibile, il doppio clic su di esso lo eseguirà +altrimenti se il +.\"LINK2" +file estensioni +.\"Edit Extension File" +ha un programma specifico per quell'estensione del file, il suddetto programma +verrà eseguito. +.PP +E' anche possibile eseguire i comandi assegnati ai tasti funzione +cliccando sulle etichette dei tasti. +.PP +Se un tasto del mouse viene premuto sulla riga in cima al pannello directory, +il pannello sfoglia di una pagina in alto. Allo stesso modo, un clic sulla +riga in basso provocherà un cambio di pagina in basso. Questo metodo dei bordi +funziona anche nel +.\"LINK2" +visualizzatore dell'aiuto +.\"Contents" +e nell' +.\"LINK2" +albero directory\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +.PP +L'auto ripetizione predefinita per il mouse è di 400 millisecondi. Questo +valore può essere cambiato modificando il file +.\"LINK2" +\&~/.config/mc/ini +.\"Save Setup" +e cambiando il parametro +.IR mouse_repeat_rate . +.PP +Se il Commander sta funzionando con il supporto mouse, si può saltarlo +ed ottenere il funzionamento del mouse normale (taglia e incolla di testo) +tenendo premuto il tasto Maiuscole. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Tasti" +Alcuni comandi nel Midnight Commander presuppongono l'uso dei tasti +.I Control +(talvolta chiamato CTRL o CTL) e +.I Meta +(talvolta chiamato ALT o anche Compose). In questo manuale si utilizzeranno +le seguenti abbreviazioni: +.TP +.B C\-<chr> +significa premere il tasto control mentre si batte il carattere <chr>. +Perciò C\-f sarà: premi e tieni premuto il tasto Control e premi f. +.TP +.B M\-<chr> +significa premere il tasto Meta o Alt mentre si batte <chr>. +Se non c'è un tasto Meta o Alt, premere +.IR ESC , +rilasciarlo, poi premere il carattere <chr>. +.TP +.B S\-<chr> +significa premere il tasto Maiuscole mentre si batte il carattere <chr>. +.PP +Tutte le linee di ingresso nel Midnight Commander usano un'approssimazione +dei tasti usati dall'editor GNU Emacs. +.PP +Ci sono molte sezioni che parlano dei tasti. Le seguenti sono le +più importanti. +.PP +La sezione +.\"LINK2" +menu file +.\"File Menu" +documenta le abbreviazioni di tasti per i comandi che appaiono nel +menu file. Questa sezione include i tasti funzione. Molti di questi comandi +lavorano sui file selezionati o sui file marcati. +.PP +La sezione +.\"LINK2" +pannelli directory +.\"Directory Panels" +documenta i tasti che selezionano o marcano i file come oggetto +per una seguente azione (l'azione normalmente deriva dal menu file). +.PP +La sezione +.\"LINK2" +shell a riga di comando +.\"Shell Command Line" +elenca i tasti utilizzati per immettere e modificare linee di comando. +Molti di questi copiano nomi di file o altro dal pannello directory +alla riga di comando (per evitare troppo lavoro di battitura) o per +accedere alla cronologia comandi. +.PP +I +.\"LINK2" +tasti della riga di ingresso +.\"Input Line Keys" +sono usati per modificare le righe di ingresso. Cioè sia la riga di comando +che le righe di ingresso nelle finestre di interrogazione. +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH " Tasti vari" +Qua ci sono alcuni tasti che non sono classificabili in nessuna delle +altre categorie: +.TP +.B Invio +se c'è del testo nella riga di comando (quella in fondo ai pannelli), +allora quel comando viene eseguito. Se non c'è testo nella riga di +comando allora se la barra di selezione è sopra una directory il +Midnight Commander esegue un +.B chdir(2) +alla directory selezionata e ricarica le informazioni sul pannello; +se la selezione è un file eseguibile allora esso viene eseguito. +Per ultimo, se l'estensione del file selezionato corrisponde ad una +delle estensioni presenti nel +.\"LINK2" +file estensioni\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +il comando corrispondente viene eseguito. +.TP +.B C\-l +ridisegna tutto nel Midnight Commander. +.TP +.B C\-x c +esegue il comando +.\"LINK2" +chmod +.\"Chmod" +su un file o su un gruppo di file marcati. +.TP +.B C\-x o +esegue il comando +.\"LINK2" +chown +.\"Chown" +sul file corrente o sui file marcati. +.TP +.B C\-x l +crea un collegamento. +.TP +.B C\-x s +crea un collegamento simbolico. +.TP +.B C\-x i +imposta la modalità della visualizzazione dell'altro pannello a informazioni. +.TP +.B C\-x q +imposta la modalità della visualizzazione dell'altro pannello a vista rapida. +.TP +.B C\-x ! +esegue il comando +.\"LINK2" +pannellizza comando\&. +.\"External panelize" +.TP +.B C\-x h +esegue il comando aggiungi directory alla lista +.\"LINK2" +directory favorite\&. +.\"Hotlist" +.TP +.B M\-! +esegue il comando vista filtrata, descritto in +.\"LINK2" +visualizzatore di file interno\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.TP +.B M\-? +esegue il comando +.\"LINK2" +trova file\&. +.\"Find File" +.TP +.B M\-c +mostra la finestra +.\"LINK2" +cambia dir veloce\&. +.\"Quick cd" +.TP +.B C\-o +quando il programma viene eseguito in una console Linux o FreeBSD o in +un xterm, mostrerà il risultato del comando precedente. Eseguito in +console Linux, il Midnight Commander usa un programma esterno +(cons.saver) per gestire il salvataggio e recupero delle informazioni +sullo schermo. +.PP +Se è stato compilato il supporto alla subsell, è possibile premere C\-o +in ogni momento per tornare alla schermata principale del Midnight Commander; +per tornare all'applicazione basta premere C\-o. Se si ha un'applicazione +sospesa usando questo trucco, non si sarà in grado di eseguire altri +programmi dal Midnight Commander finché non si terminerà l'applicazione +sospesa. +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Pannelli directory" +Questa sezione elenca i tasti che operano sui pannelli directory. +Se si desidera sapere come cambiare la visualizzazione dei pannelli, +date un'occhiata alla sezione su +.\"LINK2" +menu sinistra e destra\&. +.\"Left and Right Menus" +.TP +.B Tab, C\-i +cambia il pannello corrente. L'altro pannello diventa il nuovo pannello +corrente mentre il pannello corrente diventa l'altro pannello. +La barra di selezione si sposta dal vecchio pannello al nuovo corrente. +.TP +.B Ins, C\-t +DEPRECATED! per marcare i file si può usare il tasto di Inserimento (la sequenza +teminfo kich1) o la sequenza C\-t (Control\-t). Per smarcare i file +basta marcare un file già marcato. +.TP +.B Insert, C\-t +to tag files you may use the Insert key (the kich1 terminfo sequence). +To untag files, just retag a tagged file. +.TP +.B M\-e +to change charset of panel you may use M\-e (Alt\-e). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding you may select "directory up" (..) in active panel. +To cancel the charsets in all directories, select "No translation " in +the dialog of encodings. +.TP +.B M\-g, M\-r, M\-j +usato per selezionare rispettivamente il file superiore, il file centrale o +quello inferiore in un pannello. +.TP +.B M\-t +cambia il modo di visualizzazione corrente per mostrare la modalità +successiva. In questo modo è possibile cambiare velocemente da listati +lunghi a listati normali a listati definiti dall'utente. +.TP +.B C\-\\\\ (control\-barra retroversa) +mostra le +.\"LINK2" +directory favorite +.\"Hotlist" +e va alla directory selezionata. +.TP +.B + \ (più) +viene utilizzato per selezionare (marcare) un gruppo di file. Il Midnight +Commander richiederà un'espressione regolare per descrivere il gruppo. +Quando i +.I modelli della shell +sono abilitati, le espressioni regolari sono molto simili alle espressioni +regolari in una shell (* significa zero o più caratteri e ? un carattere). Se i +.I modelli della shell +sono disabilitati, la marcatura dei file viene fatta con le normali espressioni +regolari (vedere ed (1)). +.TP +.B \\\\ (barra retroversa) +usare il tasto "\\" per deselezionare un gruppo di file. Questo è l'opposto +del tasto più. +.TP +.B freccia\-su, C\-p +sposta la barra di selezione alla voce precedente nel pannello. +.TP +.B freccia\-giù, C\-n +sposta barra di selezione alla voce successiva nel pannello. +.TP +.B home, a1, M\-< +sposta la barra di selezione alla prima voce nel pannello. +.TP +.B fine, c1, M\-> +sposta la barra di selezione all'ultima voce nel pannello. +.TP +.B pagina\-giù, C\-v +sposta la barra di selezione di una pagina in basso. +.TP +.B pagina\-su, M\-v +sposta la barra di selezione di una pagina in alto. +.TP +.B M\-o +rende la directory corrente del pannello corrente, la directory +corrente dell'altro pannello. Mette l'altro pannello in modalità +elenco se necessario. Se il pannello corrente è pannellizzato, +l'altro non diventa pannellizzato. +.TP +.B C\-PaginaSu, C\-PaginaGiù +solo quando si esegue in console Linux: rispettivamente cambia +directory a ".." e alla directory correntemente selezionata. +.TP +.B M\-y +sposta la directory precedente nella cronologia, equivalente a +premere '<' con il mouse. +.TP +.B M\-u +sposta la directory successiva nella cronologia, equivalente a +premere '>' con il mouse. +.TP +.B M\-S\-h, M\-H +mostra la cronologia directory, equivalente a premere 'v' con il mouse. +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH " Quick search" +.TP +.B C\-s, M\-s +inizia una ricerca nella directory. Quando la ricerca è attiva i dati +immessi dall'utente vengono aggiunti alla stringa di ricerca invece +della riga di comando. Se l'opzione +.I Mostra mini\-stato +è abilitata, la stringa di ricerca viene mostrata nella riga di +mini\-stato. Scrivendo, la barra di selezione si muove al prossimo +file che comincia con le lettere battute. I tasti +.I backspace +o +.I canc +possono essere utilizzati per correggere errori di battitura. Se viene premuto +nuovamente, viene ricercata la corrispondenza successiva. +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Shell a riga di comando" +Questa sezione elenca i tasti utili ad evitare troppe battiture +nell'immissione dei comandi. +.TP +.B M\-Invio +copia nella riga di comando il nome del file attualmente selezionato. +.TP +.B C\-Invio +come M\-Invio, ma funziona solo dalla console Linux. +.TP +.B M\-Tab +esegue automaticamente il +.\"LINK2" +completamento +.\"Completion" +del nome del file, variabile, nome utente e nome host. +.TP +.B C\-x t, C\-x C\-t +copia i file marcati (o se non vi sono file marcati, il file selezionato) +del pannello corrente (C\-x t) o dell'altro pannello (C\-x C\-t) sulla +riga di comando. +.TP +.B C\-x p, C\-x C\-p +la prima sequenza di tasti copia il percorso corrente sulla riga di comando +e la seconda copia il percorso del pannello non selezionato sulla riga +di comando. +.TP +.B C\-q +il comando di inserimento letterale serve per inserire caratteri che +sarebbero altrimenti interpretati dal Midnight Commander (come il simbolo '+') +.TP +.B M\-p, M\-n +Usa questi tasti per navigare attraverso la cronologia comandi. M\-p va alla voce +precedente, M\-n va alla successiva. +.TP +.B M\-h +mostra la cronologia per la riga di ingresso corrente. +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " Tasti generali di movimento" +Il visualizzatore dell'aiuto, il visualizzatore dei file e l'albero directory +usano un codice comune per gestire il movimento. Per questa ragione essi +accettano esattamente gli stessi tasti. Ognuno di questi però accetta anche +altri tasti indipendenti. +.PP +Diverse parti del Midnight Commander usano gli stessi tasti di +movimento, questa sezione riguarda quelle parti. +.TP +.B Su, C\-p +si sposta di una riga indietro. +.TP +.B Giù, C\-n +si sposta di una riga avanti. +.TP +.B Pag. Prec., Pagina Su, M\-v +si sposta di una pagina in alto. +.TP +.B Pag. Succ., Pagina Giù, C\-v +si sposta di una pagina in basso. +.TP +.B Home, A1 +si sposta all'inizio. +.TP +.B Fine, C1 +si sposta alla fine. +.PP +In aggiunta a quelli menzionati sopra, il visualizzatore dell'aiuto accetta +i seguenti tasti: +.TP +.B b, C\-b, C\-h, Backspace, Canc +si sposta di una pagina in alto. +.TP +.B Barra spaziatrice +si sposta di una pagina in basso. +.TP +.B u, d +si sposta di mezza pagina in alto o in basso. +.TP +.B g, G +si sposta all'inizio o alla fine. +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Tasti di riga di ingresso" +I tasti di riga di ingresso (sono usati +per la +.\"LINK2" +riga di comando +.\"Shell Command Line" +e per i dialoghi di richiesta dati nel programma) accettano +questi tasti: +.TP +.B C\-a +sposta il cursore all'inizio della riga. +.TP +.B C\-e +sposta il cursore alla fine della riga +.TP +.B C\-b, freccia\-sinistra +sposta il cursore di una posizione a sinistra. +.TP +.B C\-f, freccia\-destra +sposta il cursore di una posizione a destra. +.TP +.B M\-f +sposta il cursore di una parola in avanti. +.TP +.B M\-b +sposta il cursore di una parola indietro. +.TP +.B C\-h, backspace +cancella il carattere precedente. +.TP +.B C\-d, Canc +cancella il carattere nel punto (sopra il cursore). +.TP +.B C\-@ +imposta il marcatore per tagliare. +.TP +.B C\-w +copia il testo tra il cursore e il marcatore in un kill buffer +e rimuove il testo dalla riga di ingresso. +.TP +.B M\-w +copia il testo tra il cursore ed il marcatore in un kill buffer. +.TP +.B C\-y +inserisce il contenuto del kill buffer. +.TP +.B C\-k +elimina il testo dal cursore alla fine della riga. +.TP +.B M\-p, M\-n +usa questi tasti per navigare attraverso la cronologia dei comandi. M\-p +posiziona sull'ultima voce, M\-n posiziona sulla seguente. +.TP +.B M\-C\-h, M\-Backspace +cancella una parola indietro. +.TP +.B M\-Tab +fa del nomefile, comando, variabile, nomeutente e nomehost il +.\"LINK2" +completamento +.\"Completion" +automatico. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Barra dei menu" +La barra dei menu compare premendo F9 o cliccando con il mouse sopra la riga +superiore dello schermo. La barra menu possiede cinque menu: "Sinistra", "File", +"Comando", "Opzioni" e "Destra". +.PP +I +.\"LINK2" +menu sinistra e destra +.\"Left and Right Menus" +permettono di modificare l'aspetto dei pannelli directory di +sinistra e di destra. +.PP +Il +.\"LINK2" +menu file +.\"File Menu" +elenca le azioni che possono essere condotte sui file correntemente selezionati +o marcati. +.PP +Il +.\"LINK2" +menu comando +.\"Command Menu" +elenca le azioni più generali e non ha relazione con il file correntemente +selezionati o marcati. +.PP +Il +.\"LINK2" +menu opzioni +.\"Options Menu" +elenca le azioni che permettono di personalizzare il Midnight Commander. +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH " Menu sinistra e destra (sopra e sotto)" +L'apparenza dei pannelli directory è modificabile tramite i menu +.B sinistra +e +.B destra +(vengono chiamati +.B sopra +e +.B sotto +se la divisione pannello nella finestra +.\"LINK2" +aspetto +.\"Layout" +del menu opzioni è orizzontale). +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Modalità lista..." +La modalità lista serve a mostrare un elenco di file; ci sono quattro +modalità elenco disponibili: +.BR completa , +.BR breve , +.B lunga +e +.BR "definita dall'utente" . +La modalità completa mostra il nome del file, l'ampiezza del file e +la data di modifica. +.PP +La modalità breve mostra solo il nome del file in due colonne +(perciò mostrando il doppio del numero dei file che nelle altre +modalità). La modalità lunga è simile a quella del comando +.BR "ls \-l" . +La modalità lunga usa tutta l'ampiezza dello schermo. +.PP +Se si sceglie il formato definibile dall'utente, è necessario specificare +il formato della vista. +.PP +Il formato definibile dall'utente deve cominciare con una specifica +dell'ampiezza del pannello. Questa può essere "half" o "full", che descrive +un pannello di mezza grandezza o completa rispettivamente. +.PP +Dopo l'ampiezza del pannello, è possibile specificare la modalità a +due colonne aggiungendo il numero "2" alla stringa di formato. +.PP +Dopodiché si aggiunge il nome dei campi con una specifica di ampiezza +opzionale. Questi sono i campi disponibile per la visualizzazione: +.TP +.B name +mostra il nome del file. +.TP +.B size +mostra l'ampiezza del file. +.TP +.BR bsize +è una forma alternativa del formato +.B size +mostra l'ampiezza del file e per le directory mostra solo +SUB\-DIR o UP\-\-DIR. +.TP +.B type +mostra un campo di un carattere. Questo carattere è simile a quello +mostrato dal comando ls con la flag \-F \- +.B * +per i file eseguibili, +.B / +per le directory, +.B @ +per i collegamenti, +.B = +per i socket, +.B \- +per i dispositivi a carattere, +.B + +per i dispositivi a blocchi, +.B | +per le pipe, +.B ~ +per i collegamenti simbolici a directory e +.B ! +per i collegamenti simbolici stallati (che non puntano a niente). +.TP +.B mark +un asterisco se il file è marcato, uno spazio se non lo è. +.TP +.B mtime +la data dell'ultima modifica al file. +.TP +.B atime +la data dell'ultimo accesso al file. +.TP +.B ctime +la data della creazione del file. +.TP +.B perm +una stringa che rappresenta i bit dei permessi del file. +.TP +.B mode +un valore ottale con i permessi correnti del file. +.TP +.B nlink +il numero dei collegamenti al file. +.TP +.B ngid +il GID (numerico). +.TP +.B nuid +l'UID (numerico). +.TP +.B owner +il proprietario del file. +.TP +.B group +il gruppo del file. +.TP +.B inode +l'inode del file. +.PP +Puoi usare ache questi campi per sistemare la visualizzazione: +.TP +.B space +uno spazio nel formato visualizzazione. +.TP +.B | +aggiunge una linea verticale al formato di visualizzazione. +.PP +Per forzare un campo ad un'ampiezza fissa (una specifica di ampiezza), +basta semplicemente aggiungere +.B : +ed il numero dei caratteri che si vuole che il campo abbia. Se il +numero è seguito dal simbolo +.BR + , +allora la specifica definisce l'ampiezza minima \- se il programma +trova che serve più spazio sullo schermo, espanderà il campo. +.PP +Per esempio la modalità +.B completa +corrisponde a questo formato: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +E quella +.B lunga +corrisponde a questo formato: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +Questa è una modalità interessante: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +I pannelli possono anche essere impostati alle modalità seguenti: +.TP +.B "Informazioni" +La modalità informazioni mostra alcuni dati relativi al file +correntemente selezionato e se possibile informazioni circa il file +system corrente. +.TP +.B "Albero" +La vista ad albero è abbastanza simile al comando +.\"LINK2" +albero directory\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +Vedere la sezione corrispondente per maggiori informazioni. +.TP +.B "Vista rapida" +In questa modalità il pannello si imposta come un +.\"LINK2" +visualizzatore +.\"Internal File Viewer" +ridotto che mostra i contenuti del file correntemente selezionato; +se si seleziona il pannello (con il tasto tab o con il mouse), si ha +accesso ai normali comandi del visualizzatore. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH " Ordina per..." +Gli otto possibili ordinamenti sono per nome, estensione, data +di modifica, data di accesso, data di modifica informazioni di +inode, ampiezza, per inode e non ordinato. Nella finestra di dialogo +di ordinamento è possibile scegliere il tipo di ordinamento ed è anche +possibile specificare se si desidera l'ordinamento inverso selezionando +la voce inverso. +.PP +Normalmente le directory sono ordinate prima dei file ma quest'impostazione +può essere modificata dal +.\"LINK2" +menu opzioni +.\"Options Menu" +(opzione +.BR "mescola tutti i file" ). +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Filtro..." +Il comando di filtro permette di specificare un modello (per esempio +.BR "*.tar.gz" ) +che il file deve corrispondere per essere visualizzato. Malgrado +il modello del filtro, le directory e i collegamenti a directory +vengono sempre visualizzati sul pannello directory. +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Ricarica" +Il comando ricarica l'elenco dei file nella directory. E' utile +se un'altro processo ha creato o rimosso dei file. Se +si ha pannellizzato dei nomi di file in un pannello, questo ricaricherà +il contenuto della directory e rimuoverà le informazioni pannellizzate +(vedere sezione +.\"LINK2" +pannellizza comando +.\"External panelize" +per ulteriori informazioni). +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH " Menu file" +Il Midnight Commander usa i tasti F1 \- F10 come tasti veloci +per i comandi che appaiono nel menu file. Le sequenze di escape +per i tasti funzione sono capacità terminfo da kf1 a kf10. Su terminali +senza supporto per i tasti funzione, è possibile ottenere la stessa +funzionalità premendo il tasto ESC e un numero da 1 a 9 più lo 0 +(corrispondentemente ai tasti da F1 a F9 e F10 rispettivamente). +.PP +Il file menu comprende i comandi seguenti (tasti veloci tra parentesi): +.PP +.B Aiuto (F1) +.PP +Invoca il visualizzatore incorporato di ipertesti per l'aiuto. +All'interno del +.\"LINK2" +visualizzatore aiuto\&, +.\"Contents" +è possibile usare il tasto tab per selezionare il successivo collegamento +e il tasto invio per seguirlo. I tasti Barra spaziatrice e Backspace vengono +utilizzati per muoversi avanti e indietro nella pagina di aiuto. Premere F1 +nuovamente per ottenere la lista completa dei tasti accettati. +.PP +.B Menu (F2) +.PP +Invoca il +.\"LINK2" +menu utente\&. +.\"Edit Menu File" +Il menu utente fornisce un modo semplice per dare agli utenti un menu ed +aggiungere nuove funzionalità al Midnight Commander. +.PP +.B Visualizza (F3, Maiusc\-F3) +.PP +Visualizza il file correntemente selezionato. Nell'impostazione predefinita +viene invocato il +.\"LINK2" +visualizzatore interno di file +.\"Internal File Viewer" +ma se l'opzione "Usa visualizzatore interno" è deselezionata, verrà invocato +un visualizzatore esterno specificato dalla variabile ambiente +.BR PAGER . +Se +.B PAGER +non è definita, verrà invocato il comando "view". Se si usa invece il comando +Maiusc\-F3, il visualizzatore verrà invocato senza nessun tipo di formattazione +o preprocessamento sul file. +.PP +.B Vista filtrata (M\-!) +.PP +Questo tasto richiede all'utente un comando ed i suoi argomenti (l'argomento +predefinito è il nome del file attualmente selezionato), il risultato di tale +comando viene mostrato nel visualizzatore di file interno. +.PP +.B Cambia (F4) +.PP +Invoca l'editor +.B vi +o l'editor specificato nella variabile d'ambiente +.B EDITOR +oppure +.\"LINK2" +l'editor di file interno +.\"Internal File Editor" +se l'opzione, "usa editor interno" è stata impostata. +.PP +.B Copia (F5) +.PP +Mostra una finestra di dialogo con destinazione predefinita alla +directory del pannello non selezionato, che copia il file selezionato (o +i file marcati, se ce n'è almeno uno) sulla directory specificata +dall'utente nella finestra di dialogo. Space for destination +file may be preallocated relative to preallocate_space configure option. +Durante il processo è possibile +premere C\-c o ESC per abortire l'operazione. Per maggiori dettagli sulla +maschera sorgente (che sarà normalmente * o ^\\(.*\\)$ a seconda +dell'impostazione di "modelli della shell") o sui caratteri jolly sulla +destinazione vedere +.\"LINK2" +maschera copia/rinomina\&. +.\"Mask Copy/Rename" +.PP +In alcuni sistemi è possibile eseguire la copia in background cliccando +sul bottone background (o premendo M\-b nella finestra di dialogo). Il +comando +.\"LINK2" +processi in background +.\"Background jobs" +è utile per controllarne l'andamento. +.PP +.B Collegamento (C\-x l) +.PP +Crea un collegamento fisico (hard link) al file corrente. +.PP +.B Collegamento Simbolico (C\-x s) +.PP +Crea un collegamento simbolico al file corrente. Per chi non sapesse +cosa sono i collegamenti: creare un collegamento ad un file è come +copiare il file ma sia il nome sorgente che destinazione rappresentano +la stessa immagine fisica del file. Per esempio, se si modifica uno dei +due file, tutti i cambiamenti appariranno su tutti i file. Alcuni li +chiamano anche alias o scorciatoie (o link come in originale inglese). +.PP +Un collegamento fisico appare come un file reale. Dopo che sia stato +creato non c'è modo di distinguere quale sia il collegamento e quale sia +l'originale. Se si cancella uno dei due l'altro rimarrà intatto. E' molto +difficile notare che i file rappresentano la stessa immagine. Usate i +collegamenti fisici quando non volete proprio saperlo. +.PP +Un collegamento simbolico è un riferimento al nome del file originale. +Se il file originale viene cancellato, il collegamento è inutile. +E' facile distinguere i collegamenti simbolici dall'immagine stessa. +Se il file è un collegamento simbolico a qualcosa, il Midnight Commander +mostra un simbolo "@" davanti al nome del file (eccetto se punta ad una +directory, nel qualcaso mostrerà una tilde (~)). +Il file originale sul quale punta il collegamento simbolico viene mostrato +sulla riga di mini\-stato se +.I "Mostra Mini\-stato" +è abilitata. Usare i collegamenti simbolici se si vuole evitare la confusione +che creano i collegamenti fisici. +.PP +.B Rinomina/Sposta (F6) +.PP +Mostra una finestra di dialogo con destinazione predefinita alla +directory del pannello non selezionato, che sposta il file selezionato (o +i file marcati, se ce n'è almeno uno) sulla directory specificata dall'utente +nella finestra di dialogo. Durante il processo è possibile +premere C\-c o ESC per abortire l'operazione. Per maggiori dettagli vedere la +sezione precedente Copia, dato che il comando è molto simile. +.PP +In alcuni sistemi è possibile eseguire la copia in background cliccando +sul bottone background (o premendo M\-b nella finestra di dialogo). Il +comando +.\"LINK2" +processi in background +.\"Background jobs" +è utile per controllarne l'andamento. +.PP +.B Crea Directory (F7) +.PP +Mostra una finestra di dialogo che crea la directory specificata. +.PP +.B Elimina (F8) +.PP +Cancella il file correntemente selezionato o i file marcati nel +pannello corrente. Durante il processo è possibile premere C\-c +o ESC per abortire l'operazione. +.PP +.B Cambia dir veloce (M\-c) +Usare il comando +.\"LINK2" +Cambia Dir veloce +.\"Quick cd" +se si vuole cambiare directory corrente e si ha la riga di comando occupata. +.PP +.B Seleziona gruppo (+) +.PP +Viene utilizzato per selezionare (marcare) un gruppo di file. Il +Midnight Commander richiedera un'espressione regolare per descrivere il +gruppo; se l'opzione +.I modelli della shell +è abilitata, l'espressione regolare è simile al file globbing nella shell +(* significa zero o più caratteri e ? significa un carattere). Se l'opzione +.I modelli della shell +è disabilitata, allora la selezione dei file viene eseguita con le normali +espressioni regolari (vedere ed (1)). +.PP +.B Deseleziona gruppo (\\\\) +.PP +Usata per deselezionare un gruppo di file. E' l'opposto di del comando +.IR "Seleziona gruppo" . +.PP +.B Uscita (F10, Maiusc\-F10) +.PP +Termina l'esecuzione del Midnight Commander. Maiusc\-F10 viene usata se +si esce e si sta usando lo shell wrapper. Maiusc\-F10 in tal caso non +vi porterà all'ultima directory utilizzata dal Midnight Commander ma +vi lascerà nella directory dalla quale avete fatto partire il Midnight +Commander. +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Cambia dir veloce" +Questo comando è utile se si ha la riga di comando piena e si vuole +eseguire +.\"LINK2" +cd +.\"The cd internal command" +per cambiare directory senza dover cancellare e riscrivere la riga di comando. +Questo comando fa uscire una piccola finestra di dialogo che richiede +l'immissione degli stessi argomenti che si darebbero al comando +.B cd +a riga di comando. Questo ha le stesse caratteristiche già presenti nel +comando +.\"LINK2" +comando interno cd\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Menu comando" +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +albero directory +.\"Directory Tree" +mostra un disegno ad albero delle directory. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +trova file +.\"Find File" +permette di cercare un file specifico. Il comando "Scambia pannelli" +scambia il contenuto dei due pannelli directory. +.PP +Il comando "attiva/disattiva pannelli" mostra il risultato dell'ultimo +comando shell. Quest'ultimo funziona solo su xterm e sulle console Linux +e FreeBSD. +.PP +Il comando Confronta directory (C\-x d) confronta il contenuto dei +pannelli directory uno con l'altro. E' poi possibile usare il comando +Copia (F5) per rendere i pannelli identici. Ci sono tre metodi di +confronto. Il metodo veloce confronta solo l'ampiezza e la data del +file. Il metodo completo fa un confronto byte\-per\-byte. Il metodo +completo non è disponibile se la macchina non supporta la chiamata di +sistema mmap(2). Il metodo solo dimensione confronta solo l'ampiezza dei +file e non controlla il contenuto né la data del file. +.PP +Il comando cronologia comandi mostra un'elenco dei comandi battuti. Il +comando selezionato viene copiato sulla riga di comando. Alla cronologia +comandi vi si può accedere premendo M\-p o M\-n. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +directory favorite (C\-\\) +.\"Hotlist" +permette un cambio più veloce dalla directory corrente ad una di quelle usate +più spesso. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +pannellizza comando +.\"External panelize" +permette di eseguire un coamndo esterno e di mettere il risultato nel pannello +corrente. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +modifica file estensioni +.\"Edit Extension File" +permette di specificare i programmi che devono essere eseguiti quando +si prova ad eseguire, visualizzare, modificare e un mucchio di altre +cose, file con una specifica estensione (la fine del nome del file). +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +modifica file menu +.\"Edit Menu File" +serve a modificare il menu utente (che appare premendo F2). +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Albero directory" +Il comando albero directory mostra una rappresentazione ad albero delle +directory. Selezionando una directory dalla rappresentazione il +Midnight Commander cambierà a quella directory. +.PP +Ci sono due modi di invocare l'albero. Il vero comando di albero directory +è accessibile dal menu Comandi. L'altro modo è di selezionare la vista ad +albero dai menu Sinistra o Destra. +.PP +Per evitare i lunghi ritardi il Midnight Commander crea la rappresentazione ad +albero scansionando solo una piccola porzione di tutte le directory. +Se manca la directory che si vuole visualizzare, spostarsi sulla sua directory +genitrice e premere C\-r (o F2). +.PP +E' possibile utilizzare i tasti seguenti: +.PP +Sono accettati i +.\"LINK2" +tasti generali di movimento\&. +.\"General Movement Keys" +.PP +.B Invio. +Nell'albero directory, esce dall'albero della directory e lo cambia +alla directory corrente nel pannello selezionato. Nella vista ad albero, +cambia a questa directory nell'altro pannello e rimane nella modalità +vista ad albero in quello corrente. +.PP +.B C\-r, F2 (Ricarica). +Ricarica la directory. Usare questo comando quando la rappresentazione ad +albero non è aggiornata: mancano directory o mostra alcune sottodirectory +che non esistono più. +.PP +.B F3 (Scorda). +Cancella questa directory dalla rappresentazione ad albero. Usare questo +comando per eliminare la confusione dal'albero. Se si vuole nuovamente +visualizzare l'albero completo premere F2 nella sua directory genitrice. +.PP +.B F4 (Statico/Dinamico). +Cambia tra modo di navigazione dinamico (predefinito) e statico. +.PP +Nella navigazione statica si usano i tasti Su e Giù per +selezionare la directory. Tutte le directory conosciute vengono mostrate. +.PP +Nella navigazione dinamica si usano i tasti Su e Giù per selezionare +una directory sorella, il tasto Sinistra sposta sulla directory genitrice +e il tasto Destra sposta sulla directory figlia. Solo i parenti, sorelle +e figlie, vengono mostrate; le altre sono tralasciate. La rappresentazione +ad albero cambia dinamicamente come la si attraversa. +.PP +.B F5 (Copia). +Copia la directory. +.PP +.B F6 (RinSpo). +Sposta la directory. +.PP +.B F7 (CreDir). +Crea una nuova directory sotto questa directory. +.PP +.B F8 (CancDir). +Cancella questa directory dal file system. +.PP +.B C\-s, M\-s. +Cerca la prossima directory che corrisponde alla stringa di ricerca. +Se tale directory non esiste, questi tasti faranno scendere di una riga +(il cursore). +.PP +.B C\-h, Backspace. +Cancella l'ultimo carattere nella stringa di ricerca. +.PP +.B Qualsiasi altro carattere. +Aggiunge un carattere alla stringa di ricerca e sposta alla nuova directory +che comincia con questi caratteri (il cursore). Nella vista ad albero +si deve prima attivare la ricerca premendo C\-s. La stringa di ricerca è +visibile nella riga di mini stato. +.PP +Le azioni seguenti sono disponibili solo nell'albero directory. +Non sono supportate nella vista ad albero. +.PP +.B F1 (Aiuto). +Invoca il visualizzatore dell'aiuto e mostra questa sezione. +.PP +.B Esc, F10. +Esce dalla rappresentazione ad albero. Non cambia directory. +.PP +Il mouse è supportato. Un doppio clic si comporta come premere Invio. +Vedere anche la sezione +.\"LINK2" +supporto mouse\&. +.\"Mouse Support" +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Trova file" +Il comando trova file domanda prima la directory di inizio per la +ricerca ed il nome del file da cercare. Premendo il tasto albero +puoi selezionare la directory di partenza +.\"LINK2" +dall'albero directory\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +.PP +Il campo contenuto accetta espressioni regolari simili a egrep(1). Ciò +significa che è necessario proteggere i caratteri con significati speciali per +egrep con "\\", per esempio se si ricerca "strcmp (" si dovrà immettere +"strcmp \\(" (senza le virgolette). +.PP +Per far partire la ricerca premere il tasto Ok. +E' possibile bloccare la ricerca con il tasto Sospende e farla riprendere +con il tasto Continua. +.PP +E' possibile navigare l'elenco file con i tasti freccia Su e Giù. +Il tasto Chdir cambierà la directory corrente a quella del file selezionato. +Il tasto Ripete chiederà nuovamente i parametri per una nuova ricerca. +Il tasto Uscita esce dal comando Trova. Il tasto Pannellizza +metterà i file trovati sul pannello di directory corrente cosicché si +possa svolgere ulteriori operazioni su di essi (visualizzazione, copia, +spostamento, e così via). Dopo la pannellizzazione è possibile premere C\-r +per ripristinare la vista normale dei file. +.PP +E' possibile avere una lista di directory che il comando trova file dovrebbe +saltare durante la ricerca (per esempio, si può evitare di fare ricerche su +un CDROM o su una directory NFS montata attraverso un collegamento lento). +.PP +Le directory che devono essere saltate devono essere impostate nella variabile +.B ignore_dirs +nella sezione +.B FindFile +del file ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +Le directory devono essere separate da una virgola, come nell'esempio: +.PP +.nf +[FindFile] +ignore_dirs=/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +Si può prendere in considerazione l'uso del comando +.\"LINK2" +pannellizza comando +.\"External panelize" +per operazioni particolari. Il comando trova file serve solo per +ricerche semplici mentre usando pannellizza comando si può fare +ricerche complesse come si vuole. +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " Pannellizza comando" +Pannellizza comando permette di eseguire un programma esterno, e +mettere il risultato del programma nel pannello corrente. +.PP +Per esempio, se si vuole manipolare in uno dei pannelli tutti i collegamenti +simbolici nella directory corrente, basta usare pannellizza comando per +eseguire il seguente: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +.PP +Al completamento del comando, il contenuto del pannello non sarà più +il listato della directory ma tutti i file che rappresentano +collegamenti simbolici. +.PP +Volendo pannellizzare tutti i file che sono stati scaricati dal +proprio server ftp preferito, si può usare questo comando awk per +estrarre il nome del file dal file di log del traferimento: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +Se si desidera si può salvare i comandi di pannellizzazione usati più +spesso con uno nome più descrittivo, in maniera da richiamarli più velocemente. +Per fare ciò basta battere il comando sulla riga di ingresso e premere il tasto +Aggiungi nuovo. Poi si deve dare un nome al quale associare il comando che si +desidera salvare. La prossima volta sarà possibile scegliere quel comando +dall'elenco e non servirà ribatterlo nuovamente. +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Directory favorite" +Il comando Directory favorite mostra le etichette delle directory nell'elenco +delle favorite. Il Midnight Commander andrà alla directory corrispondente +all'etichetta selezionata. Dalla finestra delle favorite si possono rimuovere +etichette/directory già create ed aggiungerne di nuove. Per aggiungere +velocemente nuove directory basta usare il comando Aggiungi alle favorite +(C\-x h), che aggiunge la directory corrente alla lista delle favorite, +richiedendo l'etichetta per identificarla. +.PP +Questo rende più veloce il cd verso directory usate spesso. Considera l'uso della +variabile CDPATH come descritto in +.\"LINK2" +comando cd interno\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Modifica file estensioni" +Questo comando invocherà l'editor sul file +.IR ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If this file does not exist and you are not root, it will be copied from +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If you are root, you can choose the file to edit: user's +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +or system\-wide +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +The format of this file is described in detail in it. +.\"NODE " Background jobs" +.SH " Processi in background" +Questo comando permette di controllare lo stato di ogni processo +in background del Midnight Commander (in background possono essere +eseguite solo operazioni di copia e rinomina). Da qui si può bloccare, +far ripartire e uccidere un lavoro in background. +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Modifica file menu" +Il menu utente è un menu di comandi utili che possono essere +personalizzati dall'utente. Quando si accede al menu utente, viene +utilizzato, se esiste, il file .mc.menu dalla directory corrente, +ma solo se è di proprietà dell'utente o di root e se non è scrivibile +a tutti. Se tale file non viene trovato, mc alla stessa maniera +prova con ~/.config/mc/menu altrimenti usa il menu di sistema +%pkgdatadir%/mc.menu. +.PP +Il formato del file menu è molto semplice. Le righe che cominciano +con qualsiasi cosa che non sia uno spazio o una tabulazione sono +considerate voci per il menu (per fare in modo di usarle anche come +scelta rapida, il primo carattere deve essere una lettera). Tutte le +righe che cominciano con uno spazio o un tab sono i comandi che verranno +eseguiti quando la voce viene selezionata. +.PP +Quando un'opzione viene selezionata tutte le linee di comando dell'opzione +vengono copiate in un file temporaneo nella directory temporanea (normalmente +/usr/tmp) e poi il file viene eseguito. Ciò permette all'utente di mettere +normali costrutti shell nei menu. Prima dell'esecuzione del codice del menu +ha luogo una semplice sostituzione di macro. Per ulteriori informazioni vedere +.\"LINK2" +sostituzione macro\&. +.\"Macro Substitution" +.PP +Ecco un esempio di un file mc.menu: +.PP +.nf +A Mostra un dump del file correntemente selezionato + od \-c %f + +B Modifica un rapporto bachi e lo spedisce a root + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Midnight Commander bug" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Legge la posta + emacs \-f rmail + +N Legge le news + emacs \-f gnus + +H Chiama il visualizzatore ipertestuale info + info + +J Copia la directory corrente nell'altro pannello ricorsivamente + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + +K Crea un rilascio della directory corrente + echo \-n "Nome del file di distribuzione: " + read tar + ln \-s %d `dirname %d`/$tar + cd .. + tar cvhf ${tar}.tar $tar + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X Estrae il contenuto di un file tar compresso + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Condizioni Predefinite +.PP +Ogni voce di menu può essere preceduta da una condizione. La condizione +deve cominciare nella prima colonna con un carattere '='. Se la condizione +è vera, la voce di menu sarà la voce predefinita. +.PP +.nf +Sintassi condizione: = <sotto\-cond> + oppure: = <sotto\-cond> | <sotto\-cond> ... + oppure: = <sotto\-cond> & <sotto\-cond> ... + +Sotto\-condizione è una delle seguenti: + + y <modello> sintassi della corrispondenza modello file corrente? + (solo per modifica menu). + f <modello> corrispondenza modello file corrente? + F <modello> corrispondenza modello altro file? + d <modello> corrispondenza modello directory corrente? + D <modello> corrispondenza modello altra directory? + t <tipo> file corrente di tipo? + T <tipo> altro file di tipo? + x <nomefile> nomefile è eseguibile? + ! <sotto\-cond> nega il risultato di una sotto\-condizione +.fi +.PP +Modello è un normale modello della shell o un'espressione regolare, +a seconda dell'opzione modelli della shell. E' possibile scavalcare +il valore globale dell'opzione modelli della shell scrivendo +"shell_patterns=x" sulla prima riga del file menu (dove "x" è 0 o 1). +.PP +.nf +Tipo è uno o più dei seguenti caratteri: + + n non directory + r file regolare + d directory + l collegamento + c carattere speciale + b blocco speciale + f fifo (pipe) + s socket + x eseguibile + t marcato +.fi +.PP +Per esempio 'rlf' significa file regolare, collegamento o fifo. Il +tipo 't' è particolare perché agisce sul pannello invece che sul file. +La condizione '=t t' è vera se ci sono file marcati nel pannello corrente +e falsa se non ce ne sono. +.PP +Se la condizione comincia con '=?' invece che '=' una traccia di debug +sarà mostrata ogniqualvolta viene calcolato il valore della condizione. +.PP +Le condizioni sono calcolate da sinistra a destra. Ciò significa che +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +viene calcolata come +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +Ecco un esempio dell'uso delle condizioni: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L Elenca i contenuti di un archivio compresso tar + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Condizioni Addizione +.PP +Se la condizione comincia con '+' (o '+?') invece che '=' (o '=?') è +una condizione addizione. Se la condizione è vera la voce di menu sarà +inclusa nel menu. Se la condizione è falsa la voce di menu non sarà +inclusa nel menu. +.PP +E' possibile combinare condizioni predefinite e addizione iniziando +la condizione con '+=' o '=+' (o '+=?' o '=+?' se vuoi una traccia di +debug). Se si vuole usare due differenti condizioni, una per addizionale +e l'altra per predefinita, si può precedere una voce di menu con due righe +di condizione, una che comincia con '+' e l'altra con '='. +.PP +I commenti cominciano con '#'. Linee di commento aggiuntive devono cominciare con +\&'#', spazi o tabulazioni. +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH " Menu opzioni" +Il Midnight Commander possiede alcune opzioni che possono essere +abilitate e disabilitate in molte finestre di dialogo accessibili +da questo menu. Le opzioni sono abilitate se hanno un "x" di fronte +ad esse. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +configurazione +.\"Configuration" +mostra una finestra di dialogo dalla quale è possibile cambiare +molte delle inpostazioni del Midnight Commander. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +aspetto +.\"Layout" +mostra una finestra di dialogo con la quale è possibile impostare molte +opzioni relative a come mc appare sullo schermo. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +conferme +.\"Confirmation" +mostra una finestra di dialogo dalla quale è possibile specificare per +quali azioni si vuole una richiesta di conferma. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +mostra bit +.\"Display bits" +mostra una finestra di dialogo dalla quale è possibile selezionare quali +caratteri il vostro terminale è capace di mostrare. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +impara tasti +.\"Learn keys" +mostra una finestra di dialogo dalla quale è possibile controllare i tasti +che non appaiono funzionare su alcuni terminali ed è possibile aggiustare. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +FS virtuale +.\"Virtual FS" +mostra una finestra di dialogo con la quale è possibile impostare alcune +opzioni relative al VFS. +.PP +Il comando +.\"LINK2" +salva configurazione +.\"Save Setup" +salva le impostazioni correnti dei menu sinistra, destra e opzioni. Viene salvato +anche un piccolo numero di altre opzioni. +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Configurazione" +Le opzioni in questa finestra sono divise in tre gruppi: +Opzioni del pannello, Pausa dopo l'esecuzione e Altre opzioni. +.PP +.B Opzioni del pannello +.PP +.I Mostra file di backup. +Se abilitata, il Midnight Commander mostrerà i file che terminano con una tilde. +Altrimenti essi non verranno mostrati (come nell'opzione \-B del comando GNU ls). +.PP +.I Mostra file nascosti. +Se abilitata, il Midnight Commander mostrerà tutti i file che cominciano con +un punto (come ls \-a). +.PP +.I Cursore in basso mentre seleziona. +Se abilitata, la barra di selezione si muoverà in basso dopo aver selezionato +un file (sia con tasto Ins). +.PP +.I Rilascia menu a cascata. +Quando quest'opzione è abilitata, la discesa dei menu sarà attivata non appena +si preme il tasto +.BR F9 . +Altrimenti si otterrà solo il titolo del menu e si dovrà attivare il menu con +i tasti freccia o con i tasti di selezione rapida. +E' raccomandata se si stanno usando i tasti di selezione rapida. +.PP +.I Mescola tutti i file. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, tutti i file e le directory vengono mostrati +mescolati insieme. Se l'opzione è spenta, le directory (e i collegamenti a +sottodirectory) vengono mostrati all'inizio dell'elenco con gli altri file +a seguire. +.PP +.I Aggiornamento rapido directory. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, il Midnight Commander userà un trucco per +determinare se i contenuti della directory sono cambiati. Il trucco consiste +nel ricaricare la directory solo se l'i\-node della directory è cambiato. +Ciò significa che la ricarica accade solo quando i file vengono creati o +cancellati. Se quello che cambia è l'i\-node di un file nella directory +(cambia l'ampiezza di un file, cambiano il proprietario o le flag, etc.) +la visualizzazione non viene aggiornata. In questi casi se l'opzione è +abilitata, è necessario ricaricare la directory manualmente (con C\-r). +.PP +.B Pausa dopo l'esecuzione +.PP +Dopo l'esecuzione di comandi, il Midnight Commander può fermarsi, in +maniera da permettere di esaminare il risultato del comando. Ci sono +tre possibili impostazioni per questa variabile: +.IP +.I Mai. +Significa che non si vuole vedere il risultato del comando. Se si sta +usando la console Linux o FreeBSD o un xterm, ci sarà la possibilità di +vedere il risultato del comando premendo C\-o. +.IP +.I Su terminali stupidi. +Si avrà il messaggio di pausa su quei terminali che non sono in grado di +mostrare il risultato dell'ultimo comando eseguito (qualsiasi terminale +che non sia un xterm o una console Linux o FreeBSD). +.IP +.I Sempre. +Il programma si fermerà dopo l'esecuzione di tutti i comandi. +.PP +.B Altre opzioni +.PP +.I Operazioni prolisse. +Quest'opzione decide se le operazioni di Copia, Spostamento o Cancellazione +saranno prolisse (cioè se mostreranno una finestra di dialogo per ogni +operazione). Se si ha un terminale lento potresti voler disabilitare +quest'opzione. Viene automaticamente spenta se la velocità del proprio +terminale è inferiore a 9600 bps. +.PP +.I Calcola totali. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, il Midnight Commander calcolerà i totali +delle ampiezze in byte e il numero totale dei file prima di ogni operazione di +Copia, Spostamento o Cancellazione. Questo genererà una barra di progressione +più accurata a discapito di un po' di velocità. Quest'opzione non ha effetto se +.I Operazioni prolisse +è disabilitata. +.PP +.I Modelli della shell. +Normalmente i comandi Seleziona, Deseleziona e Filtro usano espressioni +regolari di tipo shell. Le seguenti conversioni vengono eseguite per +ottenere questo risultato: '*' viene rimpiazzato da '.*' (zero o più +caratteri); '?' viene rimpiazzato da '.' (esattamente un carattere) e '.' +dal carattere letterale punto. Se l'opzione è disabilitata, allora le +espressioni regolari sono quelle descritte in ed(1). +.PP +.I Autosalva configurazione. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, quando si esce dal Midnight Commander le +opzioni configurabili del Midnight Commander vengono salvate nel file +~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +.I Menu automatici. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, il menu utente sarà invocato alla partenza. +Utile per creare menu per utenti non abituati a unix. +.PP +.I Usa editor interno. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, verrà usato l'editor integrato interno per +modificare i file. Se l'opzione è disabilitata, verrà usato l'editor +specificato dalla variabile ambiente +.BR EDITOR . +Se nessun editor è stato specificato, verrà usato +.BR vi . +Vedere la sezione +.\"LINK2" +editor di file interno\&. +.\"Internal File Editor" +.PP +.I Usa il visualizzatore interno. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, verrà usato il visualizzatore di file +interno per visualizzare i file. Se l'opzione è disabilitata, verrà +utilizzato il visualizzatore specificato dalla variabile ambiente +.BR PAGER . +Se il visualizzatore non è definito, verrà usato il comando +.BR view . +Vedere sezione +.\"LINK2" +visualizzatore file interno\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.PP +.I Completamento: visualizza tutto +Normalmente il Midnight Commander +mostra tutti i possibili +.\"LINK2" +completamenti +.\"Completion" +se il completamento è +ambiguo se si preme +.B M\-Tab +una seconda volta, la prima completa per quanto possibile +e, in caso di ambiguità, emette un suono. Se si vuole vedere +tutti i possibili completamenti già alla pressione del primo +.RB M\-Tab , +abilitare quest'opzione. +.PP +.I Barre che girano. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, il Midnight Commander mostra +una barra rotante nell'angolo in alto a destra come indicatore +di progressione. +.PP +.I Navigazione stile Lynx. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, è possibile usare i tasti freccia per +cambiare automaticamente directory se la selezione corrente è +una subdirectory e se la riga di comando è vuota. Normalmente +quest'opzione è spenta. +.PP +.I Cd segue i collegamenti. +Quest'opzione, se impostata, fa in modo che il Midnight Commander +segua la catena logica delle directory, quando si cambia la directory +corrente in ogni pannello o usando il comando cd. Questo è il +comportamento predefinito di bash. Quando non è impostata, il +Midnight Commander segue la reale struttura della directory, perciò +eseguendo cd .. se si è entrati in una directory attraverso un +collegamento, ci porterà alla genitrice reale della directory corrente +e non alla directory dov'era il collegamento. +.PP +.I Cancellazione sicura. +Se quest'opzione è abilitata, la cancellazione non intenzionale dei file +sarà più difficile. La preimpostazione della finestra di dialogo della +conferma cambia da "Si" a "No". Normalmente quest'opzione è +disabilitata. +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Aspetto" +La finestra di aspetto da la possibilità di cambiare l'aspetto generale +dello schermo. Si può specificare la visibilità della barra dei menu, +della riga dei comandi, della riga dei suggerimenti o della riga dei +tasti funzione. Sulle console Linux o FreeBSD si può impostare quante +righe siano visibili sulla finestra di uscita. +.PP +Il resto dell'area dello schermo viene usata per i due pannelli directory. +Si può specificare se l'area venga divisa dai due pannelli in direzione +verticale o orizzontale. La divisione può essere uguale o si può dividere +in maniera asimmetrica. +.PP +Normalmente i contenuti dei pannelli directory sono visualizzati dello stesso +colore, ma si può specificare se i +.I permessi +e i +.I tipi di file +siano evidenziati con speciali +.\"LINK2" +colori\&. +.\"Colors" +Se l'evidenziazione dei permessi è abilitata, i campi +.I permessi +e +.I modalità +.\"LINK2" +dello schermo +.\"Listing Format..." +valide per l'utente che usa il Midnight Commander +sono evidenziati con il colore definito con la parolachiave +.IR selezionata . +Se l'evidenziazione del tipo di file è abilitata, i file vengono colorati +a seconda del tipo (per esempio directory, file core, eseguibili, ...). +.PP +Se l'opzione +.I Mostra mini\-stato +è abilitata, una riga di informazioni di stato circa la voce correntemente +selezionata viene mostrata sul fondo dei pannelli. +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Conferme" +In questo menu è possibile configurare le opzioni di conferma per la +cancellazione e sovrascrittura dei file, esecuzione dei file premendo invio e +per l'uscita dal programma. +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Mostra bit" +Viene usata per configurare la quantità dei caratteri visibili sullo +schermo. Quest'impostazione può essere 7 bit, se il terminale/libreria_curses +supporta solo sette bit in uscita, ISO\-8859\-1 se mostra tutti i caratteri +nella mappa ISO\-8859\-1 e uscita completa a 8 bit per quei terminali che possono +visualizzare tutti i caratteri a 8 bit. +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Impara tasti" +Questa finestra di dialogo permette di controllare e ridefinire i tasti +funzione, i tasti freccia e alcuni altri tasti per farli funzionare +correttamente sul terminale corrente. Spesso non funzionano dato che +molti database di terminali sono incompleti o errati. +.PP +Ci si può muovere con il tasto Tab e con i tasti di movimento di vi ('h' +sinistra, 'j' giù, 'k' su e 'l' destra). Una volta premuti e riconosciuti +i tasti di movimento del cursore, si possono tranquillamente utilizzare. +.PP +E' possibile provare i tasti semplicemente premendoli ognuno. Quando si preme +un tasto ed è riconosciuto correttamente, appare un OK accanto al nome di +quel tasto. Una volta che il tasto è marcato OK, esso comincia a funzionare +regolarmente, per esempio premendo il tasto F1, la prima volta controllerà +il funzionamento, ma dopodiché mostrerà la schermata di aiuto. Lo stesso +dicasi per i tasti freccia. +Il tasto Tab dovrebbe funzionare sempre. +.PP +Se alcuni tasti non funzionano correttamente, non si vedrà apparire +l'OK dopo la pressione di quel tasto. Allora è possibile ridefinirlo. +Fatelo, premendo il bottone corrispondente al nome del tasto (con il mouse +o premendo Invio o Spazio, dopo aver selezionato il bottone con Tab o con +le frecce). Ecco che un messaggio apparirà richiedendo di premere quel tasto. +Fatelo ed aspettate che la finestra sparisca. Se si vuole annullare, basta +premere Esc una volta ed aspettare. +.PP +Quando si è finito con tutti i tasti, è possibile salvarli. Le definizioni +dei tasti che si è ridefinito saranno scritte nella sezione [terminal:TERM] +del vostro ~/.config/mc/ini file (dove TERM è il nome del terminale corrente). Le +definizioni dei tasti che già funzionavano correttamente non vengono salvate. +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " FS virtuale " +Quest'opzione permette di controllare l'impostazione della cache informazioni +del +.\"LINK2" +file system virtuale\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.PP +Il Midnight Commander tiene in memoria le informazioni +relative ad alcuni dei file system virtuali per accelerare +l'accesso all'elenco dei file nel file system (per esempio, +l'elenco dei file scaricato dai server ftp). +.PP +Inoltre, per accedere al contenuto dei file compressi (per +esempio file tar compressi) il Midnight Commander deve creare +un file temporaneo non compresso sul disco. +.PP +Siccome sia le informazioni in memoria che i file temporanei su +disco occupano risorse, si può voler impostare i parametri delle +informazioni della cache per ridurre l'uso delle risorse o per +massimizzare la velocità di accesso ai file system usati spesso. +.PP +A causa del formato degli archivi tar, il +.I filesystem tar +necessita di leggere l'intero file solo per caricare le voci dei +file. Dato che molti file tar sono compressi (i file +tar non compressi sono una specie in via di estinzione), +il file system tar deve decomprimere il file su disco, +in una locazione temporanea per poi accedervi come un file tar +normale. +.PP +Ora, visto che noi tutti amiamo navigare nei file e nei file tar +dappertutto su disco, succede spesso che si lascia un file tar per +poi rientrarvi successivamente. Siccome la decompressione è lenta, +il Midnight Commander conserverà l'informazione in memoria per un +tempo limitato, allo scadere del quale, tutte le risorse associate +al file system verranno liberate. La scadenza predefinita è impostata +a un minuto. +.PP +Il +.\"LINK2" +file system FTP +.\"FTP File System" +(ftpfs) permette di navigare le directory su server FTP remoti. Esso +possiede diverse opzioni. +.PP +.I Password ftp anonimo +è la password utilizzata per accedere come "anonimo". Alcuni siti +richiedono un indirizzo email valido. D'altra parte, probabilmente +non si vuole dare il vostro indirizzo email reale a siti non di fiducia, +specialmente se non si sta usando filtri anti spam. +.PP +L'ftpfs mantiene l'elenco della directory che scarica dal server ftp +in una cache. Il tempo di scadenza della cache è configurabile +con l'opzione +.IR "scadenza cache directory ftpfs" . +Un valore basso per quest'opzione può rallentare ogni operazione sul +file system ftp perché ogni operazione è accompagnata da una +richiesta al server ftp. +.PP +E' possibile definire un host proxy per fare trasferimenti ftp. +Notare che molti firewall moderni sono totalmente trasparenti almeno +per i trasferimenti FTP passivi (vedere di seguito), perciò i proxy +ftp sono considerati obsoleti. +.PP +Se +.I usa sempre ftp proxy +non è impostata, è possibile usare il punto escamativo per abilitare +il proxy per certi host. Vedere la sezione +.\"LINK2" +file system FTP +.\"FTP File System" +per gli esempi. +.PP +Se quest'opzione è impostata, il programma farà due cose: consulterà +il file %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy per le righe contenenti nomi host +locali (se il nome host comincia con un punto, è considerato un +dominio) e assumendo che ogni nome host senza punti nel nome sia +direttamente accessibile. Tutti gli altri host verranno contattati +attraverso il proxy host specificato. +.PP +E' possibile abilitare l'uso del file +.I ~/.netrc +che mantiene i nomi di accesso e le password per i server ftp. Vedere +netrc (5) per una descrizione del formato .netrc. +.PP +.I Usa modalità passiva +abilita l'uso della modalità FTP passiva quando la connessione per +il trasferimento file è iniziata dal client, non dal server. +Quest'opzione è raccomandata e preimpostata. Se quest'opzione è spenta, +la connessione dati viene iniziata dal server. Questo potrebbe non +funzionare con alcuni firewall. +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Salva configurazione" +Alla partenza il Midnight Commander prova a caricare le informazioni di +inizializzazione dal file ~/.config/mc/ini. Se questo file non esiste, +caricherà le informazioni dal file di configurazione di sistema +posizionato in %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini. Se il file di configurazione di +sistema non esiste, MC userà le impostazioni predefinite. +.PP +Il comando +.I salva configurazione +crea il file ~/.config/mc/ini salvando le impostazioni correnti +dei menu +.\"LINK2" +sinistra, destra +.\"Left and Right Menus" +e +.\"LINK2" +opzioni\&. +.\"Options Menu" +.PP +Se si attiva l'opzione +.IR "autosalva configurazione" , +MC salverà sempre le impostazioni correnti all'uscita. +.PP +Esistono anche impostazioni che non possono essere cambiate dai menu. +Per cambiare queste impostazioni è necessario modificare il file di +configurazione con il vostro editor preferito. Vedere sezione +.\"LINK2" +impostazioni speciali +.\"Special Settings" +per ulteriori informazioni. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Esecuzione comandi del sistema operativo" +E' possibile eseguire comandi del sistema operativo direttamente +nella riga di comando del Midnight Commander o selezionando il +programma che si vuole eseguire con la barra di selezione in uno +dei pannelli e premendo Invio. +.PP +Se si preme Invio su di un file che non è eseguibile, il Midnight +Commander confronta l'estensione del file selezionato con ciò +che trova nel +.\"LINK2" +file estensioni\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +Se viene trovata una corrispondenza, verrà eseguito il codice associato. +Verrà eseguita una semplice +.\"LINK2" +espansione di macro +.\"Macro Substitution" +prima di eseguire il comando. +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH "Il comando cd interno" +Il comando +.I cd +non viene passato alla shell per l'esecuzione ma viene interpretato +dal Midnight Commander. Perciò esso non può gestire tutte quelle +simpatiche espansioni di macro e sostituzioni che fa la shell, malgrado +alcune le possa ancora fare: +.PP +.I Sostituzione della tilde. +La (~) verrà sostituita con la vostra directory home e se si appende +un nome utente dopo la tilde, allora verrà sostituita con la directory +di login dell'utente indicato. +.PP +Per esempio, ~ospite è la directory home dell'utente ospite, mentre +~/ospite è la directory ospite nella vostra home directory. +.PP +.I Directory precedente. +E' possibile saltare alla directory dove si era precedentemente usando +il nome directory speciale '\-' così: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I Directory CDPATH. +Se la directory indicata al comando +.B cd +non è nella directory corrente, il Midnight Commander userà il +valore della viariabile ambiente +.B CDPATH +per cercare la directory in ognuna delle directory nominate. +.PP +Per esempio si può impostare la variabile +.B CDPATH +a ~/src:/usr/src, permettendo di cambiare directory verso ognuna +delle directory presenti nelle directory ~/src e /usr/src da qualunque +parte nel file system (per esempio cd linux vi porterà in +/usr/src/linux). +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Sostituzione di macro" +Quando si accede ad un +.\"LINK2" +menu utente\&, +.\"Edit Menu File" +o si esegue un +.\"LINK2" +comando dipendente dall'estensione\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +o si esegue un comando dalla riga di ingresso, +viene eseguita una semplice sostituzione di macro. +.PP +Le macro sono: +.TP +.I "%i" +Indentazione di spazi, uguale alla colonna della +posizione del cursore. Solo per la modifica menu. +.TP +.I "%y" +Il tipo di sintassi del file corrente. Solo per la modifica menu. +.TP +.I "%k" +Nome del file di blocco. +.TP +.I "%e" +Nome del file di errore. +.TP +.I "%m" +Nome del menu corrente. +.TP +.IR "%f" e "%p" +Nome del file corrente. +.TP +.I "%x" +L'estensione del file corrente. +.TP +.I "%b" +Nome del file corrente ma senza estensione. +.TP +.I "%d" +Nome della directory corrente. +.TP +.I "%F" +Il file corrente nel pannello non selezionato. +.TP +.I "%D" +La directory corrente nel pannello non selezionato. +.TP +.I "%t" +I file attualmente marcati. +.TP +.I "%T" +I file attualmente marcati nel pannello non selezionato. +.TP +.IR "%u" e "%U" +Simili alle macro %t e %T, in aggiunta i file vengono deselezionati. +E' possibile usare questa macro solo una volta per voce di menu file +o per voce di file estensione, dato che la volta successiva non ci +saranno file marcati. +.TP +.IR "%s" e "%S" +I file selezionati se ce ne sono. Altrimenti il file corrente. +.TP +.I "%cd" +Questa è una macro speciale usata per cambiare la directory corrente +alla directory specificata di fronte ad essa. Usata principalmente +come interfaccia al +.\"LINK2" +file system virtuale\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.TP +.I "%view" +Questa macro serve per invocare il visualizzatore interno. Può essere +usata da sola o con argomenti. Se si passa argomenti a questa macro, +questi dovrebbero essere racchiusi da parentesi. +.IP +Gli argomenti sono: +.I ascii +per forzare il visualizzatore in modo ascii; +.I hex +per forzare il visualizzatore in modo esadecimale; +.I nroff +per dire al visualizzatore che deve interpretare le sequenze di +grassetto e sottolineato di nroff; +.I unformatted +per dire al visualizzatore di non interpretare i comandi nroff +per rendere il testo grassetto o sottolineato. +.TP +.I "%%" +Il carattere % +.TP +.I "%{testo}" +Visualizza una richiesta di sostituzione. Viene mostrata una finestra +contenente il testo all'interno delle graffe. La macro viene sostituita +dal testo immesso dall'utente. L'utente può premere ESC o F10 per annullare. +Questa macro non funziona ancora sulla riga di comando. +.TP +.I "%var{ENV:default}" +Se la variabile di ambiente +.I ENV +non è impostata, la sostituzione prenderà +.IR default . +Altrimenti, verrà sostituito il valore di +.IR ENV . +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " Supporto alla subshell" +Il supporto alla subshell è una opzione di compilazione che lavora +con le seguenti shell: bash, tcsh e zsh. +.PP +Quando il codice di subshell è attivato il Midnight Commander +genererà un processo copia concorrente della shell (quella definita +dalla variabile +.B SHELL +e se non è definita, prenderà quella presente nel file /etc/passwd) +e lo eseguirà in un pseudo terminale; invece di invocare una nuova +shell ogniqualvolta si esegue un comando, il comando verrà passato +alla subshell come se lo si avesse battuto personalmente. Questo +permette di cambiare le variabili di ambiente, usare funzioni della +shell e definire alias che rimangono validi fintanto che non si +esca dal Midnight Commander. +.PP +Se si sta usando +.B bash +si può specificare comandi alla partenza della subshell nel file +~/.local/share/mc/bashrc e mappature speciali della tastiera nel file +~/.local/share/mc/inputrc. +.B tcsh +gli utenti possono specificare comandi alla partenza nel file +~/.local/share/mc/tcshrc. +.PP +Quando il codice della subshell viene utilizzato, si può sospendere +l'applicazione in ogni momento con la sequenza C\-o e saltare nuovamente +al Midnight Commander; se si interrompe un'applicazione, non si sarà +in grado di eseguire altri comandi esterni finché non si esce +dall'applicazione interrotta. +.PP +Una caratteristica aggiuntiva dell'usare la subshell è data dal +fatto che il prompt mostrato dal Midnight Commander sarà lo stesso +di quello utilizzato dalla shell. +.PP +La sezione +.\"LINK2" +OPZIONI +.\"OPTIONS" +contiene informazioni aggiuntive riguardo come controllare il codice +della subshell. +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Permessi" +La finestra Permessi serve a cambiare i bit di attributo in gruppi di +file o directory. La si può invocare con la combinazione di tasti C\-x c. +.PP +La finestra dei Permessi ha due parti \- +.I Permessi +e +.IR File . +.PP +La sezione File mostra il nome del file o della directory ed i suoi +permessi in forma ottale, oltre che il proprietario ed il gruppo. +.PP +Nella sezione Permessi c'è un set di caselle che corrispondono +agli attributi dei file. Come si cambia il bit di attributo, +si può vedere il valore in ottale aggiornato nella sezione File. +.PP +Per muoversi attraverso le sezioni (bottoni e caselle) usare i +.I tasti freccia +oppure +.IR Tab . +Per cambiare lo stato delle caselle o per selezionare un bottone +usare lo +.IR Spazio . +Si può usare anche i tasti di scelta rapida sui bottoni per attivarli +velocemente. I tasti di scelta rapida corrispondono alle lettere evidenziate +dei bottoni. +.PP +Per impostare i bit degli attributi, usare il tasto Invio. +.PP +Quando si lavora con un gruppo di file o directory, basta cliccare sui +bit che si vogliono impostare o cancellare. Una volta selezionati i bit +da cambiare, selezionare una delle azioni (Imposta marcati o Cancella +marcati). +.PP +Infine, per impostare gli attributi esattamente come specificato, usare +il tasto +.BR "[Imposta tutti]" , +che agisce su tutti i file marcati. +.PP +.B [Modifica tutti] +modifica solo gli attributi marcati su tutti i file. +.PP +.B [Imposta marcati] +pone a uno i bit marcati degli attributi di tutti i file selezionati. +.PP +.B [Cancella marcati] +pone a zero i bit marcati degli attributi di tutti i file selezionati. +.PP +.B [Imposta] +imposta gli attributi di un file. +.PP +.B [Cancella] +cancella il comando Permessi. +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Proprietario" +Il comando proprietario serve a cambiare il proprietario/gruppo di un +file. Il tasto di scelta rapida per questo comando è C\-x o. +.\"NODE "Advanced Chown" +.SH "Proprietario avanzato" +Il comando Proprietario avanzato consiste nel comando +.\"LINK2" +permessi +.\"Chmod" +e +.\"LINK2" +proprietario +.\"Chown" +combinati assieme in una finestra. E' così possibile cambiare i permessi +ed il proprietario/gruppo dei file in un sol colpo. +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "Operazioni sui file" +Quando si copia, sposta o cancella dei file il Midnight Commander +mostra la finestra di operazioni sui file. Essa mostra i file sui cui +si sta operando attualmente e ci possono essere fino a tre barre di +progressione. La barra file mostra quanta parte del file corrente è +stata copiata. La barra conteggio mostra quanti dei file selezionati +sono stati gestiti. La barra byte comunica quanto dell'ampiezza totale +dei file selezionati è stata elaborato. Se l'opzione operazioni prolisse +è deselezionata, non verranno mostrate la barra file e la barra byte. +.PP +Ci sono due bottoni sul fondo della finestra di dialogo. Premendo +il tasto Salta si salterà il resto del file. Premendo il tasto +Esci si bloccherà tutta l'operazione ed il resto dei file saranno +ignorati. +.PP +Ci sono tre altre finestre di dialogo che si possono incontrare +durante le operazioni sui file. +.PP +La finestra di dialogo di errore informa circa le condizioni di +errore ed ha tre scelte. Normalmente si seleziona il tasto +Salta per saltare il file o Esci per bloccare l'operazione. E' +possibile anche selezionare il tasto Riprova se nel frattempo si ha +risolto il problema da un'altro terminale. +.PP +La finestra di dialogo di rimpiazzo viene mostrata quando si tenta +di copiare o spostare un file sopra un file esistente. La finestra +mostra la data e la dimensione di tutti e due i file. Premere il +tasto Si per rimpiazzare il file, No per saltare il file, Tutti per +sovrascrivere tutti i file, Nessuno per non sovrascriverli mai e +Aggiorna per sovrascriverli solo se il file sorgente è più recente +del file di destinazione. E' possibile bloccare l'intera operazione +premendo il tasto Esci. +.PP +La finestra di dialogo della cancellazione ricorsiva appare quando +si tenta di cancellare una directory che non è vuota. Premere il +tasto Si per cancellare la directory ricorsivamente o No per +saltare la directory, il tasto Tutto per cancellare tutte le +directory non vuote e Nessuno per saltare tutte le directory non +vuote. Per fermare l'intera operazione premere il tasto Esci. +Se si seleziona il tasto Si o Tutto verrà richiesta una conferma. +Premere "si" solo se si è veramente sicuri di voler fare una +cancellazione ricorsiva. +.PP +Se si hanno dei file marcati e si esegue un'operazione su di essi, solo +i file sui quali l'operazione ha avuto successo verranno deselezionati. +I file su cui è fallita l'operazione o che sono stati saltati vengono +lasciati marcati. +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Maschera Copia/Rinomina" +L'operazione di copia/rinomina permette di cambiare il nomi dei file in +maniera semplice. Per farlo, è necessario specificare la maschera di +sorgente corretta e generalmente, nella parte finale della destinazione, +specificare alcuni caratteri jolly. +Tutti i file corrispondenti alla maschera sorgente sono +copiati/rinominati secondo la maschera destinazione. Se ci sono file +marcati, vengono rinominati solo i file marcati che corrispondono alla +maschera sorgente. +.PP +Queste le opzioni che possono essere impostate: +.PP +Segue i collegamenti, specifica se creare i collegamenti simbolici o no +(hard link), presenti nella directory sorgente (e ricorsivamente nelle +sue sotto directory) come nuovi collegamenti oppure se invece si +desidera che venga copiato il loro contenuto. +.PP +In una sottodir se esiste già, specifica cosa fare se nella +directory obiettivo esiste una directory con lo stesso nome del +file/directory in copia. L'azione predefinita è di copiare +il suo contenuto in quella directory, ma selezionando quest'opzione +si può copiare la directory sorgente in questa directory. +Forse un esempio aiuterà: +.PP +Si vuole copiare il contenuto di una directory pallo su /pinco/pallo, +che è una directory che esiste già. Normalmente (quando l'opzione +non è impostata), mc farebbe la copia in /pinco/pallo. Abilitando +quest'opzione verrà eseguita la copia in /pinco/pallo/pallo, perché +la directory esiste già. +.PP +Mantiene gli attributi, specifica se si vuole preservare i permessi +originali del file, le date e se si è l'utente root, gli attributi +UID e GID. Se quest'opzione non è impostata verrà rispettato il valore +corrente di umask. +.PP +.B "Usa i modelli della shell, opzione abilitata" +.PP +Quando l'opzione dei modelli della shell è abilitata è possibile usare +i caratteri jolly '*' e '?' nella maschera sorgente. Questi lavorano +come nella shell. Nella maschera obbiettivo sono permessi solo i caratteri +jolly '*' e '\\<cifra>'. Il primo carattere jolly '*' nella maschera +obbiettivo corrisponde al primo gruppo di caratteri jolly nella maschera +sorgente, il secondo '*' al secondo gruppo e così via. Il carattere +jolly '\\1' corrisponde al primo gruppo di caratteri jolly nella maschera +sorgente, '\\2' corrisponde al secondo gruppo e così via fino al '\\9'. +Il carattere jolly '\\0' rappresenta tutto il nome del file sorgente. +.PP +Due esempi: +.PP +Se la maschera sorgente è "*.tar.gz", la destinazione è "/bla/*.tgz" e +il file da copiare è "foo.tar.gz", la copia sarà "foo.tgz" in "/bla". +.PP +Supponiamo si voglia scambiare la base e l'estensione di un file cosicché +"file.c" divenga "c.file" e così via. La maschera sorgente per questa +operazione sarà "*.*" e la destinazione sarà "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Usa i modelli della shell, opzione disabilitata" +.PP +Quando l'opzione dei modelli della shell è disabilitata, MC non +esegue più il raggruppamento automatico. E' necessario usare +espressioni tipo '\\(...\\)' nella maschera sorgente per dare significato +ai caratteri jolly nella maschera obbiettivo. Altrimenti le maschere +obbiettivo si trovano nella situazione di quando i modelli della shell +sono abilitati. +.PP +Due esempi: +.PP +Se la maschera sorgente è "^\\(.*\\)\\.tar\\.gz$", la destinazione è +"/bla/*.tgz" e il file da copiare è "foo.tar.gz", la copia sarà +"/bla/foo.tgz". +.PP +Supponiamo che si voglia scambiare la base e l'estensione di un file +cosicché "file.c" divenga "c.file" e così via. La maschera sorgente per +questa operazione sarà "^\\(.*\\)\\.\\(.*\\)$" e la destinazione sarà +"\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Conversioni Maiuscole/Minuscole" +.PP +E' anche possibile cambiare tra maiuscole e minuscole i caratteri dei file. +Se si usa '\\u' o '\\l' nella maschera obbiettivo, il carattere successivo +sarà convertito rispettivamente in maiuscolo o minuscolo. +.PP +Se si usa '\\U' o '\\L' nella maschera obbiettivo, il caratteri successivi +saranno convertiti rispettivamente in maiuscolo o minuscolo fino alla +prossima corrispondenza di '\\E' o '\\U', '\\L' o alla fine del nome del file. +.PP +Notare che '\\u' e '\\l' sono più forti di '\\U' e '\\L'. +.PP +Per esempio, se la maschera sorgente è '*' (modelli della shell abilitati) +o '^\\(.*\\)$' (modelli della shell disabilitati) e la maschera obbiettivo +è '\\L\\u*' i nomi dei file saranno convertiti ad avere maiuscola iniziale +ed il resto minuscolo. +.PP +Si può usare '\\' come carattere di protezione. Per esempio, '\\\\' è +una barra retroversa e '\\*' è un asterisco. +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Visualizzatore di file interno" +Il visualizzatore di file interno fornisce due modalità di visualizzazione: +ASCII e esadecimale. Per passare da una modalità all'altra, usare il tasto F4. +Se si ha il programma GNU gzip installato, esso verrà usato automaticamente +per decomprimere i file al volo. +.PP +Il visualizzatore tenterà di usare il metodo migliore fornito dal sistema +o a seconda del tipo di file, per mostrare le informazioni. Il visualizzatore +interno interpreterà alcune sequenze di stringa per impostare gli attributi +di grassetto e sottolineato, per mostrare al meglio i file. +.PP +In modalità esadecimale, la funzione di ricerca accetta testo protetto e +costanti numeriche. Il testo protetto viene confrontato esattamente dopo +la rimozione della protezione. Ogni numero rappresenta un byte. E' possibile +mescolare testo protetto con costanti come nell'esempio: +.PP +.nf +"Stringa" \-1 0xBB 012 "ancora testo" +.fi +.PP +Notare che 012 è un numero ottale. \-1 viene convertito in 0xFF. +.PP +Alcuni dettagli interni circa il visualizzatore: su sistemi che +forniscono la chiamata di sistema mmap(2), il programma mappa il +file invece di caricarlo; se il sistema non fornisce la chiamata di +sistema mmap(2) o il file corrisponde ad un'azione che richiede +un filtro, allora il visualizzatore userà i buffer di accrescimanto +(growing), caricando perciò solo le parti del file su cui vi si accede +(inclusi i file compressi). +.PP +Ecco un'elenco di azioni associate ad ogni tasto che il Midnight Commander +gestisce nel visualizzatore di file interno. +.PP +.B F1 +Invoca il visualizzatore ipertestuale dell'aiuto. +.PP +.B F2 +Abilita/disabilita la funzione di a capo automatico. +.PP +.B F4 +Abilita/disabilita la modalità esadecimale. +.PP +.B F5 +Vai alla riga. Questo comando richiederà un numero di riga e mostrerà +quella riga. +.PP +.B F6, /. +Ricerca tramite espressione regolare. +.PP +.B ?, +Ricerca in ordine inverso, tramite espressione regolare. +.PP +.B F7 +Ricerca normale / ricerca in modalità esadecimale. +.PP +.B C\-s, F17, n. +Inizia una ricerca normale, se non c'era già un'espressione di +ricerca, altrimenti trova la prossima occorrenza. +.PP +.B C\-r. +Inizia una ricerca normale in ordine inverso, se non c'era già +un'espressione di ricerca, altrimenti trova la prossima occorrenza. +.PP +.B F8 +Cambia tra modalità Normale/Filtrata: questo mostrerà il file come si +trova su disco o se è stato specificato un filtro nel file mc.ext.ini, come +esce dal filtro. La modalità corrente è sempre quella diversa da quella +mostrata dall'etichetta del tasto, dato che il bottone rappresenta la +modalità nella quale si entra premendolo. +.PP +.B F9 +Cambia tra modalità non formattata e formattata: quando la modalità è +formattata, il visualizzatore interpreterà alcune sequenze di stringa +per rappresentare il grassetto e il sottolineato con colori diversi. +Anche per questa funzione, l'etichetta sul tasto rappresenta la modalità +non corrente. +.PP +.B F10, Esc. +Esce dal visualizzatore di file interno. +.PP +.B pagina\-giù, spazio, C\-v. +Sfoglia di una pagina in avanti. +.PP +.B pagina\-sù, M\-v, C\-b, backspace. +Sfoglia di una pagina indietro. +.PP +.B freccia\-in\-basso +Si sposta di una riga in avanti. +.PP +.B up\-key +Si sposta di una riga indietro. +.PP +.B C\-l +Ridisegna lo schermo. +.PP +.B C\-o +Passa alla subshell e mostra la schermata dei comandi. +.PP +.B "[n] m" +Imposta l'indice n. +.PP +.B "[n] r" +Salta all' indice n. +.PP +.B C\-f +Salta al file successivo. +.PP +.B C\-b +Salta al file precedente. +.PP +.B M\-r +Abilita/disabilita il righello. +.PP +E' anche possibile istruire il visualizzatore su come mostrare un file, +vedere la sezione +.\"LINK2" +modifica file estensioni\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Editor di file interno" +L'editor di file interno fornisce molte delle funzioni dei più +diffusi editor a pieno schermo. Viene invocato tramite +.B F4 +sempre che l'opzione +.I use_internal_edit +sia impostata nel file di inizializzazione. Esso ha un limite estensibile +di sedici megabyte e gestisce i file binari senza problemi. +.PP +Le funzioni che allo stato attuale supporta sono: copia, +spostamento, cancellazione, taglia e incolla di blocchi; +.IR "tasto per l'annullamento" ; +menu a discesa, inserimento file, definizione di macro, ricerca e +sostituzione di espressioni regolari; evidenziazione di testo maiuscole\-freccia +MSW\-MAC (solo per la console Linux); scambio tra inserimento\-rimpiazzo e +un'opzionale flusso di blocchi di testo attraverso comandi shell come indent. +.PP +L'editor è molto semplice da usare e non richiede apprendimento. +Per vedere cosa fanno i tasti, basta consultare il menu a +discesa appropriato. Gli altri tasti sono: maiusc + tasti freccia +produce la selezione del testo. +.B Ctrl\-Ins +copia nel file +.B mcedit.clip +e +.B Shift\-Ins +incolla da mcedit.clip. +.B Shift\-Del +taglia in +.BR mcedit.clip , +e +.B Ctrl\-Del +cancella il testo selezionato. +Funziona anche l'evidenziazione con il mouse che, come al solito, si può +utilizzare come in un normale terminale, premendo contemporaneamente +il tasto Maiuscole mentre si fa clic trascinando con il mouse. +.PP +Per definire una macro, premere +.B Ctrl\-R +poi premere i tasti che si voglia essere eseguiti. Premere nuovamente +.B Ctrl\-R +quando si ha finito. E' possibile assegnare una macro a qualsiasi tasto +si preme. La macro viene eseguita quando si preme +.B Ctrl\-A +e poi il tasto assegnato. La macro viene eseguita anche se si +preme il tasto Meta, Ctrl, o Esc e il tasto assegnato, basta che il tasto +non sia già assegnato a qualche altra funzione. Una volta definiti, i +macro comandi finiscono nel file +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +nella propria directory home. E' possibile cancellare una macro cancellando +la riga appropriata nel suddetto file. +.PP +.B F19 +formatterà il blocco evidenziato correntemente (testo, codice +.B C +o +.B C++ +o altro). Questo comportamento viene controllato dal file +.B %pkgdatadir%/edit.indent.rc +che viene copiato nel +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +nella propria directory home la prima volta che lo si usa. +.PP +L'editor visualizza snche caratteri non\-americani (160+). Quando si modifica +file binari, si dovrebbe impostare +.B mostra bit +a 7 bit nel menu opzioni, per mantenere la spaziatura pulita. +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH "Completamento" +Ovvero lascia che il Midnight Commander scriva per te. +.PP +Tentativi per eseguire un completamento del testo prima della posizione +corrente. MC tenta il completamento trattando il testo come una variabile +(se il testo comincia con +.BR $ ), +nomeutente (se il testo comincia con +.BR ~ ), +nomehost (se il testo comincia con +.BR @ ) +o comando (se si è sulla riga di comando nell'atto di battere un comando, +allora possibili completamenti includerebbero parole riservate e comandi +integrati della shell). Se nessuno di questi produce una corrispondenza, +viene tentato un completamento del nome del file. +.PP +Completamenti di nomefile, nomeutente, variabili e nomehost funzionano +su tutte le righe di ingresso, il completamento dei comandi invece è +specifico della riga di comando. +Se il completamento è ambiguo (ci sono più possibilità differenti), +MC emette un suono e l'azione seguente dipenderà a seconda delle impostazioni +dell'opzione +.I completamento: visualizza tutto +nella finestra +.\"LINK2" +configurazione\&. +.\"Configuration" +Se è abilitata, un elenco di tutte le possibilità viene mostrato vicino +alla posizione corrente per poter selezionare con i tasti freccia e +.B Invio +la voce corretta. Si può anche battere le prime lettere nelle quali le varie +possibilità differiscono per muoversi in un sottoinsieme di tutte le +possibilità e completare il più possibile. Se si preme nuovamente +.BR M\-Tab , +verrà mostrato solo il sottoinsieme nella finestra dell'elenco, altrimenti +la prima voce che corrisponde a tutti i caratteri precedenti verrà evidenziata. +Non appena non c'è più ambiguità, la finestra scompare, ma la si può nascondere +con i tasti di cancellamento +.BR Esc , +.B F10 +e i tasti di freccia sinistra e destra. Se +.\"LINK2" +completamento: visualizza tutto +.\"Configuration" +è disabilitato, la finestra viene mostrata solo se si preme +.B M\-Tab +una seconda volta; la prima volta MC emette solo un suono. +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "File system virtuale" +Il Midnight Commander è provvisto di uno strato di codice per +accedere al file system; questo strato di codice è conosciuto anche +con il nome di commutazione di file system virtuale. La commutazione +del file system virtuale permette al Midnight Commander di manipolare +file all'interno di un file system non di tipo Unix. +.PP +Attualmente il Midnight Commander viene confezionato con alcuni File +System Virtuali (VFS): il file system locale, usato per accedere al +normale file system Unix; l'ftpfs, usato per manipolare file su sistemi +remoti con il protocollo FTP; il tarfs, usato per manipolare file tar +e file tar compressi; l'undelfs, usato per recuperare file cancellati +su file system di tipo ext2 (il file system predefinito per sistemi +Unix), fish (per manipolare file su connessioni shell come rsh e ssh) e +per ultimo l'mcfs (file system del Midnight Commander), un file system +basato sulla rete. +.PP +Il codice di commutazione di file system interpreta tutti i nomi di +percorso utilizzati e li dirige al file system corretto; il formato +utilizzato per ognuno di questi file system viene descritto più avanti +nella sezioni apposite. +.\"NODE " FTP File System" +.SH " File system FTP" +Il file system FTP (ftpfs) permette di manipolare file su macchine remote. +Per utilizzarlo, si può usare il pannello del comando +.I Connessione FTP +(accessibile dalla barra dei menu) oppure si può cambiare direttamente +la directory corrente con un comando +.I cd +verso un percorso simile al seguente: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][utente[:pass]@]macchina[:porta][dir\-remota] +.PP +Gli elementi +.IR utente , +.I porta +e +.I dir\-remota +sono opzionali. Se si specifica l'elemento +.IR utente , +allora il Midnight Commander tenterà di collegarsi alla macchina remota +come quell'utente, altrimenti userà il vostro nome di login o il nome +di login prelevato dal file +.IR ~/.netrc . +L'elemento opzionale +.I pass +è la parola d'ordine per la connessione. L'uso della password nel nome VFS +della directory non è raccomandabile, dato che può apparire sullo schermo in +chiaro e può essere salvato nella cronologia directory. +.PP +Per abilitare l'uso del proxy FTP, anteporre +.B ! +(un punto esclamativo) al nome host. +.PP +Esempi: +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!dietro.il.firewall.edu/pub + ftp://guest@host\-remoto.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@server/pub +.fi +.PP +Controllare la finestra di dialogo +.\"LINK2" +file system virtuale +.\"Virtual FS" +per le opzioni ftpfs. +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH " File system Tar" +Il file system tar fornisce un accesso in sola lettura ai file tar +e tar compressi usando il comando chdir. Per cambiare la directory corrente +al file tar usare la seguente sintassi: +.PP +.I /nomefile.tar/utar://[dir\-dentro\-tar] +.PP +Il file mc.ext.ini già fornisce un collegamento per il file tar; ciò +significa che normalmente basta selezionare un file tar e premere invio +per entrare nel file tar, vedere la sezione +.\"LINK2" +modifica file estensioni +.\"Edit Extension File" +per i dettagli su come questo viene fatto. +.PP +Esempi: +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +L'ultima riga, specifica il percorso completo dell'archivio tar. +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " Trasferimento di file su FIlesystem di SHell (FISH)" +Il file system fish è un file system basato sulla rete che permette di +manipolare i file di una macchina remota come fossero locali. Per usarlo, +l'altra parte deve avere un server fish o avere una shell compatibile +bash. +.PP +Per collegarsi ad una macchina remota, basta solo fare cd +in una speciale directory il cui nome ha il seguente formato: +.PP +.nf +sh://[utente@]macchina[:opzioni]/[dir\-remota] +.fi +Gli elementi +.IR utente , +.I opzioni +e +.I dir\-remota +sono opzionali. Se si specifica l'elemento +.I utente +allora il Midnight Commander tenterà di connettersi alla macchina remota +con quell'utente, altrimenti userà il nome di login. +.PP +Le +.I opzioni +sono 'C' \- usa la compressione e 'rsh' per usare rsh invece +di ssh. Se l'elemento +.I dir\-remota +è presente, la directory corrente sulla macchina remota sarà impostata +a questo valore. +.PP +Esempi: +.PP +.nf + sh://solorsh.mx:r/linux/locale + sh://joe@vuole.lacompressione.edu:C/privato + sh://joe@noncompresso.ssh.edu/privato +.fi +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Recupero file cancellati" +Su sistemi Linux, se si richiede, tramite configure, di usare la +caratteristica di undelete del file system ext2, si avrà accesso al +file system di recupero file cancellati. Il recupero file cancellati è +disponibile solo su file system di tipo ext2. Il file system è solo +un'interfaccia alla libreria ext2fs che: recupera tutti i nomi dei +file cancellati su un fs ext2 e fornisce ed estrae i file selezionati +in una partizione normale. +.PP +Per usare questo file system, è necessario entrare nella directory +con il nome speciale formato dal prefisso "undel://" e dal nome del +file system dove il file risiede. +.PP +Per esempio, per recuperare file cancellati sulla seconda partizione +del primo disco SCSI su Linux, si dovrà usare il seguente percorso: +.PP +.nf + undel://sda2 +.fi +.PP +Il recupero può metterci un po' di tempo per caricare le informazioni +necessarie per poter cominciare a navigare attraverso i file. +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " EXTernal File System" +.B extfs +allows to integrate numerous features and file types into GNU Midnight +Commander in an easy way, by writing scripts. +.PP +Extfs filesystems can be divided into two categories: +.PP +1. Stand\-alone filesystems, which are not associated with any existing +file. They represent certain system\-wide data as a directory tree. +You can invoke them by typing +.RI ' "cd fsname://" ' +where fsname is an extfs short name (see below). Examples of such +filesystems include audio (list audio tracks on the CD) or apt (list of +all Debian packages in the system). +.PP +For example, to list CD\-Audio tracks on your CD\-ROM drive, type +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. 'Archive' filesystems (like rpm, patchfs and more), which represent +contents of a file as a directory tree. It can consist of 'real' files +compressed in an archive (urar, rpm) or virtual files, like messages +in a mailbox (mailfs) or parts of a patch (patchfs). To access such +filesystems +.RI ' fsname:// ' +should be appended to the archive name. Note that the archive itself +can be on another vfs. +.PP +For example, to list contents of a zip archive documents.zip type +.PP +.nf + cd documents.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +In many aspects, you could treat extfs like any other directory. For +instance, you can add it to the hotlist or change to it from directory +history. An important limitation is that you cannot invoke shell +commands inside extfs, just like any other non\-local VFS. +.PP +Common extfs scripts included with Midnight Commander are: +.TP +.B a +access 'A:' DOS/Windows diskette +.RI ( "cd a://" ). +.TP +.B apt +front end to Debian's APT package management system +.RI ( "cd apt://" ). +.TP +.B audio +audio CD ripping and playing +.RI ( "cd audio://" +or +.IR "cd device/audio://" ). +.TP +.B bpp +package of Bad Penguin GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.bpp/bpp://" ). +.TP +.B deb +package of Debian GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.deb/deb://" ). +.TP +.B dpkg +Debian GNU/Linux installed packages +.RI ( "cd deb://" ). +.TP +.B hp48 +view and copy files to/from a HP48 calculator +.RI ( "cd hp48://" ). +.TP +.B lslR +browsing of lslR listings as found on many FTPs +.RI ( "cd filename/lslR://" ). +.TP +.B mailfs +mbox\-style mailbox files support +.RI ( "cd mailbox/mailfs://" ). +.TP +.B patchfs +extfs to handle unified and context diffs +.RI ( "cd filename/patchfs://" ). +.TP +.B rpm +RPM package +.RI ( "cd filename/rpm://" ). +.TP +.B rpms +RPM database management +.RI ( "cd rpms://" ). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +archivers +.RI ( "cd archive/xxxx://" +where xxxx is one of: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +You could bind file type/extension to specified extfs as described in the +.\"LINK2" +Edit Extension File +.\"Edit Extension File" +section. Here is an example entry for Debian packages: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Open=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH "Colori" +Il Midnight Commander tenta di stabilire se il terminale corrente +supporta i colori usando il database dei terminali e il nome del +terminale corrente. Capita che possa sbagliarsi, perciò si può essere +costretti a forzare la modalità a colori o a disabilitarla usando +rispettivamente le opzioni \-c e \-b. +.PP +Se il programma è compilato con il manager dello schermo S\-Lang invece +che ncurses, controllerà se è impostata anche la variabile +.B COLORTERM, +con lo stesso effetto dell'opzione \-c. +.PP +E' possibile specificare i terminali su cui si vuole forzare sempre +la modalità colore aggiungendo la variabile +.I color_terminals +nella sezione Colors del file di inizializzazione. +Questo previene il Midnight Commander dal tentare di controllare se +il terminale supporta i colori. Per esempio: +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +.fi +.nf +color_terminals=nome_terminale\-1,nome\-terminale\-2... +.fi +.PP +Il programma può essere compilato sia con il supporto di ncurses che +di S\-Lang ma ncurses non fornisce alcun modo per forzare la modalità +colore: ncurses userà solo le informazioni nel database dei terminali. +.PP +Il Midnight Commander fornisce un modo per cambiare i colori predefiniti. +Attualmente i colori sono configurati usando la variabile ambiente +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +o la sezione Colors nel file di inizializzazione. +.PP +Nella sezione Colors, la mappa dei colori predefinita viene caricata +dalla variabile +.IR base_color . +Si può specificare una mappa colori alternativa per un terminale +usando il nome del terminale come chiave nella sezione. Esempio: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +Il formato della definizione dei colori è: +.PP +.nf + <parolachiave>=<coloreprimopiano>,<coloresfondo>:<parolachiave>= ... +.fi +.PP +I colori sono opzionali e le parolechiave sono: normal, selected, marked, +markselect, errors, input, reverse, gauge. I colori dei menu sono: menunormal, +menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, menuinactive. I colori delle finestre di +dialogo sono: dnormal, dfocus, dhotnormal, dhotfocus. I colori dell'aiuto +sono: helpnormal, helpitalic, helpbold, helplink, helpslink. +Il colore del visualizzatore è: viewunderline. +Colori speciali di evidenziazione: executable, directory, link, device, +special, core. +I colori dell'viewer sono: viewnormal, viewbold, viewunderline, viewselected. +I colori dell'editor sono: editnormal, editbold, editmarked. +.PP +.I input +determina il colore delle righe di input usate delle finestre di dialogo. +.PP +.I gauge +determina il colore della parte riempita della barra di progressione +(gauge), che mostra quanta percentuale del file è stata copiata o +altro in forma grafica. +.PP +Le finestre di dialogo usano i colori seguenti: +.I dnormal +usata per il testo normale, +.I dfocus +è il colore usato per il componente correntemente selezionato, +.I dhotnormal +è il colore usato per differenziare il tasto di scelta rapida +nei componenti normali, mentre il colore +.I dhotfocus +viene usato per il colore evidenziato nel componente correntemente +selezionato. +.PP +I menu usano lo stesso schema ma usano invece i selettori menunormal, menusel, +menuhot, menuhotsel e menuinactive. +.PP +L'aiuto usa i seguenti colori: +.I helpnormal +viene usato per il testo normale, +.I helpitalic +viene usato per il testo enfatizzato con il corsivo nelle pagine del manuale, +.I helpbold +viene usato per il testo enfatizzato con il grassetto nelle pagine del manuale, +.I helplink +viene usato per un collegamento non selezionato e +.I helpslink +viene usato per un collegamento selezionato. +.PP +I colori speciali di evidenziazione determinano come i file +vengono visualizzati quando l'evidenziazione dei file è +abilitata (vedere sezione +.\"LINK2" +aspetto\&). +.\"Layout +.I directory +usata per directory o collegamenti simbolici a directory; +.I executable +per il file eseguibili; +.I link +viene usata per i collegamenti simbolici che non sono nè interrotti +nè connessi a directory; +.I stalelink +usata per collegamenti simbolici interrotti; +.I device +\- dispositivi a caratteri e blocchi; +.I special +usata per i file speciali, come pipe e socket; +.I core +usata per i file core. +.PP +I colori possibili sono: black, gray, red, brightred, green, +brightgreen, brown, yellow, blue, brightblue, magenta, brightmagenta, +cyan, brightcyan, lightgray e white. Inoltre c'è una speciale parola +chiave per lo sfondo trasparente. Essa è 'default'. Il 'default' può +essere usato solo come colore di sfondo. Esempio: +.nf +[Colors] +base_color=normal=white,default:marked=magenta,default +.fi +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Impostazioni speciali" +Molte delle impostazioni del Midnight Commander possono essere cambiate +dai menu. Comunque, c'è un piccolo numero di impostazioni che possono +essere cambiate solo agendo sul file di configurazione. +.PP +Queste sono le variabili che possono essere impostate nel file ~/.config/mc/ini: +.TP +.I clear_before_exec +Il valore predefinito del Midnight Commander è di cancellare lo schermo +prima dell'esecuzione di un comando. Se si preferisce vedere il risultato +di un comando in fondo allo schermo, si modifichi la copia locale del file +~/.config/mc/ini e si cambi il valore del campo clear_before_exec a 0. +.TP +.I confirm_view_dir +Se si preme F3 su di una directory, normalmente MC entra nella directory. +Se questa opzione è impostata a 1, MC chiederà una conferma prima di +cambiare directory se si hanno dei file marcati. +.TP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds +Questo valore è il numero di secondi che il Midnight Commander aspetta +prima di tentare di riconnettersi ad un ftp server che ha negato +l'autenticazione. Se il valore è zero, l'autenticazione non verrà ritentata. +.TP +.I max_dirt_limit +Specifica al massimo quanti aggiornamenti possono essere saltati nel +visualizzatore di file interno. Normalmente questo valore non è +significativo, dato che il codice automaticamente aggiusta il numero +da saltare a seconda della velocità con cui arrivano le pressioni dei +tasti. Comunque, su macchine molto lente o su terminali con un'auto +ripetizione dei tasti molto veloce, un grande valore può rendere gli +aggiornamenti dello schermo troppo instabili. +.IP +Sembra che impostare max_dirt_limit a 10 porta i migliori risultati, +e questo è il valore predefinito. +.TP +.I mouse_move_pages +Controlla il fatto che lo scorrimento con il mouse sui pannelli sia fatto +per pagine o per righe. +.TP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer +Controlla se lo scorrimento del mouse nel visualizzatore di file interno +sia fatto per pagine o per righe. +.TP +.I old_esc_mode +Normalmente il Midnight Commander tratta il tasto ESC come un prefisso +(old_esc_mode=0), ma se si imposta quest'opzione (old_esc_mode=1), +allora il tasto ESC agirà come un tasto di prefisso per un secondo, e +se non vengono premuti altri tasti, allora il tasto ESC sarà interpretato +come un tasto di cancellazione (ESC ESC). +.TP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +Permette una gestione speciale per '+', '\-', '*' nella riga di comando +(selezione, deselezione, selezione inversa) solo se la riga di comando è +vuota. Non è necessario proteggere questi caratteri nel mezzo della riga +di comando ma non è possibile cambiare selezione se la riga di comando +non è vuota. +.TP +.I panel_scroll_pages +Se impostata (valore predefinito), i pannelli scorrono di metà +quando il cursore raggiunge la fine o l'inizio del pannello, +altrimenti scorrono di un file per volta. +.TP +.I show_output_starts_shell +Questa variabile lavora solo se non si sta usando il supporto della +subshell. Quando si usano i tasti C\-o per tornare allo schermo utente, +se quest'opzione è impostata, si avrà una nuova shell. Altrimenti, +premendo qualsiasi tasto si tornerà al Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I torben_fj_mode +Se quest'opzione è impostata, allora i tasti inizio e fine lavoreranno +leggermente differentemente sui pannelli. Invece che muovere le selezioni +al primo e ultimo file del pannello, agiranno nel modo seguente: +.IP +Il tasto inizio: va alla riga centrale, se sotto di essa, altrimenti +va alla riga in cima a meno che non ci sia già; in tal caso andrà al +primo file del pannello. +.IP +Il tasto fine ha un comportamento simile: va giù alla riga centrale +se era sopra di essa, altrimenti va alla riga di fondo a meno che non +ci sia già; in tal caso sposterà la selezione all'ultimo file del +pannello. +.TP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +Se questa variabile è abilitata (valore predefinito) userà il comando +file per trovare delle corrispondenze sui tipi di file elencati nel +.\"LINK2" +file mc.ext.ini\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.TP +.I xtree_mode +Se questa variabile è impostata (il valore predefinito è no) quando +si naviga il file system su un pannello ad albero, automaticamente +ricaricherà l'altro pannello con il contenuto della directory +selezionata. +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH "Database di terminali" +Il Midnight Commander fornisce una maniera per correggere il database +dei terminali si sistema senza richiedere i privilegi di +amministratore (root). Il Midnight Commander ricerca nel file di +inizializzazione di sistema (il file mc.lib collocato nella directory +di libreria del Midnight Commander) e nel file ~/.config/mc/ini la sezione +"terminal:nome\-del\-terminale\-in\-uso" e poi la sezione "terminal:general", +ogni riga della sezione contiene il simbolo chiave che si vuol definire, +seguito da un segno di uguale e la definizione per quel tasto. +E' possibile usare la forma speciale \\e per rappresentare il carattere +di escape e ^x per rappresentare il carattere control\-x. +.PP +I simboli chiave possibili sono: +.PP +.nf +f0 a f20 tasti funzione f0\-f20 +bs backspace +home tasto inizio +end tasto fine +up tasto freccia in su +down tasto freccia in giù +left tasto freccia a sinistra +right tasto freccia a destra +pgdn tasto pagina in giù +pgup tasto pagina in su +insert tasto inserimento +delete tasto cancellazione +complete per fare il completamento +.fi +.PP +Per esempio, per definire il tasto di inserimento come escape + [ + O + p +impostare il seguente nel file ini: +.PP +.nf +insert=\\e[Op +.fi +.PP +Il tasto di +.I completamento +rappresenta le sequenze di escape usate per invocare il processo di +completamento, invocato tramite M\-tab, ma ridefinibile ad altri tasti +per fare lo stesso lavoro (su quelle tastiere con tonnellate di +simpatici tasti dappertutto). +.SH "" +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH "FILE" +Il programma recupera tutte le informazioni relative al proprio funzionamento +dalla variabile ambiente +.BR MC_DATADIR , +e se la variabile non è impostata, passerà alla directory %pkgdatadir% . +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +Il file di aiuto per il programma. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Il file delle estensioni di sistema predefinito. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Le estensioni dell'utente, la configurazione del visualizzatore e +dell'editor di file. Se presenti, questi file si sovrappongono ai file di +sistema. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +La configurazione di sistema predefinita per il Midnight Commander, usata solo +se l'utente non possiede il proprio file ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Le impostazioni globali per il Midnight Commander. La modifica di questo +file influisce su tutti gli utenti, che abbiano o no il file ~/.config/mc/ini . +Attualmente vengono caricate solo le +.\"LINK2" +impostazioni del terminale +.\"Terminal databases" +da mc.lib. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +La configurazione dell'utente. Se questo file è presente, la configurazione +viene caricata da qui invece che dal file di sistema. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +Questo file contiene i suggerimenti (dritte) mostrate dal programma. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +Questo file contiene il menu di sistema per le applicazioni. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +Il menu utente per le applicazioni. Se presente viene usato al posto +del menu delle applicazioni di sistema. +.PP +.I ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.IP +L'elenco di directory per l'albero directory e per la vista ad albero. +.PP +.I ./.mc.menu +.IP +Menu locale definito dall'utente. Se questo file è presente viene usato +al posto del menu delle applicazioni utente o di sistema. +.PP +To change default home directory of MC, you can use +.BR MC_PROFILE_ROOT +environment variable. The value of MC_PROFILE_ROOT must be an absolute path. +If MC_PROFILE_ROOT is unset or empty, HOME variable is used. If HOME is unset +or empty, MC directories are get from GLib library. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "LICENZA" +Questo programma è distribuito sotto i termini della Licenza Generale +GNU come pubblicata dalla Free Software Foundation. Vedere l'aiuto integrato +per i dettagli sulla licenza e sulla mancanza di garanzie. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH "REPERIBILITA'" +L'ultima versione di questo programma si trova su +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH "VEDERE ANCHE" +ed(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), view(1), sh(1), bash(1), +tcsh(1), zsh(1). +.PP +.nf +La pagina Web del Midnight Commander: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH "AUTORI" +Miguel de Icaza (miguel@ximian.com), Janne Kukonlehto +(jtklehto@paju.oulu.fi), Radek Doulik (rodo@ucw.cz), Fred +Leeflang (fredl@nebula.ow.org), Dugan Porter (dugan@b011.eunet.es), +Jakub Jelinek (jj@sunsite.mff.cuni.cz), Ching Hui +(mr854307@cs.nthu.edu.tw), Andrej Borsenkow (borsenkow.msk@sni.de), +Norbert Warmuth (nwarmuth@privat.circular.de), +Mauricio Plaza (mok@roxanne.nuclecu.unam.mx), Paul Sheer +(psheer@icon.co.za), Pavel Machek (pavel@ucw.cz) e Pavel Roskin +(proski@gnu.org) sono gli sviluppatori di questo pacchetto. +Alessandro Rubini (rubini@ipvvis.unipv.it) ha dato un notevole +contribuito nella correzione e nel miglioramento del supporto del +mouse nel programma, John Davis (davis@space.mit.edu) ha reso +disponibile la sua libreria S\-lang sotto la licenza GPL e ha risposto +alle mie domande su di essa; le seguenti persone hanno contribuito +al codice e in molte correzioni (in ordine alfabetico): +.PP +Adam Tla/lka (atlka@sunrise.pg.gda.pl), +alex@bcs.zp.ua (Alex I. Tkachenko), Antonio Palama, +DOS port (palama@posso.dm.unipi.it), Erwin van Eijk +(wabbit@corner.iaf.nl), Gerd Knorr (kraxel@cs.tu\-berlin.de), +Jean\-Daniel Luiset (luiset@cih.hcuge.ch), Jon Stevens +(root@dolphin.csudh.edu), Juan Francisco Grigera, port su piattaforma Win32 +(j\-grigera@usa.net), Juan Jose Ciarlante (jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), +Ilya Rybkin (rybkin@rouge.phys.lsu.edu), Marcelo Roccasalva +(mfroccas@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), Massimo Fontanelli (MC8737@mclink.it), +Sergey Ya. Korshunoff (seyko2@gmail.com), Thomas Pundt +(pundtt@math.uni\-muenster.de), Timur Bakeyev +(timur@goff.comtat.kazan.su), Tomasz Cholewo +(tjchol01@mecca.spd.louisville.edu), Torben Fjerdingstad +(torben.fjerdingstad@uni\-c.dk), Vadim Sinolitis (vvs@nsrd.npi.msu.su) +e Wim Osterholt (wim@djo.wtm.tudelft.nl). +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH "BACHI" +Vedere il file TODO nella distribuzione per informazioni su +quello che rimane ancora da fare. +.PP +Se si vuole fare un rapporto di un problema nel programma, si prega di +spedire un messaggio di posta a questo indirizzo: +mc\-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org. +.PP +Nel rapporto è necessario fornire una descrizione dettagliata del baco, +la versione del programma (mc \-v mostra quest'informazione), il sistema +operativo su cui si sta facendo girare il programma e, se il programma +va in crash, è gradita una traccia dello stack. + diff --git a/doc/man/mc.1.in b/doc/man/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6aad0e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,4331 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\"TOPICS "Topics:" +.TH MC 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "NAME" +mc \- Visual shell for Unix\-like systems. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.B mc +[\-abcCdfhPstuUVx] [\-l log] [dir1 [dir2]] [\-e [file] ...] [\-v file] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +GNU Midnight Commander is a directory browser/file manager for +Unix\-like operating systems. +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.SH "OPTIONS" +.TP +.I \-a, \-\-stickchars +Disable usage of graphic characters for line drawing. +.TP +.I \-b, \-\-nocolor +Force black and white display. +.TP +.I \-c, \-\-color +Force color mode, please check the section +.\"LINK2" +Colors +.\"Colors" +for more information. +.TP +.I \-C arg, \-\-colors=arg +Specify a different color set in the command line. The format of arg is +documented in the +.\"LINK2" +Colors +.\"Colors" +section. +.TP +.I \-\-configure\-options +Display configure options. +.TP +.I \-d, \-\-nomouse +Disable mouse support. +.TP +.I \-e [file], \-\-edit[=file] +Start the internal editor. If the file is specified, open it on +startup. See also +.BR "mcedit (1)" . +.TP +.I \-f, \-\-datadir +Display the compiled\-in search paths for Midnight Commander files. +.TP +.I \-F, \-\-datadir\-info +Display extended info about compiled\-in paths for +Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Force a "normal tracking" mouse mode. Used when running on +xterm\-capable terminals (tmux/screen). +.TP +.I \-k, \-\-resetsoft +Reset softkeys to their default from the termcap/terminfo +database. Only useful on HP terminals when the function keys don't work. +.TP +.I \-K file, \-\-keymap=file +Specify a name of keymap file in the command line. +.TP +.I \-l file, \-\-ftplog=file +Save the ftpfs dialog with the server in file. +.TP +.I \-\-nokeymap +Don't load key bindings from any file, use default hardcoded keys. +.TP +.I \-P file, \-\-printwd=file +Print the last working directory to the specified file. This option is +not meant to be used directly. Instead, it's used from a special shell +script that automatically changes the current directory of the shell to +the last directory Midnight Commander was in. Source the file +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.sh +(bash and zsh users) or +.B %libexecdir%/mc.csh +(tcsh users) respectively to define +.B mc +as an alias to the appropriate shell script. +.TP +.I \-s, \-\-slow +Turn on the slow terminal mode, in this mode the program will not draw +expensive line drawing characters and will toggle verbose mode off. +.TP +.I \-S arg, \-\-skin=arg +Specify a name of skin in the command line. Technology of skins is +documented in the +.\"LINK2" +Skins +.\"Skins" +section. +.TP +.I \-t, \-\-termcap +Used only if the code was compiled with S\-Lang and terminfo: it makes +Midnight Commander use the value of the +.B TERMCAP +variable for the terminal information instead of the information on +the system wide terminal database +.TP +.I \-u, \-\-nosubshell +Disable use of the concurrent shell (only makes sense if Midnight +Commander has been built with concurrent shell support). +.TP +.I \-U, \-\-subshell +Enable use of the concurrent shell support (only makes sense if the +Midnight Commander was built with the subshell support set as an +optional feature). +.TP +.I \-v file, \-\-view=file +Start the internal viewer to view the specified file. See also +.BR "mcview (1)" . +.TP +.I \-V, \-\-version +Display the version of the program. +.TP +.I \-x, \-\-xterm +Force xterm mode. Used when running on xterm\-capable terminals (two +screen modes, and able to send mouse escape sequences). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +Do not use X11 to get the state of modifiers Alt, Ctrl, Shift +.PP +If both paths are specified, the first path name is the directory to show +in the active panel; the second path name is the directory to be shown in +the other panel. +.PP +If one path is specified, the path name is the directory to show +in the active panel; value of "other_dir" from panels.ini is the directory +to be shown in the passive panel. +.PP +If no paths are specified, current directory is shown in the active panel; +value of "other_dir" from panels.ini is the directory to be shown in +the passive panel. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH "Overview" +The screen of Midnight Commander is divided into four parts. +Almost all of the screen space is taken up by two directory panels. +By default, the second line from the bottom of the screen is the +shell command line, and the bottom line shows the function key labels. +The topmost line is the +.\"LINK2" +menu bar line\&. +.\"Menu Bar" +The menu bar line may not be visible, but appears if you click the +topmost line with the mouse or press the F9 key. +.PP +Midnight Commander provides a view of two directories at the same +time. One of the panels is the current panel (a selection bar is in +the current panel). Almost all operations take place on the current +panel. Some file operations like Rename and Copy by default use the +directory of the unselected panel as a destination (don't worry, they +always ask you for confirmation first). For more information, see the +sections on the +.\"LINK2" +Directory Panels\&, +.\"Directory Panels" +the +.\"LINK2" +Left and Right Menus +.\"Left and Right Menus" +and the +.\"LINK2" +File Menu\&. +.\"File Menu" +.PP +You can execute system commands from Midnight Commander by simply +typing them. Everything you type will appear on the shell command line, +and when you press Enter, Midnight Commander will execute the +command line you typed; read the +.\"LINK2" +Shell Command Line +.\"Shell Command Line" +and +.\"LINK2" +Input Line Keys +.\"Input Line Keys" +sections to learn more about the command line. +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Mouse Support" +Midnight Commander comes with mouse support. It is activated +whenever you are running on an +.B xterm(1) +terminal (it even works if you take a telnet, ssh or rlogin connection to +another machine from the xterm) or if you are running on a Linux +console and have the +.B gpm +mouse server running. +.PP +When you left click on a file in the directory panels, that file is +selected; if you click with the right button, the file is marked (or +unmarked, depending on the previous state). +.PP +Double\-clicking on a file will try to execute the command if it is +an executable program; and if the +.\"LINK2" +extension file +.\"Edit Extension File" +has a program specified for the file's extension, the specified +program is executed. +.PP +Also, it is possible to execute the commands assigned to the function +key labels by clicking on them. +.PP +The default auto repeat rate for the mouse buttons is 400 +milliseconds. This may be changed to other values by editing the +.\"LINK2" +\&~/.config/mc/ini +.\"Save Setup" +file and changing the +.I mouse_repeat_rate +parameter. +.PP +If you are running Midnight Commander with the mouse support, you +can get the default mouse behavior (cutting and pasting text) by holding +down the Shift key. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Keys" +Some commands in Midnight Commander involve the use of the +.I Control +(sometimes labeled CTRL or CTL) and the +.I Meta +(sometimes labeled ALT or even Compose) keys. In this manual we will +use the following abbreviations: +.TP +.B C\-<chr> +means hold the Control key while typing the character <chr>. +Thus C\-f would be: hold the Control key and type f. +.TP +.B Alt\-<chr> +means hold the Meta or Alt key down while typing <chr>. +If there is no Meta or Alt key, type +.IR Esc , +release it, then type the character <chr>. +.TP +.B S\-<chr> +means hold the Shift key down while typing <chr>. +.PP +All input lines in Midnight Commander use an approximation to +the GNU Emacs editor's key bindings (default). +.PP +You may redefine key bindings. See +.\"LINK2" +.I redefine hotkey bindings +.\"Keys_redefine" +.PP +for more info. All other key bindings (described in this manual) are relative +to default behavior. + +.PP +There are many sections which tell about the keys. The following are +the most important. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +File Menu +.\"File Menu" +section documents the keyboard shortcuts for the commands appearing in +the File menu. This section includes the function keys. Most of these +commands perform some action, usually on the selected file or the +tagged files. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Directory Panels +.\"Directory Panels" +section documents the keys which select a file or tag files as a +target for a later action (the action is usually one from the file +menu). +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Shell Command Line +.\"Shell Command Line" +section list the keys which are used for entering and editing command +lines. Most of these copy file names and such from the directory +panels to the command line (to avoid excessive typing) or access the +command line history. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Input Line Keys +.\"Input Line Keys" +are used for editing input lines. This means both the command line and +the input lines in the query dialogs. + +.\"NODE " Keys_redefine" +.SH " Redefine hotkey bindings" +Hotkey bindings may be read from external file (keymap\-file). +Initially, Midnight Commander creates key bindings using keymap defined +in the source code. Then, two files +.B %pkgdatadir%/mc.keymap +and +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.keymap +are loaded always, sequentially reassigned key bindings defined earlier. +User\-defined keymap\-file is searched on the following algorithm (to the first one found): +.IP +.br +1) command line option +.B \-K <keymap> +or +.B \-\-keymap=<keymap> +.br +2) Environment variable +.B MC_KEYMAP +.br +3) Parameter +.B keymap +in section +.B [Midnight\-Commander] +of config file. +.br +4) File +.B ~/.config/mc/mc.keymap +.br +.PP +Command line option, environment variable and parameter in config file may +contain the absolute path to the keymap\-file (with the extension \.keymap +or without it). Search of keymap\-file will occur in (to the first one found): +.IP +.br +1) +.B ~/.config/mc +.br +2) +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/ +.br +3) +.B %pkgdatadir%/ + +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH " Miscellaneous Keys" +Here are some keys which don't fall into any of the other categories: +.TP +.B Enter +if there is some text in the command line (the one at the bottom of +the panels), then that command is executed. If there is no text in the +command line then if the selection bar is over a directory the +Midnight Commander does a +.B chdir(2) +to the selected directory and reloads the information on the panel; +if the selection is an executable file then it is executed. Finally, +if the extension of the selected file name matches one of the +extensions in the +.\"LINK2" +extensions file +.\"Edit Extension File" +then the corresponding command is executed. +.TP +.B C\-l +repaint all the information in Midnight Commander. +.TP +.B C\-x c +run the +.\"LINK2" +Chmod +.\"Chmod" +command on a file or on the tagged files. +.TP +.B C\-x o +run the +.\"LINK2" +Chown +.\"Chown" +command on the current file or on the tagged files. +.TP +.B C\-x l +run the hard link command. +.TP +.B C\-x s +run the absolute symbolic link command. +.TP +.B C\-x v +run the relative symbolic link command. See the +.\"LINK2" +File Menu +.\"File Menu" +section for more information about symbolic links. +.TP +.B C\-x i +set the other panel display mode to information. +.TP +.B C\-x q +set the other panel display mode to quick view. +.TP +.B C\-x ! +execute the +.\"LINK2" +External panelize +.\"External panelize" +command. +.TP +.B C\-x h +run the +.\"LINK2" +add directory to hotlist +.\"Hotlist" +command. +.TP +.B Alt\-! +executes the Filtered view command, described in the +.\"LINK2" +view command\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.TP +.B Alt\-? +executes the +.\"LINK2" +Find file +.\"Find File" +command. +.TP +.B Alt\-c +pops up the +.\"LINK2" +quick cd +.\"Quick cd" +dialog. +.TP +.B C\-o +when the program is being run in the Linux or FreeBSD console or under +an xterm, it will show you the output of the previous command. When ran +on the Linux console, Midnight Commander uses an external program +(cons.saver) to handle saving and restoring of information on the +screen. +.PP +When the subshell support is compiled in, you can type C\-o at any time +and you will be taken back to Midnight Commander's main screen, to +return to your application just type C\-o. If you have an application +suspended by using this trick, you won't be able to execute other +programs from Midnight Commander until you terminate the suspended +application. +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Directory Panels" +This section lists the keys which operate on the directory panels. If +you want to know how to change the appearance of the panels take a +look at the section on +.\"LINK2" +Left and Right Menus\&. +.\"Left and Right Menus" +.TP +.B Tab, C\-i +change the current panel. The old other panel becomes the new current +panel and the old current panel becomes the new other panel. The +selection bar moves from the old current panel to the new current +panel. +.TP +.B Insert, C\-t +to tag files you may use the Insert key (the kich1 terminfo sequence). +To untag files, just retag a tagged file. +.TP +.B Alt\-e +to change charset of panel you may use Alt\-e (M\-e). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding, select "No translation" in the dialog of encodings. +.TP +.B Alt\-g, Alt\-r, Alt\-j +used to select the top file in a panel, the middle file and the bottom one, +respectively. +.TP +.B Alt\-t +toggle the current display listing to show the next display listing +format. +With this it is possible to quickly switch to brief listing, long +listing, user defined listing format, and back to the default. +.TP +.B C\-\\\\ (control\-backslash) +show the +.\"LINK2" +directory hotlist +.\"Hotlist" +and change to the selected directory. +.TP +.B + \ (plus) +this is used to select (tag) a group of files. Midnight Commander +will prompt for a selection options. When +.I Files only +checkbox is on, only files will be selected. If +.I Files only +is off, as files as directories will be selected. +When +.I Shell Patterns +checkbox is on, the regular expression is much like the filename globbing +in the shell (* standing for zero or more characters and ? standing +for one character). If +.I Shell Patterns +is off, then the tagging of files is done with normal regular +expressions (see ed (1)). When +.I Case sensitive +checkbox is on, the selection will be case sensitive characters. +If +.I Case sensitive +is off, the case will be ignored. +.TP +.B \\\\ (backslash) +use the "\\" key to unselect a group of files. This is the opposite of +the Plus key. +.TP +.B up\-key, C\-p +move the selection bar to the previous entry in the panel. +.TP +.B down\-key, C\-n +move the selection bar to the next entry in the panel. +.TP +.B home, a1, Alt\-< +move the selection bar to the first entry in the panel. +.TP +.B end, c1, Alt\-> +move the selection bar to the last entry in the panel. +.TP +.B next\-page, C\-v +move the selection bar one page down. +.TP +.B prev\-page, Alt\-v +move the selection bar one page up. +.TP +.B Alt\-o +If the currently selected file is a directory, load that directory on +the other panel and moves the selection to the next file. If the +currently selected file is not a directory, load the parent directory +on the other panel and moves the selection to the next file. +.TP +.B Alt\-i +make the current directory of the current panel also the current +directory of the other panel. Put the other panel to the listing mode +if needed. If the current panel is panelized, the other panel doesn't +become panelized. +.TP +.B C\-PageUp, C\-PageDown +only when supported by the terminal: change to ".." and to the currently +selected directory respectively. +.TP +.B Alt\-y +moves to the previous directory in the history, equivalent to clicking +the +.I < +with the mouse. +.TP +.B Alt\-u +moves to the next directory in the history, equivalent to clicking the +.I > +with the mouse. +.TP +.B Alt\-S\-h, Alt\-H +displays the directory history, equivalent to depressing the 'v' with +the mouse. +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH " Quick search" +The Quick search mode allows you to perform fast file search in file panel. +Press +.I C\-s +or +.I Alt\-s +to start a filename search in the directory listing. +.P +When the search is active, the user input will be added to the search string +instead of the command line. If the +.I Show mini\-status +option is enabled the search string is shown on the mini\-status +line. When typing, the selection bar will move to the next file +starting with the typed letters. The +.I Backspace +or +.I DEL +keys can be used to correct typing mistakes. If C\-s is pressed +again, the next match is searched for. +.P +If quick search is started with double pressing of C\-s, the previous quick +search pattern will be used for current search. +.P +Besides the filename characters, you can also use wildcard +characters '*' and '?'. +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Shell Command Line" +This section lists keys which are useful to avoid excessive typing when +entering shell commands. +.TP +.B Alt\-Enter +copy the currently selected file name to the command line. +.TP +.B C\-Enter +same a Alt\-Enter. May not work on remote systems and some terminals. +.TP +.B C\-S\-Enter +copy the full path name of the currently selected file to the command +line. May not work on remote systems and some terminals. +.TP +.B Alt\-Tab +does the filename, command, variable, username and hostname +.\"LINK2" +completion +.\"Completion" +for you. +.TP +.B C\-x t, C\-x C\-t +copy the tagged files (or if there are no tagged files, the selected +file) of the current panel (C\-x t) or of the other panel (C\-x C\-t) to +the command line. +.TP +.B C\-x p, C\-x C\-p +the first key sequence copies the current path name to the command +line, and the second one copies the unselected panel's path name to +the command line. +.TP +.B C\-q +the quote command can be used to insert characters that are otherwise +interpreted by Midnight Commander (like the '+' symbol) +.TP +.B Alt\-p, Alt\-n +use these keys to browse through the command history. Alt\-p takes you +to the last entry, Alt\-n takes you to the next one. +.TP +.B Alt\-h +displays the history for the current input line. +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " General Movement Keys" +The help viewer, the file viewer and the directory tree use common +code to handle moving. Therefore they accept exactly the same +keys. Each of them also accepts some keys of its own. +.PP +Other parts of Midnight Commander use some of the same movement +keys, so this section may be of use for those parts too. +.TP +.B Up, C\-p +moves one line backward. +.TP +.B Down, C\-n +moves one line forward. +.TP +.B Prev Page, Page Up, Alt\-v +moves one page up. +.TP +.B Next Page, Page Down, C\-v +moves one page down. +.TP +.B Home, A1 +moves to the beginning. +.TP +.B End, C1 +move to the end. +.PP +The help viewer and the file viewer accept the following keys in +addition the to ones mentioned above: +.TP +.B b, C\-b, C\-h, Backspace, Delete +moves one page up. +.TP +.B Space bar +moves one page down. +.TP +.B u, d +moves one half of a page up or down. +.TP +.B g, G +moves to the beginning or to the end. +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Input Line Keys" +The input lines (they are used for the +.\"LINK2" +command line +.\"Shell Command Line" +and for the query dialogs in the program) accept these keys: +.TP +.B C\-a +puts the cursor at the beginning of line. +.TP +.B C\-e +puts the cursor at the end of the line. +.TP +.B C\-b, move\-left +move the cursor one position left. +.TP +.B C\-f, move\-right +move the cursor one position right. +.TP +.B Alt\-f +moves one word forward. +.TP +.B Alt\-b +moves one word backward. +.TP +.B C\-h, Backspace +delete the previous character. +.TP +.B C\-d, Delete +delete the character in the point (over the cursor). +.TP +.B C\-@ +sets the mark for cutting. +.TP +.B C\-w +copies the text between the cursor and the mark to a kill buffer and +removes the text from the input line. +.TP +.B Alt\-w +copies the text between the cursor and the mark to a kill buffer. +.TP +.B C\-y +yanks back the contents of the kill buffer. +.TP +.B C\-k +kills the text from the cursor to the end of the line. +.TP +.B Alt\-p, Alt\-n +Use these keys to browse through the command history. Alt\-p takes you +to the last entry, Alt\-n takes you to the next one. +.TP +.B Alt\-C\-h, Alt\-Backspace +delete one word backward. +.TP +.B Alt\-Tab +does the filename, command, variable, username and hostname +.\"LINK2" +completion +.\"Completion" +for you. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Menu Bar" +The menu bar pops up when you press F9 or click the mouse on the top +row of the screen. The menu bar has five menus: "Left", "File", +"Command", "Options" and "Right". +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Left and Right Menus +.\"Left and Right Menus" +allow you to modify the appearance of the left and right directory +panels. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +File Menu +.\"File Menu" +lists the actions you can perform on the currently selected file or +the tagged files. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Command Menu +.\"Command Menu" +lists the actions which are more general and bear no relation to the +currently selected file or the tagged files. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Options Menu +.\"Options Menu" +lists the actions which allow you to customize Midnight Commander. +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH " Left and Right (Above and Below) Menus" +The outlook of the directory panels can be changed from the +.B Left +and +.B Right +menus (they are named +.B Above +and +.B Below +when the horizontal panel split is chosen from the +.\"LINK2" +Layout +.\"Layout" +options dialog). +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Listing Format..." +The listing mode view is used to display a listing of files, there are +four different listing formats available: +.BR Full , +.BR Brief , +.B Long +and +.BR User . +The full directory view shows the file name, the size of the file and +the modification time. +.PP +The brief view shows only the file name and it has from 1 up to 9 columns +(therefore showing more files unlike other views). The long view +is similar to the output of +.B "ls \-l" +command. The long view takes the whole screen width. +.PP +If you choose the "User" display format, then you have to specify +the display format. +.PP +The user display format must start with a panel size specifier. This +may be "half" or "full", and they specify a half screen panel and a +full screen panel respectively. +.PP +After the panel size, you may specify how many listings to fit in the +panel, side\-by\-side (in other words: how many times to repeat the +fields horizontally). This defaults to 1. You may change this by adding a +number from 1 to 9 to the format string. +.PP +After this you add the name of the fields with an optional size +specifier. This are the available fields you may display: +.TP +.B name +displays the file name. +.TP +.B size +displays the file size. +.TP +.B bsize +is an alternative form of the +.B size +format. It displays the size of the files and for directories it just +shows SUB\-DIR or UP\-\-DIR. +.TP +.B type +displays a one character wide type field. This character is similar to +what is displayed by ls with the \-F flag \- +.B * +for executable files, +.B / +for directories, +.B @ +for links, +.B = +for sockets, +.B \- +for character devices, +.B + +for block devices, +.B | +for pipes, +.B ~ +for symbolic links to directories and +.B ! +for stale symlinks (links that point nowhere). +.TP +.B mark +an asterisk if the file is tagged, a space if it's not. +.TP +.B mtime +file's last modification time. +.TP +.B atime +file's last access time. +.TP +.B ctime +file's status change time. +.TP +.B perm +a string representing the current permission bits of the file. +.TP +.B mode +an octal value with the current permission bits of the file. +.TP +.B nlink +the number of links to the file. +.TP +.B ngid +the GID (numeric). +.TP +.B nuid +the UID (numeric). +.TP +.B owner +the owner of the file. +.TP +.B group +the group of the file. +.TP +.B inode +the inode of the file. +.PP +Also you can use following keywords to define the panel layout: +.TP +.B space +a space in the display format. +.TP +.B | +add a vertical line to the display format. +.PP +To force one field to a fixed size (a size specifier), you just add +.B : +followed by the number of characters you want the field to have. If the +number is followed by the symbol +.BR + , +then the size specifies the minimal field size \- if the program finds +out that there is more space on the screen, it will then expand that +field. +.PP +For example, the +.B Full +display corresponds to this format: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +And the +.B Long +display corresponds to this format: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +This is a nice user display format: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +Panels may also be set to the following modes: +.TP +.B "Info" +The info view display information related to the currently +selected file and if possible information about the current file +system. +.TP +.B "Tree" +The tree view is quite similar to the +.\"LINK2" +directory tree +.\"Directory Tree" +feature. See the section about it for more information. +.TP +.B "Quick View" +In this mode, the panel will switch to a reduced +.\"LINK2" +viewer +.\"Internal File Viewer" +that displays the contents of the currently selected file, if you +select the panel (with the tab key or the mouse), you will have access +to the usual viewer commands. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH " Sort Order..." +The eight sort orders are by name, by extension, by modification time, +by access time, and by inode information modification time, by size, +by inode and unsorted. In the Sort order dialog box you can choose +the sort order and you may also specify if you want to sort in reverse +order by checking the reverse box. +.PP +By default directories are sorted before files but this can be changed +from the +.\"LINK2" +Panel options +.\"Panel options" +menu (option +.BR "Mix all files" ). +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Filter..." +The filter command allows you to specify a shell pattern (for example +.BR "*.tar.gz" ) +which the files and directories must match to be shown. +The +.\"LINK2" +input line +.\"Input Line Keys" +allow enter the pattern of file/directory names that will be shown +in the panel. +.PP +When +.I Files only +checkbox is on, only files will be matched to the filter, and all +directories will be shown. Otherwise, as files as directories will +be filtered. When +.I Shell Patterns +checkbox is on, the regular expression is much like the filename globbing +in the shell (* standing for zero or more characters and ? standing +for one character). Otherwise, the matching of files/directoris is done +with normal regular expressions (see ed(1)). When +.I Case sensitive +checkbox is on, the filtering will be case sensitive characters. Otherwise, +the case will be ignored. +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Reread" +The reread command reload the list of files in the directory. It is +useful if other processes have created or removed files. +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH " File Menu" +Midnight Commander uses the F1 \- F10 keys as keyboard shortcuts +for commands appearing in the file menu. The escape sequences for the +function keys are terminfo capabilities kf1 trough kf10. On terminals +without function key support, you can achieve the same functionality by +pressing the Esc key and then a number in the range 1 through 9 and 0 +(corresponding to F1 to F9 and F10 respectively). +.PP +The File menu has the following commands (keyboard shortcuts in parentheses): +.PP +.B Help (F1) +.PP +Invokes the built\-in hypertext help viewer. Inside the +.\"LINK2" +help viewer\&, +.\"Contents" +you can use the Tab key to select the next link and the Enter key to +follow that link. The keys Space and Backspace are used to move +forward and backward in a help page. Press F1 again to get the full +list of accepted keys. +.PP +.B Menu (F2) +.PP +Invoke the +.\"LINK2" +user menu\&. +.\"Edit Menu File" +The user menu provides an easy way to provide users with a menu and +add extra features to Midnight Commander. +.PP +.B View (F3, F13) +.PP +View the currently selected file. By default this invokes the +.\"LINK2" +Internal File Viewer +.\"Internal File Viewer" +but if the option "Use internal view" is off, it invokes an external +file viewer specified by the +.B VIEWER +environment variable. If +.B VIEWER +is undefined, the +.B PAGER +environment variable is tried. If +.B PAGER +is also undefined, the "view" command is invoked. If you use F13 +instead, the viewer will be invoked without doing any formatting or +preprocessing to the file. +.P +See +.\"LINK2" +parameters for external viewer +.\"Parameters for external editor or viewer" +for explain how you may specify an extended command line options +for external viewers. +.PP +.B Filtered View (Alt\-!) +.PP +This command prompts for a command +and its arguments (the argument defaults to the currently selected +file name), the output from such command is shown in the internal file +viewer. +.PP +.B Edit (F4, F14) +.PP +Press F4 to edit the highlighted file. Press F14 (usually F14) +to start the editor with a new, empty file. +Currently they invoke the +.B vi +editor, or the editor specified in the +.B EDITOR +environment variable, or the +.\"LINK2" +Internal File Editor +.\"Internal File Editor" +if the use_internal_edit option is on. +.P +See +.\"LINK2" +parameters for external editor +.\"Parameters for external editor or viewer" +for explain how you may specify an extended command line options +for external editors. +.PP +.B Copy (F5, F15) +.PP +Press F5 to pop up an input dialog to copy the currently selected file (or +the tagged files, if there is at least one file tagged) to the +directory/filename you specify in the input dialog. The destination +defaults to the directory in the non\-selected panel. Space for destination +file may be preallocated relative to preallocate_space configure option. +During this process, you can press C\-c or Esc to abort the operation. +For details about source mask (which will be usually either * or ^\\(.*\\)$ +depending on setting of Use shell patterns) and possible wildcards in the +destination see +.\"LINK2" +Mask copy/rename\&. +.\"Mask Copy/Rename" +.PP +F15 (usually F15) is similar, but defaults to the directory in the +selected panel. It always operates on the selected file, regardless of +any tagged files. +.PP +On some systems, it is possible to do the copy in the background by +clicking on the background button (or pressing Alt\-b in the dialog +box). The +.\"LINK2" +Background Jobs +.\"Background jobs" +is used to control the background process. +.PP +.B Link (C\-x l) +.PP +Create a hard link to the current file. +.PP +.B Absolute symlink (C\-x s) +.PP +Create a absolute symbolic link to the current file. +.PP +.B Relative symLink (C\-x v) +.PP +Create a relative symbolic link to the current file. +.PP +To those of you who don't know what links are: creating a link to a file +is a bit like copying the file, but both the source filename and the destination +filename represent the same file image. For example, if you edit one of these +files, all changes you make will appear in both files. Some people call +links aliases or shortcuts. +.PP +A hard link appears as a real file. After making it, there is no way of +telling which one is the original and which is the link. If you delete +either one of them the other one is still intact. It is very difficult +to notice that the files represent the same image. Use hard links when +you don't even want to know. +.PP +A symbolic link is a reference to the name of the original file. If +the original file is deleted the symbolic link is useless. It is quite +easy to notice that the files represent the same image. Midnight +Commander shows an "@"\-sign in front of the file name if it is a +symbolic link to somewhere (except to directory, where it shows a tilde (~)). +The original file which the link points to is shown on mini\-status line if the +.I "Show mini\-status" +option is enabled. Use symbolic links when you want to avoid the +confusion that can be caused by hard links. +.PP +When you press "C\-x s" Midnight Commander will automatically fill in the +complete path+filename of the original file and suggest a name for the link. +You can change either one. +.PP +Sometimes you may want to change the absolute path of the original into +a relative path. An absolute path starts from the root directory: +.PP +.I /home/frodo/mc/mc \-> /home/frodo/new/mc +.PP +A relative link describes the original file's location starting from the +location of the link itself: +.PP +.I /home/frodo/mc/mc \-> ../new/mc +.PP +You can force Midnight Commander to suggest a relative path by pressing +"C\-x v" instead of "C\-x s". +.PP +.B Rename/Move (F6, F16) +.PP +Press F6 to pop up an input dialog to copy the currently selected file (or +the tagged files, if there is at least one file tagged) to the +directory/filename you specify in the input dialog. The destination +defaults to the directory in the non\-selected panel. For more details +look at Copy (F5) operation above, most of the things are quite similar. +.PP +F16 (usually F16) is similar, but defaults to the directory in the +selected panel. It always operates on the selected file, regardless of +any tagged files. +.PP +On some systems, it is possible to do the copy in the background by +clicking on the background button (or pressing Alt\-b in the dialog +box). The +.\"LINK2" +Background Jobs +.\"Background jobs" +is used to control the background process. +.PP +.B Mkdir (F7) +.PP +Pop up an input dialog and creates the directory specified. +.PP +.B Delete (F8) +.PP +Delete the currently selected file or the tagged files in the +currently selected panel. During the process, you can press C\-c or +Esc to abort the operation. +.PP +.B Quick cd (Alt\-c) +Use the +.\"LINK2" +quick cd +.\"Quick cd" +command if you have full command line and want to cd somewhere. +.PP +.B Select group (+) +.PP +This is used to select (tag) a group of files. Midnight Commander +will prompt for a selection options. When +.I Files only +checkbox is on, only files will be selected. If +.I Files only +is off, as files as directories will be selected. +When +.I Shell Patterns +checkbox is on, the regular expression is much like the filename globbing +in the shell (* standing for zero or more characters and ? standing +for one character). If +.I Shell Patterns +is off, then the tagging of files is done with normal regular +expressions (see ed (1)). When +.I Case sensitive +checkbox is on, the selection will be case sensitive characters. +If +.I Case sensitive +is off, the case will be ignored. +.PP +.B Unselect group (\\\\) +.PP +Used to unselect a group of files. This is the opposite of the +.I "Select group" +command. +.PP +.B Quit (F10, S\-F10) +.PP +Terminate Midnight Commander. S\-F10 is used when you want to +quit and you are using the shell wrapper. S\-F10 will not take you +to the last directory you visited with Midnight Commander, instead +it will stay at the directory where you started Midnight Commander. +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Quick cd" +This command is useful if you have a full command line and want to +.\"LINK2" +cd +.\"The cd internal command" +somewhere without having to yank and paste the command line. This command +pops up a small dialog, where you enter everything you would enter after +.B cd +on the command line and then you press enter. This features all the things +that are already in the +.\"LINK2" +internal cd command\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Command Menu" +The +.\"LINK2" +Directory tree +.\"Directory Tree" +command shows a tree figure of the directories. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +"Find file" +.\"Find File" +command allows you to search for a specific file. +.PP +The "Swap panels" command swaps the contents of the two directory panels. +.PP +The "Switch panels on/off" command shows the output of the last shell command. +This works only on xterm and on Linux and FreeBSD console. +.PP +The "Compare directories" command compares the directory +panels with each other. You can then use the Copy (F5) command to make +the panels identical. There are three compare methods. The quick method +compares only file size and file date. The thorough method makes a +full byte\-by\-byte compare. The thorough method is not available if the +machine does not support the mmap(2) system call. The size\-only +compare method just compares the file sizes and does not check the +contents or the date times, it just checks the file size. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +"External panelize" +.\"External panelize" +allows you to execute an external program, and make the output of that +program the contents of the current panel. +.PP +The "Command history" command shows a list of typed commands. The +selected command is copied to the command line. The command history +can also be accessed by typing Alt\-p or Alt\-n. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +"Directory hotlist" +.\"Hotlist" +command makes changing of the current directory to often used directories +faster. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +"Screen list" +.\"Screen selector" +command shows a dialog window with the list of currently running +internal editors, viewers and other MC modules that support this mode. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +"Edit extension file" +.\"Edit Extension File" +command allows you to specify programs to executed when you try to +execute, view, edit and do a bunch of other thing on files +with certain extensions (filename endings). +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +"Edit Menu File" +.\"Edit Menu File" +command may be used for editing the user menu (which appears by +pressing F2). +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Directory Tree" +The Directory Tree command shows a tree figure of the directories. You +can select a directory from the figure and Midnight Commander will +change to that directory. +.PP +There are two ways to invoke the tree. The real directory tree command +is available from Commands menu. The other way is to select tree view +from the Left or Right menu. +.PP +To get rid of long delays, Midnight Commander creates the tree +figure by scanning only a small subset of all the directories. If the +directory which you want to see is missing, move to its parent +directory and press C\-r (or F2). +.PP +You can use the following keys: +.TP +.\"LINK2" +General movement keys +.\"General Movement Keys" +are accepted. +.TP +.B Enter. +In the directory tree, exits the directory tree and changes to this +directory in the current panel. In the tree view, changes to this +directory in the other panel and stays in tree view mode in the +current panel. +.TP +.B C\-r, F2 (Rescan). +Rescan this directory. Use this when the tree figure is out of date: +it is missing subdirectories or shows some subdirectories which don't +exist any more. +.TP +.B F3 (Forget). +Delete this directory from the tree figure. Use this to remove clutter +from the figure. If you want the directory back to the tree figure +press F2 in its parent directory. +.TP +.B F4 (Static/Dynamic). +Toggle between the dynamic navigation mode (default) and the static +navigation mode. +.PP +In the static navigation mode you can use the Up and Down keys to +select a directory. All known directories are shown. +.PP +In the dynamic navigation mode you can use the Up and Down keys to +select a sibling directory, the Left key to move to the parent +directory, and the Right key to move to a child directory. Only the +parent, sibling and children directories are shown, others are left +out. The tree figure changes dynamically as you traverse. +.TP +.B F5 (Copy). +Copy the directory. +.TP +.B F6 (RenMov). +Move the directory. +.TP +.B F7 (Mkdir). +Make a new directory below this directory. +.TP +.B F8 (Delete). +Delete this directory from the file system. +.TP +.B C\-s, Alt\-s. +Search the next directory matching the search string. If there is +no such directory these keys will move one line down. +.TP +.B C\-h, Backspace. +Delete the last character of the search string. +.TP +.B Any other character. +Add the character to the search string and move to the next directory +which starts with these characters. In the tree view you must first +activate the search mode by pressing C\-s. The search string is shown +in the mini status line. +.PP +The following actions are available only in the directory tree. They +aren't supported in the tree view. +.TP +.B F1 (Help). +Invoke the help viewer and show this section. +.TP +.B Esc, F10. +Exit the directory tree. Do not change the directory. +.PP +The mouse is supported. A double\-click behaves like Enter. See +also the section on +.\"LINK2" +mouse support\&. +.\"Mouse Support" +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Find File" +The Find File feature first asks for the start directory for the +search and the filename to be searched for. By pressing the Tree +button you can select the start directory from the +.\"LINK2" +directory tree +.\"Directory Tree" +figure. +.PP +The "File name" input field contains a filename pattern to be searched +for. It is interpreted as a shell pattern or as a regular expression +depending on the state of the "Using shell patterns" checkbox. An empty +value is valid and matches any file name. +.PP +The "Content" input field contains a string to search for within the +files. Leave this field empty to disable searching file contents. +.PP +Option "Whole words" allows select only those files containing matches that +form whole words. Like grep \-w. +.PP +You can start the search by pressing the OK button. +During the search you can stop from the Stop button and continue from +the Start button. +.PP +You can browse the filelist with the up and down arrow keys. The Chdir +button will change to the directory of the currently selected +file. The Again button will ask for the parameters for a new +search. The Quit button quits the search operation. The Panelize +button will place the found files to the current directory panel so +that you can do additional operations on them (view, copy, move, +delete and so on). To return to the normal file listing, change directory +to "..". +.PP +The 'Enable ignore directories' checkbox and input field below it +allow one to set up the list of directories that should be skip during the search +files (for example, you may want to avoid searches on a CD\-ROM or on a NFS +directory that is mounted across a slow link). List components must be separated +with a colon, here is an example: +.PP +.nf +/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +Relative paths are supported also. The following example shows how to skip special +directories of version control systems: +.nf +/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs:.svn:.git:CVS +.fi +.PP +Attention: input field can contain a dot (.), this means the current absolute path. +.PP +You may consider using the +.\"LINK2" +External panelize +.\"External panelize" +command for some operations. Find file command is for simple queries +only, while using External panelize you can do as mysterious searches +as you would like. +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " External panelize" +The External panelize allows you to execute an external program, and +make the output of that program the contents of the current panel. +.PP +For example, if you want to manipulate in one of the panels all the +symbolic links in the current directory, you can use external +panelization to run the following command: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +.PP +Upon command completion, the directory contents of the panel will no +longer be the directory listing of the current directory, but all the +files that are symbolic links. +.PP +If you want to panelize all of the files that have been downloaded +from your FTP server, you can use this awk command to extract the file +name from the transfer log files: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +You may want to save often used panelize commands under a descriptive name, +so that you can recall them quickly. You do this by typing the command on +the input line and pressing Add new button. Then you enter a name under +which you want the command to be saved. Next time, you just choose that +command from the list and do not have to type it again. +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Hotlist" +The Directory hotlist command shows the labels of the directories +in the directory hotlist. Midnight Commander will change to the +directory corresponding to the selected label. From the hotlist dialog, +you can remove already created label/directory pairs and add new ones. +To add new directories quickly, you can use the Add to hotlist command +(C\-x h), which adds the current directory into the directory hotlist, +asking just for the label for the directory. +.PP +This makes cd to often used directories faster. You may consider using the +CDPATH variable as described in +.\"LINK2" +internal cd command +.\"The cd internal command" +description. +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Edit Extension File" +This will invoke your editor on the file +.IR ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If this file does not exist and you are not root, it will be copied from +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If you are root, you can choose the file to edit: user's +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +or system\-wide +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +The format of this file is described in detail in it. +.\"NODE " Background jobs" +.SH " Background Jobs" +This lets you control the state of any background Midnight Commander +process (only copy and move files operations can be done in the +background). You can stop, restart and kill a background job from +here. +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Edit Menu File" +The user menu is a menu of useful actions that can be customized by +the user. When you access the user menu, the +file .mc.menu from the current directory is used if it exists, +but only if it is owned by user or root and is not world\-writable. +If no such file found, ~/.config/mc/menu is tried in the same way, +and otherwise mc uses the default system\-wide menu +%pkgdatadir%/mc.menu. +.PP +The format of the menu file is very simple. Lines that start with +anything but space or tab are considered entries for the menu (in +order to be able to use it like a hot key, the first character should +be a letter). All the lines that start with a space or a tab are the +commands that will be executed when the entry is selected. +.PP +When an option is selected all the command lines of the option are +copied to a temporary file in the temporary directory (usually +/usr/tmp) and then that file is executed. This allows the user to put +normal shell constructs in the menus. Also simple macro substitution +takes place before executing the menu code. For more information, see +.\"LINK2" +macro substitution\&. +.\"Macro Substitution" +.PP +Here is a sample mc.menu file: +.PP +.nf +A Dump the currently selected file + od \-c %f + +B Edit a bug report and send it to root + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Midnight Commander bug" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Read mail + emacs \-f rmail + +N Read Usenet news + emacs \-f gnus + +H Call the info hypertext browser + info + +J Copy current directory to other panel recursively + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + +K Make a release of the current subdirectory + echo \-n "Name of distribution file: " + read tar + ln \-s %d `dirname %d`/$tar + cd .. + tar cvhf ${tar}.tar $tar + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X Extract the contents of a compressed tar file + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Default Conditions +.PP +Each menu entry may be preceded by a condition. The condition must +start from the first column with a '=' character. If the condition is +true, the menu entry will be the default entry. +.PP +.nf +Condition syntax: = <sub\-cond> + or: = <sub\-cond> | <sub\-cond> ... + or: = <sub\-cond> & <sub\-cond> ... + +Sub\-condition is one of following: + + y <pattern> syntax of current file matching pattern? + (for edit menu only) + f <pattern> current file matching pattern? + F <pattern> other file matching pattern? + d <pattern> current directory matching pattern? + D <pattern> other directory matching pattern? + t <type> current file of type? + T <type> other file of type? + x <filename> is it executable filename? + ! <sub\-cond> negate the result of sub\-condition +.fi +.PP +Pattern is a normal shell pattern or a regular expression, according +to the shell patterns option. You can override the global value of +the shell patterns option by writing "shell_patterns=x" on the first +line of the menu file (where "x" is either 0 or 1). +.PP +Type is one or more of the following characters: +.PP +.nf + n not a directory + r regular file + d directory + l link + c character device + b block device + f FIFO (pipe) + s socket + x executable file + t tagged +.fi +.PP +For example 'rlf' means either regular file, link or fifo. The 't' +type is a little special because it acts on the panel instead of the +file. The condition '=t t' is true if there are tagged files in the +current panel and false if not. +.PP +If the condition starts with '=?' instead of '=' a debug trace will be +shown whenever the value of the condition is calculated. +.PP +The conditions are calculated from left to right. This means +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +is calculated as +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +Here is a sample of the use of conditions: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L List the contents of a compressed tar\-archive + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Addition Conditions +.PP +If the condition begins with '+' (or '+?') instead of '=' (or '=?') it +is an addition condition. If the condition is true the menu entry will +be included in the menu. If the condition is false the menu entry will +not be included in the menu. +.PP +You can combine default and addition conditions by starting condition +with '+=' or '=+' (or '+=?' or '=+?' if you want debug trace). If you +want to use two different conditions, one for adding and another for +defaulting, you can precede a menu entry with two condition lines, one +starting with '+' and another starting with '='. +.PP +Comments are started with '#'. The additional comment lines must start +with '#', space or tab. +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH " Options Menu" +Midnight Commander has some options that may be toggled on and +off in several dialogs which are accessible from this menu. Options +are enabled if they have an asterisk or "x" in front of them. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Configuration +.\"Configuration" +command pops up a dialog from which you can change most of settings of +Midnight Commander. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Layout +.\"Layout" +command pops up a dialog from which you specify a bunch of options how mc +looks like on the screen. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Panel options +.\"Panel options" +command pops up a dialog from which you specify options of file manager panels. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Confirmation +.\"Confirmation" +command pops up a dialog from which you specify which actions you want to +confirm. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Appearance +.\"Appearance" +command pops up a dialog from which you specify the skin. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Display bits +.\"Display bits" +command pops up a dialog from which you may select which characters is your +terminal able to display. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Learn keys +.\"Learn keys" +command pops up a dialog from which you test some keys which are not working +on some terminals and you may fix them. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Virtual FS +.\"Virtual FS" +command pops up a dialog from which you specify some VFS related options. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +Save setup +.\"Save Setup" +command saves the current settings of the Left, Right and Options +menus. A small number of other settings is saved, too. +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Configuration" +The options in this dialog are divided into several groups: "File +operation options", "Esc key mode", "Pause after run" and "Other options". +.PP +.B File operation options +.PP +.I Verbose operation. +This toggles whether the file Copy, Rename and Delete operations are +verbose (i.e., display a dialog box for each operation). If you have a +slow terminal, you may wish to disable the verbose operation. It is +automatically turned off if the speed of your terminal is less than +9600 bps. +.PP +.I Compute totals. +If this option is enabled, Midnight Commander computes total byte +sizes and total number of files prior to any Copy, Rename and Delete +operations. This will provide you with a more accurate progress bar +at the expense of some speed. This option has no effect, if +.I Verbose operation +is disabled. +.PP +.I Classic progressbar. +If this option is enabled, the progressbar of Copy/Move/Delete operations +is always grown form left to right. If disabled, the growing direction +of progressbar follows to direction of Copy/Move/Delete operation: +from left panel to right one and vice versa. Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Mkdir autoname. +When you press F7 to create a new directory, the input line in popup dialog +will be filled by name of current file or directory in active panel. +Disabled by default. +.PP +.I Preallocate space. +Preallocate space for whole target file, if possible, before copy operation. +Disabled by default. +.PP +.B Esc key mode. +.PP +By default, Midnight Commander treats the Esc key as a key prefix. +Therefore, you should press Esc code twice to exit a dialog. But there is +a possibility to use a single press of Esc key for that action. +.PP +.I Single press. +By default this option is disabled. If you'll enable it, the Esc key +will act as a prefix key for set up time interval (see +.I Timeout +option below), and if no extra keys have arrived, then the Esc key +is interpreted as a cancel key (Esc Esc). +.PP +.I Timeout. +This options is used to setup the time interval (in microseconds) +for single press of Esc key. By default, this interval is one second +(1000000 microseconds). Also the timeout can be set via KEYBOARD_KEY_TIMEOUT_US +environment variable (also in microseconds), which has higher priority +than Timeout option value. +.PP +.B Pause after run +.PP +After executing your commands, Midnight Commander can pause, so +that you can examine the output of the command. There are three +possible settings for this variable: +.PP +.I Never. +Means that you do not want to see the output of your command. If you +are using the Linux or FreeBSD console or an xterm, you will be able to +see the output of the command by typing C\-o. +.PP +.I On dumb terminals. +You will get the pause message on terminals that are not capable of +showing the output of the last command executed (any terminal that is +not an xterm or the Linux console). +.PP +.I Always. +The program will pause after executing all of your commands. +.PP +.B Other options +.PP +.I Use internal editor. +If this option is enabled, the built\-in file editor is used to edit +files. If the option is disabled, the editor specified in the +.B EDITOR +environment variable is used. +If no editor is specified, +.B vi +is used. See the section on the +.\"LINK2" +internal file editor\&. +.\"Internal File Editor" +.PP +.I Use internal viewer. +If this option is enabled, the built\-in file viewer is used to view +files. If the option is disabled, the pager specified in the +.B PAGER +environment variable is used. +If no pager is specified, the +.B view +command is used. See the section on the +.\"LINK2" +internal file viewer\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.PP +.I Ask new file name. +If this option is enabled, file name is asked before open new file in editor. +.PP +.I Auto menus. +If this option is enabled, the user menu will be invoked at startup. +Useful for building menus for non\-unixers. +.PP +.I Drop down menus. +When this option is enabled, the pull down menus will be activated as +soon as you press the F9 key. Otherwise, you will only get the menu title, +and you will have to activate the menu either with the arrow keys or with +the hotkeys. It is recommended if you are using hotkeys. +.PP +.I Shell Patterns. +By default the Select, Unselect and Filter commands will use shell\-like +regular expressions. The following conversions are performed to achieve +this: the '*' is replaced by '.*' (zero or more characters); the '?' +is replaced by '.' (exactly one character) and '.' by the literal +dot. If the option is disabled, then the regular expressions are the +ones described in ed(1). +.PP +.I Complete: show all. +By default, Midnight Commander pops up all possible +.\"LINK2" +completions +.\"Completion" +if the completion is ambiguous only when you press +.B Alt\-Tab +for the second time. For the first time, it just completes as much as +possible and beeps in the case of ambiguity. Enable this option if you +want to see all possible completions even after pressing +.B Alt\-Tab +the first time. +.PP +.I Rotating dash. +If this option is enabled, the +Midnight Commander shows a rotating dash in the upper right corner +as a work in progress indicator. +.PP +.I Cd follows links. +This option, if set, causes Midnight Commander to follow the +logical chain of directories when changing current directory +either in the panels, or using the cd command. This is the default +behavior of bash. When unset, Midnight Commander follows the +real directory structure, so cd .. if you've entered that directory +through a link will move you to the current directory's real parent +and not to the directory where the link was present. +.PP +.I Safe delete. +If this option is enabled, deleting files and directory hotlist entries +unintentionally becomes more difficult. The default selection in the +confirmation dialogs for deletion changes from +.B Yes +to +.BR No . +This option is disabled by default. +.PP +.I Safe overwrite. +If this option is enabled, overwriting files unintentionally becomes +more difficult. The default selection in the overwrite confirmation dialog +changes from +.B Yes +to +.BR No . +This option is disabled by default. +.PP +.I Auto save setup. +If this option is enabled, when you exit Midnight Commander, the +configurable options of Midnight Commander are saved in the +~/.config/mc/ini file. +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Layout" +The layout dialog gives you a possibility to change the general layout +of screen. The options in this dialog are divided into several groups: +"Panel split", "Console output" and "Other options". +.PP +.B Panel split +.PP +The rest of the screen area is used for the two directory panels. You +can specify whether the area is split to the panels in +.I Vertical +or +.I Horizontal +direction. Panel layout can be changed using Alt\-, (Alt\-comma) shortcut. +.PP +.I Equal split. +By default, panels have equal sizes. Using this option you can specify +an unequal split. +.PP +.B Console output +.PP +On the Linux or FreeBSD console you can specify how many lines are shown +in the output window. This option is available if Midnight Commander runs +on native console only. +.PP +.B Other options +.PP +.I Menu bar visible. +If enabled, main menu of Midnight Commander is always visible on the top row +of screen above panels. Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Command prompt. +If enabled, command line is available. Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Keybar visible. +If enabled, 10 labels associated with F1\-F10 keys are located at the bottom +row of screen. Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Hintbar visible. +If enabled, the one\-line hints are visible below panels. Enabled by default. +.PP +.I XTerm window title. +When run in a terminal emulator for X11, Midnight Commander sets the +terminal window title to the current working directory and updates it +when necessary. If your terminal emulator is broken and you see some +incorrect output on startup and directory change, turn off this option. +Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Show free space. +If enabled, free space and total space of current file system is shown +at the bottom frame of panel. Enabled by default. +.\"NODE " Panel options" +.SH " Panel options" +.B Main panel options +.PP +.I Show mini\-status. +If enabled, one line of status information about the currently selected item +is shown at the bottom of the panels. Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Use SI size units. +If this option is enabled, Midnight Commander will use SI prefixes (base 10) +when displaying any byte sizes. If disabled (default), Midnight Commander will +use IEC prefixes (base 2). +.PP +.I Mix all files. +If this option is enabled, all files and directories are shown mixed +together. If the option is disabled (default), directories (and links to +directories) are shown at the beginning of the listing, and other files below. +.PP +.I Show backup files. +If enabled, Midnight Commander will show files ending with a tilde. +Otherwise, they won't be shown (like GNU's ls option \-B). Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Show hidden files. +If enabled, Midnight Commander will show all files that start with +a dot (like ls \-a). Disabled by default. +.PP +.I Fast directory reload. +If this option is enabled, Midnight Commander will use a trick to +determine if the directory contents have changed. The trick is to reload +the directory only if the i\-node of the directory has changed; this means +that reloads only happen when files are created or deleted. If what +changes is the i\-node for a file in the directory (file size changes, +mode or owner changes, etc) the display is not updated. In these cases, +if you have the option on, you have to rescan the directory manually +(with C\-r). Disabled by default. +.PP +.I Mark moves down. +If enabled, the selection bar will move down when you mark a file (with +Insert key). Enabled by default. +.PP +.I Reverse files only. +Allow revert selection of files only. Enabled by default. +If enabled, the reverse selection is applied to files only, not to directories. +The selection of directories is untouched. If off, the reverse selection +is applied to files as well to directories: all unselected items become +selected, and vice versa. +.PP +.I Simple swap. +If both panels contain file listing, simple swap means that panels exchange +its screen positions: left panel become right one, and vice versa. If this +option is unchecked, file listing panels exchange its content keeping listing +format and sort options. Unchecked by default. +.PP +.I Auto save panels setup. +If this option is enabled, when you exit Midnight Commander, the +current settings of panels are saved in the ~/.config/mc/panels.ini file. +Disabled by default. +.PP +.B Navigation +.PP +.I Lynx\-like motion. +If this option is enabled, you may use the arrows keys to automatically +chdir if the current selection is a subdirectory and the shell command +line is empty. By default, this setting is off. +.PP +.I Page scrolling. +If set (the default), panel will scroll by half the display when the +cursor reaches the end or the beginning of the panel, otherwise it +will just scroll a file at a time. +.PP +.I Center scrolling. +If set, panel will scroll when the cursor reaches the middle of the +panel column, only hitting the top or bottom of the panel when actually on +the first or last file. This behavior applies when scrolling one file +at a time, and does not apply to the page up/down keys. +.PP +.I Mouse page scrolling. +Controls whenever scrolling with the mouse wheel is done by pages or +line by line on the panels. +.PP +.B File highlight +.PP +You can specify whether +.I permissions +and +.I file types +should be highlighted with distinctive +.\"LINK2" +Colors\&. +.\"Colors" +If the permission highlighting is enabled, the parts of the +.I perm +and +.I mode +.\"LINK2" +display fields +.\"Listing Format..." +which apply to the user running Midnight Commander are highlighted with +the color defined by the +.I selected +keyword. If the file type highlighting is enabled, file names are colored +according to rules described in +%sysconfdir%/mc/filehighlight.ini +file. See +.\"LINK2" +Filenames Highlight +.\"Filenames Highlight" +for more info. +.PP +.B Quick search +.PP +You can specify how the +.\"LINK2" +Quick search +.\"Quick search" +mode should work: case insensitively, case sensitively or be matched +to the panel sort order: case sensitive or not. +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Confirmation" +In this dialog you configure the confirmation options for file deletion, +overwriting files, execution by pressing enter, quitting the program, +directory hotlist entries deletion and history cleanup. +.\"NODE " Appearance" +.SH " Appearance" +In this dialog you can select the skin to be used and enable shadow +for dialogs and drop down menus. +.PP +See the +.\"LINK2" +Skins +.\"Skins" +section for technical details about the skin definition files. +.PP +.I Shadows. +If this option is enabled, all dialogs and drop down menus will have a shadow. +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Display bits" +This is used to configure the range of visible characters on the +screen. This setting may be 7\-bits if your terminal/curses supports +only seven output bits, ISO\-8859\-1 displays all the characters in the +ISO\-8859\-1 map and full 8 bits is for those terminals that can display +full 8 bit characters. +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Learn keys" +This dialog allows you to test and redefine functional keys, cursor +arrows and some other keys to make them work properly on your terminal. +They often don't, since many terminal databases are incomplete or broken. +.PP +You can move around with the Tab key and with the vi moving keys ('h' +left, 'j' down, 'k' up and 'l' right). Once you press any cursor movement +key and it is recognized, you can use that key as well. +.PP +You can test keys just by pressing each of them. When you press a +key and it is recognized properly, OK should appear next to the name +of that key. Once a key is marked OK it starts working as usually, +e.g. F1 pressed the first time will just check that the F1 key works, +but after that it will show help. The same applies to the arrow keys. +The Tab key should be working always. +.PP +If some keys do not work properly then you won't see OK appear after +pressing one of these. Then you may want to redefine it. Do it by pressing +the button with the name of that key (either by the mouse or by Enter +or Space after selecting the button with Tab or arrows). Then a message +box will appear asking you to press that key. Do it and wait until the +message box disappears. If you want to abort, just press Escape once +and wait. +.PP +When you finish with all the keys, you can Save them. The definitions +for the keys you have redefined will be written into the [terminal:TERM] +section of your ~/.config/mc/ini file (where TERM is the name of your current +terminal). The definitions of the keys that were already working properly +are not saved. +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " Virtual FS" +This option gives you control over the settings of the +.\"LINK2" +Virtual File System\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.PP +Midnight Commander keeps in memory the information related to some +of the virtual file systems to speed up the access to the files in the +file system (for example, directory listings fetched from FTP servers). +.PP +Also, in order to access the contents of compressed files (for example, +compressed tar files), Midnight Commander needs to create temporary +uncompressed files on your disk. +.PP +Since both the information in memory and the temporary files on disk +take up resources, you may want to tune the parameters of the cached +information to decrease your resource usage or to maximize the speed of +access to frequently used file systems. +.PP +Because of the format of the tar archives, the +.I Tar filesystem +needs to read the whole file just to load the file entries. Since most +tar files are usually kept compressed (plain tar files are species in +extinction), the tar file system has to uncompress the file on the disk +in a temporary location and then access the uncompressed file as a +regular tar file. +.PP +Now, since we all love to browse files and tar files all over the disk, +it's common that you will leave a tar file and then re\-enter it later. +Since decompression is slow, Midnight Commander will cache the +information in memory for a limited time. When the timeout expires, all +the resources associated with the file system are released. The default +timeout is set to one minute. +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +FTP File System +.\"FTP File System" +(ftpfs) allows you to browse directories on remote FTP servers. It has +several options. +.PP +.I ftp anonymous password +is the password used when you login as "anonymous". Some sites require +a valid e\-mail address. On the other hand, you probably don't want to +give your real e\-mail address to untrusted sites, especially if you are +not using spam filtering. +.PP +ftpfs keeps the directory listing it fetches from a FTP server in a cache. +The cache expire time is configurable with the +.I ftpfs directory cache timeout +option. A low value for this option may slow down every operation on +the ftpfs because every operation would require sending a request to the +FTP server. +.PP +You can define an FTP proxy host for doing FTP. Note that most modern +firewalls are fully transparent at least for passive FTP (see below), so +FTP proxies are considered obsolete. +.PP +If +.I Always use ftp proxy +is not set, you can use the exclamation sign to enable proxy for certain +hosts. See +.\"LINK2" +FTP File System +.\"FTP File System" +for examples. +.PP +If this option is set, the program will do two things: consult the +%sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy file for lines containing host names that +are local (if the host name starts with a dot, it is assumed to be a +domain) and to assume that any hostnames without dots in their names are +directly accessible. All other hosts will be accessed through the +specified FTP proxy. +.PP +You can enable using +.I ~/.netrc +file, which keeps login names and passwords for ftp servers. See netrc +(5) for the description of the .netrc format. +.PP +.I Use passive mode +enables using FTP passive mode, when the connection for data transfer is +initiated by the client, not by the server. This option is recommended +and enabled by default. If this option is turned off, the data +connection is initiated by the server. This may not work with some +firewalls. +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Save Setup" +At startup, Midnight Commander tries to load initialization information +from the ~/.config/mc/ini file. +If this file doesn't exist, the system\-wide file +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ini +is used. If this file doesn't exist, the system\-wide file +.B %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +is used. If this file doesn't exist, MC uses the default settings. +.PP +The +.I Save Setup +command creates the ~/.config/mc/ini file by saving the +current settings of the +.\"LINK2" +Left, Right +.\"Left and Right Menus" +and +.\"LINK2" +Options +.\"Options Menu" +menus. +.PP +If you activate the +.I auto save setup +option, MC will always save the current settings when exiting. +.PP +There also exist settings which can't be changed from the menus. To +change these settings you have to edit the setup file with your +favorite editor. See the section on +.\"LINK2" +Special Settings +.\"Special Settings" +for more information. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Executing operating system commands" +You may execute commands by typing them directly in Midnight +Commander's input line, or by selecting the program you want to +execute with the selection bar in one of the panels and hitting Enter. +.PP +If you press Enter over a file that is not executable, Midnight +Commander checks the extension of the selected file against the +extensions in the +.\"LINK2" +Extensions File\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +If a match is found then the code associated with that extension is +executed. A very simple +.\"LINK2" +macro expansion +.\"Macro Substitution" +takes place before executing the command. +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH " The cd internal command" +The +.I cd +command is interpreted by Midnight Commander, it is not passed to +the command shell for execution. Thus it may not handle all of the +nice macro expansion and substitution that your shell does, although it +does some of them: +.PP +.I Tilde substitution. +The (~) will be substituted with your home directory, if you append a +username after the tilde, then it will be substituted with the login +directory of the specified user. +.PP +For example, ~guest is the home directory for the user guest, while +~/guest is the directory guest in your home directory. +.PP +.I Previous directory. +You can jump to the directory you were previously by using the special +directory name '\-' like this: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I CDPATH directories. +If the directory specified to the +.B cd +command is not in the current directory, then Midnight Commander +uses the value in the environment variable +.B CDPATH +to search for the directory in any of the named directories. +.PP +For example you could set your +.B CDPATH +variable to ~/src:/usr/src, allowing you to change your directory to +any of the directories inside the ~/src and /usr/src directories, from +any place in the file system by using its relative name (for example +cd linux could take you to /usr/src/linux). +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Macro Substitution" +When accessing a +.\"LINK2" +user menu\&, +.\"Edit Menu File" +or executing an +.\"LINK2" +extension dependent command\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +or running a command from the command line input, a simple macro +substitution takes place. +.PP +The macros are: +.TP +.I %i +The indent of blank space, equal the cursor column position. For edit +menu only. +.TP +.I %y +The syntax type of current file. For edit menu only. +.TP +.I %k +The block file name. +.TP +.I %e +The error file name. +.TP +.I %m +The current menu name. +.TP +.IR %f " and " %p +In file manager user menu: the current file name in selected panel. +In mcedit user menu: the name of opened file. +.TP +.I %x +The extension of current file name. +.TP +.I %b +The current file name without extension. +.TP +.I %d +The current directory name. +.TP +.I %F +The current file in the unselected panel. +.TP +.I %D +The directory name of the unselected panel. +.TP +.I %t +The currently tagged files. +.TP +.I %T +The tagged files in the unselected panel. +.TP +.IR %u " and " %U +Similar to the %t and %T macros, but in addition the files are untagged. +You can use this macro only once per menu file entry or extension file +entry, because next time there will be no tagged files. +.TP +.IR %s " and " %S +The selected files: The tagged files if there are any. Otherwise the +current file. +.TP +.I %cd +This is a special macro that is used to change the current directory +to the directory specified in front of it. This is used primarily as +an interface to the +.\"LINK2" +Virtual File System\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.TP +.I %view +This macro is used to invoke the internal viewer. This macro can be +used alone, or with arguments. If you pass any arguments to this +macro, they should be enclosed in brackets. +.IP +The arguments are: +.I ascii +to force the viewer into ascii mode; +.I hex +to force the viewer into hex mode; +.I nroff +to tell the viewer that it should interpret the bold and underline +sequences of nroff; +.I unformatted +to tell the viewer to not interpret nroff commands for making the text +bold or underlined. +.TP +.I %% +The % character +.TP +.I %{some text} +Prompt for the substitution. An input box is shown and the text inside +the braces is used as a prompt. The macro is substituted by the text +typed by the user. The user can press Esc or F10 to cancel. This macro +doesn't work on the command line yet. +.TP +.I %var{ENV:default} +If environment variable +.I ENV +is unset, the +.I default +is substituted. Otherwise, the value of +.I ENV +is substituted. +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " The subshell support" +The subshell support is a compile time option, that works with the +shells: bash, ash (BusyBox and Debian), tcsh, zsh and fish. +.PP +When the subshell support is active, Midnight Commander will +spawn a concurrent copy of your shell (the one defined in the +.B SHELL +variable and if it is not defined, then the one in the /etc/passwd +file) and run it in a pseudo terminal, instead of invoking a new shell +each time you execute a command, the command will be passed to the +subshell as if you had typed it. This also allows you to change the +environment variables, use shell functions and define aliases that are +valid until you quit Midnight Commander. +.PP +.B bash +users may specify startup commands in ~/.local/share/mc/bashrc (fallback ~/.bashrc) +and special keyboard maps in ~/.local/share/mc/inputrc (fallback ~/.inputrc). +.PP +.B ash/dash +users (BusyBox or Debian) may specify startup commands in ~/.local/share/mc/ashrc (fallback ~/.profile). +.PP +.B zsh +users may specify startup commands in ~/.local/share/mc/.zshrc (fallback ~/.zshrc). +.PP +.B tcsh, fish +users cannot specify mc-specific startup commands at present. They have to rely on +shell-specific startup files. +.PP +The following paragraphs are relevant only when the subshell support is +active: +.PP +You can suspend applications at any +time with the sequence C\-o and jump back to Midnight Commander, if +you interrupt an application, you will not be able to run other +external commands until you quit the application you interrupted. +.PP +The basic prompt displayed by Midnight Commander is of the form +"user@host:current_path$ ". When using a capable shell, like Bash, the +prompt displayed by Midnight Commander will be the same prompt that you +are currently using in your shell. +.PP +(There's a known problem when using fish: the prompt is displayed only in +full screen mode (Ctrl-o), not when the panels are visible.) +.PP +The +.\"LINK2" +OPTIONS +.\"OPTIONS" +section has more information on how you can control subshell usage (-U/-u). +Furthermore, to set a specific subshell different from your current SHELL variable or +login shell defined in /etc/passwd, you may call MC like this: +.B SHELL=/bin/myshell mc +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Chmod" +The Chmod window is used to change the attribute bits in a group of +files and directories. It can be invoked with the C\-x c key combination. +.PP +The Chmod window has two parts \- +.I Permissions +and +.IR File . +.PP +In the File section are displayed the name of the file or directory +and its permissions in octal form, as well as its owner and group. +.PP +In the Permissions section there is a set of check buttons which +correspond to the file attribute bits. As you change the attribute +bits, you can see the octal value change in the File section. +.PP +To move between the widgets (buttons and check buttons) use the +.I arrow keys +or the +.I Tab +key. To change the state of the check buttons or to select a button +use +.I Space. +You can also use the hotkeys on the buttons to quickly activate them. +Hotkeys are shown as highlighted letters on the buttons. +.PP +To set the attribute bits, use the Enter key. +.PP +When working with a group of files or directories, you just click on +the bits you want to set or clear. Once you have selected the bits +you want to change, you select one of the action buttons (Set marked +or Clear marked). +.PP +Finally, to set the attributes exactly to those specified, you can use +the +.B [Set all] +button, which will act on all the tagged files. +.PP +.B [Marked all] +set only marked attributes to all selected files +.PP +.B [Set marked] +set marked bits in attributes of all selected files +.PP +.B [Clean marked] +clear marked bits in attributes of all selected files +.PP +.B [Set] +set the attributes of one file +.PP +.B [Cancel] +cancel the Chmod command +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Chown" +The Chown command is used to change the owner/group of a file. The hot +key for this command is C\-x o. +.\"NODE "Advanced Chown" +.SH "Advanced Chown" +The Advanced Chown command is the +.\"LINK2" +Chmod +.\"Chmod" +and +.\"LINK2" +Chown +.\"Chown" +command combined into one window. You can change the permissions and +owner/group of files at once. +.\"NODE "Chattr" +.SH "Chattr" +The Chattr window is used to change the attributes of a group of files +and directories on a Linux file system. It can be invoked with the C\-x e +key combination. +.PP +Not all attributes are supported or utilized by all filesystems. +List of available attribute flags is represented as a set of check buttons +which correspond to the attribute flags (see +.B chattr(1) +for details). As you change the attribute flags, you can see the symbolic +value change below file name. +.PP +To move between the widgets (buttons and check buttons) use the +.I arrow keys +or the +.I Tab +key. To change the state of the check buttons or to select a button use +.BR Space . +.PP +To set the attributes, use the Enter key. +.PP +When working with a group of files or directories, you just click on +the flags you want to set or clear. Once you have selected the flags +you want to change, you select one of the action buttons (Set marked +or Clear marked). +.PP +Finally, to set the attributes exactly to those specified, you can use +the +.B [Set all] +button, which will act on all the tagged files. +.PP +.B [Marked all] +set only marked attributes to all selected files. +.PP +.B [Set marked] +set marked flags in attributes of all selected files. +.PP +.B [Clean marked] +clear marked flags in attributes of all selected files. +.PP +.B [Set] +set the attributes of one file. +.PP +.B [Cancel] +cancel the Chattr command. +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "File Operations" +When you copy, move or delete files, Midnight Commander shows the +file operations dialog. It shows the files currently being processed +and uses up to three progress bars. The file bar indicates the +percentage of the current file that has been processed so far. The +count bar shows how many of the tagged files have been handled. The +bytes bar indicates the percentage of the total size of the tagged files +that has been handled. If the verbose option is off, the file and bytes +bars are not shown. +.PP +There are two buttons at the bottom of the dialog. Pressing the Skip +button will skip the rest of the current file. Pressing the Abort +button will abort the whole operation, the rest of the files are +skipped. +.PP +There are three other dialogs which you can run into during the file +operations. +.PP +The error dialog informs about error conditions and has three choices. +Normally you select either the Skip button to skip the file or the Abort +button to abort the operation altogether. You can also select the Retry +button if you fixed the problem from another terminal. +.PP +The replace dialog is shown when you attempt to copy or move a file on +the top of an existing file. The dialog shows the dates and sizes of +the both files. Press the Yes button to overwrite the file, the No +button to skip the file, the All button to overwrite all the files, the +None button to never overwrite and the Update button to overwrite if the +source file is newer than the target file. You can abort the whole +operation by pressing the Abort button. +.PP +The recursive delete dialog is shown when you try to delete a directory +which is not empty. Press the Yes button to delete the directory +recursively, the No button to skip the directory, the All button to +delete all the directories and the None button to skip all the non\-empty +directories. You can abort the whole operation by pressing the Abort +button. If you selected the Yes or All button you will be asked for a +confirmation. Type "yes" only if you are really sure you want to do the +recursive delete. +.PP +If you have tagged files and perform an operation on them only the files +on which the operation succeeded are untagged. Failed and skipped files +are left tagged. +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Mask Copy/Rename" +The copy/move operations let you translate the names of files in an +easy way. To do it, you have to specify the correct source mask and +usually in the trailing part of the destination specify some wildcards. +All the files matching the source mask are copied/renamed according to +the target mask. If there are tagged files, only the tagged files +matching the source mask are renamed. +.PP +There are other options which you can set: +.PP +.B Follow links +.PP +determines whether make the symlinks and hardlinks in the source +directory (recursively in subdirectories) new links in the target +directory or whether would you like to copy their content. +.PP +.B Dive into subdirs +.PP +determines the behavior when the source directory is about to be copied, +but the target directory already exists. The default action is to copy +the contents of the source directory into the target directory. +Enabling this option causes copying the source directory itself into the +target directory. +.PP +For example, you want to copy directory +.I /foo +containing file +.I bar +to +.IR /bla/foo , +which is an already existing directory. Normally (when +.B Dive into subdirs +is not set), mc would copy file +.I /foo/bar +into the file +.IR /bla/foo/bar . +By enabling this option the +.I /bla/foo/foo +directory will be created, and +.I /foo/bar +will be copied into +.IR /bla/foo/foo/bar . +.PP +.B Preserve attributes +.PP +determines whether to preserve the permissions, timestamps and (if you +are root) the ownership of the original files. If this option is not +set, the current value of the umask will be respected. +.PP +.B Use shell patterns +.PP +When this option is on you can use the '*' and '?' wildcards in the source +mask. They work like they do in the shell. In the target mask only the '*' +and '\\<digit>' wildcards are allowed. The first '*' wildcard in the target +mask corresponds to the first wildcard group in the source mask, +the second '*' corresponds to the second group and so on. The '\\1' wildcard +corresponds to the first wildcard group in the source mask, the '\\2' wildcard +corresponds to the second group and so on all the way up to '\\9'. +The '\\0' wildcard is the whole filename of the source file. +.PP +Two examples: +.PP +If the source mask is "*.tar.gz", the destination is "/bla/*.tgz" and the +file to be copied is "foo.tar.gz", the copy will be "foo.tgz" in "/bla". +.PP +Suppose you want to swap basename and extension so that "file.c" would +become "c.file" and so on. The source mask for this is "*.*" and the +destination is "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B Use shell patterns off +.PP +When the shell patterns option is off the MC doesn't do automatic +grouping anymore. You must use '\\(...\\)' expressions in the source +mask to specify meaning for the wildcards in the target mask. This is +more flexible but also requires more typing. Otherwise target masks +are similar to the situation when the shell patterns option is on. +.PP +Two examples: +.PP +If the source mask is "^\\(.*\\)\\.tar\\.gz$", the destination is +"/bla/*.tgz" and the file to be copied is "foo.tar.gz", the copy +will be "/bla/foo.tgz". +.PP +Let's suppose you want to swap basename and extension so that "file.c" +will become "c.file" and so on. The source mask for this is +"^\\(.*\\)\\.\\(.*\\)$" and the destination is "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B Case Conversions +.PP +You can also change the case of the filenames. If you use '\\u' +or '\\l' in the target mask, the next character will be converted to +uppercase or lowercase correspondingly. +.PP +If you use '\\U' or '\\L' in the target mask, the next characters will +be converted to uppercase or lowercase correspondingly up to the +next '\\E' or next '\\U', '\\L' or the end of the file name. +.PP +The '\\u' and '\\l' are stronger than '\\U' and '\\L'. +.PP +For example, if the source mask is '*' ( +.I Use shell patterns +on) or '^\\(.*\\)$' ( +.I Use shell patterns +off) and the target mask is '\\L\\u*' the file names will be converted +to have initial upper case and otherwise lower case. +.PP +You can also use '\\' as a quote character. For example, '\\\\' is +a backslash and '\\*' is an asterisk. +.PP +.B Stable symlinks +.PP +commands Midnight Commander, that it should change symlinks in the target, +so that they'll point to the same location as it did before. With absolute +symbolic links this does nothing, but if you have a relative one, it will +recompute its value, adding necessary ../ and other directory parts and making +the value as short as possible (most modern filesystems keep short symlinks +inside inodes and thus don't waste much disk space). + +.\"NODE "Select/Unselect Files" +.SH "Select/Unselect Files" +The dialog of group of files and directories selection or uselection. +The +.\"LINK2" +input line +.\"Input Line Keys" +allow enter the regular expression of filenames that will be +selected/unselected. +.PP +When +.I Files only +checkbox is on, only files will be selected. If +.I Files only +is off, as files as directories will be selected. +When +.I Shell Patterns +checkbox is on, the regular expression is much like the filename globbing +in the shell (* standing for zero or more characters and ? standing +for one character). If +.I Shell Patterns +is off, then the tagging of files is done with normal regular +expressions (see ed (1)). When +.I Case sensitive +checkbox is on, the selection will be case sensitive characters. +If +.I Case sensitive +is off, the case will be ignored. +.\"NODE "Diff Viewer" +.SH "Internal Diff Viewer" +The mcdiff is a visual diff tool. You can compare two files and edit them +in\-place (diffs are updated dynamically). You can browse and view a working +copy from popular version control systems (GIT, Subversion, etc). +.PP +Following shortcuts are available in internal diff viewer of Midnight +Commander. +.TP +.B F1 +Invoke the built\-in hypertext help viewer. +.TP +.B F2 +Save modified files. +.TP +.B F4 +Edit file of the left panel in the internal editor. +.TP +.B F14 +Edit file of the right panel in the internal editor. +.TP +.B F5 +Merge the current hunk. Only the current hunk will be merged. +.TP +.B F7 +Start search. +.TP +.B F17 +Continue search. +.TP +.B F10, Esc, q +Exit from diff viewer. +.TP +.B Alt\-s, s +Toggle show of hunk status. +.TP +.B Alt\-n, l +Toggle show of line numbers. +.TP +.B f +Maximize left panel. +.TP +.B = +Make panels equal in width. +.TP +.B > +Reduce the size of the right panel. +.TP +.B < +Reduce the size of the left panel. +.TP +.B c +Toggle show of trailing carriage return (CR) symbol as ^M. +.TP +.B 2, 3, 4, 8 +Set tabulation size +.TP +.B C\-u +Swap contents of diff panels. +.TP +.B C\-r +Refresh the screen. +.TP +.B C\-o +Switch to the subshell and show the command screen. +.TP +.B Enter, Space, n +Find next diff hunk. +.TP +.B Backspace, p +Find previous diff hunk. +.TP +.B g +Go to line. +.TP +.B Down +Scroll one line forward. +.TP +.B Up +Scroll one line backward. +.TP +.B PageUp +Move one page up. +.TP +.B PageDown +Mves one page down. +.TP +.B Home, A1 +Moves to the line beginning. +.TP +.B End +Moves to the line end. +.TP +.B C\-Home +Move to the file beginning. +.TP +.B C\-End, C1 +Move to the file end. +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Internal File Viewer" +The internal file viewer provides two display modes: ASCII and hex. +To toggle between modes, use the F4 key. +.PP +The viewer will try to use the best method provided by your system or +the file type to display the information. +Some character sequences, which appear most often in preformatted manual +pages, are displayed bold and underlined, thus making a pretty display +of your files. +.PP +When in hex mode, the search function accepts text in quotes and +constant numbers. Text in quotes is matched exactly after removing +the quotes. Each number matches one byte. You can mix quoted text +with constants like this: +.PP +.nf +"String" 34 0xBB 012 "more text" +.fi +.PP +Numbers are always interpreted in hex. In the example above, "34" is +interpreted as 0x34. The prefix "0x" isn't really needed: we could type +"BB" instead of "0xBB". And "012" is interpreted as 0x12, not as an octal +number. +.PP +Here is a listing of the actions associated with each key that the +Midnight Commander handles in the internal file viewer. +.TP +.B F1 +Invoke the built\-in hypertext help viewer. +.TP +.B F2 +Toggle the wrap mode. +.TP +.B F4 +Toggle the hex mode. +.TP +.B F5 +Goto. You can specify a line number, offset or percentage of file size +of position that you want to view. +.TP +.B F7, /, ? +Start search. These keys call the dialog window that allows you to set up +the search options. If key is ? the "Backwards" option is on. +.TP +.B C\-s +Continue forward search. +.TP +.B C\-r +Continue reverse search. +.TP +.B F17, n +Continue search in the chosen direction. +.TP +.B N +Temporary change the search direction: backwards if forward search is chosen, +and vice versa. +.TP +.B F8 +Toggle Raw/Parsed mode: This will show the file as found on disk or if +a processing filter has been specified in the mc.ext.ini file, then the +output from the filter. Current mode is always the other than written +on the button label, since on the button is the mode which you enter +by that key. +.TP +.B F9 +Toggle the format/unformat mode: when format mode is on the viewer +will interpret some string sequences to show bold and underline with +different colors. Also, on button label is the other mode than current. +.TP +.B F10, Esc. +Exit the internal file viewer. +.TP +.B PageDown, space, C\-v. +Scroll one page forward. +.TP +.B PageUp, Alt\-v, C\-b, Backspace. +Scroll one page backward. +.TP +.B Down +Scroll one line forward. +.TP +.B Up +Scroll one line backward. +.TP +.B C\-l +Refresh the screen. +.TP +.B C\-o +Switch to the subshell and show the command screen. +.TP +.B "[n] m" +Set the mark n. +.TP +.B "[n] r" +Jump to the mark n. +.TP +.B C\-f +Jump to the next file. +.TP +.B C\-b +Jump to the previous file. +.TP +.B Alt\-r +Toggle the ruler. +.TP +.B Alt\-e +to change charset of displayed text may use Alt\-e (M\-e). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding you may select "<No translation>" in charset +selection dialog. +.PP +It's possible to instruct the file viewer how to display a file, look +at the +.\"LINK2" +Edit Extension File section +.\"Edit Extension File" + +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Internal File Editor" +The internal file editor is a full\-featured full screen editor. It can +edit files up to 64 megabytes. It is possible to edit binary files. +The internal file editor is invoked using +.B F4 +if the +.I use_internal_edit +option is set in the initialization file. +.PP +The features it presently supports are: block copy, move, delete, cut, +paste; key for key undo; pull\-down menus; file insertion; macro +commands; regular expression search and replace; S\-arrow text highlighting +(if supported by the terminal); insert\-overwrite toggle; word wrap; +autoindent; tunable tab size; syntax highlighting for various file +types; and an option to pipe text blocks through shell commands like +indent and ispell. +.PP +Sections: +.IP +.\"LINK2" +Options of editor in ini\-file +.\"Internal File Editor / options" +.PP +The editor is very easy to use and requires no tutoring. To see what +keys do what, just consult the appropriate pull\-down menu. Other keys +are: Shift movement keys do text highlighting. +.B C\-Ins +copies to the file +.B mcedit.clip +and +.B S\-Ins +pastes from mcedit.clip. +.B S\-Del +cuts to +.BR mcedit.clip , +and +.B C\-Del +deletes highlighted text. Mouse highlighting also works, and you +can override the mouse as usual by holding down the shift key +while dragging the mouse to let normal terminal mouse highlighting +work. +.PP +To define a macro, press +.B C\-R +and then type out the key +strokes you want to be executed. Press +.B C\-R +again when finished. You can then assign the macro to any key you +like by pressing that key. The macro is executed when you press +.B C\-A +and then the assigned key. The macro is also executed if +you press Meta, Ctrl, or Esc and the assigned key, provided that the +key is not used for any other function. Once defined, the macro +commands go into the file +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +You can delete a macro by deleting the +appropriate line in this file. +.PP +To change charset of displayed text may use Alt\-e (M\-e). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding you may select "<No translation>" in charset +selection dialog. +.PP +.B F19 +will format the currently highlighted block (plain text or C or C++ +code or another). This is controlled by the +file +.B %pkgdatadir%/edit.indent.rc +which is copied to +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +in your home directory the first time you use it. +.PP +The editor also displays non\-us characters (160+). When editing +binary files, you should set +.B display bits +to 7 bits in the options menu to keep the spacing clean. + +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor / options" +.SH "Options of editor in ini\-file" + +Some editor options of ini\-file are described in this section. +Options are placed in [Midnight\-Commander] section +.TP +.I editor_wordcompletion_collect_entire_file +Search autocomplete candidates in entire of file or just from +begin of file to cursor position (0) + +.\"NODE "Screen selector" +.SH "Screen selector" +Midnight Commander supports running many internal modules (such as +editor, viewer and diff viewer) simultaneously and switching between +them without closing open files. Using several file managers at a time, +however, is not currently supported. +.PP +Let's call each of these modules a screen. There are three ways to +switch between screens, using one of these global shortcuts: +.TP +.B Alt\-} +switch to the next screen; +.TP +.B Alt\-{ +switch to the previous screen; +.TP +.B Alt\-` +open a dialog window with the list of currently open screens (or use the +"Screen list" menu item). +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH "Completion" +Let Midnight Commander type for you. +.PP +Attempt to perform completion on the text before current position. MC +attempts completion treating the text as variable (if the text begins +with +.BR $ ), +username (if the text begins with +.BR ~ ), +hostname (if the text begins with +.BR @ ) +or command (if you are on the command line in the position where you +might type a command, possible completions then include shell reserved +words and shell built\-in commands as well) in turn. If none of these +matches, filename completion is attempted. +.PP +Filename, username, variable and hostname completion works on all input +lines, command completion is command line specific. If the completion +is ambiguous (there are more different possibilities), MC beeps and the +following action depends on the setting of the +.\"LINK2" +Complete: show all +.\"Configuration" +option in the +.\"LINK2" +Configuration +.\"Configuration" +dialog. If it is enabled, a list of all possibilities pops up next to +the current position and you can select with the arrow keys and +.B Enter +the correct entry. You can also type the first letters in which the +possibilities differ to move to a subset of all possibilities and +complete as much as possible. If you press +.B Alt\-Tab +again, only the subset will be shown in the listbox, otherwise the first +item which matches all the previous characters will be highlighted. As +soon as there is no ambiguity, dialog disappears, but you can hide it by +canceling keys +.BR Esc , +.B F10 +and left and right arrow keys. If +.\"LINK2" +Complete: show all +.\"Configuration" +is disabled, the dialog pops up only if you press +.B Alt\-Tab +for the second time, for the first time MC just beeps. +.PP +Apply escaping of \fB?\fR, \fB*\fR, and \fB&\fR symbols (as \fB\\?\fR, \fB\\*\fR, +and \fB\\&\fR) in filenames to disallow use them as metasymbols in regular +expressions when substitution is performed in the input line. + +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "Virtual File System" +Midnight Commander is provided with a code layer to access the file +system; this code layer is known as the virtual file system switch. The +virtual file system switch allows Midnight Commander to manipulate +files not located on the Unix file system. +.PP +Currently, Midnight Commander is packaged with some Virtual File +Systems (VFS): the +.I local +file system, used for accessing the regular Unix file system; the +.IR ftpfs , +used to manipulate files on remote systems with the FTP protocol; the +.IR tarfs , +used to manipulate tar and compressed tar files; the +.IR undelfs , +used to recover deleted files on ext2 file systems (the default file +system for Linux systems), +.I fish +(for manipulating files over shell connections such as rsh and ssh). +If the code was compiled with +.I sftpfs +(for manipulating files over SFTP connections). +.PP +A generic +.I extfs +(EXTernal virtual File System) is provided in order to easily expand +VFS capabilities using scripts and external software. +.PP +The VFS switch code will interpret all of the path names used and will +forward them to the correct file system, the formats used for each one +of the file systems is described later in their own section. +.\"NODE " FTP File System" +.SH " FTP File System" +The FTP File System (ftpfs) allows you to manipulate files on remote +machines. To actually use it, you can use the +.I FTP link +item in the menu or directly change your current directory using the +.I cd +command to a path name that looks like this: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][user[:pass]@]machine[:port][remote\-dir] +.PP +The +.IR user , +.I port +and +.I remote\-dir +elements are optional. If you specify the +.I user +element, Midnight Commander will login to the remote machine as that +user, otherwise it will use anonymous login or the login name from the +.I ~/.netrc +file. The optional +.I pass +element is the password used for the connection. Using the password in +the VFS directory name is not recommended, because it can appear on the +screen in clear text and can be saved to the directory history. +.PP +To enable using FTP proxy, prepend +.B ! +(an exclamation sign) to the hostname. +.PP +Examples: +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!behind.firewall.edu/pub + ftp://guest@remote\-host.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@server/pub +.fi +.PP +Please check the +.\"LINK2" +Virtual File System +.\"Virtual FS" +dialog box for ftpfs options. +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH " Tar File System" +The tar file system provides you with read\-only access to your tar +files and compressed tar files by using the chdir command. To change +your directory to a tar file, you change your current directory to the +tar file by using the following syntax: +.PP +.I /filename.tar/utar://[dir\-inside\-tar] +.PP +The mc.ext.ini file already provides a shortcut for tar files, this means +that usually you just point to a tar file and press return to enter +into the tar file, see the +.\"LINK2" +Edit Extension File +.\"Edit Extension File" +section for details on how this is done. +.PP +Examples: +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +The latter specifies the full path of the tar archive. +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +The fish file system is a network based file system that allows you to +manipulate the files in a remote machine as if they were local. To use +this, the other side has to either run fish server, or has to have +bash\-compatible shell. +.PP +To connect to a remote machine, you just need to chdir +into a special directory which name is in the following +format: +.PP +.I sh://[user@]machine[:options]/[remote\-dir] +.PP +The +.I user, +.I options +and +.I remote\-dir +elements are optional. If you specify the +.I user +element, Midnight Commander will try to login on the remote +machine as that user, otherwise it will use your login name. +.PP +The available +.I options +are: +.nf + 'C' \- use compression; + 'r' \- use rsh instead of ssh; + port \- specify the port used by remote server. +.fi +If the +.I remote\-dir +element is present, your current directory on the remote machine will be +set to this one. +.PP +Examples: +.PP +.nf + sh://onlyrsh.mx:r/linux/local + sh://joe@want.compression.edu:C/private + sh://joe@noncompressed.ssh.edu/private + sh://joe@somehost.ssh.edu:2222/private +.fi +.\"NODE " SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) filesystem" +.SH " SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) filesystem" +The SFTP file system is a network based file system that allows you to +manipulate the files in a remote machine as if they were local. +.PP +To connect to a remote machine, you just need to chdir +into a special directory which name is in the following +format: +.PP +.I sftp://[user@]machine:[port]/[remote\-dir] +.PP +The +.I user, +.I port +and +.I remote\-dir +elements are optional. If you specify the +.I user +element, Midnight Commander will try to login on the remote +machine as that user, otherwise it will use your login name. +.I port +\- specify the port used by remote server (22 by default). +If the +.I remote\-dir +element is present, your current directory on the remote machine will be +set to this one. +.PP +Examples: +.PP +.nf + sftp://onlyrsh.mx/linux/local + sftp://joe:password@want.compression.edu/private + sftp://joe@noncompressed.ssh.edu/private + sftp://joe@somehost.ssh.edu:2222/private +.fi +.PP +When establishing the connection, server key fingerprint is verified using +the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file. If the host/key pair is not found or the host is found, +but the key doesn't match, an appropriate message is shown. +There are three buttons in the message dialog: +.PP +.B [Yes] +add new host/key pair to the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file and continue. +.PP +.B [Ignore] +do not add new host/key pair to the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file, but continue +nevertheless (at you own risk). +.PP +.B [No] +abort connection. +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Undelete File System" +On Linux systems, if you asked configure to use the ext2fs undelete +facilities, you will have the undelete file system available. +Recovery of deleted files is only available on ext2 file systems. The +undelete file system is just an interface to the ext2fs library to +retrieve all of the deleted files names on an ext2fs and provides and +to extract the selected files into a regular partition. +.PP +To use this file system, you have to chdir into the special file name +formed by the "undel://" prefix and the file name where the actual +file system resides. +.PP +For example, to recover deleted files on the second partition of the +first SCSI disk on Linux, you would use the following path name: +.PP +.nf + undel://sda2 +.fi +.PP +It may take a while for the undelfs to load the required information +before you start browsing files there. +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " EXTernal File System" +.B extfs +allows you to integrate numerous features and file types into GNU Midnight +Commander in an easy way, by writing scripts. +.PP +Extfs filesystems can be divided into two categories: +.PP +1. Stand\-alone filesystems, which are not associated with any existing +file. They represent certain system\-wide data as a directory tree. +You can invoke them by typing +.I "cd fsname://" +where fsname is an extfs short name (see below). Examples of such +filesystems include audio (list audio tracks on the CD) or apt (list of +all Debian packages in the system). +.PP +For example, to list CD\-Audio tracks on your CD\-ROM drive, type +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. 'Archive' filesystems (like rpm, patchfs and more), which represent +contents of a file as a directory tree. It can consist of 'real' files +compressed in an archive (urar, rpm) or virtual files, like messages +in a mailbox (mailfs) or parts of a patch (patchfs). To access such +filesystems +.I fsname:// +should be appended to the archive name. Note that the archive itself +can be on another vfs. +.PP +For example, to list contents of a zip archive documents.zip type +.PP +.nf + cd documents.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +In many aspects, you could treat extfs like any other directory. For +instance, you can add it to the hotlist or change to it from directory +history. An important limitation is that you cannot invoke shell +commands inside extfs, just like any other non\-local VFS. +.PP +Common extfs scripts included with Midnight Commander are: +.TP +.B a +access 'A:' DOS/Windows diskette +.RI ( "cd a://" ). +.TP +.B apt +front end to Debian's APT package management system +.RI ( "cd apt://" ). +.TP +.B audio +audio CD ripping and playing +.RI ( "cd audio://" +or +.IR "cd device/audio://" ). +.TP +.B bpp +package of Bad Penguin GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.bpp/bpp://" ). +.TP +.B deb +package of Debian GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.deb/deb://" ). +.TP +.B dpkg +Debian GNU/Linux installed packages +.RI ( "cd deb://" ). +.TP +.B hp48 +view and copy files to/from a HP48 calculator +.RI ( "cd hp48://" ). +.TP +.B lslR +browsing of lslR listings as found on many FTPs +.RI ( "cd filename/lslR://" ). +.TP +.B mailfs +mbox\-style mailbox files support +.RI ( "cd mailbox/mailfs://" ). +.TP +.B patchfs +extfs to handle unified and context diffs +.RI ( "cd filename/patchfs://" ). +.TP +.B rpm +RPM package +.RI ( "cd filename/rpm://" ). +.TP +.B rpms +RPM database management +.RI ( "cd rpms://" ). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +archivers +.RI ( "cd archive/xxxx://" +where xxxx is one of: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +You could bind file type/extension to specified extfs as described in the +.\"LINK2" +Edit Extension File +.\"Edit Extension File" +section. Here is an example entry for Debian packages: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Open=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH "Colors" +Midnight Commander will try to detect if your terminal supports +color using the terminal database and your terminal name. Sometimes +it gets confused, so you may force color mode or disable color mode +using the \-c and \-b flag respectively. +.PP +If the program is compiled with the S\-Lang screen manager instead of +ncurses, it will also check the variable +.B COLORTERM, +if it is set, it has the same effect as the \-c flag. +.PP +You may specify terminals that always force color mode +by adding the +.I color_terminals +variable to the Colors section of the initialization file. This will +prevent Midnight Commander from trying to detect if your terminal +supports color. Example: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +color_terminals=terminal\-name1,terminal\-name2... +.fi +.PP +The program can be compiled with both ncurses and S\-Lang, ncurses does +not provide a way to force color mode: ncurses uses just the +information in the terminal database. +.PP +Midnight Commander provides a way to change the default colors. +Currently the colors are configured using the environment variable +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +or the Colors section in the initialization file. +.PP +In the Colors section, the default color map is loaded from the +.I base_color +variable. You can specify an alternate color map for a terminal by +using the terminal name as the key in this section. Example: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +The format for the color definition is: +.PP +.nf + <keyword>=<fgcolor>,<bgcolor>,<attributes>:<keyword>=... +.fi +.PP +The colors are optional, and the keywords are: normal, selected, disabled, marked, +markselect, errors, input, inputmark, inputunchanged, commandlinemark, +reverse, gauge, header, inputhistory, commandhistory. Button bar colors are: +bbarhotkey, bbarbutton. Status bar color: statusbar. Menu colors are: menunormal, +menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, menuinactive. Dialog colors are: dnormal, dfocus, +dhotnormal, dhotfocus, dtitle. Error dialog colors are: errdfocus, errdhotnormal, +errdhotfocus, errdtitle. Help colors are: helpnormal, helpitalic, helpbold, +helplink, helpslink, helptitle. Viewer colors are: viewnormal, viewbold, +viewunderline, viewselected. Editor colors are: editnormal, editbold, editmarked, +editwhitespace, editlinestate. Popup menu colors are: pmenunormal, pmenusel, +pmenutitle. +.PP +.I header +determines the color of panel header, the line that contains column titles +and sort mode indicator. +.PP +.I input +determines the color of input lines used in query dialogs. +.PP +.I gauge +determines the color of the filled part of the progress bar (gauge), +which is used to show the user the progress of file operations, such as +copying. +.PP +.I disabled +determines the color of the widget that cannot be selected. +.PP +The dialog boxes use the following colors: +.I dnormal +is used for the normal text, +.I dfocus +is the color used for the currently selected component, +.I dhotnormal +is the color used to differentiate the hotkey color in normal +components, whereas the +.I dhotfocus +color is used for the highlighted color in the currently selected +component. +.PP +Menus use the same scheme but uses the menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel +and menuinactive tags instead. +.PP +Help uses the following colors: +.I helpnormal +is used for normal text, +.I helpitalic +is used for text which is emphasized in italic in the manual page, +.I helpbold +is used for text which is emphasized in bold in the manual page, +.I helplink +is used for not selected hyperlinks and +.I helpslink +is used for selected hyperlink. +.PP +Popup menu uses following colors: +.I pmenunormal +is used for non\-selected menu items and as a main color of popup menu window, +.I pmenusel +is used for selected menu item, +.I pmenutitle +is used for popup menu title. +.PP +The possible colors are: black, gray, red, brightred, green, +brightgreen, brown, yellow, blue, brightblue, magenta, brightmagenta, +cyan, brightcyan, lightgray and white. And there is a special keyword +for transparent background. It is 'default'. The 'default' can only be +used for background color. Another special keyword "base" means mc's main +colors. When 256 colors are available, they can be specified either as +color16 to color255, or as rgb000 to rgb555 and gray0 to gray23. Example: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color=normal=white,default:marked=magenta,default +.fi +.PP +Attributes can be any of bold, italic, underline, reverse and blink, appended by a +plus sign if more than one are desired. The special word "none" means no +attributes, without attempting to fall back to base_color. Example: +.PP +.nf +menuhotsel=yellow;black;bold+underline +.fi + +.\"NODE "Skins" +.SH "Skins" +You can change the appearance of Midnight Commander. +To do this, you must specify a file that contain descriptions of colors +and lines to draw boxes. Redefining of the colors is entirely compatible +with the assignment of colors, as described in Section +.\"LINK2" +Colors\&. +.\"Colors" +.PP +If your skin contains any true\-color definitions, you should define +the 'truecolors' key set to TRUE value in [skin] section. If true\-color +is not used but 256\-color is, you should define '256colors' instead. +.PP +A skin\-file is searched on the following algorithm (to the first one found): +.IP +.br +1) command line option +.B \-S <skin> +or +.B \-\-skin=<skin> +.br +2) Environment variable +.B MC_SKIN +.br +3) Parameter +.B skin +in section +.B [Midnight\-Commander] +in config file. +.br +4) File +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/skins/default.ini +.br +5) File +.B %pkgdatadir%/skins/default.ini + +.PP +Command line option, environment variable and parameter in config file may +contain the absolute path to the skin\-file (with the extension \.ini +or without it). Search of skin\-file will occur in (to the first one found): +.IP +1) +.B ~/.local/share/mc/skins/ +.br +2) +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/skins/ +.br +3) +.B %pkgdatadir%/skins/ +.br + +.PP +For getting extended info, refer to: +.IP +.\"LINK2" +Description of section and parameters +.\"Skins sections" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Color pair definitions +.\"Skins colors" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Color and attribute aliases +.\"Skins aliases" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Draw lines +.\"Skins lines" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Compatibility +.\"Skins oldcolors" +.br + +.\"NODE " Skins sections" +.SH " Description of section and parameters" + +Section +.B [skin] +contain metainfo for skin\-file. Parameter +.I description +contain short text about skin. + +.PP +Section +.B [filehighlight] +contain descriptions of color pairs for filenames highlighting. +Name of parameters must be equal to names of sections into +filehighlight.ini file. +See +.\"LINK2" +Filenames Highlight +.\"Filenames Highlight" +for getting more info. + +.PP +Section +.B [core] +describes the elements that are used everywhere. +.TP +.I _default_ +Default color pair. Used in all other sections if they not contain +color definitions +.TP +.I selected +cursor +.TP +.I marked +selected data +.TP +.I markselect +cursor on selected data +.TP +.I gauge +color of the filled part of the progress bar +.TP +.I input +color of input lines used in query dialogs +.TP +.I inputmark +color of input selected text +.TP +.I inputunchanged +color of input text before first modification or cursor movement +.TP +.I commandlinemark +color of selected text in command line +.TP +.I reverse +reverse color +.PP +Section +.B [dialog] +describes the elements that are placed on dialog windows (except error dialogs). +.TP +.I _default_ +Default color for this section. Used [core]._default_ if not specified +.TP +.I dfocus +Color of active element (in focus) +.TP +.I dhotnormal +Color of hotkeys +.TP +.I dhotfocus +Color of hotkeys in focused element + +.PP +Section +.B [error] +describes the elements that are placed on error dialog windows +.TP +.I _default_ +Default color for this section. Used [core]._default_ if not specified +.TP +.I errdhotnormal +Color of hotkeys +.TP +.I errdhotfocus +Color of hotkeys in focused element + +.PP +Section +.B [menu] +describes the elements that are placed in menu. This section describes +system menu (called by F9) and user\-defined menus (called by F2 in panels +and by F11 in editor). +.TP +.I _default_ +Default color for this section. Used [core]._default_ if not specified +.TP +.I entry +Color of menu items +.TP +.I menuhot +Color of menu hotkeys +.TP +.I menusel +Color of active menu item (in focus) +.TP +.I menuhotsel +Color of menu hotkeys in focused menu item +.TP +.I menuinactive +Color of inactive menu + +.PP +Section +.B [help] +describes the elements that are placed on help window. +.TP +.I _default_ +Default color for this section. Used [core]._default_ if not specified +.TP +.I helpitalic +Color pair for element with +.B italic +attribute +.TP +.I helpbold +Color pair for element with +.B bold +attribute +.TP +.I helplink +Color of links +.TP +.I helpslink +Color of active link (on focus) + +.PP +Section +.B [editor] +describes the colors of elements placed in editor. +.TP +.I _default_ +Default color for this section. Used [core]._default_ if not specified +.TP +.I editbold +Color pair for element with +.B bold +attribute +.TP +.I editmarked +Color of selected text +.TP +.I editwhitespace +Color of tabs and trailing spaces highlighting +.TP +.I editlinestate +Color for line state area + +.PP +Section +.B [viewer] +describes the colors of elements placed in viewer. +.TP +.I viewunderline +Color pair for element with +.B underline +attribute + +.\"NODE " Skins colors" +.SH " Color pair definitions" +Any parameter in skin\-file contain definition of color pair. +.PP +Color pairs described as two colors and the optional attributes +separated by ';'. First field sets the foreground color, second +field sets background color, third field sets the attributes. +Any of the fields may be omitted, in this case value will be +taken from default color pair (global color pair or from default +color pair of this section). +.PP +Example: +.br +.nf +[core] + # green on black + _default_=green;black + # green (default) on blue + selected=;blue + # yellow on black (default) + # underlined yellow on black (default) + marked=yellow;;underline +.fi + +.PP +Possible colors (names) and attributes are described in +.\"LINK2" +Colors\&. +.\"Colors" +section. + +.\"NODE " Skins aliases" +.SH " Color and attribute aliases" +This optional section might define aliases for single colors (not color pairs) +as well as combination of attributes; in other words, for semicolon\-separated +fragments of parameters. Aliases can refer to other aliases as long as they +don't form a loop. +.PP +Example: +.br +.nf +[aliases] + myfavfg=green + myfavbg=black + myfavattr=bold+italic +[core] + _default_=myfavfg;myfavbg;myfavattr +.fi + +.\"NODE " Skins lines" +.SH " Draw lines" +Lines sets in section +.B [Lines] +into skin\-file. By default single lines are used, but you may redefine +to usage of any utf\-8 symbols (like to lines, for example). +.PP +.I WARNING!!! +When you build Midnight Commander with the ncurses screen library +usage of drawing lines is limited! +Possible only drawing a single lines. +For all questions and comments please contact the developers of ncurses. + +.PP +Descriptions of parameters +.BR [Lines] : +.TP +.I lefttop +left\-top line fragment. +.TP +.I righttop +right\-top line fragment. +.TP +.I centertop +down branch of horizontal line +.TP +.I centerbottom +up branch of horizontal line +.TP +.I leftbottom +left\-bottom line fragment +.TP +.I rightbottom +right\-bottom line fragment +.TP +.I leftmiddle +right branch of vertical line +.TP +.I rightmiddle +left branch of vertical line +.TP +.I centermiddle +cross of lines +.TP +.I horiz +horizontal line +.TP +.I vert +vertical line +.TP +.I thinhoriz +thin horizontal line +.TP +.I thinvert +thin vertical line + + +.\"NODE " Skins oldcolors" +.SH " Compatibility" + +Appointment of color by skin\-files fully compatible with +the appointment of the colors described in +.\"LINK2" +Colors\&. +.\"Colors" +section. +.PP +In this case, reassignment of colors has priority over the skin file and is +complementary. + +.\"NODE "Filenames Highlight" +.SH "Filenames Highlight" +Section [filehighlight] in current skin\-file contains key names as +highlight groups and values as color pairs. Color pairs is documented +in +.\"LINK2" +Skins +.\"Skins" +section. +.PP +Rules of filenames highlight are placed in %pkgdatadir%/filehighlight.ini file +(~/.config/mc/filehighlight.ini). +Name of section in this file must be equal to parameters names in +[filehighlight] section (in current skin\-file). +.PP +Keys in these groups are: +.TP +.I type +file type. If present, all other options are ignored. +.TP +.I regexp +regular expression. If present, 'extensions' option is ignored. +.TP +.I extensions +list of extensions of files. Separated by ';' sign. +.TP +.I extensions_case +(make sense only with 'extensions' parameter) make 'extensions' +rule case sensitive (true) or not (false). +.PP +`type' key may have values: +.nf +\- FILE (all files) + \- FILE_EXE +\- DIR (all directories) + \- LINK_DIR +\- LINK (all links except stale link) + \- HARDLINK + \- SYMLINK +\- STALE_LINK +\- DEVICE (all device files) + \- DEVICE_BLOCK + \- DEVICE_CHAR +\- SPECIAL (all special files) + \- SPECIAL_SOCKET + \- SPECIAL_FIFO + \- SPECIAL_DOOR +.fi +.PP + +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Special Settings" +Most of Midnight Commander settings can be changed from the +menus. However, there are a small number of settings which can only be +changed by editing the setup file. +.PP +These variables may be set in your ~/.config/mc/ini file: +.TP +.I clear_before_exec +By default, Midnight Commander clears the screen before executing a +command. If you would prefer to see the output of the command at the +bottom of the screen, edit your ~/.config/mc/ini file and change the value of +the field clear_before_exec to 0. +.TP +.I confirm_view_dir +If you press F3 on a directory, normally MC enters that directory. If +this flag is set to 1, then MC will ask for confirmation before changing +the directory if you have files tagged. +.TP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds +This value is the number of seconds Midnight Commander will wait +before attempting to reconnect to an FTP server that has denied the +login. If the value is zero, the login will no be retried. +.TP +.I max_dirt_limit +Specifies how many screen updates can be skipped at most in the internal +file viewer. Normally this value is not significant, because the code +automatically adjusts the number of updates to skip according to the +rate of incoming keystrokes. However, on very slow machines or +terminals with a fast keyboard auto repeat, a big value can make screen +updates too jumpy. +.IP +It seems that setting max_dirt_limit to 10 causes the best behavior, +and that is the default value. +.TP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer +Controls if scrolling with the mouse is done by pages or line by line +on the internal file viewer. +.TP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +Allow special treatment for '+', '\-', '*' in the command line (select, +unselect, reverse selection) only if the command line is empty. You +don't need to quote those characters in the middle of the command line. +On the other hand, you cannot use them to change selection when the +command line is not empty. +.TP +.I alternate_plus_minus +If true, use '+', '\-', '\\' and '*' keys normally. For select/unselect, +use 'Alt\-+', 'Alt\--' and 'Alt\-*'. +.TP +.I show_output_starts_shell +This variable only works if you are not using the subshell support. +When you use the C\-o keystroke to go back to the user screen, if this +one is set, you will get a fresh shell. Otherwise, pressing any key +will bring you back to Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I timeformat_recent +Change the time format used to display dates less than 6 months from +now. +See strftime or date man page for the format specification. If this +option is absent, default timeformat is used. +.TP +.I timeformat_old +Change the time format used to display dates older than 6 months from +now or for dates in the future. +See strftime or date man page for the format specification. If this +option is absent, default timeformat is used. +.TP +.I torben_fj_mode +If this flag is set, then the home and end keys will work slightly +different on the panels, instead of moving the selection to the first +and last files in the panels, they will act as follows: +.IP +The home key will: Go up to the middle line, if below it; else go to the +top line unless it is already on the top line, in this case it will go +to the first file in the panel. +.IP +The end key has a similar behavior: Go down to the middle line, if over +it; else go to the bottom line unless you already are at the bottom +line, in such case it will move the selection to the last file name in +the panel. +.TP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +If this variable is on (the default) it will spawn the file command to +match the file types listed on the +.\"LINK2" +mc.ext.ini file\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.TP +.I xtree_mode +If this variable is on (default is off) when you browse the file system +on a Tree panel, it will automatically reload the other panel with the +contents of the selected directory. +.TP +.I fish_directory_timeout +This variable holds the lifetime of a directory cache entry in seconds. The +default value is 900 seconds. +.TP +.I clipboard_store +This variable contains path (with options) to the external clipboard +utility like 'xclip' to read text into X selection from file. +For example: +.PP +.nf +clipboard_store=xclip \-i +.fi +.TP +.I clipboard_paste +This variable contains path (with options) to the external clipboard +utility like 'xclip' to print the selection to standard out. +For example: +.PP +.nf +clipboard_paste=xclip \-o +.fi +.TP +.I autodetect_codeset +This option allows use the `enca' command to autodetect codeset of text files +in internal viewer and editor. List of valid values can be obtain by the +`enca \-\-list languages | cut \-d : \-f1' command. Option must be located +in the [Misc] section. +.PP +For example: +.PP +.nf +autodetect_codeset=russian +.fi +.\"NODE "Parameters for external editor or viewer" +.SH "Parameters for external editor or viewer" +Midnight Commander provides a way for specify an options for external editors +and viewers. Midnight Commander tries to search the +"[External editor or viewer parameters]" section in the system initialization file +(the mc.lib file located in Midnight Commander's library directory) +and then in the ~/.config/mc/ini file. The option name should be equal to the name +(full pathname) of external editor or viewer. The option value can contain following +variables: +.TP +.I %filename +The filename to edit/view. +.TP +.I %lineno +The start line in the opening file. +.PP +For example: +.PP +.nf +[External editor or viewer parameters] + vi=%filename +%lineno + joe=%filename +%lineno + more=%filename +%lineno +.fi +.PP +Start line is passed to the external editor/viewer only if it is called from the +.\"LINK2" +Find file +.\"Find File" +results window. +.PP +If external editor/viewer is launched via F4/F3 keys, MC hopes that program +(at least "joe", but probably others too) has an own feature that by default +opens the file where it was last open. MC doesn't prevent external editor/viewer +to save and restore position in opened files. +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH "Terminal databases" +Midnight Commander provides a way to fix your system terminal +database without requiring root privileges. Midnight Commander +searches in the system initialization file (the mc.lib file located in +Midnight Commander's library directory) and in the +~/.config/mc/ini file for the section +"terminal:your\-terminal\-name" and then for the section +"terminal:general", each line of the section contains a key symbol that +you want to define, followed by an equal sign and the definition for the +key. You can use the special \\e form to represent the escape character +and the ^x to represent the control\-x character. +.PP +The possible key symbols are: +.PP +.nf +f0 to f20 Function keys f0\-f20 +bs backspace +home home key +end end key +up up arrow key +down down arrow key +left left arrow key +right right arrow key +pgdn page down key +pgup page up key +insert the insert character +delete the delete character +complete to do completion +.fi +.PP +For example, to define the key insert to be the Escape + [ + O + p, you +set this in the ini file: +.PP +.nf +insert=\\e[Op +.fi + +.PP +Also now you can use +.I extended learn keys. +For example: + +.nf + ctrl\-alt\-right=\\e[[1;6C + ctrl\-alt\-left=\\e[[1;6D +.fi + +.PP +This means that ctrl+alt+left sends a \\e[[1;6D escape sequence +and therefore Midnight Commander interprets "\\e[[1;6D" as C\-Alt\-Left. + +.PP +The +.I complete +key symbol represents the escape sequences used to invoke the completion +process, this is invoked with Alt\-tab, but you can define other keys to do +the same work (on those keyboard with tons of nice and unused keys +everywhere). +.SH "" +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH "FILES" +Full paths below may vary between installations. They are also affected +by the +.B MC_DATADIR +environment variable. If it's set, its value is used instead of +%pkgdatadir% in the paths below. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +The help file for the program. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +The default system\-wide extensions file. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +User's own extension, view configuration and edit configuration +file. They override the contents of the system wide files if present. +.PP +.I %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ini +.RE +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +System\-wide setup files for Midnight Commander, used only if the user +doesn't have his own +.B ~/.config/mc/ini +file. If %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ini exists, %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini isn't used. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Global settings for Midnight Commander. Settings in this file +affect all users, whether they have ~/.config/mc/ini or not. Currently, only +.\"LINK2" +terminal settings +.\"Terminal databases" +are loaded from mc.lib. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +User's own setup. If this file is present then the setup is loaded +from here instead of the system\-wide startup file. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +This file contains the hints displayed by the program. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +This file contains the default system\-wide applications menu. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +User's own application menu. If this file is present it is used instead +of the system\-wide applications menu. +.PP +.I ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.IP +The directory list for the directory tree and tree view features. +.PP +.I ~/.local/share/mc.menu +.IP +Local user\-defined menu. If this file is present, it is used instead of +the home or system\-wide applications menu. +.PP +To change default root directory of MC, you can use +.B MC_PROFILE_ROOT +environment variable. The value of MC_PROFILE_ROOT must be an absolute path. +If MC_PROFILE_ROOT is unset or empty, HOME variable is used. If HOME is unset +or empty, MC directories are get from GLib library. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "LICENSE" +This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public +License as published by the Free Software Foundation. See the built\-in +help for details on the License and the lack of warranty. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH "AVAILABILITY" +The latest version of this program can be found at +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH "SEE ALSO" +ed(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), view(1), sh(1), bash(1), +tcsh(1), zsh(1). +.PP +.nf +Midnight Commander's page on the World Wide Web: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH "AUTHORS" +Authors and contributors are listed in the AUTHORS file in the source +distribution. +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH "BUGS" +See the file TODO in the distribution for information on what remains to +be done. +.PP +If you want to report a problem with the program, please create bugreport +at https://www.midnight\-commander.org/. +.PP +Provide a detailed description of the bug, the version of the program +you are running +.RI ( "mc \-V" +displays this information), the operating system you are running the +program on. If the program crashes, we would appreciate a stack trace. diff --git a/doc/man/mcedit.1.in b/doc/man/mcedit.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2869af7 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/mcedit.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,661 @@ +.TH MCEDIT 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.SH NAME +mcedit \- Internal file editor of GNU Midnight Commander. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mcedit +[\-bcCdfhstVx?] [+lineno] [file1] [file2] ... +.PP +.B mcedit +[\-bcCdfhstVx?] file1:lineno[:] file2:lineno[:] ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.LP +mcedit is a link to +.BR mc , +the main GNU Midnight Commander executable. Executing GNU Midnight Commander +under this name runs the internal editor and opens files +specified on the command line. The editor is based on the terminal version of +.B cooledit +\- standalone editor for X Window System. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.I "+lineno" +Go to the line specified by number (do not put a space between the +.I "+" +sign and the number). Several line numbers are allowed but only the last one +will be used, and it will be applied to the first file only. +.TP +.I "\-b" +Force black and white display. +.TP +.I "\-c" +Force ANSI color mode on terminals that don't seem to have color +support. +.TP +.I "\-C <keyword>=<fgcolor>,<bgcolor>,<attributes>:<keyword>= ..." +Specify a different color set. See the +.B Colors +section in mc(1) for more information. +.TP +.I "\-d" +Disable mouse support. +.TP +.I "\-f" +Display the compiled\-in search path for GNU Midnight Commander data +files. +.TP +.I "\-t" +Force using termcap database instead of terminfo. This option is only +applicable if GNU Midnight Commander was compiled with S\-Lang library +with terminfo support. +.TP +.I "\-V" +Display the version of the program. +.TP +.I "\-x" +Force xterm mode. Used when running on xterm\-capable terminals (two +screen modes, and able to send mouse escape sequences). +.SH FEATURES +The internal file editor is a full\-featured windowed editor. It can +edit several files at the same time. Maximum size of each file is 64 +megabytes. It is possible to edit binary files. The features it presently +supports are: block copy, move, delete, cut, paste; key for key undo; +pull\-down menus; file insertion; macro commands; regular expression +search and replace; shift\-arrow text highlighting (if supported by +the terminal); insert\-overwrite toggle; autoindent; tunable tab size; +syntax highlighting for various file types; and an option to pipe text +blocks through shell commands like indent and ispell. +.PP +Each file is opened in its own window in full\-screen mode. Window control +in mcedit is similar to the window control in other multi\-window program: +double click on window title maximizes the window to full\-screen or restores +window size and position; left\-click on window title and mouse drag moves +the window in editor area; left\-click on low\-right frame corner and mouse drag +resizes the window. These actions can be made using "Window" menu. +.SH KEYS +The editor is easy to use and can be used without learning. The +pull\-down menu is invoked by pressing F9. You can learn other keys from +the menu and from the button bar labels. +.PP +In addition to that, Shift combined with arrows does text highlighting +(if supported by the terminal): +.B Ctrl\-Ins +copies to the file +.BR ~/.cache/mc/mcedit/mcedit.clip , +.B Shift\-Ins +pastes from +.BR ~/.cache/mc/mcedit/mcedit.clip , +.B Shift\-Del +cuts to +.BR ~/.cache/mc/mcedit/mcedit.clip , +and +.B Ctrl\-Del +deletes highlighted text. Mouse highlighting also works on some +terminals. To use the standard mouse support provided by your terminal, +hold the Shift key. Please note that the mouse support in the terminal +doesn't share the clipboard with +.BR mcedit . +.PP +The completion key (usually +.B "Meta\-Tab" +or +.BR "Escape Tab" ) +completes the word under the cursor using the words used in the file. +.SH MACRO +.PP +To define a macro, press +.B Ctrl\-R +and then type out the keys you want to be executed. Press +.B Ctrl\-R +again when finished. The macro can be assigned to any key by pressing that key. +The macro is executed when you press the assigned key. +.PP +The macro commands are stored in section +.B [editor] +it the file +.BR ~/.local/share/mc/mc.macros . +.PP +External scripts (filters) can be assigned into the any hotkey by edit +.B mc.macros +like following: +.PP +.nf +[editor] +ctrl\-W=ExecuteScript:25; +.fi +.PP +This means that ctrl\-W hotkey initiates the +.I ExecuteScript(25) +action, then editor handler translates this into execution of +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/macros.d/macro.25.sh +shell script. +.PP +External scripts are stored in +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/macros.d/ +directory and must be named as +.B macro.XXXX.sh +where +.B XXXX +is the number from 0 to 9999. +See +.B Edit Menu File +for more detail about format of the script. +.PP +Following macro definition and directives can be used: +.TP +.I #silent +If this directive is set, then script starts without interactive subshell. +.TP +.I %c +The cursor column position number. +.TP +.I %i +The indent of blank space, equal the cursor column. +.TP +.I %y +The syntax type of current file. +.TP +.I %b +The block file name. +.TP +.I %f +The current file name. +.TP +.I %n +Only the current file name without extension. +.TP +.I %x +The extension of current file name. +.TP +.I %d +The current directory name. +.TP +.I %F +The current file in the unselected panel. +.TP +.I %D +The directory name of the unselected panel. +.TP +.I %t +The currently tagged files. +.TP +.I %T +The tagged files in the unselected panel. +.TP +.IR %u " and " %U +Similar to the +.I %t +and +.I %T +macros, but in addition the files are untagged. You can use this macro +only once per menu file entry or extension file entry, because next time +there will be no tagged files. +.TP +.IR %s " and " %S +The selected files: The tagged files if there are any. Otherwise the +current file. +.PP +Feel free to edit this files, if you need. +Here is a sample external script: +.PP +.nf +l comment selection + TMPFILE=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/up.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + echo #if 0 > $TMPFILE + cat %b >> $TMPFILE + echo #endif >> $TMPFILE + cat $TMPFILE > %b + rm \-f $TMPFILE +.fi +.PP +If some keys don't work, you can use +.B Learn Keys +in the +.B Options +menu. +.SH CODE NAVIGATION +.B mcedit +can be used for navigation through code with tags files created by etags +or ctags commands. If there is no TAGS file code navigation will not work. +For example, in case of exuberant\-ctags for C language command will be: +.PP +ctags \-e \-\-language\-force=C \-R ./ +.PP +.B Meta\-Enter +shows list box to select item under cursor (cursor should stand at the end +of the word). +.PP +.B Meta\-Minus +where minus is symbol "\-" goes to previous function in navigation list +(like browser's Back button). +.PP +.B Meta\-Equal +where equal is symbol "=" goes to next function in navigation list +(like browser's Forward button). +.PP +.SH SYNTAX HIGHLIGHTING +.B mcedit +supports syntax highlighting. This means that keywords and contexts +(like C comments, string constants, etc) are highlighted in different +colors. The following section explains the format of the file +.BR ~/.local/share/mc/syntax/Syntax . +If this file is missing, system\-wide +.B %pkgdatadir%/syntax/Syntax +is used. +The file +.B ~/.local/share/mc/syntax/Syntax +is rescanned on opening of every new editor file. The file contains +rules for highlighting, each of which is given on a separate line, and +define which keywords will be highlighted with what color. +.PP +The file is divided into sections, each beginning with a line with the +.B file +command. The sections are normally put into separate files using the +.B include +command. +.PP +The +.B file +command has three arguments. The first argument is a regular expression +that is applied to the file name to determine if the following section +applies to the file. The second argument is the description of the file +type. It is used in +.BR cooledit ; +future versions of +.B mcedit +may use it as well. The third optional argument is a regular expression +to match the first line of text of the file. The rules in the following +section apply if either the file name or the first line of text matches. +.PP +A section ends with the start of another section. Each section is +divided into contexts, and each context contains rules. A context is a +scope within the text that a particular set of rules belongs to. For +instance, the text within a C style comment (i.e. between +.B /* +and +.BR */ ) +has its own color. This is a context, although it has no further rules +inside it because there is probably nothing that we want highlighted +within a C comment. +.PP +A trivial C programming section might look like this: +.PP +.nf +file .\\*\\\\.c C\\sProgram\\sFile (#include|/\\\\\\*) + +wholechars abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ_ + +# default colors +define comment brown +context default + keyword whole if yellow + keyword whole else yellow + keyword whole for yellow + keyword whole while yellow + keyword whole do yellow + keyword whole switch yellow + keyword whole case yellow + keyword whole static yellow + keyword whole extern yellow + keyword { brightcyan + keyword } brightcyan + keyword '*' green + +# C comments +context /\\* \\*/ comment + +# C preprocessor directives +context linestart # \\n red + keyword \\\\\\n brightred + +# C string constants +context " " green + keyword %d brightgreen + keyword %s brightgreen + keyword %c brightgreen + keyword \\\\" brightgreen +.fi +.PP +Each context starts with a line of the form: +.PP +.B context +.RB [ exclusive ] +.RB [ whole | wholeright | wholeleft ] +.RB [ linestart ] +.I delim +.RB [ linestart ] +.I delim +.RI [ foreground ] +.RI [ background ] +.RI [ attributes ] +.PP +The first context is an exception. It must start with the command +.PP +.B context default +.RI [ foreground ] +.RI [ background ] +.RI [ attributes ] +.PP +otherwise +.B mcedit +will report an error. The +.B linestart +option specifies that +.I delim +must start at the beginning of a line. The +.B whole +option tells that +.I delim +must be a whole word. To specify that a word must begin on the word +boundary only on the left side, you can use the +.B wholeleft +option, and similarly a word that must end on the word boundary is specified by +.BR wholeright . +.PP +The set of characters that constitute a whole word can be changed at any +point in the file with the +.B wholechars +command. The left and right set of characters can be set separately +with +.PP +.B wholechars +.RB [ left | right ] +.I characters +.PP +The +.B exclusive +option causes the text between the delimiters to be highlighted, but not +the delimiters themselves. +.PP +Each rule is a line of the form: +.PP +.B keyword +.RB [ whole | wholeright | wholeleft ] +.RB [ linestart ] +.I string foreground +.RI [ background ] +.RI [ attributes ] +.PP +Context or keyword strings are interpreted, so that you can include tabs +and spaces with the sequences \\t and \\s. Newlines and backslashes are +specified with \\n and \\\\ respectively. Since whitespace is used as a +separator, it may not be used as is. Also, \\* must be used to specify +an asterisk. The * itself is a wildcard that matches any length of +characters. For example, +.PP +.nf + keyword '*' green +.fi +.PP +colors all C single character constants green. You also could use +.PP +.nf + keyword "*" green +.fi +.PP +to color string constants, but the matched string would not be allowed +to span across multiple newlines. The wildcard may be used within +context delimiters as well, but you cannot have a wildcard as the last +or first character. +.PP +Important to note is the line +.PP +.nf + keyword \\\\\\n brightgreen +.fi +.PP +This line defines a keyword containing the backslash and newline +characters. Since the keywords are matched before the context +delimiters, this keyword prevents the context from ending at the end of +the lines that end in a backslash, thus allowing C preprocessor +directive to continue across multiple lines. +.PP +The possible colors are: black, gray, red, brightred, green, +brightgreen, brown, yellow, blue, brightblue, magenta, brightmagenta, +cyan, brightcyan, lightgray and white. The special keyword "default" means +the terminal's default. Another special keyword "base" means mc's main +colors, it is useful as a placeholder if you want to specify attributes +without modifying the background color. When 256 colors are available, +they can be specified either as color16 to color255, or as rgb000 to rgb555 +and gray0 to gray23. +.PP +If the syntax file is shared with +.BR cooledit , +it is possible to specify different colors for +.B mcedit +and +.B cooledit +by separating them with a slash, e.g. +.PP +.nf +keyword #include red/Orange +.fi +.PP +.B mcedit +uses the color before the slash. See cooledit(1) for supported +.B cooledit +colors. +.PP +Attributes can be any of bold, italic, underline, reverse and blink, appended by a +plus sign if more than one are desired. +.PP +Comments may be put on a separate line starting with the hash sign (#). +.PP +If you are describing case insensitive language you need to use +.B caseinsensitive +directive. It should be specified at the beginning of syntax file. +.PP +Because of the simplicity of the implementation, there are a few +intricacies that will not be dealt with correctly but these are a minor +irritation. On the whole, a broad spectrum of quite complicated +situations are handled with these simple rules. It is a good idea to +take a look at the syntax file to see some of the nifty tricks you can +do with a little imagination. If you cannot get by with the rules I +have coded, and you think you have a rule that would be useful, please +email me with your request. However, do not ask for regular expression +support, because this is flatly impossible. +.PP +A useful hint is to work with as much as possible with the things you +can do rather than try to do things that this implementation cannot deal +with. Also remember that the aim of syntax highlighting is to make +programming less prone to error, not to make code look pretty. +.PP +The syntax highlighting can be toggled using Ctrl\-s shortcut. +.SH COLORS +The default colors may be changed by appending to the +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +environment variable. Foreground and background colors pairs may be +specified for example with: +.PP +.nf +MC_COLOR_TABLE="$MC_COLOR_TABLE:\\ +editnormal=lightgray,black:\\ +editbold=yellow,black:\\ +editmarked=black,cyan" +.fi +.SH OPTIONS +Most options can be set from Options dialog box. See the +.B Options +menu. The following options are defined in +.B ~/.config/mc/ini +and have obvious counterparts in the dialog box. You can modify them to +change the editor behavior, by editing the file. Unless specified, a 1 +sets the option to on, and a 0 sets it to off, as usual. +.TP +.I use_internal_edit +This option is ignored when invoking +.BR mcedit . +.TP +.I editor_tab_spacing +Interpret the tab character as being of this length. +Default is 8. You should avoid using +other than 8 since most other editors and text viewers +assume a tab spacing of 8. Use +.B editor_fake_half_tabs +to simulate a smaller tab spacing. +.TP +.I editor_fill_tabs_with_spaces +Never insert a tab character. Rather insert spaces (ascii 32) to fill to the +desired tab size. +.TP +.I editor_return_does_auto_indent +Pressing return will tab across to match the indentation +of the first line above that has text on it. +.TP +.I editor_backspace_through_tabs +Make a single backspace delete all the space to the left +margin if there is no text between the cursor and the left +margin. +.TP +.I editor_fake_half_tabs +This will emulate a half tab for those who want to program +with a tab spacing of 4, but do not want the tab size changed +from 8 (so that the code will be formatted the same when displayed +by other programs). When editing between text and the left +margin, moving and tabbing will be as though a tab space were +4, while actually using spaces and normal tabs for an optimal fill. +When editing anywhere else, a normal tab is inserted. +.TP +.I editor_option_save_mode +Possible values 0, 1 and 2. The save mode (see the options menu also) +allows you to change the method of saving a file. Quick save (0) saves +the file immediately, truncating the disk file to zero length (i.e. +erasing it) and then writing the editor contents to the file. This +method is fast, but dangerous, since a system error during a file save +will leave the file only partially written, possibly rendering the data +irretrievable. When saving, the safe save (1) option enables creation +of a temporary file into which the file contents are first written. In +the event of a problem, the original file is untouched. When the +temporary file is successfully written, it is renamed to the name of the +original file, thus replacing it. The safest method is create backups +(2): a backup file is created before any changes are made. You +can specify your own backup file extension in the dialog. Note that +saving twice will replace your backup as well as your original file. +.TP +.I editor_word_wrap_line_length +Line length to wrap at. Default is 72. +.TP +.I editor_backup_extension +Symbol to add to name of backup files. Default is "~". +.TP +.I editor_line_state +Show state line of editor. Currently it shows current line number (in the future +it might show things like folding, breakpoints, etc.). M\-n toggles this option. +.TP +.I editor_visible_spaces +Toggle "show visible trailing spaces". If editor_visible_spaces=1, they are shown +as '.' +.TP +.I editor_visible_tabs +Toggle "show visible tabs". If editor_visible_tabs=1, tabs are shown as '<\-\-\-\->' +.TP +.I editor_persistent_selections +Do not remove block selection after cursor movement. +.TP +.I editor_drop_selection_on_copy +Reset selection after copy to clipboard. +.TP +.I editor_cursor_beyond_eol +Allow moving cursor beyond the end of line. +.TP +.I editor_cursor_after_inserted_block +Allow moving cursor after inserted block. +.TP +.I editor_syntax_highlighting +enable syntax highlighting. +.TP +.I editor_edit_confirm_save +Show confirmation dialog on save. +.TP +.I editor_option_typewriter_wrap +to be described +.TP +.I editor_option_auto_para_formatting +to be described +.TP +.I editor_option_save_position +Save file position on exit. +.TP +.I source_codepage +Symbol representation of codepage name for file (i.e. CP1251, ~ \- default). +.TP +.I editor_group_undo +Combine UNDO actions for several of the same type of action (inserting/overwriting, +deleting, navigating, typing) +.TP +.I editor_wordcompletion_collect_entire_file +Search autocomplete candidates in entire file (1) or just from +beginning of file to cursor position (0). +.TP +.I editor_wordcompletion_collect_all_files +Search autocomplete candidates from all loaded files (1, default), not only from +the currently edited one (0). +.TP +.I spell_language +Spelling language (en, en\-variant_0, ru, etc) installed with aspell +package (a full list can be obtained using 'aspell' utility). +Use +.B spell_language = NONE +to disable aspell support. Default value is 'en'. Option must be located +in the [Misc] section. +.TP +.I editor_stop_format_chars +Set of characters to stop paragraph formatting. If one of those characters +is found in the beginning of line, that line and all following lines of paragraph +will be untouched. Default value is +"\fB-\fR\fB+\fR\fB*\fR\fB\\\fR\fB,\fR\fB.\fR\fB;\fR\fB:\fR\fB&\fR\fB>\fR". +.TP +.I editor_state_full_filename +Show full path name in the status line. If disabled (default), only base name of the +file is shown. +.SH MISCELLANEOUS +The editor also displays non\-us characters (160+). When editing +binary files, you should set +.B display bits +to 7 bits in Midnight Commander's options menu to keep the spacing +clean. +.SH FILES +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +The help file for the program. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +The default system\-wide setup for GNU Midnight Commander, used only if +the user's own ~/.config/mc/ini file is missing. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Global settings for Midnight Commander. Settings in this file +affect all users, whether they have ~/.config/mc/ini or not. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/syntax/* +.IP +The default system\-wide syntax files for mcedit, used only if +the corresponding user's own file in +.B ~/.local/share/mc/syntax/ +is missing. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +User's own setup. If this file is present then the setup is loaded +from here instead of the system\-wide setup file. +.PP +.I ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/ +.IP +User's own directory where block commands are processed and saved and +user's own syntax files are located. +.SH LICENSE +This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public +License as published by the Free Software Foundation. See the built\-in +help of Midnight Commander for details on the License and the lack +of warranty. +.SH AVAILABILITY +The latest version of this program can be found at +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.SH SEE ALSO +cooledit(1), mc(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), scanf(3). +.SH AUTHORS +Paul Sheer (psheer@obsidian.co.za) is the original author of +Midnight Commander's internal editor. +.SH BUGS +Bugs should be reported to https://www.midnight\-commander.org/. diff --git a/doc/man/mcview.1.in b/doc/man/mcview.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89dc7fa --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/mcview.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +.TH MCVIEW 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.SH NAME +mcview \- Internal file viewer of GNU Midnight Commander. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mcview +[\-bcCdfhstVx?] file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.LP +mcview is a link to +.BR mc , +the main GNU Midnight Commander executable. Executing GNU Midnight +Commander under this name requests staring the internal viewer and +opening the +.I file +specified on the command line. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.I "\-b" +Force black and white display. +.TP +.I "\-c" +Force color mode on terminals where +.B mcview +defaults to black and white. +.TP +.I "\-C <keyword>=<fgcolor>,<bgcolor>,<attributes>:<keyword>= ..." +Specify a different color set. See the +.B Colors +section in mc(1) for more information. +.TP +.I "\-d" +Disable mouse support. +.TP +.I "\-f" +Display the compiled\-in search paths for Midnight Commander files. +.TP +.I "\-t" +Used only if the code was compiled with S\-Lang and terminfo: it makes +Midnight Commander use the value of the +.B TERMCAP +variable for the terminal information instead of the information on +the system wide terminal database +.TP +.I "\-V" +Displays the version of the program. +.TP +.I "\-x" +Forces xterm mode. Used when running on xterm\-capable terminals (two +screen modes, and able to send mouse escape sequences). +.PP +.SH COLORS +The default colors may be changed by appending to the +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +environment variable. Foreground and background colors pairs may be +specified for example with: +.PP +.nf +MC_COLOR_TABLE="$MC_COLOR_TABLE:\\ +normal=lightgray,black:\\ +selected=black,green" +.fi +.PP +.SH FILES +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +The help file for the program. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +The default system\-wide setup for GNU Midnight Commander, used only if +the user's own ~/.config/mc/ini file is missing. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Global settings for Midnight Commander. Settings in this file +affect all users, whether they have ~/.config/mc/ini or not. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +User's own setup. If this file is present, the setup is loaded from +here instead of the system\-wide startup file. +.PP +.SH LICENSE +This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public +License as published by the Free Software Foundation. See the built\-in +help of Midnight Commander for details on the License and the lack +of warranty. +.SH AVAILABILITY +The latest version of this program can be found at +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.SH SEE ALSO +mc(1), mcedit(1) +.PP +.SH BUGS +Bugs should be reported to https://www.midnight\-commander.org/. diff --git a/doc/man/pl/Makefile.am b/doc/man/pl/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8aa93d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/pl/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +LANG=pl +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in + +man_MANS = mc.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +DATE_LANG=pl_PL.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%B %Y + +include ../date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/pl/Makefile.in b/doc/man/pl/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6c2b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/pl/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man/pl +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +LANG = pl +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in +man_MANS = mc.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +DATE_LANG = pl_PL.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %B %Y +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/pl/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/pl/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man \ + uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/pl/mc.1.in b/doc/man/pl/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..344c4b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/pl/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,2933 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\"Przetłumaczone przez by Macieja Wojciechowskiego wojciech@staszic.waw.pl +.TH MC 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH NAZWA +mc \- wizualny interpetator poleceń dla systemów Unixopodobnych +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH UŻYTKOWANIE +.B mc +[\-abcCdfPstuUVx] [\-l log] [kat1 [kat2]] [\-v plik] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH OPIS +Midnight Commander jest przeszukiwarką katalogów/menedżerem plików dla systemów +Unixopodobnych +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.SH OPCJE +.TP +.I \-a +Wyłącza używanie symboli graficznych przy rysowaniu ramek. +.TP +.I \-b +Wymusza wyświetlanie czarno\-białe. +.TP +.I \-c +Wymusza wyświetlanie w kolorze, zobacz sekcję +.B Kolory +żeby zasięgnąć szerszej informacji. +.TP +.I \-C arg +Używane do wybierania innego koloru, który ma być obecny w linii poleceń. Format +argumentu +.I arg +jest opisany w sekcji +.BR Kolory . +.TP +.I \-d +Wyłącza używanie myszy. +.TP +.I \-f +Wyświetla wkompilowane ścieżki, w których Mindnight Commander szuka swoich +plików. +.TP +.I \-k +Resetuje "miękkie" klawisze do ich standardowych funkcji z termcap/terminfo. +Użyteczne tylko przy terminalach HP, kiedy klawisze funkcyjne nie działają. +.TP +.I \-l plik +Zachowuje logi z serwerów ftp do pliku +.IR plik . +.TP +.I \-P +Przy zakończeniu programu, Midnight Commander wydrukuje na ekranie katalog, +w którym pracowaliśmy na końcu; to w połaczeniu z funkcją napisaną poniżej +pozwoli ci na przeglądanie swoich katalogów i automatyczne przejście do +tego, +w którym byłeś ostatnio (dziękuję Torbenowi Fjerdingstadowi i Sergeyowi za wkład +w tę funkcję oraz za kod źródłowy, który wprowadzili w życie). +.nf +użytkownicy basha i zsh: + +mc () +{ + MC=$HOME/tmp/mc$$\-"$RANDOM" + %bindir%/mc \-P "$@" > "$MC" + cd "`cat $MC`" + rm "$MC" + unset MC; +} + +użytkownicy tcsh: +alias mc 'setenv MC `%bindir%/mc \-P \!*`; cd $MC; unsetenv MC' +.fi +Wiem, że ta funkcja mogłaby być krótsza dla basha i zsh, ale małe cudzysłowy +nie zaakceptowały by zawieszenia programu kombinacją +.BR C\-z . +.TP +.I \-s +Włącza tryb powolnego terminala, w którym program nie będzie rysował zbyt +obciążających znaków graficznych oraz wyłączy opcję weryfikacji. +.TP +.I \-t +Używane tylko jeśli kod był skompilowany przy użyciu S\-Langa i terminfo: +powoduje, że Midnight Commander będzie używać zmiennej środowiskowej +.B TERMCAP +do pokazywania informacji terminala, zamiast informacji w systemowej bazie +typów terminali. +.TP +.I \-u +Wyłącza używanie równoległej powłoki (ma sens tylko jeśli +Midnight Commander był kompilowany z obsługą równoległych powłok). +.TP +.I \-U +Włącza użycie jednoczesnego inerpretatora poleceń (ma sens tylko jeśli Midnight +Commander był zbudowany z ustawieniem powłoki w tle jako opcji dodatkowej). +.TP +.I \-v plik +Włącza wbudowany podgląd w celu obejrzenia wybranego pliku +.IR plik . +.TP +.I \-V +Wyświetla wersję programu. +.TP +.I \-x +Wymusza włączenie trybu xterm. Używane kiedy działa się na terminalach wyposażonych +w opcje xterm (dwa tryby ekranu i możliwość wysyłania myszą sygnałów wyjścia). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +Do not use X11 to get the state of modifiers Alt, Ctrl, Shift +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Force a "normal tracking" mouse mode. Used when running on +xterm\-capable terminals (tmux/screen). +.PP +Jeśli wybrano, pierwszy katalog używany jest do wyświetlenia w pierwszym panelu. +Drugi wyświetlany jest w drugim panelu. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH Opis +Ekran Midnight Commandera podzielony jest na cztery części. Prawie cały obszar +ekranu zajmują dwa panele. Standardowo przedostatnia od dołu linijka ekranu, +przeznaczona jest do wpisywania poleceń, a ostatnia pokazuje klawisze funkcyjne. +Najwyższy wiersz jest wierszem menu. Może on być niewidoczny, ale pojawia się zawsze +po kliknięciu w najwyższą linię ekranu, albo po wciśnięciu klawisza F9. +.PP +Midnight Commander pozwala na oglądanie dwóch paneli w tym samym czasie. +Jeden z nich jest panelem aktywnym (podświetlona linia wyboru znajduje się właśnie +w nim). Niemal wszystkie operacje wykonuje się na panelu aktywnym. +Niektóre operacje, jak +np. kopiowanie, zmiana nazwy używają jako domyślnego miejsca docelowego +katalogu otwartego w panelu nieaktywnym +(nie martw się, zawsze zostaniesz poproszony o +potwierdzenie takiej operacji). W celu zasięgnięcia szerszych informacji zajrzyj +do działów +.BR "Panele katalogów" , " Lewe i prawe menu " oraz " Menu plików" . +.PP +Możesz wywoływać dowolne komendy systemowe po prostu wpisując je. Wszystko co +piszesz pojawia się w linii poleceń i po naciśnięciu klawisza Enter zostanie +wykonane przez Midnight Commandera. Przeczytaj sekcję +.BR "Linia powłoki i Linia wejściowa klawiszy" , +żeby nauczyć się więcej na ten temat. +.PP +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Obsługa myszy" +Midnight Commander obsługuje mysz. Moduł ten jest uruchamiany wtedy kiedy +korzystasz z terminala +.BR xterm (1) +(działa nawet wtedy, kiedy łączysz się przez telnet albo rlogin z innym komputerem +z terminala xterm) lub jeśli korzystasz z linuksa na konsoli z zainstalowanym +serwerem +.BR gpm (1). +.PP +Kiedy klikniesz lewym przyciskiem na panel z katalogami, plik zostanie +wybrany jako aktywny; jeśli klikniesz prawym przyciskiem zostanie on +zaznaczony [lub odznaczony \- w zależności od jego aktualnego stanu \- +działanie podobne do klawisza +.B Insert +\- przyp. tłumacza]. +.PP +Podwójne kliknięcie w plik spowoduje wykonanie pliku, jeśli jest on wykonywalny, +a jeśli rozszerzenie pliku jest rozpoznawane przez Midnight Commander'a i dostępny +jest odpowiedni program, jest on uruchamiany. +.PP +Możliwe jest również wykonywanie komend przypisanych klawiszom funkcyjnym +przez kliknięcie w nie. +.PP +Jeśli kliknięcie odbędzie się w rejonie górnej lini panelu z katalogami, zostanie +on przewinięty jedną stronę wstecz. Podobnie kliknięcie na dolną ramkę przewija +tekst jedną stronę do przodu. Ta opcja klikania w ramki działa również przy +przeglądaniu pomocy i przy drzewie katalogów. +.PP +Standardowo czas autopowtórzenia przy klikaniu myszą wynosi 400 milisekund. +Tę wartość można zmienić edytując plik +\&~/.config/mc/ini +i zmieniając parametr +.IR mouse_repeat_rate . +.PP +Jeśli używasz Midnight Commandera z obsługą myszy, możesz "przeszczepiać" +kawałki tekstów i używać standardowych zastosowań myszki (kopiowanie i +wklejanie) za pomocą klawisza Shift. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Klawisze" +Niektóre komendy Midnight Commandera wywołuje się kombinacją klawiszy +.I Control +(czasem opisywanego jako CTRL lub CTL) lub +.I Meta +(opisywanego ALT lub nawet Compose). W tym manualu (pliku pomocy) będziemy +używać następujących kombinacji: +C\-<klawisz> \- znaczy: trzymając klawisz Control naciśnij +<klawisz>. Więc C\-f będzie oznaczać: trzymając Control, naciśnij f. +.PP +M\-<klawisz> \- znaczy, że trzymając klawisz Meta lub alt naciskamy <klawisz>. +Jeśli na twojej klawiaturze nie ma ani klawisza Alt ani Meta, naciśnij ESC, puść +go i wtedy naciśnij <klawisz> [skutek ten sam, acz jednak użycie trochę +mniej przyjemne i bardziej skomlikowane \- przyp. tłumacza]. +.PP +Wszystkie linie wprowadzające Midnight Commandera używają w przybliżeniu tych +samych przypisań klawiszy co wersja GNU edytora Emacs. +.PP +Jest wiele sekcji mówiących o klawiszach. Ta następująca jest najważniejsza. +.PP +Sekcja +.\"LINK2" +.I Menu plików +.\"File Menu" +opisuje skróty klawiszowe do komend pojawiających się w menu plików. Ta sekcja +zawiera funkcję klawiszy. Większość z tych komend wywołuje jakąś akcję przede +wszystkim na jednym lub kilku wybranych plikach. +.PP +Sekcja +.\"LINK2" +.I Panele katalogowe +.\"Directory Panels" +opisuje klawisze, które zaznaczają plik lub pliki jako docelowe do dalszych +działań (akcją jest najczęściej jedna z tych przedstawionych w menu plików). +.PP +Sekcja +.I Komendy linii poleceń +wypisuje listę klawiszy, które są używane do wprowadzania lub edytowania +tekstów w wierszu poleceń. Większość z nich kopiuje nazwy, i inne tego typu, +z panelu katalogów do linii poleceń (żeby uniknąć ich przepisywania), lub +pozwala zwiedzić historię komend linii poleceń. +.PP +.I Klawisze linii wejściowych +są używane do edytowania linii na wejściu (przy wpisywaniu). Oznacza, +to że stosuje się je zarówno +do linii poleceń jak do okien dialogowych. +.PP +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH "Klawisze różne" +Jest tu kilka klawiszy, które nie kwalifikują się do żadnej z wymienionych +powyżej grup: +.PP +.BR Enter . +Jeśli jest wpisany jakiś tekst w linii poleceń (na samym dole, pod panelami), +to wpisana komenda jest wykonywana. Jeśli nic nie jest wpisane, i linia wyboru +jest na jakimś katalogu, Midnight Commander wykonuje komendę +.BR chdir (2) +(zmiana katalogu) do wybranego katalogu i odświeża zawartość panelu; jeśli +linia wyboru jest na pliku wykonywalnym jest on wykonywany. I wreszcie jeśli +rozszerzenie pliku zgadza się z obługiwanym przez programy zewnętrzne, które +są obsługiwane prze Midnight Commandera, są one wywoływane z owym programem. +.PP +.BR C\-l . +Od nowa rysuje wszystkie informacje okna Midnight Commandera. +.PP +.BR "C\-x c" . +Uruchamia komendę Chmod dla aktualnego pliku lub zaznaczonych plików. +.PP +.BR "C\-x o" . +Uruchamia komendę Chown dla aktualnego pliku lub zaznaczonych plików. +.PP +.BR "C\-x l" . +Uruchamia komendę dowiązywania. +.PP +.BR "C\-x s" . +Uruchamia komendę miękkiego dowiązywania. +.PP +.BR "C\-x i" . +Zmienia aktywny panel. +.PP +.BR "C\-x q" . +Przełacza nieaktywny panel w tryb "quick view". +.PP +.BR "C\-x !" . +Wykonuje komendę z zewnętrznego panelu. +.PP +.BR "C\-x h" . +Uruchamia komendę dodawania katalogów do hotlisty. +.PP +.BR M\-! . +Uruchamia komendę filtrowanego podglądu, opisanego w sekcji +.IR Podgląd . +.PP +.BR M\-? . +Uruchamia komendę szukania pliku. +.PP +.BR M\-c . +Włącza okno dialogowe quick cd (szybkiej zmiany katalogów) +.PP +.BR C\-o . +Jeśli program jest uruchamiany na konsoli typu Linux lub FreeBSD lub też +na konsoli xterm, pokaże wyjście ostatnio wykonywanego programu. Jeśli +uruchomiono Midnight Commandera na konsoli type Linux, MC używa +zewnętrznego programu (cons.saver) w celu zachowywyania i odzyskiwania +informacji na ekranie komputera. +.PP +Jeśli użycie trybu powłoki w tle jest wkompilowane, możesz nacisnąć +C\-o w dowolnej chwili i zostataniesz przeniesiony z powrotem bezpośrednio +do głównego okna Midnight Commandera, żeby powrócić do wykonywania aplikacji +po prostu naciśnij znów C\-o. Jeśli masz zawieszoną aplikację właśnie przez +użycie tego triku, nie będziesz mógł "odpalać" innych programów spod Midnight +Commandera dopóki nie zamkniesz zawieszonego programu. +.PP +Aby dowiedzieć się czegoś na temat polskiech liter w Midnight Commanderze +przeczytaj sekcję +.IR "Polskie litery" . +.PP +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Panel Katalogów" +Sekcja opisuje klawisze, które operują na panelu katalogów. Jeśli chcesz +wiedzieć jak zmienić panele zobacz sekcję +.IR "Lewe i prawe menu" . +.PP +.BR Tab ", " C\-i . +Zmienia aktywny panel. Stary panel staje się w tym momencie aktywnym panelem, +a aktywny staje się starym. Linia wyboru zmienia swoje położenia do aktywnego +panelu. +.PP +.BR Insert ", " C\-t . +DEPRECATED! Do zaznaczania plików możesz używać klawisza Insert lub C\-t. Żeby odznaczyć plik +po prostu zaznacz jakiś już zaznaczony. +.TP +.B Insert +to tag files you may use the Insert key (the kich1 terminfo sequence). +To untag files, just retag a tagged file. +.TP +.B M\-e +to change charset of panel you may use M\-e (Alt\-e). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding you may select "directory up" (..) in active panel. +To cancel the charsets in all directories, select "No translation " in +the dialog of encodings. +.PP +.BR M\-g ", " M\-r ", " M\-j . +Używane do wybierania najwyższego, środkowego i najniższego pliku w panelu. +.PP +.BR M\-t . +Przełącza tryb wyświetlania do następnego możliwego. Używając tej opcji +łatwo jest przejść szybko z długiego do krótkiego trybu wyświetlania +jak również do tego zdefiniowanego przez użytkownika. +.PP +.B C\-\\\\ +(control\-backslash). +Pokazuje hotlistę katalogów i zmienia katalog do wybranego przez użytkownika. +.PP +.B + +(plus). +Używane do zaznaczania grupy plików. Midnight Commander zapyta o +wyrażenie opisującą grupę. Jeśli opcja +.I Shell Patterns +jest włączona, typ wyrażeń jest bardzo podobny do tego w powłoce +(* dla zera i więcej znaków i ? dla jednego znaku). Jeśli zaś opcja +.I Shell Patterns +jest wyłączona, sposób zaznaczania plików jest zgodny z ustawieniami +(zobacz +.BR ed (1)). +.PP +.B \\\\ +(backslash). +Używaj znaków "\\" do odznaczania grupy plików. Jest to przeciwieństwo klawisza +plus. +.PP +.BR "strzałka do góry" ", " C\-p . +Przenosi linię wyboru do poprzedniej pozycji w panelu. +.PP +.BR "strzałka do dołu" ", " C\-n . +Przenosi linię wyboru do następnej pozycji w panelu. +.PP +.BR home ", " a1 ", " M\-< . +Przenosi linię wyboru do pierwszej pozycji w panelu. +.PP +.BR end ", " c1 ", " M\-> . +Przenosi linię wyboru do ostatniej pozycji w panelu. +.PP +.BR PageDown ", " C\-v . +Przenosi linię wyboru jedną stronę do dołu. +.PP +.BR PageUp ", " M\-v . +Przenosi linię wyboru jedną stronę do góry. +.PP +.BR M\-o . +Jeśli drugi panel jest zwykłym panelem wyświetlającym i w aktywnym panelu +stoisz na katalogu, drugi panel będzie +pokazywać zawartość +akutalnego katalogu (tak jak w Emacsie kombinacja C\-o). Jeśli nie stoisz +na katalogu zawartością drugiego katalogu stanie się katalog o jedno piętro +wyższy od aktualnego. +.PP +.BR C\-PageUp ", " C\-PageDown . +Działa tylko na konsoli typu Linux: wykonuje przejście do katalogu ".." lub +do aktualnie wybranego, w zależności od kombinacji. +.PP +.BR M\-y . +Przenosi do poprzedniego katalogu w historii, podobne do kliknięcia myszką. +\&'<'. +.PP +.BR M\-u . +Przechodzi do następnego katalogu w historii, podobne do kliknięcie myszką +w '>'. +.PP +.BR M\-S\-h ", " M\-H . +Wyświetla historię katalogów, podobne działanie do kliknięcia myszką 'v'. +.PP +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH " Quick search" +.PP +.BR C\-s ", " M\-s . +Uruchamia szukanie pliku w katalogu na podstawie jego nazwy. Kiedy szukanie +jest aktywne, każde naciśnięcie klawisza doda jeden znak do poszukiwania +zamiast wypisania go linii poleceń. Jeśli opcja +.I "Show mini\-status" +jest włączona, szukany ciąg znaków pojawia się w linii mini\-statusu. Kiedy +wpisujemy znak, linia wyboru przemieszcza się do następnego pliku zaczynającego +się od podanych liter. Klawisze +.I backspace +lub +.I del +mogą być używane do poprawiania błędów. Jeśli C\-s zostanie naciśnięte ponownie, +Midnight Commander rozpoczyna szukanie następnego pliku +zaczynającego się od podanych znaków. +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Linia Powłoki" +Ta sekcja opisuje klawisze, które są użyteczne do efektywniejszego +wpisywania podczas podawania komend powłoki. +.PP +.BR M\-Enter . +Kopiuje nazwę aktualniego wybranego pliku do linii poleceń. +.PP +.BR C\-Enter . +To samo co M\-Enter, działa tylko na konsoli typu Linux. +.PP +.BR M\-Tab . +Wykonuje dokończenie nazw plików, komend, zmiennych, użytkowników, nazw hostów +za Ciebie. +.PP +.BR "C\-x t" ", " "C\-x C\-t" . +Kopiuje nazwy zaznaczonych plików (lub jeśli nie ma zaznaczonych \- aktywnego) +w aktywnym (C\-x t) lub nieaktywnym panelu (C\-x C\-t) do linii poleceń. +.PP +.BR "C\-x p" ", " "C\-x C\-p" . +Pierwsza kombinacja kopiuje pełną ścieżkę z aktywnego, a druga z nieaktywnego +panelu. +.PP +.BR C\-q . +Komenda 'quote' (cytuj) może być używana do wpisywania do wiersza poleceń znaków, które +normalnie przechwytywane są przez Commandera (tak jak znak '+'). +.PP +.BR M\-p ", " M\-n . +Używaj tych klawiszy, żeby przeglądać historię komend. M\-p wyświetla poprzednią, +a M\-n następną komendę. +.PP +.BR M\-h . +Wyświetla historię aktualnej linii poleceń. +.PP +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " Podstawowe klawisze ruchu" +Przeglądarka pomocy, podgląd plików i drzewo katalogów używają podobnych +klawiszy do przemieszczania. Przez to akceptują dokładnie te same klawisze. +Każde z nich z resztą traktują je jako swoje własne. +.PP +Niektóre partie Midnight Commandera również używają tych klawiszy, +więc niniejsza sekcja może być użyteczna również dla tych partii. +.PP +.BR "strzałka w górę" ", " C\-p . +Przechodzi jedną linię wstecz. +.PP +.BR "strzałka w dół" ", " C\-n . +Przechodzi jedną linię naprzód. +.PP +.BR "Page Up" ", " M\-v . +Przechodzi jedną stronę wstecz. +.PP +.BR "Next Page" ", " "Page Down" ", " C\-v . +Przechodzi jedną stronę naprzód. +.PP +.BR Home ", " A1 . +Przechodzi do początku. +.PP +.BR End ", " C1 . +Przechodzi na koniec. +.PP +Przeglądarka pomocy i podgląd plików akceptują następujące klawisze +(poza tymi opisanymi powyżej). +.PP +.BR b ", " C\-b ", " C\-h ", " Backspace ", " Delete . +Przechodzi jedną stronę wstecz. +.PP +.BR "klawisz spacji" . +Przechodzi jedną stronę naprzód. +.PP +.BR u ", " d . +Przechodzi pół strony naprzód lub wstecz. +.PP +.BR g ", " G . +Przechodzi do początku lub do końca. +.PP +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Linia wejściowa klawiszy" +Linie wejściowe (te używane w linii komend i w oknach dialogowych), akceptują +następujące klawisze: +.PP +.BR C\-a . +umieszcza kursor na początku linii. +.PP +.BR C\-e . +umieszcza kursor na końcu linii. +.PP +.BR C\-b ", " move\-left . +przenosi kursor o jedną pozycję w lewo. +.PP +.BR C\-f ", " move\-right . +przenosi kursor o jedną pozycję w prawo. +.PP +.BR M\-f . +przesuwa kursor o jedno słowo naprzód. +.PP +.BR M\-b . +przesuwa kursor o jedno słowo wstecz. +.PP +.BR C\-h ", " backspace . +kasuje poprzedni znak. +.PP +.BR C\-d ", " Delete . +kasuje znak w miejscu kursora (nad nim). +.PP +.BR C\-@ . +wstawia zaznaczenie do kasowanie (patrz następne pozycje). +.PP +.BR C\-w . +kopiuje tekst spomiędzy kursora i zaznaczenia do bufora i usuwa go z linii +poleceń. +.PP +.BR M\-w . +to samo co C\-w tylko, że nie usuwa tekstu z linii. +.PP +.BR C\-y . +wstawia spowrotem zawartość wyciętego bufora. +.PP +.BR C\-k . +wycina tekst od kursora do końca linii. +.PP +.BR M\-p ", " M\-n . +Używaj tych klawiszy, żeby przeglądać historię komend. M\-p wyświetla poprzednią, +a M\-n następną. +.PP +.BR M\-C\-h ", " M\-Backspace . +kasuje jedno słowo wstecz (poprzednie). +.PP +.BR M\-Tab . +Wykonuje dokończenie nazw plików, komend, zmiennych, użytkowników, nazw hostów +za Ciebie. +.PP +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Linia menu" +Linia menu uaktywnia się kiedy wciskasz klawisz F9 lub kiedy klikasz myszką +na najwyższy wiersz ekranu. Linia menu ma pięć podmenu: "left", "file", command", +"options" i "right" (po polsku to jest "lewe", "plik", "komendy", "opcje", +"prawe"). +.PP +Lewe i prawe menu pozwalają ci na modyfikacje wyglądu lewego i prawego panelu +katalogowego. +.PP +Menu plik pozwala na wykonanie akcji na aktualnym lub zaznaczonych plikach. +.PP +Menu komend mieści w sobie możliwe do wykonania akcje, które są dużo bardziej +globalne i nie mają związku z aktualnym i zaznaczonymi plikami. +.PP +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH " Lewe i prawe menu" +Wygląd panelu katalogowego może zostać zmieniony poprzez menu +.B left +i +.BR right . +.PP +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Tryby wyświetlania (Listing modes)" +Tryby wyświetlania są używane do zmienia ustawień przy wyświetlaniu. +Dostępne są cztery różne tryby: +.BR Full , +.BR Brief , +.B Long +i +.BR User . +Tryb "Full" pokazuje nazwę, rozmiar i czas modyfikacji pliku. +.PP +Tryb "Brief" pokazuje tylko nazwę pliku i ma dwie kolumny (dzięki temu +może pokazywać nawet dwa razy więcej niż inne tryby). Tryb "Long" jest +podobny do wyniku polecenia +.BR "ls \-l" . +Zabiera on szerokość całego ekranu. +.PP +Jeśli wybierzesz tryb "user" (użytkownika), będziesz mógł wybrać własny +sposób wyświetlania. +.PP +Tryb użytkownika musi zaczynać się od określenia wielkości panelu. Może +to być "half" (pół) lub "full" (cały) i określa, czy ma być widoczny +jeden duży panel na cały ekran czy dwa mniejsze. +.PP +Po rozmiarze panelu możesz włączyć tryb dwóch kolumn panelu. Robi się +to dodając liczbę "2" do tekstu formatu. +.PP +Po tym wpisujesz już nazwy pól z podaniem opcjonalnej wielkości. +Wszystkie możliwe pola jakich możesz użyć to: +.TP +.B name +wyświetla nazwę pliku. +.TP +.B size +wyświetla wielkość pliku. +.TP +.B bsize +jest alternatywą dla format +.BR size . +Wyświetla rozmiar plików, a dla katalogów po prostu wyświetla tekst +"SUB\-DIR" lub "UP\-\-DIR". +.TP +.B type +wyświetla jednoznakowy opis typu pliku. Ten znak jest taki sam co ten +wyświetlany prze komendę ls z flagą \-F. Wyświetlana jest gwiazdka +dla plików wykonywalnych, +ukośnik dla katalogów, małpa (@) dla dowiązań, znak równości dla gniazd, +minus dla urządzeń niestniejących, znak plus dla urządzeń istniejących, +pionową kreskę (|) dla kolejek FIFO, tyldę dla dowiązań +symbolicznych, i wykrzyknik dla dowiązań wskazujących na nieistniejący plik. +.TP +.B mark +Gwiazdka jeśli plik jest zaznaczony, spacja jeśli nie jest. +.TP +.B mtime +czas ostatniej modyfikacji pliku. +.TP +.B atime +czas ostatniego dostępu do pliku. +.TP +.B ctime +czas utworzenia pliku. +.TP +.B perm +tekst reprezentujący aktualne uprawnienia do pliku. +.TP +.B mode +wartość (cyfrowa) przedstawiająca prawa do pliku. +.TP +.B nlink +liczba dowiązań do pliku. +.B ngid +GID (numeryczny). +.TP +.B nuid +UID (numeryczny). +.TP +.B owner +właściciel pliku. +.TP +.B group +grupa pliku. +.TP +.B inode +numer i\-węzła pliku. +.PP +Możesz również używać następujących znaków dla zmiany wyświetlania: +.TP +.B space +spacja w formacie wyświetlania. +.TP +.B | +Ten znak jest używany w celu dodania pionowej linii od formatu wyświetlania. +.PP +Żeby wymusić szerokość pola, po prostu dodaj ':' a potem ilość znaków jakie +chcesz żeby miało pole. Jeśli numer zaczyna się od '+', to szerokość nie może +być mniejsza od podanej, jeśli program zobaczy, że jest jeszcze trochę +miejsca na ekranie, rozszerzy to pole. +.PP +Na przykład tryb +.B Full +wyświetla w formacie: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +A format +.B Long +wyświetla w formacie: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +A to jest całkiem ładny tryb użytkownika: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +Panele mogą być również przestawione do następujących trybów: +.TP +.B Info +Tryb info wyświetla informację o aktualnie zaznaczonym pliku i (jeśli +to możliwe) o systemie plików. +.TP +.B Tree (drzewo) +Widok drzewa jest całkiem podobny do widoku +.\"LINK2" +Drzewa katalogów\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +Zobacz tę sekcję jeśli chcesz się dowiedzieć czegoś na ten temat. +.TP +.B Quick View +W tym trybie, panele zostaną przełączone w tryb zredukowanego podglądu +wyświetlającego zawartość aktualnego pliku. Jeśli zaznaczysz panel +(klawiszem tab lub myszką), będziesz miał dostęp do większości komend +podglądu. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH " Porządek sortowania (Sort order...)" +Istnieje osiem porządków sortowania. Przez: nazwę, rozszerzenie, +datę modyfikacje, datę odczytu, datę zmiany, rozmiar, +numeru i\-węzła i niesortowane. Porządek sortowanie możesz wybrać w oknie +dialogowym porządku sortowania. Możliwe jest również wybranie porządku +wstecznego (od tyłu). +.PP +Standardowo, katalogi są sortowane przed plikami, ale może to być zmienione +przez opcję +.BR "Mix all files (mieszaj wszystkie pliki)" . +.PP +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Filtry (Filter...)" +Komenda filtra pozwala ci na podanie rozszerzenia, które musi być spełnione, +żeby pliki były widoczne (na przykład +.BR "*.tar.gz" ). +Niezależnie od filtru katalalogi i dowiązania do katalogów są zawsze pokazywane. +.PP +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Odśwież (Reread)" +Komenda odśwież odświeża widok wszystkich plików w katalogów. Jest to użyteczne +jeśli inny proces stworzył lub usunął jakiś pliki. Jeśli użyłeś panelu +zewnętrznego, wszystkie informacje zostaną przywrócone do prawdziwego stanu. +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH "Menu plików (File menu)" +.PP +Midnight Commander używa klawiszy F1 \- F10 jako skrótów klawiszowych do komend +występujących w menu plików. Na terminalach bez funkcji klawiszowych (F1 \- F10) +można używać kombinacji klawisza Escape i numeru ( odpowiednio 1 dla F1, +2 dla F2 itd. ) +.PP +Menu plików ma następujące komendy (skróty klawiszowe umieszczone są +na dole ekranu): +.PP +.B Pomoc (F1) +.PP +Wywołuje wbudowaną przeglądarkę plików pomocy. Wewnątrz niej można używać +klawisza Tab żeby przejść do następnego dowiązania, Enter +żeby przejść do wybranego dowiązania. Klawisze Spacji i Backspace są używane +do poruszania się naprzód i wstecz na stronach pomocy. Naciśnij klawisz +F1 żeby uzyskać pełną listę dostępnych klawiszy w pomocy. +.PP +.B Menu (F2) +.PP +Wywołuje menu użytkownika. Menu użytkownika jest łatwym w użyciu narzędziem +służącym do obsługi zewnętrznych programów i dodatkowych opcji Midnight +Commandera. +.PP +.B Podgląd (F3, Shift\-F3) +.PP +Włącza podgląd aktualnie wybranego pliku. Standardowowo wywoływany jest +wbudowany podgląd plików, ale jeśli opcja "Use internal view" jest wyłączona, +wywoływany jest zewnętrzny program do poglądu, wskazywany przez zmienną +.BR PAGER . +Jeśli jednak zmienna +.B PAGER +nie została jeszcze zdefiniowana, wywoływana jest komenda "view". Jeśli użyjesz +kombinacji klawiszy +.BR Shift\-F3 , +pogląd zostanie wywołany bez jakiegokolwiek +formatownia pliku. +.PP +.B Filtrowany podgląd (M\-!) +.PP +Ta kombinacja klawiszy oczekuje na komendę i jej argument (argumentem standardowo +jest wybrany aktualnie plik), całe wyjście programu przekierowywane jest do pliku, +który zostaje automatycznie wyświetlony na ekranie w trybie podglądu. +.PP +.B Edycja (F4) +.PP +Aktualnie ta komenda wywołuje edytor +.BR vi (1) +lub edytor wybrany w zmiennej środowiskowej, lub wbudowany wewnętrzny edytor +plików jeśli opcja use_internal_edit jest włączona. +.PP +.B Kopiuj (F5) +.PP +Włącza okno dialogowe, w którym standardowo znajduje się ścieżka do +katalogu w +nieaktywnym panelu, po czym kopiuje aktualny plik (lub wybrane +jeśli wybrano jakiekolwiek) do katalogu, który wybraliśmy w oknie dialogowym. +Space for destination file may be preallocated relative to preallocate_space +configure option. +Podczas procesu kopiowania możesz go w każdej chwili przerwać wciskając C\-c lub +Esc. Żeby dowiedzieć się czegoś więcej na temat jokerów w ścieżce źródłowej +(którymi najczęściej będą * lub ^\\(.*\\)$) i innych możliwych określeń w +katalogu docelowym zobacz kategorię +.B "Maski kopiowania/przenoszenia" +.PP +Na niektórych systemach możliwe jest kopiowanie w tle, robi się to klikając +na przycisk backgorund (lub naciskając kombinację M\-b w oknie dialogowym). +Background Jobs jest używane do kontrolowania prac w tle. +.PP +.B Link (C\-x l) +.PP +Tworzy sztywne dowiązanie do aktualnego pliku. +.PP +.B SymLink (C\-x s) +.PP +Tworzy symboliczne dowiązanie do aktualnego pliku. Dla tych, którzy nie wiedzą +co to jest dowiązanie: tworzenie dowiązania do pliku jest tak jak kopiowanie +pliku, z tym tylko, +że zarówno plik źródłowy i docelowy reprezentują ten sam plik. Na przykład, +jeśli edytujesz jeden z tych plików, zmiany, które czynisz pojawiają się w obu +plikach. Niektórzy mówią na dowiązania aliasy lub skróty. +.PP +Twarde dowiązanie wydaje się być prawdziwym plikiem. Po stworzeniu go +nie ma możliwości +rozróżnienia, który z plików jest oryginalny, a który jest dowiązaniem. +Jest bardzo +ciężko zauważyć, że wskazują one na ten sam plik. +Używaj dowiązań twardych wtedy kiedy nie chcesz tego wiedzieć. +.PP +Dowiązanie symboliczne jest tylko odwołaniem do oryginalnego pliku. +Jeśli ten plik +zostanie wyrzucony, dowiązanie stanie się bezużyteczne. Jest całkiem łatwo +zauważyć, +że pliki odnoszą się w gruncie rzeczy do tego samego. Midnight Commander +pokazuje znak "@" przed nazwą pliku jeśli jest dowiązaniem +symbolicznym do innych +(poza katalogami, przed którymi pokazuje tyldę (~)). Oryginalny plik wskazywany +przez dowiązanie jest pokazywany w linii mini\-statusu, jeśli opcja +.I "Show mini\-status" +jest włączona. Używaj dowiązań symbolicznych, jeśli chcesz unikąć problemów z +rozpoznawaniem twardych dowiązań. +.PP +.B Zmiana nazwy/przeniesienie (F6) +.PP +Włącza okno dialogowe, gdzie standardowo wpisana jest nazwa katalogu w +nieaktywnym panelu, i przenosi aktualnie wybrany plik (lub zaznaczone jeśli +choć jeden jest zaznaczony) do katalogu wpisanego w oknie dialogowym. Podczas +procesu przenoszenia możesz użyć kombinacji klawiszy C\-c lub ESC, żeby przerwać +operację. Po więcej szczegółów zobacz operację +.B Kopiuj +opisaną powyżej. Większość rzeczy jest całkiem podobna. +.PP +Na niektórych systemach możliwe jest przenoszenie w tle, robi się to klikając +na przycisk background (lub naciskając kombinację M\-b w oknie dialogowym). +Background Jobs jest używane do kontrolowania prac w tle. +.PP +.B "Utwórz katalog (F7)" +.PP +Włącza menu dialogowe i zakłada katalog o podanej nazwie +.PP +.B Kasuj (F8) +.PP +Kasuje aktualnie wybrany lub zaznaczone pliki w aktywnym panelu. Podczas +procesu możesz nacisnąć C\-C lub Esc żeby przerwać operację. [skasowane pliki +nie będą jednak odzyskane \- przyp. tłumacza]. +.PP +.B Zaznacz grupę (+) +.PP +Używane do zaznaczania grupy plików. Midnight Commander będzie żądał tekstu +opisującego grupę plików. Jeśli opcja +.I Shell Patterns +jest włączona, tekst będzie traktowany jako globalny dla interpretatora (* +oznacza zero lub więcej znaków a ? oznacza jeden znak). Jeśli opcja +.I Shell Patterns +jest wyłączona, wtedy zaznaczanie plików jest robione z zastosowaniem norm +zewnętrznych (zobacz ed (1)). +.PP +.B Odznacz grupę (\\\\) +.PP +Używane do odznaczania grupy plików. Jest przeciwieństwem komendy +.IR "Zaznacz pliki" . +.PP +.B Wyjdź (F10, Shift\-F10) +.PP +Zamyka Midnight Commandera. Shift\-F10 jest używany jeśli używasz +"wrappera" powłoki. Shift\-F10 nie przeniesie cię do katalogu, w którym +byłeś ostatnio w Midnight Commanderze, zamiast tego przejdzie do katalogu, +z którego uruchomiłeś program. +.PP +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Szybka zmiana katalogów (Quick cd) M\-c" +Ta komenda jest bardzo użyteczna, jeśli masz już pełną linię poleceń, a +chcesz przejść do innego katalogu. Uruchamia ona małe okno dialogowe, +w którym podajesz to co po normalnej komendzie +.B cd +po czym naciskasz Enter. Wszystkie opcje są dokładnie takie same jak we +wbudowanej komendzie cd. +.PP +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Menu komend (Command Menu)" +Komenda drzewo katalogów (Directory tree) pokazuje drzewo katalogów. +.PP +Komenda "Find file" szuka pliku spełniającego podane warunki, natomiast komenda +"Swap panels" zamienia zawartości obu paneli. +.PP +Komenda "Panels on/off" pokazuje wyjście ostatniej komendy interpetatora +poleceń. Działa ona tylko na terminalach typu Linux lub FreeBSD. +.PP +Komenda porównywania katalogów (Compare directories) (C\-x d) porównuje +zawartości panelu katalogowego z drugim. Możesz potem użyc Kopiuj (F5) +żeby stworzyć dwa dokładnie identyczne panele. Metoda "quick" porównuje +tylko i wyłącznie rozmiary plików i ich daty. Metoda "thorough" porównuje +pliki bajt po bajcie. Ta metoda działa tylko wtedy kiedy komputer obsługuje +wywołanie mmap(2). Metoda "size\-only" zwraca uwagę tylko na rozmiar plików. +Nie ma dla niej żadnego znaczenia czy plik ma inną datę lub zawartość, liczy +się tylko rozmiar. +.PP +Komenda historii komend (Command history) pokazuje listę wpisanych komend. +Ta, którą wybierzesz, jest kopiowana do linii poleceń. Do historii komend +można mieć dostęp również przy użyciu kombinacji M\-p lub M\-n. +.PP +Komenda hotlisty katalogów (Directory hotlist) (C\-\\) pozwala na zmienianie +katalogów do tych najczęściej używanych dużo szybciej. +.PP +Komenda panelu zewnętrznego (External panelize) pozwala na wykonywania programów +zewnętrznych i ustawienia zawartości paneli na to co zwróciła wywołana +komenda. +.PP +Komenda edycji rozszerzeń plików (Edit Extension File) pozwala na własny wybór +programów, które mają być używane do wykonywania plików z podanymi +rozszerzeniami. Komenda edycji pliku menu (Edit Menu File) może być używana do +edytowania menu użytkownika (tego, które pojawia się po naciśnięciu kombinacji +F2). +.PP +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Drzewo katalogów (Directory Tree)" +Możesz wybierać katalogi z drzewa katalogów i Midnight Commander przejdzie do +wybranego przez Ciebie katalogu. +.PP +Są dwa sposoby wywoływania drzewa. Prawdziwa komenda drzewa katalogów jest +dostępna z menu komend. Inną metodą jest wybranie drzewa z menu "lewego" bądź +"prawego". +.PP +Żeby nie mieć zbyt dużych opóźnień Midnight Commander skanuje tylko małą +ilość katalogów (tę potrzebną w danej chwili). Jeśli jakiegoś katalogu nie +widać przejdź do jego katalogu nadrzędnego i naciśnij C\-r (lub F2). +.PP +Możesz używać następujących klawiszy: +.PP +Generalne klawisze ruchu są akceptowane. +.PP +.BR Enter . +W drzewie katalogów, wychodzi z trybu drzewa i przechodzi znów do trybu +zwykłego panelu. W podglądzie drzewa zmienia katalog w drugim panelu i zostaje +w trybie podglądu drzewa w panelu aktywnym. +.PP +.BR C\-r ", " F2 " (Rescan)." +Odświeża aktualny katalog. Używane jeśli drzewo nie jest już aktualne. Nie +pokazuje katalogów, które już istnieją lub pokazuje te, których już nie ma. +.PP +.BR F3 " (Forget)." +Usuwa aktualny katalog z drzewa katalogów. Używaj tego jeśli chcesz usunąć +"śmiecące" i niepotrzebne katalogi z wyświetlania. Żeby były one znów +widoczne wystarczy nacisnąć F2. +.PP +.BR F4 " (Static/Dynamic)." +Przełącza pomiędzy dynamicznym (standardowo) i statycznym trybem nawigacji. +.PP +W trybie statycznym możesz używać strzałek do dołu i do góry do wybierania +katalogu. Wszystkie zwiedzone katalogi są widoczne. +.PP +W trybie dynamicznym możesz używać strzałek w celu wybrania równorzędnego +katalogu, strzałki w lewo żeby dostać się do katalogu domowego, strzałki +w prawo w celu dostania się do katalogu podrzędnego. Widoczne jest tylko +najbardziej aktualne drzewo katalogów. Drzewo zmienia się więc dynamicznie +podczas twojego przemieszczania. +.PP +.B F5 +(Copy). +Kopiuje katalog. +.PP +.B F6 +(RenMov). +Przenosi katalog. +.PP +.B F7 +(Mkdir). +Tworzy nowy katalog poniżej aktualnego. +.PP +.B F8 +(Delete). +Kasuje katalog z systemu plików. +.PP +.BR C\-s ", " M\-s . +Szuka natępnego katalogu spełniającego podane warunki szukania. Jeśli taki +nie istnieje te klawisze spowodują przemieszczenie się o jedną linię w dół. +.PP +.BR C\-h ", " Backspace . +Kasuje ostatni znak w ciągu znaków do poszukiwania. +.PP +.BR "Jakikolwiek inny klawisz" . +Dodaje klawisz do ciągu znaków do szukania i przenosi do najbliższego +katalogu, którego nazwa zaczyna się od tych znaków. W podglądzie drzewa musisz +najpierw uaktywnić szukanie naciskając C\-s. Ciąg szukający jest pokazywany +w linii mini\-statusu. +.PP +Następujące klawisze są dostępne tylko w drzewie katalogów. Nie działają one +w poglądzie katalogów. +.PP +.B F1 +(Help). +Wywołuje podgląd pomocy i pokazuje tę sekcję. +.PP +.BR Esc ", " F10 . +Wychodzi z drzewa. Nie zmienia katalogów. +.PP +Mysz jest obsługiwana. Podwójne kliknięcie ma znaczenie identyczne do +klawisza Enter. Zobacz również sekcję +.IR "Obsługa myszy" . +.PP +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Znajdź plik (Find File)" +Komenda znajdź plik najpierw pyta się o startowy katalog do przeszukiwania +i o nazwę pliku, który ma być znaleziony. Wciskając przycisk "Tree" (drzewo) +możesz wybrać katalog startowy z drzewa katalogów. +.PP +Pole trzecie akceptuje wszystkie wyrażenia podobne do tych w egrep(1). +Oznacza to, że musisz rozpoczynać znaki o specjalnym znaczeniu kombinacją +"\\" np. szukając "strcmp (" będziesz musiał wpisać "strcmp \\(" (bez +cudzysłowów oczywiście). +.PP +Możesz zacząć przeszukiwanie naciskając przycisk Ok. Podczas szukania możesz +zatrzymać proces przy użyciu przycisku Stop i kontynuować po naciśnięciu +Startu. +.PP +Możesz przeglądać liste znalezionych plików za pomocą strzałek do dołu +i do góry. Komenda Chdir przejdzie do katalogu aktualnie wybranego. Przycisk +Again zapyta się o nowe parametry do szukania (rozpocznie proces od nowa). +Przycisk Quit kończy przeszukiwanie. Przycisk Panelize umieści znalezione +pliki w aktywnym panelu katalogowym tak, że będziesz mógł wykonywać na nich +standardowe czynności (podgląd, kopiowanie, przenoszenie, kasowanie itp.). +Po spanelizowaniu wystarczy naciśnąć C\-r żeby powrócić do normalnego trybu. +.PP +Możliwe jest posiadanie listy katalogów, których szukanie plików nie +powinno uwzględniać (na przykład możesz chcieć ominąć przeszukiwanie CDROMu +i innych podmontowanych systemów plików). +.PP +Katalogi do omijania powinny być umieszczone w zmiennej +.B ignore_dirs +w sekcji +.B FindFile +twojego pliku ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +Składowe katalogów powinny być oddzielone od siebie przez średniki, to jest +przykład: +.PP +.nf +[FindFile] +ignore_dirs=/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +Możesz woleć używać panelu zewnętrznego do wykonywania niektórych operacji. +Szukanie pliku jest dobre tylko dla prostych zapytań. Używając panelu +zewnętrznego możesz dokonywać tak skomplikowanych wyszukiwań jak tylko +pragniesz. +.PP +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " Panel zewnętrzny" +Panel zewnętrzny pozwala ci na wykonywanie zewnętrznych programów i +oglądanie ich wyjścia jako zawartości aktywnego panelu. +.PP +Na przykład, jeśli chcesz aby w aktywnym panelu wyświetlone zostały +wszystkie dowiązania w aktywnym katalogu, możesz użyć panelu zewnętrznego +i następującej komendy: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +Zanim komenda zakończy działanie, zawartość katalogów nie będzie już dłużej +zawartością aktualnego katalogu, ale wszystkie pliki będą symbolicznymi +dowiązaniami. +.PP +Jeśli chcesz wyświetlić wszystkie pliki, które ściągnąłeś ze swoich +serwerów ftp, możesz użyć tej komendy awk żeby wypisać nazwę pliku z +logów transferu: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +Możesz zapisać sobie często używane komendy pod jakąś nazwą, po to +żeby móc ich potem używać dużo łatwiej. Robisz to po prostu wpisując komendę +w linii wejściowej, a potem naciskająć przycisk Add. Potem wpisujesz nazwę, +pod jaką ta komenda ma być widoczna. Następnym razem po prostu wybierasz +tę komendę z listy i nie musisz już wpisywać jej ponownie. +.PP +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Hotlist" +Hotlista katalogów pokazuje nazwy katalogów wprowadzonych do hotlisty. +Midnight Commander zmieni miejsce do tego, które wskazuje nazwa katalogu. +Z hotlisty możesz wyrzucać już dodane pozycje par nazw/wskazań i dodawać nowe. +Dla dodawania możesz wykorzystać kombinację (C\-x h), która dodaje +ścieżkę +aktualnego katalogu do hotlisty. Użytkownik musi tylko podać pod jaką +nazwą ma być ten katalog widoczny. +.PP +Powoduje to przechodzenie do częściej przeglądanych katalogów znacznie szybciej. +Możesz używać ciągle wartości CDPATH opisanej w sekcji Wewnętrzne +przemieszczanie. +.PP +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Edycja rozszerzeń pliów (Edit Extension File)" +Ta komenda wywoła twój edytor na plik +.IR ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If this file does not exist and you are not root, it will be copied from +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If you are root, you can choose the file to edit: user's +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +or system\-wide +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +The format of this file is described in detail in it. +PP +.\"NODE " Background Jobs" +.SH " Prace w tle (Background jobs)" +Pozwalają ci one kontrolować status jakichkolwiek procesów wykonywanych +w tle +przez Midnight Commandera (tylko operacje kopiowania i przenoszenia, mogą +być wykonywane w tle). Z tego menu możesz zastopować, zresetować i "zabić" +proces w tle. +.PP +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Edycja menu użytkownika (Edit Menu File)" +Menu użytkownika jest bardzo użytecznym menu, które może być tworzone +w sposób dowolny, przez użytkownika. Kiedy tylko próbujesz coś zrobić +przy użyciu tego menu, ładowany jest plik .mc.menu z aktualnego katalogu, ale +tylko wtedy kiedy jest on w posiadaniu użytkownika lub roota i mamy do niego +prawa zapisu. Jeśli takiego nie ma próbuje się z plikiem ~/.config/mc/menu z tymi +samymi założeniami, jeśli jego też nie ma \- używa się standardowego pliku +systemowego, który znajduje się w %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu. +.PP +Format pliku z menu użytkownika jest bardzo prosty. Linie zaczynające się +od czegokolwiek innego niż spacja lub tabulacja, są traktowane jako +wtyczki do menu (aby móc używać ich potem jako gorących klawiszy, dobrze +jest aby pierwszy znak był literą). Wszystkie linie zaczynające od spacji +lub tabulacji, są komendami, które mają być wykonane jeśli wtyczka zostanie +wybrana. +.PP +Kiedy opcja zostaje wybrana, wszystkie komendy należące do tej opcji +kopiowane są do pliku w katalogu tymczasowym (najczęściej do /usr/tmp), a +potem plik jest wykonywany. Pozwala to użytkownikowi wkładać normalne +konstrukcje powłoki do konstrukcji kodu wykonywanego. Po więcej +informacji zobacz, używania makr. +.PP +To jest przykładowy plik mc.menu: +.PP +.nf +A Wyrzuć aktualny plik. + od \-c %f + +B Stwórz raport o błędzie i wyślij do roota. + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Błąd Midnight Commandera" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Przeczytaj pocztę. + emacs \-f rmail + +N Przeczytaj grupę dyskucyjną. + emacs \-f gnus + +J Skopiuj rekursywnie cały aktualny katalog. + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X Zdekompresuj skompresowany plik tar. + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Standardowe warunki +.PP +Każda opcja może być opatrzona w warunki. Warunek musi zaczynać się od +pierwszej kolumny i od znaku '='. Jeśli warunek jest prawdziwy, opcja +stanie się opcją domyślną. +.PP +.nf +Składnia warunku: = <warunek> + lub: = <warunek> | <warunek> ... + lub: = <warunek> & <warunek> ... + +Warunek jest jednym z następujących: + + f <wzorzec> aktualny plik zgodny z wzorcem? + F <wzorzec> plik w drugim panelu zgodny z wzorcem? + d <wzorzec> aktualny katalog spełniający wzorzec? + D <wzorzec> katalog w drugim panelu spełniający wzorzec? + t <typ> aktualny pliku typu typ? + T <typ> plik w drugim panelu typu typ? + ! <warunek> zaprzeczenie warunku +.fi +.PP +Wzorzec jest normalnym wzorcem powłoki lub wyrażeniem, +podobnym do wzorca powłoki. Możesz zmienić globalne ustawienia +wzorców powłoki pisząc "shell_patterns=x" w pierwszej linii menu +użytkownika (x jest równe 0 lub 1). +.PP +.nf +Typ jest jednym lub więcej z podanych znaków: + + n nie katalog + r zwykły plik + d katalog + l dowiązanie + c specjalny znak + b specjalny blok + f fifo + s gniazdo + x wykonywalny + t zaznaczony +.fi +.PP +Na przykład 'rlf' oznacza zwykły plik, dowiązanie lub fifo. Typ 't' jest +trochę odmienny ponieważ dotyczy panelu a nie pliku. Warunek '=t t' jest +prawdziwy jeśli są jakieś zaznaczone pliki w aktywnym panelu, a fałszywy jeśli +nie ma. +.PP +Jeśli warunek rozpoczyna się od '=?' zamiast '=' droga przechodzenia +przez warunki będzie pokazywana +za każdym razem kiedy warunek będzie obliczany [przydatne do wyszukiwania błędów +\- przyp. tłumacza]. +.PP +Warunki są obliczane od lewej do prawej. Oznacza to, że +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +jest liczone tak samo jak +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +To jest prosty przykład zastosowania tych warunków: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L Listuje zawartość skompresowanego archiwum tar + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Warunki dodania +.PP +Jeśli warunek rozpoczyna się od znaku '+' (lub '+?') zamiast od '=' (lub '=?') +jest to warunek dodania. Jeśli warunek jest prawdziwy, opcja menu będzie +dołączona do menu. Jeśli nie jest prawdziwy, nie będzie ona w nim zawarty. +.PP +Możesz łączyć ze sobą standardowe i dodane warunki zaczynając warunek od +kombinacji +\&'+=' lub '=+' (lub '+=?' lub '=+?' jeśli chcesz zobaczyć trasę błędów). +Jeśli chcesz użyć różnych warunków, dodanego i standardowego, +możesz poprzedzić wpis menu dwoma wierszami warunkowymi. Jednym zaczynającym +się od znaku '+', a drugim od '='. +.PP +Wszelkie komentarze rozpoczynają się od znaku '#'. +.PP +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH " Menu opcji (Options Menu)" +Midnight Commander ma niektóre opcje, które mogą być włączane lyb wyłączane +w różnych oknach dialogowych z tego menu. Opcja jest włączona jeśli widnieje +przed nią gwiazdka lyb "x". +.PP +Komenda +.I Configuration +włącza okno dialogowe, z którego możesz zmienić +większość ustawień Midnight Commandera. +.PP +Menu +.I Layout +pozwala na zmianę wielu ustawień, które mają znaczący wpływ +na to jak MC będzie wyglądał na ekranie. +.PP +Menu +.I Confirmation +włącza okno dialogowe, w którym możesz ustawić przy wykonaniu +których operacji chcesz być pytany o potwierdzenie. +.PP +Menu +.I Display bits +pozwala określić jakiego typu znaki twój terminal jest +w stanie wyświetlić. +.PP +Menu +.I Learn Keys +pokazuje okno dialogowe, w którym możesz poznać +które klawisze nie działają i w razie problemów naprawić to. +.PP +Menu +.I Virtual FS +pokazuje okno, w którym możesz zmienić niektóre ustawienia +dotyczące systemów VFS. +.PP +Komenda +.I Save Setup +zachowuje wszystkie ustawienia z menu Lewego, Prawego i Opcji. +.PP +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Konfiguracja" +Opcje w tym oknie są podzielone na trzy grupy: +opcje panelu (Panel Options), zatrzymaj po uruchomieniu (Pause after run) i +inne opcje (Other Options). +.PP +.B Opcje panelu +.PP +.I Show Backup Files. +Standardowo Midnight Commander nie wyświetla plików kończących się znakiem +\&'~' (tak jak komenda ls \-B w wersji GNU). +.PP +.I Show Hidden Files. +Standardowo Midnight Commander wyświetla wszystkie pliki zaczynające się +od kropki (tak jak ls \-a). +.PP +.I Mark moves down. +Standardowo kiedy zaznaczasz plik (zarówno przy klawisze Insert) +linia wyboru przenosi się o jedno w dół. +.PP +.I Drop down menus. +Kiedy ta opcja jest włączona, kiedy naciskasz klawisz +.B F9 +menu będzie aktywowane, w przeciwnym wypadku zostaniesz tylko przeniosiony +do tytułów w tym menu i będziesz musiał wybrać opcję ręcznie przy użyciu +strzałek bądź też przy użyciu pierwszej litery z nazwy konkretnego menu. +.PP +.I Mix all files. +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, wszystkie pliki i katalogi są pomieszane razem. +Jeśli zaś jest wyłączona, katalogi (i dowiązania do nich), są listowane na +początku a pozostałe pliki dopiero za nimi. +.PP +.I Fast directory reload. +Standardowo ta opcja jest wyłączona. Jeśli ją włączysz Midnight Commander +będzie używał triku do sprawdzenia czy zawartość katalogu się zmieniła. +Trik polega na tym, że sprawdza się i\-węzeł katalogu i jeśli się on zmienił +to katalog jest ładowany na nowo. Oznacza to przeładowywanie zawartości panelu +tylko wtedy, kiedy tworzysz lub kasujesz pliki. Jeśli robisz inne zmiany +(rozmiaru, właściciela, uprawnień, grupy itp.) będziesz musiał ręcznie przeładować +widok (np. używając kombinacji klawiszy C\-r). +.PP +.B Zatrzymaj po uruchomieniu +.PP +Po wykonaniu komendy, Midnight Commander może zrobić pauzę, po to abyś +mógł spokojnie przejrzeć wyjście ostatniej komendy. Są trzy możliwe wartości +dla tej zmiennej: +.IP +.I Nigdy (Never) +Oznacza, że nie chcesz widzieć wyjścia twojej komendy. Jeśli używasz +termianala typu Linux lub FreeBSD czy też xterm, będziesz mógł jednak +zobaczyć jej wyjście naciskając C\-o. +.IP +.I "On dumb terminals" +Będziesz miał pauzę po uruchomieniu na terminalach, które nie są w stanie +pokazywać widoku ostatniej komendy (na wszystkich terminalach, które nie są +xtermami lub Linux). +.IP +.I Zawsze (Always) +Program zatrzyma się po wykonaniu każdej z twoich komend. +.PP +.B Inne opcje +.PP +.I Operacje weryfikacji (Verbose operation). +Przełącza czy podczas kopiowania, kasowania, przenoszenia plików ma być +pokazywane okno dialogowe pokazujące stopień zaawansowania. Jeśli masz powolny +terminal, możesz chcieć wyłączyć weryfikację. Jest to wykonywane automatycznie +za ciebie jeśli twój terminal jest wolniejszy niż 9600 bps. +.PP +.I Zliczaj wszystko (Compute totals). +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, Midnight Commander zlicza wszytkie bajty +plików, które są przeznaczone do kopiowania, przenoszenia, kasowania. Spowoduje +to wyświetlanie dużo bardziej zaawansowanego wskaźnika postępu w zamian +zmiejszając trochę prędkość. Ta opcja nie ma żadnego znaczenia jeśli opcja +.I Verbose operation +jest wyłączona. +.PP +.I Wzorce powłoki (Shell patterns). +Standardowo komendy zaznacz (Select), odznacz (Unselect), i filtruj (Filter) +będą używać wyrażeń takich samych jak powłoka. Oznacza to, że +gwiazdka oznacza zero lub więcej znaków, znak zapytania dokładnie jeden znak, +a każdy inny znak sam siebie. Jeśli ta opcja jest wyłączona, stosowane są +te, których używa w komenda +.BR ed (1). +.PP +.I Auto Save Setup. +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, kiedy wychodzisz z Midnight Commandera +konfiguracja MC zostanie zachowana automatycznie (bez pytania) +do pliku ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +.I Auto menus. +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, menu użytkownika będzie włączone na starcie. +Użyteczne do budowania menu dla nie unixowców. +.PP +.I Używaj wewnętrznego edytora (Use internal editor). +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, do edycji plików używany jest wbudowany +edytor plików. Jeśli ta opcja jest wyłączona, używany będzie edytor wybrany +w zmiennej +.BR EDITOR . +Jeśli żaden edytor nie został wybrany, używany będzie +.BR vi (1). +Zobacz sekcję Wewnętrzny edytor plików. +.PP +.I Używaj wewnętrznego podglądu (Use internal viewer). +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, wbudowany podgląd pliku jest używany do oglądania +pliku. Jeśli ta opcja jest wyłączona, używany jest podgląd wybrany w zmiennej +.BR PAGER . +Jeśli żaden podgląd nie został wybrany, wywoływana jest komenda +.BR view . +Zobacz sekcję Wbudowany podgląd plików. +.PP +.I Dokańczanie: pokaż wszystkie (Complete: show all). +Standardowo Midnight Commander pokazuje wszystkie możliwe dokończenia +jeśli jest ich więcej, kiedy naciśniesz drugi raz klawisz +.BR M\-Tab , +za pierwszym razem, po prostu dokańcza to na ile można i wydaje krótki +dźwięk. Jeśli chcesz widzieć wszystkie możliwości po pierwszym naciśnięciu +.B M\-Tab +włącz tę opcję. +.PP +.I Obrotowy myślnik (Rotating dash). +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, Midnight Commander będzie pokazywał obracający +się myślnik w lewym górnym rogu, jeśli będzie akurat w trakcie wykonywania +jakiegoś procesu. +.PP +.I Lynx\-like motion. +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, możesz używać strzałek przemieszczenia +żeby automatycznie zmieniać katalog jeśli aktualnie wybrany katalog jest +podkatalogiem, a linia poleceń jest pusta. Standardowo ta opcja jest wyłączona. +.PP +.I Dowiązania podążające cd (Cd follows links). +Ta opcja, jeśli jest włączona, zmusza Midnight Commandera żeby podążał +za łańcuchem katalogów przy zmienianiu go w panelu czy za pomocą komendy cd. +To jest standardowe zachowanie basha. Jeśli jest wyłączona, Midnight Commander +podąża za prawdziwą strukturą katalogów, więc cd .. jeśli wszedłeś do +katalogu poprzez dowiązanie, przeniesie cię do prawdziwego katalogu na dysku, a nie +tam gdzie wskazywało dowiązanie. +.PP +.I Bezpieczne kasowanie (Safe delete). +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, nieumyślne kasowanie plików stanie się +dużo trudniejsze. Standardowy wybór w linii potwierdzenia zmienia się z +"Yes" na "No". Standardowo ta opcja jest wyłączona. +.PP +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Wygląd (Layout)" +Meny wygląd pozwala ci na różne warianty zmieniania ogólnego wyglądu +zewnętrznego ekranu. Możesz wybrać, czy linia menu, linia poleceń, linia +hintów (pomocy) i linia klawiszy funkcyjnych mają być widoczne. Na +konsolach typu Linux lub FreeBSD możesz wybrać ile linii ma być +pokazywanych na wyjściu okna. +.PP +Reszta powierzchni ekranu jest używana przez dwa panele katalogowe. Możesz +wybrać nawet czy panele mają być ułożone poziomo czy pionowo. +Kolejną możliwością jest zmiana ich standardowej szerokości (bądź wysokości). +Jest ona standardowo równa, ale można to zmienić. +.PP +Standardowo cała zawartość panelu katalogowego jest wyświetlana tą samą barwą, +ale możesz zmienić to tak aby +.I uprawnienia +i +.I typy plików +były wyświetlane specjalnym podświetlonym kolorem. +Jeśli podświetlanie uprawnień jest włączone, część pól (ta z +.I uprawnieniami +i +.IR "typami plików" ) +będzie podświetlona przy użyciu koloru wybranego jako +.IR selected . +Jeśli podświetlanie jest włączone, pliki są kolorowane w zależnośći od swojego +typu (np. katalogi, pliki typu core, wykonywalne, ...). +.PP +Jeśli opcja +.I Show Mini\-Status +jest włączona, jeden wiersz informacji statusowych na temat aktualnie +wybranej rzeczy w panelu, będzie pokazany na dole panelu. +.PP +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Potwierdzanie (Confirmation)" +W tym menu możesz skonfigurować opcje potwierdzania dla kasowania, +zastępowania, wykonywania przez naciśnięcie klawisza Enter, jak również +wychodzenia z programu. +.PP +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Wyświetlanie znaków (Display bits)" +Używane do konfigurowania zakresu znaków widocznych potem na ekranie. +To ustawienie może być 7\-bitowe jeśli twój terminal obsługuje tylko +siedmiobitowe wyjście, ISO\-8859\-1 wyświetla wszystkie znaki z mapy +ISO\-8859\-1 a pełny 8 bitowy przeznaczony jest dla tych terminali, które radzą +sobie z wyświetlaniem znaków ośmiobitowych. +.PP +Zobacz sekcję +.IR "Polskie znaki" , +po więcej szczegółów na temat ich używania w Midnight Commanderze. +.PP +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Nauka klawiszy (Learn keys)" +W tym oknie możesz przetestować czy twoje klawisz F1\-F20, Home, End itp. +pracują poprawnie na twoim terminalu. Często nie działają tak, ponieważ +bazy danych terminali są poniszczone. +.PP +Przemieszczać się możesz za pomocą klawisza Tab, za pomocą klawiszy ruchu +edytora vi ('h' lewo, 'j' dół, 'k' góra i 'l' prawo) i po tym jak już raz +naciśniesz daną strzałkę (zaznaczy się ona na OK), za ich pomocą również. +.PP +Klawisze testujesz po prostu naciskając każdy z nich. Jak tylko naciśniesz +klawisz i pracuje on zupełnie poprawnie, obok nazwy klawisza powinno pojawić +się OK. Kiedy klawisz jest już sprawdzony, zaczyna pracować normalnie (np. F1 +wciśnięty po raz pierwszy po prostu pokaże, że ten klawisz działa, ale +naciśnięty po raz drugi pokaże pomoc). Taka sama sytuacja powtarza się przy strzałkach. +Klawisz Tab powinien pracować zawsze. +.PP +Jeśli niektóre klawisze nie pracują poprawnie, nie zobaczysz OK obok ich nazwy +po naciśnięciu ich. Możesz chcieć je naprawić. Robisz to najeżdżając na +odpowiedni przycisk dla tego klawisza i naciskając Enter. Pokaże się wtedy +czerwona wiadomość i zostaniesz poproszony o podanie odpowiedniego klawisza. +Jeśli chcesz zrezygnować, po prostu naciśnij Esc i poczekaj do czasu kiedy +wiadomość zniknie. W przeciwnym wypadku wciśnij klawisz, który sobie życzysz +i również poczekaj na zniknięcie okna. +.PP +Kiedy skończysz już ze wszystkimi klawiszami, możesz nacisnąć Save +żeby zachować zmiany do pliku ~/.config/mc/ini do sekcji [terminal:TERM] (gdzie +TERM jest nazwą twojego aktualnego terminala) lub po prostu odrzucić je. +.PP +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " Wirtualny system plików (Virtual FS)" +Ta opcja daje ci kontrolę nad ustawieniami informacji wirtualnego systemu +plików. +Midnight Commander zachowuje w pamięci informacje związane z niektórymi +wirtualnymi systemami plików, po to żeby kolejne połączenia przebiegały dużo +szybciej (np. ściągane listy katalogów z serwerów ftp). +.PP +Niemniej jednak, żeby mieć dostęp do zawartości skompresowanego +pliku (np. skompresowanego pliku tar) Midnight Commander musi +stworzyć tymczasowy nieskompresowany plik na twoim dysku. +.PP +Dopiero kiedy informacje w pamięci i tymczasowe pliki na dysku są zgodne z +zasobami, możesz chcieć zmienić parametry informacji znajdujących się w +buforze podręcznym po to, żeby zmniejszyć obciążenie dysku do mninimum albo do +zmaksymalizowania prędkości dostępu do najczęściej używanych systemów +plików. +.PP +System plików tar jest całkiem inteligentny jeśli chodzi o przechowywanie +plików: po prostu ściąga wejścia do katalogów i kiedy chcemy więcej +szczegółów o nim to system je dla nas ściąga. +.PP +W rzeczywistości jednak, pliki tar najczęściej trzymane są jako +skompresowane i jako iż natura tych plików nie pozwala na oglądanie ich bez +dekompresji (nie ma tam +widocznych od razu wejść do katalogów), system plików musi być najpierw +zdekompresowany na dysk do pliku tymczasowego i dopiero potem MC ma do niego +dostęp taki jak do normalnego pliku typu tar. +.PP +Teraz, kiedy tak kochamy odwiedzać różne pliki i zwiedzać systemy +plików typu tar na całym dysku, jest całkiem prawdopodobne, że wyjdziesz +z takiego pliku, a po krótkim czasie będziesz chciał wejdść +do niego spowrotem. +Ponieważ dekompresja jest powolna, Midnight Commander będzie robił +kopie plików w pamięci na określony czas, po upływie którego pliki +zostaną skasowane a miejsce zajmowane przez nie zwolnione. Standardowo ten +czas ustawiony jest na jedną minutę. +.PP +System plików FTP trzyma listę katalogów z odwiedzanego przez nas +serwera w buforze podręcznym. Jego ważność konfigurowana jest za pomocą opcji +.IR ftpfs directory cache timeout . +Mała wartość dla tej opcji może spowolnić wszystkie operacje na systemach +ftp ponieważ każda operacja będzie wymagać kolejnych zapytań do serwera. +.PP +Ponadto możesz zdefiniować serwer proxy dla transferów ftp i skonfigurować +Midnight Commandera tak, aby zawsze go używał. Zobacz sekcję +System plików FTP (FTP File System) po więcej szczegółów. +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Zapisz ustawienia (Save Setup)" +Na starcie Midnight Commander będzie próbował odczytać opcje startowe +z pliku ~/.config/mc/ini. Jeśli on nie istnieje, odczyta on konfiguracje z +ogólnodostępnego pliku %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini. Jeśli on też nie istnieje MC +użyje swoich domyślnych ustawień. +.PP +Komenda +.I Save Setup +tworzy plik ~/.config/mc/ini zachowując aktualne ustawienia lewego, prawego menu, +jak również menu opcji. +.PP +Jeśli właczysz opcję +.IR "auto save setup" , +MC zawsze będzie zachowywał standardowe ustawienie podczas wychodzenia. +.PP +Istnieją również ustawienia, które nie mogą być zmienione z poziomu menu. +Dla tych ustawień musisz wyedytować swój plik konfiguracyjny za pomocą +twojego ulubionego edytora. Zobacz sekcję Specjalne ustawienia po więcej +informacji. +.PP +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Wykonywanie poleceń systemu operacyjnego (Executing operating system commands)" +Możesz wykonywać komendy wpisując je bezpośrednio do linii poleceń Midnight +Commandera, lub wybierając program, który chcesz wykonać za pomocą klawiszy +przemieszczenia i nacisnąć Enter. +.PP +Jeśli naciśniesz Enter na pliku, który nie jest wykonywalny, Midnight Commander +sprawdzi rozszerzenie pliku i porówna je z rozszerzeniami wybranymi w pliku +rozszerzeń (Extensions File). Jeśli jakaś pozycja się zgadza, wykonywana +jest komenda (raczej bardziej rozszerzone makro) powiązana z tym rozszerzeniem. +.PP +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH " Wbudowana komenda cd (The cd internal command)" +Komenda cd jest interpretowana przez Midnight Commandera, nie +dokładnie tak samo jak wykonuje to powłoka. Przez to rozkaz cd nie może zawierać +wielu składników makr, które są standardowo dostępne, jednak niektórych +potrafi używać: +.PP +.I Tylda +Znak tyldy (~) jest zawsze równoznaczny z wpisaniem nazwy katalogu domowego. +Jeśli po znaku tyldy dodasz jakiś login użytkownika, zostanie on zastąpiony +przez katalog domowy wybranego użytkownika. +.PP +Na przykład, ~guest jest katalogiem domowym użytkownika guest, podczas +kiedy ~/guest jest katalogiem guest w twoim katalogu domowym. +.PP +.I Poprzedni katalog (Previous directory) +Możesz przeskakiwać do katalogu, w którym byłeś poprzednio, używając specjalnej +nazwy katalogu '\-' tak jak: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I katalogi CDPATH +Jeśli katalog wybrany do przejścia nie jest w naszym aktualnym katalogu, to +Midnight Commander używa ścieżki w zmiennej +.B CDPATH +do szukania w jakimkolwiek z wymienionych tam katalogów. +.PP +Na przykład, możesz ustawić swoją zmienną +.B CDPATH +na katalogi ~/src:/usr/src, pozwalając na zmianę katalogów na jakikolwiek +inny wewnątrz ~/src i /usr/src, z miejsca w którym jesteś (np. cd linux +przeniesie cię do katalogu /usr/src/linux). +.PP +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Obsługa makr (Macro Substitution)" +.PP +Kiedy używamy menu użytkownika, wykonujemy plik o znajomym rozszerzeniu, lub +wykonujemy komendę z linii poleceń, możemy użyć kilku bardzo prostych makr. +.PP +Są to: +.PP +.I "%f" +.IP +Nazwa aktualnego pliku. +.PP +.I "%d" +.IP +Nazwa aktulnego katalogu. +.PP +.I "%F" +.IP +Nazwa pliku w niewybranym panelu. +.PP +.I "%D" +.IP +Nazwa katalogu w niewybranym panelu. +.PP +.I "%t" +.IP +Aktualnie zaznaczone pliki. +.PP +.I "%T" +.IP +Pliki zaznaczone w nieaktywnym panelu. +.PP +.I "%u" +i +.I "%U" +.IP +Podobne w działaniu do %t i do %T jednak z tą różnicą, że pliki po ich +użyciu zostaną odznaczone. Oznacza to, że można ich użyć tylko raz w jednym +menu, ponieważ potem nie będzie już żadnych plików zaznaczonych. +.PP +.I "%s" +i +.I "%S" +.IP +Wybiera: zaznaczone pliki jeśli są jakieś, w przeciwnym razie aktualny +plik. +.PP +.I "%cd" +.IP +To jest specjalne makro, które jest używane do zmieniania aktualnego katalogu +na wybrany katalog, na którego froncie jesteśmy. Jest to używane przede +wszystkim jako interfejs do wirtualnych systemów plików. +.PP +.I "%view" +.IP +To makro jest używane żeby włączać wbudowany podgląd plików. Może być +ono pojedynczo lub z grupą argumentów. Jeśli postanawiasz używać któregokolwiek +z tych argumentów musisz je koniecznie wziąć w nawiasy. +.IP +Argumentami są: +.I ascii +aby wymusić podgląd w trybie ascii; +.I hex +aby wymusić podgląd w trybie szesnastkowym; +.I nroff +przekazuje podglądowi, że powinien interpretować pogrubione +i podkreślone sekwencje programu nroff; +.I unformated +aby przekazać podglądowi, żeby nie interpretował komend nroff aby zrobić +tekst pogrubiony lub podkreślony. +.PP +.I "%%" +.IP +Znak % +.PP +.I "%{jakiś tekst}" +.IP +Pyta się o zmienną. Pokazuje się okienko wejściowe i tekst wewnątrz klamerek +używany jest jako zachęta (prompt). Makro jest zastępowane tekstem wpisanym +przez użytkownika. Użytkownik może nacisnąć ESC lub F10 aby anulować. To +makro nie działa jeszcze w linii poleceń. +.PP +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " Obsługa podpowłoki (The subshell support)" +Podpowłoka (powłoka w tle) jest opcją, która musi być wybrana przy kompilacji, +działa ona z powłokami: bash, tcsh i zsh. +.PP +Jeśli powłoka w tle jest włączona do komplilacji, Midnight Commander będzie +sobie tworzył kopie twojej powłoki (tej zdefiniowanej w zmiennej +.BR SHELL , +a jeśli nie ma, to będzie czerpał bezpośrednio z pliku /etc/passwd) +i odpalał pseudo terminal, zamiast wywoływać nową powłokę za każdym razem +kiedy wywołujesz komendę, komenda będzie przekazana powłoce w tle, +jak tylko ją napiszesz. To pozwala ci na zmianę wielu zmiennych, używanie +funkcji powłoki i zdefiniowanych aliasów, które są ważne dopóki nie wyjdziesz +z Midnight Commandera. +.PP +Jeśli używasz +.B basha +możesz wybrać startowe komendy twojej powłoki w tle w pliku ~/.local/share/mc/bashrc, +a ustawienia klawiatury w ~/.local/share/mc/inputrc. +Użytkownicy +.B tcsh +mogą wstawiać komendy startowe do pliku ~/.local/share/mc/tcshrc. +.PP +Jeśli kod powłoki w tle jest użyty, możesz zawiesić aplikację w dowolnej chwili +po prostu naciskając kombinację C\-o i przeskakując spowrotem do Midnight +Commandera, jeśli zawiesisz jakąś aplikację nie będziesz mógł używać innych +zewnętrznych komend zanim nie wyjdziesz z aplikacji, którą przerwałeś. +.PP +Extra dodatkiem do używania powłoki w tle jest to, że zachęta widoczna +w Midnight Commanderze jest tą samą, którą aktualnie używasz w powłoce. +.PP +Zobacz sekcję Opcje po więcej informacji na temat tego, jak możesz +kontrolować powłokę w tle. +.PP +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Chmod" +Okno Chmod jest używane do zmieniania atrybutów grupy plików lub katalogów. +Może być ono wywołane kombinacją C\-x c. +.PP +Okno Chmod ma dwie części \- +.I Uprawnienia (Permissions) +i +.I Plik (File) +.PP +W sekcji Plik wyświetlana jest nazwa pliku lub katalogu i jego uprawnienia +w formie liczbowej jak również właściciel i grupa. +.PP +W sekcji Uprawnienia jest kilka przycisków, z których każdy odpowiada +za odpowiednie uprawnienie do pliku. Podczas zmieniania atrybutów, widzisz +jak zmienia się wartość liczbowa w oknie Plik. +.PP +Do poruszania pomiędzy okienkami (przyciskami i polami do zaznaczania) używaj +.I strzałek +lub klawisza +.IR tab . +Aby zmienić pola lub wcisnąć przycisk używaj klawisza +.IR spacji . +Możesz również używać "gorących liter" aby go wybrać +(są one podświetlonymi literami na przyciskach). +.PP +Aby uaktywnić wprowadzone zmiany wciśnij Enter. +.PP +Kiedy pracujesz z grupą plików, lub katalogów, możesz kliknąć na +bit, który chcesz wybrać lub wyczyścić. Kiedy już wybrałeś bity, +które chcesz zmienić, możesz wcisnąć jeden z przycisków aktywujących +.RI ( "Set marked" +lub +.IR "Clear marked" ). +.PP +I w końcu, aby wprowadzić dokładnie takie zmiany jak wybrałeś, użyj +przycisku +.BR "[Set all]" , +który zadziała na wszystkich wybranych plikach. +.PP +.B [Marked all] +włącza tylko zaznaczone atrybuty do wybranych plików. +.PP +.B [Set marked] +włącza zaznaczone bity w atrybutach wszystkich wybranych plików. +.PP +.B [Clean marked] +czyści zaznaczone bity z atrybutów zaznaczonych plików. +.PP +.B [Set] +ustawia atrybuty jednego pliku. +.PP +.B [Cancel] +unieważnia komendę chmod. +.PP +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Chown" +Komenda chown jest używana do zmiany właściela/grupy pliku. Skrótem +klawiszowym jest kombinacja C\-x o. +.PP +.\"NODE "Advanced Chown" +.SH "Zaawansowane chown (Advanced Chown)" +Zaawansowane chown jest komendą łączącą w sobie komendy chmod i chown. +Możesz za jednym zamachem zmienić atrybuty i właściela/grupę pliku. +.PP +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "Operacje na plikach (File Operations)" +Kiedy kopiujesz, przenosisz lub kasujesz pliki, Midnight Commander pokazuje +okno opisowe operacji na pliku. Pokazuje nazwę pliku, na którym +aktualnie dokonuje się operacja. Widoczne są co najwyżej trzy linie postępu. +Pierwsza (file) mówi nam jak duża część pliku została już przekopiowana. +Druga (bytes) mówi jak duża część wszystkich zaznaczonych plików została +przekopiowana jak do tej pory. Trzecia (count) mówi jaka ilość plików +została już przekopiowana. Jeśli opcja verbose jest wyłączona, linia +file i bytes nie jest pokazywana. +.PP +Są dwa przyciski na dole okna dialogowego. Naciskając przycisk Skip +ominiemy resztę aktualnie "ruszanego" pliku. Naciskając przycisk Abort +zatrzymamy całą operację, pominiemy resztę plików. +.PP +Są trzy inne okna dialogowe, które mogą się włączyć podczas operacji +na plikach. +.PP +Okno błędów informuje nas o błędach zaistniałych podczas operacji +na pliku. Są w nim trzy możliwości wyboru. Przycisk Skip mówi żeby +pominąć wybrany plik, przycisk Abort żeby przerwać całą operacją, +a Retry aby ponowić próbę (np. kiedy usunąłeś problem korzystając +z innego terminala). +.PP +Okno zastępowania jest pokazywane kiedy próbujesz przenieść lub +przekopiować plik, a taki już w miejscu docelowym istnieje. Okno pokazuje +daty i wielkości obu plików. Naciśnij przycisk Yes aby nadpisać (zastąpić) +stary plik nowym, No aby pominąć ten plik, alL aby zastąpić wszystkie pliki, +nonE aby nigdy nie zastępować i Update aby zastąpić ale tylko wtedy kiedy +plik źródłowy jest nowszy niż docelowy. Całą operację możesz przerwać +naciskając przycisk Abort. +.PP +Okno rekursywnego kasowania jest pokazywane kiedy próbujesz skasować +katalog, który nie jest pusty. Naciśnij przycisk Yes aby skasować +katalog rekursywnie, No aby pominąć katalog, alL aby skasować wszystkie +katalogi rekursywnie i nonE aby pominąć wszystkie katalogi, które nie są +puste. Możesz przerwać całą opecją naciskając przycisk Abort. Jeśli +wybrałeś przycisk Yes lub alL będziesz zapytany o potwierdzenie. Wybierz +"yes" tylko jeśli jesteś pewien, że chcesz skasować wszystko rekursywnie. +.PP +Jeśli zaznaczyłeś pliki, i wykonujesz operacje tylko na nich, to jeśli +operacja się udała zostaną one odznaczone, te, na których operacja +nie przebiegła całkowicie pomyślnie, pozostaną zaznaczone. +.PP +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Maski kopiowania/przenoszenia (Mask Copy/Rename)" +Operacje przenoszenia i kopiowania pozwalają ci na tłumaczenie nazw +plików w łatwy sposób. Aby to zrobić, musisz wybrać odpowiednią maskę +źródłową i najczęściej w nazwie docelowej użyć gwiazdek. +Wszystkie pliki pasujące do maski źródłowej są kopiowane/przenoszone +w zgodzie z maską docelową. Jeśli są jakieś pliki zaznaczone, tylko one są +brane pod uwagę przy wybieraniu plików. +.PP +Są jeszcze inne opcje, które możesz ustawić: +.PP +Opcja +.I Follow links +mówi czy dowiązania i dowiązania twarde w katalogu źródłowym powinny być przenoszone +jako dowiązania czy też powinna być przegrywana ich zawartość (plik, na +który wskazują). +.PP +Opcja +.I Dive into subdirs ... +mówi co program ma robić, kiedy kopiuje się katalog, a taki już istnieje. +Standardowo kopiuje się pliki do wewnątrz już istniejącego katalogu (dodaje), +po włączeniu tej opcji kopiuje się katalog źródłowy do wnętrza tego katalogu. +Może przykład pomoże: +.PP +Chcesz przekopiować zawartość katalogu foo do /bla/foo, które +już istnieje. Normalnie (Dive nie jest włączone), mc skopiuje to dokładnie +do /bla/foo. Po włączeniu tej opcji zawartość zostanie skopiowana +do /bla/foo/foo ponieważ ten katalog już istnieje. +.PP +Opcja +.I Preserve attributes +mówi czy zachowywać oryginalne atrybuty pliku, czasy i jeśli jesteś +rootem to nawet numery UID i GID. Jeśli ta opcja jest wyłączona +używana jest aktualna wartość zmiennej umask. +.PP +.B "Use shell patterns on" +.PP +Jeśli opcja obsługi wzorców powłoki jest włączona, możesz używać znaków '*' i +\&'?' w maskach źródłowych. Działają one tak jak w powłoce. W masce docelowej możesz +używać tylko '*' i '\\<cyfra>'. Pierwsza maska '*' w nazwie docelowej +odnosi sie do pierwszej gwiazdki w masce źródłowej, druga do drugiej itd. +Joker '\\1' odnosi się do pierwszego jokera w masce źródłowej, '\\2' odnosi +się do drugiego i tak dalej aż do '\\9'. Joker '\\0' oznacza pełną nazwę +pliku źródłowego. +.PP +Dwa przykłady: +.PP +Jeśli maska źródłowa jest "*.tar.gz", a miejscem docelowym jest "/bla/*.tgz" +i plikiem, który ma zostać przekopiowany jest "foo.tar.gz", to kopią będzie +"foo.tgz" w katalogu "/bla". +.PP +Załóżmy, że chcesz zaminieć miejscami nazwę i rozszerzenie pliku, tak, że +plik "plik.c" ma być zmieniony na "c.plik" itp. Maska źródłowa powinna być +następująca: "*.*", natomiast docelowa: "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Use shell patterns off" +.PP +Kiedy wzorce powłoki są wyłączone, MC nie dokonuje automatycznego grupowania +plików. Musisz użyć wyrażenia'\\(...\\)' w masce źródłowej aby zasygnalizować +istnienie jokerów w masce docelowej. Jest to trochę łatwiejsze, ale też +wymaga aby trochę się napisać. Z drugiej jednak strony, makra są bardzo +podobne tych używanych kiedy wzorce powłoki są włączone. +.PP +Dwa przykłady: +.PP +Jeśli maską źródłową jest "^\\(.*\\)\\.tar\\.gz$", docelową jest +"/bla/*.tgz" +i plikiem do przekopiowania jest "foo.tar.gz", kopią będzie "/bla/foo.tgz". +.PP +Załóżmy, że chemy zamienić miejscami nazwę i rozszerzenia, tak, że plik +"plik.c" będzie się nazywał "c.plik" itp. Maską źródłową powinno być +"^\\(.*\\)\\.\\(.*\\)$", a docelową "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Konwersje nazwy (Case Conversions)" +.PP +Możesz również zmieniać nazwy plików. Jeśli użyjesz '\\u' lub +\&'\\l' w masce docelowej, następny znak będzie przekonwertowany na +duży lub mały, zależnie od podanej opcji. +.PP +Jeśli użyjesz '\\U' lub '\\L' w masce docelowej, następne znaki będą +zmieniane na małe lub duże (zależnie od opcji), aż do napotkania znaku +\&'\\E' lub następnych '\\U', '\\L' bądź też końca linii. +.PP +Konwersje '\\u' i '\\l' mają wyższy priorytet niż '\\U' i '\\L'. +.PP +Na przykład, jeśli maską źródłową jest '*' (shell patterns on) lub '^\\(.*\\)$' +(shell patterns off) i maską docelową jest '\\L\\u*', nazwa pliku będzie +miała pierwszą literę dużą, ale pozostałe już małe, niezależnie od obecnej +nazwy. +.PP +Możesz również używać '\\' aby "podkreślić" znak. Na przykład, '\\\\' jest +backsleshem, a '\\*' jest gwiazdką. +.PP +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Wbudowany podgląd plików" +Wbudowany podgląd plików pozwala na dwa tryby wyśmietlania: ASCII i hex. +Aby przełączać się pomiędzy tymi trybami używaj klawisza F4. Jeśli masz +zainstalowany program GNU gzip, będzie on automatycznie używany do dekompresji +plików w przypadku wystąpienia takiej potrzeby. +.PP +Podgląd plików będzie próbował użyć najlepszej metody zalecanej przez system +lub rozszerzenie pliku. Wbudowany podgląd plików będzie interpretował wiele +ciągów znaków, i włączał podkreślenie lub pogrubienie, powodując tym samym +dużo przyjemniejszy wygląd plików. +.PP +Kiedy jesteś w trybie hex, funkcja szukania akceptuje tekst w cudzysłowach +równie dobrze jak wartości szesnastkowe. +.PP +Możesz mieszać ciągi znaków ze stałymi tak jak: "Ciąg" 0xFE 0xBB +"więcej tekstu". Ciąg pomiędzy stałymi i cudzysłowami jest po prostu +ignorowany. +.PP +Kilka wewnętrznych szczegółów na temat podglądu: Na systemach, które używają +wywołania systemowego mmap(2), program mapuje pliki zamiast je ładować; +jeśli system nie obsługuje mmap(2) lub plik pasuje do któregoś z wybranych +filtrów, podgląd użyje jego rozszerzalnych buforów, dzięki temu ładując tylko +te części, do których musisz mieć aktualnie dostęp (dotyczy również +plików skompresowanych). +.PP +Tu jest lista akcji powiązanych z każdym klawiszem, który Midnight Commander +obsługuje w wewnętrznym poglądzie. +.PP +.B F1 +Wywołuje wbudowaną przeglądarkę pomocy. +.PP +.B F2 +Przełącza tryb zawijania. +.PP +.B F4 +Przełącza tryb wyświetlania. +.PP +.B F5 +Idź do linii. Zostaniesz zapytany o numer linii i zostanie ona wyświetlona na +ekranie twojego monitora. +.PP +.BR F6 ", " / . +Szukaj wyrażeń w dalszej części. +.PP +.B ?, +Wsteczne wyszukiwanie wyrażenia. +.PP +.B F7 +Normalne wyszukiwanie\wyszukiwanie w trybie hex. +.PP +.BR C\-s . +Zaczyna normalne szukanie jeśli nie było żadnego wcześniej, w przeciwnym +razie szuka następnego wystąpienia. +.PP +.BR C\-r . +Zaczyna szukanie wsteczne jeśli jeszcze żadnego nie było, w przeciwnym +razie szuka następnego wystąpienia. +.PP +.BR n . +Szuka następnego wystąpienia. +.PP +.B F8 +Przełącza tryby Raw i Parsed. Pokaże to plik w postaci takiej w jakiej +został znaleziony na dysku, lub jeśli został wybrany jakiś filtr, bądź +też plik spełnia wymagania w pliku mc.ext.ini, wyświetlane jest to co +przekazuje filtr. Aktualne ustawienie jest zawsze przeciwne niż to napisane +na przycisku, przycisk wskazuje zawsze to co się stanie po jego +naciśnięciu. +.PP +.B F9 +Przełącza pomiędzy trybami format i unformat. Kiedy tryb formatu jest +włączony podgląd będzie interpretował niektóre sentencje i pokazywał +tekst pogrubiony i podkreślony innymi kolorami. Wynika z tego, że przycisk +wskazuje co innego niż jest aktualnie (patrz wyżej). +.PP +.BR F10 ", " Esc . +Wychodzi z wbudowanego podglądu. +.PP +.BR "Page Down" ", " space ", " C\-v . +Przewija jedną stronę naprzód. +.PP +.BR "Page Up" ", " M\-v ", " C\-b ", " backspace . +Przewija jedną stronę wstecz. +.PP +.BR "strzałka w dół" . +Przewija jedną linię naprzód. +.PP +.BR "strzałka w górę" . +Przewija jedną linię wstecz. +.PP +.BR C\-l . +Odświeża ekran. +.PP +.BR C\-f . +Przeskakuje do następnego pliku. +.PP +.BR C\-b . +Przeskakuje do poprzedniego pliku. +.PP +.BR M\-r . +Przełącza linijkę. +.PP +Możliwe jest poinstruowanie podglądu pliku jak ma wyświetlać plik, zobacz +sekcję Edycja pliku rozszerzeń. +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Wbudowany edytor plików" +Wbudowany edytor plików ma większość funkcji posiadanych przez inne +edytory pełno\-ekranowe. Jest wywoływany po naciśnięciu klawisza +.B F4 +o ile opcja +.I use_internal_edit +jest ustawiona w pliku startowyn. Ma maksymalny rozmiar pliku wynoszący +szesnaście megabajtów i potrafi bez skazy edytować pliki binarne. +.PP +Opcje, które aktualnie posiada to: kopiowanie, przenoszenie, kasowanie, +wycinanie i wklejanie bloków; +.IR "klawisz dla klawisza undo" ; +rozciągane menu; wklejanie plików; definiowanie makr; szukanie i +zastępowanie wyrażeń regularnych; strzałki z Shiftem zaznaczające teksty +w stylu MSW\-MAC (tylko dla konsoli typu Linux); przełączanie trybu +wstawiania\-zastępowania; opcja pozwalająca na "przerzucenie" bloku tekstu +przez komendę powłoki jak na przykład indent. +.PP +Edytor jest bardzo prosty w użyciu i nie wymaga żadnego przygotowania. Aby +zobaczyć jakie są klawisze po prostu obejrzyj odpowiednie menu +rozwijalne. Inne klawisze to: przemieszczanie z Shiftem zaznaczające tekst. +.B Ctrl\-Ins +kopiuje do pliku +.B mcedit.clip +a +.B Shift\-Ins +wkleja z pliku mcedit.clip. +.B Shift\-Del +Wycina do +.BR mcedit.clip , +a +.B Ctrl\-Del +kasuje zaznaczony tekst. Klawisze dokończenia również dają Enter z +automatycznym wcięciem. Podświetlanie myszą również działa, +i możesz je przesłonić i spowodować normalne zaznaczanie tekstu (takie jak +obsługuje terminal) po prostu trzymając klawisz Shift. +.PP +Aby zdefiniować makro, naciśnij +.B Ctrl\-R +i potem naciśnij klawisze, które chcesz aby były wykonywane. Naciśnij +ponownie +.B Ctrl\-R +kiedy skończysz. Możesz również przyporządkować makro do dowolnego klawisza +jaki chcesz naciskając ten klawisz. Makro jest wykonywane kiedy naciśniesz +.B Ctrl\-A +i przyporządkowany klawisz. Makro jest wykonywane również jeśli naciśniesz +klawisz Meta, Ctrl, lub Esc i wybrany klawisz, jednak tylko jeśli ten +klawisz nie jest używane przez inne funkcje. Raz zdefiniowane, makro +wędruje sobie do pliku +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +w twoim katalogu domowym. Możesz skasować makro kasując odpowiednią linię z +tego pliku. +.PP +.B F19 +sformatuje format C jeśli jest podświetlony. Żeby to działało, stwórz +wykonywalny plik +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +w twoim katalogu domowym zawierający poniższe: +.PP +.nf +#!/bin/sh +/usr/bin/indent \-kr \-pcs ~/.cache/mc/mcedit/mcedit.block>& /dev/null +cat /dev/null > ~/.cache/mc/mcedit/cooledit.error +.fi +.PP +Edytor wyświetla również znaki nieamerykańskie (160+). Kiedy edytujesz plik +binarny, powinieneś ustawić opcję +.B display bits +do 7 bitów w menu opcji, aby utrzymać przejrzystość odstępów między znakami. +.PP +Zobacz sekcję Polskie znaki, aby poznać szczegóły na temat używania +polskich znaków w Midnight Commanderze. +.PP +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH Dokańczanie +.PP +Pozwól Midnight Commanderowi pisać za ciebie. +.PP +Spróbuj użyć dokończenia na tekście przed aktualną pozycją. MC próbuje +dokończyć tekst jako zmienną (jeśli tekst zaczyna się od znaku +.BR $ ), +nazwę użytkownika (jeśli tekst zaczyna się od znaku +.BR ~ ), +nazwę hosta (jeśli tekst zaczyna się od znaku +.BR @ ) +lub komendę (jeśli jesteś w linii komend w pozycji gdzie możesz wpisać +jakąś komendę, możliwe dokończenia będą zawierać również zarezerwowane +słowa i wbudowane komendy powłoki). Jeśli żaden z powyższych warunków nie +jest spełniony, próbuje się dokańczać nazwę pliku. +.PP +Nazwa pliku, nazwa użytkownika i hosta, pracuje we wszystkich liniach +wejścia, dokańczanie komend pracuje tylko w wybranych. Jeśli dokańczanie +jest rozbudowane (jest więcej różnych możliwości), MC wyda krótki dźwięk, a +następna akcja będzie zależeć od wartości zmiennej +.I Complete: show all +w menu konfiguracja. Jeśli jest ona włączona, zostanie wyświetlona lista +wszystkich możliwych nazw. Właściwą nazwę możesz wybrać za pomocą strzałek +a potem naciskając klawisz +.B Enter +na właściwej pozycji. Możesz także nacisnąć pierwsze litery, którymi różnią +się możliwości aby odrzucić tak dużą część dokończeń jak to tylko możliwe. +Jeśli naciśniesz znowu +.BR M\-Tab , +pokazane zostaną tylko te pozycje, które zaczynają się od kolejnych +podanych liter. Kiedy nie maja już więcej możliwości, okno znika, ale +możesz je wcześniej schować używając klawiszy anulujących: +.BR Esc , +.B F10 +oraz strzałek w lewo i prawo. Jeśli +Complete: show all +jest wyłączone, okno z listą włącza się dopiero wtedy, kiedy naciskasz +.B M\-Tab +po raz drugi. Za pierwszym razem MC wydaje tylko krótki dźwięk. +.PP +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "Wirtualny system plików (Virtual File System)" +Midnight Commander jest dostarczany z kodem pozwalający na dostęp do +systemów plików. Ten kod nazywany jest wirtualnym systemem plików. Pozwala on +Midnight Commanderowi manipulować plikami trzymanymi na systemach nie +Unixowych. +.PP +Aktualnie Midnight Commander jest wyposażony w niektóre wirtualne systemy +plików (VFS): lokalny system plików, używany do dostępu do typowych +systemów plików Unixowych; ftpfs używanego do manipulowania plikami na +zdalnych systemach na poprzez protokół FTP; tarfs używany do manipulania +plikami w systemach tar i w skompresowanych systemach tar; undelfs, używany +do odzyskiwania skasowanych plików na systemach typu ext2 (standardowy +system pracy systemu Linux), fish (do manipulowania plikami poprzez +połączenia powłok takich jak rsh czy ssh) i w końcu system mcfs (system +plików Midnight Commandera), oparty o sieć. +.PP +Kod VFS potrafi interpretować poprawnie wszystkie nazwy ścieżek i przekazuje +je do właściwego systemu plików. Format używany dla każdego z systemów plików +jest opisany w swojej oddzielnej sekcji. +.PP +.\"NODE " FTP File System" +.SH " System plików FTP (FTP File System)" +Ftpfs pozwala na manipulowanie plikami na zdalnych komputerach, do +normalnego użytku, możesz próbować używać panelowych komend FTP i dowiązań +(dostępnych z linii menu) lub zmienić ścieżkę bezpośrednio za pomocą zwykłej +komendy cd wyglądającej tak jak poniżej: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][użytkownik[:hasło]@]komputer[:port][zdalny katalog] +.PP +Parametry +.IR użytkownik , +.I port +i +.I zdalny katalog +są opcjonalne. Jeśli wybierzesz element +.I użytkownik +Midnight Commander spróbuje zalogować się na zdalnym komputerze jako +zadany użytkownik, w przeciwnym razie użyje twojego loginu. Opcjonalne jest +również +.IR hasło , +jeśli jest obecne zostanie użyte do nawiązania połączenia. To użycie nie +jest zalecane (tak samo jak trzymanie tego w twojej hotliście, +dopóki nie ustawisz odpowiednich uprawnień, aby nikt niepowołany nie miał +do tego dostępu). +.PP +Przykłady: +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!behind.firewall.edu/pub + ftp://guest@remote\-host.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@server/pub +.fi +.PP +Aby połączyć się z serwerem znajdującym się za firewallem, będziesz musiał +użyc przedrostka ftp://! aby wymusić na Midnight Commanderze używanie +serwera proxy do transferu danch. Serwer proxy definiuje się w oknie +dialogowym wirtualnego systemu plików. +.PP +Inną możliwością jest ustawienie opcji +.I Always use ftp proxy +w oknie konfiguracyjnym wirtualnego systemu plików. Skonfiguruje +to program tak, aby zawsze +używał serwera proxy. Jeśli ta zmienna jest ustawiona, program będzie robił +dwie rzeczy: konsultował plik %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy w celu znalezienia linii +zawierających nazwy serwerów, które są lokalne (jeśli nazwa hosta zaczyna +się od kropki, uznaje się, że jest to domena) i sprawdza czy jakieś hosty +bez kropek w nazwie są widoczne bezpośrednio. +.PP +Jeśli używasz systemu ftpfs będąc za routerem filtrującym, który nie +pozwala ci na używanie standardowej metody otwierania plików, możesz +chcieć wymusić na programie używanie trybu passive\-open. Aby tego używać +ustaw opcję ftpfs_use_passive_connections w pliku inicjującym. +.PP +Midnight Commander przechowuje listę katalogów w buforze podręcznym. Czas wyrzucania +bufora jest ustawiany w oknie dialogowym Wirtualnego Systemu Plików. To ma +śmieszną właściwość taką, że nawet kiedy wystąpią jakieś zmiany w katalogu, nie +będą one pokazane w strukturze katalogów, dopóki nie wymusisz tego przy +użyciu kombinacji C\-r. To jest dobre rozwiązanie (jeśli myślisz, że to jest +bug, to pomyśl o pracy na zdalnych systemach położonych po drugiej stronie +Atlantyku przy użyciu ftpfs :) ). +.PP +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH " System plików tar (Tar File System)" +System plików tar pozwala na dostęp w trybie tylko\-do\-odczytu do plików typu +tar i do skompresowanych plików typu tar, za pomocą komendy chdir. Aby +zmienić katalog na plik tar, możesz zmienić aktualny katalog używając +następującej konstrukcji: +.PP +.I /nazwa_pliku.tar:utar/[katalogu\-wewnątrza\-archiwum] +.PP +Plik mc.ext.ini pozwala już na tworzenie skrótów do plików tar, oznacza to, że +możesz wybrać jakiś plik tar i nacisnąć enter aby do niego wejść, zobacz +sekcję Edycja pliku rozszerzeń po więcej szczegółów na temat tego jak +zostało to pomyślane. +.PP +Przykłady +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +Późniejszy podaje pełną ścieżkę archiwum tar. +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " Transfer plików pomiędzy systemami plików (FIle transfer over SHell filesystem)" +.PP +System plików fish jest systemem opartym na sieci, który pozwala na +manipulowanie plikami na obcej maszynie tak jakby były one lokalne. Aby +tego używać, druga strona musi również mieć ustawiony serwer fish, lub musi +mieć powłokę kompatybilną z bashem. +.PP +Aby połączyć się z obcą maszyną, musisz tylko zmienić katalog do +specjalnego katalogu, którego nazwa jest w następującym formacie: +.PP +.nf +sh://[użytkownik@]komputer[:opcje];/[zdalny\-katalog];</em> +.fi +Elementy +.IR użytkownik , +.I opcje +i +.I zdalny katalog +są opcjonalne. Jeśli podasz +.I użytkownika +Midnight Commander spróuje zalogować się na obcy komputer jako zadany +użytkownik w przeciwnym razie użyty zostanie twój login. +.PP +Jako +.I opcja +może wystąpić 'C' \- włącza kompresje i 'rsh' \- włącza rsh zamist ssh. Jeśli +.I zdalny\-katalog +istnieje, twój aktualny katalog na zdalnym komputerze będzie ustawiony +na niego. +.PP +Przykłady: +.PP +.nf + sh://onlyrsh.mx:r/linux/local + sh://joe@want.compression.edu:C/private + sh://joe@noncompressed.ssh.edu/private +.fi +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Odzyskiwanie plików" +Na systemach Linuksowych, jeśli dodałeś w konfiguracji opcję przywracania +skasowanych plików z systemów ext2, będziesz w stanie to robić. Odzyskiwanie +plików jest możliwe tylko i wyłącznie na systemach typu ext2. Przywracany +system plików jest tylko nakładką na bibliotekę ext2fs: odzyskiwanie nazw +wszystkich skasowanych plików i próba uczynienia z nich normalnej partycji. +.PP +Żeby używać tych systemów plików, będziesz musiał przejść od specjalnego +pliku, którego nazwa składa się z przedrostka "undel://" i nazwy pliku, +w której ów plik rezyduje. +.PP +Na przykład, aby odzyskać skasowane pliki z drugiej partycji pierwszego +dysku scsi Linux, będziesz musiał użyć następującej ścieżki: +.PP +.nf + undel:///dev/sda2 +.fi +.PP +Może to chwilkę potrwać zanim pliki zostaną pokazane i będziesz mógł je +normalnie oglądać. +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " EXTernal File System" +.B extfs +allows to integrate numerous features and file types into GNU Midnight +Commander in an easy way, by writing scripts. +.PP +Extfs filesystems can be divided into two categories: +.PP +1. Stand\-alone filesystems, which are not associated with any existing +file. They represent certain system\-wide data as a directory tree. +You can invoke them by typing +.RI ' "cd fsname://" ' +where fsname is an extfs short name (see below). Examples of such +filesystems include audio (list audio tracks on the CD) or apt (list of +all Debian packages in the system). +.PP +For example, to list CD\-Audio tracks on your CD\-ROM drive, type +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. 'Archive' filesystems (like rpm, patchfs and more), which represent +contents of a file as a directory tree. It can consist of 'real' files +compressed in an archive (urar, rpm) or virtual files, like messages +in a mailbox (mailfs) or parts of a patch (patchfs). To access such +filesystems +.RI ' fsname:// ' +should be appended to the archive name. Note that the archive itself +can be on another vfs. +.PP +For example, to list contents of a zip archive documents.zip type +.PP +.nf + cd documents.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +In many aspects, you could treat extfs like any other directory. For +instance, you can add it to the hotlist or change to it from directory +history. An important limitation is that you cannot invoke shell +commands inside extfs, just like any other non\-local VFS. +.PP +Common extfs scripts included with Midnight Commander are: +.TP +.B a +access 'A:' DOS/Windows diskette +.RI ( "cd a://" ). +.TP +.B apt +front end to Debian's APT package management system +.RI ( "cd apt://" ). +.TP +.B audio +audio CD ripping and playing +.RI ( "cd audio://" +or +.IR "cd device/audio://" ). +.TP +.B bpp +package of Bad Penguin GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.bpp/bpp://" ). +.TP +.B deb +package of Debian GNU/Linux distribution +.RI ( "cd file.deb/deb://" ). +.TP +.B dpkg +Debian GNU/Linux installed packages +.RI ( "cd deb://" ). +.TP +.B hp48 +view and copy files to/from a HP48 calculator +.RI ( "cd hp48://" ). +.TP +.B lslR +browsing of lslR listings as found on many FTPs +.RI ( "cd filename/lslR://" ). +.TP +.B mailfs +mbox\-style mailbox files support +.RI ( "cd mailbox/mailfs://" ). +.TP +.B patchfs +extfs to handle unified and context diffs +.RI ( "cd filename/patchfs://" ). +.TP +.B rpm +RPM package +.RI ( "cd filename/rpm://" ). +.TP +.B rpms +RPM database management +.RI ( "cd rpms://" ). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +archivers +.RI ( "cd archive/xxxx://" +where xxxx is one of: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +You could bind file type/extension to specified extfs as described in the +.\"LINK2" +Edit Extension File +.\"Edit Extension File" +section. Here is an example entry for Debian packages: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Open=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.SH Polskie znaki +Midnight Commander bardzo dobrze radzi sobie z obsługą znaków +nieamerykańskich (160+) w tym polskich. Ważne jest aby mieć ustawione +polskie znaki na konsoli (tzn. aby powłoka je obsługiwała). Jeśli używasz +basha musisz tylko ustawić w pliku inputrc ( /etc/inputrc lub ~/.inputrc) +następujące wartości: +.PP +.nf +set meta\-flag on +set convert\-meta off +set output\-meta on +.fi +.PP +w pliku /etc/sysconfig/i18n: +.PP +.nf +SYSFONT=lat2u\-16 +SYSFONTACM=iso02 +.fi +.PP +natomiast w pliku /etc/sysconfig keyboard: +.PP +.nf +KEYTABLE=pl +.fi +.PP +Potem użyj poleceń +.I /sbin/setsysfont +i +.IR "loadkeys pl" . +[Zwróć uwagę na to, że te pliki są charakterystyczne dla dystrybucji +RedHat, jeśli masz inną i wiesz jak to ustawić, to napisz do mnie, a ja to +tu dopiszę [ patrz tłumacz na dole ;)) ]]. +.PP +Teraz wystarczy już tylko włączyć odpowiednie opcje w menu opcji (klawisz +F9). W menu opcji wybieramy +.I Display bits +i włączamy opcje +.I ISO 8859\-1 +oraz +.IR "Full 8 bits input" . +Potem zapisujemy konfigurację w opcje | Save setup. +.PP +I gotowe \- polskie literki działają również w podglądzie i wbudowanym +edytorze plików. +.PP +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH Kolory +Midnight Commander próbuje sprawdzić czy twój terminal obsługuje +kolory używając bazy danych terminali. Czasami jest to zmieniane +przez różne flagi startowe, np. możesz wymusić wyświetlanie czarno\-białe +lub kolorowe startując z opcją odpowiednio \-b i \-c. +.PP +Jeśli program jest skompilowany z menedżerem ekranu S\-Lang zamiast ncurses, +sprawdzi on również wartość zmiennej +.BR COLORTERM . +Jeśli jest ustawiona, ma takie samo znaczenie jak opcja \-c. +.PP +Możesz wybrać terminale, które zawsze żądają wyświetlania w kolorze, +poprzez dodanie ich do pozycji +.I color_terminals +w sekcji pliku startującego. Uchroni to Midnight Commandera przed próbami +odkrycia typu twojego terminala. Na przykład +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +.fi +.nf +color_terminals=terminal\-name1,terminal\-name2... +.fi +.PP +Program może być skompilowany zarówno z bibliotekami S\-Lang jak i ncurses. +Ncurses nie obsługuje metody wymuszania wyświetlania, zawsze sprawdza w bazie danych +terminali. +.PP +Midnight Commander umożliwia również zmianę standardowych barw ekranu. +Aktualnie kolory są skonfigurowane przy użyciu zmiennej +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +w sekcji Colors pliku startowego. +.PP +W sekcji kolorów, standardowa mapa kolorów jest ładowana ze zmiennej +.IR base_color . +Możesz wybrać swoją własną mapę dla terminala poprzez użycie nazwy terminala +jako klucza w tej sekcji. Na przykład: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +Format definicji kolorów jest następujący: +.PP +.nf + <słowo kluczowe>=<kolor powierzchni">,<kolor tła>:<słowo kluczowe>= ... +.fi +.PP +Kolory są opcjonalne, a słowa kluczowe są następujące: normal, selected, +marked, markselect, errors, input, reverse menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, +menuinactive, gauge; kolory okien dialogowych: dnormal, dfocus, dhotnormal, +dhotfocus; Kolory pomocy: helpnormal, helpitalic, helpbold, helplink, +helpslink; Kolory podglądu: viewunderline; Specjalne tryby podświetlenia: +executable, directory, link, device, special. Viewer colors are: viewnormal, +viewbold, viewunderline, viewselected. Editor colors are: editnormal, editbold, +editmarked, editwhitespace, editlinestate. Popup menu colors are: pmenunormal, +pmenusel, pmenutitle. +[nie tłumaczyłem nazw z racji tego, że trzeba je stosować w ich angielskim +brzmieniu \- jeśli jesteś aż tak zaawansowany, użyj słownika]. +.PP +Okna dialogowe mogą mieć następujące kolory: +.I dnormal +używany do normalnego tekstu, +.I dfocus +jest kolorem używanym do wyświetlania aktualnego komponentu, +.I dhotnormal +jest kolorem używanym do odróżnienia klawiszy w normalnych komponentach, +a +.I dhotfocus +jest używany do wyświetlania owych w aktualnie wybranym. +.PP +Menu używa tego samego schematu, ale jako nazw kolorów używa menunormal, menusel, +menuhot, menuhotsel i menuinactive. +.PP +Pomoc używa następujących kolorów: +.I helpnormal +używany do normalnego tekstu, +.I helpitalic +używa tej samej czcionki, którą wykorzystuje manual do wyświetlania +czcionki typu italic, +.I helpbold +tak samo jak wyżej tylko czcionki są typu bold, +.I helplink +używane dla niewybranych jeszcze dowiązań i +.I helpslink +używane dla już wybranych. +.PP +.I gauge +pokazuje kolor wypełnienia pokazywany przy wskaźniku postępu [ang. gauge], +ukazującym ile procent pliku zostało przekopiowane itp. w graficzny sposób. +.PP +Dla trybu wysokiego podświetlania +.I directory +jest używane jako kolor do wyświetlania katalogów; +.I executable +dla plików wykonywalnych; +.I link +do wyświetlania dowiązań; +.I device +do wyświetlania plików urządzeń (devices); +.I special +dla plików specjalnych, takich jak gniazda FIFO i IPC; +.I core +dla wyświetlania plików typu core (zobacz również tę opcję w sekcji Specjalne +ustawienia). +.PP +Możliwe kolory to: black, gray, red, brightred, green, +brightgreen, brown, yellow, blue, brightblue, magenta, brightmagenta, +cyan, brightcyan, lightgray and white. [sorry, że ich nazw nie tłumaczyłem, +ale używać ich trzeba w oryginalnym brzmieniu :))]. +.PP +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Specjalne ustawienia" +Większość ustawień Midnight Commandera może być zmieniana z poziomu menu. +Pomimo tego jest pewna ilość ustawień, których zmiana możliwa jest jedynie +poprzez zmianę w plikach konfiguracyjnych. +.PP +Opcje mogą być ustawione w twoim pliku ~/.config/mc/ini : +.PP +.I clear_before_exec. +.IP +Standardowo Midnight Commander czyści ekran przed wykonaniem komendy. +Jeśli chciałbyś widzieć wyjście komendy na dole ekranu, wyedytuj twój plik +~/mc/ini i zmień pole clear_before_exec na 0. +.PP +.I confirm_view_dir. +.IP +Jeśli naciskasz F3 na katalogu, normalnie MC wchodzi do niego. Jeśli ta opcja +ma wartość 1, MC zapyta się o potwierdzenie przed wejściem do tego +katalogu, jeśli masz zaznaczone jakieś pliki. +.PP +.I drop_menus. +.IP +Jeśli ta opcja jest ustawiona, kiedy naciskasz klawisz F9, rozciągane menu +będzie od razu rozłożone, w przeciwnym wypadku znajdziesz się po prostu +w najwyższym wierszu ekranu traktowanym jako menu. Będziesz musiał użyć strzałek +lub pierwszych literek, aby wybrać konkretne menu. +.PP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds. +.IP +Wartość jest ilością sekund, przez które Midnight Commander będzie czekał +cierpliwie zanim rozpocznie łączenie się z serwerem ftp od nowa. Dzieje +się to wtedy kiedy serwer odmówił połączenia lub hasło jest nieprawidłowe. +Jeśli wartość wynosi zero, nie nastąpi próba ponownego połączenia z serwerem. +.PP +.I ftpfs_use_passive_connections. +.IP +Standardowo ta opcja jest wyłączona. Powoduje ona, że ftpfs otwiera połączenia +pasywne dla transmisji danych. Jest to używane przez ludzi, którzy siedzą +za ruterami filtrującymi. Działa to tylko wtedy, kiedy nie używasz serwera +ftp proxy. +.PP +.I max_dirt_limit. +.IP +Opisuje jak wiele odświeżeń ekranu może być maksymalnie ominięte we wbudowanym +podglądzie plików. Normalnie ta wartość jest ważna, gdyż MC automatycznie +dostosowuje liczbę odświeżeń do liczby naciśniętych klawiszy. Chociaż na bardzo +wolnych komputerach lub na klawiaturach z szybkim powtarzaniem klawiszy, +duża wartość mogłaby spowodować skoki ekranu i utratę płynności. +.IP +Wydaje się, że wartość 10 dla max_dirt_limit jest najlepszym ustawieniem +i to jest wartość standardowa tej funkcji. +.PP +.I mouse_move_pages. +.IP +Kontroluje czy przewijanie w panelu za pomocą myszki odbywa się strona po +stronie czy linijka po linjce. +.PP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer. +.IP +Tak samo jak wyżej tylko, że we wbudowanym wewnętrznym podglądzie plików. +.PP +.I navigate_with_arrows. +.IP +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, możesz używać strzałek do automatycznego +przemieszczanie się pomiędzy katalogami, jeśli linia poleceń jest pusta. +(dotyczy to strzełek w bok). +.PP +.I nice_rotating_dash +.IP +Jeśli jest włączony, Midnight Commander będzie pokazywał w lewym górnym +rogu obracający się myślnik kiedy będzie wykonywał jakiś proces. +.PP +.I old_esc_mode +.IP +Standardowo Midnight Commander traktuje klawisz ESC jako przedrostek +(old_esc_mode=0). Jeśli włączysz tę opcję (old_esc_mode=1), to klawisz +ESC będzie przedrostkiem dla innego klawisza, ale jeśli ten nie nastąpi, +będzie on zinterpretowany jako klawisz anulowania (tak jak ESC ESC). +.PP +.PP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +.IP +zmienia znaczenia znaków '+', '\-', '*' w linii komend (wybór, odznaczenie, +odwrócenie zaznaczenia). Standardowo działają one tylko wtedy kiedy linia +poleceń jest pusta. Jeśli coś jest w niej już napisane, znaki te są traktowane +jako normalne. Jest to przydatne gdyż najczęściej w trakcie pisania nie chcemy +zmieniać zaznaczenia. Jednak czasami ... \- wystarczy przestawić tę opcję +i klawisze te będą zawsze działać. +.I panel_scroll_pages +.IP +Jeśli ustawione (standardowo), panel będzie przewijany o połowę za każdym +razem kiedy kursor dochodzi do dolnej lub górnej linii, w przeciwnym wypadku +przewijanie będzie się odbywać linia po linii. +.PP +.I show_output_starts_shell +.IP +Ta opcja pracuje jeśli nie używasz obsługi powłoki w tle. Kiedy +użyjesz kombinacji klawiszy C\-o i ta opcja jest włączona, będziesz +miał nową powłokę. Jeśli nie, dowolny klawisz przywróci znów Midnight +Commandera (C\-o działa jak podgląd). +.PP +.I show_all_if_ambiguous. +.IP +Standardowo Midnight Commander pokazuje wszystkie możliwe dokończenia +jeśli jest ich więcej i naciśnięto kombinację +.B M\-Tab +po raz drugi, za pierwszym razem dokończone zostanie tylko tyle ile jest to +możliwe i jeśli będzie więcej możliwości słychać będzie krótkie bipnięcie. +Jeśli chcesz widzieć wszystkie możliwe dokończenia już po pierwszym naciśnięciu +.BR M\-Tab , +zmień tę opcję na 1. +.PP +.I torben_fj_mode +.IP +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona, klawisze home i end będą działały troszkę +inaczej w panelach, zamiast przemieszczać linię wyboru do pierwszej lub +ostatniej linii w panelu, będą działały tak jak jest to opisane poniżej: +.IP +Klawisz home będzie: przechodził do środkowej linii, jeśli jest pod nią; w +przeciwnym wypadku będzie przechodził do najwyższej linii w panelu, jeśli +już w niej jest, będzie przechodził do pierwszego pliku w panelu. +.IP +Klawisz end ma podobne zastosowanie: przechodzi do środkowej linii, jeśli +jest nad nią; w przeciwnym wypadku przechodzi do najniższej linii w panelu, +chyba że już się w niej znajduje, wtedy przechodzi do ostatniego pliku w +panelu. +.PP +.I highlight_mode +Standardowo wszystkie informacje w panelach są wyświetlane tym samym +kolorem. Jeśli ta warość jest ustawiona na 1, to +.I uprawnienia +lub +.I tryb +będą wyświetlane przy użyciu podświetlonej barwy, tak aby pokazać +ustawienia dla użytkownika. Tak więc prawa do odczytu, zapisu i wykonywania +będą wyświetlane na żółto (tzn. kolorem +.IR selected ). +W dodatku jeśli ta zmienna jest ustawiona na 2, to całe linie są +wyświetlane w kolorze odpowiadającym ich typowi (zobacz sekcję Kolory). +Podświetlenie uprawnień również pracuje w tym trybie. +.PP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +.IP +Jeśli ta zmienna jest ustawiona (standardowo) próbuje się dostosować +rozszerzenie pliku do tego wybranego w pliku mc.ext.ini. +.PP +.I xtree_mode +.IP +Jeśli ta opcja jest włączona (standardowo tak nie jest) kiedy przeglądasz plik +w panelu drzewa, będzie on automatycznie przeładowywał drugi panel na +zawartość wybranego katalogu. +.PP +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH Baza danych terminali (Terminal databases) +Midnight Commander pozwala ci na naprawienie bazy danych terminali bez +posiadania uprawnień roota. Midnight Commander szuka w pliku startowym +(mc.lib położonego w katalogach z bibliotekami Midnight Commandera) lub w +pliku ~/.config/mc/ini sekcji "terminal:nazwa\-twojego\-terminala" i potem sekcji +"terminal:general", każda linia sekcji zawiera symbol klawisza, który +chcesz zdefiniować, zaczynające się do znaku równości i definicji klawisza. +Możesz użyć kombinacji \\E aby reprezentować znak escape i ^x aby +reprezentować znak Control\-x. +.PP +Możliwymi klawiszami symboli są: +.PP +.nf +f0 do f20 Klawisze funkcyjne f0\-f20 +bs backspace +home klawisz home +end klawisz end +up strzałka w górę +down strzałka w dół +left strzałka w lewo +right strzałka w prawo +pgdn klawisz page down +pgup klawisz page up +insert znak insert +delete znak delete +complete do dokańczania +.fi +.PP +Na przykład, aby zdefiniować klawisz insert jako Escape + [ + O + p, możesz +ustawić to pliku ini: +.PP +.nf +insert=\\E[Op +.fi +.PP +Symbol klawisza +.I complete +reprezentuje sekwencję wyjścia używaną do wywoływania procesu dokańczania, +jest to wywoływane kombinacją M\-tab, ale możesz zdefiniować inne klawisze +do wykonywania tych samych funkcji (na tych klawiaturach z toną fajnych i +zupełnie bezużytecznych klawiszy). +.PP +.SH "" +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH PLIKI +.PP +Program będzie pobierał wszystkie swoje informacje ze zmiennej +.BR MC_DATADIR , +jeśli jest ona nie ustawiona to znowu przetwarzany jest katalog /usr. +.PP +%pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +Plik pomocy dla programu. +.PP +%pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Standardowy plik rozszerzeń plików. +.PP +~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Własny plik użytkownika, konfiguruje podgląd i edycje plików. Ma wyższy +priorytet niż plik systemowy. +.PP +%pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +Standardowy plik setupu do Midnight Commandera, używany tylko wówczas, +kiedy użytkownik nie ma swojego własnego pliku ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +%pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Globalne ustawienia Midnight Commandera. Ustawienia w tym pliku są +uwzględniane przez wszystkie sesje Midnight Commandera, użyteczne do +definiowania ogólnosystemowych ustawień terminali. +.PP +~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +Własny setup użytkownika. Jeśli ten plik jest dostępny, jest ładowany +zamiast pliku globalnego. +.PP +%pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +Plik zawierający podpowiedzi (hints) wyświetlane przez program. +.PP +%pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +Ten plik zawiera informacje o ogólnosystemowych aplikacjach w menu. +.PP +~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +Własny plik menu użytkownika. Jeśli ten plik jest obecny jest używany +zamiast pliku globalnego. +.PP +~~/.cache/mc/tree +.IP +Lista katalogów drzewa katalogów i podglądu drzewa. Jedna linia jest jednym +wejściem. Linie zaczynające się od ukośnika są pełnymi nazwami katalogów. +Linie zaczynające się od numeru mają tyle znaków ile poprzedni katalog. +Jeśli chcesz możesz stworzyć plik używając komendy "find / \-type d +\-print | sort > ~/.cache/mc/tree". Normalnie nie ma sensu tego czynić, gdyż +Midnight Commander robi to sam za ciebie. +.PP +\&./.mc.menu +.IP +Lokalny plik zdefiniowany przez użytkownika. Jeśli ten plik jest dostępny, +jest używany zamiast pliku w katalogu domowym i ogólnosystemowego. +.PP +To change default home directory of MC, you can use +.BR MC_PROFILE_ROOT +environment variable. The value of MC_PROFILE_ROOT must be an absolute path. +If MC_PROFILE_ROOT is unset or empty, HOME variable is used. If HOME is unset +or empty, MC directories are get from GLib library. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH LICENCJA +Program jest dystrybuowany na zasadach licencji GNU General Public License +dopóki jako publikowany przez Free Software Foundation. Zobacz wbudowaną +pomoc po więcej szczegółów na temat licencji i braku gwarancji. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH DOSTĘPNOŚĆ +Najnowsza wersja programu jest do zdobycia na serwerze ftp.nuclecu.unam.mc w +katalogu /linux/local i w Europie na serwerze sunsite.mff.cuni.cz w katalogu +/GNU/mc i na serwerze ftp.teuto.de w katalogu /lmb/mc. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH ZOBACZ TAKŻE +ed(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), view(1), sh(1), bash(1), +tcsh(1), zsh(1). +.PP +.nf +Strona Midnight Commander w sieci World Wide Web: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.PP +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH AUTORZY +Miguel de Icaza (miguel@roxanne.nuclecu.unam.mx), Janne Kukonlehto +(jtklehto@paju.oulu.fi), Radek Doulik (rodo@ucw.cz), Fred +Leeflang (fredl@nebula.ow.org), Dugan Porter (dugan@b011.eunet.es), +Jakub Jelinek (jj@sunsite.mff.cuni.cz), Ching Hui +(mr854307@cs.nthu.edu.tw), Andrej Borsenkow (borsenkow.msk@sni.de), +Norbert Warmuth (nwarmuth@privat.circular.de), +Mauricio Plaza (mok@roxanne.nuclecu.unam.mx), Paul Sheer +(psheer@icon.co.za) and Pavel Machek (pavel@ucw.cz) are the developers +of this package; +Alessandro Rubini (rubini@ipvvis.unipv.it) has been especially helpful +debugging and enhancing the program's mouse support, John Davis +(davis@space.mit.edu) also made his S\-Lang library available to us +under the GPL and answered my questions about it, and the following +people have contributed code and many bug fixes (in alphabetical +order): +.PP +Adam Tla/lka (atlka@sunrise.pg.gda.pl), +alex@bcs.zp.ua (Alex I. Tkachenko), Antonio Palama, +DOS port (palama@posso.dm.unipi.it), Erwin van Eijk +(wabbit@corner.iaf.nl), Gerd Knorr (kraxel@cs.tu\-berlin.de), +Jean\-Daniel Luiset (luiset@cih.hcuge.ch), Jon Stevens +(root@dolphin.csudh.edu), Juan Francisco Grigera, Win32 port +(j\-grigera@usa.net), Juan Jose Ciarlante (jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), +Ilya Rybkin (rybkin@rouge.phys.lsu.edu), Marcelo Roccasalva +(mfroccas@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), Massimo Fontanelli (MC8737@mclink.it), +Pavel Roskin (pavel_roskin@geocities.com), +Sergey Ya. Korshunoff (seyko2@gmail.com), Thomas Pundt +(pundtt@math.uni\-muenster.de), Timur Bakeyev +(timur@goff.comtat.kazan.su), Tomasz Cholewo +(tjchol01@mecca.spd.louisville.edu), Torben Fjerdingstad +(torben.fjerdingstad@uni\-c.dk), Vadim Sinolitis (vvs@nsrd.npi.msu.su) +and Wim Osterholt (wim@djo.wtm.tudelft.nl). +.PP +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH BŁĘDY +W pliku TODO dystrybucji znajdziesz informacje na temat tego, co +pozostało jeszcze do zrobienia. +.PP +Jeśli chcesz zgłosić kłopoty z programem [błędy w nim], +wyślij e\-mail [po angielsku], na adres +mc\-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org. +.PP +Do zgłoszenia błędu dołącz opis problemu, versję programu, którego używasz +(wyświetla ją mc \-V), system operacyjny, na którym pracujesz i jeśli program +się wykłada, chcielibyśmy dostać ślad stosu. +.SH TŁUMACZENIE +Maciej Wojciechowski wojciech@staszic.waw.pl diff --git a/doc/man/ru/Makefile.am b/doc/man/ru/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..701328e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/ru/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +LANG=ru +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in + +man_MANS = mc.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +DATE_LANG=ru_RU.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%B %Y + +include ../date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/ru/Makefile.in b/doc/man/ru/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be41579 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/ru/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man/ru +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +LANG = ru +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in +man_MANS = mc.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +DATE_LANG = ru_RU.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %B %Y +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/ru/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/ru/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man \ + uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/ru/mc.1.in b/doc/man/ru/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..badde23 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/ru/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,4927 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\"TOPICS "Разделы помощи:" +.\" TODO: Перевести раздел EXTernal File System +.TH MC 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "MC Version %MAN_VERSION%" "GNU Midnight Commander" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "НАИМЕНОВАНИЕ" +mc \- Визуальная оболочка для Unix\-подобных систем. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "СИНТАКСИС" +.B mc +[\-abcCdfhPstuUVx] [\-l журнал] [каталог1 [каталог2]] [\-e [файл] ...] [\-v файл] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH "ОПИСАНИЕ" +Что такое Midnight Commander +.PP +Midnight Commander \- это программа, предназначенная для просмотра +содержимого каталогов и выполнения основных функций управления файлами в +UNIX\-подобных операционных системах. +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.SH "КЛЮЧИ" +Ключи запуска программы Midnight Commander +.TP +.I \-a, \-\-stickchars +Отключить использование графических символов для рисования линий. +.TP +.I \-b, \-\-nocolor +Запуск программы в черно\-белом режиме экрана. +.TP +.I \-c, \-\-color +Включает цветной режим дисплея. Для получения более подробной информации +смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +Цвета\&. +.\"Colors" +.TP +.I \-C arg, \-\-colors=arg +Используется для того, чтобы задать другой набор цветов в командной +строке. Формат аргумента arg описан в разделе +.\"LINK2" +Цвета\&. +.\"Colors" +.TP +.I \-\-configure\-options +Выводит опции конфигурирования, с которыми был собран Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I \-d, \-\-nomouse +Отключает поддержку мыши. +.TP +.I \-e [файл] +Запустить встроенный редактор. Если параметр "файл" задан, этот файл +будет открыт при запуске. Смотрите также +.BR mcedit(1) . +.TP +.I \-f, \-\-datadir +Выводит на экран определённый в процессе компиляции программы путь к +файлам программы Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I \-F, \-\-datadir\-info +Выводит на экран расширенную информацию о путях, используемых при работе +программы Midnight Commander. +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Принудительно устанавливает режим мыши "normal tracking". В xterm\-совместимых +терминалах (например, tmux/screen). +.TP +.I \-k, \-\-resetsoft +Восстанавливает значения команд, назначенных функциональным клавишам в +предусмотренные по умолчанию значения, используя базу данных +termcap/terminfo. Этот ключ используется только на терминалах HP, где +функциональные клавиши не работают. +.TP +.I \-K файл, \-\-keymap=файл +Задаёт файл клавиатурных команд для переопределения привязки клавиатурных +комбинаций к действиям. +.TP +.I \-l файл, \-\-ftplog=файл +Сохранить диалог с ftp\-сервером в файл file. +.TP +.I \-\-nokeymap +Не загружать клавиатурные комбинации из файла, использовать определённые +в исходном коде. +.TP +.I \-P файл, \-\-printwd=файл +По окончании работы Midnight Commander запишет последний текущий каталог +в указанный файл. Эту опцию не следует использовать напрямую. Она +используется специальной функцией оболочки, которая меняет текущий +каталог оболочки на последний каталог, использованный Midnight +Commander. +.IP +Для того чтобы эта функция была определена, используйте файл +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.sh +для оболочек bash и zsh, а для оболочки tcsh соответственно файл +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.csh +.TP +.I \-s, \-\-slow +Включает медленный режим терминала, в котором программа выводит меньше +псевдографических символов (в том числе в меню и экранах помощи) и +отключается вывод дополнительных (избыточных) сообщений. +.TP +.I \-S arg, \-\-skin=arg +Используется для того, чтобы задать другой скин в командной +строке. Технология скинов описана в разделе +.\"LINK2" +Внешний вид\&. +.\"Skins" +.TP +.I \-t, \-\-termcap +Используется только в том случае, когда код был скомпилирован с S\-Lang и +terminfo: в этом случае Midnight Commander использует значение +переменной +.B TERMCAP +для получения информации о терминале вместо использования системной базы +терминалов. +.TP +.I \-u, \-\-nosubshell +Отключает использование альтернативных оболочек shell (имеет смысл +только в том случае, когда Midnight Commander был скомпилирован с +поддержкой альтернативной оболочки). +.TP +.I \-U, \-\-subshell +Делает возможным использование subshell (имеет смысл только в том +случае, когда Midnight Commander был скомпилирован с поддержкой subshell +как опции). +.TP +.I \-v file +Запустить встроенную программу просмотра Midnight Commander\-а для +просмотра указанного файла. После выхода из режима просмотра вы выходите +из Midnight Commander и оказываетесь в shell. +.TP +.I \-V, \-\-version +Отображает версию программы. +.TP +.I \-x, \-\-xterm +Запускает программу в режиме xterm. Используется только на терминалах, +работающих в режиме xterm (два режима работы экрана и возможность +формировать экранирующие последовательности с помощью мыши) (two screen +modes, and able to send mouse escape sequences). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +Не использовать X11 для получения состояния модификаторов Alt, Ctrl, Shift. +.PP +Если в командной строке указаны два каталога, первый будет отображаться +в активной панели, второй \- в другой панели. +.PP +Если указан только один каталог, он будет отображён в активной панели, +во второй панели будет отображён каталог, указанный в параметре "other_dir" +в файле panels.ini. +.PP +Если каталоги не указаны, в активной панели будет отображён текущий каталог, +а во второй панели \- каталог, указанный в параметре "other_dir" в файле panels.ini. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH "Главное окно программы" +Главное окно программы Midnight Commander состоит из трёх полей. Два +поля, называемые "панелями", идентичны по структуре и обычно отображают +перечни файлов и подкаталогов каких\-то двух каталогов файловой +структуры. Эти каталоги в общем случае различны, хотя, в частности, +могут и совпасть. Каждая панель состоит из заголовка, списка файлов и +информационной строки. +.PP +Третье поле экрана, расположенное в нижней части экрана, содержит +командную строку текущей оболочки. В этом же поле (самая нижняя строка +экрана) содержится подсказка по использованию функциональных клавиш +.BR "F1 \- F10" . +Самая верхняя строка экрана содержит строку +.\"LINK2" +горизонтального меню\&. +.\"Menu Bar" +Эта строка может не отображаться на экране; в этом случае доступ к ней +можно получить, щёлкнув мышью по верхней рамке или нажав клавишу +.BR F9 . +.PP +Панели Midnight Commander обеспечивают просмотр одновременно двух +каталогов. Одна из панелей является активной в том смысле, что +пользователь может выполнять некоторые операции с отображаемыми в этой +панели файлами и каталогами. В активной панели подсвечено имя одного из +каталогов или файлов, а также выделен цветом заголовок панели в верхней +строке. Этот заголовок совпадает с именем отображаемого в данной панели +каталога, который является текущим каталогом той оболочки, из которой +запущена программа. Вторая панель \- пассивна. Почти все операции +выполняются в активной панели, то есть в соответствующем (текущем) +каталоге. Некоторые операции (типа копирования или переноса файлов) по +умолчанию используют каталог, отображаемый в пассивной панели, как место +назначения операции. Более подробное описание панелей дано в подразделе +.\"LINK2" +.I Панели каталогов +.\"Directory Panels" +раздела +.\"LINK2" +.I Меню левой и правой панелей +.\"Left and Right Menus" +и в разделе +.\"LINK2" +.I Меню "Файл" +.\"File Menu" +.PP +Вы можете выполнить любую команду операционной системы или запустить на +исполнение любую программу непосредственно из программы Midnight +Commander, просто набрав имя этой команды (программы) в командной строке +и нажав клавишу +.BR Enter . +Прочитайте разделы +.\"LINK2" +.I Командная строка оболочки +.\"Shell Command Line" +и +.\"LINK2" +.I Редактирование строк ввода +.\"Input Line Keys" +для того, чтобы узнать больше о командной строке. +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Поддержка мыши" +Программа Midnight Commander обеспечивает поддержку мыши. Это свойство +обеспечивается независимо от того, откуда запущен терминал +.B xterm(1) +(даже если xterm запущен на удалённом компьютере, используя +соединение через telnet, ssh или rlogin) или если вы работаете за +консолью Linux и запущена программа управления мышью +.BR gpm . +.PP +Если вы щёлкаете мышью на имени файла в одной из панелей, файл +выбирается (подсветка перемещается на это имя); если вы щёлкнете правой +кнопкой мыши, файл отмечается (или отметка с файла снимается, в +зависимости от предыдущего состояния). +.PP +Двойной щелчок мыши на имени файла означает попытку запустить файл на +исполнение (если это исполняемая программа); либо, если +.\"LINK2" +файл расширений +.\"Edit Extension File" +содержит программу, ассоциированную с данным расширением, запускается +эта программа и ей передаётся на обработку выбранный файл. +.PP +Точно также можно выполнить команду, ассоциированную с любой +функциональной клавишей, щёлкнув по соответствующей экранной кнопке в +самой нижней строке экрана. +.PP +По умолчанию скорость эмуляции повторных нажатий на клавишу в случае её +удержания (auto repeat rate) составляет 400 миллисекунд. Это значение +можно изменить путем изменения параметра +.I mouse_repeat_rate +в файле +.\"LINK2" +\&~/.config/mc/ini +.\"Save Setup" +.PP +Если Commander запущен с поддержкой мыши, вы можете обойти Commander и +добиться того, что мышь будет вести себя так же, как она ведёт себя по +умолчанию (обеспечивая вырезание и вставку текста), если будете +удерживать клавишу +.BR Shift . +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Клавиатурные команды" +Некоторые команды в Midnight Commander вызываются с использованием +клавиш +.B Control +(иногда обозначается как CTRL или CTL) и +.B Meta +(иногда обозначается ALT или даже Compose). В настоящем руководстве +будут использоваться следующие сокращения: +.TP +C\-<символ> означает, что нужно нажать и удерживать клавишу +.B Control +и в это время нажать клавишу <символ>. Так C\-f будет означать: нажмите +.B Control +и, удерживая её, нажмите (коротким щелчком) клавишу f. +.TP +Alt\-<символ> означает, что надо удерживать в нажатом состоянии клавишу +.B Alt +или +.B Meta +во время нажатия на клавишу <символ>. Если на клавиатуре нет клавиш +.B Alt +и +.BR Meta , +нажмите +.BR Esc , +отпустите её, а потом нажмите на клавишу <символ>. +.TP +S\-<символ> означает, что нужно держать в нажатом состоянии клавишу +.B Shift +во время нажатия на клавишу <символ>. +.PP +Все строки ввода в Midnight Commander по умолчанию поддерживают соглашения +об использовании "горячих" клавиш, принятые в редакторе GNU Emacs. +.PP +Вы можете переопределить клавиатурные привязки "горячих" клавиш к командам, +как это описано в разделе +.\"LINK2" +.I переопределение клавиатурных команд +.\"Keys_redefine" +.PP +Все последующие описания клавиатурных команд относятся к поведению по +умолчанию. +.PP +Описания клавиатурных команд даются в нескольких разделах помощи. +Наиболее важными являются следующие разделы: +.PP +В разделе +.\"LINK2" +.I Меню "Файл" +.\"File Menu" +приведены комбинации клавиш, которые служат для вызова команд, +перечисленных в меню "Файл". В этом же разделе перечислены команды, +ассоциированные с функциональными клавишами. Большинство из этих команд +выполняют действия над подсвеченным файлом или группой отмеченных +файлов. +.PP +В секции +.\"LINK2" +.I Панели каталогов +.\"Directory Panels" +рассказано о клавишах, которые используются для выбора файла или группы +файлов как объектов некоторого последующего действия (обычно действия из +меню "Файл"). +.PP +В разделе +.\"LINK2" +.I Командная строка оболочки (Shell) +.\"Shell Command Line" +перечисляются команды и комбинации клавиш, которые используются для +ввода и редактирования команд в командной строке оболочки. Большая часть +этих команд служит для переноса имен файлов и/или имен каталогов в +командную строку (чтобы уменьшить трудоемкость ввода) или для доступа к +истории команд. +.PP +Клавиши +.\"LINK2" +редактирования строк ввода +.\"Input Line Keys" +используются как при редактировании командной строки, так и других строк +ввода, появляющихся в различных запросах программы. + +.\"NODE " Keys_redefine" +.SH " Переопределение клавиатурных команд" +Клавиатурные команды могут быть прочитаны из внешнего файла. +Сначала Midnight Commander создаёт карту клавиатурных команд из списка, +определённого в исходном коде. Затем всегда загружаются два файла +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.keymap +и +.BR %pkgdatadir%/mc.keymap , +последовательно переопределяя ранее загруженные команды. +Поиск файла клавиатурных команд, определённого пользователем, производится +по следующему алгоритму (до первого нахождения файла): +.IP +.br +1) параметр командной строки +.B \-K <файл> +или +.B \-\-keymap=<файл> +.br +2) переменная окружения +.B MC_KEYMAP +.br +3) параметр +.B keymap +в секции +.B [Midnight\-Commander] +конфигурационного файла. +.br +4) файл +.B ~/.config/mc/mc.keymap +.br +.PP +Параметры в трёх первых случаях могут содержать абсолютный путь к файлу +клавиатурных команд либо просто название схемы привязки (с расширением .keymap +либо без него). В данном случае поиск файла клавиатурных команд +будет происходить по следующим каталогам (до первого нахождения): +.IP +.br +1) +.B ~/.config/mc/ +.br +2) +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/ +.br +3) +.B %pkgdatadir%/ + +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH " Разные команды" +Имеется несколько действий, ассоциированных с некоторыми комбинациями +клавиш, которые не попадают ни в одну из других категорий: +.TP +.B Enter +Если в командной строке (в нижней части экрана) набрано имя какой\-либо +команды, запускается соответствующая программа (если команды не +существует, выдаётся соответствующее сообщение). Если в командной строке +нет никакого текста, и если на активной панели подсвечено имя каталога, +то Midnight Commander выполняет переход +.B chdir(2) +в выбранный каталог и отображает его содержимое в этой панели; если +подсвечен исполняемый файл, то он запускается на выполнение. Наконец, +если расширение подсвеченного в активной панели файла совпадает с одним +из расширений, указанных в +.\"LINK2" +файле расширений\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +то выполняется команда, связанная с этим расширением. +.TP +.B C\-l +Обновляет всю информацию, отображаемую программой Midnight Commander. +.TP +.B C\-x c +Запускает команду +.\"LINK2" +Chmod +.\"Chmod" +для подсвеченного файла или группы отмеченных файлов. +.TP +.B C\-x o +Запускает команду +.\"LINK2" +Chown +.\"Chown" +для подсвеченного файла или группы отмеченных файлов. +.TP +.B C\-x l +Запускает команду создания жесткой ссылки. +.TP +.B C\-x s +Запускает команду создания абсолютной символической ссылки. +.TP +.B C\-x v +Запускает команду создания относительной символической ссылки. +Для более детальной информации о ссылках смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +.I Меню "Файл" +.\"File Menu" +.TP +.B C\-x i +Переводит пассивную панель в режим "Информация". +.TP +.B C\-x q +Переводит пассивную панель в режим быстрого просмотра. +.TP +.B C\-x ! +Выполняется пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +"Критерий панелизации"\&. +.\"External panelize" +.TP +.B C\-x h +Добавить имя каталога в +.\"LINK2" +"Каталоги быстрого доступа"\&. +.\"Hotlist" +.TP +.B Alt\-! +Выполняет пункт меню "Просмотр вывода команды", который описан подробнее +в разделе +.\"LINK2" +"Меню "Файл"\&. +.\"File Menu" +.TP +.B Alt\-? +Вызов диалогового окна +.\"LINK2" +"Поиск файла"\&. +.\"Find File" +.TP +.B Alt\-c +Вызов диалогового окна +.\"LINK2" +"Быстрая смена каталога"\&. +.\"Quick cd" +.TP +.B C\-o +Если Midnight Commander запущен в консоли Linux или FreeBSD, или через +xterm, вам будет показан вывод предыдущей команды. При этом на +Linux\-консоли Midnight Commander использует встроенную программу +(cons.saver) для сохранения выводимой информации и демонстрации её на +экране. +.PP +Если Midnight Commander скомпилирован с поддержкой подоболочки +(subshell), вы можете в процессе выполнения приложения из\-под Midnight +Commander в любой момент набрать C\-o и вернуться к главному экрану +Midnight Commander\-а. Для возврата к вашему приложению достаточно снова +набрать C\-o. Если вы застопорите выполнение приложения, использовав этот +приём, вы не сможете запустить других программ из Midnight Commander +пока отложенное приложение не закончит работу, либо пока вы не прервете +его выполнение. +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Панели каталогов" +В настоящем разделе перечисляются команды, которые позволяют оперировать +с содержимым панелей. Если вы хотите узнать, как изменить вид панели или +способ представления информации на панели, смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +Меню левой и правой панелей\&. +.\"Left and Right Menus" +.TP +.B Tab, C\-i +Сменить текущую (активную) панель. Подсветка перемещается с панели, +которая была активной ранее, в другую панель, которая становится +активной. +.TP +.B Insert, C\-t +Чтобы отметить файл, на который указывает в данный момент подсветка, +используйте клавишу +.B Insert +(the kich1 terminfo sequence). Для снятия отметки с файла используются +те же комбинации. +.TP +.B Alt\-e +Чтобы поменять кодировку панели, используйте комбинацию Alt\-e (M\-e). +Перекодировка производится из выбранной кодировки в системную. Для отмены +перекодировки выберите "Без перекодировки" в диалоге выбора кодировок. +.TP +.B Alt\-g, Alt\-r, Alt\-j +Используются для перемещения подсветки, соответственно, на самый +верхний, средний или нижний файл из числа отображаемых в данный момент +на панели. +.TP +.B Alt\-t +Циклически переключает режимы отображения списка файлов текущего +каталога. С помощью этой комбинации клавиш можно быстро переключаться из +режима стандартного вывода (long listing) к сокращенному или к режиму, +определяемому пользователем. +.TP +.B C\-\\\\ (control\-backslash) +Показать +.\"LINK2" +"Каталоги быстрого доступа" +.\"Hotlist" +и перейти к выбранному каталогу. +.TP +.B + (plus) +Эта клавиша используется для того, чтобы выбрать (отметить) группу +файлов по регулярному выражению, задающему эту группу. Когда включена +опция +.IR "Только файлы" , +то выделены будут только файлы. Если опция +.IR "Только файлы" , +выключена, то выделены будут как файлы, так и каталоги. Если включена опция +.IR "Образцы в стиле shell" , +регулярные выражение строятся по тем же правилам, которые действуют в +оболочке shell ('*' означает ноль или большее число любых символов, а '?' +заменяет один произвольный символ). Если опция +.I "Образцы в стиле shell" +выключена, то пометка файлов производится по правилам обработки +нормальных регулярных выражений (смотрите ed (1)). Если включена опция +.I "С учётом регистра" +то пометка файлов и каталогов будет производиться с учётом регистра символов имён. +Если опция +.I "С учётом регистра" +выключена, то регистр символов учитываться не будет. +.PP +.B \\\\ (backslash) +Клавиша "\\" снимает отметку с группы файлов, то есть производит +действие, обратное тому, которое вызывается по клавише "+". +.TP +.B Up, C\-p +Перемещает подсветку на предыдущую позицию в списке файлов панели. +.TP +.B Down, C\-n +Перемещает подсветку на следующую позицию в списке файлов панели. +.TP +.B Home, a1, Alt\-< +Перемещает подсветку на первую позицию списка файлов. +.TP +.B End, c1, Alt\-> +Перемещает подсветку на последнюю позицию списка файлов. +.TP +.B PageDown, C\-v +Перемещает подсветку на одну страницу вниз. +.TP +.B PageUp, Alt\-v +Перемещает подсветку на одну страницу вверх. +.TP +.B Alt\-o +Если выделенным элементом активной панели является каталог, установить +этот каталог текущим в неактивной панели и перейти к следующему файлу. +Если выделенным элементом активной панели является не каталог, установить +родительский каталог текущим в неактивной панели и также перейти к следующему +файлу. +.TP +.B Alt\-i +Сделать текущий каталог активной панели также текущим каталогом +неактивной панели. Если необходимо, перевести неактивную панель в режим +отображения списка файлов. Если активная панель находится в режиме +панелизации, неактивная панель в этот режим не переводится. +.TP +.B C\-PageUp, C\-PageDown +Только если mc запущен с консоли Linux: выполняется, соответственно, +переход (chdir) к родительскому каталогу ("..") или к выделенному +подсветкой каталогу. +.TP +.B Alt\-y +Перемещение к предыдущему каталогу из истории перемещения по каталогам; +эквивалентно нажатию мышкой на символ '<' в верхнем углу панели. +.TP +.B Alt\-u +Перемещение к следующему каталогу из истории перемещения по каталогам; +эквивалентно нажатию мышкой на символ '>'. +.TP +.B Alt\-S\-h, Alt\-H +Отображает историю перемещения по каталогам; эквивалентно нажатию мышкой +на символ 'v' в верхнем углу панели. +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH "Быстрый поиск" +Режим быстрого поиска позволяет быстро найти нужный файл в каталоге, +отображённом в файловой панели, по первым символам имени. +Для перехода в режим быстрого поиска используются клавиатурные сочетания +.B C\-s +или +.B Alt\-s +.P +После нажатия одной из этих комбинаций вводимые символы отображаются не +в командной строке, а в строке поиска. Если режим +.I "Показ мини\-статуса" +включен, эта строка отображается на месте строки мини\-статуса. В +процессе ввода последующих символов линия подсветки перемещается к +следующему файлу, название которого начинается с введённой строки +символов. Клавиши +.B Backspace +или +.B DEL +могут использоваться для исправления ошибок. Если +.B C\-s +нажато снова, осуществляется поиск следующего подходящего файла. +.P +Если переход в режим быстрого поиска осуществляется двойным нажатием +.BR C\-s , +то в текущем поиске будет использоваться шаблон предыдущего поиска. +.P +Кроме обычных символов в имени файла также можно использовать +символы маски '*' и '?'. +.P +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Командная строка оболочки" +В этом разделе перечислены команды, которые позволяют сократить число +нажатий на клавиши во время ввода и редактирования команд в командной +строке. +.TP +.B Alt\-Enter +Копирует подсвеченное имя файла или каталога в командную строку. +.TP +.B C\-Enter +То же самое, что Alt\-Enter, но работает только на консоли Linux. +.TP +.B Alt\-Tab +Пытается выполнить операцию +.\"LINK2" +Завершение ввода (completion) +.\"Completion" +имени файла, названия команды, переменной, имени пользователя или имени +машины (в зависимости от того, что вы начали набирать и какой элемент +команды вводите). +.TP +.B C\-x t, C\-x C\-t +Копирует в командную строку имена помеченных файлов (или подсвеченное +имя, если нет помеченных) из активной панели (C\-x t) или пассивной +панели (C\-x C\-t). +.TP +.B C\-x p, C\-x C\-p +Первая комбинация клавиш копирует в командную строку имя текущего +каталога, а вторая \- имя каталога, отображаемого в пассивной панели. +.TP +.B C\-q +Эта команда (the quote command) используется для того, чтобы вставить +символы, которые каким\-то образом интерпретируются самим Midnight +Commander\-ом (например, символ '+'). +.TP +.B Alt\-p, Alt\-n +Эти комбинации используются для перемещения по истории команд. Alt\-p +вызывает перемещение на команду назад по списку ранее запускавшихся +команд, а Alt\-n \- перемещение на одну команду вперёд. +.TP +.B Alt\-h +Выводит историю текущей строки ввода (для командной строки \- историю +команд). +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " Клавиши управления перемещением" +Встроенная программа просмотра файлов, программа просмотра подсказки и +программа просмотра каталогов используют один и тот же программный код +для управления перемещением. Следовательно, для перемещения используются +одни и те же комбинации клавиш. Но в каждой подпрограмме имеются и +комбинации, применяющиеся только в ней. +.PP +Другие части Midnight Commander\-а тоже используют некоторые из +комбинаций клавиш управления перемещением, так что настоящая секция +руководства может быть также полезна при изучении этих частей. +.TP +.B Up, C\-p +Перемещение на одну строку назад или вверх +.TP +.B Down, C\-n +Перемещение на одну строку вперёд +.TP +.B PageUp, Alt\-v +Перемещение на одну страницу назад +.TP +.B PageDown, C\-v +Перемещение на одну страницу вперёд +.TP +.B Home, A1 +Перемещение к началу. +.TP +.B End, C1 +Перемещение к концу. +.TP +Программы просмотра файлов и помощи воспринимают в дополнение к +перечисленным ещё и следующие комбинации: +.TP +.B b, C\-b, C\-h, Backspace, Delete +Перемещение на одну страницу назад +.TP +.B Space bar +Перемещение на одну страницу вперёд +.TP +.B u, d +Перемещение на половину страницы назад или вперёд. +.TP +.B g, G +Перемещение к началу или к концу файла. +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Редактирование строк ввода" +Строки ввода (это не только +.\"LINK2" +командная строка +.\"Shell Command Line" +оболочки, но и строки в диалоговых окнах различных подпрограмм) +воспринимают следующие управляющие комбинации: +.TP +.B C\-a +Перемещает курсор в началу строки. +.TP +.B C\-e +Перемещает курсор в конец строки. +.TP +.B C\-b, Left +Перемещает курсор на одну позицию влево. +.TP +.B C\-f, Right +Перемещает курсор на одну позицию вправо. +.TP +.B Alt\-f +Перемещает курсор на одно слово вперёд. +.TP +.B Alt\-b +Перемещает курсор на одно слово назад. +.TP +.B C\-h, Backspace +Удаляет символ, предшествующий курсору. +.TP +.B C\-d, Delete +Удаляет символ в позиции курсора. +.TP +.B C\-@ +Устанавливает метку для того, чтобы вырезать (скопировать в буфер) часть +текста. +.TP +.B C\-w +Копирует текст, расположенный между курсором и меткой, в буфер, удаляя +текст из строки ввода. +.TP +.B Alt\-w +Копирует текст, расположенный между курсором и меткой, +в буфер. +.TP +.B C\-y +Вставляет содержимое буфера в строку ввода перед позицией курсора. +.TP +.B C\-k +Удаляет текст от курсора до конца строки. +.TP +.B Alt\-p, Alt\-n +Эти комбинации используются для перемещения по истории команд. Alt\-p +перемещает к предыдущей команде, Alt\-n \- к следующей. +.TP +.B Alt\-C\-h, Alt\-Backspace +Удалить предшествующее слово. +.TP +.B Alt\-Tab +Пытается выполнить +.\"LINK2" +завершение ввода (completion) +.\"Completion" +имени файла, команды, переменной, имени пользователя или имени машины. +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Главное меню программы Midnight Commander" +Строка главного меню появляется в верхней части экрана после нажатия +клавиши +.B F9 +или щелчка мыши по верхней рамке экрана. Меню состоит из пяти пунктов: +"Левая", "Файл", Команды", Настройки" и "Правая". При выборе одного +из этих пунктов появляется соответствующее выпадающее меню. +.PP +Пункты меню +.\"LINK2" +"Левая" и "Правая " ("Верхняя" и "Нижняя") +.\"Left and Right Menus" +позволяют изменить вид, соответственно, левой и правой (или верней и нижней) +панелей и характер отображаемой в панели информации, в частности, выполнить +соединения с удалёнными компьютерами. +.PP +Меню +.\"LINK2" +"Файл" +.\"File Menu" +позволяет выполнить какие\-то действия с выбранным файлом или группой +помеченных файлов. +.PP +Меню +.\"LINK2" +"Команды" +.\"Command Menu" +перечисляет действия, которые имеют более общий характер и не относятся +только к выделенному в данный момент файлу или группе помеченных файлов. +.PP +Меню +.\"LINK2" +"Настройки" +.\"Options Menu" +служит для задания ряда параметров, определяющих внешний вид и поведение +программы Midnight Commander. Один из пунктов этого меню служит для +сохранения настроек, заданных пользователем. +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH "Меню левой и правой (или верхней и нижней) панелей" +Вид панелей, в которых отображаются списки файлов и каталогов, может +быть изменен через пункты меню +.B "Левая" (или "Верхняя") +и +.B "Правая" (или "Нижняя"). +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Формат списка..." +Этот пункт меню предназначен для определения формата вывода списка +файлов в панели. Вы можете выбрать один из 4 вариантов представления +списка файлов: +.BR "Стандартный" , +.BR "Укороченный" , +.B Расширенный +и +.BR "Определяемый пользователем" . +.PP +В стандартном формате отображаются имя файла, его размер и время +последней модификации. +.PP +В укороченном (brief) формате отображаются только имена файлов, +расположенные в несколько колонок (от 1 до 9), за счет чего на панели +видно в несколько раз больше имен. +.PP +В расширенном (long) формате содержимое каталога представляется так, как +это делает команда +.BR "ls \-l" . +В этом формате панель занимает весь экран. +.PP +Если вы выберете формат "Определяемый пользователем" ("User"), вы должны +будете задать структуру отображаемой информации. +.PP +При задании структуры вначале указывается размер панели: "half" +(половина экрана) или "full" (весь экран). +.PP +После размера панели можно указать, что на панели должно быть две +колонки. Это делается добавлением цифры 2 в строку задания формата. +.PP +Далее надо перечислить имена полей с необязательным параметром ширины +поля. В качестве имен полей могут использоваться: +.TP +.B name +отображать имя файла. +.TP +.B size +отображать размер файла. +.TP +.B bsize +отображать размер в альтернативной форме, при которой выводятся размеры +файлов, а для каталогов выводится только надпись "ПОД\-КАТ" ("SUB\-DIR") +или "ВВЕРХ" ("UP\-\-DIR"). +.TP +.B type +отображать односимвольное поле типа. Этот символ может принимать +значения из подмножества символов, выводимых командой +.BR "ls \-F" : +.B * +(asterisk) для исполняемых файлов, +.B / +(slash) для каталогов, +.B @ +(at\-sign) для ссылок (links), +.B = +(знак равенства) для сокетов (sockets), +.B \- +дефис (hyphen) для байт\-ориентированных устройств, +.B + +для блок\-ориентированных устройств, +.B | +(pipe) для файлов типа FIFO, +.B ~ +(тильда) для символических ссылок на каталоги, +.B ! +(восклицательный знак) для оборванных (stale) символических ссылок +(ссылок, указывающих в никуда). +.TP +.B mark +Звёздочка (asterisk) если файл помечен, пробел \- если не помечен. +.TP +.B mtime +время последней модификации файла. +.TP +.B atime +время последнего доступа к файлу. +.TP +.B ctime +время последнего изменения файла. +.TP +.B perm +строка, показывающая текущие права доступа к файлу. +.TP +.B mode +восьмеричное представление текущих прав доступа к файлу. +.TP +.B nlink +число ссылок на данный файл. +.TP +.B ngid +идентификатор группы (GID, в цифровой форме). +.TP +.B nuid +идентификатор пользователя (UID, в цифровой форме). +.TP +.B owner +владелец файла. +.TP +.B group +группа, имеющая права на файл. +.TP +.B inode +номер inode файла. +.PP +Вы также можете использовать следующие имена полей для организации +вывода информации на дисплей: +.TP +.B space +Вставить пробел при выводе на дисплей. +.TP +.B | +Вставить вертикальную линию при выводе на дисплей. +.PP +Для того чтобы задать фиксированную ширину поля, нужно добавить +двоеточие ':', после которого указать число позиций, которое отводится +под это поле. Если после числа поставить символ '+', то указанное число +будет интерпретироваться как минимальная ширина поля, и, если экран +позволяет, поле будет расширено. +.PP +Например, +.B Стандартный +формат вывода задаётся строкой: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +а +.B Расширенный +\- строкой: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +А вот пример удобного формата, определяемого пользователем: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +Помимо того, что может задаваться формат вывода на панель списка файлов, +любую панель можно перевести в один из следующих режимов: +.TP +.B Информация +В этом режиме на панель выводится информация о подсвеченном в другой +панели файле и о текущей файловой системе (тип, свободное пространство и +число свободных inode). +.TP +.B Дерево +Режим отображения дерева каталогов подобен тому, который вы увидите, +выбрав пункт +.\"LINK2" +Дерево каталогов +.\"Directory Tree" +из меню "Команды" ("Commands"). Смотрите соответствующий раздел. +.TP +.B Быстрый просмотр +В этом режиме панель переключается на отображение содержимого файла, +подсвеченного в другой панели. Для вывода используется встроенная +.\"LINK2" +программа просмотра файлов\&, +.\"Internal File Viewer" +так что, если переключиться клавишей +.B Tab +в панель просмотра, вы сможете использовать все команды управления просмотром. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH "Порядок сортировки..." +Отображение списка файлов в любой из панелей может производиться в +соответствии с одним из восьми порядков сортировки: +.nf +\- по имени; +\- по расширению; +\- по размеру файла; +\- по времени модификации; +\- по времени последнего обращения к файлу; +\- по времени последнего изменения атрибутов файла; +\- по номеру узла (inode); +\- без сортировки. +.fi +.PP +Порядок сортировки можно выбрать, вызвав диалоговое окно, в котором +кроме того можно указать, что сортировка производится в обратном +порядке (поставив с помощью клавиши +.B пробела +отметку в скобках возле слова "Обратный". +.PP +По умолчанию каталоги отображаются в начале списка, но это можно +изменить, проставив отметку возле опции +.B "Смешивать файлы и каталоги" +пункта меню +.\"LINK2" +Настройки панелей\&. +.\"Panel options" +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Фильтр..." +Пункт меню "Фильтр" позволяет задать шаблон, которому должны +соответствовать имена файлов и каталогов, отображаемых в панели +(например, +.BR "*.tar.gz" ). +.PP +Строка ввода +.\"Input Line Keys" +предназначена для ввода регулярного выражения (маски) для выбора файлов. +Если включена опция +.IR "Только файлы" , +то фильтроваться будут только файлы, а все каталоги будут отображаться +независимо от того, соответствуют они фильтру или нет. В противном случае +фильтроваться будут как файлы, так и каталоги. Если включена опция +.IR "Образцы в стиле shell" , +регулярные выражение строятся по тем же правилам, которые действуют в +оболочке shell ('*' означает ноль или большее число любых символов, а '?' +заменяет один произвольный символ). В противном случае соответствие +файлов/каталогов фильтру определяется по правилам обработки нормальных +регулярных выражений (смотрите ed(1)). Если включена опция +.I "С учётом регистра" , +то фильтрация файлов и каталогов будет производиться с учётом регистра +символов имён. В противном случае регистр символов учитываться не будет. +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Перечитать" +Команда "Перечитать" обновляет список, отображаемый на панели. Это +бывает полезно в тех случаях, когда другие процессы создают или удаляют +файлы. +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH " Файл" +Программа Midnight Commander использует функциональные клавиши +.B F1 \- F10 +как "горячие" клавиши для команд, включенных в меню "Файл". +Escape\-последовательности, генерируемые клавишами +.BR "F1 \- F10" , +соответствуют функциям terminfo +.IR "kf1 \- kf10" . +На терминалах без поддержки функциональных клавиш можно достичь аналогичного +эффекта, нажав клавишу +.BR Esc , +а затем число в диапазоне от 1 до 9 или 0 (соответствует +.B F1 \- F9 +и +.BR F10 ). +.PP +Меню "Файл" содержит следующие команды: +.PP +.B Просмотр файла +.PP +Просмотреть файл, на который указывает подсветка. По умолчанию при этом +вызывается +.\"LINK2" +встроенная программа просмотра\&, +.\"Internal File Viewer" +но, сняв отметку с опции +.I "Встроенный просмотр" +в пункте "Конфигурация" меню "Настройки", можно вызывать внешнюю программу +просмотра, путь к которой должен быть указан в переменной окружения +.BR PAGER . +Если переменная +.B PAGER +не определена, вызывается встроенная программа. Если вместо F3 нажать +F13, встроенная программа просмотра не выполняет предварительного +форматирования или обработки файла. +.P +В разделе +.\"LINK2" +Параметры для внешних редакторов и программ просмотра +.\"Parameters for external editor or viewer" +описано, как можно задать параметры командной строки для внешних программ +просмотра файлов. +.PP +.B Просмотр вывода команды +.PP +По этой команде на экране появляется строка ввода, в которой вы можете +ввести любую команду с параметрами (по умолчанию предлагается +использовать в качестве параметра имя подсвеченного файла). Вывод этой +команды будет отображаться на экране через встроенную программу +просмотра. +.PP +.B Правка +.PP +Вызывается редактор +.BR vi , +либо редактор, указанный в переменной окружения +.BR EDITOR , +либо +.\"LINK2" +встроенный редактор файлов +.\"Internal File Editor" +(если включена опция +.I "Встроенный редактор" +в меню "Настройки / Конфигурация"). +.P +В разделе +.\"LINK2" +Параметры для внешних редакторов и программ просмотра +.\"Parameters for external editor or viewer" +описано, как можно задать параметры командной строки для внешних редакторов. +.PP +.B Копирование +.PP +Вызывается диалоговое окно, в котором предлагается скопировать +подсвеченный файл из каталога, отображаемого в активной панели (или +группу отмеченных файлов, если в активной панели отмечен хотя бы один +файл) в каталог, отображаемый в пассивной панели. Имя каталога, в +который будет производиться копирование, можно изменить. Можно +предварительно резервировать место под новые файлы в каталоге назначения, +выставив конфигурационную опцию preallocate_space. +О том, как задать шаблон для имен копируемых файлов (обычно это "*" +или "^\\(.*\\)$", в зависимости от установки опции +.IR "Образцы в стиле shell" , +и о допустимых символах замены (wildcards) в строке целевого каталога +вы можете узнать, просмотрев раздел +.\"LINK2" +Маски файлов для операций копирования/переименования\&. +.\"Mask Copy/Rename" +.PP +В процессе выполнения копирования можно нажать +.B Esc +для того, чтобы прервать выполнение операции. +.PP +В некоторых системах можно осуществлять копирование в фоновом режиме, +если запустить процесс не кнопкой +.B [Дальше] +диалогового окна, а кнопкой +.B [На фоне] +(или нажав +.B Alt\-b +в диалоговом окне). Используя пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +"Команды/Фоновые задания"\&, +.\"Background Jobs" +можно управлять выполнением фоновых процессов. +.PP +.B Права доступа +.PP +Позволяет изменить права доступа к выделенному или помеченным файлам. +.PP +.B Жесткая ссылка +.PP +Создаёт жесткую ссылку на текущий файл. +.PP +.B Символическая ссылка +.PP +Создаёт абсолютную символическую ссылку на текущий файл. +.PP +.B Относительная символическая ссылка +.PP +Создаёт относительную символическую ссылку на текущий файл. +.PP +Если вы не знаете, что такое ссылки: создание ссылки в некотором смысле +подобно копированию файла, но и исходное имя файла и ссылка указывают +на один и тот же реальный файл на диске. Поэтому, если вы, например, +редактируете файл, то изменения будут появляться в обеих копиях. Синонимами +термина "ссылка" (link) являются термины "алиас" (alias) и "ярлык" (shortcut). +.PP +Жесткая ссылка выглядит как реальный файл. После создания жесткой ссылки +невозможно различить, где исходный файл, а где ссылка. Если вы удаляете +один из этих файлов (точнее одно из этих имен), то файл ещё сохраняется +на диске (пока у него есть хоть одно имя\-ссылка). Очень трудно различить +первоначальное имя файла и позже созданные жесткие ссылки на него. +Поэтому жесткие ссылки применяются там, где отслеживать различия и не +требуется. +.PP +Символическая ссылка \- это ссылка на имя исходного файла. Если исходный +файл удален, символическая ссылка становится бесполезной. Символическую +ссылку легко отличить от первоначального имени файла, и программа +Midnight Commander указывает символические ссылки, выводя знак "@" перед +именем такой ссылки (кроме ссылок на каталоги, которые обозначаются +знаком тильды '~'). Если на экран выводится строка мини\-статуса (опция +.I "Показывать мини\-статус" +включена), то в ней отображается имя исходного файла. Используйте символические +ссылки в тех случаях, когда хотите избежать путаницы, связанной с применением +жестких ссылок. +.PP +Когда вы нажимаете клавиатурное сочетание \fBC\-x s\fR, Midnight Commander +автоматически заполняет поля диалога создания ссылки: имя ссылки и имя файла, +на который будет указывать ссылка. Вы можете изменить их. +.PP +Но иногда требуется, чтобы ссылка указывала на файл не по абсолютному пути, +а по относительному. Абсолютный путь начинается с корневого каталога: +.PP +.I /home/frodo/mc/mc \-> /home/frodo/new/mc +.PP +Относительный путь указывает на расположение файла относительно места, где +будет располагаться создаваемая ссылка: +.PP +.I /home/frodo/mc/mc \-> ../new/mc +.PP +Для того чтобы создать относительную символическую ссылку, используйте +клавиатурное сочетание \fBC\-x v\fR вместо \fBC\-x s\fR. +.PP +.B Владелец/группа +.PP +Позволяет выполнить команду chown. +.PP +.B Права (расширенные) +.PP +Позволяет изменить права доступа и владения файлом. +.PP +.B Переименование +.PP +Вызывается диалоговое окно, в котором предлагается перенести +подсвеченный файл из каталога, отображаемого в активной панели (или +группу отмеченных файлов, если в активной панели отмечен хотя бы один +файл) в каталог, отображаемый в пассивной панели. Имя каталога, в +который будет производиться перенос, можно изменить, воспользовавшись +соответствующей строкой ввода. +.PP +В остальном диалоговое окно аналогично окну, появляющемуся при вызове +команды копировании файлов (смотрите выше). +.PP +.B Создание каталога +.PP +Появляется диалоговое окно и создаётся каталог с введённым именем. +.PP +.B Удаление +.PP +Удаляется файл, имя которого подсвечено (или группа файлов, имена +которых помечены) в активной панели. Операцию можно прервать, нажав +.B C\-c +или +.B Esc +во время её исполнения. +.PP +.B Смена каталога +.\" Quick cd" +.PP +Используйте +.\"LINK2" +быструю смену каталога +.\"The cd internal command" +если вы знаете полный путь к каталогу, в который хотите перейти (который +хотите сделать текущим). +.PP +.B Отметить группу +.PP +Эта команда используется для отметки группы файлов по заданному шаблону. +Midnight Commander выдаст диалоговое окно, в которой надо задать опции +выделения группы файлов и каталогов. Если включена опция +.IR "Только файлы" , +то выделены будут только файлы. Если опция +.I "Только файлы" +выключена, то выделены будут как файлы, так и каталоги. Если включена опция +.IR "Образцы в стиле shell" , +регулярные выражение строятся по тем же правилам, которые действуют в +оболочке shell ('*' означает ноль или большее число любых символов, а '?' +заменяет один произвольный символ). Если опция +.I "Образцы в стиле shell" +выключена, то пометка файлов производится по правилам обработки +нормальных регулярных выражений (смотрите ed (1)). Если включена опция +.I "С учётом регистра" +то пометка файлов и каталогов будет производиться с учётом регистра символов имён. +Если опция +.I "С учётом регистра" +выключена, то регистр символов учитываться не будет. +.PP +.B "Снять отметку" +.PP +Используется для снятия отметки с группы файлов. Эта операция является +обратной по отношению к операции отметки группы файлов и использует те +же правила формирования шаблонов. +.PP +.B Выход +.PP +Выйти из программы Midnight Commander. S\-F10 используется для выхода +в тех ситуациях, когда используется shell wrapper. После S\-F10 +текущим каталогом будет не последний каталог, в котором вы были при +работе в Midnight Commander, а тот, в котором вы были, когда запустили +Midnight Commander. +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Быстрая смена каталога" +Эта команда полезна тогда, когда вы знаете полный путь к каталогу, +который хотите сделать текущим, и желаете использовать встроенную +команду +.\"LINK2" +cd\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.PP +По этой команде вызывается диалоговое окно, в строке ввода которого вы +должны ввести тот путь, который вы ввели бы в командной строке оболочки +при выполнении команды +.BR cd . +.PP +После этого надо нажать клавишу +.BR Enter . +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Меню 'Команды'" +.B Меню пользователя +.PP +Вызывает +.\"LINK2" +меню пользователя\&. +.\"Edit Menu File" +Меню пользователя предоставляет простой способ расширения возможностей +Midnight Commander за счет добавления в личное меню пользователя вызова +часто используемых программ. +.PP +При обращении к пункту меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Дерево каталогов" +.\"Directory Tree" +выводится окно, отображающее структуру каталогов файловой системы. +.PP +Команда +.\"LINK2" +.I "Поиск файла" +.\"Find File" +позволяет найти на диске файл с заданным именем. "Горячие" клавиши \- +.BR Alt\-? . +.PP +Команда +.I "Переставить панели" +меняет местами содержимое правой и левой панелей. "Горячие" клавиши \- +.BR C\-u . +.PP +По команде +.I "Отключить панели" +показывается вывод последней из выполнявшихся команд оболочки. Эта команда +работает только через xterm и на консоли Linux и FreeBSD. "Горячие" клавиши \- +.BR C\-o . +.PP +По команде +.I "Сравнить каталоги" +("горячие" клавиши \fBC\-x d\fR) сравнивается содержимое каталогов, отображаемых +на левой и правой панелях. После сравнения можно воспользоваться командой +.I "Копировать" +для того, чтобы сделать содержимое каталогов одинаковым. Существует +три метода сравнения. При быстром методе сравниваются только размер и +дата создания файлов с одинаковыми именами. При побайтном методе +сравнивается содержимое файлов (побайтно). Этот метод недоступен, если +машина не поддерживает системный вызов mmap(2). При сравнении по размеру +сравниваются только размеры соответствующих файлов, а дата создания не +проверяется. +.PP +Пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Внешняя панелизация" +.\"External panelize" +позволяет выполнить внешнюю программу, сделав ее вывод содержимым +текущей панели (характерный пример \- панелизация вывода команды find). +.PP +Пункт меню +.I "История командной строки" +выводит окно со списком ранее выполнявшихся +команд. Подсвеченную строку из истории можно скопировать в командную +строку оболочки (перемещение подсветки \- клавишами +.BR Up/Down , +копирование \- по клавише +.BR Enter ) + Доступ к истории команд можно получить также по комбинациям клавиш +.B Alt\-p +или +.BR Alt\-n , +однако в этом случае вы не видите окна с перечнем команд. Вместо этого в +командную строку выводится одна команда из списка и по комбинации +.B Alt\-p +происходит смена этой команды на предыдущую, а по +.B Alt\-n +\- на следующую команду из истории команд. +.PP +Пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Каталоги быстрого доступа" +.\"Hotlist" +позволяет создать список каталогов, которые часто используются, и +обеспечить быстрый переход к нужному каталогу из этого списка. +.PP +Пункт меню +.I "Список активных ВФС" +отображает список виртуальных файловых систем, активных на настоящий +момент. Можно перейти на выбранную виртуальную файловую систему. Для +Обновления списка выберите кнопку +.B [Освежить] +в диалоговом окне. +Кнопка +.B [Освободить ВФС сейчас] +поможет при обновлении содержимого архива или при разорванном сетевом +соединении. +.PP +Пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Фоновые задания" +.\"Background Jobs" +отображает список фоновых заданий, запущенных в диалоге +копирования/перемещения кнопкой \fB[В фоне]\fR. +.PP +Пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Список экранов" +.\"Screen selector" +отображает диалоговое окно со списком одновременно работающих в данный +момент встроенных редакторов, программ просмотра и других модулей MC, +поддерживающих такой режим работы. +.PP +После выбора пункта меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Редактировать файл расширений" +.\"Edit Extension File" +вы можете связать с определённым расширением файла (окончанием имени +после последней точки) программу, которая будет запускаться для +обработки (просмотра, редактирования или выполнения) файла с таким +расширением. Запуск выбранной программы будет осуществляться после +установки подсветки на имя файла и нажатия клавиши +.BR Enter . +.PP +Пункт меню +.\"LINK2" +.I "Файл меню" +.\"Edit Menu File" +используется для редактирования пользовательского меню (которое +появляется после нажатия клавиши +.BR F2 ). +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Дерево каталогов" +После выбора пункта меню "Дерево каталогов" появляется окно, в котором +отображена иерархическая структура каталогов. +.PP +Дерево каталогов может быть вызвано двумя способами: через пункт "Дерево +каталогов" из меню "Команды" и пункт "Дерево" из меню правой или левой +панелей. +.PP +Чтобы избавиться от долгих задержек во время создания дерева каталогов, +Midnight Commander создаёт дерево путем просмотра только небольшого +подмножества всех каталогов. Если каталог, который вам нужен, не +отображен, перейдите в его родительский каталог и нажмите +.B C\-r +(или +.BR F2 ). +.PP +Для управления просмотром дерева каталогов могут использоваться +следующие комбинации клавиш: +.TP +Работают все +.\"LINK2" +клавиши управления перемещением\&. +.\"General Movement Keys" +.TP +.B Enter +В окне просмотра дерева каталогов нажатие этой клавиши вызывает выход из +режима просмотра и отображение списка файлов выбранного каталога в +активной панели. При отображении дерева каталогов в одной из панелей при +нажатии клавиши Enter соответствующий каталог отображается во второй +панели, а на текущей панели остается дерево. +.TP +.B C\-r, F2 +Перечитать содержимое каталога. Используется в тех случаях, когда дерево +каталогов не соответствует реальной структуре: некоторые каталоги не +показаны или показаны более не существующие. +.TP +.B F3 +Удалить текущий каталог из дерева. Эта команда используется для удаления +ошибочно отображаемых ветвей дерева. Если вам необходимо вернуть +подкаталог в дерево, перейдите в его родительский каталог и нажмите +клавишу +.BR F2 . +.TP +.B F4 +Переключение между статическим (применяемым по умолчанию) и динамическим +режимами перемещения по дереву. +.TP +В статическом режиме перемещения для выбора каталога (то есть перемещения +подсветки на имя другого каталога) используются только клавиши +.BR Up/Down . +Показываются все известные программе на данный момент подкаталоги. +.TP +В динамическом режиме клавиши +.B Up/Down +используются для перехода на соседний каталог того же уровня. Для перехода +в родительский каталог используется клавиша +.BR Left , +а по клавише +.B Right +происходит переход к потомкам текущего каталога, то есть на один уровень +ниже. При этом отображаются только вышележащие каталоги (включая +родительский и выше), соседние каталоги того же уровня и непосредственные +потомки. Вид дерева каталогов динамически изменяется после каждого перемещения +по дереву. +.TP +.B F5 +Копировать подкаталог (появляется строка ввода, в которой надо указать, +куда копировать). +.TP +.B F6 +Переместить подкаталог. +.TP +.B F7 +Создать подкаталог в текущем (подсвеченном) каталоге. +.TP +.B F8 +Удалить подсвеченный каталог из файловой системы. +.TP +.B C\-s, Alt\-s +Найти следующий каталог, соответствующий заданному шаблону поиска. Если +такого каталога не существует, происходит просто смещение подсветки на +одну строку вниз. +.TP +.B C\-h, Backspace +Удаляет последний символ в строке (шаблоне) поиска. +.TP +.B Любой другой символ +Этот символ добавляется в шаблон поиска и производится перемещение на +имя следующего каталога, удовлетворяющее шаблону. В режиме просмотра +дерева каталогов вначале необходимо активизировать режим поиска +клавишами +.BR C\-s . +Шаблон поиска будет отображаться в строке мини\-статуса. +.PP +Следующие действия возможны только в окне просмотра дерева каталогов и +не поддерживаются при просмотре дерева в одной из панелей: +.TP +.B F1 (Help) +Вызов подсказки с отображением настоящего раздела помощи. +.TP +.B Esc, F10 +Выход из окна дерева каталогов. Смены текущего каталога не происходит. +.PP +В окне просмотра дерева каталогов поддерживается мышка. Двойной щелчок +аналогичен нажатию клавиши +.BR Enter . +Смотрите также секцию о +.\"LINK2" +поддержке мыши\&. +.\"Mouse Support" +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Поиск файлов" +После выбора пункта меню "Поиск файла" появляется диалоговое окно, в котором +запрашивается имя искомого файла и имя каталога, с которого необходимо начинать +поиск. Нажав кнопку +.BR [Дерево] , +можно выбрать начальный каталог поиска из +.\"LINK2" +дерева каталогов\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +.PP +Поле "Шаблон имени" содержит маску имени файла, по которой происходит поиск. +В зависимости от опции "Метасимволы shell" маска интерпретируется либо по тем же +правилам, что и в командной оболочке, либо как регулярное выражение. Пустое +поле также допустимо и соответствует любому имени. +.PP +Поле "Содержимое" позволяет задать текст, который надо найти. Если это поле +пусто, то поиск по содержимому файлов производиться не будет. +.PP +Опция +.I "Только целые слова" +устанавливает, что шаблон поиска соответствует только целым словам (например, +если указано "foo", не будет найдено слово "foobar"). +.PP +Для того чтобы начать поиск, нажмите экранную кнопку +.BR [Дальше] . +Во время поиска его можно приостановить кнопкой +.B [Приостановить] +и продолжить по кнопке +.BR [Продолжить] . +.PP +Список найденных файлов можно просматривать, перемещаясь с помощью +клавиш +.B Up +и +.BR Down . +Кнопка +.B [Перейти] +используется для перехода в каталог, в котором находится подсвеченный +файл. Кнопка +.B [Повтор] +служит для задания параметров нового поиска. Кнопка +.B [Выход] +служит для выхода из режима поиска. Нажатие на кнопку +.B [Панелизация] +приведёт к тому, что результаты поиска будут отображены на текущую +активную панель, так что вы можете производить с выбранными файлами +ещё какие\-то действия (просматривать, копировать, перемещать, удалять +и так далее). Для возврата к обычному списку файлов нужно перейти +в каталог "..". +.PP +Опция +.I "Разрешить игнорирование каталогов" +совместно с расположенным ниже полем ввода позволяет задать список каталогов, +которые нужно пропускать при поиске (например, вы знаете, что искомого файла +нет на CD\-ROM или не хотите искать в каталогах, подключенных через NFS +по очень медленному каналу). Компоненты списка должны быть разделены двоеточиями. +Например +.PP +.nf +/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +Относительные пути также поддерживаются. Следующий пример показывает, как +при поиске пропускать специальные каталоги различных систем управления версиями: +.nf +/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs:.svn:.git:CVS +.fi +.PP +Внимание: поле ввода может содержать точку (.), это означает текущий абсолютный путь. +.PP +Вы можете использовать перенаправление вывода на панель +(см. +.\"LINK2" +Критерий панелизации\&) +.\"External panelize" +для выполнения некоторых усложненных последовательностей действий, в то +время как "Поиск файла" позволяет выполнять только простые запросы. +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " Критерий панелизации" +Пункт меню "Критерий панелизации" (который правильнее было бы назвать +"Перенаправление вывода на панель") позволяет выполнить внешнюю +программу и отобразить вывод этой программы на текущей активной панели. +.PP +Например, если вы хотите выполнить какое\-то действие над всеми +символическими ссылками текущего каталога, вы можете использовать пункт +"Критерий панелизации" для запуска следующей команды: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +.PP +После выполнения этой команды в текущей панели будет отображено не +содержимое соответствующего каталога, а только все символические ссылки, +в нем расположенные. +.PP +Если вы хотите вывести на панель все файлы, которые были скачаны с +вашего FTP\-сайта, вы можете использовать следующую команду для +извлечения нужных имен из файла протокола: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +Если вы захотите, то можете сохранить часто используемые команды +панелизации под отдельными информативными именами, чтобы иметь +возможность их быстро вызвать по этим именам. Для этого нужно набрать +команду в строке ввода и нажать кнопку +.BR [Добавить] . +После этого вам потребуется ввести имя, по которому вы будете вызывать +команду. В следующий раз вам достаточно будет выбрать нужное имя +из списка, а не вводить всю команду заново. +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Каталоги быстрого доступа" +Пункт меню "Каталоги быстрого доступа" служит для вывода списка меток +(условных имен), присвоенных наиболее часто используемым каталогам. Этот +список можно использовать для быстрого перехода в нужный каталог. +Пользуясь диалоговым окном "Каталоги быстрого доступа", вы можете добавить +новую метку в список или удалить ранее созданную пару метка/каталог. Для +добавления метки можно также использовать комбинацию клавиш \fBC\-x h\fR, +по которой текущий каталог добавляется в каталоги быстрого доступа. +Программа выдаст запрос на ввод метки для этого каталога. +.PP +Использование этого пункта меню обеспечивает более быстрый переход к +часто используемым каталогам. Другим способом ускорения процедуры +переключения на часто используемые каталоги является задание переменной +CDPATH (смотрите описание +.\"LINK2" +встроенной команды cd\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Редактировать файл расширений" +Этот пункт меню "Команда" служит для вызова редактора и редактирования +файла +.BR ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini . +Если этот файл не существует и вы не root, этот файл будет скопирован с +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +Если вы root, вы можете выбрать, какой из файлов редактировать: пользовательский +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +или системный +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +Формат этого файла подробно описан в нём самом. +.\"NODE " Background Jobs" +.SH " Фоновые задания" +Этот пункт меню позволяет вам управлять фоновыми заданиями, запущенными +из Midnight Commander (такими заданиями могут быть только операции +копирования и перемещения файлов). Используя этот пункт меню или +"горячие" клавиши \fBC\-x j\fR, +вы можете остановить, возобновить или снять любое из фоновых заданий. +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Редактирование файлов меню" +Файлы меню содержат списки команд для выполнения часто повторяемых +пользователем операций. Эти меню создаются и поддерживаются самими +пользователями. Могут быть созданы три файла меню: в текущем каталоге, в +домашнем каталоге пользователя и общесистемный. Когда вы нажимаете +клавишу +.B F2 +для вызова меню, Midnight Commander вначале ищет файл +.B .mc.menu +в текущем каталоге и отображает соответствующее меню (если находит и +если владельцем этого файла является данный пользователь или root и этот +файл не доступен на запись всем). Если такого файла не найдено, таким же +образом ищется файл +.BR ~/.config/mc/menu , +и в последнюю очередь mc использует общесистемное меню +.BR %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu . +.PP +Формат всех трёх файлов меню одинаков и очень прост. Строки комментариев +начинаются с '#'. Дополнительные комментарии должны начинаться с '#', +пробела или символа табуляции. Строки, начинающиеся с любого символа, +отличного от пробела и символа табуляции, интерпретируются как названия +пунктов меню, причём если первый символ является буквой или цифрой, то +соответствующая клавиша будет служить "горячей" клавишей для вызова +этого пункта меню. Строки, начинающиеся с пробела или символа табуляции, +интерпретируются как команды, которые должны выполняться при вызове +соответствующего пункта меню. Эти строки должны следовать за строкой +названия и их может быть несколько. +.PP +Когда пользователь выбирает какой\-то пункт меню, соответствующие +командные строки копируются во временный файл во временном каталоге +(обычно /usr/tmp) и затем этот файл запускается на выполнение. Это +позволяет пользователю вставлять в команды меню любые конструкции, +допустимые в командном языке оболочки. Можно также использовать +макроподстановки, которые производятся перед выполнением кода меню +(подробнее смотрите в секции +.\"LINK2" +Макроподстановки\&). +.\"Macro Substitution" +.PP +Вот пример файла mc.menu: +.PP +.nf +A Dump the currently selected file + od \-c %f + +B Edit a bug report and send it to root + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Midnight Commander bug" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Read mail + emacs \-f rmail + +N Read Usenet news + emacs \-f gnus + +H Call the info hypertext browser + info + +J Copy current directory to other panel recursively + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + +K Make a release of the current subdirectory + echo \-n "Name of distribution file: " + read tar + ln \-s %d `dirname %d`/$tar + cd .. + tar cvhf ${tar}.tar $tar + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X Extract the contents of a compressed tar file + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Условия выполнения (Default Conditions) +.PP +Каждому пункту меню может предшествовать условие. Строка, задающая +условие, должна содержать символ '=' в первой колонке. Команды, +задаваемые этим пунктом меню, будут выполняться только если условие +выполняется. +.PP +.nf +Синтаксис строки условия: = <sub\-cond> + или: = <sub\-cond> | <sub\-cond> ... + или: = <sub\-cond> & <sub\-cond> ... + +где <sub\-condition> может принимать следующие значения: + + y <pattern> синтаксис текущего файла соответствует шаблону. + Только для меню редактора. + f <pattern> соответствует ли шаблону имя текущего файла? + F <pattern> соответствует ли шаблону файл в пассивной панели? + d <pattern> соответствует ли шаблону имя текущего каталога? + D <pattern> соответствует ли шаблону имя текущего каталога + в пассивной панели? + t <type> соответствует ли тип файла <type>? + T <type> соответствует ли тип файла в пассивной панели <type>? + x <filename> является ли filename исполнимым? + ! <sub\-cond> логическое отрицание условия <sub\-cond> +.fi +.PP +Шаблон (pattern) \- это обычный шаблон оболочки (shell pattern) или +регулярное выражение, в соответствии с опцией "shell patterns". Вы +можете задать значение опции "shell patterns" путем записи строки +"shell_patterns=x" в самую первую строку файла меню (здесь "x" равно 0 +или 1). +.PP +.nf +Типы файлов определяются следующими символами: + + n не каталог + r обычный файл (regular file) + d каталог + l ссылка (link) + c байт\-ориентированное устройство (char special) + b блок\-ориентированное устройство (block special) + f fifo + s socket + x исполняемый файл + t помеченный файл (tagged) +.fi +.PP +Например, 'rlf' означает либо обычный файл, либо ссылку, либо файл типа +fifo. Тип 't' стоит несколько особняком, потому что этот тип +определяется не типом самого файла, а тем, помечен ли файл на панели. +Условие '=t t' истинно, если в текущей панели имеются помеченные файлы, +и ложно, если таковых нет. +.PP +Если условие начинается с "=?" вместо '=', то во время выполнения +проверки условия будет отображаться ход вычисления условия (a debug +trace will be shown whenever the value of the condition is calculated). +.PP +Значение условия вычисляется слева направо. Это значит, что +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +вычисляется как +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +Вот пример использования условий: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L List the contents of a compressed tar\-archive + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Условия включения пункта в меню (Addition Conditions) +.PP +Если строка условия начинается с '+' (или "+?") вместо '=' (или "=?") \- +это условие трактуется как условие включения данного пункта в меню. Если +условие истинно, пункт включается в отображаемое на экране меню, если +условие не выполняется \- не включается. +.PP +Вы можете использовать одно и то же условие и как условие выполнения и +как условие включения пункта в меню, если начнете строку условия с "+=" +или "=+" (если надо отображать ход вычисления, то с "+=?" или "=+?"). +Если вы хотите использовать два разных условия, одно для включения в +меню, а другое \- для выполнения, надо предпослать пункту меню две строки +условий, одну \- начинающуюся с '+', и другую \- начинающуюся с '='. +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH "Меню 'Настройки'" +Программа Midnight Commander имеет ряд установок (опций), каждая из +которых может быть включена или выключена, для чего служат несколько +диалоговых окон, доступных через меню "Настройки". Опция включена, если +поставлена звёздочка или знак "x" в скобках перед названием опции. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Конфигурация +.\"Configuration" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы можете поменять большинство +установок программы Midnight Commander. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Внешний вид +.\"Layout" +служит для задания настроек, определяющих положение и вид окна программы +mc на экране. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Настройки панелей +.\"Panel options" +служит для задания настроек панелей файлового менеджера. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Подтверждение +.\"Confirmation" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы указываете, на выполнение каких +действий программа будет требовать подтверждения. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Оформление +.\"Appearance" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы можете выбрать скин. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Биты символов +.\"Display bits" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы указываете, в каком формате ваш +терминал будет обрабатывать (вводить и отображать на дисплее) +информацию, представленную байтами (например, записанную в файле). +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Распознавание клавиш +.\"Learn keys" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы можете протестировать работу +некоторых клавиш, которые работают не на всех типах терминалов, и +связать ту реакцию системы, которая должна была последовать за нажатием +отсутствующей клавиши, с нажатием другой клавиши или комбинации клавиш. +.PP +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Виртуальные ФС +.\"Virtual FS" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы можете задать значения некоторых +параметров, связанных с использованием виртуальных файловых систем. +.PP +По команде +.\"LINK2" +Сохранить настройки +.\"Save Setup" +введённые значения параметров сохраняются в ini\-файле программы. +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Конфигурация" +Параметры конфигурации, задаваемые в этом окне, делятся на несколько +групп: "Параметры операций с файлами", "Клавиша Esc", "Пауза после +исполнения" и "Прочие настройки". +.PP +.B Параметры операций с файлами +.PP +.IR "Детали операций" . +Этот переключатель определяет, будет ли при выполнении операций +копирования, перемещения и удаления выводится дополнительное окно, +отображающее ход выполнения операции. Если у вас медленный терминал, вы +можете отключить этот вывод. Он отключается автоматически, если скорость +вашего терминала меньше 9600 bps. +.PP +.IR "Подсчитывать общий размер" . +Если эта опция включена, Midnight Commander перед выполнением операций +копирования, перемещения и удаления подсчитывает общее число +обрабатываемых файлов и их суммарный размер и показывает ход выполнения +операции над этими файлами в виде диаграммы\-полоски (правда, это слегка +замедляет выполнение операций). Эта опция не работает, если выключена +опция +.IR "Детали операций" . +.PP +.IR "Обычный индикатор прогресса" . +Если эта опция включена, индикатор прогресса файловых операций (копирование, +перемещение, удаление) всегда увеличивается слева направо. Если опция +выключена, направление увеличения индикатора прогресса совпадает с направлением +файловой операции: с левой панели на правую или наоборот. По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Автоимя каталога" . +При создании нового каталога по F7 в поле ввода имени нового каталога +будет автоматически подставляться имя файла или каталога, находящегося +под курсором. По умолчанию выключено. +.PP +.IR "Выделять место" . +Если возможно, предварительно выделять место под весь копируемый файл. +По умолчанию выключено. +.PP +.B Клавиша Esc +.PP +По умолчанию Midnight Commander трактует нажатие на клавишу Esc как +действие, предшествующее нажатию какой\-то другой клавиши и совместно +обрабатывает комбинацию +.BR Esc\-key . +Поэтому вы должны нажимать Esc дважды, чтобы закрыть диалог. Но существует +возможность использовать однократное нажатие Esc для этого действия. +.PP +.IR "Однократное нажатие" . +По умолчанию эта опция выключена. Если вы её включите, то программа будет +ожидать нажатия второй клавиши только в течение некоторого временного +интервала (см. ниже опцию +.IR "Интервал" ), +и если за это время ни одна клавиша не нажата, то Esc интерпретируется +как команда "Отмена" (Esc Esc). +.PP +.IR Интервал . +Эта опция используется для задания временного интервала (в микросекундах) +для использования однократного нажатия на клавишу Esc. По умолчанию этот +интервал равен 1 секунде (1000000 микросекунд). Кроме того, этот интервал +может быть установлен через переменную окружения KEYBOARD_KEY_TIMEOUT_US +(также в микросекундах), которая имеет приоритет над над значением этой +опции. +.PP +.B Пауза после исполнения +.PP +После выполнения вашей команды Midnight Commander может обеспечить +паузу, чтобы вы могли просмотреть и изучить вывод команды. Есть три +варианта установки этой опции: +.PP +.IR Никогда . +Это значит, что вы не хотите видеть вывод команды. На консоли Linux или +FreeBSD или при использовании xterm вы можете просмотреть этот вывод, +нажав C\-o. +.PP +.IR "На \(lqтупых\(rq терминалах" . +Пауза будет создаваться на терминалах, которые не способны обеспечить +показ вывода последней из выполнявшихся команд (это любые терминалы, +отличные от xterm или консоли Linux). +.PP +.IR Всегда . +Программа обеспечит паузу после выполнения любой команды. +.PP +.B Прочие настройки +.PP +.IR "Встроенный редактор" . +Если эта опция включена, то для редактирования файлов вызывается +встроенный редактор. Если опция выключена, то будет использоваться +редактор, указанный в переменной окружения +.BR EDITOR . +Если такой редактор не задан, будет вызываться +.B vi +Смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +Встроенный редактор файлов\&. +.\"Internal File Editor" +.PP +.IR "Встроенный просмотр" . +Если эта опция включена, для просмотра файлов вызывается встроенная +программа просмотра. Если опция выключена, вызывается программа, +указанная в переменной окружения +.BR PAGER . +Если такая программа не задана, используется команда +.BR view . +Смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +Встроенная программа просмотра файлов\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.PP +.IR "Автоматические меню" . +Если эта опция включена, пользовательское меню будет автоматически +вызываться на экран при запуске программы. Это бывает полезно, если на +компьютере работают неопытные пользователи (операторы), которые должны +выполнять только стандартные операции. +.PP +.IR "Спрашивать имя нового файла" . +Если эта опция включена, то перед открытием нового файла в редакторе +будет запрошено его имя. +.PP +.IR "Выпадение меню при вызове" . +Если эта опция включена, то при вызове главного меню нажатием клавиши +.B F9 +будет сразу отображаться перечень пунктов меню (выпадающее меню). +В противном случае активизируются только пункты главного меню, и вы должны +(после выбора одного из них клавишами стрелок) нажать клавишу +.B Enter +либо выбрать нужный пункт по "горячей" клавише и только после этого +получите возможность выбрать пункт выпадающего меню. +.PP +.IR "Образцы в стиле shell" . +По умолчанию команды Select, Unselect и Filter используют регулярные +выражения, которые строятся по правилам, действующим в оболочке (shell\- +like regular expressions). Для того чтобы достичь такого эффекта, +выполняются следующие преобразования: '*' заменяется на '.*' (ноль или +больше символов); '?' заменяется на '.' (в точности один символ) и '.' +заменяется на обычную точку. Если опция выключена, то регулярные +выражения должны строиться так, как описано в ed(1). +.PP +.IR "Дополнение: показывать всё" . +В процессе ввода команд Midnight Commander может выполнять +.\"LINK2" +Завершение ввода +.\"Completion" +при нажатии на клавиши +.BR Alt\-Tab , +пытаясь угадать окончание вводимой команды. По умолчанию при первом +нажатии +.B Alt\-Tab +он ищет все возможные варианты завершения и, если завершения +неоднозначны (имеется много разных вариантов), то только издаёт звуковой +сигнал. При втором нажатии +.B Alt\-Tab +отображаются все возможные завершения. Если вы хотите видеть все +возможные варианты завершения после первого нажатия +.BR Alt\-Tab , +включите эту опцию. +.PP +.IR "Вращающийся индикатор" . +Если эта опция включена, Midnight Commander отображает в верхнем правом +углу вращающуюся черточку как индикатор того, что выполняется какое\-то +задание (операция). +.PP +.IR "Смена каталога по ссылкам" . +Установка этой опции приводит к тому, что Midnight Commander будет +следовать логической цепочке подкаталогов при выполнении команд смены +каталога как в панели, так и по команде +.BR cd . +Так же ведёт себя по умолчанию bash. Если же опция не включена, Midnight +Commander будет при выполнении команды +.B cd +следовать реальной структуре каталогов, так что если вы вошли в текущий +каталог по ссылке на него, то по команде +.B "cd .." +вы окажетесь в его родительском каталоге, а не в том каталоге, где +расположена ссылка. +.PP +.IR "Безопасное удаление" . +Если эта опция включена, непреднамеренно удалить файл будет сложнее. В +диалоговых окнах подтверждения удаления предлагаемая по умолчанию кнопка +изменяется с +.B [Да] +на +.BR [Нет] . +По умолчанию эта опция выключена. +.PP +.IR "Безопасная перезапись" . +Если эта опция включена, непреднамеренно перезаписать файл будет сложнее. В +диалоговом окне подтверждения перезаписи предлагаемая по умолчанию кнопка +изменяется с +.B [Да] +на +.BR [Нет] . +По умолчанию эта опция выключена. +.PP +.IR "Автосохранение настроек" . +Если эта опция включена, то при выходе из программы Midnight Commander +значения всех настраиваемых параметров сохраняются в файле +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini . +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Внешний вид" +Диалоговое окно "Внешний вид" даёт вам возможность изменить некоторые +параметры отображения на экране главного окна программы Midnight +Commander. Параметры, задаваемые в этом окне, делятся на несколько +групп: "Разбиение панелей", "Консольный вывод" и "Прочие настройки". +.PP +.B Разбиение панелей +.PP +Большую часть экрана занимают файловые панели. Вы можете указать, +каким должно быть расположение панелей: +.I вертикальное +или +.IR горизонтальное . +Изменить расположение панелей можно также с помощью клавиатурного сочетания +Alt\-, (Alt\-запятая). +.PP +.IR "Равные размеры" . +По умолчанию панели имеют равные размеры. Эта опция позволяет изменить их. +.PP +.BR "Консольный вывод" . +.PP +Эта опция доступна, если Midnight Commander запущен на консоли Linux или +FreeBSD. Она устанавливает число строк, которые будут оставлены для отображения +вывода команды. +.PP +.B Прочие настройки +.PP +.IR "Линейка меню" . +Если включено, основное меню программы будет отображаться постоянно вверху +экрана. По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Командная строка" . +Если включено, в нижней части экрана будет доступна командная строка. +По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Метки клавиш" . +Если включено, внизу экрана будут отображаться 10 меток, соответствующих +функциональным клавишам +.BR "F1 \- F10" . +По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Строка подсказки". +Если включено, ниже панелей будут отображаться однострочные подсказки +по приёмам работы в Midnight Commander. По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Заголовок xterm" . +При исполнении в эмуляторе терминала системы X11 Midnight Commander +отображает в заголовке xterm текущий каталог и изменяет этот заголовок +при необходимости. Если ваш эмулятор терминала неисправен и вы видите +неверный заголовок при старте или изменении каталога, выключите эту опцию. +По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Свободное место" . +Если включено, на нижней рамке панели будет показано свободное место и общий +размер текущей файловой системы. По умолчанию включено. +.\"NODE " Panel options" +.SH " Настройки панелей" +.B Основные настройки панелей +.PP +.IR "Показывать мини\-статус" . +Если включено, в нижней части каждой панели выводится строка информации +о выделенном подсветкой файле или каталоге каждой панели. По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Размеры в единицах СИ" . +Если эта опция включена, то Midnight Commander отображает размеры файлов +и каталогов с префиксами СИ (по основанию 10). По умолчанию опция выключена. +В этом случае Midnight Commander отображает размеры с префиксами МЭК (по +основанию 2). +.PP +.IR "Смешивать файлы/каталоги" . +Если эта опция включена, имена файлов и каталогов отображаются вперемежку. +Если опция выключена, каталоги (и ссылки на каталоги) показываются в начале +списка, а имена файлов \- после имен всех каталогов. По умолчанию выключено. +.PP +.IR "Показывать резервные (Backup) файлы" . +Если эта опция выключена, Midnight Commander не показывает файлы, имена которых +заканчиваются на '~' (подобно ключу \-B команды ls в GNU). По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Показывать скрытые файлы" . +Если эта опция включена, Midnight Commander показывает все файлы, имена которых +начинаются точкой (как ls \-a). По умолчанию включено. +.PP +.IR "Быстрая загрузка каталога" . +По умолчанию эта опция выключена. Если вы активизируете её, Midnight +Commander будет использовать для вывода содержимого каталога следующий трюк: +содержимое каталога перечитывается только в том случае, если изменилась +запись в i\-node каталога, то есть если в каталоге создавались или удалялись +файлы; если изменялись только записи в i\-node файлов каталога (изменялся +размер файла, режим доступа или владелец и т.п.) содержимое панели +не обновляется. В этом случае (если опция включена) вы должны обновлять список +файлов вручную (используя клавиатурное сочетание C\-r). +.PP +.IR "Отметка перемещает курсор" . +Когда вы отмечаете файл (клавишей +.BR Insert ), +то по умолчанию подсветка на имени файла смещается на одну строку вниз. +.PP +.IR "Инвертировать только файлы" . +Если опция включена (по умолчанию она включена), инвертирование +выбора применяется только к файлам, но не к каталогам. Выбор каталогов +не изменяется. Если не установлена, производится инвертирование как файлов, +так и каталогов. Все невыбранные объекты становятся выбранными и наоборот. +.PP +.IR "Простая перестановка" . +Если обе панели содержат списки файлов и каталогов, простая перестановка +представляет собой изменение расположения панелей на экране: правая панель +становится левой и наоборот. Если эта опция выключена, панели со списками файлов +обмениваются своим содержимым, сохраняя формат списка и параметры сортировки. +По умолчанию выключено. +.PP +.IR "Автосохранение настроек панелей" . +Если опция включена (по умолчанию она выключена), то при выходе из +Midnight Commander'а текущие настройки панелей сохраняются в файле +~/.config/mc/panels.ini. +.PP +.B Навигация +.PP +.IR "Навигация в стиле lynx" . +Если эта опция включена, вы имеете возможность использовать клавиши +.B Rigth +для перехода в подсвеченный в данный момент каталог и +.B Left +для перехода в родительский по отношению к текущему каталог (при условии, +что командная строка пуста). По умолчанию опция выключена. +.PP +.IR "Страничное листание" . +Если опция установлена (по умолчанию она установлена), то когда курсор +(подсветка) достигает конца или начала списка файлов, отображаемого на +панели, будет производиться смещение на половину этого списка (то есть +половина отображаемого списка остается на экране, а половина пропадает, +заменяясь следующими пунктами общего списка). Если опция не установлена, +происходит смещение только на одну строку. +.PP +.IR "Страничное листание мышью" . +Определяет, будет ли прокрутка информации (scrolling) в панелях, +осуществляемая с помощью мышки, производиться страницами или на одну +строку. +.PP +.IR "Центрированное листание" . +Если эта опция включена, содержимое панели будет пролистываться, а курсор +будет находиться в середине колонки списка файлов. Эта опция не применяется +к страничному листанию \- в этом случае позиция курсора изменится. +.PP +.B Расцветка файлов +.PP +По умолчанию вся информация отображаются одним цветом, но вы можете +сделать так, чтобы +.I права доступа +и +.I типы файлов +были выделены другими +.\"LINK2" +цветами\&. +.\"Colors" +Если включено выделение цветом прав доступа, поля +.I perm +и +.I mode +в +.\"LINK2" +форматах вывода\&, +.\"Listing Format..." +показывающие права пользователя, запустившего программу Midnight +Commander, выделены цветом, определённым ключевым словом +.IR selected . +Если разрешено, подсветка имён файлов производится на основании +правил из файла %sysconfdir%/mc/filehighlight.ini. Смотрите +.\"LINK2" +Подсветка имён файлов +.\"Filenames Highlight" +для получения большей информации. +.PP +.B Быстрый поиск +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Быстрый поиск файлов +.\"Quick search" +может работать в одном из трёх режимов: с учётом регистра имён файлов, +без учёта регистра или в соответствии с порядком сортировки файлов в панели: +с учётом регистра или без. Режим по умолчанию \- использование порядка +сортировки файлов в панели. +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Подтверждения" +Используя это диалоговое окно, вы можете сделать так, чтобы перед +выполнением операций удаления, перезаписи файла, запуска файла на выполнение, +перед выходом из программы MC, перед удалением каталога из каталогов быстрого +доступа, а также перед очисткой истории выдавался дополнительный запрос +на подтверждение. +.\"NODE " Appearance" +.SH " Оформление" +Используя это диалоговое окно, вы можете выбрать скин и разрешить отрисовку +теней у диалоговых окон и выпадающих меню. +.PP +Для получения более подробной информации о скинах обратитесь к разделу +.\"LINK2" +Внешний вид\&. +.\"Skins" +.PP +.I Тени. +Если эта опция включена, все диалоговые окна и выпадающие меню будут иметь +тени. +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Биты символов..." +Этот пункт меню используется для задания диапазона отображаемых на +дисплее символов. Если терминал поддерживает только 7\-битный вывод, то +нужно выбрать установку "7 бит". Выбрав "ISO\-8859\-1" вы получите все +символы из таблицы ISO\-8859\-1, а выбор установки "Полный 8\-битный вывод" +имеет смысл на тех терминалах, которые могут отображать все 8\-битовые +символы. +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Распознавание клавиш..." +Пункт +.\"LINK2" +Распознавание клавиш (Learn keys) +.\"Learn keys" +вызывает диалоговое окно, в котором вы можете протестировать работу +некоторых клавиш ( +.BR "F1 \- F20, Home, End" ), +которые работают не на всех типах терминалов. +.PP +В диалоговом окне появляется таблица с названиями клавиш, которые могут +тестироваться. Вы можете перемещать подсветку по названиям, используя +клавишу +.B Tab +или клавиши, применяемые в редакторе vi ('h' влево, 'j' вниз, 'k' вверх, +'l' вправо). Если один раз нажать на клавиши со стрелками, после чего возле +их названий в таблице появится пометка +.IR OK , +то их тоже можно будет использовать для управления перемещением. +.PP +Для тестирования работы клавиш нужно нажать каждую клавишу из +перечисленных в таблице. Если она работает нормально, возле её названия +в таблице появится пометка +.IR OK . +После появления такой пометки клавиша начинает работать в её обычном режиме. +Например, первое нажатие на клавишу +.B F1 +приводит только к появлению пометки (если она работает нормально), а при +следующих нажатиях будет вызываться окно подсказки. То же самое +относится к клавишам стрелок. Клавиша +.B Tab +работает всегда. +.PP +Если какая\-то клавиша не работает, то после нажатия на неё пометка +.I OK +не появится. В таком случае можно связать ту реакцию системы, которая +должна была последовать за нажатием неработающей (отсутствующей) +клавиши, с нажатием другой клавиши или комбинации клавиш. Для этого надо +переместить подсветку на название неработающей клавиши (используя мышь +или клавишу +.BR Tab ) +и нажать +.B Enter +или клавишу +.BR пробела . +Должно появиться окно красного цвета, в котором вас просят нажать +клавишу, которая будет использоваться вместо неработающей. Для отмены +операции нажмите +.B Esc +и дождитесь, пока красное окно исчезнет. Либо выберите и нажмите ту +комбинацию клавиш, которая будет служить заменой для неработающей +клавиши (и тоже дождитесь закрытия окна). +.PP +Когда закончите тестирование и настройку всех клавиш, вы можете +сохранить эти настройки в секции [terminal:TERM] вашего файла +.B ~/.config/mc/ini +(где TERM \- название используемого терминала) либо отказаться от +запоминания изменений. Если все клавиши работают нормально, то +сохранение, конечно, не требуется. +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " Виртуальные файловые системы" +Этот пункт меню позволяет задать некоторые параметры кэширования +информации о +.\"LINK2" +виртуальных файловых системах\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.PP +С целью ускорения доступа к файлам Midnight Commander сохраняет в +оперативной памяти информацию, относящуюся к некоторым виртуальным +файловым системам (например, списки файлов в каталогах удалённых +ftp\-серверов). +.PP +Кроме того, для получения доступа к содержимому сжатых архивов +(например, сжатых tar\-файлов) Midnight Commander создаёт временные файлы +на жестком диске. +.PP +Поскольку в обоих этих случаях расходуются ресурсы компьютера, у вас +может появиться желание настроить некоторые параметры таким образом, +чтобы уменьшить эти расходы или повысить скорость доступа к часто +используемым файловым системам. +.PP +Файловая система архиватора tar очень разумно организует работу с +архивными файлами: она сохраняет на диске структуру каталогов архива и, +когда возникает необходимость обращения к информации из tar\-файла, +использует этот список для извлечения нужного файла. +.PP +В общем случае tar\-файлы обычно хранятся в сжатом виде (простые +tar\-файлы \- вымирающее явление), и в силу природы таких файлов +(структура подкаталогов для tar\-файлов недоступна для мгновенной +загрузки/отображения), файловая система tar должна разархивировать файлы +на диск во временный каталог и затем представить обращение к +разархивированным файлам как обращение к tar\-файлу. +.PP +А поскольку мы все любим быстро пролистывать файлы и хранить их в виде +tar\-архивов, стало самой обычной ситуацией когда сначала просматривают +такой файл, выходят из него, а потом обращаются к нему снова. Поскольку +разархивация \- операция медленная, Midnight Commander кеширует +информацию в памяти на некоторое время. По истечении этого интервала +времени все ресурсы, выделенные этой файловой системе, будут +освобождены. По умолчанию величина этого интервала устанавливается +равной 1 минуте. Смотрите также +.\"LINK2" +Файловая система tar\&. +.\"Tar File System" +.PP +Файловая система FTP сохраняет список каталогов, полученный с +FTP\-сервера, в памяти (в кеше). Время, в течение которого этот список +хранится в кеше, задаётся опцией +.I Тайм\-аут кеша каталога FTP. +Слишком маленькое значение этого параметра будет замедлять все операции +с файловой системой ftp, потому что каждое обращение к ней будет +означать реальное обращение к удалённому ftp\-серверу. +.PP +Кроме того, в том же диалоговом окне можно задать имя прокси\-сервера +(proxy host), который будет использоваться для перекачки файлов по ftp и +сконфигурировать Midnight Commander таким образом, чтобы всегда работать +через прокси\-сервер. +.PP +.I Пароль анонимного FTP: +\- пароль, используемый когда вы регистрируетесь как анонимный пользователь +"anonymous". Для некоторых сайтов требуется полноценный электронный адрес, +с другой стороны, вероятно, вы не захотите указывать свой настоящий +электронный адрес для сайтов, которым не доверяете, особенно если +не используется фильтрация нежелательной корреспонденции. +.PP +Также можно разрешить использование файла +.BR ~/.netrc , +содержащего имена пользователей и пароли серверов FTP. +Формат файла .netrc описан в .netrc (5). +.PP +Смотрите раздел о +.\"LINK2" +файловой системе FTP +.\"FTP File System" +для получения дополнительной информации. +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Сохранение установок" +При загрузке Midnight Commander пытается считать значения различных +установочных параметров из файла +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini . +Если такого файла не существует, необходимая информация ищется в +общесистемном конфигурационном файле +.BR mc.ini . +Этот файл располагается в каталоге, путь к которому можно определить, +запустив команду +.BR "mc \-f" . +(это можно сделать даже из командной строки MC). Если и этого файла не +существует, +.I MC +использует установки по умолчанию. +.PP +Команда +.I Сохранить настройки +создаёт файл +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini , +в котором записываются текущие значения параметров, задаваемых опциями +меню +.\"LINK2" +Левая, Правая +.\"Left and Right Menus" +и +.\"LINK2" +Настройки\&. +.\"Options Menu" +.PP +Если вы включите опцию +.I Автосохранение настроек +(пункт меню "Настройки/Конфигурация"), +.I MC +будет автоматически сохранять текущие настройки при выходе из программы. +.PP +Значения некоторых параметров не могут быть изменены через пункты меню. +Для изменения значений этих параметров вы должны отредактировать файл +настроек с помощью какой\-либо программы\- редактора. Подробнее об этих +параметрах смотрите в разделе +.\"LINK2" +.I Специальные установки\&. +.\"Special Settings" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Выполнение команд операционной системы" +Для того чтобы во время работы с MC запустить любую команду ОС, вы +должны либо набрать имя соответствующей программы в командной строке, +либо выбрать имя программы в одной из панелей (переместив подсветку на +имя файла программы), а затем нажать клавишу +.BR Enter . +.PP +Если вы нажимаете клавишу +.B Enter +в тот момент, когда подсветка указывает на имя файла, не являющегося +исполняемым, Midnight Commander сравнивает расширение выбранного файла +с расширениями, прописанными в +.\"LINK2" +файле расширений\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +Если в файле расширений найдется подраздел, задающий процедуры обработки +файлов с данным расширением, то обработка файла производится в +соответствии с заданными в этом подразделе командами. Перед обработкой +выполняются простые +.\"LINK2" +макроподстановки\&. +.\"Macro Substitution" +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH " Встроенная команда cd" +Команда +.I cd +не передаётся на исполнение оболочке, а интерпретируется самой +программой Midnight Commander. Поэтому при её запуске возможны не все +удобные макрорасширения и подстановки, доступные в оболочке, а только +часть из них: +.PP +.I Замена тильды +Символ тильды (~) будет заменен именем вашего домашнего каталога, а если +вы добавите после тильды имя пользователя, эта конструкция будет +заменена на имя домашнего каталога указанного пользователя. +.PP +Например, ~guest \- это домашний каталог пользователя guest, в то время +как ~/guest \- это каталог guest в вашем домашнем каталоге. +.PP +.I Предыдущий каталог +вы можете перейти в предыдущий каталог, используя специальное имя '\-', +то есть выполнив команду: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I Каталоги в CDPATH +Если каталог, указанный команде +.BR cd , +не является подкаталогом текущего каталога, то Midnight Commander +использует значение переменной окружения +.B CDPATH +для поиска указанного каталога во всех каталогах, перечисленных в этой +переменной. +.PP +Например, если переменной +.B CDPATH +присвоено значение +.BR ~/src:/usr/src , +то из любого места в файловой системе вы сможете перейти в любой +подкаталог каталогов +.B ~/src +и +.BR /usr/src , +используя только относительные имена (cd linux вызовет переход в +/usr/src/linux). +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Макроподстановки" +Перед выполнением команд, задаваемых пунктами +.\"LINK2" +пользовательского меню\&, +.\"Edit Menu File" +вызываемых +.\"LINK2" +по расширению имени файла\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +или запускаемых из командной строки ввода, вначале выполняются простые +макроподстановки. +.PP +.TP +.I "%i" +Отступ из пробелов, равный текущему положению курсора. Только для меню +редактора. +.TP +.I "%y" +Тип синтаксиса текущего файла. Только для меню редактора. +.TP +.I "%k" +Имя файла блока редактора. +.TP +.I "%e" +Имя файла протокола ошибок исполнения сценариев редактора. +.TP +.I "%m" +Имя текущего файла меню. +.TP +.I "%f" и "%p" +В файле меню файлового менеджера: текущее имя файла в активной панели. +В файле меню встроенного редактора: имя открытого файла. +.TP +.I "%x" +Расширение текущего файла. +.TP +.I "%b" +Имя текущего файла без расширения. +.TP +.I "%d" +Имя текущего каталога. +.TP +.I "%F" +Текущее имя файла в неактивной панели. +.TP +.I "%D" +Имя текущего каталога в неактивной панели. +.TP +.I "%t" +Отмеченные файлы. +.TP +.I "%T" +Файлы, отмеченные в неактивной панели. +.TP +.I "%u" и "%U" +Подобны макросам %t и %T, но дополнительно снимается отметка с файлов. +Их можно использовать в скриптах, заданных для пункта меню или +ассоциированных с расширением файла, только один раз, поскольку после их +использования помеченных файлов не будет. +.TP +.I "%s" и "%S" +Выбранные файлы: помеченные файлы, если такие есть; в противном случае +файл, имя которого подсвечено. +.TP +.I "%cd" +Это специальный макрос, используемый для перехода из текущего каталога в +каталог, указанный перед этим макросом. Используется в основном для +обращения к +.\"LINK2" +виртуальным файловым системам\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.TP +.I "%view" +Этот макрос используется для вызова встроенной программы просмотра. +Может использоваться как с аргументами, так и без них. Если заданы +аргументы, они должны быть заключены в фигурные скобки. +.IP +Аргументами могут быть: +.I ascii +\- для перевода программы просмотра в режим ascii; +.I hex +\- для перевода программы просмотра в режим hex; +.I nroff +\- для указания программе просмотра, что необходимо интерпретировать +выделенные (bold) и подчеркнутые последовательности nroff; +.I unformatted +\- указывает программе просмотра, что не нужно использовать команды +nroff для выделения или подчеркивания текста; +.TP +.I "%%" +Символ % +.TP +.I "%{любой текст}" +Запрос на подстановку. Будет выдаваться окно ввода, а текст из скобок +выводится как подсказка. Макрос заменяется на текст, введённый +пользователем в окне ввода. Пользователь может нажать Esc или F10 для +того, чтобы отказаться от ввода. Этот макрос пока не работает в +командной строке. +.TP +.I "%var{ENV\-VAR:default}" +Этот макрос будет заменяться на значение переменной окружения ENV\-VAR, +если она установлена, в противном случае будет использовано значение +default. Это подобно конструкции ${VAR\-def} в оболочке Борна. +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " Поддержка subshell" +Поддержка subshell \- это опция компиляции, которая работает с оболочками +bash, tcsh и zsh. +.PP +Если поддержка subshell включена, то Midnight Commander будет порождать +точную копию (a concurrent copy) вашей оболочки (которая определена в +переменной окружения +.B SHELL +или, если эта переменная не определена, в файле /etc/passwd) и запускать +её в псевдо\-терминале, вместо того, чтобы каждый раз вызывать новую +оболочку для выполнения команды. Введённая команда передаётся subshell. +Это позволяет изменять значения переменных окружения, использовать +функции shell и определять алиасы (aliases), которые будут действовать +до выхода из программы Midnight Commander. +.PP +Если вы используете +.BR bash , +можно указать команды, которые будут выполняться при запуске +subshell, в файле +.B ~/.local/share/mc/bashrc +и специальную карту раскладки клавиатуры в файле +.BR ~/.local/share/mc/inputrc . +Если вы используете +.BR zsh , +можно указать команды, которые будут выполняться при запуске +subshell, в файле +.B ~/.local/share/mc/.zshrc . +Пользователи +.B tcsh +могут задать выполняемые при запуске команды в файле +.BR ~/.local/share/mc/tcshrc . +.PP +Во время выполнения приложения в subshell можно в любой момент нажать +комбинацию клавиш +.B C\-o +для переключения в Midnight Commander (выполняемая команда или +приложение будут остановлены). Если вы прервали таким образом исполнение +команды, вы не сможете запустить другую внешнюю команду, пока не +завершите работу остановленного приложения. +.PP +Особенностью использования subshell является то, что подсказка (prompt), +выводимая Midnight Commander будет той же самой, что и в вашей обычной +оболочке. +.PP +В разделе +.\"LINK2" +Опции запуска +.\"OPTIONS" +приведена дополнительная информация о том, как можно управлять +(настроить) subshell. +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Права доступа" +Диалоговое окно "Права доступа" предоставляет удобный интерфейс к +команде chmod \- команде изменения атрибутов доступа к файлам и +каталогам. Доступ к этому окну можно получить по "горячей" комбинации +клавиш \fBC\-x c\fR. +.PP +Диалоговое окно "Права доступа" состоит из двух частей: "\fIПрава доступа\fR" +и "\fIФайл\fR". +.PP +В части "Файл" отображается имя файла или каталога и права доступа на +него в восьмеричной форме, а также указаны владелец и группа файла. +.PP +В части "Права доступа" расположены двенадцать кнопок-флажков, каждая +из которых соответствует одному атрибуту доступа. Изменять установки +атрибутов можно двумя способами. +.PP +При первом способе непосредственно изменяется состояние кнопок-флажков. +Для изменения значений атрибутов надо выбрать соответствующую кнопку +и нажать клавишу +.BR пробела . +.PP +Для перемещения по кнопкам можно использовать +.B клавиши\-стрелки +или клавишу +.BR Tab . +Изменяемые атрибуты помечаются звёздочкой, и предполагаемое значение всех +прав доступа в восьмеричном представлении сразу же отображаются в части +окна "Файл". +.PP +Для того чтобы выбранные вами значения атрибутов прав доступа вступили +в силу, надо нажать клавишу +.B Enter +или экранную кнопку +.BR [Установить] . +Для отказа от изменения атрибутов нужно нажать кнопку +.BR [Прервать] . +Вместо выбора экранных кнопок можно воспользоваться "горячими" клавишами +соответствующих кнопок-флажков. +.PP +Изменять права доступа к отдельному файлу можно только этим способом. +Если вы хотите изменить атрибуты прав доступа сразу группы файлов или +каталогов, вы тоже можете воспользоваться этим способом, только вместо +экранной кнопки +.B [Установить] +или клавиши +.B Enter +должны выбрать кнопку \fB[Установить всё]\fR. +.PP +Второй способ заключается в том, что вы сначала помечаете те атрибуты, +которые хотите изменить, с помощью клавиш +.B Ins +или +.BR t . +Обратите внимание, что состояния кнопок-флажков при этом не изменяется. +После этого вы выбираете один из следующих вариантов действия (то есть +одну из экранных кнопок): +.TP +.B [Отметить всё] +отмеченные атрибуты (и только они) будут установлены в соответствии +с состоянием кнопок-флажков, причём для всех выбранных (помеченных) файлов. +Если атрибут не был отмечен, его значение для выбранных файлов не изменяется. +.TP +.B [Установить помеченное] +для всех выбранных файлов бит, соответствующий данному атрибуту, будет +установлен в 1. +.TP +.B [Очистить помеченное] +для всех выбранных файлов бит, соответствующий данному атрибуту, будет +установлен в 0. +.TP +.B [Установить] +будут установлены атрибуты только для одного файла (первого из +помеченных), причём установка производится так же, как по кнопке +\fB[Отметить всё]\fR. +.TP +.B [Прервать] +отказаться от выполнения команды Chmod. +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Владелец/группа" +Пункт меню "Владелец/группа" используется для того, чтобы изменить +владельца файла или группу, которая имеет какие\-то права на файл. +"Горячая" клавиша для вызова этого пункта меню \- \fBC\-x o\fR. +.\"NODE "Advanced Chown" +.SH "Расширенная команда Chown" +Выбрав пункт меню "Расширенная команда Chown", вы увидите окно, +совмещающее в себе окна, появляющиеся при выборе пунктов +.\"LINK2" +Права доступа +.\"Chmod" +и +.\"LINK2" +Владелец/группа\&. +.\"Chown" +В этом окне можно изменить как права доступа к файлу, так и +владельцев файла. +.\"NODE "Chattr" +.SH "Команда Chattr" +Диалоговое окно "Команда Chattr" предоставляет удобный интерфейс к команде +chattr \- команде изменения атрибутов файлов и каталогов на файловых +системах ОС Linux. Доступ к этому окну можно получить по "горячей" +комбинации клавиш +.BR "C\-x e" . +.PP +Множество поддерживаемых файловой системой атрибутов зависит от самой +файловой системы. Символьное представление атрибутов под именем файлов +показывает все доступные атрибуты (для расшифровки символов атрибутов +смотрите страницу руководства к команде +.BR chattr(1) , +а кнопки-флажки представляют только те атрибуты, которые можно изменить. +Каждая из кнопок-флажков соответствует одному атрибуту. Изменять +установки атрибутов можно двумя способами. +.PP +При первом способе непосредственно изменяется состояние кнопок-флажков. +Для изменения значений атрибутов надо выбрать соответствующую кнопку +и нажать клавишу +.BR пробела . +.PP +Для перемещения по кнопкам можно использовать +.B клавиши\-стрелки +или клавишу +.BR Tab . +Изменяемые атрибуты помечаются звёздочкой, и предполагаемое значение всех +атрибутов в символьном представлении сразу же отображается под именем файла. +.PP +Для того чтобы выбранные вами значения атрибутов вступили в силу, надо +нажать клавишу +.B Enter +или экранную кнопку +.BR [Установить] . +Для отказа от изменения атрибутов нужно нажать кнопку +.BR [Прервать] . +.PP +Изменять атрибуты отдельного файла можно только этим способом. Если вы +хотите изменить атрибуты сразу группы файлов или каталогов, вы тоже можете +воспользоваться этим способом, только вместо экранной кнопки +.B [Установить] +или клавиши +.B Enter +должны выбрать кнопку \fB[Установить всё]\fR. +.PP +Второй способ заключается в том, что вы сначала помечаете те атрибуты, +которые хотите изменить, с помощью клавиш +.B Ins +или +.BR t . +Обратите внимание, что состояния кнопок-флажков при этом не изменяется. +После этого вы выбираете один из следующих вариантов действия (то есть +одну из экранных кнопок): +.TP +.B [Отметить всё] +отмеченные атрибуты (и только они) будут установлены в соответствии +с состоянием кнопок-флажков, причём для всех выбранных (помеченных) файлов. +Если атрибут не был отмечен, его значение для выбранных файлов не изменяется. +.TP +.B [Установить помеченное] +для всех выбранных файлов данный атрибут будет установлен. +.TP +.B [Очистить помеченное] +для всех выбранных файлов данный атрибут будет сброшен. +.TP +.B [Установить] +будут установлены атрибуты только для одного файла (первого из +помеченных), причём установка производится так же, как по кнопке +\fB[Отметить всё]\fR. +.TP +.B [Прервать] +отказаться от выполнения команды Chattr. +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "Операции с файлами" +Когда вы выполняете операции копирования, перемещения или удаления +файлов, Midnight Commander отображает на экране диалоговое окно, в +котором показано, какой(ие) файл(ы) в данный момент обрабатывается и как +идет процесс обработки. Для отображения процесса обработки на экран +выводится до трёх диаграмм\-полосок (progress bars). Первая (file bar) +показывает, какая часть текущего файла обработана (например, +скопирована). Вторая (count bar) показывает, какая доля помеченных файлов +обработана на текущий момент. Третья (bytes bar) показывает долю +выполненных работ (в процентах от суммарного объема помеченных файлов). +Если выключена опция +.I "Детали операций" +(см. +.\"LINK2" +Настройки/Конфигурация\&. +.\"Configuration" +), две последних диаграммы не отображаются. +.PP +В нижней части этого диалогового окна имеются две кнопки. Нажатие на +кнопку +.B [Пропустить] +приведёт к тому, что будет пропущена обработка текущего файла. Нажатие +на кнопку +.B [Прервать] +прерывает выполнение заданной операции, все оставшиеся файлы будут пропущены. +.PP +В процессе выполнения файловых операций вы можете увидеть окна ещё трёх +видов. +.PP +Окно ошибок информирует об ошибке и предлагает три варианта продолжения. +Обычно вы выбираете либо вариант +.B [Пропустить] +для того, чтобы исключить из обработки файл, на котором споткнулась +программа, либо +.B [Прервать] , +чтобы вообще отменить выполнение заданной операции. Третий вариант, +.B [Повторить] , +выбирается тогда, когда вам удалось устранить причину сбоя (например, +воспользовавшись другим терминалом). +.PP +Окно подтверждения перезаписи появляется тогда, когда вы пытаетесь +переписать существующий файл. В этом окне отображаются время создания и +размер файла\-источника и файла\-приёмника (то есть перезаписываемого +файла, который фактически будет уничтожен). Ниже выведены два вопроса. +На первый вопрос ("Переписать этот файл?") предлагается три варианта +ответа: +.TP +.B [Д] +согласиться; +.TP +.B [Нет] +отказаться, то есть пропустить перезапись текущего файла; +.TP +.B [Дописать в конец] +дописать содержимое файла\-источника в конец файла\-приёмника. +.PP +Выбор одного из вариантов ответа на второй вопрос ("Переписать все +файлы?") позволяет принять одно решение по всем выбранным для обработки +файлам (чтобы окно запроса не появлялось каждый раз). Предлагается четыре +варианта решения: +.TP +.B [Все] +перезаписались без дополнительных вопросов все выбранные файлы; +.TP +.B [Устаревшие] +перезапишутся (затрутся) только файлы, которые созданы раньше +файла\-источника; +.TP +.B [Ни одного] +не перезаписывать файлы (но если не существует файла\-приёмника, то +копирование источника будет произведено); +.TP +.I [Различающиеся по длине] +Вы можете отказаться от выполнения операции, если нажмете кнопку +.B [Прервать] +в нижней части окна запроса. Выбор экранной кнопки производится +.B клавишами\-стрелками +или клавишей +.BR Tab . +.PP +Окно запроса на рекурсивное удаление появляется в том случае, если вы +пытаетесь удалить непустой каталог. По кнопке +.B [Да] +каталог будет удален вместе со всеми файлами. +.B [Нет] +означает отказ от удаления каталога. +.B [Всё] надо выбирать, если вы отметили группу подкаталогов для удаления и +уверены в своём выборе, +.B [Ни одного] +\- чтобы пропустить все непустые каталоги из числа помеченных. +.B [Прервать] +означает отказ от выполнения операции удаления. Выбирайте +.B [Да] +или +.B [Всё] +только в том случае, если вы действительно уверены в том, что хотите удалить +каталог со всеми вложенными подкаталогами. +.PP +Если вы пометили для обработки группу файлов, то после выполнения +операции будет снята отметка только с тех файлов, которые успешно +обработаны. Пропущенные файлы останутся помеченными. +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Маски файлов для операций копирования/переименования" +При выполнении операций копирования и перемещения (или переименования) +файлов вы имеете возможность изменить имена копируемых или перемещаемых +файлов. Для этого вы должны задать маску для имен файлов\-источников и +маску для имен файлов, которые будут созданы (файлы\-приёмники). Обычно +эта вторая маска представляет собой несколько символов замены +(wildcards) в конце строки, определяющей место назначение создаваемых +файлов. Все файлы, удовлетворяющие маске источника, будут переименованы +(скопированы или перемещены с новыми именами) в соответствии с маской +файла\-приёмника. Если имеются помеченные файлы, то копируются +(перемещаются) только помеченные файлы, удовлетворяющие заданной маске +для файлов\-источников. +.PP +Есть ещё несколько опций, которые влияют на выполнение операций +копирования/перемещения файлов, и которые устанавливаются в том же окне +запроса, где задаются маски имен файлов: +.PP +.B "Разыменовывать ссылки" +.PP +определяет, будут ли при копировании жестких или символических ссылок +в каталоге\- приёмнике (и рекурсивно в подкаталогах) создаваться такие же ссылки, +или будут копироваться файлы (и подкаталоги), на которые эти ссылки указывают. +.PP +.B "Внутрь каталога, если есть" +.PP +определяет, что делать, если в каталоге\-приёмнике уже существует подкаталог, +имя которого совпадает с именем файла (каталога), который копируется (источника). +По умолчанию (опция выключена) содержимое каталога\-источника копируется в +каталог\-приёмник. Если опция включена, то в каталоге приёмнике будет +создан новый подкаталог с тем же именем, в который и будет +осуществляться копирование. Лучше показать это на примере: +.PP +Пусть вы хотите скопировать каталог +.IR /foo , +содержащий файл +.IR bar , +в уже существующий каталог +.IR /bla/foo . +Если эта опция не включена, MC скопирует файл +.I /foo/bar +в файл +.IR /bla/foo/bar . +Если опцию включить, будет создан каталог +.I /bla/foo/foo +и файл +.I /foo/bar +будет скопирован в файл +.IR /bla/foo/foo/bar . +.PP +.B "Сохранять атрибуты" +.PP +определяет, будут ли при копировании/перемещении сохранены атрибуты исходного +файла: права доступа, временные метки и, если вы root, UID и GID исходного +файла. Если опция выключена, атрибуты будут установлены в соответствии с +текущим значением umask. +.PP +.B "Образцы в стиле shell" +.PP +Когда эта опция включена, можно использовать символы замены +(wildcards) '*' и '?' в маске источника. Они обрабатываются аналогично тому, +как это делается в shell. В маске приёмника разрешается использовать только '*' +и '\\<цифра>'. Первый символ '*' в маске приёмника соответствует первой +группе символов замены в маске источника, второй символ '*' соответствует +второй группе и т. д. Аналогично, символ замены '\\1' соответствует первой +группе символов замены в маске источника, символ '\\2' \- второй группе +и т. д. до '\\9'. Символ '\\0' соответствует целому имени файла\-источника. +.PP +Два примера: +.PP +Если маска источника "*.tar.gz", а приёмник \- "/bla/*.tgz" и имя +копируемого файла \- "foo.tar.gz", копия будет называться "foo.tgz" и +будет находиться в каталоге "/bla". +.PP +Предположим вы хотите поменять местами имя и расширение файла, так чтобы +"file.c" стал файлом "c.file". Маска источника для этого должна иметь +вид "*.*", а маска приёмника \- "\\2.\\1". +.PP +Когда опция +.I "Образцы в стиле shell" +выключена, MC не осуществляет автоматической группировки. Для указания +групп символов в маске источника, которые будут соответствовать символам +замены в маске приёмника, вы должны в этом случае использовать скобки '\\(...\\)'. +Этот способ более гибкий, но требует больше усилий при вводе. +.PP +Два примера: +.PP +Если маска источника имеет вид "^\\(.*\\)\\.tar\\.gz$", копирование +производится в "/bla/*.tgz" и копируется файл "foo.tar.gz", то +результатом будет "/bla/foo.tgz". +.PP +Предположим, что вы хотите поменять местами имя файла и его расширение, +так чтобы имена вида "file.c" приняли вид "c.file". Маска источника для +этого \- "^\\(.*\\)\\.\\(.*\\)$", а маска приёмника \- "\\2.\\1". +.PP +.B "Преобразование регистра" +.PP +Вы можете также преобразовать регистр символов в именах файлов. Если вы +используете '\\u' или '\\l' в маске приёмника, то следующий символ имени +будет образован в верхнем (заглавные символы) или нижнем (строчные) +регистре соответственно. +.PP +Если использовать в маске приёмника '\\U' или '\\L', то к +соответствующему регистру будут преобразованы все последующие символы, +вплоть до следующего вхождения '\\E' или '\\U', появления символа '\\L' +или конца имени файла. +.PP +Применение '\\u' и '\\l' обеспечивает более широкие возможности, чем '\\U' и '\\L'. +.PP +Например, если маска источника есть '*' (опция +.I "Образцы в стиле shell" +включена) или "^\\(.*\\)$" (опция +.I "Образцы в стиле shell" +выключена), а маска приёмника есть "\\L\\u*", имена файлов будут + преобразованы таким образом, что первые буквы имени будут заглавными, +а все остальные \- строчными. +.PP +Символ '\\' в масках используется для отмены специальной интерпретации +отдельных символов. Например, "\\\\" означает просто backslash и "\\*" +означает просто звёздочку (asterisk). +.PP +.B "Изменять относительные ссылки" +.PP +указывает, что Midnight Commander должен изменять символические ссылки. +Скопированные символические ссылки будут указывать на то же расположение, +что и оригинальная ссылка, при этом дописываются необходимые ../ и другие +каталоги. +.\"NODE "Select/Unselect Files" +.SH "Отметить файлы" +Диалоговое окно параметров отметки группы файлов по заданному шаблону. +.\"LINK2" +Строка ввода +.\"Input Line Keys" +предназначена для ввода регулярного выражения (маски) для помети файлов. +Если включена опция +.IR "Только файлы" , +то выделены будут только файлы. Если опция +.I "Только файлы" +выключена, то выделены будут как файлы, так и каталоги. Если включена опция +.IR "Образцы в стиле shell" , +регулярные выражение строятся по тем же правилам, которые действуют в +оболочке shell ('*' означает ноль или большее число любых символов, а '?' +заменяет один произвольный символ). Если опция +.I "Образцы в стиле shell" +выключена, то пометка файлов производится по правилам обработки +нормальных регулярных выражений (смотрите ed(1)). Если включена опция +.I "С учётом регистра" +то пометка файлов и каталогов будет производиться с учётом регистра символов имён. +Если опция +.I "С учётом регистра" +выключена, то регистр символов учитываться не будет. +.\"NODE "Diff Viewer" +.SH "Встроенная программа сравнения файлов" +mcdiff \- это встроенное средство для сравнения файлов, позволяющее сравнить два файла. +Также оно позволяет редактировать их (после завершения редактирования произойдет +обновление различий). Можно просматривать файлы, находящиеся под контролем различных +систем управления версиями, такими как GIT, Subversion и другие. +.PP +Ниже представлен список "горячих" клавиш, используемых во встроенной утилите сравнения +файлов mcdiff. +.TP +.B F1 +Вызов встроенной помощи. +.TP +.B F2 +Сохранение изменений в файлах. +.TP +.B F4 +Редактирование файла в левой панели. +.TP +.B F14 +Редактирование файла в правой панели. +.TP +.B F5 +Произвести слияние текущего изменения. +.TP +.B F7 +Вызов диалогового окна для задания шаблона поиска. +.TP +.B F17 +Продолжение поиска в соответствии с ранее определённым шаблоном. +.TP +.B F10, Esc, q +Выход. +.TP +.B Alt\-s, s +Включить/выключить показ статуса различий. +.TP +.B Alt\-n, l +Включить/выключить показ номеров строк. +.TP +.B f +Увеличить левую панель до максимума. +.TP +.B = +Сделать панели равными по ширине. +.TP +.B > +Увеличить левую панель. +.TP +.B < +Увеличить правую панель. +.TP +.B c +Включить/выключить показ символов конца строки (CR) как ^M. +.TP +.B 2, 3, 4, 8 +Установить размер табуляции. +.TP +.B C\-u +Поменять панели местами. +.TP +.B C\-r +Обновить экран. +.TP +.B C\-o +Переключиться в подоболочку и показать окно команд. +.TP +.B Enter, Space, n +Найти следующее различие. +.TP +.B Backspace, p +Найти предыдущее различие. +.TP +.B g +Показать диалог перехода к строке. +.TP +.B Down +Перемещение на одну строку вниз. +.TP +.B Up +Перемещение на одну строку вверх. +.TP +.B PageUp +Перемещение на одну страницу вверх. +.TP +.B PageDown +Перемещение на одну страницу вниз. +.TP +.B Home, A1 +Перемещение к началу строки. +.TP +.B End +Перемещение в конец строки. +.TP +.B C\-Home +Перемещение в начало файла. +.TP +.B C\-End, C1 +Перемещение в конец файла. +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Встроенная программа просмотра файлов" +Встроенная программа просмотра файлов имеет два режима просмотра: режим +ASCII и шестнадцатеричный (hex). Для переключения режимов используется +клавиша +.BR F4 . +Если у вас установлена программа gzip проекта GNU, она будет +использована для автоматического просмотра сжатых файлов. +.PP +Встроенная программа просмотра всегда пытается использовать для +отображения информации лучший из методов, предоставляемых вашей системой +для данного типа файла. Некоторые последовательности символов +интерпретируются для задания таких атрибутов, как жирный шрифт и +подчеркивание, обеспечивая более наглядное представление информации. +.PP +В шестнадцатеричном режиме функция поиска позволяет задать строку поиска +как в обычном текстовом виде (заключенном в кавычки), так и в виде +шестнадцатеричных констант. Можно даже одновременно использовать в +шаблоне поиска как ту, так и другую форму представления, например: +.PP +.nf +"String" 34 0xBB 012 "more text" +.fi +.PP +Все числа интерпретируются как шестнадцатеричные. В данном примере +"34" интерпретируется как 0x34. Префикс 0x необязателен: вместо "0xBB" +можно просто ввести "BB". Число "012" интерпретируется не как +восьмеричное, а как 0x12. +.PP +Некоторые детали внутренней реализации программы просмотра: на системах, +которые предоставляют системный вызов mmap(2) программа отображает файл +в память вместо его загрузки; иначе, а также если при вызове mmap +возникает сбой или c файлом связано некоторое действие, которое требует +фильтр, программа использует динамически распределяемые буфера памяти, +загружая только те части файла, к которым вы обращаетесь (это относится +к архивированным файлам). +.PP +Ниже приводится перечень всех клавиш и их комбинаций, с которыми +ассоциированы некие действия встроенной программы просмотра. +.TP +.B F1 +Вызывает просмотр встроенной гипертекстовой подсказки. +.TP +.B F2 +Переключает режим переноса строки. +.TP +.B F4 +Переключает между ASCII и шестнадцатеричным режимами. +.TP +.B F5 +Переход. Можно указать номер строки, абсолютное смещение или проценты +от размера файла того места, к просмотру которой вы хотите перейти. +.TP +.B F7, /, ? +Начать поиск. Вызов диалогового окна, которое позволит установить параметры +поиска. Если клавиша +.BR ? , +то будет установлен параметр поиска "Назад". +.TP +.B C\-s +Продолжение поиска. +.TP +.B C\-r +То же, что и +.BR C\-s , +но поиск производится в обратном направлении. +.TP +.B F17, n +Продолжить поиск в заданном направлении. +.TP +.B N +Временно изменить направление поиска: искать назад, если установлен поиск +вперёд, и наоборот. +.TP +.B F8 +Переключение между режимами Raw/Parsed: файл отображается либо в том +виде, как он записан на диске, либо пропущенным через фильтр, который +задан для этого типа файлов в mc.ext.ini. Текущий режим отображения всегда +обратный по отношению к тому, который указан на экранной кнопке +.BR F8 , +поскольку на кнопке указывается режим, к которому осуществляется переход +по данной кнопке. +.TP +.B F9 +Переключение между режимами отображения текста в форматированном и +неформатированном виде: в режиме отображения форматированного текста +некоторые последовательности символов отображаются другим цветом для +выделения жирного и подчеркнутого шрифта. Как и в предыдущем случае, на +кнопке указан режим, обратный по отношению к текущему. +.TP +.B F3, F10, Esc, q +Выйти из встроенной программы просмотра. +.TP +.B PageDown, пробел, C\-v +Переместиться на страницу вперёд. +.TP +.B PageUp, Alt\-v, Backspace +Переместиться на страницу назад. +.TP +.B Down +Переместиться на одну строку вперёд. +.TP +.B Up +Переместиться на одну строку назад. +.TP +.B C\-l +Обновить изображение на экране. +.TP +.B C\-o +Переключиться в subshell и показать окно команд. +.TP +.B [n] m +Установить метку с номером n (кавычки не вводятся). +.TP +.B [n] r +Переместиться к метке с номером n. +.TP +.B C\-f +Перейти к просмотру следующего файла текущего каталога. +.TP +.B C\-b +Перейти к просмотру предыдущего файла в текущем каталоге. +.TP +.B Alt\-r +Переключение режима отображения линейки (вверху/внизу/отключена). +.TP +Можно настроить режимы отображения файлов встроенной программой +просмотра, воспользовавшись +.\"LINK2" +файлом расширений\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" + +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Встроенный редактор" +Встроенный редактор обеспечивает выполнение большинства функций +редактирования, присущих полноэкранным редакторам текста. Он вызывается +нажатием клавиши +.B F4 +при условии, что в инициализационном файле установлена в 1 опция +.IR use_internal_edit . +Размер редактируемого файла не может превышать 64 Мегабайт. С помощью +этого редактора можно редактировать двоичные файлы без потери данных. +.PP +Поддерживаются следующие возможности: копирование, перемещение, +удаление, вырезание и вставка блоков текста; отмена предыдущих операций; +выпадающие меню; вставка файлов; макроопределения; поиск и замена по +регулярным выражениям; выделение текста по комбинации клавиш +.B S\-<клавиши\-стрелки> +в стиле MSW\-MAC (только для linux\-консоли); переключение между режимами +вставки\-замены символа; а также операция обработки блоков текста командами +оболочки (an option to pipe text blocks through shell commands like indent). + +.PP +Разделы: +.IP + +.\"LINK2" +Опции в ini\-файле для редактора +.\"Internal File Editor / options" + +.PP +Редактор очень прост и практически не требует обучения. Для того чтобы +узнать, какие клавиши вызывают выполнение определённых действий, +достаточно просмотреть выпадающие меню, которые вызываются нажатием +клавиши +.B F9 +в окне редактора. Не перечисленные в меню комбинации клавиш: +.B S\-<клавиши\-стрелок> +выделение блока текста. +.B C\-Ins +копирует блок в файл +.BR mcedit.clip . +.B S\-Ins +производит вставку последнего скопированного в mcedit.clip блока в +позицию курсора. +.B S\-Del +удаляет выделенный блок текста, запоминая его в файле +.BR mcedit.clip . +По клавише +.B Enter +вставляются символы конца строки, причём на следующей строке автоматически +устанавливается отступ. Работает выделение текста с помощью мыши, причём если +удерживать клавишу +.BR Shift , +то управление мышью осуществляется терминальным драйвером мыши. +.PP +Для того чтобы определить макрос, нажмите +.BR C\-R , +после чего введите строки команд, которые должны быть выполнены. После +завершения ввода команд снова нажмите +.B C\-R +и свяжите макрос с какой\-нибудь клавишей или комбинацией клавиш, нажав +эту клавишу (комбинацию). Макрос будет вызываться нажатием +.B C\-A +и назначенной для него клавиши. Макрос можно также вызвать нажатием +любой из клавиш Meta (Alt), Ctrl или Esc и назначенной макросу клавиши, +при условии, что данная комбинация не используется для вызова какой\-либо +другой функции. Макрокоманды после определения записываются в файл +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +в вашем домашнем каталоге. Вы можете удалить макрос удалением +соответствующей строки в этом файле. +.PP +По клавише +.B F19 +(её нет на обычной клавиатуре IBM PC, так что придётся пользоваться +соответствующим пунктом меню, вызываемым по клавише +.BR F9 , +или переназначить клавишу) будет осуществляться форматирование выделенного +блока кода на языке C, C++ или других. Форматирование управляется файлом +.B %pkgdatadir%/edit.indent.rc +который при первом вызове копируется в +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +в вашем домашнем каталоге. +.PP +Встроенный редактор обрабатывает символы из второй половины кодовой +таблицы (160+). Но когда редактируете бинарные файлы, лучше установить +опцию +.B "Биты символов" +из меню "Настройки" в положение "7 бит", чтобы сохранить формат файла +(to keep the spacing clean). +.PP +Описать все функции встроенного редактора в данной подсказке невозможно. +Запомните только, что все основные операции можно выполнить через пункты +меню, которое вызывается нажатием клавиши +.B F9 +в окне редактирования. Кроме того, можно прочитать man\-страницу по +команде +.B man mcedit +или +.B info mcedit + +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor / options" +.SH "Опции в ini\-файле для редактора" +.PP +В данном разделе кратко описаны опции ini\-файла, относящиеся к редактору. +Опции записываются в секцию [Midnight\-Commander]. +.TP +.I editor_wordcompletion_collect_entire_file +При автодополнении для сбора похожих слов слов просматривать весь файл(1) +или только от начала до курсора (0) + +.\"NODE "Screen selector" +.SH "Список экранов" +Midnight Commander поддерживает возможность одновременной работы своих +встроенных модулей (таких как редактор, программа просмотра, программа сравнения +файлов) и переключения между ними без необходимости закрытия загруженных файлов. +Файловый менеджер может быть только один, несколько файловых менеджеров, +работающих одновременно, не поддерживаются. Назовём каждый из таких модулей +экраном. +.PP +Есть три способа переключения между экранами: +переход к следующему экрану в списке клавиатурной комбинацией +.BR Alt\-} , +переход к предыдущему экрану в списке клавиатурной комбинацией +.BR Alt\-{ , +вызов диалогового окна со списком экранов клавиатурной комбинацией +.B Alt\-` +или с помощью пункта меню. +Все эти комбинации клавиш одинаковы во всех экранах. + +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH "Завершение ввода" +Заставьте Midnight Commander работать на клавиатуре вместо вас! +.PP +Завершение ввода \- это попытка закончить за вас ввод текста, набранного +до текущей позиции курсора. MC пытается завершить ввод, трактуя уже +введённый текст как переменную (если текст начинается с +.BR $ ")", +имя пользователя (если текст начинается с +.BR ~ ")", +имя машины (если текст начинается на +.BR @ ")" +или как команду (если вы в командной строке в позиции, где вы можете +вводить команду; в этом случае для завершения ввода используются +зарезервированные слова оболочки, в том числе любая из встроенных команд +оболочки). Если введённый текст не попадает ни в одну из перечисленных +категорий, выполняется попытка завершения текста как имени файла. +.PP +Завершение имен файлов, пользователей, переменных и машин работает во +всех строках ввода, завершение команд \- только в командной строке. Если +однозначно выполнить завершение ввода невозможно (имеется несколько +вариантов), MC издаёт звуковой сигнал и выполняет следующие действия, в +зависимости от установки опции +.\"LINK2" +Дополнение: показывать всё +.\"Configuration" +в пункте меню +.\"LINK2" +Настройки/Конфигурация\&. +.\"Configuration" +Если эта опция включена, список всех возможных вариантов завершения +появляется возле текущей позиции и вы можете выбрать нужный вариант с +помощью клавиш стрелок и +.BR Enter . +Вы можете также набрать следующую букву, чтобы перейти к подмножеству +всех возможных завершений. Если вы снова нажмете +.BR Alt\-Tab , +будет выведено уже сокращенное множество вариантов, причём в строку +ввода добавляются те символы, которые определяются однозначно (даже если +полное завершение ввода ещё невозможно). Как только неопределённость +выбора исчезает, пропадает и диалоговое окно с вариантами. Вы можете +отказаться от вывода на экран этого окна в любое время, нажав одну из +клавиш \fBEsc\fR, \fBF10\fR или \fBLeft/Right\fR. +Если опция +.\"LINK2" +"Дополнение: показывать всё" +.\"Configuration" +выключена, окно с вариантами завершения появляется только тогда, когда +вы нажмете клавиши +.B Alt\-Tab +второй раз, при первом нажатии MC только издаёт звуковой сигнал. +.PP +Используйте экранирование символов '\fB?\fR', '\fB*\fR' и '\fB&\fR' +(как \fB\\?\fR, \fB\\*\fR, \fB\\&\fR) в именах файлов, чтобы они +не рассматривались как метасимволы в регулярных выражениях при подстановках +в полях ввода. +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "Виртуальные файловые системы" +Программа Midnight Commander содержит подпрограммы, обеспечивающие +доступ к различным файловым системам. Эти подпрограммы (их совокупность +называется переключателем виртуальных файловых систем \- virtual file +system switch) позволяют Midnight Commander\-у манипулировать файлами, +расположенными на не\-Unix\-овых файловых системах. +.PP +В настоящее время Midnight Commander обеспечивает поддержку нескольких +Виртуальных Файловых Систем \- ВФС (VFS): +.br +\- локальной файловой системы, используемой для обычных файловых систем +Unix; +.br +\- файловой системы ftpfs, используемой для манипулирования файлами на +удалённых компьютерах по протоколу FTP; +.br +\- файловой системы tarfs, используемой для обработки tar\- и сжатых +tar\-файлов; +.br +\- файловой системы undelfs, используемой для восстановления удалённых +файлов в файловой системе ext2 (файловая система, используемая в Linux +по умолчанию); +.br +\- файловой системы fish (для манипулирования файлами при работе с +оболочкой через такие программы как rsh и ssh); +.br +\- и, наконец, сетевой файловой системы nfs. +.PP +Подпрограммы работы с виртуальными файловыми системами интерпретируют +все встречающиеся имена путей и формируют корректные обращения к +различным файловым системам. Форматы обращения к каждой из виртуальных +файловых систем описаны в отдельных разделах по каждой ВФС: +.IP +.\"LINK2" +Файловая система ftpfs +.\"FTP File System" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Файловая система tar +.\"Tar File System" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Файловая система FISH (FIle transfer over SHell) +.\"FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Файловая система SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) +.\"SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) filesystem" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Файловая система UFS (Undelete File System) +.\"Undelete File System" +.\"NODE "FTP File System" +.SH "Файловая система ftpfs" +Файловая система ftpfs позволяет работать с файлами на удалённых +компьютерах. Для этого можно использовать команду "FTP\-соединение" +(доступную из меню левой и правой панелей) или же непосредственно +сменить текущий каталог командой cd, задав путь к каталогу следующим +образом: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][user[:pass]@]machine[:port][remote\-dir] +.PP +Элементы +.IR user , +.I port +и +.I remote\-dir +не обязательны. Если элемент +.I user +указан, то Midnight Commander будет пытаться регистрироваться на удалённом +компьютере с эти именем, в противном случае будет использовано имя +anonymous или имя из файла ~/.netrc. Необязательный элемент +.I pass +(если указан) используется как пароль для входа. Однако явно задавать +его не рекомендуется (также не записывайте его в ваши каталоги быстрого доступа, +если только вы не обеспечили соответствующую защиту этих файлов; но и тогда +нельзя быть полностью уверенным в безопасности). +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!behind.firewall.edu/pub + ftp://guest@remote\-host.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@server/pub +.fi +.PP +Для того чтобы соединиться с сервером, который расположен за firewall, +нужно использовать префикс ftp://! (то есть добавить восклицательный +знак перед именем сервера), чтобы указать Midnight Commander на +необходимость использовать прокси для осуществления передач по ftp. Вы +можете задать имя прокси в диалоговом окне +.\"LINK2" +Виртуальные ФС... +.\"Virtual FS" +меню "Настройки". +.PP +Чтобы не задавать имя прокси\-сервера каждый раз, можно поставить отметку +в квадратных скобках возле опции +.I Всегда использовать FTP прокси +в диалоговом окне +.\"LINK2" +Виртуальные ФС... +.\"Virtual FS" +меню "Настройки". В таком случае программа всегда будет использовать +указанный прокси\-сервер. При этом (если опция установлена) программа +делает следующее: считывает из файла +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy +имена локальных машин (если имя начинается с точки, оно считается именем +домена), и, если заданное при установлении FTP\-соединения имя машины +совпадает с одним из имен, указанных в файле +.B mc.no_proxy +без точки, то производит прямое обращение к данной машине. +.PP +При подключении к ftp\-серверу через фильтрующий пакеты маршрутизатор, +который не позволяет использовать обычный режим открытия +файлов, можно заставить программу работать в режиме пассивного +открытия файла. Для этого установите в конфигурационном файле параметр +.I ftpfs_use_passive_connections +в 1. +.PP +Midnight Commander сохраняет в течение заданного интервала времени +список файлов удалённого каталога, прочитанный по FTP, в оперативной +памяти. Величина этого интервала времени задаётся в диалоговом окне +.\"LINK2" +Виртуальные ФС... +.\"Virtual FS" +меню "Настройки". В силу этого возможен побочный эффект, заключающийся в +том, что даже если вы сделали какие\-то изменения в каталоге, они не +будут отображаться в панели до тех пор, пока вы не обновите содержимое +панели командой +.BR C\-r . +Это не является недоработкой (если вы думаете, что это ошибка, +поразмыслите над тем, как происходит работа по FTP с файлами, +находящимися на другой стороне Атлантического океана). +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH "Файловая система tar" +Файловая система tar обеспечивает доступ по чтению к tar\- и сжатым +tar\-файлам, используя команду chdir. Для перехода в каталог, +представляющий список файлов tar\-файла, нужно использовать команду, +имеющую следующий формат: +.PP +.I cd ./filename.tar/utar://[dir\-inside\-tar] +.PP +Файл mc.ext.ini по умолчанию содержит команды для просмотра +tar\-файлов, то есть обычно для получения списка файлов tar\-архива +достаточно просто переместить указатель на имя tar\-файла и нажать +.BR Enter . +Чтобы понять, как это достигается, смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +Файл расширений\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.PP +Примеры: +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +В последнем примере указан полный путь к tar\-архиву. +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " Файловая система FISH (FIle transfer over SHell)" +Файловая система fish \- это сетевая файловая система, которая позволяет +работать с файлами на удалённом компьютере так, как если бы они были +расположены на вашем диске. Для того чтобы это было возможно, на +удалённом компьютере должен быть запущен fish\-сервер, или +bash\-совместимая оболочка shell. +.PP +Для соединения с удалённым компьютером нужно выполнить команду +перехода в каталог (chdir), имя которого задаётся в следующем формате: +.PP +.I sh://[user@]machine[:options]/[remote\-dir] +.PP +Элементы +.IR user , +.I options +и +.I remote\-dir +не обязательны. Если задан элемент +.IR user , +то Midnight Commander будет регистрироваться на удалённый компьютер под +этим именем, в противном случае \- под тем именем, с которым вы +зарегистрированы в локальной системе. +.PP +В качестве +.I options +могут использоваться: +.nf + 'C' \- использовать сжатие; + 'r' \- использовать rsh вместо ssh; + port \- использовать данный порт для подключения к удалённому компьютеру. +.fi +.PP +Если задан элемент +.IR remote\-dir , +то указанный каталог станет текущим после соединения с удалённым компьютером. +.PP +Примеры: +.PP +.nf + sh://onlyrsh.mx:r/linux/local + sh://joe@want.compression.edu:C/private + sh://joe@noncompressed.ssh.edu/private + sh://joe@somehost.ssh.edu:2222/private +.fi +.\"NODE " SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) filesystem" +.SH " Файловая система SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol)" +Файловая система SFTP \- это сетевая файловая система, которая позволяет +работать с файлами на удалённом компьютере так, как если бы они были +расположены на вашем диске. Для того чтобы это было возможно, на +удалённом компьютере должен быть запущен sftp\-сервер. +.PP +Для соединения с удалённым компьютером нужно выполнить команду +перехода в каталог (chdir), имя которого задаётся в следующем формате: +.PP +.I sftp://[user@]machine[:port]/[remote\-dir] +.PP +Элементы +.IR user , +.I port +и +.I remote\-dir +не обязательны. Если задан элемент +.IR user , +то Midnight Commander будет регистрироваться на удалённый компьютер под +этим именем, в противном случае \- под тем именем, с которым вы +зарегистрированы в локальной системе. Если задан +.I port +то он будет использован для подключения к удалённому компьютеру. +Если задан элемент +.IR remote\-dir , +то указанный каталог станет текущим после соединения с удалённым компьютером. +.PP +Примеры: +.PP +.nf + sftp://onlyrsh.mx/linux/local + sftp://joe:password@want.compression.edu/private + sftp://joe@noncompressed.ssh.edu/private + sftp://joe@somehost.ssh.edu:2222/private +.fi +При установлении соединения происходит проверка ключа сервера с использованием +файла ~/.ssh/known_hosts file. Если пара сервер/ключ в этом файле не найдена +или сервер найден, но ключ не соответствует, пользователю показывается +окно с соответствующим сообщением, содержащее три кнопки: +.PP +.B [Да] +добавить новую пару сервер/ключ в файл ~/.ssh/known_hosts и продолжить соединение. +.PP +.B [Игнорировать] +не добавлять новую пару сервер/ключ в файл ~/.ssh/known_hosts и всё равно +продолжить соединение (на свой страх и риск). +.PP +.B [Нет] +прервать соединение. +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Файловая система UFS (Undelete File System)" +В ОС Linux можно сконфигурировать файловую систему ext2fs, используемую +по умолчанию, таким образом, что появится возможность восстанавливать +удалённые файлы (но только в файловой системе ext2). Файловая система +UFS (Undelete File System) представляет собой интерфейс к библиотекам +ext2fs, позволяющий восстановить имена всех удалённых файлов, выбрать +некоторое количество таких файлов и восстановить их. +.PP +Для того чтобы воспользоваться этой возможностью (этой файловой +системой), нужно выполнить команду перехода (chdir) в специальный +каталог, имя которого образуется из префикса "undel://" и имени +специального файла устройства, на котором находится реальная файловая +система. +.PP +Например, чтобы восстановить удалённые файлы на втором разделе первого +SCSI\-диска, нужно использовать следующее имя: +.PP +.nf + undel://sda2 +.fi +.PP +Загрузка списка удалённых файлов требует некоторого времени, так что +наберитесь терпения. Имейте в виду, что имена файлов в полученном списке +будут цифровыми, так что поиск нужного придётся проводить либо по дате, +либо последовательным просмотром содержимого (в общем, я вам не +завидую!). +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " Внешняя файловая система (EXTernal File System)" +.B extfs +Внешняя файловая система позволяет очень просто интегрировать новые +файловые контейнера и типы файлов простым написанием скриптов. +.PP +Файловая система Extfs подразделяется на две категории: +.PP +1. Автономные файловые системы, которые не ассоциированы ни с одним из +типов файлов.они представляют некоторые системные данные как дерево каталогов +Вы можете их вызвать набрав \fIcd fsname://\fR", где fsname \- это короткое +имя extfs (см. ниже). Примеры этих ВФС включают audio (список всех звуковых +дорожек на CD) или apt (список всех установленных в системе пакетов Debian). +.PP +Например, для получения списка звуковых дорожек на CD наберите: +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. "Архивные" файловые системы (такие как rpm, patchfs и прочие) представляют +содержимое файла как дерево каталогов. Они могут состоять из "реальных" файлов, +находящихся в сжатом виде в архивах (urar, rpm) или из виртуальных файлов, +например, сообщений в файле mailbox (mailfs) или части diff\-файла (patchfs). +Для доступа к этим ВФС суффикс +.I "fsname://" +должен быть добавлен к имени архива. Сам архив может находиться в другой ВФС. +.PP +Например, для получения списка содержимого архива documents.zip наберите: +.PP +.nf + cd documents.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +Можно манипулировать extfs\-путями как обычными каталогами и файлами. Например, +можно добавить их в каталоги быстрого доступа или перейти на него из истории +каталогов в панели. Основное ограничение: нельзя запускать shell\-команды +внутри extfs, как и на любой другой нелокальной ВФС. +.PP +Список некоторых extfs\-скриптов, включённых в Midnight Commander: +.TP +.B a +доступ к DOS/Windows диску 'A:' ("\fIcd a://\fR"). +.TP +.B apt +front end для системы управления пакетами APT (Debian) ("\fIcd apt://\fR"). +.TP +.B audio +Чтение и воспроизведение звуковых дорожек с CD ("\fIcd audio://\fR" или +\"\fIcd device/audio://\fR"). +.TP +.B bpp +пакеты дистрибутива Bad Penguin GNU/Linux ("\fIcd file.bpp/bpp://\fR"). +.TP +.B deb +пакеты дистрибутива Debian GNU/Linux ("\fIcd file.deb/deb://\fR"). +.TP +.B dpkg +Управление установленными deb\-пакетами ("\fIcd deb://\fR"). +.TP +.B hp48 +просмотр и копирование файлов с/на калькулятор HP48 ("\fIcd hp48://\fR"). +.TP +.B lslR +просмотр lslR\-файлов, находящихся на многих FTP\-серверах ("\fIcd filename/lslR://\fR"). +.TP +.B mailfs +поддержка файлов формата mailbox ("\fIcd mailbox/mailfs://\fR"). +.TP +.B patchfs +поддержка diff\-файлов ("\fIcd filename/patchfs://\fR"). +.TP +.B rpm +поддержка файлов в формате RPM ("\fIcd filename/rpm://\fR"). +.TP +.B rpms +Управление установленными в системе RPM\-пакетами ("\fIcd rpms://\fR"). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +архивы ("\fIcd archive/xxxx://\fR"), где xxxx один из: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +Вы можете назначить ВФС файлах по типу или расширению в секции +.\"LINK2" +Файл расширений +.\"Edit Extension File" +Например, для обработки пакетов Debian внесите: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Open=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH "Цвета" +Программа Midnight Commander пытается определить, поддерживает ли ваш +терминал цвета, используя для этого базу данных о терминалах и имя +вашего терминала. Иногда это не удаётся. В таких случаях можно +включить или отключить цветной вывод, используя ключи запуска программы +\-c и \-b, соответственно. +.PP +Программа может быть скомпилирована с использованием библиотек +.B ncurses +или +.BR S\-Lang . +.B Ncurses +не даёт возможности включать цветной режим: ncurses использует только +информацию из базы данных о терминалах. Для того чтобы узнать, какая +библиотека была использована при компиляции, дайте команду +.BR "mc \-V" . +.PP +Если программа скомпилирована с использованием менеджера экрана +.BR S\-Lang , +она проверяет значение переменной +.BR COLORTERM . +Задание этой переменной даёт тот же эффект, что и задание ключа \-c. +.PP +Можно указать терминалы, которые всегда должны работать в цветном +режиме, добавив строку +.I color_terminals +в секцию Colors инициализационного файла. В этом случае Midnight +Commander не будет пытаться определить, поддерживает ли ваш терминал +цветной вывод. Пример: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +.fi +.nf +color_terminals=terminal\-name1,terminal\-name2... +.fi +.PP +Midnight Commander обеспечивает также возможность изменять цвета, +заданные по умолчанию. В настоящее время таблица используемых цветов +задаётся переменной +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +или в секции Colors инициализационного файла. +.PP +В секции Colors загружаемая по умолчанию таблица цветов определяется +переменной (строкой) +.IR base_color . +Вы можете указать альтернативную таблицу цветов для терминала, используя +имя терминала как ключ в этой секции. Пример: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +Формат определения цвета: +.PP +.nf + <keyword>=<fgcolor>,<bgcolor>,<attributes>:<keyword>= ... +.fi +.PP +Цвета не являются обязательными, а в качестве ключевых слов <keywords> +могут использоваться: для задания цветовой палитры в панелях: normal, +selected, disabled, marked, markselect, errors, input, inputmark, inputunchanged, +commandlinemark, reverse, gauge, header, inputhistory, commandhistory. +Цвета строки "горячих" клавиш +.BR "F1 \- F10" : +bbarhotkey, bbarbutton. +Цвет строки статуса редактора и программ просмотра и сравнения файлов: statusbar. +Цвета пунктов меню: menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, menuinactive. +Цвета в окне диалога: dnormal, dfocus, dhotnormal, dhotfocus. +Цвета в диалоге\-сообщении об ошибке: errdfocus, errdhotnormal, errdhotfocus, errdtitle. +Цвета в окне встроенной помощи: helpnormal, helpitalic, helpbold, helplink, helpslink. +Цвета в окне программы просмотра: viewnormal, viewbold, viewunderline, viewselected. +Цвета в редакторе: editnormal, editbold, editmarked, editwhitespace, editlinestate. +Цвета окна всплывающего меню: pmenunormal, pmenusel, pmenutitle. +.PP +Цвета задавать не обязательно. Цвет какого именно поля определяется +каждым ключевым словом, можно понять из перевода этого ключевого слова. +Некоторые случаи требуют пояснений. +.PP +.I header +определяет цвет заголовка панели, строку, содержащую заголовки панелей +и индикатор сортировки. +.PP +.I input +определяет цвета в строке ввода в диалоговых окнах; +.PP +.I inputmark +цвет выделенного текста в строке ввода в диалоговых окнах; +.PP +.I inputunchanged +цвет текста в строке ввода до первого изменения или до перемещения курсора; +.PP +.I commandlinemark +цвет выделенного текста в командной строке; +.PP +.I gauge +определяет цвет заполненной части полоски (progress bar), при +графическом отображении хода выполнения файловых операций (копирование и +др.). +.I disabled +определяет цвет элемента диалога, который не может по каким\-то причинам быть выбран +для работы с ним. +.PP +Диалоговые окна используют следующие цвета: +.I dnormal +используется для нормального текста, +.I dfocus +\- цвет, используемый +для выделенного в данный момент компонента окна, +.I dhotnormal +\- цвет, используемый для выделения "горячих" клавиш в обычных +компонентах, в то время как цвет +.I dhotfocus +используется для выделения "горячих" клавиш в выбранных в данный момент +компонентах окна. +.PP +В меню используется та же самая схема, только в качестве названий +элементов используются menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel и menuinactive. +.PP +Окно подсказки использует следующие цвета: +.I helpnormal +\- для отображения простого текста, +.I helpitalic +\- для вывода текста, выделенного в man\-страницах курсивом, +.I helpbold +\- для вывода текста, выделенного в man\-страницах жирным шрифтом, +.I helplink +\- для выделения неактивных гиперссылок, +.I helpslink +\- для выделения активной в данный момент гиперссылки. +.PP +Во всплывающем меню используются следующие цвета: +.I pmenunormal +\- для невыбранных пунктов меню и как основной цвет окна, +.I pmenusel +\- для выбранного пункта меню, +.I pmenutitle +\- для заголовка окна меню. +.PP +Возможные цвета: black, gray, red, brightred, green, brightgreen, brown, +yellow, blue, brightblue, magenta, brightmagenta, cyan, brightcyan, +lightgray и white. Для прозрачного фона используются специальное ключевое +слово "default". Слово "default" можно использовать только при задании цвета +фона. Для основных цветов MC используется другое специальное ключевое +слово: "base". Если терминал поддерживает 256 цветов, то для них могут +использоваться обозначения: от color16 до color255 или от rgb000 до rgb555 +и от gray0 до gray23. +Пример: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color=normal=white,default:marked=magenta,default +.fi +.PP +Атрибуты обозначаются словами "bold", "italic", "underline", "reverse" и "blink". +Чтобы использовать несколько атрибутов, их надо перечислить через символ "+". +The special word "none" menas no attributes, without attempting to fall back +to base_color. Пример: +.PP +.nf +menuhotsel=yellow;black;bold+underline +.fi +.\"NODE "Skins" +.SH "Внешний вид" +Вы можете изменить внешний вид Midnight Commander'а. Для этого необходимо +указать файл, в котором указаны цвета и линии для отрисовки рамок. Такой +файл называется далее скин\-файл. переопределение внешнего вида полностью +совместимо с заданием цветов, описанным в секции +.\"LINK2" +Цвета\&. +.\"Colors" +.PP +Если скин содержит описание любого из 256\-ти цветов, то необходимо установить +опцию '256colors' со значением TRUE в секции [skin]. +.PP +Поиск скин\-файла производится по следующему алгоритму (до +первого нахождения файла): +.IP +.br +1) параметр командной строки +.B \-S <скин> +или +.B \-\-skin=<скин> +.br +2) переменная окружения +.B MC_SKIN +.br +3) параметр +.B skin +в секции +.B [Midnight\-Commander] +конфигурационного файла. +.br +4) файл +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/skins/default.ini +.br +5) файл +.B %pkgdatadir%/skins/default.ini +.PP +Параметры в трёх первых случаях могут содержать абсолютный путь к скин\-файлу +либо просто название скина (с расширением \.ini либо без него). В данном +случае поиск скин\-файла будет происходить по следующим каталогам (до первого +нахождения): +.IP +.br +1) +.B ~/.local/share/mc/skins/ +.br +2) +.B %sysconfdir%/mc/skins/ +.br +3) +.B %pkgdatadir%/skins/ +.br +.PP +Для получения расширенной информации, обратитесь к подразделам: +.IP +.\"LINK2" +Описание секций и параметров +.\"Skins sections" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Определения цветовых пар +.\"Skins colors" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Псевдонимы цветов и атрибутов +.\"Skins aliases" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Линии для отрисовки рамок +.\"Skins lines" +.br +.\"LINK2" +Совместимость +.\"Skins oldcolors" +.br + +.\"NODE " Skins sections" +.SH " Описание секций" +Секция +.B [skin] +содержит информацию, относящуюся к самому скин\-файлу. Параметр +.I description +кратко описывает скин. + +.PP +Секция +.B [filehighlight] +содержит описания цветовых пар для групп подсветок имен файлов. +Названия параметров в секции должно совпадать с названиями секций в файле подсветки. +Смотрите раздел +.\"LINK2" +Подсветка имён файлов +.\"Filenames Highlight" +для получения подробной информации. + +.PP +Секция +.B [core] +содержит описание элементов, используемых повсеместно. +.TP +.I _default_ +Цвет по умолчанию. Используется во всех остальных секциях (глобальный параметр), +если в них нет переопределения. +.TP +.I selected +курсор +.TP +.I marked +отмеченные данные +.TP +.I markselect +курсор на отмеченных данных +.TP +.I gauge +цвет заполненной части индикатора прогресса +.TP +.I input +элемент ввода данных +.TP +.I reverse +инвертированный цвет + +.PP +Секция +.B [dialog] +содержит описания элементов диалоговых окон (кроме сообщений об ошибках). +.TP +.I _default_ +цвет по умолчанию для данной секции. Если не указан, то используется [core]._default_ +.TP +.I dfocus +цвет элемента, находящегося в фокусе +.TP +.I dhotnormal +цвет "горячих" клавиш +.TP +.I dhotfocus +цвет "горячих" клавиш, находящихся в фокусе + +.PP +Секция +.B [error] +содержит описания элементов диалога\-сообщения об ошибках. +.TP +.I _default_ +цвет по умолчанию для данной секции. Если не указан, то используется [core]._default_ +.TP +.I errdhotnormal +цвет "горячих" клавиш +.TP +.I errdhotfocus +цвет "горячих" клавиш, находящихся в фокусе + +.PP +Секция +.B [menu] +содержит описание элементов, отображающихся в меню. Это касается как системного меню +(вызываемого клавишей +.BR F9 ), +так и пользовательских меню ( +.B F2 +в панелях или +.B F11 +в редакторе). +.TP +.I _default_ +цвет по умолчанию для данной секции. Если не указан, то используется [core]._default_ +.TP +.I entry +цвет пунктов меню +.TP +.I menuhot +цвет "горячих" клавиш +.TP +.I menusel +цвет выделенного пункта меню +.TP +.I menuhotsel +цвет "горячих" клавиш, находящихся в фокусе +.TP +.I menuinactive +цвет неактивного меню + +.PP +Секция +.B [help] +содержит описания цветов для окна отображения помощи. +.TP +.I _default_ +цвет по умолчанию для данной секции. Если не указан, то используется [core]._default_ +.TP +.I helpitalic +цветовыделение элементов с атрибутом +.B italic +.TP +.I helpbold +цветовыделение элементов с атрибутом +.B bold +.TP +.I helplink +цвет ссылок +.TP +.I helpslink +цвет ссылки, находящейся под курсором + +.PP +Секция +.B [editor] +содержит описания элементов редактора +.TP +.I _default_ +цвет по умолчанию для данной секции. Если не указан, то используется [core]._default_ +.TP +.I editbold +цветовыделение элементов с атрибутом +.B bold +.TP +.I editmarked +цвет выделенного текста +.TP +.I editwhitespace +цодсветка знаков табуляции и "висящих" пробелов +.TP +.I editlinestate +цвет области отображения состояния строки. + +.PP +Секция +.B [viewer] +содержит описания элементов редактора +.TP +.I viewunderline +цветовыделение элементов с атрибутом +.B underline + +.\"NODE " Skins colors" +.SH " Цветовые пары" +Каждый параметр в скин\-файле содержит цветовые пары. +.PP +Цветовые пары описываются как два цвета и необязательные атрибуты, +разделённые символом ";". Первый цвет задаёт цвет написания символов, +второй \- цвет фона. Любой из цветов и атрибуты могут быть пропущены, +в этом случае будет взят цвет по умолчанию (глобальный или для данной +секции). +.PP +Например: +.br +.nf +[core] + # зелёным по чёрному + _default_=green;black + # зелёным (умолч.) по синему + selected=;blue + # жёлтым по чёрному (умолч.) с подчёркиванием + marked=yellow;;underline +.fi + +.PP +Возможные цвета (названия) и атрибуты описаны в секции +.\"LINK2" +Цвета\&. +.\"Colors" + +.\"NODE " Skins aliases" +.SH " Псевдонимы цветов и атрибутов" +Эта необязательная секция содержит определения псевдонимов цветов (не цветовых пар) +и атрибутов. Псевдоним представляет собой части определения параметров скина. +В определение псевдонима может использоваться другой псевдоним, но при этом +не должны образовываться циклические ссылки. +.PP +Например: +.br +.nf +[aliases] + myfavfg=green + myfavbg=black + myfavattr=bold+italic +[core] + _default_=myfavfg;myfavbg;myfavattr +.fi + +.\"NODE " Skins lines" +.SH " Линии для отрисовки рамок" +Линии задаются в секции +.B [Lines] +в скин\-файле. По умолчанию используются одинарные линии, но возможно +переназначить на использование любых utf\-8 символов, похожих на линии +.PP +.I ВНИМАНИЕ!!! +При сборке Midnight Commander с библиотекой ncurses использование +линий ограничено! Возможна только отрисовка одинарных линий. По всем +вопросам и предложениям обращайтесь к разработчикам ncurses. + +.PP +Описание параметров секции +.BR [Lines] : +.TP +.I lefttop +изображение левого верхнего угла рамки +.TP +.I righttop +изображение правого верхнего угла рамки +.TP +.I centertop +изображение ответвления горизонтальной линии вниз +.TP +.I centerbottom +изображение ответвления горизонтальной линии вверх +.TP +.I leftbottom +изображение левого нижнего угла рамки +.TP +.I rightbottom +изображение правого нижнего угла рамки +.TP +.I leftmiddle +изображение ответвления вертикальной линии вправо +.TP +.I rightmiddle +изображение ответвления вертикальной линии влево +.TP +.I centermiddle +изображение пересечения вертикальной и горизонтальной линий +.TP +.I horiz +изображение горизонтальной линии +.TP +.I vert +изображение вертикальной линии +.TP +.I thinhoriz +изображение тонкой горизонтальной линии +.TP +.I thinvert +изображение тонкой вертикальной линии + +.\"NODE " Skins oldcolors" +.SH " Совместимость" +Назначение цветов элементов посредством скин\-файлов полностью совместимо +с назначением цветов, описанном в секции +.\"LINK2" +Цвета\&. +.\"Colors" +.PP +В данном случае переназначение цветов имеет приоритет над скин\-файлами и носит +дополняющий характер. + +.\"NODE "Filenames Highlight" +.SH "Подсветка имён файлов" +Секция [filehighlight] из текущего скин\-файла содержит имена параметров +(в качестве групп подсветки) и значения параметров как цветовые пары. +Описания цветовых пар смотрите в разделе +.\"LINK2" +Внешний вид +.\"Skins" +.PP +Правила подсветки находятся в файле %sysconfdir%/mc/filehighlight.ini +(~/.config/mc/filehighlight.ini). +Названия групп должны совпадать с названиями параметров в секции +[filehighlight] в текущем скин\-файле. +.PP +Ключи в группах могут принимать следующие значения: +.TP +.I type +Тип файла. Если параметр присутствует, остальные опции игнорируются +.TP +.I regexp +Регулярное выражение. Если присутствует, параметр 'extensions' игнорируется. +.TP +.I extensions +Список расширений файлов. Расширения разделяются символом ';'. +.TP +.I extensions_case +(имеет смысл только с параметром 'extensions') делает правило 'extensions' +чувствительным к регистру букв (true) или не чувствительным (false). +.PP +Параметр 'type' (тип файла) может принимать значения: +.nf +\- FILE (все файлы) + \- FILE_EXE +\- DIR (все каталоги) + \- LINK_DIR +\- LINK (все ссылки (линки), исключая "битые" линки) + \- HARDLINK + \- SYMLINK +\- STALE_LINK +\- DEVICE (все файлы устройств) + \- DEVICE_BLOCK + \- DEVICE_CHAR +\- SPECIAL (все специальные файлы) + \- SPECIAL_SOCKET + \- SPECIAL_FIFO + \- SPECIAL_DOOR +.fi +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Специальные установки" +Большинство установок Midnight Commander может быть изменено путем +использования меню. Однако имеется несколько установок, которые могут +быть изменены только путем непосредственного редактирования +конфигурационного файла +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini . +.PP +.I clear_before_exec +.IP +По умолчанию Midnight Commander очищает экран перед выполнением команды. +Если вы хотите, чтобы вывод предыдущей команды не исчезал, измените +значение поля clear_before_exec на 0. +.PP +.I confirm_view_dir +.IP +Если вы нажимаете +.B F3 +на имени каталога, обычно +.B MC +переходит в этот каталог. Если этот флаг будет установлен в 1, +.B MC +будет спрашивать подтверждение перед тем, как перейти в указанный +каталог, если в текущем каталоге были помечены какие\-либо файлы. +.PP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds +.IP +Этот параметр задаёт интервал времени (в секундах), по истечении +которого Midnight Commander будет предпринимать повторную попытку +соединиться с ftp\-сервером после того, как предыдущая попытка окончилась +неудачей. Если задано нулевое значение, программа не будет повторять +попытку соединиться. +.PP +.I ftpfs_use_passive_connections +.IP +По умолчанию эта опция выключена. Она включается для передачи файлов по +протоколу FTP в тех случаях, когда компьютер пользователя располагается +за маршрутизатором, фильтрующим пакеты (behind a filtering packet +router). Эта опция работает только в том случае, если вы не используете +прокси (you are not using an ftp proxy). +.PP +.I max_dirt_limit +.IP +Определяет, сколько раз может быть пропущена операция обновления +изображения на экране при работе во встроенной программе просмотра. +Обычно этот параметр не имеет большого значения, поскольку программа +автоматически выбирает оптимальное значение в зависимости от скорости +нажатий на клавиши. Однако на очень медленных машинах или терминалах с +большой скоростью автоповторения (keyboard auto repeat) слишком большое +значение этого параметра может привести к тому, что процедура обновления +экрана начнет вaс раздражать. +.IP +По\-видимому, значение max_dirt_limit, равное 10, обеспечивает наилучший +выбор, и именно такое значение устанавливается по умолчанию. +.PP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer +.IP +Определяет, будет ли прокрутка информации (scrolling) во встроенной +программе просмотра, осуществляемая с помощью мышки, производиться +страницами или на одну строку. +.PP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +.IP +Устанавливает специальный режим обработки символов '+', '\-', '*' в +командной строке. Эти символы используются для выбора, отмены выбора и +инвертирования выбора, но выполняют такую функцию только если командная +строка пуста. В середине командной строки эти символы уже не вызывают +выполнения операций группового выбора, но зато вы не сможете +использовать эти символы для таких операций, если командная строка не +пуста. +.PP +.I alternate_plus_minus +.IP +Если установлена, символы '+', '\-', '\\' and '*' обрабатываются обычным +образом. Чтобы выбрать файлы, отменить или инвертировать выбор, +используйте 'Alt\-+', 'Alt\--' и 'Alt\-*' соответственно. +.PP +.I show_output_starts_shell +.IP +Эта переменная работает только в том случае, когда не включена поддержка +subshell. Если она установлена, то при нажатии +.B C\-o +для перехода в экран пользователя будет запускаться новый экземпляр +оболочки. +.PP +.I torben_fj_mode +.IP +Установка этой опции слегка изменяет реакцию программы на нажатие клавиш +.B Home +и +.B End +в активной панели. Вместо того, чтобы перемещать подсветку (курсор) к первому +или последнему из имен файлов, отображенных на панели, нажатие этих клавиш будет +вызывать следующую реакцию: +.IP +клавиша +.B Home +\- перемещение курсора вверх до середины панели, если курсор был ниже, в противном +случае перемещение на самую верхнюю строку; если только курсор уже на самой верхней +строке, то перемещение на самую первую строку списка файлов. +.IP +клавиша +.B End +вызывает аналогичную реакцию \- смещение вниз до середины панели, если курсор +был выше; если ниже \- то переход на последнюю отображаемую в панели строку; +если уже на последней строке, то перемещение курсора на самую последнюю строку +списка файлов. +.PP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +.IP +Когда эта опция включена (что сделано по умолчанию), mc будет вызывать +программу +.B file +для определения типа файла в соответствии с типами файлов, указанными в файле +.\"LINK2" +mc.ext.ini\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.PP +.I xtree_mode +.IP +Если эта переменная включена (по умолчанию она выключена), то при +просмотре в одной из панелей структуры дерева каталогов во второй панели +автоматически будет отображаться список файлов выбранного каталога. +.TP +.I clipboard_store +Эта переменная позволяет назначить внешнюю программу (с параметрами) для +работы с буфером обмена, такую как 'xclip', для вставки данных в системный +буфер обмена. +Например: +.PP +.nf +clipboard_store=xclip \-i +.fi +.TP +.I clipboard_paste +Эта переменная позволяет назначить внешнюю программу (с параметрами) для +работы с буфером обмена, такую как 'xclip', для получения данных из системного +буфера обмена. +Например: +.PP +.nf +clipboard_paste=xclip \-o +.fi +.PP +.I autodetect_codeset +.IP +Эта опция позволяет использовать команду enca для автоматического +определения кодировки текстовых файлов во встроенных просмотрщике и редакторе. +Список допустимых значений может быть получен командой +"enca \-\-list languages | cut \-d : \-f1". Опция должна располагаться в секции +[Misc]. +.PP +Например: +.PP +.nf +autodetect_codeset=russian +.fi +.\"NODE "Parameters for external editor or viewer" +.SH "Параметры для внешних редакторов и программ просмотра" +Midnight Commander позволяет задать некоторые параметрыы для внешних редакторов +и программ просмотра. Они задаются в секции "[External editor or viewer parameters]", +которая сначала ищется в системном (mc.lib), а затем в пользовательском (~/.config/mc/ini) +файле инициализации. Имя параметра должно совпадать с именем внешнего редактора или +программы просмотра. Значение параметра может содержать следующие переменные: +.PP +.I %filename +Имя файла для редактирования или просмотра. +.PP +.I %lineno +Номер начальной строки в открываемом файле. +.PP +Пример: +.PP +.nf +[External editor or viewer parameters] + vi=%filename +%lineno + joe=%filename +%lineno + more=%filename +%lineno +.fi +.PP +Начальная строка передаётся в во внешнюю программу редактирования или просмотра +только в том случае, если она вызывается из окна результатов +.\"LINK2" +поиска файлов\&. +.\"Find File" +.PP +Если внешняя программа редактирования или просмотра запускается по клавишам +.B F4 +или +.BR F3 , +MC надеется, что она имеет собственную функцию открытия файла в том же самом месте, +где он был закрыт в предыдущий раз. Такую функцию имеет, например, редактор "joe" +и многие другие. MC не препятствует внешней программе редактирования или просмотра +самостоятельно сохранять и восстанавливать позиции в открываемых файлах. +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH "Базы терминалов" +Midnight Commander обеспечивает возможность внесения исправлений в +системную базу терминалов, даже если вы не обладаете правами +суперпользователя. Midnight Commander ищет в системном инициализационном +файле (файл +.B mc.lib +в библиотечном каталоге программы Midnight Commander) или в файле +.B ~/.config/mc/ini +секцию с названием "terminal:your\-terminal\-name", а затем секцию +"terminal:general". Каждая строка в этих секциях содержит ключевое +слово, которое вы хотите определить, за которым следует знак равенства и +определение ключевого слова. Специальный символ +.B \\\\e +используется для задания экранирующих последовательностей, а +.B ^x +служит для задания последовательностей вида +.B control\-x +.PP +В качестве ключевых слов используются: +.PP +.nf +f0 \- f20 определяет последовательность символов, + генерируемых при нажатии на функциональные + клавиши F0\-F20 +bs определяет последовательность символов, которая + будет использоваться вместо клавиши Backspace +home то же для клавиши Home +end то же для клавиши End +up то же для клавиши Up +down то же для клавиши Down +left то же для клавиши Left +right то же для клавиши Right +pgdn то же для клавиши Page Down +pgup то же для клавиши Page Up +insert то же для клавиши Insert +delete то же для клавиши Delete +complete комбинация клавиш для выполнения операции "завершение ввода" +.fi +.PP +Например, для того, чтобы задать, что клавише +.B Insert +соответствует экранирующая последовательность "Escape + [ + O + p", нужно +в файле ini прописать строку: +.PP +.nf +insert=\\e[Op +.fi +.PP +Операция "завершение ввода" обычно вызывается по клавишам +.BR Alt\-Tab , +но задав значение ключевого слова +.I complete +можно вызывать такую же реакцию системы по другой комбинации клавиш +(почему бы не сделать это, если у вас клавиатура, имеющая массу +неиспользуемых клавиш!). +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH "Файлы" +Программа извлекает всю нужную ей информацию из файлов, пути к которым +определяются относительно переменной окружения +.BR MC_DATADIR . +Если эта переменная не задана, происходит обращение к так называемому +библиотечному каталогу программы Midnight Commander. Для того чтобы +узнать имя этого каталога, дайте команду +.BR "mc \-f" . +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +Файл подсказки для программы. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Используемый по умолчанию общесистемный файл расширений. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Файл расширений пользователя. Если этот файл существует, он используется +вместо общесистемного файла расширений. +.PP +.I %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ini +.RE +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +Общесистемные файлы установок для Midnight Commander; используются только +в тех случаях, когда пользователь не имеет своего файла +.BR ~/.config/mc/ini . +Если файл %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ini существует, то %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +не используется. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Глобальные установки для Midnight Commander. Установки из этого файла +действительны для всех пользователей, независимо от того, имеют ли они +~/.config/mc/ini или нет. В настоящий момент только +.\"LINK2" +настройки терминалов +.\"Terminal databases" +загружаются из mc.lib. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +Собственные установки пользователя. Если такой файл существует, то +установки загружаются из него, а не из общесистемного инициализационного +файла программы. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +Этот файл содержит подсказки (hints или cookies), циклически +отображаемые программой. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +Этот файл содержит общесистемное меню приложений. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +Собственное меню пользователя. Если этот файл существует, он +используется вместо общесистемного меню. +.PP +.I ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.IP +Список каталогов для окна, выводимого при выборе пункта меню +"Команда/Дерево каталогов" или при просмотре дерева каталогов в одной из +панелей. Каждая строка файла соответствует подкаталогу. Строки, +начинающиеся со слэша ("/") соответствуют полным путям. Если строка +начинается с цифры, то надо взять указанное число символов из имени +предыдущего каталога. При желании можно создать этот файл, дав +команду +.IP +.nf + find / \-type d \-print | sort > ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.fi +.IP +Обычно не имеет смысла делать это, потому что Midnight Commander +автоматически обновляет этот файл. +.PP +.I ./.mc.menu +.IP +локальное меню, задаваемое пользователем. Если этот файл существует, он +используется вместо файла меню из домашнего каталога пользователя и +общесистемного меню. +.PP +Для того чтобы изменить корневой каталог MC, установленный по умолчанию, +можно использовать переменную окружения +.BR MC_PROFILE_ROOT . +Значением этой переменный должен быть абсолютный путь. Если переменная MC_PROFILE_ROOT +не определена или пуста, используется переменная окружения HOME. Если и HOME +не определена или пуста, каталоги MC определяются средствами библиотеки GLib. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.\" "LICENSE" +.SH Лицензия +Эта программа распространяется в надежде, что она будет полезной, но БЕЗ +КАКИХ\-ЛИБО ГАРАНТИЙ; даже без подразумеваемых гарантий КОММЕРЧЕСКОЙ +ЦЕННОСТИ или ПРИГОДНОСТИ ДЛЯ КОНКРЕТНОЙ ЦЕЛИ. Для получения подробных +сведений смотрите Универсальную Общественную Лицензию GNU. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH "Обновление версий" +Последние версии программы Midnight Commander можно найти на сайте +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH "Другие источники" +ed(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), view(1), sh(1), bash(1), tcsh(1), +zsh(1), mcedit(1). +.PP +.nf +Страница, посвященная Midnight Commander, в World Wide Web: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.PP +Данная страница оперативного руководства содержит информацию, актуальную +для версии 4.6.0 (январь 2003 года). Если вы используете более свежую +версию программы, оригинальная страница на английском языке может +содержать более полную и актуальную информацию. Для просмотра +оригинальной страницы в оболочке bash можно использовать команду +.nf +LANG= man mc +.fi +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH "АВТОРЫ" +Miguel de Icaza (miguel@ximian.com), Janne Kukonlehto +(jtklehto@paju.oulu.fi), Radek Doulik (rodo@ucw.cz), Fred Leeflang +(fredl@nebula.ow.org), Dugan Porter (dugan@b011.eunet.es), Jakub Jelinek +(jj@sunsite.mff.cuni.cz), Ching Hui (mr854307@cs.nthu.edu.tw), Andrej +Borsenkow (borsenkow.msk@sni.de), Norbert Warmuth +(nwarmuth@privat.circular.de), Mauricio Plaza +(mok@roxanne.nuclecu.unam.mx), Paul Sheer (psheer@icon.co.za), Pavel +Machek (pavel@ucw.cz) and Pavel Roskin (proski@gnu.org) are the +developers of this package. Alessandro Rubini (rubini@ipvvis.unipv.it) +has been especially helpful debugging and enhancing the program's mouse +support, John Davis (davis@space.mit.edu) also made his S\-Lang library +available to us under the GPL and answered my questions about it, and +the following people have contributed code and many bug fixes (in +alphabetical order): +.PP +Adam Tla/lka (atlka@sunrise.pg.gda.pl), alex@bcs.zp.ua (Alex I. +Tkachenko), Antonio Palama, DOS port (palama@posso.dm.unipi.it), Erwin +van Eijk (wabbit@corner.iaf.nl), Gerd Knorr (kraxel@cs.tu\-berlin.de), +Jean\-Daniel Luiset (luiset@cih.hcuge.ch), Jon Stevens +(root@dolphin.csudh.edu), Juan Francisco Grigera, Win32 port +(j\-grigera@usa.net), Juan Jose Ciarlante (jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), +Ilya Rybkin (rybkin@rouge.phys.lsu.edu), Marcelo Roccasalva +(mfroccas@raiz.uncu.edu.ar), Massimo Fontanelli (MC8737@mclink.it), +Sergey Ya. Korshunoff (seyko2@gmail.com), Thomas Pundt +(pundtt@math.uni\-muenster.de), Timur Bakeyev +(timur@goff.comtat.kazan.su), Tomasz Cholewo +(tjchol01@mecca.spd.louisville.edu), Torben Fjerdingstad +(torben.fjerdingstad@uni\-c.dk), Vadim Sinolitis (vvs@nsrd.npi.msu.su) +and Wim Osterholt (wim@djo.wtm.tudelft.nl). +.PP +Перевод текста подсказки на русский язык \- Костромин В.А., 1999г. +Исправления, адаптация к текущей версии и конвертация в формат mandoc \- +Самойлов А.В. <sav@bcs.zp.ua>, 2002 г. +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH "Недоработки" +Известные авторам недоработки программы перечислены в файле TODO, +который можно найти в составе поставляемого пакета. +.PP +Если вы обнаружили в программе какие\-то недостатки или недоработки, +оформите, пожалуйста, ваши замечания по адресу +.IR https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ . +.PP +Дайте подробное описание обнаруженных недостатков (и/или ваших +предложений по усовершенствованию программы), сообщите версию программы +с которой вы работаете (для получения номера версии используйте команду +mc \-V), в какой операционной системе вы запускали программу. В случае +фатальной ошибки программы мы будем очень благодарны, если вы пришлете +след вызовов. diff --git a/doc/man/sr/Makefile.am b/doc/man/sr/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62883bf --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/sr/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +LANG=sr +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) + +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in + +man_MANS = mc.1 + +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) + +DATE_LANG=sr_SR.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT=%B %Y. + +include ../date-of-man-include.am diff --git a/doc/man/sr/Makefile.in b/doc/man/sr/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd8619f --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/sr/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.5 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +subdir = doc/man/sr +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/intlmacosx.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mode_t.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/stat-size.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fstypename.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/fsusage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/mountlist.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/windows-stat-inodes.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/gnulib/sys_types_h.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_path_lib_pcre.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_pcre2.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/dx_doxygen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_require_defined.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_append_compile_flags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-cflags.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-check-search-type.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-get-fs-info.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-x.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-use-termcap.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-ncurses.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-screen-slang.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-with-internal-edit.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-subshell.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-background.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-ext2fs-attr.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-glib.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-vfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/rpc.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/socket.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-extfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-ftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-sftp.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-fish.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-undelfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-tarfs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/vfs/mc-vfs-cpiofs.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-tests.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-i18n.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4.include/mc-assert.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am \ + $(srcdir)/Makefile.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CHECK_CFLAGS = @CHECK_CFLAGS@ +CHECK_LIBS = @CHECK_LIBS@ +COM_ERR_CFLAGS = @COM_ERR_CFLAGS@ +COM_ERR_LIBS = @COM_ERR_LIBS@ +CP1251 = @CP1251@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CSCOPE = @CSCOPE@ +CTAGS = @CTAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DOC_LINGUAS = @DOC_LINGUAS@ +DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE = @DOXYGEN_PAPER_SIZE@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +DX_CONFIG = @DX_CONFIG@ +DX_DOCDIR = @DX_DOCDIR@ +DX_DOT = @DX_DOT@ +DX_DOXYGEN = @DX_DOXYGEN@ +DX_DVIPS = @DX_DVIPS@ +DX_EGREP = @DX_EGREP@ +DX_ENV = @DX_ENV@ +DX_FLAG_chi = @DX_FLAG_chi@ +DX_FLAG_chm = @DX_FLAG_chm@ +DX_FLAG_doc = @DX_FLAG_doc@ +DX_FLAG_dot = @DX_FLAG_dot@ +DX_FLAG_html = @DX_FLAG_html@ +DX_FLAG_man = @DX_FLAG_man@ +DX_FLAG_pdf = @DX_FLAG_pdf@ +DX_FLAG_ps = @DX_FLAG_ps@ +DX_FLAG_rtf = @DX_FLAG_rtf@ +DX_FLAG_xml = @DX_FLAG_xml@ +DX_HHC = @DX_HHC@ +DX_LATEX = @DX_LATEX@ +DX_MAKEINDEX = @DX_MAKEINDEX@ +DX_PDFLATEX = @DX_PDFLATEX@ +DX_PERL = @DX_PERL@ +DX_PROJECT = @DX_PROJECT@ +E2P_CFLAGS = @E2P_CFLAGS@ +E2P_LIBS = @E2P_LIBS@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +ETAGS = @ETAGS@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +EXT2FS_CFLAGS = @EXT2FS_CFLAGS@ +EXT2FS_LIBS = @EXT2FS_LIBS@ +EXTHELPERSDIR = @EXTHELPERSDIR@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +FILECMD = @FILECMD@ +GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@ +GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@ +GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@ +GMODULE_CFLAGS = @GMODULE_CFLAGS@ +GMODULE_LIBS = @GMODULE_LIBS@ +GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ +GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_FILECMD = @HAVE_FILECMD@ +HAVE_ZIPINFO = @HAVE_ZIPINFO@ +HAVE_nroff = @HAVE_nroff@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ +INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ +LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ +LIBMC_RELEASE = @LIBMC_RELEASE@ +LIBMC_VERSION = @LIBMC_VERSION@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBSSH_CFLAGS = @LIBSSH_CFLAGS@ +LIBSSH_LIBS = @LIBSSH_LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ +LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAINT = @MAINT@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANDOC = @MANDOC@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MAN_DATE = @MAN_DATE@ +MAN_FLAGS = @MAN_FLAGS@ +MAN_VERSION = @MAN_VERSION@ +MCLIBS = @MCLIBS@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@ +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PCRE_CFLAGS = @PCRE_CFLAGS@ +PCRE_LIBS = @PCRE_LIBS@ +PERL = @PERL@ +PERL_FOR_BUILD = @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +POSUB = @POSUB@ +PYTHON = @PYTHON@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RUBY = @RUBY@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SLANG_CFLAGS = @SLANG_CFLAGS@ +SLANG_LIBS = @SLANG_LIBS@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +TESTS_LDFLAGS = @TESTS_LDFLAGS@ +UNZIP = @UNZIP@ +USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +X11_WWW = @X11_WWW@ +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ +XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@ +XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@ +XMKMF = @XMKMF@ +X_CFLAGS = @X_CFLAGS@ +X_EXTRA_LIBS = @X_EXTRA_LIBS@ +X_LIBS = @X_LIBS@ +X_PRE_LIBS = @X_PRE_LIBS@ +ZIP = @ZIP@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +mandir = @mandir@/$(LANG) +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +LANG = sr +EXTRA_DIST = mc.1.in +man_MANS = mc.1 +CLEANFILES = $(man_MANS) +DATE_LANG = sr_SR.UTF-8 +DATE_FORMAT = %B %Y. +SED_PARAMETERS = \ + -e "s/%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%/$${MAN_DATE}/g" \ + -e "s/%MAN_VERSION%/@MAN_VERSION@/g" \ + -e "s{%sysconfdir%{@sysconfdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%libexecdir%{@libexecdir@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkglibexecdir%{$(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@{g" \ + -e "s{%pkgdatadir%{$(datadir)/@PACKAGE@{g" + +MAN_DATE_CMD = \ + LC_ALL=$(DATE_LANG) @PERL_FOR_BUILD@ -CS -MPOSIX -e '\ + @fi=lstat("'$${MAN_FILE}'"); \ + print POSIX::strftime("$(DATE_FORMAT)", localtime($$fi[9]));' 2>/dev/null + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/sr/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/man/sr/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; +$(srcdir)/../date-of-man-include.am $(am__empty): + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: + +info: info-am + +info-am: + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: + +install-man: install-man1 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am \ + install install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \ + install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \ + install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ + install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \ + install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \ + installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ + mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am \ + ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man \ + uninstall-man1 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +mc.1: $(srcdir)/mc.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mc.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mc.1.in' > '$@' + +mcedit.1: $(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcedit.1.in' > '$@' + +mcview.1: $(srcdir)/mcview.1.in + MAN_FILE='$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in'; MAN_DATE=$$($(MAN_DATE_CMD)); \ + $(SED) $(SED_PARAMETERS) '$(srcdir)/mcview.1.in' > '$@' + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/man/sr/mc.1.in b/doc/man/sr/mc.1.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd04dec --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/sr/mc.1.in @@ -0,0 +1,3169 @@ +.\" -*- mode: troff; coding: UTF-8 -*- +.\"TOPICS "Теме:" +.TH ПН 1 "%DATE_OF_MAN_PAGE%" "ПН верзија %MAN_VERSION%" "ГНУ\-ов поноћни наредник" +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "НАЗИВ" +mc \- Визуална љуска за Униксолике системе. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "УПОТРЕБА" +.B mc +[\-abcCdfhPstuUVx] [\-l дневник] [дир1 [дир2]] [\-e [датотека]] [\-v датотека] +.\"NODE "DESCRIPTION" +.SH "ОПИС" +ГНУ\-ов поноћни наредник је прегледач директоријума и управитељ +датотекама за Униксолике оперативне системе. +.\"NODE "OPTIONS" +.\"DONT_SPLIT" +.SH "ИЗБОРИ" +.TP +.I "\-a" +Искључује употребу графичких знакова за цртање. +.TP +.I "\-b" +Захтева приказ у режиму без боја. +.TP +.I "\-c" +Захтева обојени режим; молим да погледате одељак +.\"LINK2" +Боје +.\"Colors" +за више информација. +.TP +.I "\-C арг" +Задавање другачијег скупа боја у наредбеном реду. Формат аргумента је +описан у одељку +.\"LINK2" +Боје\&. +.\"Colors" +.TP +.I "\-d" +Искључује подршку за миша. +.TP +.I "\-e [датотека]" +Покреће уграђени уређивач. Ако је задан назив датотеке, отвара га при +покретању. Видите и +.BR "mcedit (1)" . +.TP +.I "\-f" +Приказује уграђене путање за тражење датотека Поноћног наредника. +.TP +.I "\-k" +Поставља меке тастере на подразумеване вредности из база +termcap/terminfo. Корисно је само на ХП\-овим терминалима када не +функционишу функцијски тастери. +.TP +.I "\-l датотека" +Чува дијалог ftpfs\-а са сервером у датотеку. +.TP +.I "\-P датотека" +Штампа последњи радни директоријум у задану датотеку. Овај избор не би +требало непосредно користити. Уместо тога, требало би га користити из +посебног списа љуске који аутоматски поставља текући директоријум +љуске на последњи директоријум у коме се налазио Поноћни наредник. +Учитајте датотеку +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.sh +(за кориснике љуски bash и zsh) или +.B %pkglibexecdir%/mc.csh +(за кориснике љуске tcsh), тим редом, да бисте задали +.B mc +као надимак за одговарајући спис љуске. +.TP +.I "\-s" +Укључује режим спорог терминала; у овом режиму програм неће исцртавати +скупе знакове за цртање линија и искључиће брбљиви режим. +.TP +.I "\-t" +Користи се само ако је код преведен уз коришћење библиотеке S\-Lang и +базе terminfo: овај избор чини да Поноћни наредник користи вредност +променљиве +.B TERMCAP +за податак о терминалу уместо података из системске базе терминала +.TP +.I "\-u" +Искључује употребу подршке за упоредне љуске (има смисла само уколико +је Поноћни наредник преведен са подршком за упоредне љуске). +.TP +.I "\-U" +Укључује употребу подршке за упоредне љуске (има смисла само уколико +је Поноћни наредник преведен са подршком за подљуске која је подешена +као необавезна одлика). +.TP +.I "\-v датотека" +Покреће уграђени прегледач за преглед задане датотеке. Погледајте и +.BR "mcview (1)" . +.TP +.I "\-V" +Приказује верзију програма. +.TP +.I "\-x" +Захтева режим Икс терминала. Користи се када је програм покренут на +терминалима који имају подршку за Икс терминале (два екранска режима, +и могућност слања мишјих комбинација избегавања). +.TP +.I \-X, \-\-no\-x11 +Do not use X11 to get the state of modifiers Alt, Ctrl, Shift +.TP +.I \-g, \-\-oldmouse +Force a "normal tracking" mouse mode. Used when running on +xterm\-capable terminals (tmux/screen). +.PP +Ако је ово задано, прва путања се тумачи као директоријум кога би +требало приказати у изабраном окну, а друга путања као директоријум +кога би требало приказати у другом окну. +.\"NODE "Overview" +.SH "Преглед" +Екран Поноћног наредника је подељен у четири дела. Два директоријумска +окна заузимају скоро читав екрански простор. Подразумевано стање је да +други ред с краја екрана представља наредбени ред љуске, а последњи +ред приказује натписе функцијских тастера. Највиши ред представља +.\"LINK2" +ред менија\&. +.\"Menu Bar" +Ред менија се можда не види, али се појављује када притиснете дугме +миша када је показивач на највишем реду или када притиснете тастер F9. +.PP +Поноћни наредник нуди истовремени преглед два директоријума. Једно од +окана је текуће (ред избора се налази у текућем окну). Скоро све +операције се дешавају у текућем окну. Неке од операција, као што су +`Преименуј' и `Копирај' подразумевано користе директоријум неизабраног +окна као одредиште (не брините, оне ће вас увек прво питати за +потврду). За више информација, погледајте одељке о +.\"LINK2" +Директоријумским окнима\&, +.\"Directory Panels" +.\"LINK2" +Менијима `Лево' и `Десно' +.\"Left and Right Menus" +и +.\"LINK2" +Менију `Датотека'\&. +.\"File Menu" +.PP +Можете извршавати системске наредбе из Поноћног наредника простим +укуцавањем. Све што откуцате ће се појавити на наредбеном реду љуске, +а када притиснете тастер `Enter', Поноћни наредник ће извршити +наредбени ред који сте откуцали; прочитајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +Наредбени ред љуске +.\"Shell Command Line" +и +.\"LINK2" +Пречице реда за унос +.\"Input Line Keys" +да бисте сазнали више о наредбеном реду. +.\"NODE "Mouse Support" +.SH "Подршка за миша" +Поноћни наредник се испоручује са подршком за миша. Она се укључује +сваки пут када покрећете програм на терминалу врсте +.B xterm(1) +(ово ради чак и када покренете повезивање врсте telnet, ssh или rlogin +на други рачунар из Икс терминала) или ако покрећете програм у конзоли +и покренут вам је сервис за миша +.BR "gpm". +.PP +Када притиснете лево дугме миша над датотеком у директоријумским +окнима, та датотека ће бити изабрана; ако притиснете десно дугме, +датотека ће бити означена (или одозначена, у зависности од претходног +стања). +.PP +Двоструки притисак над датотеком ће покушати да изврши наредбу ако се +ради о извршном програму; а ако је у +.\"LINK2" +датотеци врста +.\"Edit Extension File" +задан програм за врсту те датотеке, тај програм ће бити извршен. +.PP +Такође је могуће извршавати наредбе додељене натписима функцијских +тастера притиснувши тастер миша када се показивач налази изнад њих. +.PP +Ако је дугме миша притиснуто када се показивач налази на највишем реду +оквира директоријумског окна, оно се клиза једну страну навише. Слично +овоме, притиском дугмета када се показивач налази на најнижем реду +оквира окно се клиза једну страну наниже. Овај начин клизања преко +реда оквира функционише и у +.\"LINK2" +Прегледачу помоћи +.\"Contents" +и +.\"LINK2" +Стаблу директоријума\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +.PP +Подразумевано чекање при понављању за дугмад миша је 400 милисекунди. +Ово се може променити уређивањем датотеке +.\"LINK2" +\&~/.config/mc/ini +.\"Save Setup" +и променом параметра +.IR "mouse_repeat_rate". +.PP +Ако покрећете Поноћног наредника са подршком за миша, можете се +пребацити на подразумевано понашање миша (исецање и лепљење текста) +држећи тастер `Shift'. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Keys" +.SH "Пречице" +Неке наредбе у Поноћном нареднику укључују употребу тастера +.I Control +(који је понекад означен са CTRL или CTL) и тастера +.I Meta +(који је понекад означен са ALT или чак Compose). У овом упутству ћемо +користити следеће скраћенице: +.TP +.B C\-<знак> +значи да би требало држати тастер `Control' док се не притисне тастер +<знак>. Тако, C\-f значи: држите тастер `Control' и притисните `f'. +.TP +.B M\-<знак> +значи да би требало држати тастер `Meta' или `Alt' док се не притисне +тастер <знак>. Ако на вашој тастатури не постоје тастери `Meta' или +`Alt', притисните тастер +.IR ESC , +отпустите га, а онда притисните тастер <знак>. +.TP +.B S\-<знак> +значи да би требало држати тастер `Shift' док се не притисне тастер +<знак>. +.PP +Сви редови за унос у Поноћном нареднику користе имитацију пречица +уређивача ГНУ\-ов Емакс. +.PP +Постоје многи одељци који се баве пречицама. Следећи су најважнији. +.PP +Одељак +.\"LINK2" +Мени `Датотека' +.\"File Menu" +описује пречице са тастатуре за наредбе из менија `Датотека'. Овај +одељак укључује функцијске тастере. Већина ових наредби ради исте +ствари, обично над изабраном датотеком или означеним датотекама. +.PP +Одељак +.\"LINK2" +Директоријумска окна +.\"Directory Panels" +описује пречице које бирају датотеку или означавају датотеке као +одредишта потоњих радњи (обично изабраних из менија `Датотека'). +.PP +Одељак +.\"LINK2" +Наредбени ред љуске +.\"Shell Command Line" +наводи пречице које се користе за уношење и уређивање наредбених +редова. Већина ових копира називе датотека и сл. из директоријумских +окана у наредбени ред (да би се избегло претерано куцање) или приступа +историји наредбеног реда. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Пречице реда за унос +.\"Input Line Keys" +се користе за уређивање редова за унос. Ово укључује наредбене редове +и редове за унос у прозорима упита. +.\"NODE " Miscellaneous Keys" +.SH " Разне пречице" +Ево неких пречица које не спадају ни у једну од других категорија: +.TP +.B Enter +ако у наредбеном реду (оном на дну окана) има текста, онда се извршава +та наредба. Ако у наредбеном реду нема текста, онда у случају да је +ред за бирање над директоријумом, Поноћни наредник извршава наредбу +.B chdir(2) +(промена директоријума) у означеном директоријуму и освежава податке у +окну; ако је изабрана извршна датотека, онда се она извршава. На +крају, ако се врста означене датотеке поклапа са једном од врста из +.\"LINK2" +датотеке врста\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +онда се извршава одговарајућа наредба. +.TP +.B C\-l +поново исцртава све податке у Поноћном нареднику. +.TP +.B C\-x c +покреће наредбу +.\"LINK2" +Chmod (промена дозвола) +.\"Chmod" +над датотеком или над означеним датотекама. +.TP +.B C\-x o +покреће наредбу +.\"LINK2" +Chown (промена власника) +.\"Chown" +над текућом датотеком или над означеним датотекама. +.TP +.B C\-x l +покреће наредбу `веза'. +.TP +.B C\-x s +покреће наредбу `симболичка веза'. +.TP +.B C\-x i +поставља режим другог окна на `информације'. +.TP +.B C\-x q +поставља режим другог окна на `брзи преглед'. +.TP +.B C\-x ! +извршава наредбу +.\"LINK2" +Критеријум попуне окна\&. +.\"External panelize" +.TP +.B C\-x h +покреће наредбу +.\"LINK2" +Додај директоријум у брзи списак\&. +.\"Hotlist" +.TP +.B M\-! +извршава наредбу Филтрирани приказ, која је описана у одељку +.\"LINK2" +наредба прегледа\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.TP +.B M\-? +извршава наредбу +.\"LINK2" +Нађи датотеку\&. +.\"Find File" +.TP +.B M\-c +отвара дијалог +.\"LINK2" +Брза пром.дир. +.\"Quick cd" +.TP +.B C\-o +када се програм покреће под конзолом ГНУ\-а или FreeBSD\-а или под Икс +терминалом, приказаће вам излаз претходне наредбе. Када се покреће под +конзолом ГНУ\-а, Поноћни наредник користи спољашњи програм (cons.saver) +који се брине о чувању и враћању података на екран. +.PP +Када је при превођењу укључена подршка за подљуске, можете било кад да +притиснете C\-o и то ће вас одвести назад на главни екран Поноћног +наредника; да бисте се вратили у вашу апликацију потребно је само да +поново притиснете C\-o. Ако сте зауставили апликацију користећи овај +трик, нећете моћи да извршавате друге програме из Поноћног наредника +све док не прекинете заустављену апликацију. +.\"NODE " Directory Panels" +.SH " Директоријумска окна" +Овај одељак набраја пречице које раде са директоријумским окнима. Ако +желите да сазнате како да промените изглед окана, погледајте одељак о +.\"LINK2" +Менијима `Лево' и `Десно'\&. +.\"Left and Right Menus" +.TP +.B Tab, C\-i +мења текуће окно. Старо окно постаје ново текуће окно а старо текуће +окно постаје ново друго окно. Ред за бирање се помера из старог +текућег окна на ново текуће окно. +.TP +.B Insert, C\-t +DEPRECATED! да бисте означили датотеке можете користити тастер `Insert' (низ kich1 +из базе terminfo) или комбинацију C\-t (Control\-t). Да бисте одозначили +датотеке, само поново означите означену датотеку. +.TP +.B Insert +to tag files you may use the Insert key (the kich1 terminfo sequence). +To untag files, just retag a tagged file. +.TP +.B C\-t +to change charset of panel you may use C\-t (Control\-t). +Recoding is made from selected codepage into system codepage. To +cancel the recoding you may select "directory up" (..) in active panel. +To cancel the charsets in all directories, select "No translation " in +the dialog of encodings. +.TP +.B M\-g, M\-r, M\-j +користе се за бирање највише датотеке у окну, средње датотеке и +најниже, тим редом. +.TP +.B M\-t +смењује текући списак приказа на следећи режим списка приказа. Уз ово +је могуће брзо прећи са дугачког списка на обичан или режим који је +задао корисник. +.TP +.B C\-\\\\ (control\-обрнута коса црта) +приказује +.\"LINK2" +брзи списак директоријума +.\"Hotlist" +и пребацује се у изабрани директоријум. +.TP +.B + \ (плус) +ово се користи за избор (означавање) групе датотека. Поноћни наредник +ће питати за регуларни израз који описује групу. Када су укључени +.IR "Обрасци љуске", +регуларни израз скоро да одговара регуларним изразима у љусци (* +замењује нула или више знакова а ? замењује један знак). Ако су +.I Обрасци љуске +искључени, онда се означавање датотека спроводи обичним регуларним +изразима (погледајте ed (1)). +.TP +.B \\\\ (обрнута коса црта) +користите тастер `\\' да бисте одизабрали групу датотека. Ово је +супротно од тастера Плус. +.TP +.B навише, C\-p +помера ред за бирање на претходну ставку у окну. +.TP +.B наниже, C\-n +помера ред за бирање на следећу ставку у окну. +.TP +.B home, a1, M\-< +помера ред за бирање на прву ставку у окну. +.TP +.B end, c1, M\-> +помера ред за бирање на последњу ставку у окну. +.TP +.B next\-page, C\-v +помера ред за бирање једну страну наниже. +.TP +.B prev\-page, M\-v +помера ред за избор једну страну навише. +.TP +.B M\-o +поставља текући директоријум другог окна на текући директоријум +текућег окна. Пребацује друго окно у режим списка по потреби. Ако +тренутно окно приказује резултате наредбе `Пребаци у окно', друго окно +ће бити обично. +.TP +.B C\-PageUp, C\-PageDown +само у случају да их подржава терминал: премешта се у директоријум +`..' и у тренутно изабран директоријум, тим редом. +.TP +.B M\-y +премешта се у претходни директоријум из историје, еквивалент притиску +.I < +дугметом миша. +.TP +.B M\-u +премешта се на следећи директоријум из историје, еквивалент притиску +.I > +дугметом миша. +.TP +.B M\-S\-h, M\-H +приказује историју директоријума, еквивалент притиску `v' дугметом миша. +.\"NODE " Quick search" +.SH " Quick search" +.TP +.B C\-s, M\-s +започиње претрагу назива датотека у списку директоријума. Када је +претрага укључена, кориснички унос ће бити додан на ниску за претрагу +уместо на наредбени ред. Ако је избор +.I Прикажи мини стање +укључен, ниска за претрагу се приказује у реду мини стања. При куцању, +ред за бирање ће се преместити на следећу датотеку, почевши од +укуцаних слова. Тастери +.I backspace +или +.I DEL +се могу користити за исправљање грешака у куцању. Ако се комбинација +C\-s поново притисне, тражи се следеће поклапање. +.\"NODE " Shell Command Line" +.SH " Наредбени ред љуске" +Овај одељак набраја пречице које су корисне за избегавање претераног +куцања при уносу наредби љуске. +.TP +.B M\-Enter +копира назив тренутно изабране датотеке у наредбени ред. +.TP +.B C\-Enter +ради исто што и M\-Enter, али ова пречица ради само у конзоли. +.TP +.B M\-Tab +покреће +.\"LINK2" +допуну +.\"Completion" +назива датотека, наредби, променљивих, корисничких имена и назива +домаћина. +.TP +.B C\-x t, C\-x C\-t +копира називе означених датотека (или, ако не постоје означене +датотеке, изабране датотеке) текућег окна (C\-x t) или другог окна (C\-x +C\-t) у наредбени ред. +.TP +.B C\-x p, C\-x C\-p +први низ тастера копира текућу путању у наредбени ред, а други копира +путању неизабраног окна у наредбени ред. +.TP +.B C\-q +наредба `цитирања' се може користити за унос знакова које иначе +обрађује Поноћни наредник (на пример, симбол `+') +.TP +.B M\-p, M\-n +користите ове пречице да бисте разгледали историју наредби. Тастер M\-p +вас води на претходну ставку, а M\-n на следећу. +.TP +.B M\-h +приказује историју текућег реда за унос. +.\"NODE " General Movement Keys" +.SH " Опште пречице за кретање" +Прегледач помоћи, прегледач датотека и стабло директоријума користе +заједнички код за померање. Они стога прихватају потпуно исте пречице. +Сваки од њих такође прихвата и неке своје пречице. +.PP +Други делови Поноћног наредника користе неке од тих пречица за +кретање, па ће овај одељак можда бити од користи и за те делове. +.TP +.B Up, C\-p +померање један ред уназад. +.TP +.B Down, C\-n +померање један ред унапред. +.TP +.B Prev Page, Page Up, M\-v +померање једну страну навише. +.TP +.B Next Page, Page Down, C\-v +померање једну страну наниже. +.TP +.B Home, A1 +померање на почетак. +.TP +.B End, C1 +померање на крај. +.PP +Прегледач помоћи и прегледач датотека прихватају, поред ових, и +следеће пречице: +.TP +.B b, C\-b, C\-h, Backspace, Delete +померање једну страну навише. +.TP +.B Space bar +померање једну страну наниже. +.TP +.B u, d +померање половину стране навише или наниже. +.TP +.B g, G +померање на почетак или на крај. +.\"NODE " Input Line Keys" +.SH " Пречице реда за унос" +Редови за унос (који се користе за све +.\"LINK2" +наредбене редове +.\"Shell Command Line" +и за дијалоге упита у програму) прихватају следеће пречице: +.TP +.B C\-a +поставља курсор на почетак реда. +.TP +.B C\-e +поставља курсор на крај реда. +.TP +.B C\-b, move\-left +помера курсор једно место улево. +.TP +.B C\-f, move\-right +помера курсор једно место удесно. +.TP +.B M\-f +померање једну реч унапред. +.TP +.B M\-b +померање једну реч уназад. +.TP +.B C\-h, backspace +брише претходни знак. +.TP +.B C\-d, Delete +брише знак на том месту (преко курсора). +.TP +.B C\-@ +поставља ознаку за исецање. +.TP +.B C\-w +копира текст између курсора и ознаке у прихватник и уклања текст из +реда за унос. +.TP +.B M\-w +копира текст између курсора и ознаке у прихватник. +.TP +.B C\-y +враћа садржај прихватника. +.TP +.B C\-k +брише текст од курсора до краја реда. +.TP +.B M\-p, M\-n +Користите ове пречице да бисте разгледали историју наредби. Тастер M\-p +вас води на претходну ставку, а M\-n на следећу. +.TP +.B M\-C\-h, M\-Backspace +брише једну реч уназад. +.TP +.B M\-Tab +извршава +.\"LINK2" +допуну +.\"Completion" +назива датотека, наредби, променљивих, корисничких имена и назива +домаћина. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Menu Bar" +.SH "Ред менија" +Ред менија искаче када притиснете тастер F9 или притиснете дугме миша +када је показивач над највишим редом на екрану. Ред менија садржи пет +менија: `Лево', `Датотека', `Наредба', `Избори' и `Десно'. +.PP +Менији +.\"LINK2" +`Лево' и `Десно' +.\"Left and Right Menus" +вам дозвољавају да измените изглед левог и десног директоријумског окна. +.PP +Мени +.\"LINK2" +Датотека +.\"File Menu" +садржи радње које можете извршити над тренутно изабраном датотеком или +означеним датотекама. +.PP +Мени +.\"LINK2" +Наредба +.\"Command Menu" +садржи радње које су општије и немају везе са тренутно изабраном +датотеком или означеним датотекама. +.PP +Мени +.\"LINK2" +Избори +.\"Options Menu" +садржи радње које вам дзвољавају да прилагодите Поноћног наредника. +.\"NODE " Left and Right Menus" +.SH " Менији `Лево' и `Десно' (`Изнад' и `иСпод')" +Изглед директоријумских окана се може мењати из менија +.B Лево +и +.B Десно +(они се називају +.B Изнад +и +.B иСпод +када је из дијалога избора +.\"LINK2" +Изглед +.\"Layout" +изабрана положена подела окна). +.\"NODE " Listing Format..." +.SH " Режим списка..." +Поглед режима списка се користи за приказ списка датотека; постоје +четири различита режима списка: +.BR Пун , +.BR Кратак , +.B Дугачак +и +.B Кориснички задан. +Пун директоријумски поглед приказује назив датотеке, величину датотеке +и датум измене. +.PP +Кратки поглед приказује само назив датотеке и садржи две колоне (тиме +приказујући двоструко више датотека него други погледи). Дугачки +поглед је сличан излазу наредбе +.BR "`ls \-l'". +Дугачки поглед заузима целу ширину екрана. +.PP +Ако изаберете `Кориснички' формат приказа, онда сами морате задати +формат приказа. +.PP +Кориснички формат приказа мора почети задавачем величине окна. Ово +може да буде `half' или `full', што задаје окно величине пола екрана и +окно величине целог екрана, тим редом. +.PP +После величине окна, можете задати двоколонски режим окна. Ово се +задаје додавањем цифре `2' на ниску корисничког формата. +.PP +После овога додају се називи поља са необавезним задавачем величине. +Поља која можете приказати су следећа: +.TP +.B name +приказује назив датотеке. +.TP +.B size +приказује величину датотеке. +.TP +.B bsize +ово је други облик формата +.B size. +Овај облик приказује величину датотека, а за директоријуме приказује +само ПОД\-ДИР или НАД\-ДИР. +.TP +.B type +приказује поље врсте, ширине један. Овај знак је сличан оном кога +приказује наредба `ls' уз прекидач `\-F' \- за извршне датотеке: +.BR "*", +за директоријуме: +.BR "/", +за везе: +.BR "@", +за утичнице: +.BR "=", +за знаковне уређаје: +.BR "\-", +за блок уређаје: +.BR "+", +за цеви: +.BR "|", +за симболичке везе ка директоријумима: +.BR "~", +и за бајате симвезе (везе које не указују ни на шта): +.BR "!". +.TP +.B mark +звездица ако је датотека означена, а размак ако није. +.TP +.B mtime +датум последње измене датотеке. +.TP +.B atime +датум последњег приступа. +.TP +.B ctime +датум стварања датотеке. +.TP +.B perm +ниска која представља текуће битове дозволе датотеке. +.TP +.B mode +октална вредност која садржи текуће битове дозволе датотеке. +.TP +.B nlink +број веза које указују на датотеку. +.TP +.B ngid +ИБГ \- идентификациони број групе (бројевна вредност). +.TP +.B nuid +КИБ \- кориснички идентификациони број (бројевна вредност). +.TP +.B owner +власник датотеке. +.TP +.B group +група датотеке. +.TP +.B inode +ичвор датотеке. +.PP +Такође, можете користити следеће кључне речи да бисте задали изглед +окна: +.TP +.B space +размак у формату приказа. +.TP +.B | +додавање усправне црте у формат приказа. +.PP +Да бисте захтевали да неко поље буде фиксне величине (задавач +величине), потребно је само да додате +.B : +и жељени број знакова у пољу (ширину). Ако се после броја налази +симбол +.BR + , +онда величина задаје најмању величину поља \- ако програм открије да +постоји још простора на екрану, прошириће то поље. +.PP +На пример, +.B Пун +приказ одговара следећем формату: +.PP +half type name | size | mtime +.PP +.B Дугачки +приказ одговара следећем формату: +.PP +full perm space nlink space owner space group space size space mtime +space name +.PP +Ево финог корисничког формата приказа: +.PP +half name | size:7 | type mode:3 +.PP +Окна се могу поставити и у следеће режиме: +.TP +.B `Подаци' +Приказ Подаци приказује податке о тренутно изабраној датотеци и, ако +је то могуће, податке о текућем систему датотека. +.TP +.B `Стабло' +Поглед Стабло је веома сличан одлици +.\"LINK2" +стабло директоријума\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +Погледајте одељак о њој за више информација. +.TP +.B `Брзи преглед' +У овом режиму, окно ће се претворити у смањени +.\"LINK2" +прегледач +.\"Internal File Viewer" +који приказује садржај тренутно изабране датотеке; ако изаберете окно +(тастером `tab' или мишем), добићете приступ уобичајеним наредбама +прегледача. +.\"NODE " Sort Order..." +.SH " Поредак ређања..." +Постоје осам поредака ређања: по имену, по врсти, по датуму измене, по +датуму приступа, по датуму измене података ичвора, по величини, по +броју ичвора, и без ређања. У дијалогу Поредак ређања можете да +изаберете поредак ређања а такође можете и да задате да ли желите да +ређате у обрнутом поретку потврдивши кућицу `Обрни'. +.PP +Подразумевано стање је да се директоријуми ређају пре датотека, али се +ово може изменити из менија +.\"LINK2" +Избори +.\"Options Menu" +(избор +.BR "Мешани приказ" ). +.\"NODE " Filter..." +.SH " Филтар..." +Наредба Филтар вам омогућава да задате образац љуске (на пример: +.BR "*.tar.gz" ) +који датотеке морају да задовоље да би биле приказане. Без обзира на +то какав је образац филтра, директоријуми и везе ка директоријумима +су увек приказани у директоријумском окну. +.\"NODE " Reread" +.SH " Освежи" +Наредба Освежи поново учитава списак датотека у директоријуму. Она је +корисна ако су други процеси створили или уклонили неке датотеке. Ако +сте окно попунили називима датотека, ова наредба ће поново учитати +садржај директоријума и уклонити податке о попуни окна (Погледајте +одељак +.\"LINK2" +Критеријум попуне окна +.\"External panelize" +за више информација). +.\"NODE " File Menu" +.SH " Мени `Датотека'" +Поноћни наредник користи тастере F1 \- F10 као пречице са тастатуре за +наредбе из менија `Датотека'. Комбинације избегавања за функцијске +тастере су у ствари могућности базе terminfo од `kf1' до `kf10'. На +терминалима без подршке за функцијске тастере, можете постићи исто то +притиском на тастер ESC и броја између 1 и 9 или 0 (што редом одговара +тастерима од F1 до F9 и F10). +.PP +Мени `Датотека' садржи следеће наредбе (пречице са тастатуре су у +заградама): +.PP +.B Помоћ (F1) +.PP +Покреће уграђени хипертекстуални прегледач помоћи. У оквиру +.\"LINK2" +прегледача помоћи +.\"Contents" +можете користити тастер `Tab' да бисте изабрали следећу везу и тастер +`Enter' да бисте пратили ту везу. Тастерима размакница и `Backspace' +се помера напред или назад у оквиру странице помоћи. Поново притисните +тастер `F1' да бисте добили пун списак подржаних тастера. +.PP +.B Мени (F2) +.PP +Покреће +.\"LINK2" +кориснички мени\&. +.\"Edit Menu File" +Кориснички мени пружа лак начин да се корисницима понуди мени и додаје +посебне одлике Поноћном нареднику. +.PP +.B Прегледај (F3, Shift\-F3) +.PP +Прегледа тренутно изабрану датотеку. Подразумевано је покретање +.\"LINK2" +Уграђеног прегледача датотека\&, +.\"Internal File Viewer" +али ако је искључен избор `Користи уграђени преглед', ова наредба +покреће спољашњи прегледач датотека, задан у променљивој окружења +.BR "PAGER". +Ако променљива +.B PAGER +није задана, биће покренута наредба `view'. Ако уместо ове користите +пречицу Shift\-F3, прегледач ће бити покренут без икаквог форматирања +или предобраде датотеке. +.PP +.B Филтрирано прегледање (M\-!) +.PP +Ова наредба пита за наредбу и њене аргументе (подразумевано назив +тренутно изабране датотеке), а излаз те наредбе се приказује у +уграђеном прегледачу датотека. +.PP +.B Уреди (F4) +.PP +За сада ова наредба покреће уређивач +.BR "vi", +уређивач који је задан преко променљиве окружења +.B EDITOR +или +.\"LINK2" +Уграђени уређивач датотека +.\"Internal File Editor" +ако је укључен избор use_internal_edit (Користи уграђено уређивање). +.PP +.B Копирај (F5) +.PP +Приказује дијалог за унос са одредиштем које је подразумевано +директоријум у неизабраном окну и копира тренутно изабрану датотеку +(или означене датотеке, ако је бар једна означена) у директоријум који +је корисник задао у дијалогу за унос. Space for destination +file may be preallocated relative to preallocate_space configure option. +Током овог процеса можете +притиснути пречицу C\-c или тастер ESC да бисте прекинули операцију. За +детаље о изворној масци (која је обично * или ^\\(.*\\)$, у зависности +од постављања избора `Користи обрасце љуске') и могућим џокерским +знацима у одредишту погледајте +.\"LINK2" +Копирање/преименовање са маском\&. +.\"Mask Copy/Rename" +.PP +На неким системима је могуће покренути копирање у позадини притиском +на дугме Позадина (или притиском на M\-b у дијалогу). Ставка +.\"LINK2" +Позадински послови +.\"Background jobs" +се користи за управљање позадинским пословима. +.PP +.B Направи везу (C\-x l) +.PP +Ствара тврду везу ка текућој датотеци. +.PP +.B Направи симвезу (C\-x s) +.PP +Ствара симболичку везу ка текућој датотеци. За оне који не знају шта су +везе: стварање везе ка датотеци је помало као копирање датотеке, али и +назив изворне датотеке и назив одредишне датотеке представљају исти +лик датотеке. На пример, ако уредите једну од те две датотеке, све +измене ће се појавити у обема датотекама. Неки људи везе (links) зову +надимцима (alias) или пречицама (shortcuts). +.PP +Тврда веза је сличнија стварној датотеци. Пошто је направите, не +постоји начин да се разликује извор од везе. Ако обришете било које од +та два, друго ће још увек бити нетакнуто. Веома је тешко приметити да +обе датотеке представљају исти лик. Користите тврде везе када не +желите да знате шта је шта. +.PP +Симболичка веза представља упућивање на назив изворне датотеке. Ако је +изворна датотека обрисана, симболичка веза постаје бескорисна. Веома +је лако уочити да датотеке представљају исти лик. Поноћни наредник +приказује знак `@' испрад назива датотеке ако се ради о симболичкој +вези (изузев ако се ради о симболичкој вези ка директоријуму, када се +приказује тилда (~)). Изворна датотека на коју упућује веза се +приказује у реду мини стања ако је укључен избор +.IR "Прикажи мини стање". +Користите симболичке везе када желите да избегнете забуну коју могу да +изазову тврде везе. +.PP +.B Преименуј/премести (F6) +.PP +Отвара дијалог за унос који подразумевано садржи назив директоријума +из неизабраног окна и премешта тренутно изабрану датотеку (или +означене датотеке ако постоји бар једна означена датотека) у +директоријум који је задао корисник у дијалогу за унос. Током овог +процеса, можете притиснути C\-c или ESC да бисте прекинули ову +операцију. За више детаља, погледајте горњу операцију Копирај; више +ствари је исто за обе наредбе. +.PP +на неким системима је могуће копирање у позадини преко притиска на +дугме Позадина (или притискања M\-b у дијалогу). Ставка +.\"LINK2" +Позадински послови +.\"Background jobs" +се користи за управљање позадинским процесима. +.PP +.B Направи директоријум (F7) +.PP +Отвара дијалог за унос и ствара задани директоријум. +.PP +.B Обриши (F8) +.PP +Брише тренутно изабрану датотеку или означене датотеке у третнутно +изабраном окну. Током овог процеса можете притиснути C\-c или ESC да +бисте прекинули операцију. +.PP +.B Брза пром.дир. (M\-c) +Ако вам је наредбени ред попуњен а желите да текући директоријум +поставите на неку другу вредност, косиртите наредбу +.\"LINK2" +Брза пром.дир. +.\"Quick cd" +.PP +.B Изабери групу (+) +.PP +Ово се користи за избор (означавање) групе датотека. Поноћни наредник +ће питати за регуларни израз који описује групу. Када су укључени +.IR "Обрасци љуске", +регуларни изрази су слични задавању датотека у оквиру љуске (* +замењује нула или више знакова а ? један знак). Ако су +.I Обрасци љуске +искључени, онда се означавање датотека обавља обичним регуларним +изразима (погледајте ed (1)). +.PP +.B Одизабери групу (\\\\) +.PP +Користи се за одбирање групе датотека. Ово је супротна наредба од +наредбе +.IR "Изабери групу". +.PP +.B Заврши (F10, Shift\-F10) +.PP +Прекида рад у Поноћном нареднику. Када желите да завршите рад а +користите омотач љуске, користите Shift\-F10. Пречица Shift\-F10 вас +неће одвести на последњи директоријум који сте посетили у Поноћном +нареднику, већ ћете се вратити на директоријум у ком сте покренули +Поноћног наредника. +.\"NODE " Quick cd" +.SH " Брза пром.дир." +Ова наредба је корисна ако вам је наредбени ред попуњен а желите да +.\"LINK2" +промените текући директоријум +.\"The cd internal command" +без потребе да исечете и залепите наредбени ред. Ова наредба отвара +мали дијалог у ком можете да унесете све што бисте унели после наредбе +.B cd +(промени директоријум) у наредбеном реду и онда притиснете тастер +`enter'. Ово укључује све ствари које се већ налазе у +.\"LINK2" +уграђеној наредби промене директоријума\&. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Command Menu" +.SH " Мени `Наредба'" +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Стабло директоријума +.\"Directory Tree" +приказује илустрацију стабла директоријума. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Нађи датотеку +.\"Find File" +вам омогућава да тражите жељену датотеку. Наредба `Размени окна' +размењује садржаје два директоријумска окна. +.PP +Наредба `Укључи/искључи окна' приказује излаз последње наредбе љуске. +Ово ради само у Икс терминалу или у конзоли ГНУ\-а или FreeBSD\-а. +.PP +Наредба Упореди директоријуме (C\-x d) упоређује директоријумска окна +једно са другим. Тада можете користити наредбу Копирај (F5) да бисте +изједначили окна. Постоје три начина упоређивања. Брзи начин упоређује +само величину и датум датотека. Темељни начин упоређује сваки бајт са +сваким бајтом датотека. Темељни начин није доступан ако машина не +подржава системски позив mmap(2). Начин упоређивања Само величина +упоређује само величине датотека, а не проверава садржаје или датуме +датотека. +.PP +Историја наредби приказује списак откуцаних наредби. Изабрана наредба +се копира у наредбени ред. Историји наредби се може приступити преко +пречица M\-p и M\-n. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Брзи списак директоријума (C\-\\) +.\"Hotlist" +убрзава постављање текућег директоријума на један од често коришћених +директоријума. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Критеријум попуне окна +.\"External panelize" +вам омогућава да извршите спољашњи програм и проследите излаз тог +програма као садржај тренутног окна. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Уреди датотеку врста +.\"Edit Extension File" +вам омогућава да задате програме који се извршавају када покушате да +извршите, прегледате, уређујете или радите прегршт других ствари над +датотекама извесних врста (наставака назива датотека после тачке). +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Уреди датотеку менија +.\"Edit Menu File" +се може користити за уређивање корисничког менија (који се појављује +притиском на тастер F2). +.\"NODE " Directory Tree" +.SH " Стабло директоријума" +Наредба Стабло директоријума приказује илустрацију стабла директоријума. +Можете да изаберете директоријум из стабла а Поноћни наредник ће +поставити тај директоријум за текући. +.PP +Постоје два начина да покренете ову наредбу. Права наредба `Стабло +директоријума' је доступна из менија `Наредбе'. Други начин је да +изаберете поглед Стабло из менија `Лево' или `Десно'. +.PP +Да би вас ослободио дугих застоја, Поноћни наредник ствара илустрацију +стабла уз помоћ претраге малог подскупа свих директоријума. Ако +директоријума кога желите да видите нема, померите се у његов +родитељски директоријум и притисните C\-r (или F2). +.PP +Можете да користите следеће пречице: +.PP +Дозвољене су +.\"LINK2" +Опште пречице за кретање\&. +.\"General Movement Keys" +.PP +.B Enter. +У оквиру стабла директоријума, излази из стабла директоријума и +прелази у овај директоријум у текућем окну. У погледу Стабло, прелази +у овај директоријум у другом окну и остаје у режиму погледа Стабло за +текуће окно. +.PP +.B C\-r, F2 (Освежи). +Освежава садржај овог директоријума. Користите ову пречицу када је +илустрација стабла застарела: када недостају директоријуми или су +приказани директоријуми који више не постоје. +.PP +.B F3 (Заборави). +Брише овај директоријум из илустрације стабла. Користите ово да бисте +уклонили непотребне ставке из стабла. Ако желите да вратите +директоријум назад у илустрацију стабла, притисните F2 над његовим +родитељским директоријумом. +.PP +.B F4 (Статично/динамично). +Смењује режим између режима динамичне навигације (подразумевано) и +статичне навигације. +.PP +У режиму статичне навигације можете да користите тастере Навише и +Наниже да бисте изабрали директоријум. Приказани су сви познати +директоријуми. +.PP +У режиму динамичне навигације можете користити тастере Навише и Наниже +да бисте изабрали директоријум\-потомка, тастер Налево да бисте прешли +у родитељски директоријум и тастер Надесно да бисте прешли у +директоријум\-дете. Приказују се само родитељски, директоријум\-потомак +и директоријуми\-деца, док су други изостављени. Илустрација стабла се +динамички мења при проласку кроз њу. +.PP +.B F5 (Копирај). +Копира директоријум. +.PP +.B F6 (ПимПрм). +Премешта директоријум. +.PP +.B F7 (НапДир). +Прави нови директоријум у текућем директоријуму. +.PP +.B F8 (Обриши). +Брише овај директоријум из система датотека. +.PP +.B C\-s, M\-s. +Тражи следећи директоријум који задовољава ниску претраге. Ако такав +директоријум не постоји, ове пречице ће се померити један ред надоле. +.PP +.B C\-h, Backspace. +Брише последњи знак из ниске претраге. +.PP +.B Било који други знак. +Додаје знак у ниску претраге и помера се на следећи директоријум чији +назив почиње тим знаковима. У погледу Стабло морате прво да укључите +режим претраге притиснувши C\-s. Ниска претраге се приказује у реду +мини стања. +.PP +Следеће радње су доступне само у стаблу директоријума. Оне нису +подржане у погледу Стабло. +.PP +.B F1 (Помоћ). +Покреће прегледач помоћи и приказује овај одељак. +.PP +.B Esc, F10. +Излази из стабла директоријума. Не мења директоријум. +.PP +Подржан је миш. Двоструки притисак се понаша као тастер `Enter'. +Погледајте и одељак о +.\"LINK2" +подршци за миша\&. +.\"Mouse Support" +.\"NODE " Find File" +.SH " Нађи датотеку" +Одлика Нађи датотеку прво пита за почетни директоријум претраге и +назив датотеке. Притискањем дугмета Стабло можете изабрати почетни +директоријум из илустрације +.\"LINK2" +стабла директоријума\&. +.\"Directory Tree" +.PP +Поље Саржај прихвата регуларне изразе који су слични програму +egrep(1). Ово значи да морате да наводите знакове са посебним значењем +преко знака `\\'; нпр. ако тражите ниску `strcmp (' мораћете да +унесете `strcmp \\(' (без знакова навода). +.PP +Можете да почнете претрагу притискањем дугмета У реду. Током претраге +можете да обуставите поступак преко дугмета Обустави а да наставите +преко дугмета Настави. +.PP +Можете да разгледате списак датотека уз помоћ тастера Стрелица нагоре +и Стрелица надоле. Дугме Пром.дир. ће прећи у директоријум у ком се +налази тренутно изабрана датотека. Дугме Поново ће упитати за +параметре нове претраге. Дугме Заврши завршава операцију претраге. +Дугме Претвори у окно ће ставити нађене датотеке у текуће +директоријумско окно, да бисте могли да спроведете додатне операције +над њима (преглед, копирање, премештање, брисање, итд.) После +претварања у окно можете да притиснете C\-r да бисте се вратили на +обичан режим списка датотека. +.PP +Можете да направите списак директоријума које би наредба Нађи датотеку +требало да прескочи приликом претраге (на пример, ако желите да +избегнете претраге на CD\-ROM\-у или директоријуму МСД (мрежног система +датотека) који је монтиран преко споре везе). +.PP +Директоријуме које би требало избегавати би требало навести у +променљивој +.B ignore_dirs +у одељку +.B FindFile +ваше датотеке ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +Директоријуме би требало раздвајати двотачком; ево примера: +.PP +.nf +[FindFile] +ignore_dirs=/cdrom:/nfs/wuarchive:/afs +.fi +.PP +Можете да размотрите и употребу наредбе +.\"LINK2" +Критеријум попуне окна +.\"External panelize" +за неке операције. Наредба Нађи датотеку је намењена само за +једноставне упите, док уз наредбу Критеријум попуне окна можете +спроводити и најмистериозније претраге. +.\"NODE " External panelize" +.SH " Критеријум попуне окна" +Наредба Критеријум попуне окна вам омогућава да извршите спољашњи +програм и да његов излаз претворите у садржај текућег окна. +.PP +На пример, ако желите да у једном окну радите са свим симболичким +везама из текућег директоријума, можете да користите критеријум попуне +окна да бисте покренули следећу наредбу: +.PP +.nf +find . \-type l \-print +.fi +.PP +По завршетку наредбе, директоријумски садржај окна неће више бити +списак свих датотека у директоријуму, већ списак свих симболичких веза. +.PP +Ако желите да окно попуните списком свих датотека које сте преузели са +сервера FTP\-а, можете да користите следећу наредбу awk\-а да бисте +издвојили назив датотеке из датотека дневника преноса: +.PP +.nf +awk '$9 ~! /incoming/ { print $9 }' < /var/log/xferlog +.fi +.PP +Можете и сачувати често коришћене критеријуме попуне окна под описним +називима, тако да се они касније могу брзо позвати. Ово се може +урадити куцањем наредбе у реду за унос и притиском на дугме Додај +ново. Онда унесите назив под којим желите да се сачува наредба. +Следећи пут само изаберите ту наредбу из списка \- више никад нећете +морати да је укуцавате. +.\"NODE " Hotlist" +.SH " Брзи списак" +Наредба Брзи списак директоријума приказује натписе директоријума у +брзом списку директоријума. Поноћни наредник ће прећи у директоријум +који одговара изабраном натпису. Можете да уклоните постојеће и да +доадте нове парове натписа и назива директоријума. Да бисте брзо +додали нове дирекотријуме, можете да користите наредбу Додај у брзи +списак (C\-x h), која додаје текући директоријум у брзи списак +директоријума, питавши само за натпис. +.PP +Ово убрзава промену директоријума на неки од често коришћених +директоријума. Можете да размислите и о коришћењу променљиве CDPATH, +као што је описано у опису +.\"LINK2" +наредбе уграђена пром.дир. +.\"The cd internal command" +.\"NODE " Edit Extension File" +.SH " Уреди датотеку врста" +Ово покреће ваш уређивач над датотеком +.IR ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If this file does not exist and you are not root, it will be copied from +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +If you are root, you can choose the file to edit: user's +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +or system\-wide +.IR %sysconfdir%/mc/mc.ext.ini . +The format of this file is described in detail in it. +.\"NODE " Background jobs" +.SH " Позадински послови" +Ово вам омогућава да управљате стањем било ког позадинског процеса +Поноћног наредника (за сада се у позадини могу обављати само копирање +и премештање датотека). Одавде можете да заустављате, поново покрећете +и убијате позадинске послове. +.\"NODE " Edit Menu File" +.SH " Уреди датотеку менија" +Кориснички мени је мени корисних радњи кога корисник може +прилагођавати. Када приступите корисничком менију, користи се +датотека .mc.menu из текућег директоријума, уколико она постоји, али само +уколико је њен власник корисник или администратор (root) и није +дозвољен упис у њу од стране других (света). Ако таква датотека није +нађена, на исти начин се покушава са датотеком ~/.config/mc/menu, а иначе ПН +користи подразумевану датотеку менија за цео систем +%pkgdatadir%/mc.menu. +.PP +Формат датотеке менија је веома једноставан. Редови који почињу било +чим осим размака или табулатора се узимају за ставке менија (да би се +користио за пречицу, први знак би требало да буде слово). Сви редови +који почињу размаком или табулатором су наредбе које ће се извршити +при избору тог уноса. +.PP +Када је неки од избора изабран, сви наредбени редови избора се +копирају у привремену датотеку у привременом директоријуму (обично +/usr/tmp) и онда се та датотека извршава. Ово омогућава кориснику да у +меније смести обичне наредбе љуске. Такође, пре извршавања кода менија +се примењује једноставна замена макроа. За више информација, +погледајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +замена макроа\&. +.\"Macro Substitution" +.PP +Ево примера датотеке mc.menu: +.PP +.nf +A Истреса садржај тренутно изабране датотеке + od \-c %f + +B Уређује пријаву грешке и шаље је администратору + I=`mktemp ${MC_TMPDIR:\-/tmp}/mail.XXXXXX` || exit 1 + vi $I + mail \-s "Грешка у поноћном нареднику" root < $I + rm \-f $I + +M Чита пошту + emacs \-f rmail + +N Чита вести са Usenet\-а + emacs \-f gnus + +H Позива читач хипертекста info + info + +J Рекурзивно копира текући директоријум у друго окно + tar cf \- . | (cd %D && tar xvpf \-) + +K Прави издање текућег поддиректоријума + echo \-n "Назив датотеке за расподелу: " + read tar + ln \-s %d `dirname %d`/$tar + cd .. + tar cvhf ${tar}.tar $tar + += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +X Издваја садржај компримоване датотеке врсте `tar' + tar xzvf %f +.fi +.PP +.B Услови подразумевања +.PP +Пре сваке ставке менија могу се навести услови. Услов мора да почиње +од прве колоне са знаком `='. Ако је услов тачан, ставка менија ће +бити подразумевана ставка. +.PP +.nf +Синтакса услова: = <под\-усл> + или: = <под\-усл> | <под\-усл> ... + или: = <под\-усл> & <под\-усл> ... + +Под\-услови могу да буду: + + y <образац> синтакса тренутне датотеке задовољава образац. + (само у менију уређивача) + f <образац> назив текуће датотеке задовољава образац? + F <образац> датотека у другом окну задовољава образац? + d <образац> текући директоријум задовољава образац? + D <образац> други директоријум задовољава образац? + t <врста> врста текуће датотеке је <врста>? + T <врста> врста друге датотеке је <врста>? + x <називдат> да ли је датотека извршна? + ! <под\-усл> негира резултат под\-услова +.fi +.PP +Образац је обичан образац љуске или регуларни израз, што зависи од +избора `обрасци љуске'. Можете да заобиђете глобалну вредност избора +`обрасци љуске' стављањем `shell_patterns=x' у први ред датотеке +менија (`x' може да буде 0 или 1). +.PP +Врсту чине један или више следећих знакова: +.PP +.nf + n није директоријум + r обична датотека + d директоријум + l веза + c знаковни уређај + b блок уређај + f ПРУПРИ \- први у, први из (FIFO, цев) + s утичница + x извршна датотека + t означено +.fi +.PP +На пример, `rlf' означава обичну датотеку, везу или прупри. Врста `t' +је помало посебна, јер делује над окном уместо над датотеком. Услов +`=t t' је тачан уколико постоје означене датотеке у текућем окну а +нетачан уколико не постоје. +.PP +Ако услов почиње са `=?' уместо са `=' биће приказан траг за +поправљање кадгод се рачуна вредност услова. +.PP +Услови се рачунају слева надесно. Ово значи да се +.nf + = f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +.fi +рачуна као +.nf + ( (f *.tar.gz) | (f *.tgz) ) & (t n) +.fi +.PP +Ево примера употребе услова: +.PP +.nf += f *.tar.gz | f *.tgz & t n +L Набраја садржај компримоване архиве врсте `tar' + gzip \-cd %f | tar xvf \- +.fi +.PP +.B Услови додавања +.PP +Ако услов почиње знаком `+' (или `+?') уместо знаком `=' (или `=?'), +онда се назива условом додавања. Ако је такав услов тачан, ставка +менија ће бити укључена у мени. Ако је услов нетачан, ставка менија +неће бити укључена у мени. +.PP +Можете да комбинујете услове подразумевања са условима додавања +почињући услов знаком `+=' или `=+' (или `+=?' или `=+?' ако желите +траг за поправљање). Ако желите да користите два различита услова \- +један за додавање а други за подразумевање, можете да пре ставке +менија ставите два реда услова, један који почиње знаком `+' и други +који почиње знаком `='. +.PP +Коментари почињу знаком `#'. Додатни редови коментара морају да почињу +знаком `#', размаком или табулатором. +.\"NODE " Options Menu" +.SH " Мени `Избори'" +Поноћни наредник поседује неке изборе који се могу смењивати из +неколико дијалога који су доступни из овог менија. Избори су укључени +ако се испред њих налазе звездица или знак `x'. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Подешавања +.\"Configuration" +отвара дијалог из кога можете променити већину поставки Поноћног +наредника. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Изглед +.\"Layout" +отвара дијалог из кога можете задати прегршт избора који управљају +изгледом екрана ПН. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Потврде +.\"Confirmation" +отвара дијалог из кога можете задати које радње желите да потврђујете. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Битова у приказу +.\"Display bits" +отвара дијалог из кога можете да изаберете које знакове ваш терминал +може да прикаже. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Научи тастере +.\"Learn keys" +отвара дијалог из кога можете да испробате тастере који не функционишу +на неким терминалима и да их поправите. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Виртуални СД +.\"Virtual FS" +отвара дијалог из кога можете да задате неке изборе који су у вези са +ВСД. +.PP +Наредба +.\"LINK2" +Сачувај подешавања +.\"Save Setup" +чува текуће поставке менија `Лево', `Десно' и `Избори'. Такође се чува +и нешто других поставки. +.\"NODE " Configuration" +.SH " Подешавања" +Избори из овог дијалога се деле у три групе: Избори окна, Пауза после +покретања и Други избори. +.PP +.B Избори окна +.PP +.I Прикажи резервне датотеке. +Ако је ово укључено, Поноћни наредник ће приказати датотеке које се +завршавају тилдом (~). Иначе оне неће бити приказане (као код избора +`\-B' ГНУ\-ове наредбе `ls'). +.PP +.I Прикажи сакривене датотеке. +Ако је ово укључено, Поноћни наредник ће приказати све датотеке које +почињу тачком (као наредба `ls \-a'). +.PP +.I После ознаке иди доле. +Ако је ово укључено, ред за бирање ће се померати надоле када означите +датотеку (било тастера `Insert'). +.PP +.I Падајући менији. +Ако је овај избор укључен, падајући менији биће отворени приликом +притиска на тастер +.BR "F9". +Иначе, добићете само наслов менија и мораћете да мени отворите преко +тастера са стрелицама или пречицама. Препоручује се да користите +пречице. +.PP +.I Мешани приказ. +Ако је овај избор укључен, датотеке и директоријуми ће бити приказани +помешано. Ако је овај избор искључен, директоријуми (и везе ка +директоријумима) ће бити приказани на почетку списка а друге датотеке +испод њих. +.PP +.I Брзо учитавање директоријума. +Ако је овај избор укључен, Поноћни наредник ће употребљавати трик да +одреди да ли се садржај директоријума променио. Трик се састоји у томе +да се директоријум освежава само ако је промењен и\-чвор директоријума; +ово значи да се поновно учитавање дешава само при стварању или брисању +датотека. Ако је оно што се променило и\-чвор датотеке у директоријуму +(промена величине датотеке, режима или власника, итд.), приказ се не +ажурира. Тада, уколико сте укључили овај избор, морате ручно (уз C\-r) +да освежите садржај директоријума. +.PP +.B Пауза после покретања +.PP +После извршавања ваших наредби, Поноћни наредник се може паузирати, +тако да имате могућност да прегледате излаз наредбе. Постоје три +могуће поставке ове променљиве: +.PP +.I Никад. +Ово значи да не желите да видите излаз ваше наредбе. Ако користите +конзолу ГНУ\-а или FreeBSD\-а или Икс терминал, моћи ћете да видите +излаз наредбе куцајући C\-o. +.PP +.I На глупим терминалима. +Добићете поруку о паузи на терминалима који нису способни да прикажу +излаз последње извршене наредбе (сваки терминал који није Икс терминал +или конзола ГНУ\-а). +.PP +.I Увек. +Програм ће паузирати после извршавања свих ваших наредби. +.PP +.B Други избори +.PP +.I Брбљиви рад. +Ово смењује брбљивост (приказивање дијалога за сваку операцију) код +операција копирања, преименовања и брисања. Ако имате спори терминал, +можда ћете желети да искључите брбљиви рад. Он се аутоматски искључује +ако је брзина вашег терминала мања од 9600 б/с. +.PP +.I Рачунај укупне збирове. +Ако је овај избор укључен, Поноћни наредник рачуна укупне величине у +бајтовима и укупни број датотеке пре било које операције копирања, +преименовања и брисања. Ово ће вам приказати тачније показатеље +напретка науштрб нешто брзине. Овај избор нема ефекта ако је искључен +избор +.IR "Брбљиви рад". +.PP +.I Обрасци љуске. +Наредбе избора, одизбора и филтрирања подразумевано користе љусколике +регуларне изразе. Да би се ово постигло, примењују се следећа +претварања: знак `*' се замењује ниском `.*' (нула или више знакова); +знак `?' се замењује знаком `.' (тачно један знак) а знак `.' +дословном тачком. Ако је овај избор искључен, регуларни изрази су +као они описани у упутству за ed(1). +.PP +.I Аутоматско чување подешавања. +Ако је овај избор укључен, подесиви избори Поноћног наредника ће бити +сачувани у датотеци ~/.config/mc/ini при изласку из Поноћног наредника. +.PP +.I Аутоматски менији. +Ако је овај избор укључен, при покретању Поноћног наредника ће бити +позван кориснички мени. Ово је корисно за изградњу менија за +почетнике. +.PP +.I Користи уграђени уређивач. +Ако је овај избор укључен, за уређивање датотека ће бити коришћен +уграђени уређивач датотека. Ако је овај избор искључен, биће коришћен +уређивач задан у променљивој окружења +.BR "EDITOR". +Ако уређивач није задан, биће коришћен +.BR "vi". +Погледајте одељак о +.\"LINK2" +уграђеном уређивачу датотека\&. +.\"Internal File Editor" +.PP +.I Користи уграђени прегледач. +Ако је овај избор укључен, за преглед датотека биће коришћен уграђени +прегледач датотека. Ако је овај избор искључен, биће коришћен +страничник задан у променљивој окружења +.BR "PAGER". +Ако страничник није задан, биће коришћена наредба +.BR "view". +Погледајте одељак о +.\"LINK2" +уграђеном прегледачу датотека\&. +.\"Internal File Viewer" +.PP +.I Допуна: прикажи све. +У случају да је допуна двосмислена, Поноћни командир ће подразумевано +отворити прозор са свим могућим +.\"LINK2" +допунама\&, +.\"Completion" +али само уколико притиснете +.B M\-Tab +и други пут. Први пут ће само допунити онолико колико је то могуће и +писнути у случају двосмислености. Укључите овај избор ако желите да +видите све могуће допуне после само једног притиска на +.BR "M\-Tab". +.PP +.I Ротирајућа црта. +Ако је овај избор укључен, Поноћни наредник ће у својству показатеља +напретка приказати ротирајућу црту у доњем десном углу. +.PP +.I Lynx\-олико кретање. +Ако је овај избор укључен, моћи ћете да користите тастере са +стрелицама да бисте се аутоматски пребацили у директоријум ако је +текући избор поддиректоријум а наредбени ред празан. Подразумевано је +овај избор искључен. +.PP +.I Пром.дир. прати везе. +Овај избор, у случају да је постављен, казује Поноћном нареднику да +прати логички ланац директоријума при промени текућег директоријума, +било у окнима, било при коришћењу наредбе `cd' (промена +директоријума). Ово је подразумевано понашање љуске `bash'. Када је +овај избор искључен, Поноћни наредник ће пратити праву структуру +директоријума, па ће вас наредба `cd ..' (постављање текућег +директоријума на родитељски директоријум), у случају да сте ушли у +директоријум преко везе, пребацити у стварног родитеља текућег +директоријума, а не у директоријум у ком је веза. +.PP +.I Безбедно брисање. +Ако је овај избор укључен, он отежава ненамерно брисање датотека. +Наиме, тада је подразумевани избор у дијалозима потврде `Не' уместо +`Да'. Овај избор је подразумевано искључен. +.\"NODE " Layout" +.SH " Изглед" +Дијалог Изглед вам омогућује да промените општи изглед екрана. Можете +да задате да ли ће бити приказани ред менија, наредбени одзивник, ред +савета и ред функцијских тастера. У конзолама ГНУ\-а или FreeBSD\-а +можете да задате колико редова је приказано у прозору излаза. +.PP +Остатак екранске области заузимају два директоријумска окна. Можете да +задате да ли се та област дели усправно или положено. Подела може бити +подједнака или можете да задате неједнаку поделу. +.PP +Можете да задате да ли би требало истицати посебним +.\"LINK2" +бојама +.\"Colors" +.I дозволе +и +.IR "врсте датотека". +Ако је укључено истицање дозвола, делови +.\"LINK2" +поља приказа +.\"Listing Format..." +.I perm (дозволе) +и +.IR "mode (окталне дозволе)", +који се примењују на корисника Поноћног наредника ће бити истакнути +бојом коју задаје кључна реч +.IR "selected". +Ако је укључено истицање врста датотека, датотеке се фарбају у складу +са њиховом врстом (нпр. директоријум, датотека сржи, извршна датотека, +итд.). +.PP +Ако је укључен избор +.IR "Прикажи мини стање", +при дну окана се приказује један ред података о стању тренутно +изабране ставке. +.PP +Када је покренут у имитатору терминала за Икс, Поноћни наредник +поставља наслов терминалског прозора на текући радни директоријум и +ажурира га по потреби. Ако је ваш имитатор терминала покварен и видите +неисправан излаз при покретању и промени текућег директоријума, +искључите избор +.IR "Наслов прозора Икс терминала". +.\"NODE " Confirmation" +.SH " Потврде" +У овом менију можете подесити изборе потврде при брисању, преписивању +датотека, извршавању датотека притиском на тастер `enter' и завршавању +рада у програму. +.\"NODE " Display bits" +.SH " Битова у приказу" +Ово се користи за подешавање опсега видљивих знакова на екрану. Ово +подешавање може да буде `7 бита' или `7\-bit ASCII' ако ваш терминал +или библиотека `curses' подржавају само седмобитни излаз. Поставка +`ISO\-8859\-1' приказује све знаке из мапе изо 8859\-1 а `Пуно осмобитно' +је за оне терминале који могу да прикажу пуне осмобитне знаке. +.\"NODE " Learn keys" +.SH " Научи тастере" +Овај дијалог вам омогућава да испробате и промените функцијске +тастере, курсорске стрелице и неке друге тастере, како би они исправно +радили на вашем терминалу. Често ово није случај, јер су многе +терминалске базе непотпуне или покварене. +.PP +Можете се кретати уз помоћ тастера `Tab' и пречица за кретање програма +`vi' (`h' лево, `j' наниже, `k' навише и `l' десно). Чим једном +притиснете било који тастер за померање курсора и он је препознат, +можете користити и њега. +.PP +Можете испробавати тастере притиском на сваки од њих. Када притиснете +тастер и он је исправно препознат, поред назива тог тастера би требало +да се појави `Да'. Чим је тастер означен са `Да', он поприма своје +уобичајено значење, нпр. при првом притиску на F1 обавиће се само +провера тог тастера, али после ње ће притисак на тај тастер приказати +помоћ. Исто важи и за тастере са стрелицама. Тастер `Tab' би требало +увек да функционише. +.PP +Ако неки тастери не раде исправно, нећете видети `Да' при притиску на +њих. Онда ћете можда желети да их измените. То можете учинити +притиском на дугме са називом тог тастера (мишем или притиском на +тастер `Enter' или размакницу после бирања дугмета тастером `Tab' или +стрелицама). Онда ће се појавити прозор који ће од вас тражити да +притиснете тај тастер. Притисните га и сачекајте док прозор не +нестане. Ако желите да прекинете, притисните само једном тастер +`Escape' и сачекајте. +.PP +Кад завршите са свим тастерима, можете да их сачувате. Дефиниције +тастера које сте задали ће бити уписане у одељак [terminal:TERM] ваше +датотеке ~/.config/mc/ini (где `TERM' представља назив вашег текућег +терминала). Дефиниције тастера који су већ исправно радили се не +чувају. +.\"NODE " Virtual FS" +.SH " Виртуални СД" +Овај избор вам пружа могућност управљања подешавањима +.\"LINK2" +виртуалног система датотека\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.PP +Поноћни наредник чува у меморији податке о неким виртуалним системима +датотека да би убрзао приступ датотекама из тог система (нпр. спискови +датотека добављени са сервера FTP\-а). +.PP +Такође, како би приступио садржају компримованих датотека (нпр. +компримованих датотека врсте `tar'), Поноћни наредник мора да створи +привремену некомпримовану датотеку на вашем диску. +.PP +Како и подаци у меморији и привремене датотеке на диску заузимају +ресурсе, можда ћете желети да подесите параметре остављених података +како бисте смањили количину употребљених ресурса или повећали брзину +приступа често коришћеним системима датотека. +.PP +.I Систем датотека врсте `tar' +мора да прочита целу датотеку само да би приказао списак датотека, +због формата архива врсте `tar'. Како је већина датотека врсте `tar' +обично компримована, (обичне датотеке врсте `tar' су угрожена врста), +систем датотека врсте `tar' мора да их отпакује на диск, на привремено +место, и тек тада приступи отпакованој датотеци као што би приступио +обичној датотеци врсте `tar'. +.PP +Сад, пошто сви ми волимо да разгледамо датотеке и датотеке врсте `tar' +свуда на диску, уобичајено је да ћете напустити датотеку врсте `tar' и +касније је поново посетити. Пошто је отпакивање споро, Поноћни +наредник ће на одређено време смештати све податке у меморију. Када то +одређено време истекне, биће ослобођени сви ресурси додељени том +систему датотека. Подразумевано време чекања је један минут. +.PP +.\"LINK2" +Систем датотека FTP\-а +.\"FTP File System" +(ftpfs) вам омогућава да разгледате директоријуме на удаљеним +серверима FTP\-а. Он садржи неколико избора. +.PP +.I анонимна лозинка за ftp +је лозинка која ће се користити када се пријављујете као `anonymous'. +Нека места захтевају исправну адресу епоште. Са друге стране, +вероватно не желите да остављате вашу праву адресу епоште на +непровереним местима, а посебно уколико не користите филтрирање +нежељене поште. +.PP +ftpfs чува списак директоријума који добавља са сервера FTP\-а у +остави. Време трајања оставе се може подесити избором +.IR "`истекло време за оставу дир. ftpfs\-а'". +Ниска вредност овог избора може успорити сваку радњу над ftpfs\-ом, јер +онда свака радња захтева слање захтева серверу FTP\-а. +.PP +Можете да задате посредничког домаћина FTP\-а. Пазите, јер је већина +модерних заштитних зидова у потпуности неприметна, макар за FTP +(погледајте доле), па се посредници за FTP сматрају застарелим. +.PP +Ако није укључено +.IR "Увек користи посредника за ftp", +можете да користите узвичник да бисте укључили посредника за извесне +домаћине. Погледајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +Систем датотека FTP\-а +.\"FTP File System" +за примере. +.PP +Ако је овај избор укључен, програм ће или: гледати датотеку +%sysconfdir%/mc/mc.no_proxy и тражити редове који садрже називе +домаћина који су локални (ако назив домаћина почиње тачком, +претпоставља се да се ради о домену) и претпоставиће да су називи +домаћина без тачака непосредно приступачни. Свим другим домаћинима ће +се приступати кроз заданог посредника за FTP. +.PP +Можете да укључите употребу датотеке +.IR "~/.netrc", +у којој се чувају корисничка имена и лозинке за сервере ftp\-а. +Погледајте netrc(5) за опис формата датотке .netrc. +.PP +.I Користи пасивни режим +укључује употребу пасивног режима FTP\-а, при коме повезивање ради +преноса података покреће клијент, а не сервер. Овај избор се +препоручује и подразумевано је укључен. Ако се овај избор искључи, +податковна повезивања покреће сервер. Ово може да не ради са одређеним +заштитним зидовима. +.\"NODE " Save Setup" +.SH " Сачувај подешавања" +При покретању, Поноћни наредник ће покушати да учита податке о +покретању из датотеке ~/.config/mc/ini. Ако ова датотека не постоји, учитаће +податке из датотеке са подешавањима за цео систем. Ако ни она не +постоји, ПН ће користити подразумеване поставке. +.PP +Наредба +.I Сачувај подешавања +ствара датотеку ~/.config/mc/ini чувањем текућих поставки менија +.\"LINK2" +`Лево', `Десно' +.\"Left and Right Menus" +и +.\"LINK2" +`Избори'\&. +.\"Options Menu" +.PP +Ако укључите избор +.IR "Аутоматско чување подешавања", +ПН ће увек чувати текуће поставке при излазу. +.PP +Постоје и поставке које се не могу променити из менија. Да бисте +променили те поставке, морате да уређујете датотеку са поставкама из +вашег омиљеног уређивача. Погледајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +Посебне поставке +.\"Special Settings" +за више информација. +.SH "" +.\"NODE "Executing operating system commands" +.SH "Извршавање наредби оперативног система" +Можете да извршите наредбе укуцавши их непосредно у ред за унос +Поноћног наредника, или избором програма кога желите да извршите редом +за бирање у окну и притиском на тастер `Enter'. +.PP +Уколико притиснете тастер `Enter' над датотеком која није извршна, +Поноћни наредник ће упоредити врсту изабране датотеке са врстама из +.\"LINK2" +датотеке врста\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +Ако је пронађена врста која одговара траженој, онда ће се извршити код +придружен тој врсти. Пре извршења наредбе врши се веома једноставно +.\"LINK2" +раширење макроа\&. +.\"Macro Substitution" +.\"NODE " The cd internal command" +.SH " Уграђена наредба пром.дир." +Наредбу +.I cd (промена текућег директоријума) +тумачи Поноћни наредник; она се не предаје наредбеној љусци ради +извршавања. Стога се можда неће вршити сва она згодна раширења и +замене макроа које обавља ваша љуска, иако ће се нека примењивати: +.PP +.I Замена тилде. +Тилда (~) ће се заменити називом вашег домаћег директоријума, а ако +додате корисничко име после тилде, биће замењена називом корисничког +директоријума заданог корисника. +.PP +На пример, ~guest представља домаћи директоријум корисника guest, а +~/guest је директоријум под именом guest у вашем домаћем +директоријуму. +.PP +.I Претходни директоријум. +Можете скочити на директоријум који сте претходно користили уз посебан +назив директоријума: `\-', овако: +.B cd \- +.PP +.I Директоријуми CDPATH\-а. +Ако се директоријум задан у наредби +.B cd +не налази у текућем директоријуму, Поноћни наредник ће користити +вредност променљиве окружења +.B CDPATH +да би тражио директоријум у било ком директоријуму наведеном у тој +променљивој. +.PP +На пример, могли бисте да подесите вашу променљиву +.B CDPATH +на ~/src:/usr/src, тиме омогућивши да пређете у било који +поддиректоријум унутар директоријума ~/src и /usr/src, и то са било +ког места у систему датотека, користећи његов релативни назив (нпр. cd +linux би вас одвело у /usr/src/linux). +.\"NODE " Macro Substitution" +.SH " Замена макроа" +Приликом приступа +.\"LINK2" +корисничком менију\&, +.\"Edit Menu File" +извршења +.\"LINK2" +наредбе зависне од врсте\&, +.\"Edit Extension File" +или покретања наредбе из уноса наредбеног реда, врши се једноставна +замена макроа. +.PP +Макрои су следећи: +.TP +.I %i +Увлачење белинама, једнако позицији колоне курсора. Примењује се само +у менију уређивача. +.TP +.I %y +Врста синтаксе текуће датотеке. Примењује се само у менију уређивача. +.TP +.I %k +Назив датотеке блока уређивача. +.TP +.I %e +Назив датотеке са грешкама. +.TP +.I %m +Назив текуће датотеке менија. +.TP +.IR %f " и " %p +Назив текуће датотеке. +.TP +.I %x +Врста текуће датотеке. +.TP +.I %b +Назив текуће датотеке без врсте. +.TP +.I %d +Назив текућег директоријума. +.TP +.I %F +Назив текуће датотеке у неизабраном окну. +.TP +.I %D +Назив директоријума у неизабраном окну. +.TP +.I %t +Тренутно означене датотеке. +.TP +.I %T +Означене датотеке у неизабраном окну. +.TP +.IR %u " и " %U +Слични макроима %t и %T, али с том разликом што се датотеке +одозначавају. Можете да користите овај макро једном за ставку менија +или датотеку врста, јер при следећем извршавању ниједна датотека неће +бити означена. +.TP +.IR %s " и " %S +Код изабраних датотека: означене датотеке, уколико постоје. У +супротном, назив текуће датотеке. +.TP +.I %cd +Ово је посебан макро који се користи за постављање текућег +директоријума на директоријум задан пре макроа. Ово се пре свега +користи као спрега за +.\"LINK2" +виртуални систем датотека\&. +.\"Virtual File System" +.TP +.I %view +Овај макро се користи за покретање уграђеног прегледача. Он се може +користити засебно, или уз аргументе. Уколико му задате аргументе, они +би требало да се окруже витичастим заградама. +.IP +Аргументи су следећи: +.I ascii +да би се захтевао режим аскија; +.I hex +да би се захтевао хексадекадни режим; +.I nroff +да би се наложило прегледачу да тумачи низове за полуцрна слова и +подвлачење програма nroff; +.I unformatted +да би се наложило прегледачу да не тумачи наредбе nroff\-а за полуцрна +слова и подвлачење. +.TP +.I %% +Знак % +.TP +.I %{неки текст} +Пита за замену. Приказује се прозор за унос а текст унутар витичастих +заграда се користи као одзивник. Макро се замењује текстом који је +унео корисник. Корисник може да притисне тастере ESC или F10 за +поништавање. Овај макро још увек не ради у наредбеном реду. +.TP +.I %var{ENV:подраз} +Уколико променљива љуске +.I ENV +није постављена, користи се вредност +.IR "подраз". +Иначе, користи се вредност променљиве +.IR "ENV". +.\"NODE " The subshell support" +.SH " Подршка за подљуске" +Подршка за подљуске је избор у време превођења програма; она ради са +љускама bash, tcsh и zsh. +.PP +Када се код подљуске покрене, Поноћни наредник ће зачети упоредни +примерак љуске (оне задане у променљивој +.BR "SHELL", +а ако она није задана, онда оне у датотеци /etc/passwd) и покренути га +у псеудотерминалу; уместо се да покреће нова љуска сваки пут при +извршењу наредбе, наредба ће бити прослеђена подљусци као да сте је ви +укуцали. Ово вам омогућава и да мењате променљиве љуске, користите +функције љуске и задајете надимке који ће важити до изласка из +Поноћног наредника. +.PP +Уколико користите љуску +.BR "bash", +можете да задате наредбе које се извршавају при покретању подљуске у +вашој датотеци ~/.local/share/mc/bashrc а посебне мапе тастатуре у датотеци +~/.local/share/mc/inputrc. +Корисници љуске +.B tcsh +могу да задају наредбе које се извршавају при покретању у датотеци +~/.local/share/mc/tcshrc. +.PP +При употреби кода подљуске, можете било када да обуставите апликације +пречицом C\-o и вратите се у Поноћног наредника; уколико сте обуставили +апликацију, нећете моћи да се покрећете друге спољашње наредбе све док +не завршите рад у апликацији коју сте обуставили. +.PP +Додатна одлика употребе подљуски је да се за одзивник који приказује +Поноћни наредник користи исти одзивник који користите у љусци. +.PP +Одељак +.\"LINK2" +ИЗБОРИ +.\"OPTIONS" +садржи више информација о томе како можете да управљате кодом +подљуски. +.\"NODE "Chmod" +.SH "Промена дозвола" +Прозор `Промена дозвола' се користи за промену битова атрибута групе +датотека и директоријума. Он се може покренути пречицом C\-x c. +.PP +Прозор `Промена дозвола' се састоји из два дела \- +.I Дозволе +и +.IR Датотека . +.PP +У одељку Датотека су приказани назив датотеке или директоријума и +њене дозволе у окталном облику, као и њен власник и група. +.PP +У одељку Дозволе постоји низ кућица које одговарају битовима атрибута +датотеке. При промени битова атрибута, видећете да се октална вредност +у одељку Датотека мења. +.PP +Да бисте се померали између контрола (дугмади и кућица), користите +.I тастере са стрелицама +или тастер +.IR "`Tab'". +Да бисте променили стање кућица или изабрали дугме користите +.I размакницу. +Такође можете да користите пречице са дугмади да бисте их брже +активирали. Пречице су приказане у виду истакнутих слова на дугмадима. +.PP +Да бисте поставили битове атрибута, користите тастер `Enter'. +.PP +При раду са групом датотека или директоријума, потребно је само да +притиснете тастер миша када је показивач над битовима које желите да +поставите или очистите. Када сте изабрали битове које желите да +промените, изаберите једно од дугмади (Постави означене или Очисти +означене). +.PP +На крају, да бисте атрибуте поставили дословно на оне које сте задали, +можете да користите дугме +.B [Постави све] +које ће радити над свим означеним датотекама. +.PP +.B [Све означене] +поставља само означене атрибуте за све изабране датотеке +.PP +.B [Постави означене] +поставља означене битове у атрибутима свих изабраних датотека +.PP +.B [Очисти означене] +чисти означене битове у атрибутима свих изабраних датотека +.PP +.B [Постави] +поставља атрибуте једне датотеке +.PP +.B [Поништи] +поништава наредбу промене дозвола +.\"NODE "Chown" +.SH "Промена власника" +Наредба промене власника се користи да би се променио власник/група +датотеке. Пречица за ову наредбу је C\-x o. +.\"NODE "Advanced Chown" +.SH "Напредна промена власника" +Наредба Напредна промена власника представља комбинацију наредби +.\"LINK2" +Промена дозвола +.\"Chmod" +и +.\"LINK2" +Промена власника +.\"Chown" +у један прозор. Можете да одједном промените дозволе и власника/групу +датотека. +.\"NODE "File Operations" +.SH "Операције над датотекама" +При копирању, премештању или брисању датотека Поноћни наредник +приказује дијалог операција над датотекама. Он приказује датотеке које +се тренутно обрађују и проценат текуће датотеке који је обрађен. Ред +са бројем приказује колико је означених датотека обрађено. Ред са +бајтовима приказује обрађени проценат укупне величине означених +датотека. Уколико је брбљивост искључена, неће бити приказани редови +датотеке и бајтова. +.PP +У дну дијалога постоје два дугмета. Притиском на дугме Прескочи, +остатак текуће датотеке ће бити прескочен. Притиском на дугме Прекини, +цела операција ће бити прекинута а остале датотеке прескочене. +.PP +Постоје још три друга дијалога које можете да покренете током +операција са датотекама. +.PP +Дијалог грешке вас обавештава о врсти грешке и садржи три избора. +Обично ћете бирати дугме Прескочи да бисте прескочили датотеку или +дугме Прекини да бисте прекинули целокупну операцију. Можете такође да +изаберете дугме Понови уколико сте проблем решили са другог терминала. +.PP +Дијалог замене се приказује када покушате да копирате или преместите +датотеку преко постојеће датотеке. Дијаог приказује датуме и величине +обеју датотека. Притисните дугме Да како бисте преписали датотеку, +дугме Не како бисте прескочили датотеку, дугме Све да бисте преписали +све датотеке, дугме Ништа да не препишете ниједну датотеку а дугме +Ажурирај да бисте преписали датотеку ако је изворна датотека новија од +одредишне. Можете да прекинете целу операцију притиском на дугме +Прекини. +.PP +Дијалог рекурзивног брисања се приказује када покушате да обришете +директоријум који није празан. Притисните дугме Да како бисте +рекурзивно обрисали директоријум, дугме Не како бисте прескочили +директоријум, дугме Све како бисте обрисали све директоријуме а дугме +Ништа како бисте прескочили све непразне директоријуме. Можете да +прекинете целу операцију притиском на дугме Прекини. Уколико изаберете +дугме Да или Све, бићете упитани за потврду. Притисните Да само +уколико сте заиста уверени да желите да рекурзивно бришете тај +директоријум. +.PP +Уколико сте означили датотеке и над њима спровели операцију, +одозначиће се само датотеке над којима је операција успела. Датотеке +које нису успеле или су прескочене остају означене. +.\"NODE "Mask Copy/Rename" +.SH "Копирање/преименовање са маском" +Операције копирања/премештања вам омогучавају да на лак начин +преносите називе датотека. Да бисте то урадили, морате да задате +исправну изворну маску, и да задате неке џокерске знаке, обично у +наставку одредишта. Све датотеке које одговарају изворној масци ће +бити копиране/преименоване у складу са одредишном маском. Уколико +постоје означене датотеке, биће преименоване само означене датотеке +које одговарају изворној масци. +.PP +Постоје и други избори које можете да поставите: +.PP +.B Прати везе +.PP +одређује да ли да се симвезе и тврде везе из изворног директоријума (и +рекурзивно из поддиректоријума) превежу у одредишном директоријуму или +да им се прекопира садржај. +.PP +.B Зарони у поддиректоријуме +.PP +одређује шта се ради када би требало копирати изворни директоријум, +али одредишни директоријум већ постоји. Подразумевана радња је да се +садржај изворног директоријума копира у одредишни директоријум. +Укључивањем овог избора изворни директоријум ће копирати као +поддиректоријум одредишног директоријума. +.PP +На пример, уколико желите да копирате директоријум +.I `/trla' +који садржи датотеку +.I `baba' +у +.IR `/lan/trla' , +који већ постоји. Подразумевано (када избор +.B Зарони у поддиректоријуме +није постављен), ПН ће копирати датотеку +.I `/trla/baba' +у датотеку +.IR `/lan/trla/baba' . +Укључивањем овог избора биће створен директоријум +.IR `/lan/trla/trla' , +а датотека +.I `/trla/baba' +ће бити копирана у +.IR `/lan/trla/trla/baba' . +.PP +.B Очувај атрибуте +.PP +одређује да ли да се чувају дозволе, датуми и (у случају да сте +администратор) власник изворних датотека. Ако овај избор није +постављен, поштоваће се текућа вредност подразумеване маске (umask). +.PP +.B Користи обрасце љуске: укључено +.PP +Када је избор Обрасци љуске укључен, можете да користите џокерске +знаке `*' и `?' у изворној масци. Они функционишу на исти начин као у +љусци. У одредишној масци су дозвољени само џокерски знаци `*' и +`\\<цифра>'. Први џокерски знак `*' у одредишној масци одговара првој +џокерској групи из изворне маске, други знак `*' одговара другој, итд. +Џокерски знак `\\1' одговара првој џокерској групи из изворне маске, +знак `\\2' другој, и тако даље до `\\9'. Џокерски знак `\\0' +представља цео назив изворне датотеке. +.PP +Ево два примера: +.PP +Ако је изворна маска `*.tar.gz', одредиште је `/bla/*.tgz' а датотека +која се копира `foo.tar.gz', копија ће се звати `foo.tgz' у +директоријуму `/bla'. +.PP +Уколико претпоставимо да желите да замените основни део назива и +врсту, како би датотека `dato.c' постала `c.dato' итд, било би +потребно да задате изворну маску `*.*' а одредишну `\\2.\\1'. +.PP +.B Користи обрасце љуске: искључено +.PP +Уколико је избор Обрасци љуске искључен, ПН неће самостално груписати +обрасце. У изворној масци ћете морати да користите изразе као што је +`\\(...\\)' да бисте задали значење за џокерске знаке у одредишној +масци. Ово је флексибилније, али и захтева више куцања. Иначе, +одредишне маске су сличне ситуацији у којој су обрасци љуске укључени. +.PP +Ево два примера: +.PP +Ако је изворна маска `^\\(.*\\)\\.tar\\.gz$', одредишна маска +`/lan/*.tgz' а датотеку би требало копирати у `baba.tar.gz', копија ће +се наћи у `/lan/baba.tgz'. +.PP +Претпоставимо да желите да замените основни назив датотеке и врсту, +како би датотека `dato.c' постала `c.dato' итд. Изворна маска за ово +је `^\\(.*\\)\\.\\(.*\\)$' а одредишна `\\2.\\1'. +.PP +.B Претварања великих у мала слова и обрнуто +.PP +Можете и да промените да ли су слова мала или велика у називима +датотека. Уколико користите `\\u' или `\\l' у одредишној масци, +следећи знак ће бити претворен у велика слова или мала слова, тим +редом. +.PP +Уколико користите `\\U' или `\\L' у одредишној масци, следећи знаци ће +бити претворени у велика или мала слова, тим редом, све до следећег +`\\E', `\\U', `\\L' или краја назива датотеке. +.PP +`\\u' и `\\l' су јачи од `\\U' и `\\L'. +.PP +На пример, уколико је изворна маска `*' (при укљученим обрасцима +љуске) или `^\\(.*\\)$' (при искљученим обрасцима љуске) а одредишна +маска је `\\L\\u*', називи датотека ће бити пребачени у такве, који +имају почетно велико, а остала мала слова. +.PP +Можете да користите и `\\' као знак за цитирање. На пример, `\\\\' је +обрнута коса црта а `\\*' је звездица. +.\"NODE "Internal File Viewer" +.SH "Уграђени прегледач датотека" +Уграђени прегледач датотека пружа два режима приказа: аски и +хексадекадни. Да бисте сменили приказе, користите тастер F4. Уколико +имате инсталиран ГНУ\-ов програм gzip, он ће бити коришћен за +самораспакивање датотека по потреби. +.PP +Прегледач ће покушати да користи најбољи начин за приказ података који +пружа ваш систем или врста датотека. Уграђени прегледач датотека ће +тумачити неке низове ниски како би поставио атрибуте полуцрног или +подвученог исписа, на тај начин улепшавајући приказ ваших датотека. +.PP +У хексадекадном режиму могућност за претраживање прихвата текст под +наводницима и константне бројеве. Текст у наводницима се тражи +дословно, без окружујућих наводника. Сваки број представља један бајт +који се тражи. Можете да мешате цитирани текст са константама на +следећи начин: +.PP +.nf +"Ниска" \-1 0xBB 012 "још текста" +.fi +.PP +Приметите да је 012 октални број. \-1 се претвара у 0xFF. +.PP +Ево још неких детаља о прегледачу: на системима који имају системски +позив mmap(2), програм мапира датотеку уместо да је учита; уколико +систем нема системски позив mmap(2) или датотека одговара радњи која +захтева филтар, онда ће прегледач користити растуће прихватнике, тиме +учитавајући само оне делове датотеке којима стварно приступате (овим +су обухваћене и компримоване датотеке). +.PP +Ево списка радњи које су придружене тастерима које Поноћни наредник +прихвата у уграђеном прегледачу. +.PP +.B F1 +Покреће уграђени хипертекстуални прегледач помоћи. +.PP +.B F2 +Смењује режим прелома. +.PP +.B F4 +Смењује хексадекадни режим. +.PP +.B F5 +Иди на ред. Ово ће вас упитати за број реда и приказаће тај ред. +.PP +.B F6, /. +Претрага регуларних израза. +.PP +.B ?, +Претрага регуларних израза уназад. +.PP +.B F7 +Обична претрага / претрага у хексадекадном режиму. +.PP +.B C\-s, F17, n. +Покреће обичну претрагу уколико израз за претрагу није претходно +задан, а иначе налази следеће задовољење. +.PP +.B C\-r. +Покреће претрагу уназад уколико израз за претрагу није претходно +задан, а иначе налази уназад следеће задовољење. +.PP +.B F8 +Смењује сирови/рашчлањени режим: ово ће приказати датотеку онако каква +је она на диску или, у случају да је у датотеци mc.ext.ini задан филтар за +обраду, као излаз филтра. Текући режим је увек онај други од оног +који стоји на натпису дугмета, пошто се на дугмету налази режим који +укључујете тим тастером. +.PP +.B F9 +Смењује форматирани/неформатирани режим: када је укључен форматирани +режим, прегледач ће тумачити неке низове ниски, како би приказао +полуцрн и подвучен текст у различитим бојама. Такође, натпис дугмета +садржи неукључени режим. +.PP +.B F10, Esc. +Излази из уграђеног прегледача датотека. +.PP +.B следећа\-страна, размакница, C\-v. +Клиза једну страну унапред. +.PP +.B претходна\-страна, M\-v, C\-b, backspace. +Клиза једну страну уназад. +.PP +.B стрелица\-наниже +Клиза један ред унапред. +.PP +.B стрелица\-навише +Клиза један ред уназад. +.PP +.B C\-l +Освежава екран. +.PP +.B C\-o +Прелази у подљуску и приказује наредбени екран. +.PP +.B "[n] m" +Поставља ознаку `n'. +.PP +.B "[n] r" +Скаче на ознаку `n'. +.PP +.B C\-f +Скаче на следећу датотеку. +.PP +.B C\-b +Скаче на претходну датотеку. +.PP +.B M\-r +Смењује лењир. +.PP +Можете да саопштите прегледачу датотека како да прикаже датотеку, +погледајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +уређивање датотеке врста\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.\"NODE "Internal File Editor" +.SH "Уграђени уређивач датотека" +Уграђени уређивач датотека је моћан екрански уређивач. Он може да +уређује датотеке величине до 64 мегабајта. Могуће је уређивати бинарне +датотеке. Уграђени уређивач датотека се покреће преко тастера +.B F4 +уколико је избор +if the +.I use_internal_edit +постављен у датотеци са почетним поставкама. +.PP +Одлике које су тренутно подржане су: копирање, премештање, брисање, +исецање, лепљење блокова; опозив тастер\-по\-тастер; падајући менији; +уметање датотека; макронаредбе; претраживање и замена регуларним +изразима; означавање текста уз помоћ пречице shift\-стрелица (уколико +то подржава терминал); смењивање уметања и преписивања текста; прелом редова; +самоувлачење; подесива величина табулатора; истицање синтаксе за разне +врсте датотека и избор да се блокови текста прослеђују наредбама +љуске, као што су `indent' и `ispell'. +.PP +Уређивач се врло лако употребљава и да бисте га користили није вам +потребно посебно подучавање. Да бисте видели која пречица шта ради, +погледајте одговарајући падајући мени. Друге пречице су: тастери за +кретање у комбинацији са тастером `Shift' за означавање текста. +.B Ctrl\-Ins +копира у датотеку +.B `mcedit.clip' +а +.B Shift\-Ins +лепи из датотеке `mcedit.clip'. +.B Shift\-Del +исеца у +.BR `mcedit.clip' , +а +.B Ctrl\-Del +брише означени текст. Такође функционише и означавање мишем, а можете, +као и обично, да заобиђете миша држећи тастер `shift' уз превлачење +мишем да бисте омогућили обично терминалско означавање мишем. +.PP +Да бисте задали макро, притисните +.B Ctrl\-R +а онда откуцајте тастере које желите да извршите. Када сте готови, +притисните поново +.BR Ctrl\-R . +Тада можете да доделите макро било којем тастеру притиском на тај +тастер. Макро ће бити извршен када притиснете +.B Ctrl\-A +и додељени тастер. Макро ће такође бити извршен ако притиснете тастере +`Meta', `Ctrl' или `Esc' са додељеним тастером, уз услов да се та +пречица не користи за нешто друго. Када су једном задане, макронаредбе +се смештају у датотеку +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/mcedit.macros +у вашем домаћем директоријуму. Можете да обришете макро брисањем +одговарајућег реда у овој датотеци. +.PP +.B F19 +ће форматирати текући означени блок (обичан текст или код у језику +.B Це +или +.B Це++ +или другом). Овим се управља преко датотеке +.B %pkgdatadir%/edit.indent.rc +која ће бити копирана у +.B ~/.local/share/mc/mcedit/edit.indent.rc +у вашем домаћем директоријуму први пут када је будете користили. +.PP +Уређивач такође приказује неамеричке знаке (160 и више). При уређивању +бинарних датотека би требало да поставите +.B битове приказа +на 7 битова, у менију Избори, како бисте задржали исправно исцртавање +размацима. +.\"NODE "Completion" +.SH "Допуна" +Нека Поноћни наредник куца место вас. +.PP +Ово представља покушај да се изврши допуна у тексту пре текуће +позиције. ПН ће покушати допуну, сматрајући да је текст променљива +(уколико текст почиње знаком +.BR $ ), +корисничко име (уколико текст почиње знаком +.BR ~ ), +назив домаћина (уколико текст почиње знаком +.BR @ ) +или наредба (уколико сте у наредбеном реду, где можете да укуцате +наредбу, могуће допуне ће бити и резервисане речи љуске и уграђене +наредбе љуске). Уколико ништа од овога не одговара, покушаће допуну +назива датотеке. +.PP +Допуна назива датотеке, корисничког имена, променљивих и назива +домаћина функционише у свим редовима уноса, док је допуна наредби +специјалност наредбеног реда. Уколико је допуна двосмислена (постоји +више различитих могућности), ПН ће писнути а оно што ће урадити +следеће зависи од стања избора +.I Допуна: прикажи све +у дијалогу +.\"LINK2" +Подешавања\&. +.\"Configuration" +Уколико је овај избор укључен, после текуће позиције ће искочити +списак свих могућности, и моћи ћете да изаберете исправну ставку +тастерима са стрелицама и тастером +.BR Enter . +Можете и да укуцате прва слова којима се могућности разликују једна од +друге како бисте се преместили на подскуп свих могућности и допунили +што више. Уколико поново притиснете +.BR M\-Tab , +у списку ће бити приказан само подскуп, а иначе ће бити означена прва +ставка која одговара свим претходним знаковима. Чим нестане +двосмислености, дијалог ишчезава, али га можете сакрити тастерима за +поништавање +.BR Esc , +.B F10 +и тастерима са стрелицама налево и надесно. Уколико је избор +.\"LINK2" +Допуна: прикажи све +.\"Configuration" +искључен, дијалог ће искочити само уколико притиснете пречицу +.B M\-Tab +по други пут; када је притиснете први пут ПН ће само писнути. +.\"NODE "Virtual File System" +.SH "Виртуални систем датотека" +Поноћни наредник садржи слој кода за приступ систему датотека; овај +слој кода се назива скретница виртуалног система датотека. Скретница +виртуалног система датотека омогућава Поноћном нареднику да ради над +датотекама који се не налазе у Униксовом систему датотека. +.PP +За сада се уз Поноћног наредника испоручује неколико Виртуалних +система датотека (ВСД): систем датотека +.IR `local' , +који се користи за приступ обичном Униксовом систему датотека; систем +датотека +.IR ftpfs , +који се користи за рад са датотекама на удаљеним системима преко +протокола FTP; систем датотека +.IR tarfs , +који се користи за рад са обичним и компримованим датотекама врсте +`tar'; систем датотека +.IR undelfs , +који се користи за опоравак обрисаних датотека на системима датотека +`ext2' (подразумевани систем датотека за систем ГНУ), +.I fish +(за рад са датотекама преко повезивања љуске, као што су `rsh' и +`ssh'). +.PP +Обезбеђен је и општи систем +.I extfs +(спољашњи виртуални систем датотека), како би се лако прошириле +могућности ВСД преко списа и спољашњег софтвера. +.PP +Код скретнице ВСД ће тумачити све коришћене путање и усмеравати их на +исправан систем датотека; формати који се користе за сваки од система +датотека су описани касније у њиховим одељцима. +.\"NODE " FTP File System" +.SH " Систем датотека FTP\-а" +Систем датотека FTP\-а (ftpfs) вам омогућава да радите са датотекама на +удаљеним машинама. Да бисте га користили, можете да користите ставку +менија +.I Повезивање FTP\-ом +или да директно поставите ваш текући директоријум преко наредбе +.I cd (пром.дир.) +на путању која изгледа овако: +.PP +.I ftp://[!][корисник[:лозинка]@]машина[:порт][удаљени\-дир] +.PP +Елементи +.IR корисник , +.I порт +и +.I удаљени\-дир +су необавезни. Уколико задате елемент +.IR корисник , +Поноћни наредник ће се пријавити на удаљену машину под тим корисничким +именом, а иначе ће користити анонимну пријаву или корисничко име из +датотеке +.IR "~/.netrc". +Необавезни елемент +.I лозинка +представља лозинку која се користи за повезивање. Не препоручује се +употреба лозинке у називу директоријума ВСД\-а, јер се она онда може +појавити на екрану као обичан текст и може да буде сачувана у историју +директоријума. +.PP +Да бисте укључили посредника за FTP, ставите +.B ! +(узвичник) пре назива домаћина. +.PP +Примери: +.PP +.nf + ftp://ftp.nuclecu.unam.mx/linux/local + ftp://tsx\-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/packages + ftp://!iza.zast.zida.edu.cs/pub + ftp://guest@udaljeni\-domacin.com:40/pub + ftp://miguel:xxx@server/pub +.fi +.PP +Молим да ради избора ftpfs\-а погледате дијалог +.\"LINK2" +Виртуални систем датотека\&. +.\"Virtual FS" +.\"NODE " Tar File System" +.SH " Систем датотека врсте `Tar'" +Систем датотека врсте `tar' вам омогућава приступ само за читање вашим +датотекама врсте `tar' преко наредбе `chdir' (промена текућег +директоријума). Да бисте прешли у датотеку врсте `tar', можете да +користите наредбу промене текућег директоријума уз следећу синтаксу: +.PP +.I /datoteka.tar/utar://[дир\-унутар\-дат] +.PP +Датотека `mc.ext.ini' већ садржи пречицу за датотеке врсте `tar', што +значи да можете само показати на датотеку врсте `tar' и притиснути +`Return' или `Enter' да бисте ушли у њу; погледајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +Уређивање датотеке врста +.\"Edit Extension File" +за детаље како да ово обавите. +.PP +Примери: +.PP +.nf + mc\-3.0.tar.gz/utar://mc\-3.0/vfs + /ftp/GCC/gcc\-2.7.0.tar/utar:// +.fi +.PP +Последњи ред задаје пуну путању архиве врсте `tar'. +.\"NODE " FIle transfer over SHell filesystem" +.SH " Систем датотека FISH (пренос датотека преко љуске)" +Систем датотека fish је систем датотека заснован на мрежи који вам +омогућава да радите са датотекама на удаљеној машини, као да су оне у +локалу. Да бисте ово користили, друга страна мора да има покренут +сервер `fish', или да поседује љуску сагласну са љуском `bash'. +.PP +Да бисте се повезали на удаљену машину, потребно је само да поставите +текући директоријум на посебан директоријум чији назив је у следећем +формату: +.PP +.I sh://[корисник@]машина[:избори]/[удаљени\-дир] +.PP +Елементи +.IR корисник , +.I избори +и +.I удаљени\-дир +су необавезни. Уколико задате елемент +.IR корисник , +Поноћни наредник ће покушати да се пријави на удаљену машину под тим +корисничким именом, а иначе ће користити ваше корисничко име. +.PP +Могући +.I избори +су `C' \- користи компримовање и `rsh' \- користи `rsh' уместо `ssh'. +Уколико је присутан елемент +.IR удаљени\-дир , +ваш текући директоријум на удаљеној машини ће бити постављен на тај +директоријум. +.PP +Примери: +.PP +.nf + sh://onlyrsh.mx:r/linux/local + sh://joe@hocu.komprimovanje.edu:C/private + sh://joe@nekomprimovan.ssh.edu/private +.fi +.\"NODE " Undelete File System" +.SH " Систем датотека за одбрисање" +На ГНУ\-овим системима, уколико сте од програма `configure' захтевали +да користи могућности одбрисања на систему датотека `ext2fs', моћи +ћете да користите систем датотека за одбрисање. Опоравак обрисаних +датотека је могућ само на системима датотека врсте `ext2'. Систем +датотека за одбрисање је само спрега за добављање свих обрисаних +датотека на систему датотека `ext2fs' библиотеке `ext2fs'\-а. Он +омогућава издвајање изабраних датотека у обичну партицију. +.PP +Да бисте користили овај систем датотека, морате да поставите текући +директоријум на посебни назив датотеке који се састоји од префикса +`undel://' и назива датотеке у којој се налази систем датотека. +.PP +На пример, да бисте опоравили обрисане датотеке на другој партицији +првог скази диска под ГНУ\-ом, можете да користите следећу путању: +.PP +.nf + undel://sda2 +.fi +.PP +Учитавање тражених података пре него што можете да почнете разгледање +датотека може потрајати. +.\"NODE " EXTernal File System" +.SH " Спољашњи системи датотека (EXTFS)" +.B extfs +вам омогућавају да на лак начин спојите бројне одлике и системе +датотека са ГНУ\-овим Поноћним наредником, пишући списе. +.PP +Системи датотека `extfs'\-а се могу поделити у две категорије: +.PP +1. Самостални системи датотека, који нису повезани ни са једном +стварном датотеком. Они представљају извесне податке за цео систем у +виду стабла директоријума. Можете их позвати куцајући +.RI ' `cd називсд://' ' +где је `називсд' кратки назив система `extfs'\-а (погледајте доле). +Примери оваквих система датотека су `audio' (наводи звучне траке на +CD\-овима) или `apt' (списак свих Дебијанових пакета на систему). +.PP +На пример, да бисте добили списак трака врсте `CD\-Audio' са вашег +уређаја за CD\-ROM\-ове, можете да откуцате +.PP +.nf + cd audio:// +.fi +.PP +2. `Архивни' системи датотека (као што су `rpm', `patchfs' и други), +који представљају садржај датотеке у виду стабла директоријума. Они се +могу састојати од `стварних' датотека, које су компримоване у архиву +(`urar', `rpm') или виртуалних датотека, као што су поруке у +сандучићима (`mailfs') или делови закрпе (`patchfs'). Да бисте +приступили таквим системима датотека, требало би да на назив архиве +надовежете +.RI ` називсд://. ' +Приметите да сама архива може да буде у другом виртуалном систему +датотека. +.PP +На пример, да бисте приказали садржај архиве врсте `zip' под називом +`dokumenti.zip', откуцајте +.PP +.nf + cd dokumenti.zip/uzip:// +.fi +.PP +На више начина, можете да сматрате да су спољашњи системи датотека +као и сви остали директоријуми. На пример, можете их додати у брзи +списак или прећи у њих из историје директоријума. Важно огреничење је +то што не можете да покрећете наредбе љуске из спољашњих система +датотека као на другим не\-локалним ВСД. +.PP +Општи списи спољашњих система датотека који се испоручују уз Поноћног +наредника су: +.TP +.B a +приступа дискети ДОС\-а/Виндовса `A:' +.RI ( "`cd a://'" ). +.TP +.B apt +љуска за Дебијанов систем управљања пакетима `APT' +.RI ( "`cd apt://'" ). +.TP +.B audio +скидање и пуштање звучних CD\-ова +.RI ( "`cd audio://'" +или +.IR "`cd device/audio://'" ). +.TP +.B bpp +пакет дистрибуције ГНУ/Линукса Лош Пингвин (Bad Penguin) +.IR ( "`cd file.bpp/bpp://'" ). +.TP +.B deb +пакет дистрибуције ГНУ/Линукса Дебијан +.RI ( "`cd file.deb/deb://'" ). +.TP +.B dpkg +инсталирани пакети Дебијановог ГНУ/Линукса +.RI ( "`cd deb://'" ). +.TP +.B hp48 +преглед и копирање датотека на/са калкулатора ХП48 +.RI ( "`cd hp48://'" ). +.TP +.B lslR +разгледање спискова `lslR' који се могу наћи на многим серверима FTP\-а +.RI ( "`cd filename/lslR://'" ). +.TP +.B mailfs +подршка за сандучиће електронске поште врсте `mbox' +.RI ( "`cd mailbox/mailfs://'" ). +.TP +.B patchfs +спољашњи систем датотека за рад са унификованим и контекстним +датотекама врсте `diff' +.RI ( "`cd filename/patchfs://'" ). +.TP +.B rpm +пакет врсте `RPM' +.RI ( "`cd filename/rpm://'" ). +.TP +.B rpms +управљање базом пакета врсте `RPM' +.RI ( "`cd rpms://'" ). +.TP +.B ulha, urar, uzip, uzoo, uar, uha +архивари +.RI ( "`cd архива/xxxx://'" +где xxxx може да буде: +.IR ulha , +.IR urar , +.IR uzip , +.IR uzoo , +.IR uar , +.IR uha ). +.PP +Можете да придружите врсту датотеке одређеном спољашњем систему +датотека, као што је то описано у одељку +.\"LINK2" +уређивање датотеке врста\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +Ево примера ставке за Дебијанове пакете: +.PP +.nf + regex/\.deb$ + Отвори=%cd %p/deb:// +.fi +.\"NODE "Colors" +.SH "Боје" +Поноћни наредник ће покушати да открије да ли ваш терминал подржава +боје преко базе терминала и назива вашег терминала. Понекад се он може +збунити, па ћете можда желети да захтевате режим у боји или да +искључите режим у боји преко прекидача `\-c' и `\-b', тим редом. +.PP +Уколико је програм преведен са управитељом екрана `S\-Lang' уместо +`ncurses', ПН ће такође проверити да ли је постављена променљива +.B COLORTERM, +која има сличан ефекат као прекидач `\-c'. +.PP +Можете да задате терминале који увек захтевају режим у боји додавањем +променљиве +.I color_terminals +у одељак `Colors' датотеке са почетним поставкама. Ово ће спречити +Поноћног наредника да покуша да открије да ли ваш терминал подржава +боје. Ево примера: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +color_terminals=linux,xterm +color_terminals=terminal\-name1,terminal\-name2... +.fi +.PP +Програм се може превести и са подршком за `ncurses' и `S\-Lang'; +`ncurses' нема начина да захтева режим у боји: он користи само податке +из базе терминала. +.PP +Поноћни наредник поседује начин да промени подразумеване боје. За сада +се боје подешавају преко променљиве окружења +.B MC_COLOR_TABLE +или одељка `Colors' у датотеци са почетним поставкама. +.PP +У одељку `Colors', подразумевана мапа боја се учитава из променљиве +.IR base_color . +Можете да задате другачију мапу боја терминала коришћењем назива +терминала као кључ у овом одељку. На пример: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color= +xterm=menu=magenta:marked=,magenta:markselect=,red +.fi +.PP +Формат задавања боје је следећи: +.PP +.nf + <кључнареч>=<бојатекста>,<бојапозадине>:<кључнареч>= ... +.fi +.PP +Боје су необавезне, док кључне речи могу бити: normal, selected, +marked, markselect, errors, input, reverse, gauge. Боје менија су: +menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel, menuinactive. Боје дијалога су: +dnormal, dfocus, dhotnormal, dhotfocus. Боје помоћи су: helpnormal, helpitalic, +helpbold, helplink, helpslink. Боја прегледача је: viewunderline. +Посебне боје за истицање су: executable, directory, link, stalelink, +device, special, core. Viewer colors are: viewnormal, viewbold, viewunderline, +viewselected. Боје уређивача су: editnormal, editbold, editmarked. +.PP +.I input +одређује боју редова за унос који се користе у дијалозима упита. +.PP +.I gauge +одређује боју испуњеног дела реда напретка, који се користи за приказ +напретка операција над датотекама, као што је копирање. +.PP +Дијалози користе следеће боје: +.I dnormal +се користи за обичан текст, +.I dfocus +се користи за тренутно изабрану контролу, +.I dhotnormal +се користи за разликовање боје пречице у обичним контролама, а боја +.I dhotfocus +се користи за боју истицања у тренутно изабраној контроли. +.PP +Менији користе исту шему, али користе изнаке menunormal, menusel, menuhot, menuhotsel +и menuinactive. +.PP +Помоћ користи следеће боје: +.I helpnormal +се користи за обичан текст, +.I helpitalic +се користи за текст који је у страници упутства истакнут курзивом, +.I helpbold +се користи за текст који је у страници упутства истакнут полуцрним +словима, +.I helplink +се користи за хипервезе које нису изабране, а +.I helpslink +се користи за изабране хипервезе. +.PP +Посебне боје истицања одређују како су датотеке приказане у случају да +је укључено истицање датотека (погледајте одељак +.\"LINK2" +Изглед\&). +.\"Layout" +.I directory +се користи за директоријуме или симболичке везе ка директоријумима; +.I executable +за извршне датотеке; +.I link +се користи за симболичке везе које нису ни бајате нити указују на +директоријум; +.I stalelink +се користи за бајате симболичке везе; +.I device +\- знаковни уређаји и блок уређаји; +.I special +се користи за посебне датотеке, као што су цеви и утичнице; +.I core +је за датотеке сржи. +.PP + +Могуће боје су: black, gray, red, brightred, green, +brightgreen, brown, yellow, blue, brightblue, magenta, brightmagenta, +cyan, brightcyan, lightgray и white. Постоји и посебна кључна реч за +провидну позадину. Она гласи: `default' и може да се користи само за +боју позадине. На пример: +.PP +.nf +[Colors] +base_color=normal=white,default:marked=magenta,default +.fi +.\"NODE "Special Settings" +.SH "Посебна подешавања" +Већина подешавања Поноћног наредника се могу изменити из менија. +Међутим, постоји нешто поставки које се могу изменити само уређивањем +датотеке поставки. +.PP +Ове променљиве се могу подесити у вашој датотеци `~/.config/mc/ini': +.TP +.I clear_before_exec +Подразумевано ће пре извршавања наредбе Поноћни наредник очистити +екран. Уколико желите да видите излаз наредби на дну екрана, уредите +вашу датотеку `~/.config/mc/ini' и промените вредност поља +`clear_before_exec' на 0. +.TP +.I confirm_view_dir +Када притиснете тастер F3 над директоријумом, подразумевано ће ПН ући +у тај директоријум. Уколико је овај прекидач постављен на 1, ПН ће +питати за потврду пре промене директоријума уколико сте означили +датотеке. +.TP +.I ftpfs_retry_seconds +Ова вредност представља број секунди чекања пре покушаја поновног +повезивања са сервером FTP\-а који одбија пријаву. Уколико је ова +вредност нула, пријављивање се неће поново покушавати. +.TP +.I max_dirt_limit +Задаје колико највише ажурирања екрана може бити прескочено у +уграђеном прегледачу датотека. Ова вредност подразумевано није +значајна, јер код самостално подешава број прескочених ажурирања у +складу са количином примљених притисака на тастере. Међутим, на веома +спорим машинама или терминалима са брзим самопонављањем тастера, +превисока вредност ће дати скоковита ажурирања екрана. +.IP +Изгледа да постављање променљиве `max_dirt_limit' на 10 даје најбоље +понашање, и то је подразумевана вредност. +.TP +.I mouse_move_pages +Одређује да ли се клизање мишем одвија по странама или ред по ред у +окнима. +.TP +.I mouse_move_pages_viewer +Одређује да ли се клизање мишем одвија по странама или ред по ред у +уграђеном прегледачу датотека. +.TP +.I old_esc_mode +Подразумевано ће Поноћни наредник сматрати да је тастер `ESC' префикс +за пречице (old_esc_mode=0). Уколико је овај избор укључен +(old_esc_mode=1), тастер `ESC' ће се понашати као префикс за пречице +током једне секунде, а уколико нови притисци на тастере нису +регистровани, тастер `ESC' ће бити протумачен као пречица за +поништавање (`ESC ESC'). +.TP +.I only_leading_plus_minus +Дозвољава посебно третирање знакова `+', `\-', `*' у наредбеном реду +(избор, одизбор, обртање избора) у случају да је наредбени ред празан. +Онда нећете морати да цитирате те знаке усред наредбеног реда. Са +друге стране, нећете моћи ни да их користите за промену избора уколико +наредбени ред није празан. +.TP +.I panel_scroll_pages +Уколико је ово укључено (подразумевано), окно ће клизати за пола +приказа када курсор достигне крај или почетак окна, а иначе ће само +клизати за једну датотеку. +.TP +.I show_output_starts_shell +Ова променљива ради само уколико не користите подршку за подљуске. +Када користите пречицу `C\-o' да бисте прешли на кориснички екран, +уколико је ово подешено, добићете свежу љуску. Иначе ће вас притисак +на било који тастер довести у Поноћног наредника. +.TP +.I torben_fj_mode +Уколико је овај прекидач постављен, онда ће тастери `home' и `end' +радити мало другачије над окнима; уместо да се избор помера на прву и +последњу датотеку у окну, тастери ће имати следећи ефекат: +.IP +Тастер `home' ће: ићи на средњи ред, уколико се налазимо испод њега; +иначе ће ићи на први ред, осим уколико се већ налазимо у првом реду, а +тада ће ићи на прву датотеку у окну. +.IP +Тастер `end' се слично понаша: ићи ће доле на средњи ред, уколико се +налазимо на њему; иначе ће ићи на последњи ред, осим уколико смо већ у +последњем реду, а тада ће ићи на последњи назив датотеке у окну. +.TP +.I use_file_to_guess_type +Уколико је ова променљива укључена (подразумевано), ПН ће покренути +наредбу `file' за одређивање врсте датотека које су задане у +.\"LINK2" +датотеци `mc.ext.ini'\&. +.\"Edit Extension File" +.TP +.I xtree_mode +Уколико је ова променљива укључена (подразумевано је искључена), +приликом разгледања система датотека у окну које је у режиму Стабла, +друго окно ће се аутоматски поново учитати у изабраном директоријуму. +.\"NODE "Terminal databases" +.SH "Базе терминала" +Поноћни наредник обезбеђује начин да поправи вашу системску базу +терминала без потребе за администраторским привилегијама. Поноћни +наредник претражује системску датотеку са почетним поставкама +(датотеку `mc.lib' у библиотечком директоријуму Поноћног наредника), +онда одељак `terminal:назив\-вашег\-терминала' у датотеци `~/.config/mc/ini', +и онда одељак `terminal:general', чији сваки ред садржи симбол тастера +кога желите да задате, после кога следи знак једнакости и задавање +тастера. Можете да користите посебан облик `\\e' да бисте представили +наведени знак и `^x' да бисте представили знак `control\-x'. +.PP +Доступни симболи тастера су: +.PP +.nf +f0 до f20 Функцијски тастери f0\-f20 +bs backspace +home тастер `home' +end тастер `end' +up тастер `стрелица навише' +down тастер `стрелица наниже' +left тастер `стрелица налево' +right тастер `стрелица надесно' +pgdn тастер `page down' +pgup тастер `page up' +insert знак `insert' +delete знак `delete' +complete за допуну +.fi +.PP +На пример, како бисте задали да тастер `insert' буде `Escape + [ + O + +p', можете да поставите ово у датотеци са почетним поставкама: +.PP +.nf +insert=\\e[Op +.fi +.PP +Симбол тастера +.I complete +представља низове цитирања који се користе за поступак допуне; ово се +подразумевано покреће са M\-tab, али можете да задате и друге пречице +за исту радњу (на оним тастатурама са тонама финих и неискоришћених +тастера). +.SH "" +.\"NODE "FILES" +.SH "ДАТОТЕКЕ" +Програм ће добавити све своје податке у односу на променљиву окружења +.BR MC_DATADIR . +Ако ова променљива није постављена, биће употребљен директоријум +%pkgdatadir%. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/help/mc.hlp +.IP +Датотека помоћи за програм. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Подразумевана системска датотека врста. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/mc.ext.ini +.IP +Корисничке датотеке врста, подешавања прегледача и уређивача. Уколико +постоје, оне заобилазе системске датотеке. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.ini +.IP +Подразумевана системска подешавања Поноћног наредника; користе се само +у случају да корисник нема сопствену датотеку ~/.config/mc/ini. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.lib +.IP +Глобалне поставке Поноћног наредника. Поставке из ове датотеке се +односе на све кориснике без обзира на то да ли они имају своје +датотеке ~/.config/mc/ini или не. За сада, из датотеке mc.lib се учитавају +само +.\"LINK2" +поставке терминала\&. +.\"Terminal databases" +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/ini +.IP +Корисничка подешавања. Ако је ова датотека присутна, подешавања се +учитавају из ње уместо из системске почетне датотеке. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/hints/mc.hint +.IP +Ова датотека садржи савете (колачиће) који се приказују у програму. +.PP +.I %pkgdatadir%/mc.menu +.IP +Ова датотека садржи подразумевани мени програма за цео систем. +.PP +.I ~/.config/mc/menu +.IP +Кориснички мени програма. Ако је ова датотека присутна, онда се она +користи уместо менија програма система. +.PP +.I ~/.cache/mc/Tree +.IP +Списак директоријума за одлику `стабло директоријума' и +директоријумски поглед. +.PP +.I ./.mc.menu +.IP +Локални кориснички мени. Ако је ова датотека присутна, онда се она +користи уместо менија програма дома или система. +.\"SKIP_SECTION" +.SH "ЛИЦЕНЦА" +Овај програм се расподељује под одредбама ГНУ\-ове опште јавне лиценце +коју је објавила Задужбина за слободни софтвер. Погледајте уграђену +помоћ за детаље о Лиценци и одсуству гаранције. +.\"NODE "AVAILABILITY" +.SH "ДОСТУПНОСТ" +Најновија верзија овог програма се може наћи на адреси +http://ftp.midnight\-commander.org/. +.\"NODE "SEE ALSO" +.SH "ВИДИТЕ И" +ed(1), gpm(1), terminfo(1), view(1), sh(1), bash(1), +tcsh(1), zsh(1). +.PP +.nf +Страница Поноћног наредника на Међународној мрежи: + https://www.midnight\-commander.org/ +.fi +.\"NODE "AUTHORS" +.SH "АУТОРИ" +Аутори и дародавци су наведени у датотеци AUTHORS из изворне +дистрибуције. +.\"NODE "BUGS" +.SH "ГРЕШКЕ" +Погледајте датотеку TODO из дистрибуције за информације о томе шта +остаје да се уради. +.PP +Ако желите да пријавите проблем у вези са програмом, молим да пошаљете +еписмо на следећу адресу: mc\-devel@lists.midnight-commander.org. +.PP +Доставите детаљан опис грешке, верзију програма коју користите +.RI ( "mc \-V" +приказује овај податак) и оперативни систем под којим покрећете +програм. Ако програм крахира, било би нам корисно да нам пошаљете мапу +стога (stack trace). |